From e0c6872cf40896c7be36b11dcc744620f10adf1d Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 From: Norbert Preining Date: Mon, 2 Sep 2019 13:46:59 +0900 Subject: Initial commit --- macros/latex/contrib/paracol/README | 123 + macros/latex/contrib/paracol/bgpaint.dtx | 601 + macros/latex/contrib/paracol/impl.dtx | 19562 +++++++++++++++++++++++++ macros/latex/contrib/paracol/man.dtx | 863 ++ macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol-man.pdf | Bin 0 -> 618897 bytes macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.dtx | 825 ++ macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.ins | 8 + macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.pdf | Bin 0 -> 1590604 bytes macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ppts.dtx | 472 + macros/latex/contrib/paracol/probs.dtx | 262 + macros/latex/contrib/paracol/pwfnote.dtx | 608 + macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ref.dtx | 1535 ++ 12 files changed, 24859 insertions(+) create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/README create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/bgpaint.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/impl.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/man.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol-man.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.ins create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.pdf create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ppts.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/probs.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/pwfnote.dtx create mode 100644 macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ref.dtx (limited to 'macros/latex/contrib/paracol') diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/README b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/README new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..07bc7f36f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/README @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ +paracol (v1.35): a multi-column package to typeset columns in "parallel". +=== +Copyright (C) 2005-2018 + Hiroshi Nakashima + (Kyoto Univerisity) +This package can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms +of the LaTeX Project Public License distributed from CTAN +archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either +version 1 of the License, or any later version. +=== + +[Contents] + +- README ............ this document +- paracol.ins ....... for docstrip +- paracol.dtx ....... main dtx for manual and implementation document +- man.dtx ........... source of Section 1 to 6 of user's manual +- ref.dtx ........... source of Section 7 of user's manual +- pwfnote.dtx ....... source of Section 8 of user's manual +- ppts.dtx .......... source of Section 9 of user's manual +- bgpaint.dtx ....... source of Section 10 of user's manual +- probs.dtx ......... source of Section 11 of user's manual +- impl.dtx .......... source of implementation document +- paracol-man.pdf ... PDF of user's manual + +[How to "make"] + + % tex paracol.ins # you'll have paracol.sty and paracol-man.tex + +# to have user's manual (its PDF is included in the distribution) + % latex paracol-man + % latex paracol-man # you need do it twice to make index correct. + % makeindex -s gind.ist -o paracol-man.ind paracol-man.idx + % latex paracol-man + +# to have implementation document of almmost 300 pages(!!) + % latex paracol.dtx + % latex paracol.dtx # you need do it twice to make index correct. + % makeindex -s gind.ist -o paracol.ind paracol.idx + % makeindex -s gglo.ist -o paracol.gls paracol.glo + % latex paracol.dtx + +Note that if you want LaTeXing paracol-man.tex and/or paracol.dtx, +you need newvbtm.sty being also available in CTAN. + +[Features] + ++ "paracol" environment in which you may "switch" and "synchronize columns + by \switchcolumn(*). + ++ "column", "nthcolumn", "leftcolumn" and "rightcolumn" environments used in + "paracol" to enclose texts to appear in a column. + ++ Counters are "local" to each column in default but you may make some of + them global to all columns by \globalcounter{}. + ++ \definethecounter{}{}{} to give its resentaion + specific to -th column. + ++ \addcontentsonly{}{} to allow contents output for only + from (new for v1.00). + ++ \columnratio{,,...} to control the width of each column rather + than splitting columns evenly (new for v1.1). + +- \columncolor[]{}[] to give the default (with + ) to the column (new for v1.2). + +- \footnotelayout{} to choose ordinary column-wise footnote + typesetting or page-wise typesetting to gather footnotes in all columns + (new for v1.2 and *NEW* for v1.3 with better API). + +- \twosided{...} to enable ordinary two-sided typesetting + (=p), reversal of printing order of columns in even-numbered pages + (=c), reversal of margins where marginal notes go to (=m), + and/or mirroring background painting (=b) ('m' and 'b' and better API + are *NEW* for v1.3). + +- "paracol" environment has options for "parallel-paging" to typeset + parallel-columns in adjacent page pairs (*NEW* for v1.3). + +- \thecolumn to let your macros know which columns they are in (*NEW* for + v1.3). + +- \ensurevspace{} to force a page break if a synchronization point + would be set leaving a small space less than (*NEW* for v1.3). + +- \setcolumnwidth{,,...}[,,...] to specify widths of + columns and column-separating gaps more detailedly than \columnratio + (*NEW* for v1.3). + +- \marginparthreshold{}[] to specify the minimum ordinal of + columns whose marginal notes go to right margin (*NEW* for v1.3). + +- \[no]coloredwordhyphenated to allow/disallow hyphenating the first word + following a coloring command (*NEW* for v1.3). + +- \colseprulecolor[]{}[] to specify the color of rules + drawn in gaps separating columns, i.e., now they can be drawn (*NEW* for + v1.3). + +- \backgroundcolor{}{}[] to paint the background of a + by (*NEW* for v1.3). + +- \globalcounter* to make all counters global (*NEW* for v1.32). + +- Compatible with the new implemenatation of LaTeX (2015/01/10 or + later) now (*NEW* for v 1.32). + +- \belowfootnoteskip to add space below non-merged pre-environment footnotes + (*NEW* for v 1.35). + +- \definecolumnpreamble{}{} to define the column preamble + for the column (*NEW* for v 1.35). + +- Emulation of \marginnote[]{}[] given by marginnote + package (*NEW* for v 1.35). + +- Bugs found in v1.3 and successors up to v1.34 has been fixed. + +Enjoy! + +Hiroshi Nakashima diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/bgpaint.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/bgpaint.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..ac79f4e9a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/bgpaint.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,601 @@ +% \backgroundcolor{t}[rgb]{0.7,0,0} +% \backgroundcolor{b}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,0} +% \backgroundcolor{l}[rgb]{0,0,0.7} +% \backgroundcolor{r}[rgb]{0,0.7,0} +% \backgroundcolor{c[0]}[rgb]{1,0.8,1} +% \backgroundcolor{c[1]}[rgb]{1,1,0.8} +% \backgroundcolor{g}[rgb]{0.8,1,1} +% \backgroundcolor{f}[rgb]{0.8,0,1} +% \backgroundcolor{n}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,1} +% \backgroundcolor{p}[rgb]{0.8,1,0.6} +% \backgroundcolor{s}[rgb]{0.8,0.8,0.8} +% \pagerim5pt +% +% \section{Examples of Background Painting} +% \label{sec:bgpaint} +% \subsection{Fundamental Painting} +% \label{sec:bgpaint-fund} +% \twosided[pcm] +% +% As you undoubtedly notice, this page and a few pages following it are +% colorfully painted. For this and the next three pages, the author +% declared the \bground{} color of each region as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% |\backgroundcolor{t}[rgb]{0.7,0,0} % dark red for top margin|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{b}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,0} % dark orange for bottom margin|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{l}[rgb]{0,0,0.7} % dark blue for left margin|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{r}[rgb]{0,0.7,0} % dark green for right margin|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{c[0]}[rgb]{1,0.8,1} % pink for colunmn-0|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{c[1]}[rgb]{1,1,0.8} % cream yellow for column-1|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{g}[rgb]{0.8,1,1} % light blue for the gap|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{f}[rgb]{0.8,0,1} % purple for page-wise floats|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{n}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,1} | +% |% light purple for page-wise footnotes|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{p}[rgb]{0.8,1,0.6} | +% |% pale green for pre/post-environment|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{s}[rgb]{0.8,0.8,0.8} % light gray for spanning texts| +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \SpecialUsageIndex{\backgroundcolor} +%  +% Therefore, the \bground{} of this |p|re-environment paragraph and other +% stuff above is painted by pale green. +%  +% \Index{pre-environment stuff} +%  +% Since the author set \Uidx{\!\pagerim!} to be 5\,|pt|, you will see +% unpainted strips of 5\,|pt| wide at all paper edges surrounding painted +% regions. For this and the next three pages, \Uidx{\!\twosided!}|[pcm]| is +% declared to enable |p|, |c| and |m| features but to disable the |b| +% feature. Therefore, though this page \pageref{sec:bgpaint} is even and +% thus the left outside margin is wider than the right inside one, the +% \bground{}s of |l|(eft) and |r|(ight) margins are painted by dark blue and +% dark green respectively. +% \par\bigskip +%  +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% This column-0 is now right and inside because of the |c| feature of +% \!\twosided! is enabled. On the other hand, the \bground{} is this column +% is painted by pink because \!\backgroundcolor! for |c[0]| specifies so. +% That is, the column ordinals optionally given to |c|(olumn) (and |g|(ap)) +% regions are \emph{logical} ones not always corresponding to their +% \emph{physical} positions in a page. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% As explained in the right column-0, the \bground{} of this left and +% outside column-1 is painted by cream yellow as +% {\rm\!\backgroundcolor!|{c[1]}|} specifies. Now we have a +% {\rm\!\switchcolumn!|*|} with a \mctext{} to show the \bgpaint{} for +% it\footnote{ +%  +% Since the footnotes in this \env{paracol} environment are \scfnote{} and +% \mgfnote{}, and \!\backgroundcolor!\texttt{\char`\{n\char`\}} specifies +% light purple, the \bground{} of this (foot)|n|(ote) region is painted by +% the color.}. +%  +% \par\endgroup +% \switchcolumn*[\subsection*{The background of this |s|(panning text) +% region is painted by light gray}\medskip] +% +% \begin{figure*}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% \texttt{f}(loat) region for this page-wise figure is painted by purple\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Page-Wise Figure} +% \end{figure*} +% +% This paragraph is to show how the first line of a paragraph just below a +% \mctext{} is placed in the painted region. +% \par\vfill +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% See the right column for the reason why this paragraph is here. +% \par\vfill +% +% See the right column for what we are now doing. +% \par\endgroup +% \switchcolumn +% +% Now we have a \!\flushpage! to see the \bgpaint{} for a material not shown +% in the page, i.e., a page-wise float. +% \flushpage +% +% Since we are now in an odd-numbered page \pageref{page:bgpaint2}, this +% column-0 is now a left one and is still painted by pink of course. +% \par\vfill\label{page:bgpaint2} +% +% This paragraph is to show how the last line of a page without \Scfnote{}s +% is placed in the painted region. +% \par\newpage +% +% This page is to show how the page without any \pwstuff{} looks like. +% \par\vfill +% +% Shortly we will close this \env{paracol} environment in the next page. +% \par\newpage +% +% Now we are closing this \env{paracol} environment to show how its +% \postenv{} is painted. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% As expected, the \bground{} of this column-1 is still painted by cream +% yellow. +% \par\vfill +% +% See the comment in the left column. +% \par\newpage +% +% See the right column for the reason why we have this almost blank page. +% \par\vfill +% +% See the right column for what will happen shortly. +% \par\newpage +% +% See the left column for the reason why we are now closing the environment. +% \endgroup +% \end{paracol} +% \bigskip +%  +% The \bground{} of this paragraph in |p|(ost-environment) region is also +% painted by pale green, because \postenv{} can be \preenv{} at the same +% time as we see shortly. \par\bigskip +% +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% This short \env{paracol} environment illustrates how the \preenv{} of this +% environment, or the \postenv{} of the last environment in other words, is +% painted. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% Therefore, the author does not have much to say in this column, except for +% giving a footnote here\footnote{ +%  +% Since this footnote is \mgfnote{} with that in the \postenv{}, it is +% considered as a part of \postenv{} and thus painted by pale green rather +% than light purple.\label{fn:bgpaint1}}. +% \endgroup +% \end{paracol} +% \bigskip +% +% Before moving to the next example, one caution is given for \bgpaint{} of +% \Mgfnote{}s. As the footnote \ref{fn:bgpaint1} itself says, \Mgfnote{}s +% given in the \lpage{} of a \env{paracol} environment are considered as +% belonging to \postenv{}. Therefore, the footnote \ref{fn:bgpaint1} is +% painted by pale green as well as another footnote given now\footnote{ +%  +% Since this footnote really belongs to \postenv{}, its \bground{} is painted +% by pale green naturally.}. +% \par\label{page:bgpaint4} +% +% +% +% \newpage +% \backgroundcolor{t(0pt,0pt)(0pt,-4pt)}[rgb]{0.7,0,0} +% \backgroundcolor{b(0pt,-4pt)(0pt,0pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,0} +% \backgroundcolor{l(0pt,4pt)(-4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0,0,0.7} +% \backgroundcolor{r(-4pt,4pt)(0pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0,0.7,0} +% \backgroundcolor{c[0](4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{1,0.8,1} +% \backgroundcolor{c[1](4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{1,1,0.8} +% \backgroundcolor{g(-4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,1,1} +% \backgroundcolor{f(4pt,4pt)(4pt,-4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0,1} +% \backgroundcolor{n(4pt,-4pt)(4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,1} +% \backgroundcolor{p(4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,1,0.6} +% \backgroundcolor{s(4pt,-4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0.8,0.8} +% +% \subsection{Mirrored Painting and Enlarging/Shrinking/Shifting Regions} +% \label{sec:bgpaint-me} +% \twosided +% +% At a glance, this and the next three pages look painted similarly to +% previous four pages, but by a careful examination you should notice +% two important differences. The first one is found in the colors +% of left and right margins. As the author enabled all features of +% \Uidx{\!\twosided!} including |b| for \mirror{}ing and we are now in an +% even-numbered page \pageref{sec:bgpaint-me}, the left and outside margin +% is painted by dark green for the region |r|(ight margin), while the right +% and inside one is painted by dark blue for |l|(eft margin). +% +% The other is that regions are enlarged, shrunk or shifted by 4\,|pt| by +% the following \!\backgroundcolor! commands with extensions. +%  +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% |\backgroundcolor{t(0pt,0pt)(0pt,-4pt)}[rgb]{0.7,0,0} | +% |% B up|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{b(0pt,-4pt)(0pt,0pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,0} | +% |% T down|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{l(0pt,4pt)(-4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0,0,0.7} | +% |% R left T/B outside|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{r(-4pt,4pt)(0pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0,0.7,0} | +% |% L right T/B outside|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{c[0](4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{1,0.8,1} | +% |% all edges outside|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{c[1](4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{1,1,0.8} | +% |% all edges outside|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{g(-4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,1,1} | +% |% L/R inside & T/B outside|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{f(4pt,4pt)(4pt,-4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0,1} | +% |% L/R outside & T/B up|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{n(4pt,-4pt)(4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0.6,1} | +% |% L/R outside & T/B down|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{p(4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,1,0.6} | +% |% all edges outside|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor{s(4pt,-4pt)}[rgb]{0.8,0.8,0.8} | +% |% L/R outside & T/B inside| +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \SpecialUsageIndex{\backgroundcolor} +%  +% In the comments above, |L|(eft), |R|(ight), |T|(op) and |B|(ottom) mean +% edges moved by a given extension. Therefore, for example, +% ``|L/R outside & T/B up|'' for |f|(loat) region means it is enlarged +% horizontally and shifted up vertically by the asymmetric extension +% |(4pt,4pt)(4pt,-4pt)|. These a little bit complicated setting of +% extensions are to solve the problems in the fundamental example shown in +% previous four pages, namely too strict definition of the regions to be +% painted. That is, both vertical edges of regions having texts, e.g., +% |c|(olumn) regions, should look too close to the first and last letters. +% Similarly both horizontal edges of those regions seem too close especially +% when the first line is tall (e.g., the section title in +% p.\Tie\pageref{sec:bgpaint} and the page-wise figure in +% p.\Tie\pageref{page:bgpaint2}) and the last line of a column is followed by +% \mctext{} or \postenv. Therefore, the author made fine tuning moving +% inside edges of margins outside, and so on. We will come back this issue +% after exemplifying the effect of the tuning. +% \par\bigskip +%  +% \advance\skip\footins4pt\relax +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% By the tuning to enlarge this |c|(olumn) region, this paragraph has +% comfortable spaces above and below it, as well as at the both side edges. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% This paragraph is surrounded by spaces of a small but comfortable amount as +% well.\footnote{ +%  +% Shifting this (foot)|n|(ote) region down a little bit, the space below this +% footnote and above the top edge of the |b|(ottom margin) region is enlarged.}. +%  +% \par\endgroup +% \switchcolumn*[\subsection*{The background of this |s|(panning text) +% region is painted by light gray and enlarged horizontally but shrunk +% vertically}\par\medskip] +% +% \begin{figure*}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% shifting up this \texttt{f}(loat) region gives us a small space above +% the top edge of the rectangle\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Page-Wise Figure} +% \end{figure*} +% +% This paragraph is to show how well the first line of a paragraph just below a +% \mctext{} is separated from the boundary of two painted regions. +% \par\vfill +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% See the right column for the reason why this paragraph is here. +% \par\vfill +% +% See the right column for what we are now doing. +% \par\endgroup +% \switchcolumn +% +% By enlarging this |c|(olumn) region and shift the (foot)|n|(ote) region +% down, this paragraph has a comfortable amount of space below it. +% \flushpage +% +% Similarly to other paragraphs below \pwstuff, this paragraph is well +% separated from the bottom edge of the |f|(loat) region above. +% +% \par\vfill\label{page:bgpaint-me2} +% +% As in the case of the line above \Scfnote{}s, the last line of this +% paragraph has a sufficient space separating it from the top edge of the +% |b|(ottom margin) region. +% \par\newpage +% +% This page is to show how the page without any \pwstuff{} looks like. As +% you are seeing, the space above this paragraph is sufficient and +% comfortable. +% \par\vfill +% +% Shortly we will close this \env{paracol} environment in the next page. +% \par\newpage +% +% Now we are closing this \env{paracol} environment to show how this +% paragraph is separated from the boundary of |c|(olumn) and +% |p|(ost-environment) regions. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% See the comment in the left column for the intention of placing this +% paragraph here. +% \par\vfill +% +% See the comment in the left column, too. +% \par\newpage +% +% See the right column for the reason why we have this almost blank page. +% \par\vfill +% +% See the right column for what will happen shortly. +% \par\newpage +% +% See the left column for the reason why we are now closing the environment. +% \endgroup +% \end{paracol} +% \bigskip +%  +% The \bground{} of this paragraph in |p|(ost-environment) region is +% painted by pale green as done in p.\Tie\pageref{page:bgpaint4}, but its top +% and bottom edges \emph{look} shifted down and up to give spaces below and +% above the last and first paragraphs in \env{paracol} environments, +% respectively. +% \par\bigskip +% +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% This short \env{paracol} environment illustrates how the \preenv{} of this +% environment, or the \postenv{} of the last environment in other words, is +% painted. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% Therefore, the author does not have much to say in this column, except for +% giving a footnote here\footnote{ +%  +% As the footnote \ref{fn:bgpaint1} in p.\Tie\pageref{fn:bgpaint1}, this +% \Mgfnote{} is a part of \postenv{} and thus painted by pale green rather +% than light purple.\label{fn:bgpaint-me1}}. +% \endgroup +% \end{paracol} +% \bigskip +% +% In the setting with \!\backgroundcolor! commands in +% p.\Tie\pageref{sec:bgpaint-me}, the author carefully moved contacting edges +% of regions. For example, to enlarge |c|(olumn) regions, the inside edges +% of |l|(eft margin) and |r|(ight margin) regions are moved outside, and both +% vertical edges of the |g|(ap) region shifted toward its inside. As for +% the horizontal edges, the bottom edges of |t|(op margin) and |f|(loat) +% regions are moved up, the top edges of |b|(ottom margin) and +% (foot)|n|(ote) regions are moved down, and both top and bottom edges of +% the |s|(panning text) region are shifted toward its inside. +% +% These edge shifting could make a region too narrow or too much shifted +% resulting in a material in it overreaching its boundary, especially in +% vertical shifting of horizontal edges. However we can exploit some large +% space automatically or manually inserted above and/or below the material +% to avoid overreaching. That is the author exploited the following spaces; +% \!\headsep! below the page head (though it is empty in this document); +% \!\dbltextfloatsep! below the bottom-most page-wise float; spaces that +% \!\subsection!|*| inserts above and below it together with manually +% inserted \!\medskip! below it; \!\skip!\!\footins!\footnote{ +%  +% This is a kind of ``length command'' maybe not widely known.} +%  +% above the first footnote which the author enlarged by 4\,|pt| temporarily +% for this and the next subsections; and \!\footskip! from the bottom edge +% of text area to that of the page number. +% +% Now you might notice that the explanation above does not mention the |p| +% region for \Preenv{} and \postenv. As you should find in the settings, +% this region is enlarged horizontally \emph{and vertically} so that its top +% and bottom edges are moved up and down when the region is at the top or +% bottom of a page, as you are seeing now and find in +% p.\Tie\pageref{sec:bgpaint-me}. However, this enlargement of course has a +% side effect that the region collides against |c|(olumn) and |g|(ap) regions +% also enlarged vertically making them overlapped. This overlap will be +% invisible with most of \emph{printers} because, as shown in +% Section\Tie\ref{sec:ref-bgpaint}, |p| region is painted \emph{before} |c| +% and |g| regions are painted. In addition, since relatively large spaces +% of \!\bigskip! are manually inserted before each \beginparacol{} and after +% each \Endparacol{}, texts in \Preenv{} and \postenv{} are well separated +% from region boundaries. +% +% This overlay painting |c| and |g| over |p|, however, might produce an +% unexpected result with some printer with which, for example, two colors +% are \emph{blended} in the thin overlapped strip\footnote{ +%  +% For example, a dvi previewer |dviout| produces such a blended result with +% the default setting of coloring.}. +%  +% Unfortunately, this overlay painting is inevitable in the current version +% 1.3, but in a future version, hopefully 1.4, more sophisticated +% \emph{position-dependent} region definition, for example, to shift the top +% edge of |p| region only when the region is at the top of page, could be +% introduced. +% +% Another remark is that the \mirror{}ing specified by the |b| feature of +% \!\twosided! works not only on the colors of side margins but also on +% their asymmetric shrinkage. That is, the asymmetric shifts of vertical +% edges of |l| and |r| regions correctly performed irrespective of their +% physical positions, i.e., even when the |l| (resp.\ |r|) region is at +% the right (resp.\ left) margin and the edge to be shift is the left +% (resp.\ right) one rather than right (resp.\ left). +% +% +% +% \newpage \suppressfloats +% \nobackgroundcolor{t} +% \nobackgroundcolor{b} +% \nobackgroundcolor{l} +% \nobackgroundcolor{r} +% \nobackgroundcolor{g} +% \backgroundcolor{c[0](4pt,4pt)(0.5\columnsep,4pt)}[rgb]{1,0.8,1} +% \backgroundcolor{c[1](0.5\columnsep,4pt)(4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{1,1,0.8} +% \backgroundcolor{C[0](10000pt,10000pt)(0.5\columnsep,10000pt)}[rgb]{1,0.8,1} +% \backgroundcolor{C[1](0.5\columnsep,10000pt)(10000pt,10000pt)}[rgb]{1,1,0.8} +% +% \subsection{Regions with Infinite Extensions} +% \label{sec:bgpaint-inf} +% +% You are now seeing another \bgpaint{} much different from previous two +% examples. That is, after disabling painting of |t|, |b|, |l|, |r| and |g| +% regions by \Uidx{\!\nobackgroundcolor!}, the author gave the followings +% for painting this and the next pages. +%  +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% |\backgroundcolor| +% |{c[0](4pt,4pt)(0.5\columnsep,4pt)}[rgb]{1,0.8,1}|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor| +% |{c[1](0.5\columnsep,4pt)(4pt,4pt)}[rgb]{1,1,0.8}|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor| +% |{C[0](10000pt,10000pt)(0.5\columnsep,10000pt)}[rgb]{1,0.8,1}|\\ +% |\backgroundcolor| +% |{C[1](0.5\columnsep,10000pt)(10000pt,10000pt)}[rgb]{1,1,0.8}| +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \SpecialUsageIndex{\backgroundcolor} +%  +% The first two lines above is different from the previous declaration +% because inside edges of |c[0]| and |c[1]| regions are shifted toward +% outside of them and thus inside of unpainted |g| region so that the edges +% are contacted. On the other hand, the last two lines are for +% \emph{under-painting} of columns and has \emph{\bginfext} to make top, +% bottom and outside edges of |C| regions reaching to the corresponding +% paper edges. Since this under-painting is done with colors same as those +% of over-painting of |c| regions, you will have an impression that the +% paper is two-toned and \pwstuff{} are pasted on the paper\footnote{ +%  +% This footnote is given outside \env{paracol} environment but its +% \bground{} is painted by light purple because it is merged with the +% footnote \ref{fn:bgpaint-inf2}.\label{fn:bgpaint-inf1}}. +%  +% \par\bigskip +%  +% \begin{figure}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% \parbox{.8\textwidth}{ +% This \texttt{f}(loat) region could be extended to both side edges +% and the top edge of the paper if its extension were +% \texttt{(10000pt,10000pt)(10000pt,-4pt)}.}\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Page-Wise Figure \emph{Imported} from Pre-Environment} +% \label{fig:bgpaint-inf} +% \end{figure} +%  +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% Though you cannot see, the right edge of this over-painted |c[0]| region +% is shifted right by 4\,|pt| to hide the small patch at the right bottom +% corner of the |p| region above by overlaying. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% As explained in the right column, this {\rm|c[1]|} region also has an +% invisible left edge shifted left by {\rm4\,|pt|}\footnote{ +%  +% This (foot)|n|(ote) region could be extended to both side edges and the +% bottom edge of the paper if its extension were +% \texttt{(10000pt,-4pt)(10000pt,10000pt)}.\label{fn:bgpaint-inf2}}. +% \endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn*[\subsection*{This \texttt{s}(panning text) region could be +% extended to both side edges of the paper if its extension were +% \texttt{(10000pt,-4pt)}.}\par\medskip] +% +% The author does not have much to say now for this column chunk. +% \par\vfill +% +% Still nothing to say particular to the page break we will have shortly. +% \par\newpage +% +% This paragraph is just for keeping the \env{paracol} environment alive in +% this page. +% \switchcolumn +% +% \begingroup\it +% Little to say as well. +% \par\vfill +% +% Nothing to say as well. +% \par\newpage +% +% This paragraph is not necessary for keeping alive the environment but is +% given for consistent view. +% \endgroup +% +% \begin{figure*}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% \parbox{.8\textwidth}{ +% This figure is given in the \env{paracol} environment closed in the +% previous page but its background is not painted.}\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Page-Wise Figure \emph{Exported} to Post-Environment} +% \label{fig:bgpaint-inf2} +% \end{figure*} +% \end{paracol} +% \bigskip +% +% Note that overlay painting is inevitable for two-toned page painting, as +% far as you want to paint \bground{} of \pwstuff. +% +% The last issue of \bgpaint{} is about painting materials given outside +% \env{paracol}. As you have seen, \Preenv{} and \postenv{} are painted but +% it is done only when they reside in a page having a portion of a +% \env{paracol} environment (maybe) of course. Therefore, the next page is +% \emph{not} painted because the page does not have any parallel-columned +% stuff. Therefore, even if you wish to paint the whole of your document +% including pages without \env{paracol} stuff, you cannot do it just with +% \Paracol{} package, at least so far. +% +% On the other hand, some materials given outside \env{paracol} environments +% are painted as if they are given in the environment when they are +% \emph{imported} into the environment. One category has footnotes given in +% \preenv{} when \!\footnotelayout!|{m}| is specified for merging, as +% exemplified by the footnote \ref{fn:bgpaint-inf1} in the previous page. +% Note that such a footnote is painted by the color for |n| region rather +% than |p| region even when there are no footnotes in the \env{paracol} +% environment. The other category has ordinary floats given by \env{figure} +% and/or \env{table} +% (i.e., neither \env{figure*} nor \env{table*}) environments outside +% \env{paracol} and then \emph{deferred} to a page having (a portion of) +% stuff produced by \env{paracol}. Since such a float, e.g., +% Figure\Tie\ref{fig:bgpaint-inf} in this page, is considered as a page-wise +% float given in the \env{paracol} environment in this section, its +% background is painted by the color for the |f| region, rather than that +% for the |p| region which would be used if the float were is placed in the +% previous page. Note that such a deferred float import could occur not +% only from the page having \beginparacol{} but also from pages preceding +% it. For example, if you have three \env{figure} environments in a page +% $p-1$ just preceding the page $p$ in which you start a \env{paracol} +% environment, it could happen that first one is placed in $p-1$ without +% painting, the second is placed in $p$ and painted by the color for |p|, +% and the third is placed in $p+1$ and painted by the color for |f|. +% +% Finally some materials \emph{exported} from a \env{paracol} environment +% are painted as if they are in \postenv. In previous two subsections, we +% saw \Mgfnote{}s (e.g., \ref{fn:bgpaint1} in p.\Tie\pageref{fn:bgpaint1} +% and \ref{fn:bgpaint-me1} in p.\Tie\pageref{fn:bgpaint-me1}) are painted by +% the color of |p| rather than |n|. The other kind of exportation is of +% page-wise floats given in a \env{paracol} environment but deferred to the +% page next to the page having \Endparacol, or further. For example, +% Figure~\ref{fig:bgpaint-inf2} is given in the \env{paracol} environment +% above in this page, but its \bground{} is not painted because the next page +% in which the figure is placed does not have any parallel-columned +% stuff\footnote{ +%  +% If it has, the background is painted by the color for |p|.}. +%  +% \newpage\vspace*{\fill} +% \centerline{(intentionally blanked page to show this page is \emph{not} +% painted)} +% \vfill +% \advance\skip\footins-4pt\relax +% \endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/impl.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/impl.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d7893f019 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/impl.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,19562 @@ +% \section{Overview} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv} +% +% \subsection{Column-Pages} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-colpage} +% +% In our parallel multi-column typesetting, a column may grow independently +% of other columns and may cross its page boundary asynchronously with +% others. Therefore, we cannot throw away the contents of a column in a +% page, or a {\em\Uidx\colpage} in short, when a page break occurs in the +% column. Instead, we have to keep \colpage{}s until all columns are +% {\em\Uidx\sync{}ed} implicitly or explicitly. +% +% An {\em\Uidx\imsync} takes place when all columns in a page see +% page-breaks to let the page is shipped out. In general, all columns but +% the last one which arrives the page-break have completed \colpage{}s in the +% page in question and some of them may have succeeding \colpage{}s. +% Therefore, we maintain the list of completed \colpage{}s +% $\Uidx\S_c=|\pcol@shipped|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@shipped} +%  +% for each column $c\In0\C$, where $\Uidx\C=\!\pcol@ncol!$ is the number of +% columns given through the argument of \env{paracol} environment, and the +% set of them $\Uidx\SS=\Set{\S_c}{c\In0\C}$. +% +% Each element $\Uidx\s_c(p)$ of a list $\S_c$ is an \!\insert! whose +% \!\vbox! contains the +% $p$-th completed \colpage\footnote{ +%  +% Other registers such as \cs{count} are not used.}, +%  +% where $p=0$ for the first \colpage{} produced in \env{paracol} +% environment or that following a page flushing macro \!\flushpage!, +% \!\clearpage! or \!\cleardoublepage!. That is, $\S_c$ is defined as +% follows, where $\Uidx\pbase=\!\pcol@basepage!$ is the zero-origin ordinal +% of the {\em\Uidx\bpage} being the oldest page not shipped out yet. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \S_c&=&(\s_c(\pbase),\s_c(\pbase{+}1),\ldots,\s_c(\pbase{+}k{-}1))\\ +% &=&\!\@elt!\,\s_c(\pbase)\;\!\@elt!\,\s_c(\pbase{+}1)\;\cdots\; +% \!\@elt!\,\s_c(\pbase{+}k{-}1) +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% Note that a list $\S_c$ can be empty and all members in $\SS$ may be empty. +% +% The other type of \sync{}ation, {\em\Uidx\exsync}, takes place by +% \!\switchcolumn!|*| or the beginning of starred \csenv{}s, by +% \Endparacol, or by one of page flushing macros \!\flushpage!, +% \!\clearpage! and \!\cleardoublepage!. A flushing \exsync{} ships out the +% pages from $\pbase$ to $\Uidx\ptop=\!\pcol@toppage!$ being the ordinal of +% the {\em\Uidx\tpage} to which the most advanced {\em\Uidx\lcolumn} has +% reached. On the other hand, other non-flushing \exsync{} keeps the page +% $\ptop$ from being shipped out because the \colpage{}s in it or the page +% itself will grow further. +% +% +% +% \subsection{Current Column-Pages and Their Contexts} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-ccol} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove $\mu$ for \cs{@mparbottom} from column-context because it is +% now in page context.} +% +% We also have to maintain another type of \colpage{}s which are currently +% built, or {\em\Uidx\ccolpage{}s} in short, to switch from a column to +% another. Since each column may have its own {\em context} for the +% typsetting of it, or {\em\Uidx\cctext} in short, it were perfect to save +% the context when we leave from a +% column and to restore that when we revisit the column if we could. +% However, \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} has a tremendously large number of context +% variables and the number becomes virtualy boundless when we take variables +% defined in various styles and by users themselves into account. +% Therefore, we had to abandon to keep the whole context of the column but +% carefully chose a small subset comprising variables automatically modified +% outside of users' control. That is, the \cctext{} +% $\Uidx\cc_c=|\pcol@col|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@col} +%  +% of a column $c$ consists of the following elements, each of which named +% $e$ is referred to as $\cc_c(e)$ hereafter. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item $\Uidx\vb$ +% represents $\!\insert!{\cdot}\vb$ containing the followings. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\vb^b=\!\box!{\cdot}\vb=\!\@holdpg!$ is the \!\vbox! containing the main +% vertical list which has already contributed to the \ccolpage{}. +% +% \item +% $\vb^p=\!\count!{\cdot}\vb=\!\pcol@page!$ means the \ccolpage{} belongs to +% the page $\vb^p$. +% +% \item +% $\vb^r=\!\dimen!{\cdot}\vb=\!\@colroom!$ is the room of the column. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item $\Uidx\ft=\Midx{\!\pcol@currfoot!}$ +% is the \!\insert! containing the footnotes added in the \ccolpage, if +% \Mcfnote{} typesetting is in effect. Its constituent \!\box!, \!\count!, +% \!\dimen! and \!\skip! are denoted as $\ft^b$, $\ft^c$, $\ft^d$ and +% $\ft^s$ respectively. On the other hand, if \Scfnote{} typesetting is in +% effect, $\ft$ is always empty\footnote{ +%  +% But the macro \cs{pcol@currfoot} is used to keep \Scfnote{}s temporarily.}. +% +% \item $\Uidx\pd=\!\pcol@prevdepth!$ +% is the depth of the last vertical item in $\vb^b$ obtained by +% \!\prevdepth!. +% +% \item $\Uidx\tl=\!\@toplist!$ +% is the list of top floats inserted in the \ccolpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\ml=\!\@midlist!$ +% is the list of mid floats inserted in the \ccolpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\bl=\!\@botlist!$ +% is the list of bottom floats inserted in the \ccolpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\dl=\!\@deferlist!$ +% is the list of \cwise{} floats deferred to the next \colpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\tf=\!\pcol@textfloatsep!$ +% is the vertical skip used instead of \!\textfloatsep! for top floats in the +% \ccolpage{} if it has \sync{}ation points, or $\infty$ otherwise. +% +% \item $\Uidx\fh=\!\@textfloatsheight!$ +% is the total height of mid floats and their separators in the \ccolpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\tn=\!\@topnum!$ +% is the maximum number of top floats which the \ccolpage{} can accommodate +% further. +% +% \item $\Uidx\tr=\!\@toproom!$ +% is the room for top floats in the \ccolpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\bn=\!\@botnum!$ +% is the maximum number of bottom floats which the \ccolpage{} can accommodate +% further. +% +% \item $\Uidx\br=\!\@botroom!$ +% is the room for bottom floats in the \ccolpage. +% +% \item $\Uidx\cn=\!\@colnum!$ +% is the maximum total number of floats which the \ccolpage{} can accommodate +% further. +% +% \item $\Uidx\sw$ +% is the following encoding of \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and +% \CSIndex{if@afterindent} at the time we left from the column $c$. +% $$ +% \sw=\cases{0&$\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\false$\cr +% 1&$\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true\;\land\; +% \CSIndex{if@afterindent}=\true$\cr +% 2&$\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true\;\land\; +% \CSIndex{if@afterindent}=\false$} +% $$ +% Note that we have only three states because \CSIndex{if@afterindent} is +% meaningful only when $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$\footnote{ +%  +% If only with the standard \LaTeX{} and so far.}. +% +% \item $\Uidx\ep=\!\everypar!$ +% is the tokens stored in \!\everypar! at the time we left from the column +% $c$. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Add description of $w_c\EQ\cs{pcol@columnwidth}{\cdot}c$.} +%  +% In addition, we have special context variables +% $\Uidx\w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% in which we keep \!\columnwidth! for the column $c$. +% +% Note that we could add other variables to the saved context and/or provide +% some API macro to define them by users, but abandon them because it should +% be too complicated for users\footnote{ +%  +% And for the author if we include save/restore of macros, though it could +% be done with a \cs{toks} containing the \cs{def}initions of macros.}. +%  +% Also note that we provide a save/restore mechanism for \lcounter{}s as +% discussed in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-counter}. +% +% +% +% \subsection{Pages and Their Contexts} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-page} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Redesign page context and its implementation.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\pi^s(p)$ to the page context of $p$ for column-separating +% rule drawing and background painting.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\pi^m(p)$ to the page context of $p$ for marginal note +% placement.} +% +% Besides the \colpage{}s, we have to keep track each whole page not yet +% shipped out but has some complete or incomplete (i.e., current) \colpage{}s. +% We maintain the list; +%  +% \SpecialMainIndex{\pcol@pages} +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \Uidx\PP +% &=&\!\pcol@pages!=(\Uidx\pp(\pbase),\pp(\pbase{+}1),\ldots\pp(\ptop{-}1))\\ +% &=&\!\@elt!\,\pp(\pbase)\;\!\@elt!\,\pp(\pbase{+}1)\;\cdots\; +% \!\@elt!\,\pp(\ptop{-}1)\\ +% \pp(p)&=&|{|\pp^p(p)|}|\pp^i(p)\pp^f(p)|{|\pp^s(p)|}||{|\pp^m(p)|}| +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% where $\pp(p)$ is the {\em\Uidx\pctext} of $p$ and its elements $\pp^p(p)$, +% $\pp^i(p)$, $\pp^f(p)$, $\pp^s(p)$ and $\pp^m(p)$ have the followings. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\pp^p(p)=\Uidx\page(p)$ is the value of the counter \counter{page} +% (i.e. \!\c@page!) for the page $p$. +% +% \item +% Iff $\pp^i(p)\neq\bot$, the page $p$ has \pwise{} floats or the +% single-column {\em\Uidx\preenv} preceeding \beginparacol{} in the +% {\em\Uidx\spage} where it resides and spannig all columns. In this case +% $\pp^i(p)=i$ represents $\!\insert!{\cdot}i$, often {\em cached} +% in the macro \!\pcol@spanning!, for such {\em\Uidx\spanning} +% whose registers have the followings. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\pp^b(p)=\!\box!{\cdot}i$ contains the \spanning. +% +% \item +% $\pp^h(p)=\!\dimen!{\cdot}i=\!\@colht!$ if positive for the height of +% columns shrunk by the \spanning. If negative, the page is only for +% the \spanning, i.e. a {\em\Uidx\fpage}. We use the notation $\pp^h(p)$ +% for the pages $\pp^i(p)=\bot$ to mean \!\textheight!. +% +% \item +% $\pp^t(p)=\!\skip!{\cdot}i=\!\pcol@topskip!$ being the value of +% \!\topskip! at \beginparacol{} to be inserted at the top of each column in +% each non-first page. Otherwise, i.e., for the columns in the \spage{} +% following the \preenv{}, it has 0 to prevent the \!\topskip! insertion. +% We use the notation $\pp^t(p)$ for the pages $\pp^i(p)=\bot$ to +% mean \!\pcol@topskip!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item +% Iff $\pp^f(p)\neq\bot$, \Scfnote{} typesetting, discussed in +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-scfnote}, is in effect and the page $p$ has some +% footnotes in $\!\box!\cdot\pp^f(p)$. This element is often {\em cached} +% in the macro \Midx{\!\pcol@footins!}. +%  +% \SpecialMainIndex{\pcol@pages} +% +% \item +% $\pp^s(p)=(\Uidx\spt(H_1,h_1),\ldots,\spt(H_n,h_n))= +% \!\@elt!\Arg{H_1,h_1}\ldots\!\@elt!\Arg{H_n,h_n}$ is the list of \mctext{}s +% in the page $p$, where $i$-th one's top edge is at $H_i$ from the top of +% the page (excluding \spanning) and its height-plus-depth is $h_i$, where +% $H_i$ and $h_i$ are represented in the form of integers. Therefore, it is +% emptied by \!\pcol@startpage!, and then the elements are added by +% \!\pcol@makecol! (only for the last one) and \!\pcol@output@switch! +% whenever they find a \mctext{} completes. The element is often {\em +% cached} in the macro \!\pcol@sptextlist! and is referred to by +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! to draw \cseprule{} and to paint columns and +% \csepgap{} leaving spaces for \mctext{}s. The usage of this element is +% discussed in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-cswap} a little bit more detailedly. +% +% \item +% $\pp^m(p)=\Arg{\Uidx\mpb_L^l}\Arg{\mpb_L^r}\Arg{\mpb_R^l}\Arg{\mpb_R^r}$ +% is the set of lists of marginal notes in the left ($l$) and right +% ($r$) margins and in the left ($L$) and right ($R$) \parapag{}es. The +% words left and right of margins mean physical left and right, while left +% and right of \parapag{}es mean the logical ones, i.e., the page where the +% column-0 resides is left. Each element $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$ has a +% list $(\Uidx\mpar(t_1,b_1),\ldots,\mpar(t_n,b_n))= +% \!\@elt!\Arg{t_1}\Arg{b_1}\ldots\!\@elt!\Arg{t_n}\Arg{b_n}$ of marginal +% notes whose top and bottom are at $t_i$ and $b_i$ from the top of the +% column area, where $t_i$ and $b_i$ are represented in the form of +% integers. Each element can be empty of course, and $\pp^m(p)$ itself can +% be so as well to mean all elements are empty\footnote{ +%  +% To minimize the possibility of miscoding for emptying and save a small +% amount of memory for pages having no marginal notes.}. +%  +% Therefore, $\pp^m(p)$ is emptied by +% \!\pcol@startpage!, and then examined and modified by +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! when it adds a marginal note through macros +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom! and \!\pcol@setmpbelt!. Another modifier +% \!\pcol@output@start! initializes one of the element $\mpb_L^{\{l,r\}}$ +% with the value representing the last marginal note in \preenv{}, while +% another examiner \!\pcol@output@end! lets the outside \!\@mparbottom! have +% a value based on $b_n$ of one of the element, according to \LaTeX's +% setting of marginal note placement. The whole elemnt $\pp^m(p)$ is often +% {\em cached} in the macro \!\pcol@mparbottom!. The usage of this +% element is discussed in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-cswap} a little bit more +% detailedly. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% Note that even in \parapag{}ing and in \npaired{} one in particular, +% a page $p$ consists of all columns $c\In0\C$. Therefore, the term {\em +% left\slash right \parapag{}e} $p$ always mean the left and right component +% of a \parapag{}e (pair) $p$. +% +% The reason why we keep track of $\page(p)$ is that page numbering is not +% necessrary to be consecutive. If such a {\em jump} occurs randomly in any +% columns explicitly updating \counter{page}, it is very tough to give a +% consistent view of the page number of a specific page to all columns. +% Therefore we suppose jumps occur only in the leftmost column 0\footnote{ +%  +% But we neither inhibit nor nullify a jump in non-leftmost column and thus +% the update can be seen referring to \texttt{page} counter explicitly.} +%  +% which controls the page numbering, while non-leftmost columns are expected +% to refer the \counter{page} passively. +% +% This page numbering is implemented as follows. Each time a \colpage{} at +% $p$ of the leftmost column is completed to start a new \colpage{}, +% $\page(p)$ is fixed to be the value of \counter{page} and +% $\page(q)=\pp^p(q)$ for all $q\in[p,\ptop]$ are let be $\page(p)+(q-p)$ in +% usual cases but $\page(p)+2(q-p)$ in \npaired{} \parapag{}ing. +% This update also takes place on \cswitch{} from the leftmost \colpage{} at +% $p$ to another column so that a jump happning before the switching is +% notified to other columns. On the other hand, starting or \cswitch{} to a +% non-leftmost \colpage{} at $p$ lets \counter{page} have $\page(p)$ +% referring to $\pp(p)$, unless the column starts the most advanced \tpage. +% In this new \tpage{} case, $\pp(\ptop{+}1)$ is added to $\PP$ with the +% temporary setting $\pp^p(\ptop+1)=\page(\ptop+1)=\page(\ptop)+1$ usually but +% $\pp^p(\ptop+1)=\page(\ptop+1)=\page(\ptop)+2$ in \npaired{} +% \parapag{}ing, and $\ptop$ is incremented. +% +% Note that this management is imperfect because direct references of +% \counter{page} in non-leftmost columns can give inconsistent results if +% \counter{page} is modified in a non-leftmost column or the reference occurs +% in a page $p$ after that the leftmost column modifies \counter{page} in a +% page $q$ such that $q\leq p$. In addition to them, this mechanism in +% \npaired{} \parapag{}ing always gives incorrect page number to the +% columns in a right \parapag{}e because $\pp^p(p)$ always has $\page(p)$ +% for the left \parapag{}e. However, it is expected that the progress of +% the leftmost column usually preceeds other columns to give consistent +% \counter{page} reference even with jumps, unless the reference is made by +% a column in a right \npaired{} \parapag{}e. More importantly, it is +% assured that indirect refereces through |.aux| records and page numbers +% recorded in |.toc|, |.idx|, and so on are always consistent because of the +% lazy evaluation of $\counter{page}=\page(p)$ at ship-out of an ordinary +% page $p$ or a left \parapag{}e $p$, while the counter is let have +% $\page(p)+1$ when a right \npaired{} \parapag{}e $p$ is shipped out. +% +% Also note that we also keep $\pp(\ptop)$ in \Midx{\!\pcol@currpage!} +% which is initialized by \!\pcol@output@start! to let $\pp^i(\ptop)$ have +% the \preenv. Then the macro is redefined to have the value representing +% the new page possibly with $\pp^i(\ptop)$ for \pwise{} floats in +% \!\pcol@startpage! by the macro \!\pcol@defcurrpage!. Another +% \!\def!inition is done in \!\pcol@output@switch! also with +% \!\pcol@defcurrpage! to let $\pp^f(\ptop)$ have \Scfnote{}s built in +% \!\footins! if \scfnote{} typsetting is in effect and the \cswitch{} +% leaves the column in $\ptop$\footnote{ +%  +% The \!\def!inition of \!\pcol@currpage! in \!\pcol@setpnoelt!, and +% emptying it in \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@freshpage! are for coding +% trick and thus not for giving a really new \!\def!initions.}. +%  +% We denote the concatenation of $\PP$ and $\pp(\ptop)$ as $\Uidx\PPP$ to +% represent all pages {\em on-the-fly}. +% +% +% +% \subsection{Counters} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-counter} +% +% Besides the context variables discussed in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-ccol}, we +% need to make counters local to each column except for those declared to be +% global by \!\globalcounter!. Let $\Uidx\CC$ be the set (list) of all +% counters declared before \beginparacol, i.e., $\CC=\!\cl@@ckpt!$, and +% $$ +% \Uidx\CG=\!\pcol@gcounters!=\{\Uidx\cg_1,\ldots\}=\!\@elt!|{|\cg_1|}|\cdots +% $$ +% be the set of {\em\Uidx\gcounter{}s} which have declared so by +% \!\globalcounter!|{|$\cg_i$|}|. Then the set of {\em\Uidx\lcounter{}s} +% $\Uidx\CTL$ is defined as follows. +%  +% \SpecialMainIndex{\pcol@counters} +% $$ +% \CTL=\CC-\CG=\!\pcol@counters!=\{\Uidx\cl_1,\ldots\}=\!\@elt!|{|\cl_1|}|\cdots +% $$ +% +% Since each column has its own values in \lcounter{}s, we have to keep the +% set of counter\slash value pairs +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@counters} +% $$ +% \Uidx\Cc_c=\!\pcol@counters!{\cdot}c=\{\<\cl_1,\val_c(\cl_1)\>,\ldots\} +% =\!\@elt!|{|\cl_1|}||{|\val_c(\cl_1)|}|\cdots +% $$ +% for each column $c$, where $\Uidx\val_c(\cl_i)$ is the value of a counter +% $\cl_i$ local to $c$. That is, whenever we switch from a column $c$ to +% $d$, we save $\<\cl_i,\val_c(\cl_i)\>$ in $\Cc_c$ and restore $\cl_i$ for +% $d$ by letting it have $\val_d(\cl_i)$ in $\Cc_d$, for all $\cl_i\in\CTL$. +% +% A \gcounter{} is free from these save\slash restore operations but needs +% another special operation when it is incremented by \!\stepcounter!. That +% is, the invocation of \!\stepcounter! for a \gcounter{} $\cg_i$ may clear +% \lcounter{}s in its set of descendant counters +% $\Uidx\clist(\cg_i)=|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\cg_i$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta}{\pcol@cl@} +%  +% and this clearing must be performed on the all instances of +% $\cl_j\in\clist(\cg_i)$ saved in $\Cc_c$ for all $c\In0\C$. Therefore, on +% the \!\stepcounter!, we do the followings for all $c\In0\C$; temporarily +% restore all $\cl_k\in\CTL$ from $\Cc_c$; clear all $\cl_j\in\clist(\cg_i)$; +% and then save $\<\cl_k,\val_c(\cl_k)\>$ back to $\Cc_c$. +% +% The other item we maintain for a \lcounter{} $\cl$ is its {\em\Uidx\lrep} +% $\arg{rep}$ in a column $c$ defined by +% $\!\definethecounter!\<\cl\>\\arg{rep}$. The \lrep{} $\arg{rep}$ is +% kept in $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}c$ and is made \!\let!-equal to +% $|\the|{\cdot}\cl$ when the column $c$ is visted. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Page-Wise and Merged Footnotes} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-scfnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the subsection ``Single-Columned and Merged Footnotes''.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Change the title from ``Single-Columned and Merged Footnotes'' to +% ``Page-Wise and Merged Footnotes'' according to the new naming.} +% +% \Uidx{\Index{page-wise footnote}}{\em Page-wise footnote} +% typesetting is completely different from ordinary {\em\Mcfnote} +% typesetting. +% +% When a \colpage{} in the \tpage{} is built, \!\footins! keeps all footnotes +% \!\insert!ed by \!\footnote! or \!\footnotetext! in {\em any} columns in +% the page. Therefore, \!\footnote! and \!\footnotetext! in the \tpage{} +% act as usual to add the footnote to \!\footins!. Then if a \cswitch{} +% takes place to leave the column, \!\footins! is saved into $\pp^f(\ptop)$ +% by \!\pcol@output@switch!, so that $\pp^f(\ptop)$ is \!\insert!ed to +% \!\footins! again by \!\pcol@restartcolumn! when it visits a column in +% $\ptop$, or by \!\pcol@startcolumn! when it finds a column proceeds to +% $\ptop$. +% +% Then, when a \colpage{} in the \tpage{} completes advancing $\ptop$, +% \!\footins! is kept in $\pp^f(\ptop{-}1)$ by \!\pcol@startpage!, rather +% than being combined with the \colpage{}. This saving into +% $\pp^f(\ptop{-}1)$ {\em fixes} the footnotes in $\ptop{-}1$ so that +% $\pp^f(\ptop{-}1)$ is combined with other materials in the page by +% \!\pcol@outputelt! or \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! through \!\pcol@putfootins! +% when the page is shipped out. +% +% Fixing $\pp^f(p)$ for $p<\ptop$ makes it impossible to add footnotes in a +% column in the page $p$ not only to $\pp^f(p)$ but also to \!\footins! +% for the page $p$ becaues we have at least one fixed \colpage{} $\s_c(p)$ +% unable to shrink to have such additional footnotes in $p$\footnote{ +%  +% The \colpage{} $\s_c(p)$ could have some space at its bottom produced by, +% for example, \cs{newpage}, but exploitation of such space is extremely +% hard.}. +%  +% Therefore, such a footnote addition is {\em deferred} and is thrown into +% $\pp^f(\ptop)$ through a list; +% $$ +% \Uidx\df=\!\pcol@topfnotes!= +% (f_1,f_2,\ldots,f_n)=\!\vbox!|{|f_1\;f_2\;\cdots\;f_n|}| +% $$ +% where $f_i$ is a \!\vbox! containing the deferred footnote preceded by +% \!\penalty!\!\interlinepenalty! to allow \TeX{} to break footnotes to place +% them in two (or more) pages. That is, \!\footnote! or \!\footnotetext! in +% $p<\ptop$ adds an element for the footnote to $\df$, then all the elements +%  +% \footnote{More accurately, some trailing elements may be left in $\df$ if +% its total height is too large, as discussed in +% \secref{sec:imp-sout-scfnote}.} +%  +% are \!\insert!ed to \!\footins! by \!\pcol@deferredfootins! invoked in +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! when it visits a column in $\ptop$, or in +% \!\pcol@startcolumn! when it starts a \colpage{} in $\ptop$. The macro +% \!\pcol@output@end! also do the \!\insert!ion by itself with \Mgfnote{} +% typesetting to let deferred footnotes be a part of \postenv. +% +% The reference to $\pp^f(p)$ for $p<\ptop$ is also made in +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! and \!\pcol@flushcolumn!. The former \!\insert!s +% $\pp^f(p)$ to \!\footins! so that the \colpage{} which the macro restarts +% is built as if it has the footnotes in $\pp^f(p)$ to make the \colpage{} +% broken leaving the space for the footnotes. However, \!\footins! is never +% grown because it has been fixed and thus additional footnotes will go +% to $\df$ as discussed above. Then \!\footins! is discarded by +% \!\pcol@makecol! when the \colpage{} completes, or by +% \!\pcol@output@switch! when it leaves the column. +% +% The reference to $\pp^f(p)$ by the latter macro \!\pcol@flushcolumn! is to +% build the ship-out image of the \colpage{} to be flushed. When this macro +% and other macros, namely \!\pcol@makecol! and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% build the ship-out image in a page $p$ having $\pp^f(p)$ using +% \!\@makecol!, we have to be careful of the fact that the \colpage{} has +% been build as if it has footnotes in $\pp^f(p)$ but the footnotes are not +% included in its ship-out image but that of the page. Therefore, +% \!\@colht! referred in \!\@makecol! should be shrunk by the sum of +% height and depth of $\pp^f(p)$ and $\!\skip!\cdot\pp^f(p)$ by +% \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn!. Other and more subtle adjustment is to add the +% stretch and shrink factors of $\!\skip!\cdot\pp^f(p)$ at the tail of the +% \colpage{} by \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv!. This is necessary because \TeX{} has +% broken the \colpage{} taking account of the stretch and, more essentially, +% shrink factors, and thus without the factors the main vertical list in the +% \colpage{} could be a little bit taller than \!\@colht! causing overfull. +% +% The feature gathering footnotes in all columns in a page brings a problem +% to \exsync{}, because a column whose contents fit the \tpage{} at the +% last visit may be too tall on the \sync{}ation because other columns have +% put some footnotes after the last visit. That is, we cannot simply build +% the \tpage{} combining $\s_c(\ptop)$ for all $c\In0\C$ and $\pp^f(\ptop)$ +% because there could be $\s_c(\ptop)$ too tall to reside in $\ptop$ with +% $\pp^f(\ptop)$. +% +% To solve this problem, we perform the following operations prior to fix +% the contents of $\ptop$ having an \exsync{} point in it. First one is +% {\em\Uidx\cscan} to visit all columns by \cswitch{} prior to the +% \sync{}ation so that \TeX's page builder has opportunities to break too +% tall \colpage{}s. Since this scan could merely break footnotes rather +% than the main vertical lists in the \colpage{}s and the broken footnotes +% will be reconnected when the \!\output!-routine is invoked for the +% \sync{}ation, we then examine if all $\s_c(\ptop)$ are accommodated in +% $\ptop$ with $\pp^f(p)$. +% +% This examination for a \sync{}ation by \!\switchcolumn!|*| or its +% relatives is done as a part of the inherent \sync{}ing procedure to see if +% the combination of the tallest {\em top} items, i.e., top floats and the +% main vertical list, and the tallest {\em bottom} items, i.e., bottom +% floats and \Mcfnote{}s, is too large causing page flushing. As for page +% flushing and environment closing, this {\em\Uidx\pfcheck} requires a +% special kind of \sync{}ed \cswitch{} by which we flush pages up to +% $\ptop-1$ and examine if there is a too tall column. +% +% Then if too tall columns are found, in either cases, we move to the {\em +% tallest} column to force a page break in the column so that we have a new +% page with shorter columns and shorter \Scfnote{}s as well. In the +% \sync{}ation by \!\switchcolumn!|*| or its relatives, this forced page +% break is then applied to all other columns so that new \colpage{}s have +% top floats, if any, below which we should place the \sync{}ation point. +% This examination and forced page break is repeated until we have a page +% without any too tall columns, because a page break may bring deferred +% floats and footnotes which may result in a too tall column. +% +% +% +% \subsection{Text Coloring} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-color} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the subsection ``Coloring''.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Change the subsection title from ``Coloring'' to ``Text Coloring'' +% to distinguish it from background painting clearly.} +% +% \subsubsection{Fundamental Mechanism} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-color-fundamental} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Revise the description of \Sec1.6.1 according to the new +% implementation with \cs{insert}.} +% +% Text coloring done by \textsf{color} package and its relatives using +% \!\special! stands on the fact that the main vertical list is {\em +% printed} in the order of occurrence in the source |.tex|. That is, a +% command such as \!\color!|{red}| puts +% \!\special!|{color push [1 0 0]}|\footnote{ +%  +% If \texttt{.dvi} is processed by \texttt{dvips}, or other +% printer-dependent command corresponding to it.} +%  +% into |.dvi| to make all stuff in the main vertical list colored red until +% other coloring \!\special! inserted by other coloring macro appears in +% |.dvi|. This simple mechanism works well even when the pair of coloring +% \!\special!s are in different pages and/or columns because, with respect +% to the main vertical list, everything between them in |.tex| is also +% surrounded by the \!\special! pair in |.dvi|. As for other stuff such as +% header, footer, floats and footnotes, \LaTeX{} surrounds them by +% \!\color@begingroup! and \!\color@endgroup! or other similar constructs so +% that they are colored without interference with the coloring of the main +% vertical list. +% +% In \env{paracol} environment, however, the orders of the main vertical list +% in |.tex| and |.dvi| are not always same. When a column encounters a page +% break, in |.dvi| the other column should intervene between the stuff in +% the broken pair of \colpage{}s possibly changing the color of the second +% \colpage. A \cswitch{} from $c_1$ to $c_2$ also makes the main vertical +% list out-of-order to cause another unexpected coloring because a coloring +% command in $c_2$ will have no effect when $c_1$ is revisited after that +% following its pre-switching stuff in |.dvi| which was put before the +% coloring. Therefore, we have to make {\em\Uidx\colorctext{}s} in both +% |.tex| and |.dvi| coherent inserting appropriate \!\special!s into |.dvi| +% whenever an out-of-order {\em jump} occurs in |.dvi| by a page break or in +% |.tex| by a \cswitch{}. +% +% The \textsf{color} package and its relatives\footnote{ +%  +% And all other coloring mechanism compliant with \LaTeXe{}, hopefully and +% believingly.} +%  +% assume that {\em printers} have a stack for coloring and thus a coloring +% \!\special! pushes the new color into the stack while it is popped by +% another \!\special! which will be inserted by \!\aftergroup! mechanism +% when a group surrounding the coloring \!\special! is closed. Therefore we +% have to keep track of the \colorctext{} with {\em\Uidx\colorstack} +% $$ +% \Uidx\cst= +% (\Uidx\celt_1,\celt_1,\ldots,\celt_n)= +% \!\vbox!|{|\celt_1\;\celt_2\;\ldots\;\celt_n|}| +% $$ +% where $\celt_i$ is a \!\vbox! of 1\,|sp| tall, 0 deep and 0 wide containing +% a coloring \!\special! which \!\set@color! puts into the main vertical +% list. That is, when \!\set@color! is invoked we push $\celt$ to the tail +% of $\cst$, while when the corresponding \!\reset@color! appears we pop it +% from $\cst$\@. Then when we encounter an out-of-order jump, at first we +% rewind the \colorstack{} in |.dvi| by putting \!\special!s which +% \!\reset@color! would put, and then reestablish the \colorstack{} by +% putting \!\special!s in $\celt_i$ as if \!\set@color! for it is invoked +% for all $\celt_i\in\cst$. Therefore from the viewpoint of a {\em +% printer}, it will see stack-rewinding at the end of each \colpage{} and +% the leaving points of \cswitch{}, while the beginning of each \colpage{} +% and the entry points of \cswitch{} should have the sequence of coloring +% \!\special!s to regain the \colorstack{} which the {\em printer} must have +% at each of the points. +% +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +%  +% In addition, for each column $c$ we keep +% $\Uidx\Celt^c=|\pcol@columncolor@box|\cdot c$ as the {\em default} color +% of the column $c$, optionally given by the API macro \!\columncolor! or +% \!\normalcolumncolor!. If given for $c$, it is assumed to be at the bottom +% of the \colorstack{} denoted by +% $\Uidx\CST^c=(\Celt^c,\celt_1,\ldots,\celt_n)$ which we rewind\slash +% reestablish at each out-of-order jump in the column $c$. +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Coloring in Horizontal Mode} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-color-hmode} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Add the subsection ``Coloring in Horizontal Mode''.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Revise the description of \Sec1.6.2 according to the new +% implementation with \cs{insert}.} +% +% We have to pay attention to the fact a coloring command can appear in +% horizontal mode of course, and thus push/pop operations in a \colpage{} +% would be done {\em before} the \colpage{} starts when \!\set@color! or +% \!\reset@color! is in the second half of a page-crossing paragraph and if +% we immediately performed push\slash pop of the \colorstack{} in these +% macros. In addition, even in vertical mode these macros can appear before +% \TeX{} finds a page break after which they must be in effect, if they are +% preceded by a sequece of non-breakable vertical items by which \TeX{}'s +% examination of the page break is {\em delayed} as well as the invocation +% of \!\output! at the break. +% +% In order to solve the problem of push/pop timing, we perform push\slash +% pop operations through \!\insert! to our own register set +% \!\pcol@colorins!. That is, we \!\insert! $\celt$ to \!\pcol@colorins! +% when we encounter a \!\set@color! for $\celt$, while its corresponding +% \!\reset@color! also \!\insert!s another \!\vbox! $\Uidx\celtpop$ of +% null-height\slash depth\slash width having a \!\special! which the +% \!\reset@color! puts into the main vertical list. Since we let +% $\!\count!\!\pcol@colorins!=0$ and $\!\skip!\!\pcol@colorins!=0$ to keep +% the \!\insert!iion from affecting the growth of \!\pagetotal!, it is +% guaranteed that an inserted $\celt$ or $\celtpop$ is given to \!\output! +% through \!\pcol@colorins! together with |\box255| containing the +% corresponding \!\special!. +% +% When \!\output! is invoked, \!\pcol@colorins! has $\Uidx\cstraw$ +% containing $\celt_i$ and possibly its corresponding $\celtpop_i$. +% Therefore, if \!\output! is for a page break or a \cswitch, we remove all +% pairs of $\celt_i$ and $\celtpop_i$ from \!\pcol@colorins! to let it have +% $\cst$ only with $\celt_j$ whose corresponding $\celt_j^-$ is not in +% $\cstraw$. For this removal, we scan $\cstraw$ from its tail +% incrementing\slash decrementing a counter $\Uidx\npop$ which we initialize +% to 0 before scanning. In the scan, we remove all $\celtpop$ +% unconditionally incrementing $\npop$, and $\celt$ such that $\npop>0$ on +% the encounter with it decrementing $\npop$. This scan is done by +% \!\pcol@clearcolorstack!, invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! for a page break and +% \!\pcol@output@switch! for a \cswitch{} through \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox!, +% and is for rewinding the \colorstack{} +% $(\Celt^c,\cstraw)=\Uidx\CSTraw^c$. Therefore, for each $\celt$ to be kept +% because of $\npop=0$ on the encoutner with it we put \!\special! for +% \!\reset@color!. Note that on another scan for stack reestablishment, +% \!\pcol@colorins! has $\cst$ and is kept unchanged. Also note that other +% \!\output! invocations such as that for floats do not touch $\cstraw$ to +% allow it grows with $\celt$ and $\celtpop$ corresponding to \!\set@color! +% and \!\reset@color! in the \colpage{} in which the invocation +% happens\footnote{ +%  +% Unlike \cs{footins} which becomes void by putting its contents back to the +% main vertical list to reexamine the footnote placement possibly with +% splitting.}. +% +% The mechanism above especially for horizontal mode has subtle issues as +% follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% If \!\set@color! appears in a \!\vbox!, the \!\insert!ion for pushing +% is not effective but corresponding \!\reset@color! can be outside of the +% \!\vbox! to make pushes and pops unbalanced because \!\aftergroup! for it +% inserts it just after the closing of the \!\vbox! if \!\set@color! is not +% surrounded by an inner group. +% +% \item +% If we are in vertical mode, we can know if we are in a \!\vbox! by +% \CSIndex{ifinner}. However, in horizontal or math mode, \CSIndex{ifinner} +% cannot help us because it is true iff we are in a \!\hbox! or in an +% in-text math. In short, \TeX{} does not provide us with any convenient +% means to know if we are in a \!\vbox!. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% To solve the problem above, we introduced a trick with \!\everyvbox! to +% turn a switch $\CSIndex{ifpcol@inner}=\true$ at the beginning of every +% \!\vbox! in a \env{paracol} environment, by which we supress the +% \!\insert!ion for \!\set@color! because a \!\vbox! cannot cross a +% page boundary. As for that of \!\reset@color!, we suppress it by not +% reserving our own macro \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! for the \!\insert!ion by +% \!\aftergroup!. That is, we reserve both \!\reset@color! and +% \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! with \!\aftergroup! if we are outside of any +% \!\vbox!es, while does the former only otherwise. By the same reason, we +% supress the \!\insert!ion if we are in restricted horizontal mode, i.e., +% if both \CSIndex{ifhmode} and \CSIndex{ifinner} are true. On the other +% hand, we cannot supress the \!\insert!ion when we are in an in-text math +% because it can cross a page boundary\footnote{ +%  +% If an in-text math is in a \cs{hbox}, \cs{insert}ion is not +% necessary because the math cannot cross a page boundary. Though we can +% detect it by a trick with \!\everyhbox!, we abandon this idea because the +% request is not harmful. Another and more serious issue of coloring in +% math mode will be discussed shortly.}. +%  +% Note that the detailed implementation shown in \secref{sec:imp-startenv} +% does not interfere the use of \!\everyvbox! inside/outside of +% \env{paracol} environments or is not affected by the use. +% +% Another attention we should pay is that \!\color! will leave \!\aftergroup! +% tokens of \!\reset@color! and thus they are invoked just after +% \Endparacol. However, since we have completed all \colpage{}s in the +% \lpage, the \colorstack{} in |.dvi| should be empty. Therefore to avoid +% stack underflow, we should reestablish $\cst$ (not $\CST^c$) so that +% elements in the stack are popped by \!\reset@color! invoked with the +% \!\aftergroup! mechanism. We also take care of our own \colorstack{} +% popper \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! which must do nothing, i.e., must not make +% an \!\insert!ion, after we completed the \lpage, i.e., if +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@output} is $\false$. +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Changing Default Column Color} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-color-colcolor} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Split the description of \cs{columncolor} from \Sec1.6.2 to have +% new \Sec1.6.3 ``Changing Default Column Color'' because we have +% serveral new issues in the new implementation with \cs{insert}.} +% +% The implemntation of \!\columncolor! and \!\normalcolumncolor! is +% relatively easy for the cases that they appear outside +% \env{paracol} environment or they define the default color of a +% column different from the current column. That is, for the default color +% of a column $c$ we simply \!\def!ine +% ${\Uidx\Celtshadow}^c=|pcol@columncolor|\cdot c$ to let it have what +% \!\current@color! has for the color. Then, in \beginparacol{} in the +% former case or immediately in the latter, we let +% $\Celt^c=|pcol@coloumncolor@box|\cdot c$ have the coloring \!\special! for +% the color acquiring an \!\insert! from \!\@freelist! if the box is +% $\bot$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +% +% On the other hand, when the API commands are to define the default color +% of the current column $c$, we need to place the coloring at the bottom of +% \colorstack{}s in terms of |.tex| and |.dvi|. That is, for the former we +% have to rewind and reestablish the stack which can be different from +% $\CST^c$ because the API command can follow a page break which \TeX{} does +% not yet find. Therefore, we maintain a {\em shadow} of $\cst$ namely; +% $$ +% {\Uidx\cstshadow}={\Midx{\!\pcol@colorstack@shadow!}} +% =({\Uidx\celtshadow}_1,\celtshadow_2,\ldots,\celtshadow_n) +% =\!\@elt!\Arg{\celtshadow_1}\;\!\@elt!\Arg{\celtshadow_2}\;\cdots\; +% \!\@elt!\Arg{\celtshadow_n} +% $$ +% to which our version of \!\set@color! pushes $\celtshadow_i$ being +% \!\current@color! which the original one defines, while popping is done +% automatically by \TeX's grouping mechanism because pushes are done by +% \!\edef! rather than \!\xdef!. Then before we \!\def!ine $\Celtshadow^c$ +% we rewind +% ${\Uidx\CSTshadow}^c=(\Celtshadow^c,\celtshadow_1,\ldots,\celtshadow_n)$ +% putting \!\special! for pop to the main vertical list for each elements, +% and then after the \!\def!initon of $\Celtshadow^c$ we reestablish +% $\CSTshadow^c$ putting coloring \!\special! for each element. +% +% As for placing $\Celt^c$ at the bottom of $\CST^c$, we must ensure that +% the placement is done for the \colpage{} in which the API command +% belongs to, as we did in ordinary push\slash pop of the \colorstack. +% Therefore the API command \!\insert!s $\Celt^c$ to $\cstraw$ in the form +% of a \!\vbox!, whose height and depth are 1\,|sp| and width is 0, +% containing the coloring \!\special! for $\Celt^c$. Then when $\cstraw$ is +% scanned for rewinding in \!\output!, this \!\vbox! is found to let +% $\Celt^c$ have the \!\special! acquiring an \!\insert! from \!\@freelist! +% it was $\bot$. Note that $\cstraw$ may have multiple \!\vbox!es to update +% $\Celt^c$ and if so the last one is effective. +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Coloring in Math Mode} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-color-mmode} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {Add the subsection ``Coloring in Math Mode''.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Revise the description of \Sec1.6.4 according to the new +% implementation with \cs{insert}.} +% +% Unfortunately the solution above is imperfect because \TeX{} builds an +% implicit \!\hbox! for a |{|\textit{math stuff}|}| construct in math mode +% and an \!\insert! in the construct does not contribute to +% the main vertical list at all\footnote{ +%  +% The contents is not thrown away but \cs{insert}ion itself is added +% to the list rather than given to \cs{output}.}. +%  +% Since the implicit \!\hbox! does not care about \!\everyhbox!, we cannot +% use the trick similar to that with \!\everyvbox!. Another bad news is +% that built-in \cs{if}s for mode checking cannot help us because we always +% have $\CSIndex{ifvmode}=\CSIndex{ifhmode}=\false$ and +% $\CSIndex{ifmmode}=\true$ while $\CSIndex{ifinner}$ is $\true$ or $\false$ +% when we are in in-text or displayed math mode respectively. Therefore, we +% have to take care of the potential loss of \!\insert!ion for pushes and +% thus unmatched pops in $\cstraw$. +% +% For example, we have to remember that, in the cases like +% |${|\!\color!$\Arg{c}\textit{text}$|}$| or +% |$|\!\textcolor!$\~\Arg{c}\ARg{text}$|$| expanded to the former, the +% \!\insert!ion for push is lost while its counterpart for pop survives +% making it necessary to check the existance of pushing counterpart for each +% pop in $\cstraw$\footnote{ +%  +% Since a pop is always in a group one level outer from its push +% counterpart, the pop request should be presented if the push does.}. +%  +% Note that the fact that the pop in the examples is in the in-text math +% does not help us, because the pop in +% |$|\!\begingroup!\!\color!\Arg{c}\textit{text}\!\endgroup!|$| is also in +% the in-text math while its pushing counterpart performs an effective +% \!\insert!ion, and two \!\insert!ions must be presented in $\cstraw$ +% because we can have a page-break in \textit{text}. Therefore, we have to +% find a means to examine whether a pop $\celtpop_i$ has its counterpart +% $\celt_i$ in $\cstraw$ to remove $\celt_i$ from $\cstraw$ if exists or to +% igonore $\celtpop_i$ otherwise. That is, we have to attach an identifier +% $m$ to $\celt_i$ and $\celtpop_i$, i.e., to make them $\Uidx\mcelt_{i,m}$ +% and $\Uidx\mceltpop_{i,m}$. +% +% Since the only means we have for the communication with \!\output! routine +% is what we \!\insert! to $\cstraw$, the \!\insert!ed \!\vbox! must carry an +% identifier $m$ for a push\slash pop in math mode. To do that, we make +% \!\vbox! $m$\,|sp| wide ($m>0$) if our version of \!\set@color! is in math +% mode to represent $\mcelt_{i,m}$ and $\mceltpop_{i,m}$, while the width is +% 0 otherwise as described in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-color-hmode}. Then in the +% scan of $\cstraw$ for rewinding in \!\output!, we supress +% incrementing\slash decrementing $\npop$ for $\mcelt_{i,m}$ and +% $\mceltpop_{i,m}$, but remove $\mcelt_{i,m}$ if $\mceltpop_{i,m}$ is in +% $\cstraw$ as a successor while we keep it in $\cstraw$ otherwise putting a +% \!\special! of pop for it to the main vertical list. +% +% To ensure that $\mcelt_{i,m}$ has its counterpart $\mceltpop_{i,m}$ in +% $\cstraw$ iff the push and pop are in a \colpage, we maintain the counter +% \!\pcol@mcid! incremented before (the attempt of) the \!\insert!ion of +% $\mcelt_{i,m}$ with $m=\!\pcol@mcid!$ and the \!\aftergroup! reservaion +% for that of $\mceltpop_{i,m}$. Then the counter is zero-cleared by +% \!\output! routine in order to keep it less than +% $\!\pcol@mcpushlimit!=1000$ unless, roughly speaking, a \colpage{} has a +% unexpectedly large number of math constructs having coloring commands in +% them. Note that this zero-clearing does not ensure that an identifier $m$ +% is unique in $\cstraw$. That is, it can happen that $\cstraw$ has +% $\mcelt_{i,m}$, $\mceltpop_{i,m}$, $\mcelt_{j,m}$ and/or $\mceltpop_{j,m}$ +% in this order for $i0\;\land\;$non-\lpage\cr +% 0&otherwise}\\[1ex] +% d_s&=&\cases{H_{n+1}-(H_n+h_n)+\!\maxdepth!& +% $i=n\;\land\;H'_{n+1}=0\;\land\;$non-\lpage\cr +% 0&otherwise} +% \end{eqnarray*} +% \endgroup +%  +% In the specifications above, $\w_c$ and $\Uidx\gap_c$ is the width of the +% column $c$ and that of the \csepgap{} following it, defined by +% \!\columnratio! or \!\setcolumnwidth! and stored in +% $|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ and $|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$ +% respectively. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% The additions of $d_{c/g}$ and $d_s$ are to extend the bottom edge of each +% region down to the bottom of text area. In addition, for each +% $\bgr_a^{[c]}=[(x_0,y_0)(x_1,y_1)]$, {\em\Uidx\bgext}s +% $\Uidx{\bge}_a^{[c]}(\{x,y\}^\pm)$ can be specified to shift the base +% points $x_0$, $y_0$, $x_1$ and $y_1$ left ($x^-$), right ($x^+$), upward +% ($y^-$) and downward ($y^+$) respectively. That is, a region is defined +% as; +% $$ +% \bgr_a^{[c]}=[(x_0-\bge_a^{[c]}(x^-),\;y_0-\bge_a^{[c]}(y^-))\; +% (x_1+\bge_a^{[c]}(x^+),\;y_1+\bge_a^{[c]}(y^+))] +% $$ +% \begingroup\par\hfuzz0.9pt\noindent +% with the optional shifts specified by the first argument of +% \!\backgroundcolor! as +% \Arg{\hbox{\ttfamily\itshape{a}}\oarg{c}$|(|x^\pm|,|y^\pm|)|$} (for both +% $x^-$/$y^-$ and $x^+$/$y^+$) or \Arg{\hbox{\ttfamily\itshape +% a}\oarg{c}$|(|x^-|,|y^-|)||(|x^+|,|y^+|)|$} and kept in macros +% $|\pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}\~d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}a[{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c]$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex +% {d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c} +% {\pcol@bg@ext@} +%  +% where $d\in\{|l|,|r|,|t|,|b|\}$ for $x^-$ (|l|), $x^+$ (|r|), $y^-$ (|t|) +% and $y^+$ (|b|). Note that $\bge_a^{[c]}(\{x,y\}^\pm)$ can be extremely +% large, namely greater than or equal to 9000pt, to mean the region is +% extended to a border near by the corresponding paper edge. More +% specifically, by this {\em\Uidx\bginfext}, each $xy$ coordinate in +% $[(x_0,y_0)(x_1,y_1)]$ is defined as follows to represent a coordinate +% being $10000\PT-\bge_a^{[c]}(\{x,y\}^\pm)+\!\pagerim!$ inside from the page +% edge; +% \par\endgroup +%  +% \begingroup \def\feven{f_{\mathit{even}}} +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% x_0&=&-\WM+(10000\PT-\bge_a^{[c]}(x^-)+\WR)\\ +% y_0&=&-(\HS+\HM)+(10000\PT-\bge_a^{[c]}(y^-)+\HR)\\ +% x_1&=&(\WP-\WM)-(10000\PT-\bge_a^{[c]}(x^+)+\WR)\\ +% y_1&=&(\HP-\HS-\HM)-(10000\PT-\bge_a^{[c]}(y^+)+\HR)\\ +% \Uidx\WP&=&\!\paperwidth!\\ +% \Uidx\WM&=&1|in|+\cases{\!\oddsidemargin!&$\lnot\feven$\cr +% \!\evensidemargin!&$\feven$}\\ +% \Uidx\WR&=&\Uidx\HR=\!\pagerim!\\ +% \Uidx\HP&=&\!\paperheight!\\ +% \Uidx\HM&=&\!\headsep!+\!\headheight!+\!\topmargin!+1|in|\\ +% \Uidx\HS&=&\mathit{height}(\pp^b(p))+\mathit{depth}(\pp^b(p)) +% \end{eqnarray*} +% \endgroup +%  +% where $f_{\mathit{even}}$ is $\true$ iff we are in an even numbered page +% and two-sided typesetting is specified by the optional argument of +% \!\documentclass! or by the specifier `|p|' of \!\twosided! explicitly or +% implicitly. +% +% Another remark is that \cswap{} affects $\bgr_c^c(i)$ and $\bgr_s^c(i)$ to +% {\em\Uidx\mirror} the region making a reflection-symmetric transformation +% on it using a vertical edge of a page as the axis. That is, +% $[(x_0,y_0)(x_1,y_1)]$ for a region is transformed to +% $[(\WT-x_1,y_0)(\WT-x_0,y_1)]$ if $x_{\{0,1\}}$ is not extended infinitely. +% With \bginfext{} on the other hand, before this transformation $x_0$ and/or +% $x_1$ are calculated by the rule above replacing $\WM$ with +% $\WP-(\WM+\WT)$ to represent the width of the right margin rather than the +% left. +% +% On the other hand, the \mirror{}ing of $\bgr_{\{s,S\}}$ is enabled by the +% specifier `|b|' of \!\twosided!, together with other regions being top +% margin ($t,T$), bottom margin ($b,B$), left margin ($l,L$), right margin +% ($r,R$), \pwise{} floats ($f,F$) and \scfnote{} footnotes ($n,N$). The +% geometical specifications $\bgr_a$ for those regions are given as follows, +% but the coordinate origin is at the top-left corner of text area (rather +% than the leftmost column). +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \bgr_{\{t,T\}}&=&[(-\WM+\WR,\;-\HM+\HR),\;(\WP-\WM-\WR,\;0)]\\ +% \bgr_{\{b,B\}}&=&[(-\WM+\WR,\;\HT-\HM),\;(\WP-\WM-\WR,\;\HP-\HM-\HR)]\\ +% \bgr_{\{l,L\}}&=&[(-\WM+\WR,\;0),\;(0,\HT)]\\ +% \bgr_{\{r,R\}}&=&[(\WT,\;0),\;(\WP-\WM-\WR,\;\HT)]\\ +% \bgr_{\{f,F\}}&=&[(0.\;0),\;(\WT,\;\HS)]\\ +% \bgr_{\{n,N\}}&=&[(0,\;\HT-\HN)\;(\WT,\;\HT)]\\ +% \Uidx\HT&=&\!\textheight!+\!\maxdepth!\\ +% \Uidx\HN&=&\!\skip!\!\footins!+\!\ht!\!\footins!+\!\dp!\!\footins! +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% Note that, since we use text area coordinates, in the calculation of +% \bginfext{} $\HS$ is let be 0. +% +% We have other regions for columns and \csepgap{}s, namely $\bgr_C^c$ and +% $\bgr_G^c$, which vertically span all over text area regardless exsistance +% of any \pwstuff. Therefore, their geometical specifications are as +% follows with text area coordinates. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \bgr_C^c&=&[(\W_{c-1},\;0),\:(\W_{c-1}+w_c,\;\HT)]\\ +% \bgr_G^c&=&[(\W_{c-1}+w_c,\:0),\;(\W_c,\;\HT)] +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% In addition, we have to paint \preenv{} and \postenv{} with color +% $\bgc_{\{p,P\}}$. The region $\bgr_{\{p,P\}}$ for them is defined as +% follows with text area coordinates where $\Uidx\HB$ is the $y$-coordinate +% of the bottom of previous \env{paracol} environment if any, or 0 +% otherwise. +% $$ +% \bgr_{\{p,P\}}=\cases{ +% [(0,\;\HB)\;(\WT,\;\HS)]& \preenv\cr +% [(0,\;\HB)\;(\WT,\;\HT)]& \postenv} +% $$ +% Note that paiting of \postenv{} is done {\em outside} \env{paracol} +% environment when the \postenv{} encounters a page break, unless another +% \env{paracol} environment starts in the page and thus the \postenv{} +% becomes \preenv{} of the second (or subsequent) environment. +% +% Finally, we define the order of \bgpaint{} as follows, where $a$, $a(i)$, +% $a^c$ and $a^c(i)$ mean $\bgr_a$, $\bgr_a(i)$, $\bgr_a^c$ and +% $\bgr_a^c(i)$ respectively, so that a succeding region is {\em overlaid} +% on preceding regions. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% T&\to&B\to L\to R\\ +% &\to&G^0\to\cdots\to G^{\C-2}\to C^0\to\cdots\to C^{\C-1}\\ +% &\to&t\to b\to l\to r\to N\to n\to\{F,P\}\to\{f,p\}\footnotemark\\ +% &\to&S(1)\to\cdots\to\S(n)\\ +% &\to&g^0(1)\to\cdots\to g^{\C-2}(1)\to c^0(1)\to\cdots\to c^{\C-1}(1)\to +% s(1)\\ +% &\to&\cdots\\ +% &\to&g^0(n)\to\cdots\to g^{\C-2}(n)\to c^0(n)\to\cdots\to c^{\C-1}(n)\to +% s(n)\\ +% &\to&g^0(n{+}1)\to\cdots\to g^{\C-2}(n{+}1) +% \to c^0(n{+}1)\to\cdots\to c^{\C-1}(n{+}1) +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% \footnotetext{In column flushing, the order is $\{F,P\}\to\{f,p\}\to N\to +% n$ but this reversion should have no effect (almost always).} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Page-wise Float Placement} +% \label{sec:imp-ovv-float} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add the section ``Page-wise Float Placement'' to discuss the +% page-wise float problem.} +% +% In the release on 2015/01/10, \LaTeX{}'s float placement mechanism was +% drastically changed to avoid {\em out-of-order\/} appearance of \pwise{} +% floats as follows. Since the cause of overtaking of a \pwise{} float by a +% \cwise{} float is that they are in two separated lists \!\@dbldeferlist! +% for the former and \!\@deferlist! for the latter, in the new implemenation +% the two lists are merged to let all floats go to \!\@deferlist!. To +% distinguish \pwise{} and \cwise{} floats in the list, \!\end@dblfloat! +% lets the \pwise{} float processed by the macro have a special depth of +% |1sp|, while depth of \cwise{} floats are 0 since \!\@endfloatbox! add a +% \!\vskip! of 0 at the end of the box of floats. +% +% Then all float placement macros invoked in \!\output!-routine examine the +% depth of floats in the list they are working on against a newly introduced +% macro \!\f@depth! by also newly introduced \!\@testwrongwidth!, so that +% they process only floats of a page/column category specified by +% \!\f@depth!, while those not matching to \!\f@depth! are let go to +% \!\@deferlist! to inhibit succeeding floats of the same type from +% overtaking them. The \!\def!inition of \!\f@depth! is done only by +% modified \!\@dblfloatplacement!, always invoked in a group, to let it have +% |1sp| so that float placement macros usually work on \cwise{} ones with +% the default setting of $\!\f@depth!=\!\z@!$ except for special occasions +% in which the placement of \pwise{} floats is tried. +% +% Though the mechanism should work well with {\em ordinary\/} multi-columned +% documents, it is incompatible with \Paracol{} almost inherently. That is, +% in the first place we have to separate float-related lists into the sets +% of them corresponding to columns as we do\footnote{ +%  +% If counters \counter{figure} and \counter{table} are global and we have to +% avoid inter-column overtaking with respect to, for example, the partial +% ordering rooted by the top-left corner, merging \cwise{} lists together +% with the merge of \cs{@deferlist} and \cs{@dbldeferlist} might be a +% solution to let the depth of a \cwise{} float be $c\,\texttt{sp}$ while +% that of \pwise{} is $\C$\,\texttt{sp}. However such implementation is not +% only tough but also doubtful to be worthwhile.}. +%  +% Therefore, it is obviously nonsense to merge the list for \pwise{} floats, +% i.e., \!\@dbldeferlist!, to \!\@deferlist! of a particular column, and +% thus we have to stick with the conventional implementation to process +% \pwise{} and \cwise{} floats separately as follows. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumi{(\arabic{enumi})} +% \item +% \label{item:ovv-float-end@dblfloat} +% We \!\def!ine our own \!\end@dblfloat! namely \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! +% whose definition is exactly same as the old version of \!\end@dblfloat!, +% and replace the new version with it by \!\let!ting them equivalent in +% \!\pcol@zparacol! by which start \env{paracol} environments. Therefore, +% \pwise{} floats composed in a \env{paracol} environment is processed in +% the traditional way, i.e., being inclueded in \!\@dbldeferlist! rather than +% \!\@deferlist! and having ordinary depth 0. +% +% \item +% \label{item:ovv-float-@dblfloatplacement} +% Each invocation of \!\@dblfloatplacement! in our own \!\output!-routine is +% followed by a \!\let! to nullify the setting of $\!\f@depth!=|1sp|$ done +% by \!\@dblfloatplacement! by doing \!\f@depth!=\!\z@!. By this setting, +% \!\@tryfcolumn! in \!\pcol@startpage! and \!\@makefcolumn! in +% \!\pcol@output@clear! work on their argument \!\@dbldeferlist! in the way +% exactly same as in 2014 or before. +% +% \item +% \label{item:ovv-float-@addtodblcol} +% Among \LaTeX's macros in its \!\output!-routine which we use in our own +% one as well, only \!\@addtodblcol! changed its target from +% \!\@dbldeferlist! to \!\@deferlist!. That is, if the macro fails to put a +% \pwise{} float to the page we just have started by \!\pcol@startpage!, +% the float is added to \!\@deferlist! rather than \!\@dbldeferlist!. +% Therefore, when we apply \!\@sdblcolelt! to the copy of \!\@dbldeferlist! +% to invoke \!\@addtodblcol! for each of its element float, we have to save +% \!\@deferlist! somewhere, to \!\reserved@c! in reality, and clear it prior +% to the application. Then after all elements are processed, we have to let +% \!\@dbldeferlist! have what \!\@deferlist! have, while \!\@deferlist! +% should regain its origial contents from the saved place. A subtle issue +% is that we might work with \LaTeX{} of 2014 or older in which the floats +% are returned to \!\@dbldeferlist!. Therefore to make \Paracol{} +% compatible with both of new and old versions, we have to {\em add} +% \!\@deferlist! to \!\@dbldeferlist! rather than replacing +% \!\@dbldeferlist! with \!\@deferlist!. This addition should work well, +% because we clear both lists before the application of \!\@sdblcolelt! and +% then one of them will have the still-deferred floats after the application +% while the other remains empty. +% +% \item +% \label{item:ovv-float-@output@start} +% We convert \!\@deferlist! to \!\@dbldeferlist! in \!\pcol@output@start! to +% start a \env{paracol} environment, and perform the reverse operation in +% \!\pcol@output@end! to close the environment. Though it is very unlikely +% (or maybe impossible) that the \!\@deferlist! {\em imported\/} in the +% former operation has \LaTeX's (i.e., not \Paracol's) double-column floats +% of |1sp| deep, we make such floats old-fashioned making their depth 0 so +% that they can be put in a page built in the \env{paracol} environment. On +% the other hand, the latter cannot {\em export\/} a list having floats of +% |1sp| deep because they have been produced in the closing \env{paracol} +% environment or have passed our {\em custom\/} \!\pcol@output@start! when +% they were imported\footnote{ +%  +% Therefore, if one try to {\em smuggle\/} a double-column float of the new +% scheme into a \env{paracol} and to pass it through the environment to +% another double-column world, the float will become a single-column one. +% Even if such guy a really exists and complains abount this transformation, +% however, we have good right to say ``don't do that''.}. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% Note that the operations (1), (2) and (4) are fully compatible with 2014 +% or older version of \LaTeX{}, because with the old version; (1) +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! is equivalent to \!\end@dblfloat!; (2) modification +% of \!\f@depth! cannot be seen because it does not exist; and (4) we +% virtually do nothing in the importation. As for (3), we explicitly take +% care of the compatibility as shown above. +% +% +% +% \section{Interaction with \TeX{} and \LaTeX{}} +% \label{sec:imp-tex} +% +% The macros of \Paracol{} interacts with \TeX{} and \LaTeX{} through +% various registers and macros as discussed in this section. +% +% \subsection{Registers} +% \label{sec:imp-tex-reg} +% +% \subsubsection{Insertion Registers} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footins!}] +% is used to \!\insert! footnotes through it by \!\footnote! and +% \!\footnotetext!, and then in \!\output! routine the footnotes +% \!\insert!ed in a page is presented in the register. The register is +% referred to by the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! examines if the register has \Scfnote{}s and, if so, +% saves it into $\pp^f(p)$ if $p=\ptop$ or discards it otherwise. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startcolumn! \!\insert!s $\pp^f(p)$ into the \colpage{} to be +% created through the register. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! logs the contents of the register for debugging. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! examines if the register has footnotes to be merged +% with those in \env{paracol} environment, refers to its height plus depth to +% calculate effective \!\@colht!, and/or \!\insert!s its contents through +% itself to the main vertical list as the first part of \Mgfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! combines footnotes in the register to other +% \preenv{} to make a \spanning, or makes save\slash restore of the register +% to/from \!\@tempboxa! to exclude footnotes from \spanning{} when +% \mgfnote{}-footnote typesetting is specified. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@switch! saves the register into $\pp^f(p)$ or $\cc_c(\ft)$, +% or discards its contents, when we leave from the column $c$ with footnotes. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! restores $\cc_d(\ft)$ or $\pp^f(p)$ to the register +% and then \!\insert!s the contents of \!\box!\!\footins! into itself so +% that it contributes to the main vertical list to be rebuilt for the column +% $d$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! for column $d$ lets the register have $\cc_d(\ft)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@savefootins! saves the register into an \!\insert! for $\pp^f(p)$ +% or $\cc_c(\ft)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins! refers the \!\skip! component of the register to +% have the vertical skip above \Scfnote{}s and \!\insert!s deferred +% footnotes through the register. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@end! \!\insert!s $\pp^f(p)$ into the \lpage{} through the +% register. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntexttop!\marg{text} \!\insert!s the footnote $\arg{text}$ and a +% penalty through the register. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text} refers to the \!\skip! component of the +% register to cap the height of the footnote $\arg{text}$. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\rm\Uidx{\!\bx@A!}, \ldots, \Uidx{\!\bx@R!}] +% have floats created by \!\@xfloat! in the ordinary usage of {\em +% fundamental\/} \LaTeX{} of 2014 or earlier or that without the extension +% of e-\TeX{} or its relatives. On the other hand, in \LaTeX{} of 2015 or +% later and with e-\TeX{} or its relatives, the set is \!\bx@A!, \ldots, +% \Uidx{\!\bx@Z!}, \Uidx{\!\bx@AA!}, \ldots, \Uidx{\!\bx@ZZ!}\@. In addtion +% to the use in \LaTeX, we use these registers for completed \colpage{}s +% $s_c(p)$ (\!\pcol@opcol!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn!), main vertical list +% $\cc_c(\vb)$ (\!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!) and \Mcfnote{}s $\cc_c(\ft)$ +% (\!\pcol@output@switch!) in \ccolpage{}s, \spanning{} including \preenv{} +% $\pp^i(p)$ (\!\pcol@startpage!, \!\pcol@output@start!) and \Scfnote{}s +% $\pp^f(p)$ (\!\pcol@makecol!, \!\pcol@output@switch!) in pages, +% \mvlfloat{}s for main vertical lists in \sync{}ed pages +% (\!\pcol@synccolumn!), and \pwise{} floats deferred from \env{paracol} to +% \postenv{} (\!\pcol@output@end!). +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Integer Registers} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\!\deadcycles!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to count the number of \!\output! requests +% made between two \!\shipout! operatios. It is zero-cleared by +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput! because it can have a large number in a +% \env{paracol} environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\outputpenalty!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the page-break penalty with which +% \!\output! routine is invoked. It is referred to by \!\pcol@output! to +% know whether it has special code less than $-10000$, and by +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! in detail for the dispatch according to the code. +% The register is also used for the communication from the latter, which lets +% it be $-10000$ for our own special \!\output! routines, to the former to +% determine \!\vsize! according to if the register has a value greater than +% $-10004$ or not. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\interlinepenalty!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the page-break penalty inserted +% between two lines. The register is referred to in the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! to make \Preenv{} \Mgfnote{}s followed by this +% \!\penalty! on the \!\insert!ion, and to insert it to start the first +% \colpage{} allowing page-break before the start unless it is inhibited +% by $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! to insert this \!\penalty! to resume a \colpage{} +% allowing page-break if $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\false$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins! to let the secnod half of split $\df$ have this +% \!\penalty! as the very first element. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntexttop!\marg{text} to make the footnote $\arg{text}$ followed +% by this \!\penalty! on the \!\insert!ion. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntextother!\marg{text} to make the footnote $\arg{text}$ preceded +% by this \!\penalty! in $\df$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! to let the register have \!\interfootnotelinepenalty!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\floatingpenalty!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the page-break penalty added to +% \!\insertpenalties! if an \!\insert! is moved to the page next to the page +% in which the line having the \!\insert! resides. It is let have 20000 in +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! for footnote typesetting. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\vbadness!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the threshold of the badness of +% \!\vbox! construction with underfull messages. That is, if the badness +% exceeds the threshold on a \!\vbox! construction, \TeX{} will complain +% showing an underfull message. In \!\pcol@makenormalcol! and +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins!, the register is temporarily let have 10000 to +% avoid that \!\@makecol! invoked in the former and \!\vsplit! done in the +% latter causes the message with inevitable underfull. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\showboxdepth!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to determine the maximum depth of box +% structure to be shown in logging etc. The register is let have 10000 in +% \!\pcol@ShowBox! for full logging. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\showboxbreadth!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to determine the maximum breadth of box +% structure to be shown in logging etc. The register is let have 10000 in +% \!\pcol@ShowBox! for full logging. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\interfootnotelinepenalty!}] +% is an API \!\count! register to have \!\interlinepenalty! for footnotes. +% It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to let \!\interlinepenalty! have it. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@ne!}] +% is a \!\chardef! register to have 1. The register is referred to by the +% following macros mainly for incrementing another register. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@F@count!, +% \!\pcol@output!, +% \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@setpnoelt!, +% \!\pcol@nextpage!, +% \!\pcol@nextpelt!, +% \!\pcol@startpage!, +% \!\pcol@checkshipped!, +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\@outputpage!, +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, +% \!\pcol@iscancst!, +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn!, +% \!\pcol@synccolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats!, +% \!\pcol@freshpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput!, +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@scan!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcf!, +% \!\pcol@synccounter!, +% \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, +% \!\pcol@stepcounter!, +% \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@sptext!, +% \!\pcol@visitallcols!, +% \!\pcol@ifootnote!, +% \!\pcol@ifootnotemark!. +% \!\pcol@swapcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@set@color@push!, +% \end{quote} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\tw@!}] +% is a \!\chardef! register to have 2. It is used in \!\pcol@setcurrcol! to +% let $\cc_c(\sw)=2$ when $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$ but +% $\CSIndex{if@afterindent}=\false$, in +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ to calculate $x\cdot2^k$, $y/2^k$ +% and $(x/y)\cdot2^k$ with various $k$, and in \!\pcol@swapcolumn! to +% calculate $\Cto-(c'-\Cfrom)-2=c-1=c^g$ for the \csepgap{} ordinal $c^g$ +% physically following the column $c$ at the position $c'$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\m@ne!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have $-1$. It is used in the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@setpnoelt!, \!\pcol@nextpelt!, \!\pcol@getpelt! and +% \!\pcol@setmpbelt! to decrement +% \!\@tempcnta! which initially has $p-\pbase$ for a page $p$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! to decrement $\CBto$ by one locally to have the column +% scanning range $\LBRP\CBfrom{\CBto{-}1}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@iscancst! to decrement $\npop$ by one. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i! to let \!\@tempcnta! have it to indicate left margin. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! to calculate $\Cto-\Cfrom-1$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ in \!\@whilenum! loops to +% calculate $z'/2^k$ and $z'/2{k-16}$ where $z'/2^k\approx x/y$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@iadjustfnctr! to decrement \!\c@footnote!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\sixt@@n!}] +% is a \!\chardef! register to have 16. It is used in +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ to calculate +% $Z=z\times1\,|pt|=z'\cdot2^{16-k}$ where $z'/2^k\approx x/y$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@m!}] +% is a \!\mathchardef! register to have 1000. It is used in +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! and \!\pcol@output@end! to let +% $\!\prevdepth!=1000\,|pt|$ on a \sync{}ation or the closing \env{paracol} +% environment with an empty main vertical list, and in +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! to add 1000\,|pt| to strech and shrink +% compontents of \!\@tempskipa! having a column\slash gap sepcification to +% make it sure the skip register has those components. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@M!}] +% is a \!\mathchardef! register to have 10000. It is used in the following +% macros +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@ShowBox! to let \!\showboxdepth! and \!\showboxbreadth! have +% 10000 for full logging of a box. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output! to examine if $\!\outputpenalty!<-10000$ to mean a special +% \!\output! request. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! to let $\!\outputpenalty!=-10000$ to tell +% \!\pcol@output! that the special \!\output! request is our own. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! and \!\pcol@deferredfootins! to let \!\vbadness! +% have 10000 temporarily to avoid underfull messages. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! to bias \!\pcol@textfloatsep! by 10000\,|pt| to +% indicate a \colpage{} has an \mvlfloat{} and in \!\pcol@cflt! and +% \!\pcol@addflhd! to remove the bias. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@switchcol! and \!\pcol@flushclear! to put \!\penalty!|-10000| for +% forced page break. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ to let $Z=z\times1\,|pt|=10000\,|pt|$ +% if $x/y$ is too large. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@Mii!}] +% is a \!\mathchardef! register to have 10002. It is used in +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! to examine if $\!\@floatpenalty!=-10002$ to mean the +% float environment to be closed is given in horizontal mode. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@Miv!}] +% is a \!\mathchardef! register to have 10004. It is used in \!\pcol@output! +% to examine if $\!\outputpenalty!=-10004$ for a dummy \!\output! request +% made by \LaTeX's float-related macros and our \!\pcol@invokeoutput! to +% ensure the real request is not eliminated when it is made at the very +% beginning of a page or a \colpage. It is also used in +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! for footnote logging when +% $\!\outputpenalty!=-10004$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@MM!}] +% is a \!\mathchardef! register to have 20000. It is used in +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! to let \!\floatingpenalty! have it for footnote +% typesetting. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@beginparpenalty!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have the page-break penalty inserted before the +% first \!\item! of each \env{list}-like environment. The penalty is +% determined in class files and is, for example, $-\!\@lowpenalty!=-51$ with +% \textsf{article.cls}. It is referred to and inserted by \!\pcol@zparacol! +% when it finds the \env{paracol} environment to start is at the very +% beginning of a \env{list}-like environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@floatpenalty!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have the penalty code -10002 or -10003 given by +% \!\@xfloat! at the beginning of a float environment according to the +% environment is in horizontal or vertical mode respectively, or by +% \!\marginpar! for a marginal note in the same meaning. It is +% referred to by \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! to insert the penalty, and by +% \!\pcol@xympar! to confirm \!\marginpar! is error free. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@topnum!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have the maximum number of top floats which the +% \ccolpage{} can accept further. It is used in \!\pcol@setcurrcol! +% and \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol! to save\slash restore it into\slash from +% $\cc_c(\tn)$. The macro \!\pcol@synccolumn! also lets $\!\@topnum!=0$ to +% inhibit top-float insertions in the \ccolpage{} any more after a +% \sync{}ation. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@botnum!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have the maximum number of bottom floats which +% the \ccolpage{} can accept further. It is used in \!\pcol@setcurrcol! +% and \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol! to save\slash restore it into\slash from +% $\cc_c(\bn)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@colnum!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have the maximum total number of floats which +% the \ccolpage{} can accept further. It is used in \!\pcol@setcurrcol! +% and \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol! to save\slash restore it into\slash from +% $\cc_c(\cn)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\col@number!}] +% is a \!\count! register to have the number of columns. It is let have 1 +% by \!\pcol@zparacol! and \!\pcol@sptext! regardless the real number of +% columns $\C$ in order to keep \!\maketitle! from putting the title by +% \!\twocolumn!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\c@page!}] +% is \LaTeX's counter \Uidx{\counter{page}} being a \!\count! register to +% have the page number. It is referred to by \!\pcol@setpnoelt!, and +% \!\pcol@output@start! to let $\pp^p(p)=\page(p)$. The macro +% \!\pcol@startpage! reload the register from $\pp^p(\ptop{-}1)$ and then +% increment it by one usually but two in \npaired{} \parapag{}ing, and +% repeat $\pp^p(\ptop)=\page(\ptop)$ and incrementing $\page(p)$ for each +% \fpage{}s of \pwise{} floats. Reloading $\page(p)$ to the register from +% $\pp^p(p)$ is also done by \!\pcol@getpelt! for macros using +% \!\pcol@getcurrpage!, and by \!\pcol@outputelt!, \!\pcol@sync! and +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo!. Then the register is +% referred to by the following macros to exmine its parity. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% Our own \!\@outputpage! to give $\page(p)$ or $\page(p)+1$ to +% \!\pcol@outputpage@l! and \!\pcol@outputpage@r! which finally let the +% register have the value to be referred to by \!\pcol@@outputpage! being +% \LaTeX's \!\@outputpage!. +% +% \item +% \begin{Sloppy}{2800}% +% \!\pcol@bg@swappage! to determine the values of \!\pcol@bg@leftmargin! +% and \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@@swap} with other factors. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@shiftspanning! to decide the necessity of shifting \mctext{} left +% with \cswap{}, examining {\em raw} \!\c@page! at the \!\output! request to +% close the \mctext{} rather than $\pp^p(\ptop)$ which will have the correct +% value with respect to possible jump {\em after} the macro completes its +% work. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to determine the margin to which a marginal note +% goes. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i! to determine which of $\mpb_L^l$ or $\mpb_L^r$ is the +% target of the operation specified by \!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem!. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@swapcolumn!\\\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>$ to determine $c_2$ +% for $c_1$ if \cswap{} is in effect. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% In addition, to do the parity examination in \!\pcol@bg@swappage! above +% correctly, the macros \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, \!\pcol@iflushfloats! and \!\pcol@output@end! +% temporarily increment the register by one when they are working on a right +% \npaired{} \parapag{}e. +% +% The other users are \!\localcounter!\marg{ctr} to check +% $\arg{ctr}\neq\counter{page}$, \!\pcol@remctrelt! to let +% $|\cl@|{\cdot}\theta=\!\pcol@stepcounter!\Arg{\theta}$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +%  +% unless $\theta=\counter{page}$, and \!\pcol@FF! to write it to a log file +% as a part the logging information of memory leak debugging. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\c@footnote!}] +% is \LaTeX's counter \Uidx{\counter{footnote}} being a \!\count! register +% to have the footnote number. It is referred to by \!\pcol@zparacol! to +% let $\bf=\!\pcol@footnotebase!$ have its value, by \!\pcol@calcfnctr! to +% calculate the footnote ordinal which the one of its invoker +% \!\pcol@iadjustfnctr! sets into the register, and by \!\endparacol! to let +% the register have $\bf+\nf=\!\pcol@footnotebase!+\!\pcol@nfootnotes!$. +% +% \item[$\cs{c@}{\cdot}\theta$] +% \SpecialArrayUsageIndex{\theta}{\c@} +%  +% is a \!\count! register being \LaTeX's counter $\theta$. It is referred +% to by \!\pcol@savectrelt! to let $\val_c(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ for saving +% it in $\Cc_c$, by \!\pcol@cmpctrelt! to examine if +% $\val_0(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ to detect a modification outside +% \env{paracol} environment, and by \!\pcol@syncctrelt! to let +% $\val_c(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ for all $c$ for \csync{}. It is also +% referred to by \!\pcol@remctrelt! and \!\localcounter! to examine if +% $\theta=\counter{page}$. The macros \!\pcol@setctrelt! and +% \!\pcol@stpldelt! restore the value of the counter from $\val_c(\theta)$, +% while \!\pcol@stpclelt! lets $\Val(\theta)=0$ for zero-clearing of +% descendent counters. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\count@!}] +% is a \!\count! register for temporary use. It is used in +% \!\pcol@iscancst! to have $m$ of $\mcelt_{i,m}$, +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to have the physical column position of the current +% column $c$ in which \!\marginpar! is given, and in +% $\!\pcol@extract@fil@i!\\!\@nil!$ to exract the unit of the stretch +% component $s$ of a glue. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempcnta!}] +% is a \!\count! register for temporary use. The usages of this register +% are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@F@count!, it is used to measure the cardinality of +% \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makecol!, it is used to keep $\page(\ptop)$ gotten by +% \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! until we store it back by \!\pcol@defcurrpage!. +% +% \item\begin{Sloppy}{3700} +% In \!\pcol@setpageno!, \!\pcol@setpnoelt!, \!\pcol@nextpage!, +% \!\pcol@nextpelt!, \!\pcol@getcurrpage!, \!\pcol@getpelt!, +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! and \!\pcol@setmpbelt!, it has $p-q$ when we scan +% $\pp(q)$ for all $q\in[\pbase,\ptop]$ and the \ccolpage{} is at $p$. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@checkshipped!, it has $c$ when we scan $\S_c$ for all +% $c\In0\C$ to examine if all of them are not empty and thus we have pages +% to be shipped out. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, it has $c'$ when we scan $\s_c(q)$ for all +% $c\In0\CL$ or $c\In\CL\C$ to build the shipping out image of a page $q$, +% where $c=c'$ or $c=\Cto-1-(c'-\Cfrom)$ where +% $(\Cfrom,\Cto)\in\{(0,\CL),(\CL,\C)\}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\@outputpage!, it has $\page(p)$ or $\page(p)+1$ to be given to +% \!\pcol@outputpage@l! or \!\pcol@outputpage@r! as their argument when they +% are used to ship out the second (not always right) component of a +% \parapag{}e pair. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@bg@columnleft!, it has a value in $\LBRP\CBfrom{c}$ to sum up +% the width of columns and \csepgap{}s in the range. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@switch!, it is used to have $\page(p)$ obtained by +% \!\pcol@getcurrp~info! and simply to store the value in $\pp^p(p)$ by +% \!\pcol@defcurrpage! when we use these macros to add an element to +% $\pp^s(p)$ and/or let $\pp^f(p)=\!\footins!$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, it has the code calculated from +% \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and |\if@after|\~|indent| to be saved in +% $\cc_c(\sw)$. +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\if@afterindent} +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@scancst!\arg{box}$, it is let have +% $\arg{box}\in\{\!\pcol@colorins!,|\pcol@color|\~|stack@saved|\}$ and then is +% referred to in \!\pcol@iscancst!. +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@colorstack@saved} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar! besides the page scan shown above, it is used to +% scan all columns whose physical position is left from the current +% colum $c$ to measure the distance between the left edges of the leftmost +% column and $c$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i!, it has $\pm1$ according to the margin ($\rm +% left=-1$) which marginal notes outside \env{paracol} environments goes +% to. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, it is used to throw $\page(\ptop)$ away when we +% get it by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! because we don't need it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, it has $c$ to scan fractions $r_d$ where +% $d=c-\Cfrom$ in its argument $\arg{ratio}$ specified by \!\columnratio!, +% and then to distribute the unspecifed portion of \!\textwidth! evenly to +% $\w_c$ for all $c\In{\Cfrom{+}k{+}1}\Cto$, where $k$ is the number of +% fractions and $(\Cfrom,\Cto)\in\{(0,\CL),(\CL,\C)\}$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@scan!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\Arg{spec}$, it has $c$ for two +% loops for $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$ to add `|,|' to the tail of $\arg{spec}$ as +% many as $k=\Cto-\Cfrom$ and then to process first $k$ elements in +% $\arg{spec}$, and is referred to by \!\pcol@setcw@set! invoked in the +% second loop. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$, it used to calculate and to have +% $k$ such that $z'/2^k\approx x/y$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@cmpctrelt!, it has $\Val(\theta)$ of a counter $\theta$ to be +% compared with $\val_0(\theta)$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!, it has $(c+1)\bmod\C$ being the target of +% \cswitch{}. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@sptext!, it temporarily has $d$ being the target of \cswitch{} +% during we let \!\pcol@nextcol! have 0 to visit the leftmost column +% to put a \mctext{}. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@visitallcols!, it has $d\In0\C-\{c\}$ being the columns to be +% visited for \cscan{}ning. +% +% \item +% In \!\definecolumnpreamble!\marg{c}\marg{pream}, $c$ is assigned to the +% register to ensure $c$ is a number. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@calcfnctr!, it has the footnote ordinal calculated by the +% macro to be referred to by the invokers \!\pcol@iadjustfnctr! and +% \!\pcol@iifootnotetext!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\marginparthreshold!\Arg{t_l}|[|t_r|]|$ it is let have $t_l$, while +% in the related macro $\!\pcol@marginparthreshold!|[|t_r|]|$ it is let have +% $t_r$. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempcntb!}] +% is a \!\count! register for temporary use. It is used in the following +% macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ioutputelt! it has $c$, while in \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! it has $c'$, to have $c=c'$ or $c=\Cto-1-(c'-\Cfrom)$ +% according to \cswap{} for $c'$-th iteration of column scanning loop for +% $c'\In\Cfrom\Cto$, where $(\Cfrom,\Cto)\in\{(0,\CL),(\CL,\C)\}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@scancst! and \!\pcol@iscancst!, it has $\npop$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, it is let have the column number $d$ whose +% phisical position is left from the current colum $c$ to measure the +% distance between the left edges of the leftmost column and $c$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@sync! and \!\pcol@measurecolumn!, it has the (so-far) tallest +% column which gives $\VP$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, it has $\Cto-\Cfrom-1$ then $\Cto-1$ and +% finally $\Cto-\min(\Cfrom{+}k,\,\Cto{-}1)$, where $k$ is the number of +% fractions given in the argument of \!\columnratio! and +% $(\Cfrom,\Cto)\in\{(0,\CL),(\CL,\C)\}$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$, at first it is used to calculate +% $z'/2^k\approx x/y$ and then to calculate +% $Z=z\times1\,|pt|=z'\cdot2^{16-k}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@visitallcols!, it has $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ to exclude it from +% the \cscan{} targets. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Dimension Registers} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\!\vsize!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the height of a page or a \colpage{} +% being built. It is let be \!\@colroom! or \!\maxdimen! by +% \!\pcol@output!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\hsize!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the width of a page or a \colpage{} +% being built. It is let be $\w_c$ by \!\pcol@invokeoutput! to restart (or +% stay in) the column $c$, be \!\textwidth! by \!\pcol@sptext! for \mctext, +% and be either of \!\textwidth! or $\w_c$ by \!\pcol@fntextbody! according +% to the footnote typesetting being \scfnote{} or \mcfnote{} resepectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\maxdepth!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the maximum depth of the page being +% built. In \LaTeX, it is assumed that its value is fixed at +% \beginenv{document}, in which the value is saved into \!\@maxdepth!, for +% the typesetting throughout the document, unless a bottom float is added to +% a page in which the register is let have 0 until it is shipped out. This +% temporary setting for a page with bottom floats has some reasonability but +% its implementation for \env{paracol} environments having \cswitch{} +% from/to a \colpage{} with bottom floats to/from another one without +% them is too costly\footnote{ +%  +% That is, we would need to incorporate \cs{maxdepth} as a member of +% \cctext, but we don't because the idea of temporary setting itself is too +% vague to pay the effort and a precious membership in \cctext.}. +%  +% Therefore, we let the register have \!\@maxdepth! in \!\pcol@output! and +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! to cancel the temporary setting done in +% \!\@addtobot! for the references by \TeX's page builder and \!\@cflt! +% respectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\boxmaxdepth!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the maximum depth of \!\vbox!es. +% The macros \!\pcol@cflt!, \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@combine~floats!, \!\pcol@output@flush! and +% \!\pcol@output@clear! let it be \!\@maxdepth! for the boxes having a +% completed \colpage{} or page to cap the depth of the box. The macro +% $\!\pcol@@makecol!\$ also do that when $d=\!\@maxdepth!$ but it can be +% $d=0$ when it is invoked to build \lpage{}. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\splitmaxdepth!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the maximum depth of the \!\vbox! +% being the first half of a box being split. It is used in +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins! to cap the depth of the first half of deferred +% footnotes split from $\df$, and in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to let it have the +% depth of \!\strutbox!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\prevdepth!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the depth of the box which just has +% been added to a vertical list, or to be given to \TeX's vertical list +% builder for the calculation of the vertical skip inserted below the last +% box. The macro \!\pcol@invokeoutput! refers to it to save its value in +% \!\pcol@prevdepth! before putting a dummy \!\vbox! and making a \!\output! +% request, and then let it have \!\pcol@prevdepth! which is given by +% \!\output! routine for the column that we resume. The macro +% \!\pcol@zparacol! also refers to it to save it in \!\pcol@firstprevdepth! +% for the \preenv. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\vfuzz!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the threshold height of overfull +% messaging. It is set to 0 in $\!\pcol@ShowBox!\arg{b}$ to ensure overfull +% for any \!\box! $b$ of non-null height. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\maxdimen!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have $16383.99999\,|pt|$ being the largest +% legal dimensional value. The usages of this register are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% For the \!\insert! register set $\!\pcol@colorins!=\cstraw$, +% \!\dimen!\!\pcol@colorins! is let be \!\maxdimen! for the consistency with +% our intention that a \colpage{} can have virtually infinite number of +% \!\insert!ions for text coloring. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output!, it is set into \!\vsize! when $\!\outputpenalty!=-10004$ +% for the dummy \!\output! request so that no page break should occur +% between the dummy and real requests. +% +% \item +% Our own \!\dimen! register \!\pcol@textfloatsep! has \!\maxdimen! if a +% \colpage{} does not have \sync{}ation points to let top floats are +% inserted in usual way. Therefore, \!\pcol@floatplacement! and +% \!\pcol@zparacol! let the register have \!\maxdimen! as the initial +% value. Then the macros \!\pcol@makecol! and \!\pcol@combinefloats! +% examine if $\!\pcol@textfloatsep!=\!\maxdimen!$ to determine the operation +% type of top float insertion, while \!\pcol@synccolumn! does that to know +% if it is flushing a \colpage{} with a \sync{}ation point or is setting the +% first \sync{}ation point in the \colpage{}. The macro \!\pcol@addflhd! +% also examines it for the measurement of the combined height of top and +% bottom floats, while \!\pcol@measurecolumn! gives it \!\maxdimen! as its +% third argument for bottom floats. +% +% \item +% The \pctext{} $\pp^h(p)$ has $-\!\maxdimen!$ if the page is a \fpage{}. +% The macro \!\pcol@startpage! makes that when it creates such a page. +% +% \item +% Our own \!\pcol@prevdepth! and that saved in $\cc_c(\pd)$ have +% \!\maxdimen! if the main vertical list is empty at a \sync{}ation. The +% macro \!\pcol@measurecolumn! makes that when it finds an empty list. +% +% \item +% The \cctext{} $\cc_c(\tr)$ may have \!\maxdimen! if the column $c$ has a +% \fcolumn{} in the \lpage{} of a \env{paracol} environment and the floats in +% it can be put as top floats. The macro \!\pcol@makefcolumn! makes this +% special assignment, and \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! +% examine it. +% +% \item +% The macro \!\pcol@makefcolelt! let the room for floats in a \fpage{} be +% $-\!\maxdimen!$ if it finds no futher floats can be added to the page. +% +% \item +% At a \sync{}ation, we measure the maximum combined size of top floats and +% the main vertical list $\VT$, that of footnotes and bottom floats $\VB$, +% that of four items $\VP$, and $\VPP$ being $\VP$ or $\VP+\!\textfloatsep!$ +% according to the existence of bottom floats. We also let $\DT$ and $\DP$ +% be the minimum depth of the \colpage{}s which gives $\VT$ and $\VPP$ +% respectively. For the measurement, the macro \!\pcol@sync! lets +% $\VT=\VB=\VP=\VPP=-\!\maxdimen!$ and $\DT=\DP=\!\maxdimen!$ as their +% initial values. Then the macro \!\pcol@synccolumn! examines if +% $\DT=\!\maxdimen!$ to mean the \sync{}ation point is set just below the +% top floats of a column whose main vertical list is empty. On the other +% hand, \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@output@end! examine if +% $\VPP=-\!\maxdimen!$ to mean the last \colpage{}s are empty. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\linewidth!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of a line possibly shorter than \!\columnwidth! in \env{list}-like +% environments. It is let have $\w_c-\lrm$ by +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput! for the outermost paragraphs in \env{paracol} +% environment, where $\lrm=\!\pcol@lrmargin!=\!\textwidth!-l$ which +% \!\pcol@zparacol! lets have to represent the left-plus-right margin of the +% \env{list}-like environment, whose \!\linewidth! is $l$, enclosing +% \env{paracol} if any. The macro \!\pcol@sptext! also sets the register +% temporarily for \mctext{}s but letting it have $\!\textwidth!-\lrm$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footnotesep!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the +% vertical space inserted in a footnote when it is split into two or more +% pages. It is uesed in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to \!\splittopskip! have it, +% and to make the first line of the footnote is at least as tall as the +% amount in the register. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\topmargin!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% (height) of the top margin minus 1\,inch. The register is used as an +% element of \!\pcol@bg@pagetop! to calculate the distance from the origin +% at the left-top corner of text area to the top edge of a page. The +% other users are \!\pcol@ioutputelt! and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! +% temporarily add the height-plus-depth of $\pp^b(p)$ to the register to +% make the calculation biased shifting the origin to the left-top corner of +% column area, i.e., below $\pp^b(p)$. The macro \!\@outputpage! also +% refers to the register together with \!\headheight! and \!\headsep! to +% calculate the distance from the page top (ingoring 1\,inch shift) to the +% text area top. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\oddsidemargin!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of the left margin minus 1\,inch for two-sided odd-numbered pages and +% all single-sided pages. The register is used together with +% \!\evensidemargin! in \!\pcol@outputpage@l!, \!\pcol@outputpage@r! and +% \!\pcol@bg@swappage! to decide the left margin of the page they are +% working on. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\evensidemargin!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of the left margin minus 1\,inch for two-sided even-numbered pages. The +% register is used together with \!\oddsidemargin! in \!\pcol@outputpage@l!, +% \!\pcol@outputpage@r! and \!\pcol@bg@swappage! to decide the left margin +% of the page they are working on. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\headheight!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the +% height of page headers. The register is used together with \!\topmargin! +% and \!\headsep! as an element of \!\pcol@bg@pagetop! and in \!\@outputpage! +% to calculate the distance from the real and imaginary page top to the text +% area top respectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\headsep!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the +% vertical distance from the bottom of a page header to the text area top. +% The register is used together with \!\topmargin! and \!\headheight! as an +% element of \!\pcol@bg@pagetop! and in \!\@outputpage! to calculate the +% distance from the real and imaginary page top to the text area top +% respectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\textheight!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the +% height of text area in a page. The register is referred to by +% \!\pcol@output! to examine if a page is very short, by \!\pcol@getpinfo!, +% \!\pcol@startpage!, \!\pcol@flushfloats! and \!\pcol@output@end! to let +% \!\@colht! be it for a page without \spanning{} (so far), by +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, \!\@outputpage!, \!\pcol@output@flush! and +% \!\pcol@output@clear! to build a page to be shipped out, by +% \!\pcol@bg@textheight! to calculate $\HT$, and by \!\pcol@fntextbody! to +% cap the height of a footnote. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\textwidth!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of a page, which we occasionally refer to as $\WT$. The register is +% referred to by \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! to build a \!\hbox! of \!\textwidth! wide to have +% all columns (in a left or right \parapag{}e). It also referred to by +% following macros; \!\pcol@bg@swappage! to calculate the right margin for +% \mirror{}ed \bgpaint; \!\pcol@bg@@r!, \!\pcol@bg@@f!, \!\pcol@bg@@n!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@p! and \!\pcol@bg@@s! to specify the width of \bground{} of +% \pwstuff{} to be painted; \!\pcol@shiftspanning! to calculate the +% left-shift amount of a \mctext{} in \cswap; \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to +% measure the distance between the right edges of the rightmost and current +% columns; \!\pcol@zparacol! for the calculation of +% $\lrm=\!\pcol@lrmargin!$; \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! for the calculation of +% $\w_c$ for all $c\In0\CL$ or $c\In\CL\C$; \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! for +% the calculation of $\WT/W$ and $(\WT-W)/F$; \!\pcol@sptext!, +% \!\footnoterule! of \env{paracol}'s local and \!\endparacol! to set it +% in \!\columnwidth!; and \!\pcol@fntextbody! to set it in \!\hsize! if +% \Scfnote{} typesetting is in effect. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\columnwidth!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of a column. The register is let have $\w_c$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol! for +% the column $c$, then is referred to by the following macros; +% \!\pcol@shiftspanning! to calculate the left-shift amount of a \mctext{} in +% \cswap; \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to measure the distance between the right +% edges of the rightmost and current columns; \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! to put each \colpage{} into a \!\hbox! of $\w_c$ wide +% for shipping a page out; \!\pcol@invokeoutput! to let \!\linewidth! and +% \!\hsize! have the value of or based on it; and \!\pcol@fntextbody! to +% let \!\hsize! have it for \Mcfnote{} typesetting. The register is also +% let have \!\textwidth! by \!\footnoterule! of \env{paracol}'s local +% defined in \!\pcol@zparacol! if \Scfnote{} typesetting is in effect, by +% \!\pcol@sptext! for \mctext{}s, and by \!\endparacol! for \postenv. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\columnsep!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of \csepgap{}s. It is referred to by \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! to +% calculate $\w_c$ for all $c\In0\CL$ or $c\In\CL\C$, and by +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec! as the default width of \csepgap{}s. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\columnseprule!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of the rules to be drawn in \csepgap{}s. It is referred to by +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! and \!\pcol@buildcselt! to draw the rule, and by +% \!\pcol@hfil! to examine if it is positive to mean the rule is really +% drawn and if so to add skips of $-\!\columnseprule!/2$ to surround the +% rule to nullify the width of the rule. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\marginparwidth!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of a marginal note. It is temporarily modified by \!\pcol@addmarginpar! +% so that a left marginal note is placed appropriately. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\marginparsep!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the +% distance between a marginal note and text area. It is temporarily +% modified by \!\pcol@addmarginpar! so that a right marginal note is placed +% appropriately. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\marginparpush!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the +% minimum vertical distance between two marginal notes. It is referred to +% by \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to find a place for a marginal note and remember +% the place in $\pp^m(p)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\paperheight!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the height +% of physical pages $\HP$. It is referred to by \!\pcol@bg@paperheight! +% to calculate $\HP-2\WR$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\paperwidth!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for an API parameter of \LaTeX{} to have the width +% of physical pages $\WP$. It is referred to by \!\pcol@bg@swappage! to +% calculate the right margin for \mirror{}ed \bgpaint, and by +% \!\pcol@bg@paperwidth! to calculate $\WP-2\WR$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\z@!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have 0\,|pt| to initialize \!\pagerim!, +% \!\belowfootnoteskip! and \!\skip!\!\pcol@colorins! at their declarations, +% and is used in the following macros. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@ShowBox!, +% \!\pcol@makecol!, +% \!\pcol@combinefloats!, +% \!\pcol@nextpelt!, +% \!\pcol@floatplacement!, +% \!\pcol@startpage!, +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule!, +% \!\pcol@buildcselt@S!, +% \!\pcol@buildcselt!, +% \!\@outputpage!, +% \!\pcol@startcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@i!, +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@putbackmvl!, +% \!\pcol@iscancst!, +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins!, +% \!\pcol@combinefootins!, +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn!, +% \!\pcol@synccolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput!, +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcf!, +% \!\pcol@extract@fil@ii!, +% \!\pcol@sptext!, +% \!\pcol@fntextbody!. +% \!\pcol@marginpar!, +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, +% \!\pcol@set@color@push!, +% \!\pcol@reset@color@pop!, +% \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop!, +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii!. +% \end{quote} +%  +% It is also used to give the number 0 for the initializations of +% \!\pcol@currcol!, \!\pcol@ncol!, \!\pcol@ncolleft! and +% \!\count!\!\pcol@colorins! at their declarations, and in the following +% macros. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@ShowBox!, +% \!\pcol@F@count!, +% \!\pcol@makecol!, +% \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@setpnoelt!, +% \!\pcol@nextpelt!, +% \!\pcol@checkshipped!, +% \!\pcol@getpelt!, +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\@outputpage!, +% \!\pcol@startcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, +% \!\pcol@iscancst!, +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, +% \!\pcol@setmpbelt!, +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@synccolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@flushfloats!, +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats!, +% \!\pcol@freshpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcf!, +% \!\pcol@synccounter!, +% \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, +% \!\pcol@stepcounter!, +% \!\pcol@stpclelt!, +% \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@sptext!, +% \!\pcol@switchcol!, +% \!\pcol@visitallcols!, +% \!\pcol@xympar!, +% \!\endparacol!. +% \end{quote} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\p@!}] +% \begin{Sloppy}{3950}% +% is a \!\dimen! register to have 1\,|pt|. It is used in \!\pcol@ShowBox!, +% \!\pcol@cflt!, \!\pcol@addflhd!, \!\pcol@synccolumn!, \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!, \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!, \!\pcol@setcw@fill! and +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcf!, and the top level assignment to \!\@tempskipa! for +% the invocation of \!\pcol@defkw!, as the shorthand of |pt|. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@totalleftmargin!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the total size of the left margins of a +% \env{list}-like environment and those surrounding it. It is given to +% \!\parshape! by \!\pcol@invokeoutput! and \!\pcol@sptext! if \env{paracol} +% is enclosed in a \env{list}-like environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@themargin!}] +% is a control sequence \!\let!-equal to \!\evensidemargin! for two-sided +% even numbered pages or \!\oddsidemargin! for others. In +% \!\pcol@outputpage@l! and \!\pcol@outputpage@r! it is bound to one of +% \!\dimen! registers for the references in \!\pcol@outputpage@ev!\footnote{ +%  +% The reference in \CSIndex{pcol@@outputpage} being \LaTeX's +% \CSIndex{@outputpage} is done after the macro itself makes the assignment, +% which is of course consistent with those in our macros.}. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@maxdepth!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have \!\maxdepth! at \beginenv{document} to +% recover the temporary update of \!\maxdepth! with 0 by \!\@addtobot! for +% bottom float incorporation in a page. As discussed in the explanation of +% \!\maxdepth!, in \env{paracol} environments \!\maxdepth! is let have +% \!\@maxdepth! always by the assignments in \!\pcol@output! and +% \!\pcol@combinefloats!. Other users, \!\pcol@cflt!, \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@combinefootins!, \!\pcol@output@flush! and +% \!\pcol@output@clear!, let \!\boxmaxdepth! have \!\@maxdepth! so as to +% limit the depth of boxes for a completed \colpage{} or page to the value +% for page typesetting, while \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! do that by \!\pcol@@makecol! giving the register +% to it. The other usage of the register is to calculate \bgpaint{} +% parameter $\HT$ by \!\pcol@bg@textheight!, and to determine the bottom +% edge of the \bground{}s of columns and \csepgap{}s through the argument of +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! given by \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@iflushfloats!. The register is also +% referred to by \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv! to go back the last baseline of the +% main vertical list in \!\box!|255|, and by \!\pcol@deferredfootins! to let +% \!\splitmaxdepth! have its value to cap the depth of the first half of +% footnotes split from $\df$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@colht!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the height of columns in a page possibly +% shrunk from \!\textheight! by \spanning. The usages of the register +% are as folllows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item\begin{Sloppy}{1600} +% In \!\pcol@startpage!, \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@flushfloats! and +% \!\pcol@output@end!, it is initialized to \!\textheight!. In first two, +% the value of the register is reduced to reflect \spanning{} if exists and +% then set into $\pp^h(p)$, while the setting by the third is referred to by +% its callee \!\pcol@iflushfloats!. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@getpelt!, \!\pcol@sync!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, it is let have +% $\pp^h(p)$. In addition \!\pcol@sync! examines if +% $\!\@colht!<\VT+\VB+v(f)$, and \!\pcol@makefcolumn! uses it to initialize +% the room of a \fcolumn{} as well as the height of $\cc_c(\vb)$ for it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@opcol!, it is used to add \!\pcol@clearcolorstack! to the +% bottom of $\cc_c(\vb)$ whose height is \!\@colht!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@startcolumn!(*), \!\pcol@flushcolumn!(*) and +% \!\pcol@freshpage!, it is used to let \!\@colroom! have it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@restartcolumn!(*), it is saved and restored for the use as the +% height cap of deferred footnote \!\insert!ion in \!\pcol@deferredfootins! +% because it can be shrunk by the non-deferred \Scfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@flush! and \!\pcol@output@clear!, it is given to +% \!\pcol@make~flushedpage! as its argument. The macro +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!(*) lets \!\@colht! be the argument if it is less +% than \!\@colht! and thus is given by \!\pcol@output@end!. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% In addition, in the macros with `(*)' above and \!\pcol@makecol!, the +% register is passed to \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! to shrink the height in it +% temporarily to keep the space required to put \Scfnote{}s in the page they +% are working on, for the reference by starred macros themselves or +% \!\@makecol! invoked in \!\pcol@makecol!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@colroom!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the height of a column possibly shrunk +% from \!\@colht! by top and bottom floats. The register is initialized to +% have \!\@colht! by \!\pcol@startcolumn!, \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@freshpage!, the last three of which also +% save it into $\cc_c(\vb^r)$. This save operation is also done by +% \!\pcol@output@switch! while restoring from it done by +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, but the latter macro may shrink the amount in its +% callee \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to capture a \mctext{} while the former cancel +% this shrinkage. The macros \!\pcol@output! and \!\pcol@output@start! also +% refer to this register to let \!\vsize! have it in the former and to +% calculate the room for each \colpage{} in the \spage{} in the latter. The +% macro \!\pcol@output@end! lets the register have \!\textheight! for the +% \postenv{} because the \colpage{}s above it simply precedes the stuff in +% the main vertical list. The other users \!\pcol@makefcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@makefcolelt! use this register to accumulate the total size of +% floats to be put in a \fcolumn{} temporarily. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@pageht!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to be used in \LaTeX's \!\@specialoutput! to have +% the height of \!\@holdpg!. It is referred to by \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to +% deteremine the position at which a marginal note is placed. +% We also use it as a scratchpad to have $\VP$ in \!\pcol@sync! and +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn!, and to save $\pp^h(\ptop)$ in \!\pcol@flushcolumn! +% for the reference in itself, and to do so in \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! for +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@pagedp!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to be used in \LaTeX's \!\@specialoutput! to have +% the depth of \!\@holdpg!. However, we use it as a scratchpad in +% \!\pcol@sync! and \!\pcol@measurecolumn! to have $\DP$, and in +% \!\pcol@output@end! to have the value to be set in \!\pcol@prevdepth!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@toproom!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the room for top floats. The register is +% saved in $\cc_c(\tr)$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcol! and restored from it by +% \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol!. The macro \!\pcol@makefcolumn! uses this register +% as a flag to indicate that $\cc_c(\tl)$ of the column $c$ having +% $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ contains floats to be put in its last \fcolumn{} +% possibly as top floats so that it is examined by \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, the former of which then lets $\cc_c(\tr)=0$ to +% mean the floats are put in a \fcolumn{} in a non-\lpage{} by the macro. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@botroom!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the room for bottom floats. The register +% is saved in $\cc_c(\br)$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcol! and restored from it by +% \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@fpmin!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have $\!\floatpagefraction!\times\!\@colht!$ +% being the minimum total size of floats for which an ordinary (not flushed) +% \fcolumn{} can be build. It is referred to by \!\pcol@makefcolumn! as the +% threshhold below which floats in the last \fcolumn{} can be put as top +% floats. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@mparbottom!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the bottom position of the last +% \!\marginpar! stuff. Its value at \beginparacol{} is referred to by +% \!\pcol@output@start! to let $\mpb_L^l$ or $\mpb_L^r$ of $\pp^m(0)$ has an +% element based on it, while the tail of one of the lists in $\pp^m(\ptop)$ +% defines the value at \Endparacol{} which \!\pcol@output@end! lets the +% register have. The register is also updated by \!\pcol@getmparbottom! and +% \!\pcol@getmpbelt! to let \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! being \LaTeX's original +% \!\@addmarginpar! know the uppermost available position for the marginal +% note to be added. This update is, however, just for communicatoin betwee +% these macros and thus is ineffective for typesetting posterior to that, as +% well as the update in \!\pcol@@addmarginpar!, because whole information +% for marginal note placement is kept in $\pp^m(p)$ in $\PPP$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@textfloatsheight!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register to have the combined height of mid floats and +% their separators. It is initialize to be 0 by \!\pcol@floatplacement!, +% saved in $\cc_c(\fh)$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, and restored from it by +% \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\dimen@!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for temporary use. It is used in the following +% macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule!, \!\pcol@buildcselt@S! and \!\pcol@buildcselt! to +% have the argument $d\in\{\!\@maxdepth!,0\}$ of the first macro. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! to have $y_1$ of $\bgr_a^{[c]}$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}\Arg{t}\Arg{b}$ to have $t$ and then $t+y$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to have the height of \prespan{} in +% \!\pcol@prespan!, or 0 if it is $\bot$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@sync! to have $V$ or $V-\DT+\VE$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@addflhd! and \!\pcol@hdflelt! to measure the height of top and +% bottom floats, \!\pcol@makecol! and \!\pcol@output@switch! to measure +% the height of \prespan{} including the top floats, and +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! for top and bottom floats and $\VT$, $\VB$ and +% $\VP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s! and \!\pcol@setcw@accumwd! to accumulate $W$ being +% the sum of natural widths of column\slash gap specifications, and then +% used by \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! to calculate $W/\WT$ and $W-\WT$. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\dimen@ii!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for temporary use. It is used in the following +% macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! to measure the total height of top floats by +% \!\pcol@addflhd!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@addext! to have +% $e=|pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}\{a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c,a\}$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@} +% {\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +%  +% and then $10000\PT-e$ to calculate an \bgext{} of \bgpaint. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}\Arg{t}\Arg{b}$ to have $b$ and then $b+y$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! to measure $\VT$, $\VP$ and $\DP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s! and \!\pcol@setcw@accumwd! to accumulate $F$ being +% the sum of infinite stretch factors in column\slash gap specifications with +% the unit of pt, and then used by \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! to calculate +% $(W-\WT)/F$, where $W$ is the sum of natural widths. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! to have $(W-\WT)/F$ above or 0 to be used in +% \!\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii! through \!\pcol@setcw@filunit! made +% \!\let!-equal to the register by \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempdima!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for temporary use. The usages of this register +% are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makecol! and \!\pcol@startpage!, it is used to throw +% $\pp^h(\ptop)$ away when we get it by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! because we +% don't need it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@outputelt!, it has $\pp^h(p)$ to examine if $p$ is a \fpage. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, it has $\pp^h(p)$ possibly shrunk by \Scfnote{}s +% to know the \bground{}s to be painted for columns etc. After that it has +% $\w_c$ being the width of each \!\hbox! into which the \colpage{} of each +% column $c$ is put. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! and its callees \!\pcol@buildcselt@S! and +% \!\pcol@buildcselt!, the register has the first argment $H=\pp^h(p)$ of +% the caller macro. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@hfil!$\$, it has $\gap_c=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +% +% \item +% In \!\@outputpage!, it has the sum of \!\topmargin!, \!\headheight! and +% \!\headsep! being the distance between tops of imaginary page and its text +% area. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@startcolumn!, it is used to save \!\@colht! which can be shrunk +% temporarily by \Scfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!, it is let have $x_0$ of $\bgr_a^{[c]}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@start!, it is used to have the room for each \colpage{} +% in the \spage, and then the height-plus-depth of the \preenv. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@switch!, it is used to throw $\pp^h(p)$ away when +% we get it by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! because we don't need it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@shiftspanning!, it is let have the left-shift amount of a +% \mctext{} in \cswap. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, it is used to save \!\@colht! which can be +% shrunk temporarily by \Scfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv!$\arg{ins}$, it has the depth of \!\box!|255| for +% going back to the baseline of the box, and then has the natural component +% of $\!\skip!\arg{ins}$ to add its stretch and shrink components only. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, at first it has the distance between left edges +% of the leftmost and current columns. Then it is let have the distance +% between top edges of the column and the marginal text to be put. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@getmparbottom!\\$ and +% $\!\pcol@getmpbelt!\\$, it at first has $t$ and then is +% let have $b_i$ when the marginal note cannot be put at $t$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@sync!, \!\pcol@measurecolumn! and \!\pcol@synccolumn!, it has +% $\VT$ being the maximum combined height of top floats and the main +% vertical list. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makefcolumn! and \!\pcol@makefcolelt!, it has the room for +% floats to be put in a \fcolumn{}. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, it has the height-plus-depth of \spanning in +% $\pp^i(\ptop)$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@end!, at first it is let have $\VPP-H$, where $H$ is the +% height(-plus-depth) of \!\@outputbox! having the ship-out image of the +% \lpage, being the negative counterpart of the height-plus-depth of +% \spanning{} in the \lpage{} for setting $\mpbout$, and then have $H$ to be +% set in \!\pcol@bg@preposttop! for the \bgpaint{} of \postenv. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, it has +% $\!\textwidth!-(\Cto-\Cfrom-1)\!\columnsep!$ being the base of $\w_c$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!, it is let have the natural width of a +% column\slash gap specification, to be used in \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@accumwd! and \!\pcol@setcw@set!, while in the last of them +% it finally has $\w_c$ or $\gap_c$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$, at first it has $y$, then +% $y/2^{k_2}$, and then $\lceil y/2^{k_2+k_3}\rceil$, where $k_2$ and $k_3$ +% are scaling parameters for good approximation. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@switchcol!, it is let have what \!\pcol@ensurevspace! has so +% that the dimensional expression in it is evaluated in the macro and the +% evaluateion result is assigned to $\VE=\!\pcol@@ensurevspace!$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\ensurevspace!\ARg{space}$, it is let have $\arg{space}$ to ensure +% the argument is a dimension including forced one. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@fntextbody!, it has the height-plus-depth of the \!\vbox! in +% which the footnote is encapsulated. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@set@color@push!, it has the width of the \!\vbox! to be +% \!\insert!ed, which is $m$\,|sp| for a math-mode push of $\mcelt_{i,m}$ or +% 0 for a non-math one $\celt_i$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@bg@defext!\Arg{d}\Arg{e}$, it is let have $e$ to confirm $e$ +% is a proper dimension. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempdimb!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for temporary use. The usages of this register +% are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makecol!, it is used to measure the height-plus-depth $h_i$ of +% decapsulated \!\box!|255| and its original form to add an element +% $\spt(H_i,h_i)$ to $\pp^s(\ptop)$ for a \mctext{} captured in the box. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, if has the height-plus-depth of \spanning{} +% $\pp^b(q)$ to be temporarily added to \!\topmargin!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! it has $H_0+h_0$, while in its callee +% $\!\pcol@buildcselt!\\~\$ it has $H_{i-1}+h_{i-1}$ and then +% $H_i+h_i$ where $\spt(H_i,h_i)\in\pp^s(p)$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!, it is let have $y_0$ of $\bgr_a^{[c]}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@switch!, it is let have the height-plus-depth $h_i$ of +% \!\@holdpg! having a \mctext{} to add an element $\spt(H_i,h_i)$ to +% $\pp^s(\ptop)$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn!, it is let have the inverse of the \!\skip! +% component of the argument \!\insert! register of the macro, so that in +% \!\pcol@startcolumn! and \!\pcol@restartcolumn! it has that of $\pp^f(p)$ +% if $p$ has \Scfnote{}s, or 0 otherwise, and then is referred to by +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins! which then lets the register have the height cap +% of $\df$ splitting. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, \!\pcol@getmparbottom! and \!\pcol@getmpbelt!, +% it is let have the vertical space to be occupied +% by the marginal text to be put, being the second argument of +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@sync! and \!\pcol@measurecolumn!, it has $\VB$ and then, in the +% former, it has $\VP+v(f)$, $\VT$ or $\VT+\VB+v(f)$ according to the +% contents of the page to be \sync{}ed. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makefcolelt!, it has the size of vertical space consumed by a +% float. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@synccolumn!, it has $\VT-\vc(t)$ being the vertical space from +% the bottom of $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ to the \sync{}ation point. If the +% \sync{}ation point is defined by a column without main vertical list but +% with top floats, then the register is let have +% $\VT-\vc(t)+\!\textfloatsep!-\!\floatsep!+10000\,|pt|$ to be set in +% $\cc_c(\tf)=\!\pcol@textfloatsep!$ as the space below the \mvlfloat{} +% biased by 10000\,|pt| to indicate the last float is the \mvlfloat{}. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, it has +% $\!\textwidth!-(\Cto-\Cfrom-1)\!\columnsep!-\sum_{d=0}^{k-1}w_d$ being the +% base of $\w_c$ for $c\In{\Cfrom{+}k}{\,\Cto}$ where $k$ is the number of +% fractions given in the argument of \!\columnratio!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$, at first it is let have $x$, +% then $x\cdot2^{k_1}$, then +% $z'=\break\lfloor(x\cdot2^{k_1})/\lceil{}y/2^{k_2+k_3}\rceil\rfloor$, and +% finally +% $Z=z\times1\,|pt|=z'\cdot2^{16-k}$ referred to by +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! as $\phi_f=(\WT-W)/F$, where $k_1$, $k_2$ and +% $k_3$ are scaling parameters for good approximation and $k=k_1+k_2+k_3$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@extract@fil@ii! and \!\pcol@extract@fil@iii!, it is let have +% the infinite stretch factor of a column\slash gap specification +% represented with the unit \!\pcol@setcw@filunit!, to be used in +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!, \!\pcol@setcw@accumwd!, and \!\pcol@setcw@set!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@fntextbody!, it has $\!\textheight!-\!\skip!\!\footins!$ as the +% cap of the footnote. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempdimc!}] +% is a \!\dimen! register for temporary use. It is let have values as +% follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $H_i-(H_{i-1}+h_{i-1})$ in $\!\pcol@buildcselt!\\$. +% +% \item +% $x_1$ of $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ in \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!. +% +% \item +% $t+h$ in $\!\pcol@getmparbottom!\\$. +% +% \item +% $\max(t,b_{i-1})+h$ in $\!\pcol@getmpbelt!\\$ invoked from +% $\!\pcol@getmparbottom!\\~\$. +% +% \item +% $\DT$ in \!\pcol@sync!, \!\pcol@measurecolumn! and \!\pcol@synccolumn!. +% +% \item +% \!\floatsep! or \!\@fpsep! in \!\pcol@makefcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@makefcolelt!. +% +% \item +% $\w_c$ being the width of column $c$ in \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!. +% +% \item +% $\WT-W$ in \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors!. +% +% \item +% At first for calculation of $y/2^{k_2}$ and then $z'/2^k\approx x/y$ +% in $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\~\$ where $k_2$ and $k$ are scaling +% parameters for good approximation. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Skip Registers} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\!\baselineskip!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the vertical skip to separate +% adjacent baselines. It is referred to by \!\pcol@output! and +% \!\pcol@output@start! to examine if \!\@colroom! is unexpectedly small, +% and by \!\pcol@switchcol! to give it to \!\ensurevspace! to let +% \!\pcol@ensurevspace! have the default value. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\topskip!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the vertical skip from the top edge +% of a page to the baseline of its first vertical item. It is let be 0 by +% \!\pcol@output@start! if we have \preenv{} and is saved in $\pp^t(0)$, +% while \!\pcol@startpage! lets it be \!\pcol@topskip!, into which +% \!\pcol@zparacol! saves the value outside \env{paracol} environment, +% saving the value in $\pp^t(p)$. Then the register is restored from +% $\pp^t(p)$ by \!\pcol@getpelt! and \!\pcol@sync!, while +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! refers to the value restored by the latter to adjust a +% \sync{}ation point. The macro \!\pcol@putbackmvl! lets the register have +% 0 when it starts a \mctext{} because it originally follows \prespan{} in +% the \colpage{} to be restarted rather than at the page top. The macro +% \!\pcol@output@end! temporarily lets the register have 0 if we have +% non-empty columns in the last page, while \!\endparacol! restores it from +% \!\pcol@topskip! for the pages outside \env{paracol} environmnet. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\splittopskip!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the vertical skip inserted at the +% beginning of the second half of the box split by \!\vsplit! or \TeX's +% internal operation for splitting an \!\insert! at a page break. The +% register is temporarily let have 0 by \!\pcol@deferredfootins! when it +% splits $\df$ so that the second half does not have any skip at the top. +% The register is also let have \!\footnotesep! in \!\pcol@fntextbody! for +% footnote typesetting. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\parskip!}] +% is \TeX's primitive register to have the vertical skip inserted above each +% paragraph. It is referred to by \!\pcol@zparacol! to nullify the +% insertion going to be made by the first \!\item! of a \env{list}-like +% environment, when the macro finds the \env{paracol} environment to start +% is at the very beginning of a \env{list}-like environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\fill!}] +% is an API \!\skip! register to have a skip 0\,|pt| |plus| 1\,|fill|. In +% our macros, however, it is used as a keyword in \!\pcol@setcw@getspec!, +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! and \!\pcol@setcw@fill! to extract the infinite +% stretch factor $f$ given as $f\!\fill!$ in the specification. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\itemsep!}] +% is an API \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip inserted above each +% non-first \!\item! in \env{list}-like environments. It is referred to by +% \!\pcol@zparacol! to nullify the insertion going to be made by the first +% \!\item! of a \env{list}-like environment, when the macro finds the +% \env{paracol} environment to start is at the very beginning of a +% \env{list}-like environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\floatsep!}] +% is an API \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip between adjacent floats. +% It is referred to by \!\pcol@cflt! to cancel the skip following the last +% float, by \!\pcol@makefcolumn! to let \!\pcol@makefcolelt! examine the +% capacity of a \fcolumn{} in the \lpage, by \!\pcol@addflhd! and +% \!\pcol@hdflelt! to measure the total height of top and bottom floats, +% and by \!\pcol@sync! to calculate the space below the \mvlfloat. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\textfloatsep!}] +% is an API \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip between the main +% vertical list and top\slash bottom floats. It is referred to by +% \!\pcol@output@start! to calculate the room for each \colpage{} in the +% \spage{} with bottom floats in the \preenv{}, by \!\pcol@combinefloats! to +% insert a skip below the bottom floats in the \preenv{} and \lpage{}, +% by \!\pcol@measurecolumn! to take this skip into account in the +% calculation of $\VPP$, by \!\pcol@addflhd! to measure the vertical space +% for top and bottom floats, and by \!\pcol@synccolumn! to calculate the +% \sync{}ation point for columns with top floats. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\dblfloatsep!}] +% is an API \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip between adjacent +% \pwise{} floats, and is used in \!\pcol@startpage! to cancel the skip +% below the last float. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\dbltextfloatsep!}] +% is an API \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip between the last +% \pwise{} float and the top of columns, and is used in +% \!\pcol@startpage! to put the skip. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@topsep!}] +% is a \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip inserted above the first +% \!\item! of a \env{list}-like environment. The actual value is determined +% by \!\@trivlist! from API parameters \!\topsep!, \!\partopsep! and +% \!\parskip! depending on how the environment appears. The skip in the +% register is inserted by \!\pcol@zparacol! when it finds the \env{paracol} +% environment to start is at the very beginning of a \env{list}-like +% environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@fptop!}] +% is a \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip inserted at the top of +% a \fcolumn, and is used in \!\pcol@makefcolpage!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@fpsep!}] +% is a \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip between adjacent floats +% in a \fcolumn, and is used in \!\pcol@makefcolpage!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@fpbot!}] +% is a \!\skip! register to have the vertical skip inserted at the bottom of +% a \fcolumn, and is used in \!\pcol@makefcolpage!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempskipa!}] +% is a \!\skip! register for temporary use. It is used in the following +% macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \begin{Sloppy}{2400}% +% \!\pcol@makecol!, \!\pcol@startpage!, \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! +% to throw $\pp^t(p)$ away because we don't need it. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! to determine \!\topskip! for the \spage. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! and \!\pcol@setcw@fill! to have the width +% specification of a column or gap. +% \end{itemize} +% It is also used in the top level invocation of \!\pcol@defkw! with a glue +% of $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1\,|fil|\~\ |minus|\ 1\,|fil|$. +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Box Registers} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\!\strutbox!}] +% is an API \!\box! register to have the strut for the current font size. +% It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text} to let \!\splitmaxdepth! have +% its depth, and to let the last line of the footnote $\arg{text}$ have its +% depth at shallowest. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@cclv!}] +% is a \!\box! register but \TeX{} defines that it has the main vertical +% list when \!\output! routine is invoked. It is referred to by +% \!\pcol@makecol! when it has a broken \mctext{} to measure its +% height-plus-depth for the element to be added to $\pp^s(\ptop)$ and to +% update it combining its contents with \prespan{} optionally shifting it +% left by passing the register to \!\pcol@shiftspanning!. The macro also +% uses the register together with its callee \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv! to add +% stretch\slash shrink factor of \!\skip!\!\footins! at its bottom for a +% \colpage{} in a page having \Scfnote{}s. The macro \!\pcol@specialoutput! +% examines the register to discard the dummy \!\vbox! inserted in it by +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput!. The other users \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! +% let the register have the main vertical list of \preenv{} or a column to +% be passed to \!\@makecol!, and \!\pcol@flushcolumn! also takes care the +% skip above \Scfnote{}s. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\voidb@x!}] +% is a \!\box! register to be void ($\bot$) always. It is used to +% initialize \!\pcol@prespan! and \!\pcol@rightpage! at their declaration, +% and is referred to by the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! to make \!\pcol@currfoot! void unless \Scfnote{}s in +% \!\foot~ins! is saved into $\pp^f(p)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startpage! to let +% $\pp^i(\ptop)=\bot$ if the new \tpage{} does not have \spanning{} and +% $\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$ for all \fpage{}s and the new \tpage. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@outputelt! to initialize \!\@outputbox!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! to examine if $\S_c$ is empty. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! to let $\pp^f(0)=\bot$, and $\Celt^c=\bot$ if +% $\Celtshadow^c$ is undefined. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to let $\cc_c(\ft^b)=\bot$ if the column does +% not have \Mcfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! to let \!\footins! be void if so. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! to let $\cc_c(\ft^b)=\bot$ because the column $c$ +% does not have \Mcfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to let $\!\pcol@prespan!=\bot$ if a \mctext{} really +% starts from the top of a \colpage, and $\csts=\bot$ if the \colpage{} +% $\cc_c(\vb)$ to be restarted is non-empty. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@savecolorstack! to let $\csts=\bot$ or its first item be $\bot$ if +% $\CST^c$ or $\Celt^c$ is $\bot$, resepectively. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@savefootins! to let its argument macro have a void box if +% \!\@freelist! is exhausted. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! to initialize \!\@outputbox! and +% \!\pcol@rightpage! to be $\bot$ if the flushed page does not have +% \spanning{}, and to let $\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$ after putting it in the +% \lpage{} so that \!\pcol@output@end! will be unaware of the \scfnote{} and +% non-\Mgfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@flushfloats! to let $\!\pcol@rightpage!=\bot$ if \parapag{}ing is +% not in effect. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@end! to let $\!\pcol@rightpage!=\bot$ if +% the last page has nothing other than \spanning{} being \pwise{} floats +% and thus we don't have the right \parapag{}e. The macro also lets +% $\Celt^c=\bot$ for all $c$ and $\cst=\bot$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@com@flushpage! and \!\pcol@com@clearpage! gives the void box to +% \!\pcol@flushclear! as its argument to mean these macros are only aware +% of \CSIndex{ifpcol@flush} as the result of \pfcheck. The macro +% \!\endparacol! also does that if the footnote typesetting is \mgfnote. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@holdpg!}] +% is a \!\box! register to have the main vertical list when \!\output! is +% invoked with a special \!\penalty! code. It is let have that by +% \!\pcol@specialoutput!, and is referred to by \!\pcol@output@start! and +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! for \preenv{}, and by \!\pcol@output@switch! for the +% column from which we are leaving. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@outputbox!}] +% is a \!\box! register to have a partial or the complete ship-out image +% of a column or a page. The usages of the register are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@@makecol!, it has a \colpage{} made by \!\@makecol! for +% \!\pcol@flush~column! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@combinefloats!, it has a \colpage{} to which top and bottom +% floats are combined. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@cflt!, it has a \colpage{} to which top floats are combined. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@opcol!, it has the complete \colpage{} built by \!\@makecol!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@startpage!, it has the complete \fpage{} built by \!\@tryfcolumn!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@outputelt!, it has the complete (left parallel-) page to be +% shipped out by \!\@outputpage!. +% \Index{parallel-paging} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@outputpage@r!, it is temporarily made \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@rightpage! so that the box is shipped out by \!\pcol@@outputpage! +% being \LaTeX's \!\@outputpage! instead of the real \!\@outputbox!. +% +% \item\begin{Sloppy}{1700} +% In \!\pcol@output@start!, it has the \preenv{} built by +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol!. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@combinefootins!, it is let have the \preenv{} with footnotes. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, it has a flushed \colpage{} built by \!\@makecol! +% or a \fcolumn{} built by \!\@makefcolumn!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@flush! and \!\pcol@output@clear!, it has a flushed page +% built by \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! in which +% it has each of flushed \colpage{} built by \!\@makecol!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@flushfloats!, it has the complete (left parallel) page for +% flushed \fcolumn{}s. +%  +% \Index{parallel-paging} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@iflushfloats!, it has a \fcolumn{} built by +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@end!, it has the ship-out image of the \lpage{} of a +% \env{paracol} environment built by \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@tempboxa!}] +% is a \!\box! register for temporary use. The usages of the register are +% as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makecol!, it is used to decapsulate \!\box!|255| containing a +% broken \mctext{}. In the macro and \!\pcol@output@switch!, it is also +% used as a waste bascket to make \!\footins! void when it contains +% \Scfnote{}s in a non-\tpage. +% +% \item\begin{Sloppy}{2100} +% In \!\pcol@cflt! and \!\pcol@startpage!, it has top column-\slash +% \pwise{} floats combined by the application of +% \!\@comflelt!\slash\!\@comdblflelt! to \!\@toplist!\slash\!\@dbltoplist! +% respectively. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@phantom!$\$, it has an empty box whose height and depth are +% equal to those of the argument box $b$. +% +% \item +% By \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! and its callees \!\pcol@buildcselt@S! and +% \!\pcol@buildcselt!, it is let have the painted \bground{}s for columns, +% \csepgap{}s and \mctext{}s in a page, and then is put into the ship-out +% image of the page by \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! or +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats!. +% +% \item +% In \!\@outputpage!, it is let have the painted \bground{} of the right +% page referred to by its callee \!\pcol@outputpage@r!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@bg@paint@i!\Arg{body}$, it is let have painted \bground{}s +% built by $\arg{body}$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@bg@paintregion!\arg{a}\arg{c}$, it is let have painted +% \bground{} of the region $\bgr_a^{[c]}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@specialoutput!, it is used to discard the dummy \!\vbox! put by +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makenormalcol!, it is used to save \!\footins! into it and make +% it $\bot$ temporarily to exclude \mgfnote{} footnotes from \spanning{} for +% \preenv. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ifempty!$\arg{box}\arg{then}\arg{else}$, it is used to examine +% if $\arg{box}$ is empty. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@scancst!\arg{box}$ and \!\pcol@iscancst!, it is used to have +% what $\cst$ or $\csts$ has after the scan of $\arg{box}\in\{\cst,\csts\}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@savecolorstack!, it is used to have the \!\vbox! for $\Celt^c$ +% to be placed at the top of $\csts$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@deferredfootins!, it is used to have the first half split from +% $\df$ being the deferred footnotes to be \!\insert!ed. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text}, it is used to encapsulate $\arg{text}$ +% in it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, it is used to have a \!\vbox! to be \!\insert!ed +% for the update of $\Celt^c$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@set@color@push!, it is used to have a \!\vbox! to be \!\insert!ed +% to push $\celt_i$ or $\mcelt_{i,m}$ to $\cstraw$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! and \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop!, it is used to +% have a \!\vbox! to be \!\insert!ed to add $\celtpop_i$ or +% $\mceltpop_{i,m}$ to $\cstraw$. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Token Registers} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\!\output!}] +% is \TeX's primitive to have \!\output! routine. It is let have +% \!\pcol@output! as its sole token by \!\pcol@zparacol!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\everypar!}] +% is \TeX's primitive to have tokens inserted at the beginning of each +% paragarph. In \!\pcol@sptext! and \!\pcol@com@endcolumn!, it is +% \!\global!ized to keep its contents after the end of a group. In +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, its contents are broadcasted to $\cc_c(\ep)$ for +% all $c\In0\C$ if columns are \sync{}ed with a \mctext. Then these values +% or that simply given in a column are saved into $\cc_c(\ep)$ by +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, and then restored from it by \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\everyvbox!}] +% is \TeX's primitive to have tokens inserted at the beginning of each +% \!\vbox!. In \!\pcol@zparacol!, after tokens in it are saved into +% \!\pcol@everyvbox!, it is let have a \!\the!-reference to +% \!\pcol@everyvbox! and |\pcol@innertrue| to turn +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@inner}=\true$, and then the register itself is made +% \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@everyvbox!. In addition, it is let have tokens +% in \!\pcol@everyvbox! if a \!\global! assignment to the register is made +% in the \env{paracol} just having been closed. Another usage of this +% register is to insert a painted page \bground{} to the \!\vbox! to be +% \!\shipout! by \!\pcol@@outputpage! being \LaTeX's \!\@outputpage!, and is +% used for this purpose by \!\pcol@outputpage@l! and \!\pcol@outputpage@r!, +% and by \!\pcol@outputpage@ev! to nullify this special function for other +% inside \!\vbox!es. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@temptokena!}] +% is a \!\toks! register for temporary use. It is used in +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to broadcast \!\everypar! to $\cc_c(\ep)$ for all +% $c\In0\C$. +% +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Switches} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@twocolumn}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff multi-column pages are being typeset. It is +% turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@zparacol!, and then turned $\false$ by +% \!\endparacol!. In addition, it is turned $\false$ when \!\pcol@output! +% finds that the \!\output! request for a page break outside \env{paracol} +% is sneaked into our own \!\output! routine, in order to avoid that +% \LaTeX's original \!\output! routine misunderstands it is working on a +% two-columned document. The switch is examined by \LaTeX's own macros +% including old \!\end@dblfloat! kept in our own \!\pcol@end@dblfloat!. It +% is also examined by \!\pcol@zparacol! before being turned $\true$ to +% ensure it is $\false$ or to complain about the inappropriateness otherwise. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff the first column is being typeset. Its +% truth value is determined by \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to tell +% \!\pcol@@addmarginpar!, \!\pcol@getmparbottom@i! and \!\pcol@setmpbelt@i! +% the margin which a marginal note goes to. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@twoside}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff two-sided page typesetting is in effect and +% thus even numbered page may have their own left margins, headers and +% footers different from those for odd numbered pages. Besides the +% initialization by the main class file such as \textsf{article.cls} +% according to the class option |twoside|, the switch is \!\global!ly turned +% $\false$ by \!\pcol@twosided! for the case in which API macro \!\twosided! +% does not have `|p|' in its optional argument, and then \!\global!ly turned +% $\true$ by \!\pcol@twosided@p! which is invoked when the argument contains +% `|p|', or the API macro does not have the argument at all. Then the +% switch is referred to by \!\pcol@outputpage@l!, \!\pcol@outputpage@r! and +% \!\pcol@bg@swappage! to decide the left margin of even numbered pages, +% i.e., \!\evensidemargin! if the switch is $\true$ or \!\oddsidemargin! +% otherwise. The switch is also referred to by \!\pcol@com@cleardoublepage! +% to have a blank page if the switch is $\true$ and the command +% \!\cleardoublepage! is used in an odd-numbered page. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@reversemargin}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff \!\reversemarginpar! is specified to reverse +% the side which marginal notes go to. It is examined by +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! as a factor to decide the margin which a marginal +% note goes to, and by \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i! for the same purpose but for +% marginal notes in pre-environment or \postenv. +%  +% \Index{pre-environment stuff} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@mparswitch}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff it is specified by, for example, +% \texttt{twoside} option of a class such as \textsf{article}, that marginal +% notes in even numbered pages go to thier left margin. It is examined by +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i! as a factor to decide the margin which a maginal note +% goes to in pre-environment or \postenv{}. +%  +% \Index{pre-environment stuff} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@nobreak}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff the last paragraph is for a sectioning +% command. The switch is saved into $\cc_c(\sw)$ together with +% \CSIndex{if@afterindent} by \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, and then restored from +% it by \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol!. The macro \!\pcol@output@switch! refers to +% it to broadcast its value set by a \mctext{} to $\cc_c(\sw)$ for all +% $c\In0\C$, while \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@restartcolumn! insert +% $\!\penalty!=10000$ by \!\nobreak! if the switch is $\true$. This +% conditional \!\nobreak! is also done by \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, +% \!\pcol@set@color@push!, \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! and +% \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop! to avoid a break after an \!\insert!. The macro +% \!\pcol@zparacol! also exmaines the switch, but with the truth value in it +% given outside \env{paracol} environment, to invoke \!\@nbitem! if $\true$ +% when the macro finds the \env{paracol} environment to start is at the very +% beginning of a \env{list}-like environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@newlist}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ in the duration after a \env{list}-like +% environment starts and until its first \!\item! appears. The switch is +% examined by \!\pcol@zparacol! to know if the \env{paracol} environment to +% start is at the very beginning of a \env{list}-like environment and, if +% so, is turned $\false$ by the macro after it inserts vertical skips +% pretending the first \!\item! is given. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@inlabel}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ in the duration after an \!\item! appears and +% until its first paragraph is given. The switch is examined by +% \!\pcol@zparacol! together with \CSIndex{if@newlist} to know if the +% \env{paracol} environment to start is at the very beginning of a +% \env{list}-like environment ($\false$) and not \env{trivlist}-like one +% ($\true$). +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@afterindent}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff a sectioning commmand tells that the fisrt +% paragraph following it is to be indented. The switch is saved into +% $\cc_c(\sw)$ together with \CSIndex{if@nobreak} by \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, +% and then restored from it by \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol!. The macro +% \!\pcol@output@switch! refers to it to broadcast its value set by a +% \mctext{} to $\cc_c(\sw)$ for all $c\In0\C$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@fcolmade}}] +% is a switch to be $\true$ iff a \fcolumn{} or \fpage{} is built by +% \!\@tryfcolumn! or \!\@makefcolumn!. The value is set by \!\@tryfcolumn! +% for $\cc_c(\dl)$ is referred to by \!\pcol@output!, \!\pcol@startcolumn! +% and \!\pcol@freshpage!, while that for \!\@dbldeferlist! is referred to by +% \!\pcol@startpage!. The value set by \!\@makefcolumn! for $\cc_c(\dl)$ is +% referred to by \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, while that for \!\@dbldeferlist! is +% referred to by \!\pcol@output@clear!. The macros \!\pcol@flushfloats! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! also refer to the switch to build pages having only +% \fcolumn{}s and turn the switch $\true$ or $\false$ by themselves to know +% such paegs are still to be built or not. The macro \!\pcol@output@end! +% also turns the switch $\true$ if a \lpage{} will be followed by page(s) +% having \fcolumn{}s to tell that to \!\pcol@flushfloats!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{if@tempswa}}] +% is a switch for temporary use. The usages of the switch are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@checkshipped!, it is turned $\true$ iff $\S_c$ for all +% $c\In0\C$ have \colpage{}s to be shipped out, and then it is examined by +% \!\pcol@opcol!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@nextpage! and \!\pcol@nextpelt!, it is $\true$ until +% \!\pcol@nextpelt! finds the first $q$ such that $q>p$ and +% $\pp^h(q)\geq0$ to mean $q$ is not for a \fpage{}, so that we let $p=q$ +% to skip \fpage{}s following to the old $p$ if any. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@outputcolumns! and \!\pcol@outputelt!, it is $\true$ until +% \!\pcol@outputelt! finds the first $q$ such that $q\geq\pbase$ and +% $\pp^h(q)\geq0$ to mean $q$ is not for a \fpage{}, and the arguemnt of +% \!\pcol@outputcolumns! is 0 to mean that it is not for page flushing, so that +% we ship out $q$ and all \fpage{}s following it if any. +% +% \item +% In \!\@outputpage! it is let have the value of \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@painted} +% indicating if \bgpaint{} for the left page is done, and then it is +% examined by \!\pcol@outputpage@l! to determine whether the \bground{} is +% put into the final ship-out image. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makenormalcol!, it is $\true$ iff the footnotes in \preenv{} is +% included in \!\@outputbox! which the macro builds. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@switch!, at first it holds \CSIndex{if@nobreak} of the +% \mctext{} if columns are \sync{}ed with it to broadcast +% \CSIndex{if@nobreak} to all $\cc_c(\sw)$. Then it is turned $\true$ iff +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\true$ for \sync{}ation or +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}={\true}$ for flushing, so as to invoke +% \!\pcol@sync!. And finally, it is turned $\true$ iff +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}={\false}$ or $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\true$, so as +% to invoke \!\pcol@restartcolumn!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, it is turned $\true$ iff footnote typesetting +% is \scfnote{} and $p<\ptop$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@scancst!, it is initialized to be $\true$. Then it is referred +% to by \!\pcol@iscancst! for each $\celt\in\cstraw$ to update $\Celt^c$ and +% then turned $\false$ when the first one is found. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@savecolorstack!, it is $\true$ iff either $\cst\neq\bot$ or +% $\Celt^c\neq\bot$, i.e., $\CST^c$ to be saved is not $\bot$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@getmparbottom!, it is intialized to be $\false$ and then may be +% turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@getmpbelt! if it finds a gap between two marginal +% notes to accommodate that to be added, and then examined by +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom! to know the fact. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@sync!, it is turned $\true$ iff the \sync{}ed or flushed page +% can be built by \!\pcol@synccolumn!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makefcolumn! having non-empty $\cc_c(\tl)$, it is turned +% $\false$ iff the macro is acting on a column in the \lpage{}, $\cc_c(\dl)$ +% is emptied by the macro itself, and the total size of the floats to be put +% in the \fcolumn{} being built by the macro is less than \!\@fpmin!, to +% mean it is possible that the floats in $\cc_c(\tl)$ is put in the +% \fcolumn{} as top floats. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@measurecolumn! and \!\pcol@addflhd!, it is set to be $\false$ +% iff both top floats and the main vertical list are empty, so that +% \!\pcol@measureupdate! examines it for the update of $\VT$ and $\DT$. +% Then it is kept $\false$ iff both of footnotes and bottom floats are +% empty, so that \!\pcol@measurecolumn! examines it for the update of $\VP$ +% and \!\pcol@measureupdate! does for $\VPP$ and $\DP$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, it is made $\false$ iff $\ptop$ is the +% \lpage{}, $\VPP=-\infty$ to mean all columns are empty and +% $\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$, so as to make the \spanning{} in $\pp^i(\ptop)$ a +% float in \postenv{} if \CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats} also $\false$. Then it is +% kept $\false$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\false$ or $\pp^i(\ptop)=\bot$ +% to mean nothing is shipped out for \lpage{}. Then it is made $\false$ iff +% $\ptop$ is the \lpage{} without deferred floats and \Mgfnote{} +% typesetting is in effect, i.e., the switch is $\true$ iff \Scfnote{}s are +% put in the page to be flushed. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, it is turned $\true$ iff $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ +% and $\VPP=\pp^h(\ptop)$ to mean the floats in $\cc_c(\tl)$ should be put in +% a \fcolumn{} in the \lpage{} as usual. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@iflushfloats!, it is turned $\true$ iff one or more columns have +% non-empty $\cc_c(\dl)$ after shipping a page for \fcolumn{}s out, so that +% \CSIndex{if@fcolmade} is let have its value after scanning all columns. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@end!, it is turned $\true$ iff we built \fcolumn{}s, or +% the main vertical list in the \lpage{} is empty and the page is not the +% \spage, so that we create a new page for the \postenv. +% +% \item +% In \!\globalcounter!\marg{ctr}, it is turned $\true$ iff $\arg{ctr}\in\CG$ +% already. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@cmpctrelt!\arg{\theta}$, it is turned $\true$ iff $\theta$ is +% not in $\Cc_0$ or $\Val(\theta)\neq\val_0(\theta)$, so that $\theta$ is +% added to \!\@gtempa! being the list of \lcounter{}s to be synchronized. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@switchcolumn!$|[|d|]|$, it is turned $\false$ iff $0\leq d<\C$ +% so that we complain $c$ is invalid if the switch is $\true$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@ac@caption@def!\arg{s}\arg{t}$, \CSIndex{@tempswatrue} or +% \CSIndex{@tempswafalse} is given as its first argument $s$ by +% $\!\pcol@ac@caption@enable!$ or $\!\pcol@ac@caption@disable!$ respectively, +% so that $|\if@ac@caption@if@|{\cdot}t$ is made \!\let!-equal to $s$ and +% \!\pcol@ac@caption! examines it for enabling\slash disabling +% \!\addcontentsline! respectively. The macros \!\pcol@ac@caption@if@lof! +% and \!\pcol@ac@caption@if@lot! are initialized to be \!\let!-equal to +% \!\@tempswatrue! as the default. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, it is turned $\true$ iff we are in a \!\vbox! or +% in restricted horizontal or math mode. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i!, it is exmained if the root of the +% invocation chain is \!\backgroundcolor! which turns the switch $\true$, or +% \!\nobackgroundcolor! which turns it $\false$, to determine whether the +% \bground{} of a region is painted or not. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Macros} +% \label{sec:imp-tex-macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Procedural Macros} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{\CSIndex{par}}] +% is \TeX's primitive to end\slash start paragraphs, but may be modified by +% \LaTeX{} to have some special functionality occasionally. The macro +% \!\pcol@output! makes it \!\let!-equal to \hbox{\!\@@par!} in which the +% \TeX's orinigal definition is kept, while \!\pcol@zparacol! and +% \!\pcol@par! use it as is. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\space!}] +% is an API macro to have a space token. It is used in \!\pcol@output!, +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i! and +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! for warning messages, and in +% \!\pcol@def@extract@fil! to \!\def!ine the macro \!\pcol@extract@fil! +% having spaces in its argument specification. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\nointerlineskip!}] +% is an API macro to let $\!\prevdepth!=-1000$\,pt to inhibit \TeX's +% baseline progress mechanism. It is used in \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! to joint boxes +% without \!\baselineskip! between them, in \!\pcol@outputpage@ev! to +% suppress the \!\baselineskip! insertion after the first box of painted +% \bground{} in the final ship-out image, and in \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! +% for the same purpose for the box having painted \bground{}s. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\offinterlineskip!}] +% is an API macro to let $\!\baselineskip!=-1000$\,pt, $\!\lineskip!=0$ and +% $\!\lineskiplimit!=\!\maxdimen!$ to supress \!\baselineskip! insertion for +% all boxes following this macro. It is used in \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! to do +% that in the box in which painted \bground{}s are built. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\thepage!}] +% is an API macro to have the representation of the counter \counter{page}. +% It is used in \!\pcol@output! for a warning message. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\cs{the}{\cdot}\theta$}] +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% is an API macro to have the representation of the counter $\theta$. The +% macro is kept in $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% by \!\pcol@thectrelt! which also makes the macro \!\let!-equal to +% $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta{\cdot}0$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% if the \lrep{} of $\theta$ in the column 0 is defined by +% \!\definethecounter!. The macro \!\pcol@setctrelt! also makes this +% overriding for the column $c$ to which the macro belongs if +% $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% being the \lrep{} for $c$ is defined, while it makes $|\the|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% \!\let!-equal to $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% otherwise to give it its original definition. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\stepcounter!\<\theta\>$}] +% is an API macro to increment the counter $\theta$ and zero-clear its +% descendant counters. It is used in \!\pcol@startpage! for the counter +% \counter{page}, and in \!\pcol@iifootnotetext! for \counter{footnote}. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\nobreak!}] +% is an API macro to insert $\!\penalty!=10000$ to inhibit line or page +% breaks. It is used in \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, \!\pcol@set@color@push!, \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! +% and \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop! to meet the page-break inhibition request +% made by $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\addvspace!$\marg{skip}}] +% is an API macro to insert a vertical $\arg{skip}$ if +% $\!\lastskip!<\arg{skip}$, or a skip of $\arg{skip}+\!\lastskip!$ +% otherwise. The macro is used in \!\pcol@zparacol! when it finds the +% \env{paracol} environment to start is at the very beginning of a +% \env{list}-like environment, to insert \!\@topsep! instead of +% $\!\parskip!+\!\itemsep!$ going to be inserted by the first \!\item!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\addpenalty!\arg{pen}$}] +% is an API macro to insert a page break $\!\penalty!=\arg{pen}$ if +% $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}={\false}$. The \!\penalty! is inserted removing the +% last vertical skip which is reinserted after the \!\penalty!. The macro +% is used in \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@restartcolumn! to insert +% \!\interlinepenalty! if $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\false$, while +% \!\pcol@zparacol! uses it to insert \!\@beginparpenalty! when it finds the +% \env{paracol} environment to start is at the very beginning of a +% \env{list}-like environment. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footnotesize!}] +% is an API macro to set the font size for footnotes. It is used in +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! for footnote typesetting. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\rule!\oarg{\mbox{$r$}}$\Arg{w}\Arg{h}$}] +% is an API macro to draw a vertical rule of $w$ width and $h$ tall, +% optionally raised by $r$. It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to have the +% rule of $w=r=0$ and $h=\!\footnotesep!$ to make the first line of the +% footnote is at least as tall as \!\footnotesep!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\addcontentsline!\arg{file}\arg{sec}\arg{entry}$}] +% is an API macro to put \!\addtocontents! for the arguments to |.aux| file. +% The orignial definition of the macro is kept in +% \!\pcol@addcontentsline! so that \!\pcol@ac@disable@toc! and +% \!\pcol@ac@caption! make the macro regain its original definition after +% temporarily disabling its function by making it \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@gobblethree!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\marginpar!}\oarg{left}\marg{right}] +% is an API macro to put merginal note $\arg{left}$ or $\arg{right}$ to the +% left or right margin. In \!\pcol@zparacol! it is made \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@marginpar! for the emulation of \!\marginnote!, while its original +% version is kept in \!\pcol@@marginpar!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footnote!}\oarg{num}\marg{text}] +% is an API macro to give a footnote $\arg{text}$ optionally with its number +% $\arg{num}$. In \!\pcol@zparacol! it is made \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@footnote! to implement its starred version and the adjustment of +% \counter{footnote} at \Endparacol, while its original version is kept in +% \!\pcol@@footnote!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footnotemark!}\oarg{num}] +% is an API macro to give a footnote mark optionally with the number +% $\arg{num}$ which the mark represents. In \!\pcol@zparacol! it is made +% \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@footnotemark! to implement its starred version +% and the adjustment of \counter{footnote} at \Endparacol, while its +% original version is kept in \!\pcol@@footnotemark!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footnotetext!}\oarg{num}\marg{text}] +% is an API macro to give a footnote $\arg{text}$ optionally with its number +% $\arg{num}$ but without putting the mark in the footnoted text. In +% \!\pcol@zparacol! it is made \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@footnotetext! to +% implement its starred version, while its original version is kept in +% \!\pcol@@footnotetext!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\footnoterule!}] +% is an API macro to draw a horizontal line above footnotes, or to insert +% whatever it has above them. With \Scfnote{} typesetting, it is redefined +% in \!\pcol@zparacol! so that it refers to \!\textwidth! instead of +% \!\columnwidth! for drawing the horizontal line or whatever defined, while +% the original version is kept in \!\pcol@footnoterule!. Then it is used in +% \!\pcol@putfootins! to separate footnotes from the stuff above them, with +% the original or modified definition. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\newpage!}] +% is an API macro to break a page. It is used in \!\pcol@switchcol! as the +% argument of \!\pcol@visitallcols! to break the \colpage{}s visited in the +% \cscan{} when the \sync{}ed \cswitch{} requires explicit page breaks. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\dblfigrule!}] +% is an API macro to draw a horizontal line between the last \pwise{} +% floats and the main vertical list, or to insert whatever it has between +% them. The macro is used in \!\pcol@startpage! to build \spanning{} in +% the page $p$ in $\pp^b(p)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\topfigrule!}] +% is an API macro to draw a horizontal line between the last \cwise{} +% top float and the main vertical list, or to insert whatever it has between +% them. The macro is used in \!\pcol@cflt! and \!\pcol@synccolumn! to +% insert it below the last (real) top float. It is also made \!\let!-equal +% to \!\relax! temporarily by \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! when it put floats in +% a \fcolumn{} as top floats. Note that the macro and its bottom +% counterpart \!\botfigrule! should produce a vertical list whose total +% height and depth is 0, because \LaTeX's float mechanism and thus our +% macros believe so. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\normalcolor!}] +% is an API macro to have color specification stuff for normal coloring. +% The macro is used in \!\pcol@putfootins! to specify the color of footnotes +% to be put in \!\@outputbox!, in \!\normalcolumncolor!\oarg{c} to +% define that the default color of the column $c$ is the normal color, +% in \!\normalcolseprulecolor! to specify that the color for \cseprule{}s is +% \!\normalcolor!, and in the initial definition of \!\pcol@colseprulecolor! +% to give the default color for \cseprule{}s. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\color!}\oarg{mode}\marg{color}] +% is an API macro defined in coloring pacakges to start text coloring with +% $\arg{color}$ optionally with $\arg{mode}$. The macro is used in +% \!\pcol@xcolumncolor!\oarg{mode}\~\marg{color}\oarg{c} and +% \!\pcol@ycolumncolor!\marg{color}\oarg{c} to define the default color of +% the column $c$ is $\arg{color}$ optionally with $\arg{mode}$, in +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@x! and \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@y! to define the +% color of \cseprule{}s, and in \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@x! to define the +% color for \bgpaint{} of a region. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\pfmtname!}] +% is an API macro defined in p\LaTeX{} to have its format name |pLaTeX2e| +% (so far). It is used in the top level assignment of the constant switch +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@bfbottom}. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\PackageError!\arg{pkg}\arg{msg}\arg{hlp}$}] +% is a developer's API macro to stop the exectution showing the error +% message $\arg{msg}$ with the package identification $\arg{pkg}$ and the +% help mssage $\arg{hlp}$. The macro is used in the following macros; +% \!\pcol@ovf! on \!\@freelist! shortage; \!\pcol@set@color@push! on too +% many math-mode colorings; in \!\pcol@zparacol! on two-column +% typesetting outside \env{paracol} and illegal nesting of \env{paracol}; +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ on too large $x/y$; +% \!\pcol@switchcolumn! on invalid target column; \!\pcol@switchenv! on +% illegal \cswitch{} commands\slash environments in a \csenv; +% \!\addcontentsonly! on unknown contents type; \!\footnotelayout! on +% unknown layout; \!\pcol@twosided! on unknown two-sided typesetting +% feature; \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! on unknown region of \bgpaint; and in +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i! on a region not being a column or \csepgap{} +% but its ordinal being specified. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\PackageWarning!\arg{pkg}\arg{msg}$}] +% is a developer's API macro to report a warning message $\arg{msg}$ with +% the package identification $\arg{pkg}$. The macro is used in +% \!\pcol@ignore! to complain an API macro appears in \env{paracol} +% inappropriately, in \!\pcol@fntextbody! if the footnote is taller than +% $\!\textheight!-\!\skip!\!\footins!$, in \!\pcol@mn@warning! to show +% \!\marginnote! is emulated, and in \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i! and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! to complain +% \!\columncolor!\slash\!\normalcolumncolor!, +% \!\colseprulecolor!\slash\!\normalcolseprulecolor! or \!\background~color! +% is used without coloring packages respectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@@par!}] +% is an internal macro to keep \TeX's original primitive \CSIndex{par} in it. +% The macro is used in \!\pcol@output! to let \CSIndex{par} act with its +% original definition, and in \!\pcol@switchcol! and \!\pcol@flushclear! as +% the argument given to \!\pcol@visitallcols! to give \TeX's page builder +% the chance of page break in \cscan{}ning. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@height!}] +% is an internal macro having the keyword |height|. It is used in +% \!\pcol@buildcolsep~rule!, \!\pcol@buildcselt!, \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, and \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to draw a \!\hrule! for +% \cseprule{} in the first two, a \!\vrule! to be painted in the third, and +% an invisible \!\hrule! in the fourth and last. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@width!}] +% is an internal macro having the keyword |width|. It is used in +% \!\pcol@buildcolsep~rule!, \!\pcol@buildcselt!, \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, and \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to draw a \!\hrule! for +% \cseprule{} in the first two, a \!\vrule! to be painted in the third, and +% an invisible \!\hrule! in the fourth and last. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@plus!}] +% is an internal macro having the keyword |plus|. It is used in the +% following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! to \!\def!ine \!\@textbottom! with the body of a vertical +% skip with small infinite stretch and shrink. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! for a skip of the same amount in \!\@textbottom! +% above and that of negative amount to {\em move} the effect. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@hfil! for skips having 1\,|fil| infinite stretch with $\gap_c$ or +% $\gap_c/2$ to make it sure the series of columns and \csepgap{}s does not +% cause underfull. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! to put a $1\,|fil|$ infinte stretch below the +% main vertical list together with a small infinte shrink in the \colpage{} +% being flushed and having a \sync{}ation point, and a vertical skip with a +% small infinite stretch to push up the main vertical list above a +% \sync{}ation point. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! to add $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1000\,|pt|\ |minus|\ +% 1000\,|pt|$ to \!\@tempskipa! to ensure the register have stretch and +% shrink components. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@fill! to let $\!\@tempskipa!=0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ f\,|fil|$ as +% the infinite stretch factor of $f$. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% It is also used in the top level assignment of $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1\,|fil|\ +% |minus|\ 1\,|fil|$ to \!\@tempskipa! for the invocatoin of \!\pcol@defkw!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@minus!}] +% is an internal macro having the keyword |minus|. It is used in the +% following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! to \!\def!ine \!\@textbottom! with the body of a vertical +% skip with small infinite stretch and shrink. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! for a skip of the same amount and that of negative +% amount. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! to put a small infinite shrink together with a +% stretch of $1\,|fil|$ at the bottom of the main vertical list in a +% \colpage{} being flused and having a \sync{}ation point. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! to add $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1000\,|pt|\ |minus|\ +% 1000\,|pt|$ to \!\@tempskipa! to ensure the register have stretch and +% shrink components. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% It is also used in the top level assignment of $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1\,|fil|\ +% |minus|\ 1\,|fil|$ to \!\@tempskipa! for the invocatoin of \!\pcol@defkw!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\hb@xt@!}] +% is an internal macro having the sequence ``\!\hbox!| to|''. It is used in +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@iflushfloats! to +% put each \colpage{} in a \!\hbox! of \!\columnwidth! wide and to enclose +% all of them in a \!\hbox! of \!\textwidth! wide. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@namedef!\arg{cs}\arg{body}$}] +% is an internal macro to do $\!\def!|\|\arg{cs}\Arg{body}$. It is used in +% the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@zparacol! for \!\column*! and \!\pcol@com@column*!. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@remctrelt!\<\theta\>$ for $|\cl@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +% +% \item +% $\!\definethecounter!\<\theta\>\\arg{rep}$ for +% $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta{\cdot}c$, +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@loadctrelt!\<\theta\>\<\val_c(\theta)\>$ for +% $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@defcolumn! for \!\pcol@com@column*!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i! for $\!\pcol@colseprulecolor![{\cdot}c]$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +% +% \end{itemize} +%  +% We also use this macro in top level \!\def!initions of +% \!\pcol@com@nthcolumn*!, \!\pcol@com@leftcolumn*! and +% \!\pcol@com@rightcolumn*! for the starter of the environments +% \env{nthcolumn*}, \env{leftcolumn*} and \env{rightcolumn*}. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@nameuse!\arg{cs}$}] +% is an internal macro to do $|\|\arg{cs}$. It is used in the following +% macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bg@addext!\arg{z}\Arg{s}\Arg{d}$ for +% $|\pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}\{a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c,a\}$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@} +% {\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@columnleft! for $|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ and +% $|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@columnwidth! for $|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@columnsep! for $|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@ccuse! for +% $\Celt^c=|\pcol@columncolor@box|{\cdot}c$ or +% $\Celtshadow^c=|\pcol@columncolor|{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +% +% \item +% \!\column*! for \!\pcol@com@column*!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@zparacol! for $|\pcol@colpream|{\cdot}0$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colpream} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@storectrelt!\<\theta\>$ for $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@cmpctrelt!\<\theta\>$ for $|\c@|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\c@} +%  +% and $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@synccounter! for $|\pcol@counters|{\cdot}c$ for the column $c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@counters} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@syncctrelt!\<\theta\>$ for $|\c@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\c@} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@stepcounter!\<\theta\>$ for $|\pcol@counters|{\cdot}c$ for the +% column $c$, +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@counters} +%  +% and for $|\cl@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@switchcol! to the column $c$ for $|\pcol@colpream|{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colpream} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@aconlyelt!\\$ for $|\pcol@ac@def@|{\cdot}t$. +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@ac@def@lof}\SpecialIndex{\pcol@ac@def@lot} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@ac@def@lof!\arg{eord}$ and $\!\pcol@ac@def@lot!\arg{eord}$ +% for $|\pcol@ac@caption@|{\cdot}\~\arg{eord}$. +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@ac@caption@enable} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@ac@caption@disable} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@ac@caption!\arg{type}|[|\arg{lcap}|]|\arg{cap}$ for +% $|\pcol@ac@caption@if@|{\cdot}t$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@ac@caption@if@lof} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@ac@caption@if@lot} +%  +% and for $|\ext@|{\cdot}\~\arg{type}$. +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ext@figure}\SpecialIndex{\ext@table} +% +% \item +% $\!\footnotelayout!\Arg{l}$ for $|pcol@fnlayout@|{\cdot}l$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{l}{\pcol@fnlayout@} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@fnlayout@c} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@fnlayout@p} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@fnlayout@m} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@twosided!|[|T|]|$ for $|pcol@twosided@|{\cdot}t$ where $t\in T$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{t}{\pcol@twosided@} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@twosided@p} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@twosided@c} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@twosided@m} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@twosided@b} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@gobble!\arg{arg}$}] +% discards its argument $\arg{arg}$. It is used in \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! and \!\pcol@set@color@push! for temporarily letting +% \!\aftergroup! be \!\@gobble! to nullify \!\aftergroup! with +% \!\reset@color! invoked in \!\pcol@set@color!, being the original version +% of \!\set@color!, and in \!\pcol@zparacol! to make \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! +% \!\let!-equal to \!\@gobble! to nullify it if any coloring packages have +% not been loaded. In addition, the macros \!\pcol@F! and \!\pcol@Fe! for +% logging are made \!\let!-equial to \!\@gobble! at the top level to nullify +% them. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@ifundefined!\arg{cs}\arg{then}\arg{else}$}] +% \begin{Hfuzz}{0.8pt}% +% is an internal macro to do $\arg{then}$ or $\arg{else}$ if $\arg{cs}$ is +% undefined or defined respectively. +% It is used in the following macros; +% $\!\pcol@bg@paintregion!\arg{a}\arg{c}$ to examine if either +% $|\pcol@bg@color@|{\cdot}a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c$ or +% $|\pcol@bg@color@|{\cdot}a$ is defined; +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +%  +% \!\add~contentsonly!$\\$ to stop the execution if +% $|\pcol@ac@def@|{\cdot}t$ is not defined; +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{t}{\pcol@ac@def@} +%  +% \!\footnote~layout!$\Arg{l}$ to stop the execution if +% $|\pcol@fnlayout@|{\cdot}l$ is not defined; +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{l}{\pcol@fnlayout@} +%  +% $\!\pcol@twosided!|[|T|]|$ to stop the execution if $T$ has $t$ +% such that $|\pcol@twosided@|{\cdot}t$ is not defined; +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{t}{\pcol@twosided@} +%  +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! to stop the execution if $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ +% is not defined for a region $a$; +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@@} +%  +% and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i! to stop the execution if +% $|\pcol@bg@mayhavecol|{\cdot}a$ is not defined for a region $a$. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@ifnextchar!\arg{char}\arg{then}\arg{else}$}] +% is an internal macro to do $\arg{then}$ or $\arg{else}$ if the character +% following to the macro is $\arg{char}$ or not respectively. It is used in +% the following macros to examine if they are followed by a `\texttt{\LB}'. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\paracol!, +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, +% \!\columnratio!, +% \!\pcol@com@column*!\hbox{ (initial definition)}, +% \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@iswitchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@adjustfnctr!, +% \!\pcol@ifootnotetext!, +% \!\twosided!, +% \!\marginparthreshold!, +% \!\columncolor!, +% \!\pcol@columncolor!, +% \!\normalcolumncolor!. +% \!\colseprulecolor!, +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor!, +% \!\normalcolseprulecolor!, +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor!, +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@w!. +% \end{quote} +% It is also used in \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii! and +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iv! if they are followed by a `\texttt{\LP}'. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@ifstar!\arg{then}\arg{else}$}] +% is an internal macro to do $\arg{then}$ or $\arg{else}$ if the character +% following to the macro is `|*|'. It is used in \!\pcol@yparacol!, +% \!\globalcounter!, \!\pcol@switchcolumn!, \!\pcol@footnote!, +% \!\pcol@footnotemark! and \!\pcol@footnotetext! to examine if the optional +% `|*|' is specified. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@whilesw!\arg{sw}\cs{fi}\arg{body}$}] +% is an internal macro to iterate $\arg{body}$ while the switch $\arg{sw}$ +% is $\true$. It is used in \!\pcol@output!, \!\pcol@startpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@clear!, \!\pcol@flushfloats!, \!\pcol@freshpage! and +% \!\pcol@output@end! to iterate building process of \fcolumn{}s or +% \fpage{}s while $\CSIndex{if@fcolmade}=\true$, and in \!\pcol@switchcol! +% and \!\pcol@flushclear! to iterate the height check of \sync{}ed or +% flushed pages while $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\true$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@whilenum!\arg{ifnum}\cs{do}\arg{body}$}] +% is an internal macro to interate $\arg{body}$ while the integer comparison +% expression $\arg{ifnum}$ is $\true$. The macro is used in the following +% macros to iterate their own procedures for all columns $c\In0\C$. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@checkshipped!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@freshpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@synccounter!, +% \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, +% \!\pcol@stepcounter!, +% \!\pcol@visitallcols!. +% \end{quote} +%  +% The macro is also used in the following macros for the ranges following +% macro name, where $(\Cfrom,\Cto)\in\{(0,\CL),(\CL,\C)\}$ and $c$ is the +% column they are working on. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! $\LBRP\CBfrom{\Cto{-}1}$\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@columnleft! $\LBRP\CBfrom{c}$\\ +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! $\LBRP\Cfrom{c'}$ ($c'\in\{c,\;\Cto-(c-\Cfrom)-1\}$)\\ +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$\\ +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$\\ +% \!\pcol@setcw@scan! $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$ +% \end{quote} +%  +% The other users have a little bit more complicated range as follows. +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! to iterate \fcolumn{} building for a column $c$ in +% pages $q$ such that $q\in(\cc_c(\vb^p),\ptop)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! to make assignment of $\w_c$ for +% $c\In{\min(\Cfrom{+}k,\Cto{-}1)}{\,\Cto}$ where $k$ is the number of +% fractions given as the first or second argument of +% \!\columnratio! and kept in \!\pcol@columnratioleft! or +% \!\pcol@columnratioright!, respectively. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ to calculate +% $\lceil{y/2^{k_2+k_3}}\rceil$ finding $k_3$ by iterating $y/2$ until the +% result becomes less than $2^{15}$, to calculate $z'/2^k$ with the range +% $\LBRP0k$, to calculate $z'/2^{k-16}$ with the range $\LBRP0{\,k{-}16}$, +% and to calculate $z'\cdot2^{16-k}$ with the range $\LBRP0{\,16{-}k}$, +% where $z'\cdot2^{16-k}=Z=z\times1\,|pt|$ and $k_2$, $k_3$ and $k$ are +% scaling parameters for good approximation. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@whiledim!\arg{ifdim}\cs{do}\arg{body}$}] +% is an internal macro to interate $\arg{body}$ while the dimensional +% comparison expression $\arg{ifdim}$ is $\true$. The macro is used in +% $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ twice, at first to find +% $k_1=\min\Set{k}{x\cdot2^k\geq2^{13}\,|pt|}$ and to have $x\cdot2^{k_1}$, +% and then to find $k_2=\max\Set{k}{y\bmod2^k=0}$ and to have $y/2^{k_2}$. +% +% \item[$\Uidx{\!\@for!}\arg{cs}\texttt{:=}\arg{list}\cs{do}\arg{body}$] +% is an internal macro to iterate $\arg{body}$ for each element of the +% comma-separated $\arg{list}$ letting $\arg{cs}$ have the element. The +% macro is used in \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! to scan its argument +% $\arg{ratio}$ defined by \!\columnratio!, and in \!\pcol@setcw@scan! to +% scan its argment $\arg{spec}$ defined by \!\setcolumnwidth!. +% +% \item[$\Uidx{\!\@tfor!}\arg{cs}|:=|\arg{list}\cs{do}\arg{body}$] +% is an internal macro to iterate $\arg{body}$ for each non-space token in +% $\arg{list}$ letting $\arg{cs}$ have the token. The macro is used in +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!, \!\pcol@setcw@getspec! and \!\pcol@twosided! to scan +% their arguments, in \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! to scan a column\slash +% gap specification to remove spaces from it, and in +% $\!\pcol@twosided!|[|T|]|$ to scan all tokens being two-sided typesetting +% features in $T$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@next!\arg{elm}\arg{lst}\arg{suc}\arg{fail}$}] +% is an internal macro to remove the first element from $\arg{lst}$, +% \!\def!ine $\arg{elm}$ to have the first element, and then do $\arg{suc}$, +% if $\arg{lst}$ is not empty. Otherwise, it performs $\arg{fail}$. The +% macro is used in the following macros to obtain an \!\insert! from +% \!\@freelist!. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@opcol! for the completed \colpage{}. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startpage! for \fpage{}s and \spanning{} for \pwise{} top +% floats. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! for the \preenv{}, and \colpage{}s and $\Celt^c$ of +% all columns. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@switch! for the \colpage{} from which we are leaving. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@iscancst! for $\Celt^c$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@savefootins! for footnotes. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! for \fcolumn{}s and the empty \colpage{} in $\ptop$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! for an \mvlfloat{} on a \sync{}ation if its point +% defined by a column whose main vertical list is empty. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@end! for the \pwise{} floats in the \lpage{} if the +% main vertical list of the page is empty. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! for $\Celt^c$. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% The macro is also used in \!\pcol@ioutputelt! to obtain completed +% \colpage{}s from $\S_c$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{% +% $\!\@xnext!\cs{@elt}\arg{car}\arg{cdr}\cs{@@}\arg{first}\arg{rest}$}] +% is an internal macro to remove the first element $|\@elt|\arg{car}$ from a +% list in the form of $|\@elt|\,e_1\,\cdots\,|\@elt|\,e_n$ where +% $\arg{cdr}=|\@elt|\,e_2\,\cdots\~\,|\@elt|\,e_n$ and |\def|ine +% $\arg{first}$ as $\arg{car}$ and globally |\def|ine $\arg{rest}$ as +% $\arg{cdr}$. It is used in \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to get the first element +% of \!\@currlist! being a \!\insert! for a right marginal note without +% modifying \!\@currlist!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@cons!\arg{lst}\arg{elm}$}] +% is an internal macro to add $\!\@elt!\arg{elm}$ to the tail of $\arg{lst}$. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! to add $\spt(H,h)$ to the tail of $\pp^s(\ptop)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@opcol! to add the completed \ccolpage{} $\cc_c(\vb)$ to $\S_c$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startpage! to add $\pp(\ptop-1)$ and \fpage{}s to $\PP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@outputelt! to return \spanning{} $\pp^i(q)$ in a shipped-out \fpage{} +% $q$ to \!\@freelist!, or to add $\pp(q)$ to $\PP$ if the page $q$ is kept. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! to return \spanning{} $\pp^i(q)$, \Scfnote{}s +% $\pp^f(q)$ and/or \colpage{}s $\s_c(q)$ for all $c\In0C$ in a shipped-out +% page $q$ to \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! to return the \ccolpage{} $\cc_0(\vb)$ to +% \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to add $\spt(H,h)$ to the tail of $\pp^s(\ptop)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! to return the \ccolpage{} $\cc_c(\vb)$ to be resumed, +% and its footnotes $\cc_c(\ft)$ if any, to \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@getmparbottom!\\$ to add +% $\mpar(\max(t,b_n),\max(t,b_n){+}h)$ to the tail of the list +% $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$, and its callee +% $\!\pcol@getmpbelt!\\$ to add $\mpar(t_i,b_i)$ or +% $\mpar(\max(t,b_{i-1}),\max(t,b_{i-1}){+}h)$ to the so-far tail of the +% list in rebuilding. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! to return footnotes $\cc_c(\ft)$ in the \ccolpage{} +% of $c$ to be flushed to \!\@freelist! if any, and to add the flushed +% \colpage{} and \fcolumn{}s to $\S_c$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makefcolelt! to add a float to \!\@toplist! or $\cc_c(\dl)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! to add an \mvlfloat{} for \sync{}ation to +% $\cc_c(\tl)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! to return \spanning{} $\pp^i(\ptop)$ and/or +% \Scfnote{}s $\pp^f(\ptop)$ in the top page to be flushed to \!\@freelist! +% if any. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! to return \Mcfnote{}s in $\cc_c(\ft)$ s.t.\ +% $\cc_c(\vb^p)=\ptop$ to \!\@freelist! if any. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@end! to return $\pp^f(\ptop)$, all \ccolpage{}s +% $\cc_c(\vb)$, and all $\Celt^c\neq\bot$ to \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! to add a \pwise{} float in \!\@currbox! to +% \!\@dbldeferlist!. +% +% \item +% $\!\globalcounter!\<\theta\>$ to add a \gcounter{} $\theta$ to $\CG$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@iremctrelt!\<\theta\>$ to add a \lcounter{} $\theta$ to $\CTL$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@storectrelt!\<\theta\>$ to add a pair $\<\theta,\val_c(\theta)\>$ +% to $\Cc_c$ for a column $c$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@savectrelt!\<\theta\>$ to add a pair $\<\theta,\val(\theta)\>$ to +% $\Cc_c$ for a column $c$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@cmpctrelt!\<\theta\>$ to add a counter $\theta$ to the list of +% \lcounter{}s to be synchronized. +% +% \item +% $\!\addcontentsonly!\\$ to add a pair $\$ to $\T$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! to add a region whose \bground{} is painted to +% \!\pcol@bg@defined!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@cdr!\\\cdots\\cs{@nil}$}] +% is an internal macro to be expanded to $\\cdots\$. It is used +% in $\!\pcol@getcurrpinfo!\arg{cs}$ to extract $\pp(\ptop)$ from +% $\!\pcol@currpage!=\!\@elt!\arg{\pp(\ptop)}$ and to \!\def!ine $\arg{cs}$ +% letting it have $\pp(\ptop)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\protected@edef!\arg{macro}$\marg{body}}] +% is an internal macro to do \!\edef!$\arg{macro}$\marg{body} with the +% \!\protect!ion so that \!\protect!$\arg{cs}$ is kept in the expansion. It +% is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to \!\edef!ine \!\@currentlabel!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@latex@warning@no@line!\arg{msg}$}] +% is an internal macro to report a warning message $\arg{msg}$ without the +% line number in which the cause lies. It is used in \!\pcol@output! if +% a page with floats and very short main vertical list is built. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@eha!}] +% is an internal macro having a help message saying the command causing an +% error is ignored. It is used in \!\pcol@zparacol!, \!\pcol@setcw@calcf!, +% \!\pcol@switchcolumn!, \!\pcol@switchenv!, and \!\addcontentsonly! as the +% argument of \!\PackageError!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@ehb!}] +% is an internal macro having a help message saying the error causes a +% serious problem. It is used in \!\pcol@ovf!, \!\pcol@zparacol! and +% \!\pcol@set@color@push! as the argument of \!\PackageError!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@parmoderr!}] +% is an internal macro to complain about misplacement of a macro or +% environment which is expected to appear in ``outer par mode''. +% It is used in \!\pcol@zparacol! if it finds $\CSIndex{ifinner}=\true$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@Esphack!}] +% is an internal macro to put back the horizontal skip and space factor +% saved by \!\@bsphack! at the end of an environment. It is used in +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\reset@font!}] +% is an internal macro \!\let!-equal to \!\normalfont! to use a starndard +% font. It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! for footnote typesetting. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\set@color!}] +% is an internal macro to start coloring of texts following it. By default +% it is \!\relax! but may have a definition to put a \!\special! for +% coloring with the color in \!\current@color!. In the following macros, it +% is examined if $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$ and/or some local definition is +% given to \!\set@color!. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@output! lets $\!\set@color!=\!\pcol@set@color!$ i.e., lets it +% regain its original definition because we don't need any special +% operations in \!\output! routine. +% +% \item +% \!\@outputpage! performs \bgpaint{} if $\!\set@color!\neq\!\relax!$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@zparacol! performs set-up operations for text coloring, including +% making \!\set@color! \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@set@color@push! saving +% its original definition into \!\pcol@set@color!, and enabling \bgpaint{} +% macros if $\!\set@color!\neq\!\relax!$, while these \bgpaint{} macros are +% nullified otherwise. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! complains that no color packages have been loaded if +% \!\set@color!${}={}$\!\relax!, and then otherwise temporarily lets it be +% the original saved in \!\pcol@set@color! to \!\insert! a \!\vbox! to +% update $\Celt^c$ or to do the update immediately. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@iicolumncolor! temporarily lets $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$ so that +% \!\color! or \!\normalcolor! invoked in the macro just defines +% \!\current@color! to be set into $\Celtshadow^c$ without doing any other +% coloring operations. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i! complains that no color packages have been +% loaded if $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$, while otherwise the macro temporarily +% lets $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$ to invoke \!\color! (or \!\normalcolor!) to +% check if its arguments are properly given. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! complains that no color packages have been +% loaded if $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$, while otherwise its descendent +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@x! temporarily lets +% $\!\set@color!=\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@y!$ to \!\def!ine +% $|\pcol@bg@|\~|color@|a[|@|{\cdot}c]$ to be \!\current@color!. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\reset@color!}] +% is an internal macro to finish text coloring started by \!\set@color!. By +% default it is undefined but may have some definition to put a \!\special! +% to finish coloring. It is used in \!\pcol@clearcolorstack! so as to apply +% it to all elements in $\CST^c$, in \!\pcol@iscancst! to put it to the +% main vertical list in the case that $\Celt^c$ was $\bot$ and then updated, +% in \!\pcol@icolumncolor! to apply it to all elements in $\CSTshadow^c$, +% and in \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! and \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop! to have an +% uncoloring \!\special! in the \!\vbox! for $\celt_i$ and $\mcelt_{i,m}$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\color@begingroup!}] +% is an internal macro to open a group in which a color is specified. It is +% used in \!\pcol@putfootins! to enclose footnotes with \!\normalcolor!, and +% in \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text} to enclose the coloring in the footnote +% $\arg{text}$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\color@endgroup!}] +% is an internal macro to close a group in which a color is specified. It is +% used in \!\pcol@putfootins! to enclose footnotes with \!\normalcolor!, and +% in \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text} to enclose the coloring in the footnote +% $\arg{text}$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@stpelt!\<\theta\>$}] +% is an internal macro to zero-clear the counter $\theta$ for the +% implementation of \!\stepcounter!. It is used in \!\pcol@stepcounter! to +% clear the descendent counters of a \gcounter{} $\cg$ listed in +% $|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\cg$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@cl@} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@nbitem!}] +% is an internal macro to insert a vertical skip of +% $\!\@outerparskip!-\!\parskip!$ above the first \!\item! of a +% \env{list}-like environment when $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$. It is used +% by \!\pcol@zparacol! when it finds the \env{paracol} environment to start +% is at the very beginning of a \env{list}-like environment and +% $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@parboxrestore!}] +% is an internal macro to set up typesetting paramenters for paragraphs +% encapsulated in a box. It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! for paragraphs +% in a footnonte. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@finalstrut!}$\arg{box}$] +% is an internal macro to add an invisible vertical rule whose depth is that +% of a $\arg{box}$. It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to make the last line +% of the footnotes is as deep as \!\strutbox! at shallowest. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@sect!}] +% is an internal macro to implement sectioning commands. The original +% definition of the macro is kept in \!\pcol@ac@enable@toc!, while +% \!\pcol@ac@def@toc! makes it \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@ac@enable@toc! or +% \!\pcol@ac@disable@toc!, the latter of which uses the original version +% temporarily disabling \!\addcontentsline!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@svsechd!}] +% is an internal macro (locally) \!\def!ined in \!\@sect! and \!\@ssect! to +% keep the section header of a sectioning command such as \!\paragraph! +% which puts the header as the leading text of the paragraph following the +% command rather than putting it as an individual paragraph. The macro is +% \!\global!ized in \!\pcol@sptext! so that it is properly referred to in +% \!\everypar! for the paragraph led by the text in case that a \mctext{} +% has the sectioning command only and thus the \!\def!inition of the macro +% must survive after we close the group in which the \mctext{} is put. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@svsec!}] +% is an internal macro (locally) \!\def!ined in \!\@sect! to keep +% \!\thesection! etc.\ to be displayed as the leading part of the section +% header. The macro is \!\global!ized in \!\pcol@sptext! together with +% \!\@svsechd! because it is in the body of \!\@svsechd!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@caption!}] +% is an internal macro to implement \!\caption!. The original definition of +% the macro is kept in \!\pcol@ac@caption@latex!, while +% \!\pcol@ac@caption@def! makes it \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@ac@caption! +% which uses the original version temporarily disabling \!\addcontentsline! +% if necessary. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\end@float!}] +% is an internal macro to close a \cwise{} float environment. It is used in +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! (but never invoked because we havd \cs{if@twocolumn} +% true always). +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\end@dblfloat!}] +% is an internal macro to close a \pwise{} float environment. It is replaced +% with our own \!\pcol@end@dblfloat!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@endfloatbox!}] +% is an internal macro to close a \!\vbox! for a float. It is used in +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@largefloatcheck!}] +% is an internal macro to examine if a float is too large. It is used in +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@floatplacement!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to reinitialize \cwise{} +% float placement parameters. It is used in our own version of it, +% \!\pcol@floatplacement!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@dblfloatplacement!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to reinitialize \pwise{} +% float placement paramenters. It is used in \!\pcol@startpage! and +% \!\pcol@output@clear! prior to processing \pwise{} floats in +% \!\@dbldeferlist!. As discussed in +% item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@dblfloatplacement}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}, this macro in 2015 or later version of +% \LaTeX{} lets $\!\f@depth!=|1sp|$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@xympar!}] +% is an interal macro to perform the last operations for \!\marginpar!. In +% \!\pcol@zparacol! it is made \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@xympar! for the +% emulation of \!\marginnote!, while its original version is kept in +% \!\pcol@@xympar!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\p@footnote!}] +% is an internal macro to have the prefix to \!\thefootnote! in the printed +% reference of the counter \counter{footnote}. It is used in +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! to produce \!\@currentlabel!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@thefnmark!}] +% is an internal macro to have \!\thefootnote!\footnote{ +%  +% Or \cs{thempfootnote} in \env{minipage} environment.}. +%  +% It is used in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to produce \!\@currentlabel!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@footnotetext!}\marg{text}] +% is an internal macro to implement \!\footnote! and \!\footnotetext! for +% $\arg{text}$. In \!\pcol@zparacol!, it is made \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@fntext!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@makefntext!}\marg{fn}] +% is an internal macro to typeset the footnote $\arg{fn}$. It is used in +% \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text} to typeset the footnote $\arg{text}$ with +% some other stuff. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@emptycol!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to put back an empty page to +% the main vertical list. It is used \!\pcol@output! if a page with floats +% and very short main vertical list is built. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@specialoutput!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to process an \!\output! +% request made by \LaTeX's original \!\clearpage!, $\!\end!\Arg{float}$ and +% \!\marginpar!. It is used in \!\pcol@specialoutput! to process the +% request for floats or marginal notes. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@opcol!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to output a page or to keep +% the first column until the second one is completed. This macro is used in +% \!\pcol@output! to process a sneaked \!\output! request from outside of +% \env{paracol}, and in \!\pcol@output@end! for the case \pwise{} floats +% are left at \Endparacol{} and they are put in \fpage{}s. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@makecol!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to build the ship-out +% image of a column in \!\@outputbox! consisting of top floats, main +% vertical list in \!\box!|255|, footnotes in \!\footins!, and bottom +% floats\footnote{ +%  +% In p\LaTeX, the order of footnotes and bottom floats are reversed.}. +%  +% It is used in \!\pcol@output! to process a sneaked \!\output! request +% from outside of \env{paracol}, in \!\pcol@@makecol! for a \colpage{} to be +% flushed by \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, in +% \!\pcol@makecol! for an ordinary \colpage{}, and in \!\pcol@output@start! +% and \!\pcol@makenormalcol! for \preenv{}. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@textbottom!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to be put at the bottom of +% \!\@outputbox! in which a \colpage{} is stored, by \!\@makecol!. This +% macro is temporarily re\!\def!ined by \!\pcol@makecol! for a \colpage{} +% having \sync{}ation points so that it has a vertical skip of inifinite +% stretch and shrink to push up/down the stuff below the last \sync{}ation +% point in order to adjust its top to the point. After that, its original +% definition kept in \!\pcol@textbottom! is restored. Another modifiers of +% the macro are as follows; \!\pcol@makenormalcol! to make the macro +% \!\let!-equal to \!\relax! temporarily to avoid the insertion of whatever +% the macro has in \!\@makecol!; and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! to let the +% macro have \!\vfil! temporarily so that empty columns in a \lpage{} are +% made {\em full size} without underfull. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@outputpage!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to output a page kept in +% \!\@outputbox! together with the header and footer. The original +% definition of this macro is saved in \!\pcol@@outputpage! to be used in +% \!\pcol@outputpage@l! and \!\pcol@outputpage@r! being callees of our own +% revised version of \!\@outputpage!. Therefore, any \!\output! request to +% result in page ship-out reaches our own \!\@outputpage! and then \LaTeX's +% one after we perform operations for \parapag{}ing and \bgpaint{} onto the +% ship-out image. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@combinefloats!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to combine top and bottom +% floats in \!\@toplist! and \!\@botlist! respectively with \!\@outputbox! +% in which the main vertical list and footnotes\footnote{ +%  +% In p\LaTeX, footnotes are not in \cs{@outputbox} because of the reversal of +% footnotes and bottom floats.} +%  +% have been put by \!\@makecol!, and to have the result in \!\@outputbox! +% again. In \!\pcol@zparacol!, it is made \!\let!-equal to our own +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! so that \!\@makecol! and \!\pcol@makenormalcol! +% uses it instead of the original one. However, if \!\pcol@output! finds +% that the \!\output! request for a page break outside \env{paracol} is +% sneaked into our own \!\output! routine, it makes this macro \!\let!-equal +% to \!\pcol@@combinefloats! in which \LaTeX's version is kept so that +% \LaTeX's original \!\output! routine works perfectly as original. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@cflt!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to put all top floats in +% \!\@toplist! and related stuff such as the vertical skip of +% \!\textfloatsep! into \!\@outputbox! together with its old contents being +% the main vertical list and footnotes +%  +% \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}\footnotemark. +%  +% It is used in \!\pcol@combinefloats! if the \colpage{} being processed +% does not have \sync{}ation points. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@cflb!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to put all bottom floats in +% \!\@botlist! and related stuff such as the vertical skip of +% \!\textfloatsep! into \!\@outputbox! together with its old contents being +% top floats, the main vertical list and footnotes +%  +% \addtocounter{footnote}{-1}\footnotemark. +%  +% It is used in \!\pcol@combinefloats!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@comflelt!\arg{flt}$}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to put $\arg{flt}$ being a +% \cwise{} top or bottom float to the tail of \!\@tempboxa! which +% finally has all top\slash bottom floats in a column. It is used in +% \!\pcol@cflt! to apply it to each element of \!\@toplist!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@comdblflelt!\arg{flt}$}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to put $\arg{flt}$ being a +% \pwise{} float to the tail of \!\@tempboxa! which finally has the +% \spanning{} for \pwise{} floats. It is used in \!\pcol@startpage! to +% apply to each element of \!\@dbltoplist! to have the \spanning. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@startcolumn!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine which tries to build a +% \fcolumn{} for the floats in \!\@deferlist! and, if the column +% is not built, tries to move floats to \!\@toplist! and \!\@botlist!. This +% macro is used in \!\pcol@output! to process a sneaked \!\output! request +% from outside of \env{paracol}, and in \!\pcol@output@end! for the case +% \pwise{} floats are left at \Endparacol{} after which they become +% \cwise{} ones. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@tryfcolumn!\arg{lst}$}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine which examines if a \fcolumn{} +% or a \fpage{} can be built with some floats in $\arg{lst}$ and, if so, +% builds the page in \!\@outputbox! removing floats put in the page from +% $\arg{lst}$. It is used in \!\pcol@startpage! for \pwise{} floats in +% \!\@dbldeferlist!, and in \!\pcol@startcolumn! for \cwise{} floats in +% $\cc_c(\dl)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@scolelt!\arg{flt}$}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine which examines if a +% \cwise{} float $\arg{flt}$ can be added to \!\@toplist! or +% \!\@botlist! being the list of the floats to be put at the top or bottom +% of a page respectively. Then, if the examination succeeds, $\arg{flt}$ is +% added to \!\@toplist! or \!\@botlist!, while it is added to +% \!\@deferlist! otherwise. It is used in \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! to +% apply to each element of (the copy of) $\cc_c(\dl)$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@sdblcolelt!\arg{flt}$}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine which examines if a +% \pwise{} float $\arg{flt}$ can be added to \!\@dbltoplist! being the +% list of the floats to be put at the top of a page, and if so, adds +% $\arg{flt}$ to \!\@dbltoplist!, while it is added to \!\@dbldeferlist! or +% \!\@deferlist! depending on \LaTeX's version otherwise as discussed in +% item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@addtodblcol}) of \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}. +% It is used in \!\pcol@startpage! to apply to each element of (the copy of) +% \!\@dbldeferlist!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@addmarginpar!}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to add a marginal note. Its +% original definition is kept in \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! and used in +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! being our own \!\@addmarginpar!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@makefcolumn!\arg{lst}$}] +% is an internal macro for \!\output! routine to build a \fcolumn{} with +% some floats at the head of a float list $\arg{lst}$ and to remove the +% floats from the list. It is used in \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! for $\cc_c(\dl)$ of \cwise{} floats, and in +% \!\pcol@output@clear! for \!\@dbldeferlist! of \pwise{} floats. +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsubsection{Structural Macros} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Uidx{$\!\@elt!\\cdots\$}] +% is an internal control sequence to represent a list element having $n$ +% subelements. The sequence is often made \!\let!-equal to a macro which +% processes $\\cdots\$ and is applied to all members in a list. +% It is also made \!\let!-equal to \!\relax! on a manipulation of a list, +% such as element addition and concatenation, by \!\edef! or \!\xdef!. The +% usages of the sequence are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@F@count! \!\def!ines \!\@elt! as a macro to increment +% \!\@tempcnta! by one to measure the cardinality of \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@cflt! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\@comflelt!$ for $\cc_c(\tl)$, and then +% $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to concatenate \!\@freelist! and $\cc_c(\tl)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setpageno! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@setpnoelt!$ for $\PP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setpnoelt! and \!\pcol@setmpbelt! let $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to add +% $\pp(q)$ to $\PP$. It also uses \!\@elt! to \!\def!ine \!\pcol@currpage! +% with $\!\@elt! +% \Arg{\pp^p(q)}\<\pp^i(q)\>\<\pp^f(q)\>\~\Arg{\pp^s(p)}\Arg{\pp^m(p)}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@defcurrpage! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to \!\xdef!ine +% \!\pcol@currpage! with +% $\!\@elt!\Arg{\pp^p(q)}\<\pp^i(q)\>\<\pp^f(q)\>\Arg{\pp^s(p)}\Arg{\pp^m(p)}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@nextpage! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@nextpelt!$ for $\PP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@getcurrpage! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@getpelt!$ for $\PPP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startpage! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\@sdblcolelt!$ for (the copy of) +% \!\@dbldeferlist!, and $\!\@elt!=\!\@comdblflelt!$ for \!\@dbltoplist!. It +% also lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ for the concatenation of \!\@dbldeferlist! +% and \!\@deferlist!, and that of \!\@freelist! and \!\@dbltoplist!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@outputcolumns! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@outputelt!$ with two arguments +% for (the copy of) $\PP$. +% +% \item +% \begin{Sloppy}{2400}% +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! \!\def!ines \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! and +% \!\pcol@bg@float~height! with \!\@elt! to let painting macros add elements +% in them to have the height of the \bground{} regions $\bgr_{\{n,N\}}$ and +% $\bgr_{\{f,F\}}$ to be painted. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@buildcselt@S!$ and then +% $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@buildcselt!$ for $\pp^s(p)$, and then \!\def!ines +% \!\pcol@bg@columnheight! with \!\@elt! to add $H'_n$ and $\!\@maxdepth!$ +% or 0 for the \bground{} region $\bgr_{\{c,g\}}^c(n+1)$ where +% $n=\Abs{\pp^s(p)}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@buildcselt@S! \!\def!ines \!\pcol@bg@spanningtop! and +% \!\pcol@bg@spanning~height! with \!\@elt! to define the region +% $\bgr_S(i)$. +% +% \item +% \begin{Hfuzz}{0.55pt} +% \!\pcol@buildcselt! \!\def!ines \!\pcol@bg@columnheight!, +% \!\pcol@bg@spanningtop! and \!\pcol@bg@spanningheight! with \!\@elt! to +% define regions $\bgr_{\{c,g\}}^c(i)$ and $\bgr_s(i)$. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bg@calculate!\arg{z}\arg{z_0}\Arg{F}$ lets +% $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@bg@advance!$ to let $\!\@elt!\arg{f}$ in $F$ do +% $z\gets z+f$. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bg@negative!\Arg{F^-}$ lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@bg@nadvance!$ to +% let $\!\@elt!\arg{f}$ in $F^-$ do $z\gets z-f$, and then lets +% $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@bg@advance!$ to go back to addition. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! lets all floats $f$ imported in \!\@dbldeferlist! +% have depth 0 by \!\def!ining $\!\@elt!\arg{f}$ to do it, \!\edef!ines +% \!\pcol@bg@textheight! with \!\@elt! having height-plus-depth of +% \preenv{} for \bgpaint{} of it, and \!\def!ines $\pp^m(0)$ having one +% element in $\mpb_L^l$ or $\mpb_L^r$ for \!\@mparbottom! in \preenv{}. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to concatenate +% \!\@freelist! and \!\@midlist!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\@scolelt!$ for (the copy of) +% $\cc_c(\dl)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to \!\xdef!ine $\cc_c$ with +% $\cc_c(\tl)=\!\@toplist!$, $\cc_c(\ml)=\!\@midlist!$, +% $\cc_c(\bl)=\!\@botlist!$ and $\cc_c(\dl)=\!\@deferlist!$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@scancst! and \!\pcol@iscancst! let $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to +% \!\edef!ine the list $M=(m\,\Bar\,\mceltpop_{j,m}\in\cstraw,\;j\geq i)$ for +% $\mceltpop_{i,*}$, and then the latter \!\def!ines \!\@elt! as a macro with +% an argument $m$ to examine $m\in M$ for $\mcelt_{i,m}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@setmpbelt!$ for $\PPP$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@getmpbelt!$ for the list +% $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$. It also lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ for the +% addition of $\mpar(h_i,t_i)$ to the list by itself and +% \!\pcol@getmpbelt!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@mparbottom@zero! has \!\@elt! in its body to have $\mpar(0,0)$ for +% each $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x\in\{l,r\}}$ the macro has. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}\!\@elt!\Arg{t}\Arg{b}\!\@nil!$ has \!\@elt! +% in its argument specification, and \!\def!ines \!\reserved@b! with +% \!\@elt! for $\mpar(t+y,b+y)$. +% +% \item +% \begingroup\def\,{\mskip0mu plus2mu\relax} +% $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i!\, +% \Arg{y}\,\mpar(t_1,b_1)\,\cdots\,\mpar(t_n,b_n)\,\!\@nil!$ at first +% \!\def!\-ines \!\reserved@b! with \!\@elt! for $\mpar(y,y)$ and then +% \!\def!ines \!\@elt! to do it for $\mpar(t_i,b_i)$ for all $i\in[1,n]$. +% \endgroup +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@makefcolelt!$ for (the copy +% of) $\cc_c(\dl)$ to examine if each float in it can be put in a \fcolumn{} +% to be built, and then \!\def!ine it to put floats in $\cc_c(\tl)$ into +% $\cc_c(\vb^b)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@addflhd! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@hdflelt!$ for its argument +% $\cc_c(\tl)$ or $\cc_c(\bl)$, and then $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to give the +% default. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! \!\edef!ines \!\pcol@bg@floatheight! with +% \!\@elt! letting it be \!\relax!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! \!\def!ines \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! with +% \!\@elt!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@end! uses \!\@elt! in the argument specification of the +% \!\def!inition of \!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem!, lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to +% add the \spanning{} of the last page to the head of \!\@dbldeferlist!, and +% uses it in the body of \!\pcol@bg@textheight! and +% \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! to be \!\def!ined for \bgpaint{} of +% \Scfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% \begin{Hfuzz}{0.14pt}% +% \!\pcol@zparacol! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@remctrelt!$ for $\CG$, +% $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@thectrelt!$ for $\CTL$, $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@loadctrelt!$ +% for $\Cc_0$, $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@cmpctrelt!$ for $\CTL$, +% $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@defcomelt!$ for \!\pcol@localcommands!, and then +% $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to give the default. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% +% \item +% \!\globalcounter!\marg{ctr} defeines \!\@elt!\marg{\theta} for $\CG$ to +% check if there is $\theta\in\CG$ such that $\theta=\arg{ctr}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@localcommands! has the sequence of $\!\@elt!\ARg{com}$ for all +% \lcommand{}s $|\|\arg{com}$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@gcounters! has \!\@elt!|{page}| as its initial definition. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@removecounter!\arg{\Theta'}\arg{\theta}$ lets +% $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@iremctrelt!$ for (the copy of) its argument +% $\mathit{\Theta}'$ to remove $\theta$ from it. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@sscounters!\arg{elt}$ lets $\!\@elt!=\arg{elt}$, where +% $\arg{elt}=\!\pcol@storectrelt!$ or $\arg{elt}=\!\pcol@savectrelt!$, for +% $\CTL$, and then $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to \!\xdef!ine $\Cc_c$. +% +% \item \begingroup\hfuzz1.4pt +% $\!\pcol@com@synccounter!\<\theta\>$ gives $\!\@elt!\Arg{\theta}$ as the +% argument of |\pcol@synccounter|. +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@synccounter} +% \par\endgroup +% +% \item \begingroup\hfuzz0.51pt +% $\!\pcol@synccounter!\arg{lst}$ lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to have the list +% $\arg{lst}$ in \!\reserved@a! by \!\edef!, $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@loadctrelt!$ +% for $\CC_c$, and then $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@syncctrelt!$ for $\arg{lst}$. +% \par\endgroup +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@stepcounter!\<\theta\>$ lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@stpldelt!$ for +% $\CTL$, $\!\@elt!=|\pcol@|\~|stpclelt|$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@stpclelt} +%  +% for $\clist(\theta)$, and then $\!\@elt!=\!\@stpelt!$ for +% $\clist(\theta)$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@switchcol! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@setctrelt!$ for $\CC_c$, +% $\!\@elt!=|\pcol@|\~|aconlyelt|$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@aconlyelt} +%  +% for $\T$, and then $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to give the default. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! \!\def!ines $\!\@elt!\arg{\celtshadow_i}$ to apply +% \!\reset@color! for rewinding and \!\pcol@set@color! for reestablishing +% to each $\celtshadow_i\in\CSTshadow^c=(\Celtshadow^c,\cstshadow)$ +% by \!\pcol@scancst@shadow!, in which \!\@elt! is explicitly applied to +% $\Celtshadow^c$ if it is defined and then implicitly done to +% $\cstshadow=\!\pcol@colorstack@shadow!$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@set@color@push! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to push a color +% information into $\cstshadow$, with save\slash restore of its original +% value. +% +% \item +% \!\resetbackgroundcolor! lets $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@resetbackgroundcolor!$ to +% scan \!\pcol@bg@defined! containing $\!\@elt!\Arg{a'_i}$ to let +% $|\pcol@bg@color|{\cdot}a'_i$ for each of $i$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@empty!}] +% is a macro always having nothing. Its major usages are to examine if a +% macro often having a list is empty, and to make such a macro empty. The +% following macros use \!\@empty! to examine the emptiness of the objects in +% parentheses. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! ($\cc_c(\tl)$, $\cc_c(\bl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@checkshipped! ($S_c$)\\ +% \!\pcol@startpage! ($\pp(\ptop)$, \!\@dbltoplist!)\\ +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! (\!\@botlist! in \preenv)\\ +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom! ($\pp^m(p)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom@last! ($\pp^m(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@setmpbelt! ($\pp^m(p)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! ($\cc_c(\tl)$, $\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! ($\cc_c(\bl),\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@addflhd! ($\cc_c(\tl)$, $\cc_c(\bl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! ($\cc_c(\tl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!\arg{default}\$ ($x'_d$)\\ +% $\!\pcol@setcw@fill!\\!\fill!$ ($f$) +% \end{quote} +%  +% The following macros use \!\@empty! to empty the objects in parentheses. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \!\pcol@cflt! ($\cc_c(\tl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@setpageno! ($\PP$, $\pp(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@startpage! ($\cc_c(\dl)$, \!\@dbldeferlist!, \!\@deferlist!, +% \!\@dbltoplist!)\\ +% \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@output@start! ($\PP$, $\pp(\ptop)$, $\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! (\!\@midlist! in \preenv)\\ +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! ($\PP$, $\pp(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom! ($\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! ($\cc_c(\dl)$, $\cc_c(\tl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! ($\cc_c(\tl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@freshpage! ($\PP$, $\pp(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@zparacol! (\!\@gtempa!)\\ +% \!\pcol@removecounter!$\<\mathit{\Theta}'\>\Arg{\theta}$ +% ($\mathit{\Theta}'\in\{\CG,\CL\}$)\\ +% \!\pcol@sscounters! ($\Cc_c$) +% \end{quote} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@currentlabel!}] +% is an internal macro to have the reference to be associated with the +% \!\label! following it. It is defined in \!\pcol@fntextbody! to have the +% reference to the footnote with \!\@thefnmark!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\ext@figure!}] +% is an internal macro having ``|lof|'' being the extention of the file for +% list of figures. It is used in +% $\!\pcol@ac@caption!\arg{type}|[|\arg{lcap}|]|\$ to have ``|lof|'' +% when $\arg{type}=|figure|$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\ext@table!}] +% is an internal macro having ``|lot|'' being the extention of the file for +% list of tables. It is used in +% $\!\pcol@ac@caption!\arg{type}|[|\arg{lcap}|]|\$ to have ``|lot|'' +% when $\arg{type}=|table|$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@currbox!}] +% is an internal macro which conventionally has an \!\insert! for floats, +% etc. The follwing macros use \!\@currbox! having the objects in +% parentheses. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \!\pcol@opcol! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@startpage! ($\pp^i(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! ($\s_c(q)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@output@start! ($\pp^i(0)$, $\cc_c(\vb)$, $\Celt^c$)\\ +% \!\pcol@output@switch! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@igetcurrcol! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@putbackmvl! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@iscancst! ($\Celt^c$)\\ +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! (left marginal note)\\ +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! ($\cc_c(\vb), \s_c(q)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@freshpage! ($\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@output@end! (top float, $\cc_c(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! (\pwise{} float)\\ +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! ($\Celt^c$) +% \end{quote} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@marbox!}] +% is an internal macro which has an \!\insert! for left marginal notes. It +% is used in \!\pcol@xympar!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@currlist!}] +% is an internal macro which has an list of \!\insert!s for floats and +% marginal notes given to \!output!. It is used in \!\pcol@addmarginpar! to +% get the right marginal note from its head. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@freelist!}] +% is an internal macro having available \!\insert!s for floats originially, +% but also \colpage{}s, \spanning{}, footnotes and default column-color in +% our usage. Besides the acquisition of an \!\insert! from it shown in the +% description of \!\@next!, it is used by the following macros to return the +% the objects in parentheses to \!\@freelist!. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \!\pcol@cflt! ($\cc_c(\tl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@startpage! (\!\@dbltoplist!)\\ +% \!\pcol@outputelt! ($\pp^i(q)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! ($\pp^i(q)$, $\pp^f(q)$, $\s_c(q)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@startcolumn! ($\pp^f(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@output@start! ($\cc_0(\vb)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! (\!\@midlist! in \preenv)\\ +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! ($\cc_c(\vb)$, $\pp^f(p)$ or $\cc_c(\ft)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@savefootins! ($\pp^f(p)$ or $\cc_c(\ft)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! ($\cc_c(\ft)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makefcolpage! ($\cc_c(\tl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! ($\pp^i(\ptop)$, $\pp^f(\ptop)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! ($\cc_c(\ft)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@output@end! ($\pp^f(\ptop)$, $\cc_c(\vb)$, $\Celt^c$) +% \end{quote} +%  +% In addition \!\pcol@F@count! scans its element to have its cardinality. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@nil!}] +% is an internal control sequence which is conventionally used to terminate +% a variable length argument. It is used in the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! for the invocation of \!\@cdr!. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}\!\@elt!\Arg{t}\Arg{b}\!\@nil!$ to capture +% $t$ and $b$ following the convention in \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii!. +% +% \item +% \begingroup\def\,{\mskip0mu plus2mu\relax} +% $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i!\, +% \Arg{y}\,\mpar(t_1,b_1)\,\cdots\,\mpar(t_n,b_n)\,\!\@nil!$ to capture +% $\mpar(t_i,b_i)$ for all $i\in[1,n]$. +% \endgroup +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@do@mpb@all@i! +% \Arg{\mpb_L^l}\Arg{\mpb_L^r}\Arg{\mpb_R^l}\Arg{\mpb_R^r}$ to terminate the +% list $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x\in\{l,r\}}$ in the invocation of +% \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii!. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii! +% \Arg{y}\mpar(t_1,b_1)\cdots\mpar(t_n,b_n)\!\@nil!$ to capture +% $\mpar(t_i,b_i)$ for all $i\in[1,n]$, and then to terminate them +% passed to \!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i! or \!\pcol@getmparbottom@last!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@scan! for the invocation of\\\mbox{}\qquad +% $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec!\|/|\|/|\arg{garbage}\~\!\@nil!$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! for the invocation of\\\mbox{}\qquad +% $\!\pcol@extract@fil!\| plus |\| minus|\arg{garbage}\!\@nil!$\\ +% and thus in the \!\def!inition of it in \!\pcol@def@extract@fil!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@defkw! has \!\@nil! in its argument specification to terminate the +% argument $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1\,|fil|\ |minus|\ 1\,|fil|$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@extract@fil@i!, \!\pcol@extract@fil@ii! and +% \!\pcol@extract@fil@iii! have \!\@nil! in their argument specifications as +% the terminator, and thus \!\@nil! appears in their invocations in +% \!\pcol@extract@fil!, \!\pcol@extract@fil@i! and \!\pcol@extract@fil@ii! +% respectively, and in the \!\def!inition of \!\pcol@extract@fil@iii! in +% \!\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@iadjustfnctr! and \!\pcol@iifootnotetext! to terminate their +% argument |[|$[|+-|]\meta{disp}$|]| passed to \!\pcol@calcfnctr!. +% +% \item +% \!\backgroundcolor! and \!\nobackgroundcolor! to terminate their first +% argument given to \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! so that its descendants +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@x! and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@z! finally capture +% everything not processed by their ancestors. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\current@color!}] +% is an internal macro having color information to be put into |.dvi| as a +% part of the argument of coloring \!\special!. It is referred to by +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, +% \!\pcol@iicolumncolor!, and +% \!\pcol@set@color@push!, +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@y!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@dbldeferlist!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of \pwise{} floats whose page +% appearance are not yet fixed. It is scanned and then updated in +% \!\pcol@startpage! and \!\pcol@output@clear!, while \!\pcol@output@start! +% lets it have \!\@deferlist! made before \beginparacol, and +% \!\pcol@output@end! adds \pwise{} floats to be put in the empty +% \lpage{} to it and then move the whole of the list to \!\@deferlist!. +% As discussed in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}, 2015 or later version of +% \LaTeX{} no longer uses this list, but we stick with it for \pwise{} +% floats produced in \env{paracol} environments and thus have its top level +% definition with empty body in \Paracol. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@dbltoplist!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of \pwise{} floats which +% \!\@sdblcolelt! decided to be put in the new page. The macro +% \!\pcol@startpage! scans it to put all floats into the page $\ptop$ as its +% \spanning{} $\pp^i(\ptop)$, and then empties it after returning all floats +% to \!\@freelist!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@deferlist!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of \cwise{} floats whose page +% appearance are not yet fixed. It is scanned and then updated in +% \!\pcol@startcolumn!, \!\pcol@trynextcolumn!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! and \!\pcol@iflushfloats!, while the following macros +% also act on it. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@start! moves it to \!\@dbldeferlist! because it is created +% before \beginparacol. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startpage! uses it as the interface with \!\@addtodblcol! of 2015 +% or later version of \LaTeX{} as discussed in +% item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@addtodblcol}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol! and \!\pcol@igetcurrcol! saves\slash restores it +% into/from $\cc_c(\dl)$, respectively. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makefcolelt!$\arg{flt}$ returns $\arg{flt}$ to the list if +% $\arg{flt}$ cannot be put in the \fcolumn{} which the macro is working on. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! examines its emptiness to let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\true$ iff not empty. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@end! lets it have \!\@dbldeferlist! so that it processed as +% \cwise{} floats after \Endparacol. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@toplist!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of \cwise{} floats which is +% decided to be put at the top of the \ccolpage{} by float environments or by +% \!\pcol@trynextcolumn!. This list is scanned by \!\pcol@cflt! if its +% invoker \!\pcol@combinefloats! finds the macro is not empty. The list is +% also scanned by \!\pcol@makecol!, \!\pcol@output@switch! and +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! using \!\pcol@addflhd! for the measurement of the +% combined size of top floats, while \!\pcol@setcurrcol! and +% \!\pcol@igetcurrcol! saves\slash restores the list into/from $\cc_c(\tl)$ +% respectively. In addition our macros may add an element or build the +% entire list in the following two cases. One case is for a \sync{}ation +% for which \!\pcol@synccolumn! lets the main vertical list in +% $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ be a float, namely {\em\mvlfloat} to be added to this list. +% Another case is for a \fcolumn{} in the \lpage{} for which +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! and \!\pcol@makefcolelt! build this list for deferred +% floats. In the latter case, the list is scanned by \!\pcol@makefcolpage! +% invoked from \!\pcol@makefcolumn! itself, \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@botlist!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of \cwise{} floats which is +% decided to be put at the bottom of the \ccolpage{} by float environments or +% by \!\pcol@trynextcolumn!. The emptiness of this list examined by +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! to invoke the scanner \!\@cflb! unless empty, +% by \!\pcol@output@start! to calculate the room for each \colpage{} in the +% \spage, and by \!\pcol@makenormalcol! to decide whether \!\@makecol! is +% used or not for building \preenv. The list is also scanned by +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! for the measurement of the combined size of bottom +% floats, while \!\pcol@setcurrcol! and \!\pcol@igetcurrcol! saves\slash +% restores the list into/from $\cc_c(\bl)$ respectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@midlist!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of in-text floats which has already +% been put in the \ccolpage{} but is kept to check the ordering of the +% succeeding floats. The list is emptied by \!\pcol@makenormalcol! after +% returning all elements in it to \!\@freelist!, while \!\pcol@setcurrcol! +% and \!\pcol@igetcurrcol! saves\slash restores the list into/from +% $\cc_c(\ml)$ respectively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\f@depth!}] +% is an internal macro having |1sp| or being \!\let!-equal to \!\z@! to +% specify the float category, \pwise{} or \cwise{} respectively, which +% float-related macros work on. As discussed in +% item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@dblfloatplacement}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}, this feature introduced in 2015 version +% of \LaTeX{} is nullified in \env{paracol} environments and thus the +% setting with |1sp| done by \!\@dblfloatplacement! is overriden by +% \!\pcol@startpage! and \!\pcol@output@clear! when they invoke the macro. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\cl@@ckpt!}] +% is an internal macro having the list of all counters defined by +% \!\newcounter! and the counter \counter{page}. The original usage of this +% macro is to log the values of all counters into |.aux| by \!\include!, but +% we use it to obatin all counters in \!\pcol@zparacol! and +% \!\pcol@globalcounter@s!. +% +% \item[$\cs{cl@}{\cdot}\theta$] +% is an internal macro having the list $\clist(\theta)$ of descendant +% counters of the counter $\theta$ whose increment by \!\stepcounter! lets +% them 0. The macro \!\pcol@remctrelt! moves it to +% $|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \Uidx{\SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@}} +%  +% and re\!\def!ines it to have $\!\pcol@stepcounter!\Arg{\theta}$. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\reserved@a!}] +% is an internal macro for temporary use. Its usages are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@Fe!, it is used to keep the cardinality of \!\@freelist! in +% \!\pcol@F@n! to log it by \!\pcol@FF! after \!\pcol@F@n! is let have +% another measurement result. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@iLogLevel!\\arg{name}$, it is used to implement +% $\!\let!|\|\arg{name}=|\|\arg{name}{\cdot}l'$ where $l'$ is the roman +% representation of the level $l$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setpageno!, it has $\PPP$ so that we update $\PP$ and +% $\pp(\ptop)$ scanning their original contents. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo!, it has $\pp(\ptop)$ so that we give its five +% components to \!\pcol@getpinfo! as its first five arguments. +% +% \item +% In \!\@outputpage!, it has a sequence of \bgpaint{} for both left and +% right \parapag{}es to be shipped out outside \env{paracol} environment. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@outputpage@ev!, it has the expansion result of +% \!\meaning!\!\yoko! to be compared with \!\reserved@b! having +% \!\string!\!\yoko! for examining if \!\yoko! is a primitive of underlying +% \TeX{}. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@bg@paintregion!\arg{a}\arg{c}$, it is let have +% $a'=a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c$ or $a'=a$, and then referred to by +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! to use $|\pcol@bg@color|{\cdot}a'$, and by +% $\!\pcol@bg@addext!\arg{z}\Arg{s}\Arg{d}$ to use +% $|\pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}a'$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@} +% {\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@specialoutput!, it is \!\let!-equal to $|\pcol@output@|{\cdot}f$ +% corresponding to $\!\outputpenalty!=|\pcol@op@|{\cdot}f$, or +% \!\@specialoutput!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@start!, it is let have a \bgpaint{} macro +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! and the definition of a parameter +% \!\pcol@bg@textheight! for it. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@switch!, it is \!\let!-equal to \!\@nobreaktrue! or +% \!\@nobreakfalse! according to \CSIndex{if@nobreak} in the leaving column +% to broadcast it to other columns. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ifempty!$\arg{box}\arg{then}\arg{else}$, it has $\arg{then}$ or +% $\arg{else}$ according to the emptiness of $\arg{box}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@clearcolorstack!, it is \!\def!ined to put an uncoloring +% \!\special! by \!\reset@color! for its argument $\celt_i$ in +% \!\pcol@iscancst!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@restorecst!, it is \!\def!ined to put a coloring \!\special! in +% its argument $\celt_i$ by \!\unvbox! done in \!\pcol@iscancst!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, at first it is made let equal to 0 or $\CL$ +% according to $c<\CL$ or not. Then it is let have $\PPP$ to be scanned to +% find $\pp^m(p)$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@getmparbottom@i!, it is let have one of +% $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$ according to the side margin which the marginal +% note to be added goes to, and then it is referred to by +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setmpbelt@i!, it is let have what $\pp^m(p)$ should have after +% the update of a list of marginal notes in it, and then \!\pcol@setmpbelt! +% updates $\pp(p)$ with the new $\pp^m(p)$ in the macro. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout!\Arg{y}$ and $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last!\Arg{y}$, +% it is let have $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}$ and +% $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i!\Arg{y}$ respectively, so that they are +% invoked in \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, it is let have an invocation of +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! for \pwise{} floats in $\pp^i(\ptop)$ together with +% the condition of the \bgpaint. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@end!, it is let have the invocation of +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! for \bgpaint{} of \Scfnote{}s with the condition to +% do it and a \!\def!inition of \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@defcomelt!\arg{com}$, it is used to implement +% $\!\let!|\|\arg{com}=|\pcol@com@|{\cdot}\~\arg{com}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth!, it is made \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s! or \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! according to +% $\!\pcol@columnratioleft!=\!\relax!$ or not. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!, it is used to have the fraction $r_d$ being a +% comma-seperated list element in its argument $\arg{ratio}$ defined by +% \!\columnratio! and scanned by a \!\@for! loop. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@scan!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\Arg{spec}$, at first it is let +% have $\arg{spec}$, then the result of adding `|,|' as many as +% $\Cto-\Cfrom$ to the tail, and finally each element in the extended +% $\arg{spec}$ in a \!\@for! loop. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!\arg{default}\$, it is let have +% $\$ from which all space tokens are removed. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors!, it is used as a waste bascket to throw away +% $(\WT-W)/(F\times1\,|pt|)$ calculated by \!\pcol@setcw@calcf!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@extract@fil@i!\|.|\\!\@nil!$, it has +% $\|.|\$, and is referred to by +% \!\pcol@extract@fil@ii!. +% +% \item +% In \!\globalcounter!\marg{ctr}, it is used to have $\arg{ctr}$ for the +% \CSIndex{ifx}-comparison with each $\theta\in\CG$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@remctrelt!\<\theta\>$, it is used to implement +% $\!\let!|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\theta=|\cl@|{\cdot}\theta$, +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@cl@}\SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@removecounter!\<\mathit{\Theta}'\>\Arg{\theta}$, it is used to +% have $\theta$ for the \CSIndex{ifx}-comparison in \!\pcol@iremctrelt!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@thectrelt!\<\theta\>$, it is used to implement +% $\!\let!|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta=|\the|{\cdot}\theta$, +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@thectr@}\SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% and then is made \!\let!-equal to $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta{\cdot}0$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@synccounter!\arg{lst}$, it has $\arg{lst}$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setctrelt!\<\theta\>\<\val_c(\theta)\>$, it is made +% \!\let!-equal to $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% or +% $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\theta{\cdot}c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@switchenv!, it is used to save \!\switchcolumn! which is +% redefined in the macro, and then to invoke \!\switchcolumn! with the +% original definition. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@fntext!\marg{text}, it is \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@fntextother! +% or \!\pcol@fntext~top! according to the footnote $\arg{text}$ is deferred +% or not. +% +% \item +% \begin{Hfuzz}{0.6pt}% +% In \!\pcol@calcfnctr!$\arg{num}$\!\@nil!, it has the first token of +% $\arg{num}$ for \CSIndex{ifx}-comparison with `|+|' and `|-|'. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@twosided!|[|T|]|$, it is let have each non-space token in $T$ +% given by a \!\@tfor! loop. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\reserved@b!}] +% is an internal macro for temporary use. It is used in the following +% macros to keep a list shown in paraentheses so that we update the list in +% the scan of list elements. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \!\pcol@startpage! (\!\@dbldeferlist!)\\ +% \!\pcol@outputcolumns! ($\PP$)\\ +% \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! ($\cc_c(\dl)$)\\ +% \!\pcol@removecounter!$\<\mathit{\Theta}'\>\Arg{\theta}$ +% ($\mathit{\Theta}'\in\{\CG,\CC\}$) +% \end{quote} +%  +% In addition, it is used in the following macros. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@outputpage@ev!, it has the expansion result of +% \!\string!\!\yoko! to be compared with \!\reserved@a! having +% \!\meaning!\!\yoko! for examining if \!\yoko! is a primitive of underlying +% \TeX{}. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!, it has a token in the arguments $K_b$, $K_g$ and +% $K_c$ of the macro scanned by \!\@tfor!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@output@switch!, it is \!\let!-equal to |\@afterindenttrue| or +% |\@after|\~|indentfalse| according to \CSIndex{if@afterindent} in the +% leaving column to broadcast it to other columns. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@clearcolorstack!, it is \!\def!ined to put an uncoloring +% \!\special! by \!\reset@color! for its argument $\Celt^c$ in +% \!\pcol@scancst!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@restorecst!, it is \!\def!ined to put a coloring \!\special! in +% its argument $\Celt^c$ by \!\unvcopy! done in \!\pcol@scancst!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@scancst! and \!\pcol@iscancst!, after the reference for the +% purposes shown in the two items above, it has +% $M=(m\,\Bar\,\mceltpop_{j,m}\in\cstraw,\;j\geq i)$ for $\mceltpop_{i,*}$ +% and in the latter is scanned to find $m$ for $\mcelt_{i,m}$ in $M$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, it is made let equal to $\CL$ or $\C$ +% according to $c<\CL$ or not. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}\!\@elt!\Arg{t}\Arg{b}\!\@nil!$, it is +% let have $\mpar(t+y,b+y)$, and in $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i! +% \Arg{y}\mpar(t_1,b_1)\cdots\mpar(t_n,b_n)\!\@nil!$ it is let have +% $\mpar(y,y)$ or $\mpar(t_n,b_n)$, so that they are let be a +% $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$ by \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii!. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!\arg{default}\$, it is let have each +% non-space token in $\$ to remove space tokens from it. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@fill!\\!\fill!$, it is let have $f$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@extract@fil@ii!\arg{unit}\!\@nil!$, it is let have +% $\arg{unit}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\globalcounter!$\Arg{\theta}$, it has $\cg_i\in\CG$ for +% \CSIndex{ifx}-comparison with $\theta$. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@iremctrelt!\<\mathit{\Theta}'\>\Arg\theta$, it has $\theta$ for +% \CSIndex{ifx}-comparison with $\theta'$ to be removed from $\CG$ or $\CC$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@calcfnctr!$\arg{num}$\!\@nil!, it has `|+|' and then `|-|' for +% \CSIndex{ifx}-comparison with the first token of $\arg{num}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii!, it has \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@x! or +% \!\pcol@back~groundcolor@z! according that the region of \bgpaint{} and its +% color is defined or undefined. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\reserved@c!}] +% is an internal macro for temporary use. It is used in \!\pcol@startpage! +% to save \!\@deferlist! in it and then to restore the list from it, and in +% \!\pcol@iscancst! to have \!\relax! or the macro itself to iterate the +% macro recursively. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\reserved@d!}] +% is an internal macro for temporary use. It is used in +% \!\pcol@iscancst! as a \!\chardef! register to have 0 if $m$ for +% $\mcelt_{i,m}$ is not in the list +% $M=(n\,\Bar\,\mceltpop_{j,n}\in\cstraw,\;j\geq i)$, or 1 if found. +% +% \item[\Uidx{\!\@gtempa!}] +% is an internal macro used as a \!\global!ly modifiable scratchpad. Its +% usages are as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \!\pcol@ifempty!$\arg{box}\arg{then}\arg{else}$, it has \!\lastpenalty! +% in a \!\vbox! whose value is examined outside the \!\vbox! for the +% emptiness check of $\arg{box}$. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, it is given to \!\@xnext! as the target to have +% the second and successive elements of \!\@currlist! which we cannot modify. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@zparacol! and \!\pcol@cmpctrelt!, it has the list of counters +% to be synchronized. +% +% \item +% In $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!\arg{default}\$, it is made +% \!\@empty! or \!\relax! according to $x'_d$ has \!\fill! or not. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@storectrelt!, \!\pcol@savectrelt! and \!\pcol@sscounters!, it +% has the new version of $\CC_c$. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{description} +% +% +% +%\iffalse +%<*paracol> +%\fi +% +% \section{Register Declaration} +% \label{sec:imp-decl} +% +% \subsection{\cs{count} Registers} +% +% Here we declare registers and switches. The first group is for \!\count! +% registers. +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@currcol} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add initialization to 0 after the declaration.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@currcol! has the zero-origin ordinal $c$ of the +% column which we were in when \!\output! is invoked. Therefore, for +% example, in the process of \!\switchcolumn!, the register has $c$ from +% which we are switching to another column. The register is initialized to +% be 0 by \!\pcol@output@start!, and then set to $\!\pcol@nextcol!=d$ by +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! to switch to (or stay in) $d$. Note that these two +% assignments are \!\global! while other macros may {\em locally} use the +% register to, for example, scan all columns $c\In0\C$. Besides two macros +% above, the following macros refer to the register to know which column we +% are in (or which column is processed by their invokers). +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@Log@iii!, +% \!\pcol@Log@ii!, +% \!\pcol@FF!, +% \!\pcol@makecol!, +% \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@bg@columnleft!, +% \!\pcol@bg@columnwidth!, +% \!\pcol@bg@columnsep!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@getcurrcol!, +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol!, +% \!\pcol@clearcolorstack!, +% \!\pcol@restorecolorstack!, +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom@i!, +% \!\pcol@setmpbelt@i!, +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput!\footnote{ +%  +% Only for logging.}, +%  +% \!\thecolumn!, +% \!\pcol@sscounters!, +% \!\pcol@setctrelt!, +% \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@switchcol!, +% \!\pcol@visitallcols!, +% \!\pcol@aconlyelt!, +% \!\pcol@flushclear!. +% \!\pcol@columncolor!, +% \!\normalcolumncolor!, +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, +% \end{quote} +%  +% Among the macros above, \!\columncolor! and \!\normalcolumncolor! could +% refer to the register outside \env{paracol} environment and thus before +% the initialization by \!\pcol@output@start!. Therefore, the register is +% also initialized to be 0 after its declaration to assure safe reference. +% +% The following macros use the register for the scan of all $c\In0\C$ by +% themselves or their invokers. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn!, +% \!\pcol@synccolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@flushfloats!, +% \!\pcol@freshpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@synccounter!, +% \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, +% \!\pcol@stepcounter!. +% \end{quote} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@iflushfloats! also use +% the register for scanning but for $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$ given by their +% arguments. +% +% In addition \!\pcol@ccuse!, \!\pcol@ifccdefined! and \!\pcol@ccxdef! +% refer to the register to have the control sequence +% $|\pcol@columncolor|\cdot c=\Celtshadow^c$ or +% $|\pcol@columncolor@box|\cdot c=\Celt^c$ where $c$ is for the current +% column or for all columns depending on their invokers. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@nextcol} +% The register \!\pcol@nextcol! has the zero-origin ordinal $d$ of the +% column to which we are switching, or in which we are staying, to be set +% into \!\pcol@currcol! by \!\pcol@restartcolumn!. The main usage of the +% register is to set the switching target in \!\pcol@switchcolumn!, but +% other macros use it to specify the (temporary) target of +% \!\pcol@switchcol!; the tallest column in \!\pcol@sync!; 0 in +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, \!\pcol@sptext! and \!\endparacol!; all in $\LBRP0\C$ +% but $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ in \!\pcol@visitallcols!; and $c$ in +% \!\pcol@flushclear! to stay in the current column $c$. The other user of +% this register is \!\pcol@invokeoutput! but only for logging. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ncol} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add initial zero-clearing for safe reference in \cs{@outputpage} +% invokded prior to the first \string\texttt{paracol}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ncolleft} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to specify the number of columns in left +% parallel-pages.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@ncol! has the number of columns $\C$ given as the +% argument of \!\paracol!, whose callee \!\pcol@zparacol! being the sole +% modifier of the register \!\global!ly assigns $C$ to the register to give +% safe reference to \!\@outputbox! invoked after a \env{paracol} is closed. +% In addition for the reference in \!\@outputbox! before the first +% \env{paracol}, the register is initialized with zero after the declaration. +% +% The following macros refer to the register to scan all columns $c\In0\C$. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@checkshipped!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@freshpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@synccounter!, +% \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, +% \!\pcol@stepcounter!, +% \!\pcol@visitallcols!. +% \end{quote} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@ncolleft! has $\Uidx\CL$ being the number of columns +% in the left {\em\Uidx\parapag{}e} if \parapag{}ing is in effect, or have +% $\C$ otherwise. Similar to $\C$, the number $\CL$ is given as the +% optional argument of \!\pcol@zparacol! and is \!\global!ly assigned to the +% register by the sole modifier \!\pcol@zparacol!, unless the optional +% arugment is not less than $\C$ which is assigned to $\CL$ if this +% exception is found. The reason of the \!\global! assignment and the +% initial zero-clearing after the declaration is same as that for $C$, i.e., +% for the reference in \!\@outputpage! outside \env{paracol}. +% +% The following macros examines if $\Uidx\CL<\C$, i.e., if \parapag{}ing is +% in effect. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\@outputpage!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@output@flush!, +% \!\pcol@output@clear!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@flushfloats!, +% \!\pcol@output@end!, +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, +% \end{quote} +%  +% \begin{Sloppy}{2350} +% In the macros listed above, \!\pcol@outputelt!, \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! +% and \!\pcol@flushfloats! passes $\LBRP0\CL$ and $\LBRP\CL\C$ to their +% respective callees \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! as their argument pair +% $\LBRP{\Uidx\Cfrom}{\Uidx\Cto}$ to let them work on the left and right +% \parapag{}es repsectively. The callees above also pass the pair to +% \!\pcol@swapcolumn! to swap the scanning order of columns if \cswap{} is +% in efect. +% +% They also pass the pair to \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! which then passes it +% to \!\pcol@bg@paintcolumns! and \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! by binding it to +% $\LBRP\CBfrom\CBto=\LBRP{\!\pcol@bg@from!}{\~\!\pcol@bg@to!}$ referred to +% by \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! and its callee \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! to define the +% range of columns to be painted is $\LBRP\CBfrom\CBto$. Similar passing is +% done by (our own version of) \!\@outputpage!, but it directly uses +% $\LBRP0\CL$ and $\LBRP\CL\C$ as the sources and the target painting macros +% are \!\pcol@bg@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage! and +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox!. Note that $\CBto$ is initialized to be +% \!\let!-equal to $\C$ because it may be referred to without +% binding\footnote{ +%  +% This meaningless reference has no harmful side effects.}. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% The macro \!\pcol@addmarginpar! also referes to $\CL$ to know if the +% column $c$ on which it is working on is in the left or right \parapag{}e, +% i.e., $c<\CL$ or not, to decide the margin to which a marginal note is put, +% and to pass $\LBRP0\CL$ or $\LBRP\CL\C$ to \!\pcol@swapcolumn! to +% calculate the distance to the left or right margin from the column. The +% examination of $c<\CL$ is also done in related macros +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom@i! and \!\pcol@setmpbelt@i!. +% +% Similar column-range specification is done for the argument pair +% $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$ of \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth! invoked from +% \!\pcol@zparacol!. Then the arguments are passed to the callees +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! or \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!, the latter of +% which also passes them to its callee \!\pcol@setcw@scan!, to define the +% width of columns in $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$ and thier separators. +% +% The other references to $\C$ are made by \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@switchcolumn! to examine $c<\C$, to wraparound $\C-1$ to 0 for the +% former and to complain if $c\geq\C$ for the latter. +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@page} +% The register \!\pcol@page! has the zero-orgin ordinal $p$ of the page +% which we are in. The register is initialized to be 0 not only by +% \!\pcol@output@start! to give the obvious starting point, but also by +% \!\pcol@freshpage! for page flushing which clears $\PP=\!\pcol@pages!$ to +% give us another type of starting point. Then the register is incremented +% by \!\pcol@nextpage! to advance one page, by \!\pcol@nextpelt! to skip a +% \fpage, and by \!\pcol@startpage! for a \fpage{} to be created. The other +% type of updates of the register is done by \!\pcol@restartcolumn! which +% lets $p$ be $\cc_c(\vb^p)$ when we revisit the column $c$ belonging to the +% page $p$. Note that, besides these \!\global! updates, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! locally updates the register to scan +% $\PP=\!\pcol@pages!$, and \!\pcol@freshpage! also performs local updates +% but in more weird manner. Besides the updates discussed above, the +% macros \!\pcol@Log@iii!, \!\pcol@Log@ii!, \!\pcol@FF!, \!\pcol@makecol!, +% \!\pcol@opcol!, \!\pcol@setpageno!, \!\pcol@getcurrpage!, +% \!\pcol@startcolumn!, \!\pcol@output@switch!, \!\pcol@addmarginpar! and +% \!\pcol@fntext! refer to the register to know which page they are +% operating on. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@basepage} +% The register \!\pcol@basepage! has the ordinal $\pbase$ of the \bpage{} +% being the oldest page not shipped out yet. The register is initialized to +% be 0 by \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@freshpage! together with +% \!\pcol@page!, and then incremented by \!\pcol@outputelt! when it ships +% the page $\pbase$ out. The macros \!\pcol@setpageno!, \!\pcol@nextpage!, +% \!\pcol@getcurrpage! and \!\pcol@addmarginpar! refer to the register in +% their scans of $\PP$ or $\PPP$ to know the zero-origin ordinal of the +% element for the current page $p$ is $p-\pbase$. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@toppage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@maxpage}.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@toppage! has the ordinal $\ptop$ of the \tpage{} +% having the most advanced \colpage{}s, or {\em\Uidx\lcolpage{}s} in short. +% The register is initialized to be 0 by \!\pcol@output@start! and +% \!\pcol@freshpage! together with \!\pcol@page!, and then let be +% $p=\!\pcol@page!$ by \!\pcol@startpage! to start a new page $p$. The +% macros \!\pcol@makecol!, \!\pcol@opcol!, \!\pcol@startcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch! and \!\pcol@restartcolumn! refer to the register +% to examine if they are working on a \colpage{} in the \tpage, while +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@fntext! examines if the \ccolpage{} is +% behind the \tpage. The register is also referred to by \!\pcol@Log@iii!, +% \!\pcol@Log@ii! and \!\pcol@FF! for logging. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@footnotebase} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for page-wise footnotes.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@footnotebase! is let have the value of \!\c@footnote! +% at the start of a \env{paracol} environment by \!\pcol@zparacol! to give +% the base value $\Uidx\bf$ for relative numbering of \counter{footnote} +% done in \!\pcol@calcfnctr! for the starred versions of \!\footnote!, +% \!\footnotemark! and \!\footnotetext!. The register is also referred to +% by \!\endparacol! to let \!\c@footnote! have $\bf+\nf$ where +% $\nf=\!\pcol@nfootnotes!$ shown below is the number of footnotes in the +% \env{paracol} environment to be closed. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@nfootnotes} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for page-wise footnotes.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@nfootnotes! is to accumulate the number of footnotes +% $\Uidx\nf$ in a \env{paracol} environment. Therefore, it is zero-cleared +% by \!\pcol@zparacol!, then incremented by \!\pcol@ifootnote! and +% \!\pcol@ifootnotemark! for \!\footnote! and \!\footnotemark!, and finally +% referred to by \!\endparacol! to let $\!\c@footnote!=\bf+\nf$. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mcid} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {Introduced for coloring specified in math mode.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Change its meaning and operations with it a little bit according to +% the new text coloring with \cs{insert}.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@mcid! has the number of pushes of +% \colorstack{} by coloring commands in math mode between two consecutive +% invocations of \!\output!. The register is +% zero-cleared by \!\pcol@output! because we are definitely in the main +% vertical mode and thus all pops corresponding to pushes in math mode must +% have been applied to |.tex|'s \colorstack. Then the register +% is referred to by \!\pcol@set@color@push! when it is invoked in math mode, +% to increment it and then examine if it does not exceed the limit +% \!\pcol@mcpushlimit! to mean the math-mode coloring still can be made. The +% macro then uses the value of the register as the identifier of the push +% operation given to \!\output! through an \!\insert!ion. +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} + +%% Register Declaration + +\newcount\pcol@currcol \global\pcol@currcol\z@ +\newcount\pcol@nextcol +\newcount\pcol@ncol \global\pcol@ncol\z@ +\newcount\pcol@ncolleft \global\pcol@ncolleft\z@ +\newcount\pcol@page +\newcount\pcol@basepage +\newcount\pcol@toppage +\newcount\pcol@footnotebase +\newcount\pcol@nfootnotes +\newcount\pcol@mcid +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Switches} +% +% The second declaration group is for switches. +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@output} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to solve the \cs{output} request sneaking.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Add a user \cs{pcol@reset@color@pop} to inhibit uncoloring if +% $\mathit{false}$.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a user \cs{@outputpage} for parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a user \cs{@outputpage} for background-painting.} +%  +% The switch \CSIndex{ifpcol@output} is $\true$ iff \!\pcol@output@start! +% which turns the switch $\true$ has been invoked but \!\pcol@output@end! +% which does $\false$ has not yet. Then the switch is examined by +% \!\pcol@output! to detect an \!\output! request sneaked from outside of +% the \env{paracol} environment. The other users \!\@outputpage! and +% \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! examine this switch to know if the macro is +% invoked inside or outside of \env{paracol} environment, while the macro +% \!\pcol@output@start! temporarily turns the switch $\false$ when it ships +% out a page having \preenv{} only. +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@nospan} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@textonly}.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@nospan| is $\true$ iff a page $p$ does not have +% \spanning, i.e., $\pp^i(p)=\bot$. It is set by by +% \!\pcol@getpinfo! for the examination in \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@output@end!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@sync} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add initialization to be $\string\mathit{false}$.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@switchcol} and \cs{pcol@flushclear} to the macros +% turning the switch $\string\mathit{true}$ due to column scanning +% and pre-flushing column height check.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@sync| is $\true$ iff \!\pcol@output@switch! is invoked +% for \sync{}ed \cswitch{} by \!\switchcolumn!|*| or its relative +% enviroment openers, or \pfcheck{} prior to page flushing or environment +% closing. Therefore, the switch is \!\global!ly turned $\true$ by +% \!\pcol@iswitchcolumn! and \!\pcol@sptext! for the \sync{}ing +% \cswitch{}ing but then temporarily turned $\false$ by \!\pcol@switchcol! +% invoked by them for \cscan{}ning and then turned $\true$ again by the +% macro. For \pfcheck{}, the macro \!\pcol@flushclear! turns the switch +% $\true$. The other macro turns this switch is \!\pcol@output@switch! at +% the end of which the switch is turned $\false$ to go back to the default +% state. The macros examining this switch are \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@putbackmvl!, \!\pcol@sync!, \!\pcol@invokeoutput! (for logging) and +% \!\pcol@switchcol!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@sptextstart} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to capture the starting point of a spanning text so that +% the text is split from other main vertical list stuff.} +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@sptext} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to restrict the broadcast of \cs{if@nobreak} and +% \cs{everypar} only when a column-switching is accompanied with +% spanning text.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Renamed from \cs{ifpcol@mctext} following the naming convention, and +% move the timing of turning $\string\mathit{true}$ from the end +% of a spanning text to its beginning.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@sptextstart| is $\true$ iff \!\pcol@output@switch! is +% invoked from \!\pcol@sptext! prior to a \mctext. That is, the switch is +% \!\global!ly\footnote{ +%  +% Not necessary to be \cs{global}ly turned but we dare to do that to clearly +% distinguish that from the local turning in \cs{pcol@putbackmvl}.} +%  +% let $\true$ and then $\false$ by \!\pcol@sptext! before and +% after the invocation of \sync{}ed \!\pcol@switchcol! prior to the +% \mctext. Then the switch is examined by \!\pcol@putbackmvl! after +% the \sync{}ation to save the {\em\Uidx\prespan}, being all stuff in main +% vertical list prior to the \sync{}ation, so that the \mctext{} is split +% from the stuff and is captured afterward by \!\pcol@makecol! and/or +% \!\pcol@output@switch!. The macro also locally turns the switch +% $\false$ if it does not follow the \sync{}ation, i.e., its invocation is +% for \cscan{}ning or is caused by pre-\sync{}ation page break, to do the +% saving only when it follows the \sync{}ation. The switch is also examined +% in \!\pcol@output! to inhibit the warning and forced page break even when +% $\cc_0(\vb^r)=\!\@colroom!<1.5\!\baselineskip!$, because we may let it have +% a small value when the \mctext{} starts near the page bottom to capture +% the text portion in the page by \!\pcol@makecol!. In addition, it is +% examined by \!\pcol@switchcol! to invoke $|\pcol@colpream|{\cdot}c$, +% where $c=-1$ if $\true$ or $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ otherwise. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colpream} +% +% The macro \!\pcol@sptext! then \!\global!ly turns another switch +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext} $\true$ before putting the \mctext{} into the main +% vertical list so that \!\pcol@makecol! for the page break in the text and +% \!\pcol@output@switch! for closing capture the text to place it +% appropriately especially when \cswap{} is in effect. Then the switch +% is \!\global!ly turned $\false$ by \!\pcol@output@switch! to give the +% default state after it {\em broadcasts} \CSIndex{if@nobreak}, +% \CSIndex{if@afterindent} and \!\everypar! to all columns. +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@clear} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add initialization to be $\string\mathit{false}$.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@flushclear} to the macros turning the switch +% $\string\mathit{true}$ due to the pre-flushing column height +% check.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@clear| is $\true$ iff \!\pcol@output@switch! is +% invoked for \pfcheck{}, page flushing or environment closing. Therefore, +% the switch is turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@flushclear! in the first case, and +% by \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! in the latter two. These two macros also +% turned the switch $\false$ after the direct\slash indirect invocation of +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to give the default state. The switch is examined +% by \!\pcol@output@switch! and its descendants \!\pcol@sync!, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@synccolumn! for \sync{}ation, and by +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput! for logging. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@flush} +% \changes{v1.2-3}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to fix the problem with a too-tall page at +% synchronization.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add uses for page-wise footnote functions.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@flush| is turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@sync! iff it finds +% that the page to be \sync{}ed or to be flushed is too tall because the +% sum of the total height of top floats and main text in a column and that +% of bottom floats and footnotes in another column is larger than +% $\pp^h(\ptop)-v^f-\VE$, where $v^f$ is the total heigth-plus-depth of the +% \Scfnote{}s if $\ptop$ has them or 0 otherwise, and $\VE$ is the amount +% given by \!\ensurevspace! in \sync{}ation or 0 in flushing. Then the +% switch is examined in \!\pcol@sync! itself to restart the tallest column +% if $\true$, in \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to check if a \mctext{} is really to +% start, in \!\pcol@switchcol! to have a explicit page break in each column +% if $\true$, and in \!\pcol@flushclear! also to have a page break if +% $\true$. The last examiner \!\pcol@flushclear! may turn the switch +% $\true$ when it is invoked from \!\endparacol! if the last page leaves +% deferred and non-merged \Scfnote{}s for which an explicit page break is +% also required. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@outputflt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Renamed from \cs{ifpcol@stopoutput} with the reversal.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@outputflt| is used in \!\pcol@outputelt! to know +% whether a \fpage{} is to be shipped out ($\true$) or not. The switch is +% initialized to be $\true$ by \!\pcol@outputcolumns! which invokes +% \!\pcol@outputelt! for all $\pp(p)\in\PP$. Then if \!\pcol@outputcolumns! is +% invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! to ship the oldest page $\pbase$ out, the +% switch is turned $\false$ when we visit the second non-\fpage. That is, +% all \fpage{}s following the first (oldest) page are shipped out but others +% are not. On the other hand, if \!\pcol@outputcolumns! is invoked from +% \!\pcol@sync! to ship out all pages including \fpage{}s in $\PP$, the +% switch is kept $\true$ throughout all invocations of \!\pcol@outputelt!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@lastpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for special operations in the last page.} +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@lastpagesave} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to fix the bug that \cs{@makecol} and +% \cs{pcol@makefcolumn} in \cs{pcol@flushcolumn} misunderstand that +% non-last pages are last.} +%  +% The switch |\ifpcol@lastpage| is used to know whether the following macros +% work on the {\em\Uidx\lpage} of a \env{paracol} environment to do special +% operations if so. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! adds \!\textfloatsep! below bottom floats of each +% column if any so that the floats are well sepearated from the \postenv. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@sync! examines $\VPP$ instead of $\VP$ for the \pfcheck. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! trys to make deferred floats as top floats. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! builds a short page of $\VPP$ tall, leaves +% \spanning{} from ship-out if $\VPP=\!\pcol@colht!=-\infty$ so that it +% becomes a float in \postenv, and leaves \Scfnote{}s untouched if +% \Mgfnote{} typesetting is in effect. This macro itself turns this switch +% $\false$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\true$ to mean one or more columns +% in the \lpage{} have deferred \cwise{} floats and thus the \lpage{} +% must be {\em full size}. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! leaves the \bground{} of \Scfnote{}s unpainted, +% and lets the depth of the \lpage{} be 0 in \bgpaint{} and packing of +% \colpage{}s. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% The switch is initialized to be $\false$ by \!\pcol@zparacol!, then turned +% $\true$ by \!\endparacol!, and then finally turned $\false$ by +% \!\pcol@output@end! again for +% \fpage{}s following the \lpage{} if any. The macro \!\pcol@flushcolumn! +% saves the switch into \CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpagesave} then turning it +% $\false$ during it works on \colpage{}s in non-top and thus non-\lpage{}s +% to keep \!\@makecol! and \!\pcol@makefcolumn! from misunderstanding the +% pages are last, and then restore the switch when the macro reaches to the +% \tpage. This saving and temporary turning $\false$ is also done in +% \!\pcol@flushclear! when it forces a page break so that the \!\output! +% routine working on the broken non-\lpage{} correctly recognizes that. +% Another temporary turning is made by \!\pcol@makenormalcol! but in reverse +% to let the switch be $\true$ so that its indirect callee +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! puts a vertical skip of \!\textfloatsep! below the +% bottom floats in \preenv. +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@scfnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for page-wise footnote functions.} +%  +% The switch \!\ifpcol@scfnote! is turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@fnlayout@p! +% and \!\pcol@fnlayout@m! (through \!\pcol@fnlayout@p!) to indicate +% footnotes in all columns are merged and \scfnote, while +% \!\pcol@fnlayout@c! turns it $\false$ to make footnote typesetting +% \mcfnote{}, being default as well. The switch is examined by the +% following macros to do special operations for \Scfnote{}s if +% it is $\true$. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makecol! shrinks \!\@colht! and put the stretch\slash shrink +% factor of \!\skip!\!\footins! at the bottom of the \colpage{} to be built +% by the macro if the page has footnotes. If the \colpage{} is in the +% \tpage{} $\ptop$, the macro also saves \!\footins! into \!\pcol@currfoot! +% which then will be saved into $\pp^f(\ptop)$ by \!\pcol@startpage!, or +% \!\footins! is discarded otherwise. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@startcolumn!, if it is invoked from \!\pcol@output! to start a +% \colpage{} in a page $p$, \!\insert!s $\pp^f(p)$ through \!\footins!, and +% also the deferred footnotes in $\df$ by \!\pcol@deferredfootins!, if +% $p=\ptop$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@output@switch! saves \!\footins! into $\pp^f(\ptop)$ if the macro +% is to leave a \colpage{} in the \tpage, or discards it otherwise. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! to restart a \colpage{} in a page $p$ \!\insert!s +% $\pp^f(p)$ through \!\footins!, and also the deferred footnotes in $\df$ +% by \!\pcol@deferredfootins!, if $p=\ptop$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@sync! examines whether the total height of \Scfnote{}s is too +% large to let them reside in the page to be synchronized or flushed as a +% whole. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@zparacol! redefines \!\footnoterule! so that it refers to +% \!\textwidth! rather than \!\column~width! to determine the width of the +% rule above footnotes. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntext! invokes \!\pcol@fntextother! to add the footnote given to +% it to $\df$ as a deferred footnote if $p<\ptop$. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! lets \!\hsize! be \!\textwidth! rather than +% \!\columnwidth! to typeset the footnote given to it. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@mgfnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for page-wise footnote functions.} +%  +% The switch \!\ifpcol@mgfnote! is turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@fnlayout@m! +% to indicate footnotes in the \spage{} and \lpage{} of a \env{paracol} +% environment are merged with those in pre- and \postenv{}, while +% \!\pcol@fnlayout@p! and \!\pcol@fnlayout@c! turn it $\false$ to +% put them above\slash below the columns in the starting\slash\lpage{} +% respectively, being default as well. The switch is examined by the +% following macros to do special operations for \mgfnote{} \Scfnote{}s +% if it is $\true$. +%  +% \Index{pre-environment stuff} +% \Index{starting page} +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! leaves \!\footins! untouched rather than putting it +% as a part of \preenv. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! leaves \!\footins! untouched rather than putting it +% as a part of the \lpage{} of \env{paracol} if it works on the page. +% +% \item +% \!\endparacol! does not let \!\pcol@flushclear! examine the existence of +% deferred footnotes in \pfcheck{} for the \lpage. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begingroup\let\small\footnotesize +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@fncounteradjustment} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for page-wise footnote functions.} +%  +% The switch \!\ifpcol@fncounteradjustment! is turned $\true$ by the API +% macro \!\fncounter~adjustment!, which is also invoked from +% \!\pcol@fnlayout@p! and \!\pcol@fnlayout@m! (through \!\pcol@fnlayout@p!), +% to let $\!\c@footnote!=\bf+\nf$ by \!\endparacol!. The macro +% \!\nofncounter~adjustment! turns the switch $\false$ to give the default +% state. +% \end{macro} +% \endgroup +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@inner} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Introduced to know if we are in a \cs{vbox}.} +%  +% The switch \cs{ifpcol@inner} is turned $\false$ by \!\pcol@zparacol! to +% mean we are outside any \!\vbox!es, while the macro also lets +% \!\everyvbox! in the \env{paracol} environment has the operation to turn +% the switch $\true$ so that it is true whenever we are in a \!\vbox!. The +% switch is examined by \!\pcol@set@color@push! and \!\pcol@icolumncolor!, +% the former of which also turns it $\true$ if we are in restricted +% horizontal mode, to make an \!\output! request for \colorstack{} +% manipuratoin and, in the former, to reserve the stack popper by +% \!\aftergroup!, iff the switch is $\false$. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@firstpage} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to know if a spanning stuff is pre-environment one.} +%  +% The switch \cs{ifpcol@firstpage} is \!\global!ly turned $\true$ or +% $\false$ by \!\pcol@output@start! if it captures \preenv{} as a +% \spanning{} or not because it is too large, respectively. Then the switch +% is examined by \!\pcol@ioutputelt! or \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! when they +% finds a \spanning{} to be combined to the page to be printed so as to +% paint the \bground{} for the color of \pwise{} floats unless the switch is +% $\true$ to mean the stuff is pre-environment one rather than floats. Then +% \!\pcol@outputelt! or \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! itself \!\global!ly turns +% the switch $\false$ after printing a page because we no longer have +% \preenv{} in the \env{paracol} environment we are in. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@havelastpage} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to know if a page to be put has the last page of a +% \string\texttt{paracol} environment.} +%  +% The switch \cs{ifpcol@havelastpage} is, after intiailized $\false$, +% \!\global!ly turned $\true$ by \!\pcol@output@end! if it finds the +% \lpage{} of the \env{paracol} environment is connected to the \postenv, or +% $\false$ otherwise. Then the switch is examined by (our own version of) +% \!\@outputpage! which paints the \bground{} of the page to be printed iff +% the switch is $\true$ because a part of the page was prodcued by a +% \env{paracol} environment. Then the macro \!\global!ly turns the switch +% $\false$ because so far \bgpaint{} should be disabled. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\ifpcol@paired} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for parallel-paging which has paired and non-paired mode.} +%  +% The switch \cs{ifpcol@paired} is $\true$ if the \parapag{}ed typesetting +% should be done in {\em\paired} mode in which the pair of left and right +% \parapag{}es comprises a virtual page, while it is $false$ if +% \npaired{} to treat the left and right pages as individual ones. +% Therefore, the switch is \!\global!ly turned $\false$ by \!\pcol@yparacol! +% when \beginparacol{} has the optional argument for the number of columns +% in the left \parapag{}e followed by |*|, or turned $\true$ +% otherwise by \!\paracol! for giving default or by \!\pcol@zparacol! if it +% finds $\CL\geq\C$ to mean \parapag{}ing is not in effect +% in reality\footnote{ +%  +% The initialization to let the switch $\false$ is not necessary because it +% is examined only after the first \cs{paracol} even in the +% \cs{@outputpage} outside \texttt{paracol} environment, but we dare to do +% this for the sake of clearity.}. +% +% Then the switch is examined by \!\pcol@setpnoelt! and \!\pcol@startpage! +% so that, if the switch is $\false$, they let $\page(q)=\page(q-1)+2$ where +% $\cc_0(\vb^p)0$. +% +% The other usage of this register is to have the left or right margin for +% \bgpaint{} in the alias \!\pcol@bg@leftmargin! for strict local use in +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! and its descendent macros for \bgpaint. That is, the +% register is aliased as \!\pcol@bg@leftmargin! by \!\pcol@bg@paint@i!, let +% have left or right margin by \!\pcol@bg@swappage!, and then referred to by +% \!\pcol@bg@pageleft!. +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pagerim} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to specify the page rim size for backgournd coloring.} +%  +% The API \!\dimen! register \!\pagerim! has the size of {\em\Uidx\prim{}s} +% specified by users. Since the rims are the area for which \bgpaint{} +% is inhibited, the register is used in area specification macros +% \!\pcol@bg@paperwidth!, \!\pcol@bg@paperheight!, \!\pcol@bg@pageleft! and +% \!\pcol@bg@pagetop!, in which the register has the negative counterpart of +% the specified value set by \!\pcol@bg@paint@i!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@topskip} +% The \!\skip! register \!\pcol@topskip! keeps the value of \!\topskip! at +% \beginparacol{} for the ordinary usage of \!\topskip! which may have 0 in +% the starting and \lpage{} temporarily. After the initialization by +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, it is referred to by \!\pcol@getpinfo! for pages without +% \spanning{} and thus \preenv, by \!\pcol@startpage! to let \!\topskip! and +% $\pp^t(p)$ has it for non-\spage{} $p$, by \!\pcol@output@start! for the +% second page if it finds \preenv{} is too large to combine with the +% multi-column stuff, and by \!\endparacol! to recover \!\topskip! for the +% pages following the \lpage. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\belowfootnoteskip} +% \changes{v1.35-4}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced to specify the additional space below the non-merged +% pre-environment footnotes.} +%  +% The API \!\skip! register \!\belowfootnoteskip! has the amount of the space +% added below non-merged \Preenv{} footnotes. The register is initialized +% with the default 0\,pt, and then used in \!\pcol@output@start! to measure +% the room in the first page, and in \!\pcol@combinefootins! to add the +% space. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\newdimen\pcol@prevdepth +\newdimen\pcol@colht +\newdimen\pcol@textfloatsep +\newdimen\pcol@lrmargin +\newdimen\pagerim \pagerim\z@ +\newskip\pcol@topskip +\newskip\belowfootnoteskip \belowfootnoteskip\z@ +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \subsection{\cs{box} Registers} +% +% The next declaration group is for the following \!\box! registers. +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@topfnotes} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for page-wise footnote functions.} +%  +% The \!\box! register \!\pcol@topfnotes! is the implementation of $\df$ to +% have the list of deferred footnotes. The register is made void by +% \!\pcol@output@start! and then is made grown by \!\pcol@fntextother! with +% a deferred footnote added by the macro. The macro +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins! invoked from \!\pcol@startcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! tries to \!\insert! the contents of the register +% through \!\footins! but may keep some of trailing ones in it if the total +% height of the footnotes is too large, while \!\pcol@output@end! does the +% \!\insert!ion without height capping. The macro \!\endparacol! with +% non-\mgfnote{} \Scfnote{} typesetting also refers to the register to pass +% it to \!\pcol@flushclear! as its argument so as to make an explicit page +% break if the register has some deferred footnotes. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@prespan} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to save pre-spanning-text stuff.} +%  +% The \!\box! register \!\pcol@prespan! keeps the \prespan{} during a +% \mctext{} is processed by \TeX{} and our own \!\output! routine. That is, +% the macro \!\pcol@putbackmvl! saves the contents $\cc_0(\vb^b)$ of +% the column 0 to be restarted into the register instead of putting it back +% to the main vertical list, or makes the register $\bot$ if the column has +% nothing, when the restart follows the \sync{}ation with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\true$. Then the contents of the register +% is put back to the main vertical list together with the box having +% \mctext{} after its vertical size is registered in the list $\pp^s(p)$ of +% \mctext{} postions and heights, by \!\pcol@makecol! when the text sees a +% page break, or by \!\pcol@output@switch! when the text is completed. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@rightpage} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have the ship-out image of a right parallel-page.} +%  +% The \!\box! register \!\pcol@rightpage! is used to build (a part of) the +% ship-out image of a right \parapag{}e in it. The macros; +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@flushfloats!, +% \!\pcol@output@flush!, and +% \!\pcol@output@clear! +% \end{quote} +%  +% work on the register together with \!\@outputbox! for +% the left \parapag{}e to pass both of them to (our of version of) +% \!\@outputpage!. The macro \!\pcol@output@end! also uses the register to +% paint the \bground{} of the empty counterpart of non-merged \Scfnote{}s in +% it, or to make the register $\bot$ when it have an empty \lpage{} but with +% \spanning{} of \pwise{} floats. After closing a \env{paracol} +% environment, the contents of the register +% will be shiped out by +% \!\@outputpage! invoked outside \env{paracol} environment when the +% \postenv{} sees a page break, or referred to by \!\pcol@output@start! as +% the \preenv{} in the right \parapag{}e. This right \preenv{} then will be +% combined with \colpage{}s in the right \parapag{}e by \!\pcol@ioutputelt! +% or \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! for shipping-out, or by +% the latter indirectly invoked from \!\pcol@output@end! as the +% last\Index{last page}{} right \parapag{}e again. Therefore the \!\setbox! +% of the register in \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@output@end! must be done +% \!\global!ly\footnote{ +%  +% The \!\global! setting in \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, together with \!\@outputbox! which does not +% need \!\global! assignment, is also required by the sake of simplicity in +% its implementation, incidentally.}. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@colorstack@saved} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced as $\mathit{\Gamma}_s$ to keep the color stack +% $\mathit{\Gamma}^c$ until a column-page of $c$ becomes non-empty.} +%  +% The \!\box! register \!\pcol@colorstack@saved! is $\csts$ to keep the +% \colorctext{} $\CST^c$ of column $c$ until its \ccolpage{} becomes non-empty +% to avoid that the \colpage{} only has coloring \!\special!s for +% \colorstack{} establishing and rewinding to let \!\pcol@ifempty! misjudge +% the \colpage{} is non-empty. It is let have $\Celt^c$, if defined, +% and $\cst$ by \!\pcol@savecolorstack! invoked from \!\pcol@startcolumn! +% and \!\pcol@output@start!, and from \!\pcol@restartcolumn! through +% \!\pcol@putbackmvl! when we know or find the (re)starting \colpage{} is +% empty. The macro \!\pcol@putbackmvl! also makes the \!\box! register +% $\bot$ when the restarting \colpage{} is not empty and thus the \colpage{} +% has had coloring \!\special!s for establishing \colorctext{} at its +% beginning. Then the register is given to \!\pcol@restorecst! by +% \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox! to put leading coloring \!\special!s for +% establishing of the \colpage{} when we complete it by \!\pcol@opcol! or +% leave from it by \!\pcol@output@switch!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@tempboxa} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have materials temporarily for column-separatig rule +% drawing or background painting.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@tempbox} because its relative +% \cs{pcol@tempboxb} is introduced.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Add ussage in \cs{pcol@scancst} and \cs{pcol@iscancst}.} +%  +% The \!\box! register \!\pcol@tempboxa! is used to have stuff temporarily as +% follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% The macro \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! and its callee \!\pcol@buildcselt! +% builds the \cseprule{} in the register for a page to be shipped out, while +% its contents is put into each \csepgap{} by \!\pcol@hfil!. +% +% \item +% In (our own version of) \!\@outputpage!, the register has the \bgpaint{} +% of the (left parallel-) page, +%  +% \Index{parallel-paging} +%  +% which is inserted into the ship-out image by its callee +% \!\pcol@outputpage@l! through \!\everyvbox! and its contents +% \!\pcol@outputpage@ev!. +% +% \item +% In \!\pcol@scancst! and its callee \!\pcol@iscancst! to scan $\CSTraw^c$, +% $\CST^c$ or $\csts$, the sequence of (un)coloring \!\special!s to be put +% into the main vertical list is build in it. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@tempboxb} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to extract the top of color stack $\mathit{\Gamma}$, +% $\mathit{\Gamma}_r$ or $\mathit{\Gamma}_s$.} +%  +% The \!\box! register \!\pcol@tempboxb! is used in \!\pcol@iscancst! +% to extract the top (last) element of $\cst$, $\cstraw$ or $\csts$. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\newbox\pcol@topfnotes +\newbox\pcol@prespan \setbox\pcol@prespan\box\voidb@x +\newbox\pcol@rightpage \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\box\voidb@x +\newbox\pcol@colorstack@saved +\newbox\pcol@tempboxa +\newbox\pcol@tempboxb +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \subsection{\cs{insert} Register Set} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Add \Sec3.6 ``\cs{insert} Register Set'' for \cs{pcol@colorins}.} +% +% The next declaration is for the following \!\insert! register set. +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@colorins} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to present text-coloring operations to \cs{output} +% synchronously with column-pages.} +%  +% The register set \!\pcol@colorins! is to \!\insert! a \!\vbox! containing a +% (un)coloring \!\special! for color pushing or popping, or the definition +% of a new default color of the current column. In order to make it sure +% that an \!\insert!ion does not affect \!\pagetotal! and is given to +% \!\output! with |\box255| containing the corresponding coloring +% \!\special! put in the main vertical list, \!\count!\!\pcol@colorins! and +% \!\skip!\!\pcol@colorins! are let be 0, while \!\dimen!\!\pcol@colorins! is +% let be \!\maxdimen! to allow a \colpage{} to have vitually infinite number +% of \!\insert!ions. +% +% The \!\insert!ion is done by \!\pcol@icolumncolor! for a default color +% definition, \!\pcol@set@color@push! for color pushing, and +% \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! and \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop! for color popping +% in non-math and math mode respectrively. Then \!\insert!ed \!\vbox!es are +% packed into \!\box!\!\pcol@colorins! and is given to \!\output! as +% $\cstraw$ to be scanned by \!\pcol@clearcolorstack! to reform it as +% $\cst$, and then scanned by \!\pcol@restorecolorstack! or saved into +% $\csts=\!\pcol@colorstack@saved!$ by \!\pcol@savecolorstack!. The +% register is also referred to by $\!\pcol@scancst!\arg{box}$ to examine if +% $\arg{box}$ is this register or \!\pcol@colorstack@saved!, and is made +% $\bot$ by \!\pcol@output@end! after the final reestablishment of the +% \colorstack. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\newinsert\pcol@colorins +\count\pcol@colorins\z@ \skip\pcol@colorins\z@ \dimen\pcol@colorins\maxdimen +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{\cs{toks} Register} +% +% The last declaration is for the following \!\toks! register. +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@everyvbox} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Introduced to keep \cs{everyvbox} work as usual while having +% \cs{pcol@innertrue} in it always.} +%  +% The register \!\pcol@everyvbox! acts as \!\everyvbox! in \env{paracol} +% environments. That is, by \!\pcol@zparacol!, \!\everyvbox! is made +% \!\let!-equal to this register so that updates and references of +% \!\everyvbox! is made to this register, while the real \!\everyvbox! is +% let have the reference to the register and |\pcol@innertrue| to make +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@inner}=\true$ in every \!\vbox!. Besides +% \!\pcol@zparacol!, the register is reffered to by +% \!\pcol@restoreeveryvbox! to examine if it has been \!\global!ly updated, +% i.e., its contents is not \!\pcol@dummytoken!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\newtoks\pcol@everyvbox + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \section{Logging Tools} +% \label{sec:imp-logging} +% +% Prior to the \!\def!initions of macros to implement \textsf{paracol}'s +% functions, we define a few macros for debug logging. +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ShowBox} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Change \cs{unvcopy} to \cs{copy} to make sure the argument box +% causes overfull if its height is positive and even if it has +% nothing.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Add messaging {\tt (VOID)} if $\langle b\rangle\EQ\bot$, +% $\cs{vfuzz}\gets0$ to ensure overfull, and \cs{vskip} of 1\,{\tt +% pt} if $\langle b\rangle$'s height is 0 to ensure overfull too.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ShowBox!\arg{b}$ puts a logging \!\message! showing the +% height, depth and width of the \!\box! (or \!\insert!) register $b$, or +% ``|(VOID)|'' if $b=\bot$. Then, if $b\neq\bot$, $b$'s contents is dumped +% into |.log| file making overfull intentionally by putting $b$ into +% \!\box!|0| of null height, together with \!\vskip! of 1\,|pt| if $b$'s +% height is 0, with setting $\!\vfuzz!=0$. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{13} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@LogLevel} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iLogLevel} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Log} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Log@iii} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Log@ii} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Log@i} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logstart} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logstart@ii} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logstart@i} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logend} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logend@ii} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logend@i} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logfn} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logfn@ii} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Logfn@i} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for debugging page-wise footnote functions.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@LogLevel!\arg{l_1}\arg{l_2}\arg{l_3}$ defines the +% detailedness of logging done by logging macros. It invokes +% $\!\pcol@iLogLevel!\Arg{l_i}\Arg{cs}$ to let the following $|\|\arg{cs}$ +% be $|\|\arg{cs}|@|\arg{l'_i}$ where $l'_i$ is the \!\romannumeral! +% representation of $l_i$. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\!\pcol@Log!\arg{cs}\Arg{m}\arg{f}$ is to log the contents of the \!\insert! +% register $f$ containing footnotes which is referred to by the macro +% $\arg{cs}$ in a context shown by $m$. The macro \!\pcol@Log@iii! +% ($l_1=3$) logs the detailed contents of $f$ by \!\pcol@ShowBox!, while +% \!\pcol@Log@ii! ($l_1=2$) just shows the height of $f$ and \!\pcol@Log@i! +% ($l_1=1$) does nothing. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@Logstart!\Arg{m}$ and $\!\pcol@Logend!\Arg{m}$ put logging +% \!\message!s `$|S:|m$' and `$|E:|m$' respectively to show the beginning +% and end of a procedure in the macro whose name is at the head of $m$, if +% $l_2=2$ and thus they are \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@Logstart@ii! and +% \!\pcol@Logend@ii!. If $l_2=1$, \!\pcol@Logstart@i! and \!\pcol@Logend@i! +% do nothing. +% +% \item +% $\!\pcol@Logfn!\Arg{m}$ puts a logging \!\message! $m$ whose head is the +% macro name for footnotes whose information such as the ordinal number of +% the footnote processed by the macro may be shown in $m$ as well, if +% $l_3=2$ and thus it is \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@Logfn@ii!. If $l_3=1$, +% \!\pcol@Logfn@i! does nothing. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Logging Tools + +\def\pcol@ShowBox#1{% + \ifvoid#1\message{(VOID)}% + \else + \message{(\the\ht#1+\the\dp#1)x(\the\wd#1)}% + {\vfuzz\z@ \showboxdepth\@M \showboxbreadth\@M + \setbox\z@\vbox to\z@{\ifdim\ht#1=\z@ \vskip1\p@\fi \copy#1}}% + \fi} +\def\pcol@LogLevel#1#2#3{% + \pcol@iLogLevel{#1}{pcol@Log}% + \pcol@iLogLevel{#2}{pcol@Logstart}% + \pcol@iLogLevel{#2}{pcol@Logend}% + \pcol@iLogLevel{#3}{pcol@Logfn}} +\def\pcol@iLogLevel#1#2{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a + \csname #2@\romannumeral#1\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname #2\endcsname\reserved@a} +\def\pcol@Log@iii#1#2#3{\message{\string#1{#2% + (\number\pcol@page:\number\pcol@currcol/\number\pcol@toppage)}}% + \pcol@ShowBox#3\message{end\string#1}} +\def\pcol@Log@ii#1#2#3{\message{\string#1{#2% + (\number\pcol@page:\number\pcol@currcol/\number\pcol@toppage)}=\the\ht#3}} +\def\pcol@Log@i#1#2#3{} +\def\pcol@Logstart@ii#1{\message{S\string#1}} +\def\pcol@Logend@ii#1{\message{E\string#1}} +\def\pcol@Logstart@i#1{} +\def\pcol@Logend@i#1{} +\def\pcol@Logfn@ii#1{\message{\string#1}} +\def\pcol@Logfn@i#1{} +\pcol@LogLevel111 + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@F@write} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@F} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@FF} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@F@count} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@F@n} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Fb} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@Fe} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Introduced for debugging memory leak problems.} +% Another debugging tool is for investigating memory leak problems. Since +% \Paracol{} uses \!\insert! registers for various purposes, management +% operations of them especially that for proper release of them are crusial +% for the correctness of the implmentation. A source of toughness in +% debugging {\em memory leak} caused by missing a release of a register back +% to \!\@freelist! is that the resulting shortage is revealed long after the +% leakage to make it hard to find the point of the leakage. +% +% The set of macros is to help such debugging by logging the aquire and +% release of \!\insert! registers into a file named $\arg{job}|.fls|$ +% associated with \!\pcol@F@write! where $\arg{job}$ is given by +% \!\jobname!. After opened when \Paracol{} is loaded, the file is written by +% $\!\pcol@FF!\Arg{m_a}\Arg{m_b}$ with a line of the following form with +% text messages $m_a$ and $m_b$, where $p=\!\pcol@page!$, +% $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$, $\ptop=\!\pcol@toppage!$, $\pi=\page(p)=\!\c@page!$, +% and $n_b=\!\pcol@F@n!$ is the cardinality of \!\@deferlist! counted by +% \!\pcol@F@count!. +%  +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% $\arg{m_a}|(|\arg{p}|:|\arg{c}|/|\arg{\ptop}|:|\arg{\pi}|)=| +% \arg{n_b}\arg{m_b}$ +% \end{itemize} +%  +% The argument $\arg{m_b}$ is empty when $\!\pcol@FF!$ is invoked from +% $\!\pcol@F!\arg{m_a}$ for snapshot, while +% $\arg{m_b}=\hbox{`|<=|$\arg{n_b}$'}$ when invoked from +% $\!\pcol@Fe!\arg{m_a}$ paired by $\!\pcol@Fb!=\!\pcol@F@count!$ by which +% the cardinality of \!\@freelist! is given to $\arg{n_b}$ through +% \!\pcol@F@n! and then \!\reserved@a!. Therefore, by the pair of +% \!\pcol@Fb! and \!\pcol@Fe!, the consumption or restitution in a series of +% operations surrounded by the pair is logged in the file. +% +% In the production version, the logging is disabled of course by \!\let!ting +% \!\pcol@F! and \!\pcol@Fe! be \!\@gobble! and \!\pcol@F! be \!\relax!, +% while the open of \!\pcol@F@write! is disabled as well by a pair of +% \cs{iffalse} and \cs{fi}. +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\iffalse +\newwrite\pcol@F@write +\immediate\openout\pcol@F@write\jobname.fls +\fi +\def\pcol@F#1{\pcol@FF{#1}{}} +\def\pcol@FF#1#2{\pcol@F@count + \immediate\write\pcol@F@write{#1(\number\pcol@page:\number\pcol@currcol/% + \number\pcol@toppage:\number\c@page)=\pcol@F@n #2}} +\def\pcol@F@count{{\@tempcnta\z@ + \def\@elt##1{\advance\@tempcnta\@ne}\@freelist + \xdef\pcol@F@n{\number\@tempcnta}}} +\let\pcol@Fb\pcol@F@count +\def\pcol@Fe#1{{\let\reserved@a\pcol@F@n \pcol@FF{#1}{<=\reserved@a}}} +\let\pcol@F\@gobble +\let\pcol@Fb\relax +\let\pcol@Fe\@gobble + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% +% +% \section{\cs{output} Routine} +% \label{sec:imp-output} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ovf} +% Before giving the definitions of macros in \!\output! routine, we define +% the macro \!\pcol@ovf! invoked if \!\@freelist! is empty on an acquision +% of an \!\insert! by \!\@next! and thus we have to abort the execution by +% \!\PackageError! with a message notifying the shortage. The additional +% help message is \!\@ehb! as in \!\@fltovf!. This macro is used in +% \!\pcol@opcol!, \!\pcol@startpage!, \!\pcol@output@start!, +% \!\pcol@output@switch!, \!\pcol@iscancst!, \!\pcol@savefootins!, +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, \!\pcol@synccolumn!, \!\pcol@output@end! and +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor!. +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% \output Routine + +\def\pcol@ovf{% + \PackageError{paracol}{Too many unprocessed columns/floats}\@ehb} + +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@output} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Logstart} and \cs{pcol@Logend}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the examination of \cs{ifpcol@output} and \protect\LaTeX's +% original sequence for \cs{output} request sneaked from outside of +% \texttt{paracol} environment.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the assignment of \cs{@maxdepth} to \cs{maxdepth} to nullify +% the temproary setting done by \cs{@addtobot}.} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add a space after \cs{@opcol} to obey the coding convention.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@output! is the \Paracol's version of \!\output! which +% is let have this macro as its sole token by \!\pcol@zparacol!. The +% structure of this macro is same as that of \LaTeX's \!\output! but the +% following replacements are made\footnote{. +%  +% Besides the logging with \cs{pcol@Logstart} and \cs{pcol@Logend}.}. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\!\@specialoutput!\to\!\pcol@specialoutput!$ to process \LaTeX's genuine +% functions including the customized marginal note placement, and \Paracol's +% own special output functions; starting first page, \colorctext{} management, +% \cswitch, page flushing with\slash without float flusing, and building the +% multi-column part of the \lpage. +% +% \item +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{@makecol} with \cs{pcol@makecol} for a special care for +% column-pages with synchronization points.} +%  +% $\!\@makecol!\to\!\pcol@makecol!$ for a special care for \ccolpage{} having +% \sync{}ation point and/or \Scfnote{}s. +% +% \item +% $\!\@opcol!\to\!\pcol@opcol!$ to hold the \ccolpage{} which just has +% completed. +% +% \item +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add an argument \cs{@ne} to \cs{pcol@startcolumn} to distinguish it +% from the invocation in \cs{pcol@freshpage}.} +%  +% $\!\@startcolumn!\to\!\pcol@startcolumn!$ to creat a new \colpage{}. The +% argument \!\@ne! is to distinguish the invocation in this macro from +% that in \!\pcol@freshpage! so that the \!\insert!ions of $\pp^f(p)$ and +% $\df$ are done only when a new \colpage{} is created with ordinary page +% break. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Add reset of \cs{set@color}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {Add zero-clear of \cs{pcol@mcid}.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\cs{ifpcol@sptextstart}\EQ\string\mathit{false}$ to the +% condition for the warning of too small \cs{vsize}.} +%  +% In addition, before we start the main body of \!\output! routine, we add +% two operations for coloring. One is to make +% \!\set@color! \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@set@color!, i.e, to let it regain +% its original definition throughout \!\output! routine, because +% no manipulation of \colorstack{} is necessary\footnote{ +%  +% Though this operation is not necessary because \cs{everyvbox} should work +% for any \cs{set@color} because they should be in a \cs{vbox}, we dare to +% do it for clearity.}. +%  +% The other is to zero-clear the counter \!\pcol@mcid! because we are +% definitely in the main (non-internal) vertical mode and thus all push/pop +% pairs of the coloring in math mode have been processed. +% +% Further, before we start the sequence for non-special \!\output! request +% on page breaks, we examine if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\true$ to mean +% \!\pcol@output@start! has already been invoked in order to cope with +% \!\output! request {\em sneaking}. This sneaking happens when +% \beginparacol{} is at a crtical position of page breaking at which the +% \preenv{} has already exceeds \!\vsize! but \TeX{} cannot make the +% \!\output! request for the page break at \CSIndex{par} at the beginning of +% \!\pcol@zparacol! because it sees $\!\penalty!=10000$ due to, e.g., a +% sectioning command just preceding \beginparacol. In this case, the +% request is postponed until \TeX{} see a \!\penalty! less than 10000 and +% thus it is made with some non-special \!\outputpenalty! greather than +% $-10000$ when \TeX{} sees the dummy request of $\!\penalty!=-10004$ in +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput! for \!\pcol@output@start!. At this timing, +% \!\pcol@zparacol! has already let \!\output! have \!\pcol@output! of +% course but the request must be processed by original \!\output! because it +% is made {\em outside} of the \env{paracol} environment which has just +% started. Therefore, if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\false$, we have to +% perform the operation sequence as the original \!\output! does. +% Furthermore, we have to take care of the fact that a few our own settings +% related to \!\output! routine has already been made in \!\pcol@zparacol!, +% namely $\CSIndex{if@twocolumn}=\true$ and +% $\!\@combinefloats!=\!\pcol@combinefloats!$, which should make the macros +% in the original sequnce confused especially by the former. Therefore, we +% turns $\CSIndex{if@twocolumn}=\false$ and let \!\@combinefloats! have the +% original definition kept in \!\pcol@@combinefloats!\footnote{ +%  +% Though we know \cs{pcol@combinefloats} acts exactly as \cs{@combinefloats} +% because \cs{pcol@zparacol} initializes $\cs{pcol@textfloatsep}=\infty$ and +% $\cs{ifpcol@lastpage}=\false$. On the other hand, we don't cancel the +% re\cs{def}itnition of \cs{footnoterule} because it should be +% $\cs{textwidth}=\cs{columnwidth}$ outside of \env{paracol} environments.} +%  +% temporarily, i.e., only in the group automatically surrounding the +% invocation of \!\output!. +% +% Another addition is to assign \!\@maxdepth! to \!\maxdepth! in order to +% nullify the temporary setting to 0 done in \!\@addtobot!. By this +% assignment, in \env{paracol} environments \TeX's page builder always +% refers to the value in \!\@maxdepth!. Yet another addition is to add +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\false$ to the condition for the warning of +% too short \!\vsize!, because a \mctext{} can start near the bottom of a +% page with a small \!\@colroom! less than $1.5\times\!\baselineskip!$ and +% thus the warning is unnecessary and inappropriate when +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\true$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@output{\let\par\@@par \let\set@color\pcol@set@color + \global\pcol@mcid\z@ + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@output\number\outputpenalty + (\number\c@page:\number\pcol@currcol)}% + \ifnum\outputpenalty<-\@M + \pcol@specialoutput + \else\ifpcol@output + \pcol@makecol + \pcol@opcol + \pcol@startcolumn\@ne + \@whilesw\if@fcolmade\fi{\pcol@opcol \pcol@startcolumn\@ne}% + \else + \@twocolumnfalse \let\@combinefloats\pcol@@combinefloats + \@makecol + \@opcol + \@startcolumn + \@whilesw\if@fcolmade\fi{\@opcol \@startcolumn}% + \fi\fi + \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth + \ifnum\outputpenalty>-\@Miv + \ifdim\@colroom<1.5\baselineskip + \ifdim\@colroom<\textheight + \ifpcol@sptextstart + \global\vsize\@colroom + \else + \@latex@warning@no@line{Text page \thepage\space + contains only floats}% + \@emptycol + \fi + \else + \global\vsize\@colroom + \fi + \else + \global\vsize\@colroom + \fi + \else + \global\vsize\maxdimen + \fi + \pcol@Logend\pcol@output} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Completing Column-Page} +% \label{sec:imp-opcol} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@makecol} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to cope with the careless implementaion of \cs{@makecol} +% in p\string\LaTeX.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add an argument $d$ to be assigned to \cs{boxmaxdepth} to let it +% have 0 rather than \cs{@maxdepth} for last page.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@@makecol!\$ is used in \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! which simply require \LaTeX's original +% \!\@makecol! to build the ship-out image of a \colpage. The reason why we +% need our own version is that a variation of \LaTeX, namely p\LaTeX{} for +% Japanese, carelessly implements its own \!\@makecol! to make the resulting +% \!\@outputbox! has a depth larger than \!\@maxdepth! if the \colpage{} has +% \Mcfnote{}s whose last line is unusually deep. To cope with the problem, +% this macro at first invokes \!\@makecol!, and then reshape \!\@outputbox! +% assigning $d=\!\@maxdepth!$ to \!\boxmaxdepth! to cap its depth, unless +% this macro is used for the \lpage{} with $d=0$ because depth of the last +% component of the \!\@outputbox! is incorporated in \!\@colht!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Completing Column-Page + +\def\pcol@@makecol#1{\@makecol + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\@colht{\boxmaxdepth#1\unvbox\@outputbox}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@makecol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for special float handling in a column-page with +% synchronization points.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add save/discard of page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove unnecessary check of \cs{ifpcol@lastpage} on the +% redefinition of \cs{@textbottom}.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a function to capture a broken spanning text, to combine it +% with pre-spanning-text stuff, and to shift it left on +% column-swapping.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the addition of the element to $\pi^s(p)$ for a broken +% spanning text.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\pi^m(p)\EQ\cs{pcol@mparbottom}$ to the argument of +% \cs{pcol@defcurrpage}.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@colht} and \cs{relax} as the first and third argument of +% \cs{pcol@shrinkcolbyfn}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Move down the \cs{def}inition of \cs{pcol@currfoot} with $\bot$ to +% place it just before the \cs{ifpcol@scfnote}/\cs{fi} construct to +% make it clear how \cs{pcol@currfoot} is \cs{def}ined.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@makecol! is invoked solely from \!\pcol@output! to build +% the shipping image of the \ccolpage{} which just has completed in +% \!\@outputbox!. This macro has two additional functions to its original +% version \!\@makecol!\footnote{ +%  +% Not \cs{pcol@@makecol} because the depth capping of \cs{@outputbox} is +% done by \cs{pcol@opcol} when it saves the box into $\cc_c(\vb^b)$.} +%  +% invoked in this macro. +% +% First, if $\cc_c(\tf)\neq\infty$ to mean the \colpage{} has \sync{}ation +% points, \!\@makecol! is invoked with a special \!\def!inition of +% \!\@textbottom! to put a vertical skip having $1/10000\,|fil|$ as its +% stretch and shrink. This modification is to nullify not only finite +% stretches (as \!\raggedbottom! does) but also finite shrinks possibly +% inserted just below the last \sync{}ation point to move up the first +% visible item upward a little bit if active. Therefore, \!\flushbottom! +% setting is nullified for \colpage{}s having \sync{}ation points and a +% small exceess from the bottom of a \colpage{} cannot be absorbed by +% shrinks but visible at the bottom\footnote{ +%  +% That is, the author gives higher priority to the perfect alignment of the +% items following a \sync{}ation point.}. +%  +% Note that the original definition of \!\@textbottom! is saved in +% \Midx{\!\pcol@textbottom!} before the invocation of \!\@makecol! and is +% restored after that\footnote{ +%  +% This save/restore cannot be done by a grouping because \!\@makecol! builds +% \!\@outputbox! by local assignments.}. +% +% Second, if $\CSIndex{pcol@sptext}=\true$ and $c=0$ to mean a \mctext{} +% encounters a page break, we have the first half (or second or succeeding +% part if the text lays across three or more pages) of the text in +% \!\box!|255|. Therefore, we add an element $\spt(H_n,h_n)$ to the tail of +% the list of \mctext{}s $\pp^s(\ptop)=\!\pcol@sptextlist!$, where $H_n$ is +% the height of \prespan{} in \!\pcol@prespan!\footnote{ +%  +% Since we have a \sync{}ation point before a \mctext{} always, \prespan{} +% or its sole contents \cs{vbox} has a vertical skip at its tail to make the +% its depth 0 as discussed in \secref{sec:imp-sout-sync}.} +%  +% plus the total height of top floats calculated by \!\pcol@addflhd! with +% $\cc_c(\tl)=\!\@toplist!$, and $h_n$ is the height-plus-depth of +% \!\box!|255|. Note that $H_n$ and $h_n$ are represented in the form of +% integer and thus we produce them by expansions with \!\number!. +% +% The addition, however, is not made if $h_n=0$ because painting its +% \bground{} is harmful if an extension is specified to make the region +% visible, while not painting or drawing a segment of \cseprule{} is very +% natural. Note that this $h_n=0$ case includes that in which \!\box!|255| +% has nothing but its height-plus-depth is non-zero because of discarding +% leading skips of the \mctext{} as pre-break skips. This special case is +% detected by decapsulating \!\box!|255| by \!\unvcopy! and examining the +% height-plus-depth of the result\footnote{ +%  +% We cannot do +% \cs{setbox}\cs{@cclv}\cs{vbox}\texttt{\Arg{\cs{unvbox}\cs{@cclv}}} +% because it erases the effect of pre-break skip following some visible +% material.}. +%  +% Also note that the list to be added is always for the \tpage{}, i.e., +% $\pp^s(\ptop)$ and thus we get and update it by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! and +% \!\pcol@defcurrpage!, because the \mctext{} immediately follows a +% \sync{}ation point in $\ptop$. Then we let \!\box!|255| have the +% \prespan{} followed by the \mctext{} being the original contents of +% \!\box!|255|, which may be shifted left by +% $\WT-w_c=\!\textwidth!-\!\columnwidth!$ by the macro +% \!\pcol@shiftspanning! if \cswap{} is in effect so that its left edge is +% aligned to that of the leftmost column, i.e., of the text area. +% +% The third addition is for \Scfnote{}s. If they are presented in +% \!\footins!, we shrink \!\@colht! by its height plus depth +% by \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! and put the stretch and shrink factor of +% \!\skip!\!\footins! at the bottom of \!\box!|255| by \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv! +% to {\em remove} footnotes from the \colpage{} but keeping the +% stretch\slash shrink contribution to the page breaking by their existence. +% Then we save \!\footins! into a new \!\insert! to be referred to as +% \!\pcol@currfoot!\footnote{ +%  +% Not in \cs{pcol@footins} because it is destroyed in \cs{pcol@startpage} +% just before saving operation into $\pp^f(p)$.} +%  +% by \!\pcol@savefootins! if $p=\ptop$ so that it is saved in $\pp^f(p)$ by +% \!\pcol@startpage! afterward, or simply discard the contents of +% \!\footins! otherwise because $\pp^f(p)$ has already been fixed. Note +% that these saving\slash discarding make \!\footins! void and thus +% \!\@makecol! will not put footnotes. +% +% On the other hand, if footnote typesetting is \mcfnote{}, \!\footins! is +% kept unchanged so that its contents will be put by \!\@makecol! if it has +% something. As for \!\pcol@currfoot!, it should have its default value +% $\!\voidb@x!=\bot$ assigned to it beforehand, so that, if $p=\ptop$, +% \!\pcol@startpage! will make $\pp^f(p)=\bot$ unless \Scfnote{s} are given +% in \!\footins!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@makecol{\let\pcol@textbottom\@textbottom + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep=\maxdimen\else + \def\@textbottom{\vskip\z@\@plus.0001fil\@minus.0001fil}\fi + \ifpcol@sptext \ifnum\pcol@currcol=\z@ + \pcol@getcurrpinfo\@tempcnta\@tempdima\@tempskipa + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvcopy\@cclv}% + \@tempdimb\ht\@tempboxa \advance\@tempdimb\dp\@tempboxa + \ifdim\@tempdimb>\z@ + \@tempdimb\ht\@cclv \advance\@tempdimb\dp\@cclv + \dimen@\ht\pcol@prespan \pcol@addflhd\@toplist\pcol@textfloatsep + \@cons\pcol@sptextlist{{\number\dimen@}{\number\@tempdimb}}% + \fi + \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\@tempcnta}\pcol@spanning\pcol@footins + {\pcol@sptextlist}{\pcol@mparbottom}% + \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@prespan \pcol@shiftspanning\@cclv + \unvbox\@cclv}% + \fi\fi + \def\pcol@currfoot{\voidb@x}% + \ifpcol@scfnote \ifvoid\footins\else + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\footins\relax + \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\pcol@unvbox@cclv\footins}% + \ifnum\pcol@page=\pcol@toppage + \pcol@Log\pcol@makecol{save}\footins + \pcol@Fb + \pcol@savefootins\pcol@currfoot + \pcol@Fe{makecol(pagefn)}% + \else + \pcol@Log\pcol@makecol{discard}\footins + \setbox\@tempboxa\box\footins + \fi + \fi\fi + \pcol@Logstart\pcol@makecol + \ifvoid\footins\else \pcol@Log\@makecol{put}\footins \fi + \@makecol + \pcol@Logend\pcol@makecol + \let\@textbottom\pcol@textbottom} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\@combinefloats} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@combinefloats} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for special float handling in a column-page with +% synchronization points.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove the shrink of \cs{textfloatsep} because each column in the last +% page is now made not taller than \cs{@colht} definitely by the +% introduction of the pre-flushing column height check.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the assignment of \cs{@maxdepth} to \cs{maxdepth} to nullify +% the temproary setting done by \cs{@addtobot}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add special operations for columns having synchronization point to +% move the infinite stretch and shrink to let it follow bottom floats +% ratehr than preceding them.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@combinefloats} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to solve the \cs{output} request sneaking.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@combinefloats! being our own version of \!\@combinefloats! +% is used in \LaTeX's \!\@makecol! because the original and our +% own are made \!\let!-equal by \!\pcol@zparacol!, and also used in +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! explicitly. The customization is twofold for both +% of top and bottom floats. +% +% For the top floats, we invoke the original \!\@cflt! if +% $\cc_c(\tf)=\infty$ to mean the \colpage{} to be shipped out does not have +% \sync{}ation points, or otherwise our own \!\pcol@cflt! which we will +% discuss shortly. Prior to the invocation of \!\@cflt!, in addition, we +% let $\!\maxdepth!=\!\@maxdepth!$ so that the macro refers to the value used +% throughout a \env{paracol} environment instead of that modified by +% \!\@addtobot! possibly affect the work in \!\@cflt! by the following +% sequence. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!(c)&\to&\!\pcol@trynextcolumn!\to\cdots\to\!\@addtobot!\\ +% &\to&\!\pcol@flushcolumn!(c{+}k)\to\!\pcol@@makecol!\to\!\@makecol!\\ +% &\to&\!\pcol@combinefloats!\to\!\@cflt! +% \end{eqnarray*} +% +% For the bottom floats, we invoke the original \!\@cflb! always but, if +% the \colpage{} has \sync{}ation points, we insert vertical skips of +% $s=0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 0.0001\,|fil|\ |minus|\ 0.0001\,|fil|$ and $-s$ before +% and after the invocation respectively. Since \!\@textbottom! is let have +% the skip of $s$ by \!\pcol@makecol! for a \colpage{} having \sync{}ation +% points and is inserted below bottom floats by \!\@makecol!\footnote{ +%  +% The insertion point is common to \LaTeX{} and p\LaTeX{}.}, +%  +% the effect of \!\@textbottom! is canceled by the skip of $-s$ but looks +% moved above bottom floats. Therefore, if the natural height of the +% \colpage{} is smaller than \!\@colht!, bottom floats are flushed to the +% page bottom as if \colpage{} itself is flushed by \!\newpage! etc. On the +% other hand, if the natural height is larger, more importantly, all shrinks +% below the last \sync{}ation point is canceled by the infinite shrink in +% $s$ above the bottom float but we should have sufficient space for shrinks +% there thanks to \!\textfloatsep! to avoid the interference between the +% bottom text and bottom floats. +% +% In addition, if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ to mean the \colpage{} is +% in the \lpage{}, we insert \!\textfloatsep! in \!\@outputbox! below the +% bottom floats so that they are well separated from \postenv. The switch +% is also $\true$ in the invocation from \!\pcol@makenormalcol! for +% \preenv{}, so that the bottom floats in it are well separated from the top +% of multi-column stuff in the \spage. +% +% On the other hand, the original \!\@combinefloats! saved in +% \!\pcol@@combinefloats! by \!\pcol@zparacol! is used in \!\pcol@output! to +% restore the original when it finds \!\output! request sneaking. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@combinefloats{% + \global\maxdepth\@maxdepth + \ifx\@toplist\@empty\else + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep=\maxdimen \@cflt \else \pcol@cflt \fi + \fi + \ifx\@botlist\@empty\else + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep=\maxdimen \@cflb + \else + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox + \vskip\z@\@plus.0001fil\@minus.0001fil}% + \@cflb + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox + \vskip\z@\@plus-.0001fil\@minus-.0001fil}% + \fi + \ifpcol@lastpage + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\box\@outputbox \vskip\textfloatsep}% + \fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@cflt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for special float handling in a column-page with +% synchronization points.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Replace \cs{maxdepth} with \cs{@maxdepth}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add {\tt\%} to the end of the line to open \cs{vbox} for +% \cs{@outputbox} to obey the coding convention.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@cflt! is invoked solely from \!\pcol@combinefloats! if +% the \colpage{} for which the macro combines the top floats has +% \sync{}ation points. The macro has the same structure as \LaTeX's version +% \!\@cflt! but has three modifications. The first one is that the floats +% are packed in a \!\vbox! rather than listed in \!\@outputbox! to nullify +% the stretch and shrink of \!\floatsep! to keep the \sync{}ation point from +% moving by them\footnote{ +%  +% Maybe unnecessary because of \!\@textbottom! inserted by \!\pcol@makecol! +% but \ldots}. +%  +% The second is that we use \!\@maxdepth! instead of \!\maxdepth! to make it +% clear we always use the value common throughout a \env{paracol} +% environment. The third is that the \!\textfloatsep! is replaced with +% $\!\pcol@textfloatsep!=\cc_c(\tf)$ (definitely finite) which can have a +% value different from \!\textfloatsep! when the float space is enlarged for +% \sync{}ation. If this enlargement is required, $\cc_c(\tf)$ is biased by +% 10000\,|pt| and thus is assuredly\footnote{ +%  +% Though not definitely in theoretical sense.} +%  +% larger than 5000\,|pt|. If so, the insertion of \!\topfigrule! should be +% inhibited because it has already been inserted by \!\pcol@synccolumn! or +% there are no real floats but we only have the float for main vertical list +% prior to the \sync{}ation point, or {\em\Uidx\mvlfloat} in short. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@cflt{% + \let\@elt\@comflelt + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}% + \@toplist + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{% + \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \box\@tempboxa + \vskip-\floatsep + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep>5000\p@ + \advance\pcol@textfloatsep-\@M\p@ + \else + \topfigrule + \fi + \vskip\pcol@textfloatsep + \unvbox\@outputbox}% + \let\@elt\relax + \pcol@Fb + \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@toplist}% + \pcol@Fe{cflt}% + \global\let\@toplist\@empty} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@opcol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Remove unnecessary assignment of \cs{@colht}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@maxpage} as \cs{pcol@toppage}.} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@clearcst@unvbox} to add coloring \cs{special}s at the +% top and bottom of the column-page to be shipped out, together with +% the setting $\cs{boxmaxdepth}\EQ\cs{@maxdepth}$ for depth capping.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@outputpage} as \cs{pcol@outputcolumns}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add {\tt\%} to the end of the line to open \cs{vbox} for +% \cs{@currbox} to obey the coding convention.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@opcol! is invoked from \!\pcol@output! for the ordinary +% completed \colpage{} built by \!\pcol@makecol!, or from the loop creating +% \fcolumn{}s in \!\pcol@output! or \!\pcol@freshpage!. At first it +% saves the \colpage{} of column $c$ in \!\@outputbox!, which +% \!\pcol@makecol! or \!\@tryfcolumn! just has built for an ordinary or +% \fcolumn{} respectively, in an \!\insert! acquired from \!\@freelist! by +% \!\@next!, and then adds it to the tail of $\S_c=|\pcol@shipped|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@shipped} +%  +% by \!\@cons!. In this saving operation, we add the sequence of uncoloring +% \!\special!s at the bottom to clear \colorstack{} by +% \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox! giving it \!\@outputbox! to be \!\unvbox!ed and +% possibly coloring \!\special!s for the \colpage{}'s \colorctext{} saved in +% $\csts$ at the top, so that the succeeding \colpage{} in printing order +% starts with its own \colorctext. For this addition, furthermore, we let +% $\!\boxmaxdepth!=\!\@maxdepth!$ to keep the depth capping made in the box +% builder from nullified\footnote{ +%  +% Or to apply the capping dropped from p\LaTeX's \cs{@makecol}, or to do +% nothing for the box made by \cs{@tryfcolumn} and thus being 0 deep.}. +% +% Then if $c=0$, we fix the page number of the page $p$ having the +% \colpage{} and let $\pp^p(q)$ have $\page(p)+(q-p)$ usually but possibly +% $\page(p)+2(q-p)$ with \npaired{} \parapag{}ing, for all +% $q\in[p{+1},\ptop]$ by \!\pcol@setpageno!. After that, we invoke +% \!\pcol@nextpage! to let $p=p'$ for the next \colpage{} of $c$, where +% $p'=p+1$ usually but can be $p+k+1$ if we have consecutive $k$ \fpage{}s +% from $p+1$. +% +% Next, we check if the oldest page $\pbase$ is made ready to be shipped out +% by the participation of the completed \colpage{} by \!\pcol@checkshipped!. +% If so, we invoke \!\pcol@outputcolumns! giving argument 0 to ship out +% $\pbase$ and its successor \fpage{}s. +% +% Finally we set up the next page $p$ by \!\pcol@startpage! if $p>\ptop$ +% meaning it is new one, or by \!\pcol@getcurrpage! otherwise, and +% reinitialize parameters for floats by \!\pcol@floatplacement! before +% returning to the invoker. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@opcol{% + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox to\@colht{% + \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \pcol@clearcst@unvbox\@outputbox}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{opcol}% + \expandafter\@cons\csname pcol@shipped\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname\@currbox + \ifnum\pcol@currcol=\z@ \pcol@setpageno \fi + \pcol@nextpage + \pcol@checkshipped + \if@tempswa \pcol@outputcolumns\z@ \fi + \ifnum\pcol@page>\pcol@toppage \pcol@startpage + \else \pcol@getcurrpage + \fi + \pcol@floatplacement} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setpageno} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add \cs{let}\cs{@elt}\cs{relax} before \cs{edef} of \cs{reserved@a} +% for the sake of clarity.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setpnoelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@textonly} as \cs{ifpcol@nospan}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Completely recode reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add an operation to increment $\string\mathit{page}(p)$ by two for +% non-paired parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^s(p)$, and add a +% invoker \cs{pcol@makecol}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^m(p)$.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@setpageno! is invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! when it +% proceeses the \colpage{} of the first column $c=0$ to fix the page number +% $\page(p)\gets\counter{page}=\!\c@page!$ of the page $p=\!\pcol@page!$ +% having the \colpage{}. It is also invoked from \!\pcol@output@switch! +% when it leaves from the first column to reflect a jump of \counter{page} +% made in the column building. In both cases, the macro lets $\pp^p(q)$ +% have $\page'(q)=\page(p)+(q-p)$, except for the case of \npaired{} +% \parapag{}ing in which $\page'(q)=\page(p)+2(q-p)$ instead, for all +% $q\in[p,\ptop]$. +% +% Since we possibly have to update $\pp(q)$ such that $q\geq p$, at first we +% temporarily let +% $\Uidx\PPP=(\PP,\pp(\ptop))=\!\pcol@pages!\!\pcol@currpage!$ empty +% after copying its original value into $\mathit{\Pi}'=\!\reserved@a!$. +% Then we scan $\pi'(q)\in\mathit{\Pi}'$ for all $q\in[\pbase,\ptop]$ by +% applying \!\pcol@setpnoelt! to each $\pi'(q)$ giving its five components +% to the macro, so that the macro updates $\pp(q)$ by \!\pcol@defcurrpage! +% letting $\pp^p(q)=\page'(q)$ if $q\geq p$, or equivalently $p-q\leq0$. +% Note that we let \!\c@page! have $\page'(q)$, but this assignment is +% temporary and \!\c@page! will regain the value $\page(p)$ after +% \!\pcol@setpageno! finishes. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setpageno{\begingroup + \@tempcnta\pcol@page \advance\@tempcnta-\pcol@basepage + \let\@elt\relax \edef\reserved@a{\pcol@pages\pcol@currpage}% + \global\let\pcol@pages\@empty \global\let\pcol@currpage\@empty + \let\@elt\pcol@setpnoelt \reserved@a + \endgroup} +\def\pcol@setpnoelt#1#2#3#4#5{% + {\let\@elt\relax \xdef\pcol@pages{\pcol@pages\pcol@currpage}}% + \ifnum\@tempcnta>\z@ \gdef\pcol@currpage{\@elt{#1}#2#3{#4}{#5}}% + \else \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\c@page}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}% + \advance\c@page\@ne + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcurrpage} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced by the redesign of page context, partly replacing +% \cs{pcol@setordpage} which once we call \cs{pcol@settextpage}.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^s(p)$, and add a +% invoker \cs{pcol@makecol}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^m(p)$.} +%  +% The macro +% $\!\pcol@defcurrpage! +% \Arg{\pp^p(p)}\arg{\pp^i(p)}\arg{\pp^f(p)}\Arg{\pp^s(p)}\Arg{\pp^m(p)}$ +% is invoked from \!\pcol@makecol! to update $\pp^s(\ptop)$, +% \!\pcol@setpnoelt! to update $\pp^p(p)$, \!\pcol@startpage! to initialize +% a newly created page, \!\pcol@output@start! to initialize a \spage{}, +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to update $\pp^s(\ptop)$ and/or $\pp^f(\ptop)$, and +% \!\pcol@setmpbelt! to update $\pp^m(p)$. The macro \!\xdef!ines +% \!\pcol@currpage! letting it have the \pctext{} $\pp(p)$ given by the +% arguments. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@defcurrpage#1#2#3#4#5{{% + \let\@elt\relax \xdef\pcol@currpage{\@elt{#1}#2#3{#4}{#5}}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@nextpage} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove unnecessary scan of $\pi(p_t)$.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@nextpelt} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^s(p)$, and add a +% invoker \cs{pcol@makecol}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^m(p)$.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Fix the bug that $\pi^h(q)$ is not referred correctly.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@nextpage! is invoked solely in \!\pcol@opcol! to let +% $p$ be $p+k+1$ where $k$ is the number of \fpage{}s directly following +% $p$, i.e., $k=\Abs{\Set{q>p}{p<\forall q'\leq q:\pp(q')^h<0}}$. For +% this update, the macro scans $\pp(q)\in\PP$ for all $q\In\pbase\ptop$ +% applying \!\pcol@nextpelt! to $\pp(q)$, to perform the following where +% $p_0$ is $p$ before update and $f=\CSIndex{if@tempswa}$ being $\true$ at +% initial, to let $p\gets p+k$, and then increments $p$ to have $p+k+1$. +% $$ +% \\gets\cases{ +% \& $q\leq p_0$\cr +% \& $q>p_0\;\land\;f\;\land\;\pp^i(q)\neq\bot\;\land\; +% \pp^h(q)<0$\cr +% \& otherwise} +% $$ +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@nextpage{\begingroup + \@tempcnta\pcol@page \advance\@tempcnta-\pcol@basepage + \@tempswatrue + \let\@elt\pcol@nextpelt \pcol@pages + \global\advance\pcol@page\@ne + \endgroup} +\def\pcol@nextpelt#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta<\z@ + \ifvoid#2\@tempswafalse + \else\ifdim\dimen#2<\z@ + \if@tempswa \global\advance\pcol@page\@ne \fi + \else \@tempswafalse + \fi\fi + \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@checkshipped} +% The macro \!\pcol@checkshipped! is invoked solely in \!\pcol@opcol! to let +% \CSIndex{if@tempswa} be $\true$ iff +% $S_c=|\pcol@shipped|{\cdot}c\neq\emptyset$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@shipped} +%  +% for all $c\In0\C$ to mean the oldest page $\pbase$ is ready to be shipped +% out. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@checkshipped{\@tempswatrue + \@tempcnta\z@ \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname pcol@shipped\number\@tempcnta\endcsname\@empty + \@tempswafalse \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getcurrpage} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a user \cs{pcol@addmarginpar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getpelt} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getpinfo} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@textonly} as \cs{ifpcol@nospan}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getcurrpinfo} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^s(p)$, and add a +% invoker \cs{pcol@makecol}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^m(p)$.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@getcurrpage! is invoked in \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@freshpage! to let; +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% &&\!\c@page!=\pp^p(p)\quad +% \!\@colht!=\pp^h(p)\quad +% \!\topskip!=\pp^t(p)\quad +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@nospan}=(\pp^i(p)=\bot)\\ +% &&\Midx{\!\pcol@spanning!}=\pp^i(p)\quad +% \Midx{\!\pcol@footins!}=\pp^f(p)\quad +% \Midx{\!\pcol@sptextlist!}=\pp^s(p)\\ +% &&\Midx{\!\pcol@mparbottom!}=\pp^m(p) +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% for $p=\!\pcol@page!\in[p_b,p_t]$. To do that, the macro scans all +% $\pp(q)\in\PPP=(\PP,\pp(\ptop))$ applying \!\pcol@getpelt! to +% $\pp(q)= +% \Arg{\pp^p(q)}\arg{\pp^i(q)}\arg{\pp^f(q)}\Arg{\pp^s(q)}\Arg{\pp^m(q)}$ +% to invoke +% $$ +% \!\pcol@getpinfo! +% \Arg{\pp^p(q)}\arg{\pp^i(q)}\arg{\pp^f(q)}\Arg{\pp^s(q)}\Arg{\pp^m(q)} +% \arg{pg}\arg{ch}\arg{ts} +% $$ +% with the following arguments for \!\global! assignments, if $q=p$. +% $$ +% \arg{pg}=\!\global!\!\c@page!\quad +% \arg{ch}=\!\global!\!\@colht!\quad\arg{ts}=\!\global!\!\topskip! +% $$ +% Then the macro \!\pcol@getpinfo! do the obvious assighments to +% \!\pcol@spanning!, \!\pcol@footins!, \!\pcol@sptextlist!, +% \!\pcol@mparbottom! and $\arg{pg}$, and the following +% condintional assignments. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% &&\<\arg{ch},\arg{ts},\CSIndex{ifpcol@nospan}\>= +% \left\{\begin{array}{llll} +% \<\!\textheight!,&\!\pcol@topskip!,&\true\>&\quad\pp^i(q)=\bot\\ +% \<\pp^h(q),&\pp^t(q),&\false\>&\quad\pp^i(q)\neq\bot\end{array}\right. +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% \begin{Sloppy}{2800}\noindent +% The other macro $\!\pcol@getcurrpinfo!\arg{pg}\arg{ch}\arg{ts}$ is invoked +% in \!\pcol@makecol!, \!\pcol@startpage!, \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@sync!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@make~flushedpage! do the +% similar assignments using \!\pcol@getpinfo!, but it is not for $\pp(p)$ +% but for $\pp(\ptop)={}$\!\pcol@currpage!. The macro \!\pcol@getpinfo! +% also has a direct invoker \!\pcol@outputelt!. +% \end{Sloppy} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@getcurrpage{\begingroup + \@tempcnta\pcol@page \advance\@tempcnta-\pcol@basepage + \let\@elt\pcol@getpelt \pcol@pages\pcol@currpage + \endgroup} +\def\pcol@getpelt#1#2#3#4#5{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@ + \pcol@getpinfo{#1}#2#3{#4}{#5}% + {\global\c@page}{\global\@colht}{\global\topskip}% + \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne} +\def\pcol@getpinfo#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{\pcol@nospantrue + \gdef\pcol@spanning{#2}\gdef\pcol@footins{#3}\gdef\pcol@sptextlist{#4}% + \gdef\pcol@mparbottom{#5}% + #6#1\relax + \ifvoid#2\relax #7\textheight #8\pcol@topskip + \else #7\dimen#2\relax #8\skip#2\relax \pcol@nospanfalse + \fi} +\def\pcol@getcurrpinfo{% + \edef\reserved@a{\expandafter\@cdr\pcol@currpage\@nil}% + \expandafter\pcol@getpinfo\reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@floatplacement} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add initialization of \cs{pcol@textfloatsep}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove clearing operation on \cs{@mparbottom} because it is no +% longer in column-context.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@floatplacement! is invoked from \!\pcol@opcol!, +% \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, \!\pcol@freshpage! and +% \!\pcol@output@end! to reinitialize the parameters of \cwise{} float +% placement at the beginning of a \colpage{} or that of \postenv. The macro +% lets \!\@textfloatsheight! be 0 and then invokes \!\@floatplacement!, as +% \!\@opcol! does its tail\footnote{ +%  +% But $\!\@mparbottom!=0$ is not done because it is meaningless now.}. +%  +% In addition, the macro lets \!\pcol@textfloatsep! be \!\maxdimen! to mean +% the new \colpage{} does not have \sync{}ation point at initial. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@floatplacement{% + \global\@textfloatsheight\z@ \global\pcol@textfloatsep\maxdimen + \@floatplacement} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Starting New Page} +% \label{sec:imp-startpage} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@startpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add assignment of \cs{pcol@firstprevdepth} to be \cs{relax}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@maxpage} as \cs{pcol@toppage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@settextpage} as \cs{pcol@setordpage}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Duplicate \cs{stepcounter} of \cs{c@page} if non-paired +% parallel-paging is in effect.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^s(p)$.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^m(p)$.} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add $\hbox{\cs{f@depth}}\EQ0$ to override +% $\hbox{\cs{f@depth}}\EQ\hbox{\texttt{1sp}}$ done by +% \cs{@dblfloatplacement}.} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Modify the code to apply \cs{@sdblcolelt} to \cs{@dbldeferlist} so +% as to work with both 2015 (or newer) and 2014 (or older) versions +% of \LaTeX.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@startpage! is invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! with +% $\!\pcol@currpage!=\pp(p{-}1)$ to start a new page $p=\!\pcol@page!$, or +% from \!\pcol@output@start! with a too large \preenv{} or +% \!\pcol@freshpage! with $\!\pcol@currpage!=|{}|$ and $\!\c@page!=\page(p)$ +% to start a new page $p=0$. +% +% First, we let $\!\pcol@firstprevdepth!=\!\relax!$ to mean we have (had) +% left from the \spage{} so that \!\pcol@output@end! will be informed of +% that. Next we let $\ptop=p$ and then, if invoked from \!\pcol@opcol!, +% obtain $\pp^p(p{-}1)$ by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! to have $\page(p{-}1)$ in +% \!\c@page!, and let $\PP\gets\PPP=(\PP,\pp(p{-}1))$ with +% $\pp^f(p{-}1)=\!\pcol@currfoot!$ into which \!\pcol@makecol! saved +% \Scfnote{}s if any. Next we lets $\!\c@page!=\page(p{-}1)+1$ unless +% \npaired{} \parapag{}ing is in effect or in other words if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}=\true$, or $\!\c@page!=\page(p{-}1)+2$ otherwise, +% by \!\stepcounter!. Then we let $\!\@colht!=\!\textheight!$ as the base +% value without \spanning, and $\!\topskip!=\!\pcol@topskip!$ because the +% new page is the second or succeeding one built in \env{paracol} +% environment. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Starting New Page + +\def\pcol@startpage{% + \global\let\pcol@firstprevdepth\relax + \global\pcol@toppage\pcol@page + \ifx\pcol@currpage\@empty\else + \pcol@getcurrpinfo{\global\c@page}\@tempdima\@tempskipa + \@cons\pcol@pages + {{\number\c@page}\pcol@spanning\pcol@currfoot + {\pcol@sptextlist}{\pcol@mparbottom}}% + \stepcounter{page}\ifpcol@paired\else \stepcounter{page}\fi + \fi + \global\@colht\textheight + \global\topskip\pcol@topskip +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Then, we build \fpage{}s if any as follows. First we invoke +% \!\@dblfloatplacement! to reinitialize the parameters for \pwise{} float +% placement. In addition, we let $\!\f@depth!=0$ to nullify the +% setting $\!\f@depth!=|1sp|$ possiblly done by \!\@dblfloatplacement! as +% discussed in the item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@dblfloatplacement}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}. Then we repeat \!\@tryfcolumn! giving it +% \!\@dbldeferlist! having \pwise{} floats not contributed to previous +% pages yet, while $\CSIndex{if@fcolmade}=\true$ meaning it builds \fpage{}s +% in \!\@outputbox!. For each \fpage{}, we acquire an \!\insert! from +% \!\@freelist! by \!\@next! for $\pp^i(\ptop)$ to let it have the +% followings to represent the \fpage{}. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \pp^p(\ptop)&=&\!\c@page!\quad +% \pp^b(\ptop)=\!\@outputbox!\quad +% \pp^h(\ptop)=-\!\maxdimen!\quad +% \pp^t(\ptop)=\!\pcol@topskip!\\ +% \pp^f(\ptop)&=&\bot\quad +% \pp^s(\ptop)=\emptyset\quad +% \pp^m(\ptop)=\emptyset +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% We also increment $p$ and $\ptop$, and also \!\c@page! by one or two +% according to \CSIndex{ifpcol@paired} by \!\stepcounter!, to let them have +% the values for the page following the \fpage{}s. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \@dblfloatplacement \let\f@depth\z@ + \@tryfcolumn\@dbldeferlist + \@whilesw\if@fcolmade\fi{% + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{% + \global\setbox\@currbox\box\@outputbox}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{startpage(fcol)}% + \global\dimen\@currbox-\maxdimen + \global\skip\@currbox\pcol@topskip + \@cons\pcol@pages{{\number\c@page}\@currbox\voidb@x{}{}}% + \stepcounter{page}\ifpcol@paired\else \stepcounter{page}\fi + \global\advance\pcol@page\@ne \global\pcol@toppage\pcol@page + \@tryfcolumn\@dbldeferlist}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next, we copy \!\@dbldeferlist! containing \pwise{} floats which +% could not be included in \fpage{}s to \!\reserved@b!, clear the list, and +% then scan the copied list by applying \!\@sdblcolelt! to each list +% element to invoke \!\@addtodblcol! for adding the element to \!\@dbltoplist! +% or keeping it in \!\@dbldeferlist! or \!\@deferlist! depending on \LaTeX's +% version, as \LaTeX's \!\@startdblcolumn! does. In addition, as discussed +% in item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@addtodblcol}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}, we also clear \!\@deferlist! after saving it in +% \!\reserved@c! prior to the scan, and then after the scan we concatenate +% \!\@dbldeferlist! and \!\@deferlist! to let the former have the result and +% restore \!\@deferlist! from \!\reserved@c!. +% +% Then If this scan results in empty \!\@dbltoplist! to mean the new page +% does not have any \spanning, we invoke \!\pcol@defcurrpage! with +% $\pp^i(\ptop)=\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$ and $\pp^s(\ptop)=\pp^m(\ptop)=\emptyset$ +% so that $\pp(\ptop)$ reprsents a page perfectly empty. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \begingroup + \let\reserved@b\@dbldeferlist \let\reserved@c\@deferlist + \global\let\@dbldeferlist\@empty \global\let\@deferlist\@empty + \let\@elt\@sdblcolelt + \reserved@b + \let\@elt\relax \xdef\@dbldeferlist{\@dbldeferlist\@deferlist}% + \global\let\@deferlist\reserved@c + \endgroup + \ifx\@dbltoplist\@empty + \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\c@page}\voidb@x\voidb@x{}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Otherwise, i.e., \!\@dbltoplist! is not empty, we scan all elements in it +% by letting $\!\@elt!=\!\@comdblflelt!$ to have all \pwise{} floats in +% \!\@tempboxa!. Then, after returning all elements to \!\@freelist!, we +% acquire an \!\insert! from \!\@freelist! to be $\pp^i(\ptop)$ by \!\@next! +% and store the contents of \!\@tempboxa! in $\pp^b(\ptop)$ after removing +% the last vertical skip \!\dblfloatsep! and then adding \!\dblfigrule! and +% the vertical skip \!\dbltextfloatsep!. The other elements of $\pp(\ptop)$ +% are set as follows to represent the page with \spanning{} which makes the +% height of each column \!\@colht! shrunk from its initial value +% \!\textheight! by the series of \!\@addtodblcol!. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \pp^p(\ptop)&=&\!\c@page!=\page(\ptop)\quad +% \pp^h(\ptop)=\!\@colht!\quad +% \pp^t(\ptop)=\!\pcol@topskip!\quad +% \pp^f(\ptop)=\bot\\ +% \pp^s(\ptop)&=&\emptyset\quad +% \pp^m(\ptop)=\emptyset\quad +% \end{eqnarray*} +% +% Finally, regardless of the existence of the \pwise{} floats, we let +% $\!\pcol@footins!=\bot$ to mean the \tpage{} does not have any \Scfnote{}s, +% so far if footnote typesetting is \scfnote, or never otherwise. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}% + \begingroup + \let\@elt\@comdblflelt + \@dbltoplist + \let\@elt\relax + \pcol@Fb + \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@dbltoplist}% + \pcol@Fe{startpage(dbltop)}% + \global\let\@dbltoplist\@empty + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{% + \unvbox\@tempboxa \vskip-\dblfloatsep \dblfigrule + \vskip\dbltextfloatsep}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{startpage(spanning)}% + \global\dimen\@currbox\@colht + \global\skip\@currbox\pcol@topskip + \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\c@page}\@currbox\voidb@x{}{}% + \endgroup + \fi + \gdef\pcol@footins{\voidb@x}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Shipping Page Out} +% \label{sec:imp-outputpage} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@outputcolumns} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@stopoutput} as \cs{ifpcol@outputflt}.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@outputpage} as \cs{pcol@outputcolumns}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@outputcolumns!$\arg{all}$ is invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! +% with $\arg{all}=0$ to ship out the page $\pbase$ and \fpage{}s following +% it if any, or \!\pcol@sync! with $\arg{all}=1$ to ship out all pages in +% $\PP$. It copies $\PP=\!\pcol@pages!$ into $\mathit{\Pi}'=\!\reserved@b!$ +% and clear $\PP$ once to remove pages shipped out from it. Then, after +% initializing $f_o=\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ to ship out (the first) +% ordinary page and $f_f=\CSIndex{ifpcol@outputflt}=\true$ to ship out +% \fpage{}s (following the first page), it scans all +% $\pp(q)\in\mathit{\Pi}'$ applying $\!\pcol@outputelt!\arg{all}$ to +% $\pp(q)$ to ship it out or keep it in $\PP$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Shipping Page Out + +\def\pcol@outputcolumns#1{\begingroup + \def\@elt{\pcol@outputelt#1}\@tempswatrue \pcol@outputflttrue + \let\reserved@b\pcol@pages \gdef\pcol@pages{}% + \reserved@b + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@outputelt} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^s(p)$.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise reflecting the new page context element $\pi^m(p)$.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@outputelt! +% \arg{all}\Arg{\pp^p(q)}\arg{\pp^i(q)}\arg{\pp^f(q)} +% \Arg{\pp^s(q)}\Arg{\pp^m(q)}$ ships out the ordinary or \fpage{} $q$ if +% $f_o=\true$ or $f_f=\true$ respectively. After initializing +% \!\@outputbox! to be $\bot$, we retrive the page $q$'s information by +% \!\pcol@getpinfo! to have $\page(q)$ in \!\c@page! locally, \!\textheight! +% or $\pp^h(q)$ in $h=\!\@tempdima!$, +% $f_{\it{}ns}=\CSIndex{ifpcol@nospan}=(\pp^i(q)=\bot)$, and +% $\!\pcol@footins!={\pp^f(q)}$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@outputelt#1#2#3#4#5#6{% + \setbox\@outputbox\box\voidb@x + \pcol@getpinfo{#2}#3#4{#5}{#6}\c@page\@tempdima\@tempskipa +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Then, we do one of the followings according to $h$ and $f_o$. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item $h<0$\\ +% It means $q$ is a \fpage{}. If $f_f=\true$, we let \!\@outputbox! have +% $\pp^b(q)$ to be shipped out, paint its \bground{} with $\bgc_{\{F,f\}}$ +% by \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! letting the basic height \!\pcol@bg@floatheight! +% of the paining region +% $\bgr_{\{F,f\}}$ be +% $\HT=\!\pcol@bg@textheight!=\!\textheight!+\!\maxdepth!$, and return +% $\!\insert!{\cdot}\pp^i(q)$ to \!\@freelist! by \!\@cons! because it is no +% longer necessary. Then if $\CL<\C$ to mean \parapag{}ing is in effect, we +% let \!\pcol@rightpage! be an empty box but paint its \bground{} too, because +% the right counterpart of left parallel float page should be always blank. +% Note that we temporarily increment $\page(q)$ by one for \npaired{} right +% \parapag{}ee so that the paiting macro performs page-parity dependent +% operations correctly. +%  +% \Index{parallel-paging} +% \Index{float page} +% +% On the other hand if $f_f=\false$, we simply return $\pp(q)$ back to $\PP$. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@stopoutput} as \cs{ifpcol@outputflt}.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add painting of page-wise float page.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add building a empty right parallel float page.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifdim\@tempdima<\z@ + \ifpcol@outputflt + \def\pcol@bg@floatheight{\pcol@bg@textheight}% + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\textheight{% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\unvbox\pcol@spanning}% + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@spanning + \pcol@Fe{outputelt(spanning)}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox to\textheight{% + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\vfil}% + \fi + \else + \@cons\pcol@pages{{#2}#3#4{#5}{#6}}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item $h\geq0\;\land\;f_o=\true$\\ +% It means $q$ is a non-\fpage{} to be shipped out. If $\arg{all}=0$, we +% let $f_o=\false$ to keep succeeding non-\fpage{}s from being shipped out. +% Then we build the ship-out image of the right \parapag{}e $q$ in +% \!\pcol@rightpage! by \!\pcol@ioutputelt! giving it the box and the column +% range $\LBRP\CL\C$ if $\CL<\C$ to mean \parapag{}ing, and then that of the +% left \parapag{}e in \!\@outputbox! by \!\pcol@ioutputelt! again but giving +% it $\LBRP0\CL$ and \!\@outputbox!. Note that the right-first left-second +% order is essential, because in the process to build right \parapag{}e we +% have to examine the existence of $\pp^i(q)$ and $\pp^f(q)$ and then refer +% to their height and depth to make the region corresponding to them blank, +% while the boxes of these \!\insert!s are made void in the building process +% of the left \parapag{}e obviously. +% +% Then after the ship-out image building, we \!\global!ly let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@firstpage}=\false$ to tell \!\pcol@ioutputelt! and +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! that the pages they build are no longer first of +% a \env{paracol} environment and thus $\pp^i(q)$ should have \pwise{} +% floats rather than \preenv{} hereafter. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@textonly} as \cs{ifpcol@nospan}.} +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Use $\cs{pcol@columnwidth}{\cdot}c$ instead of \cs{columnwidth} as +% the width of $c$'s \cs{hbox}.} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add column-swapping for even pages if specified.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add ship-out of page-wise footnote.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add $\cs{boxmaxdepth}\EQ\cs{@maxdepth}$ for depth capping.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Move the core of ship-out image building to \cs{pcol@ioutputelt} for +% parallel pageing.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else\if@tempswa + \ifnum#1=\z@ \@tempswafalse \fi + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@outputelt{right}}% + \pcol@ioutputelt\pcol@ncolleft\pcol@ncol\pcol@rightpage + \pcol@Logend{\pcol@outputelt{right}}% + \fi + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@outputelt{left}}% + \pcol@ioutputelt\z@\pcol@ncolleft\@outputbox + \pcol@Logend{\pcol@outputelt{left}}% + \global\pcol@firstpagefalse +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item $h\geq0\;\land\;f_o=\false$\\ +% It means $q$ is a non-\fpage{} to be kept. Therefore, we let +% $f_f=\false$ to keep \fpage{}s following it from being shipped out. Then +% we return $\pp(q)$ to $\PP$ by \!\@cons!. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else + \pcol@outputfltfalse + \@cons\pcol@pages{{#2}#3#4{#5}{#6}}% + \fi\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Finally, if $\!\@outputbox!\neq\bot$ to mean $\pp(q)$ is to be +% shipped out, we invoke \!\@outputpage! to do it and increment $\pbase$ to +% let it has $q+1$. Note that since we have let $\!\c@page!=\page(q)$, the +% direct and indirect references to it in \!\@outputpage! are correctly done. +% Also note that the \!\global! increment of it by \!\stepcounter! in +% \!\@outputpage! will be overriden by the \!\global! assignment to it done +% by \!\pcol@startpage! or \!\pcol@getcurrpage! invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! +% if $\arg{all}=0$, or by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! invoked from \!\pcol@sync! +% otherwise. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifvoid\@outputbox\else + \global\advance\pcol@basepage\@ne \@outputpage + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ioutputelt} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add column-separating rule drawing and background painting.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a logic to cope with non-uniform column-separating gaps.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ioutputelt!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\arg{b}$ is invoked solely +% in \!\pcol@outputelt! but can be done twice with +% $(\Cfrom,\Cto,b)=(\CL,\C,\!\pcol@rightpage!)$ if \parapag{}ing is in +% effect and with $(\Cfrom,\Cto,b)=(0,\CL,\!\@outputbox!)$ always, to build +% the ship-out image of the right or left \parapag{}e $q$ in the box $b$ +% respectively. +% +% After opening a \!\vbox! of \!\textheight! tall for $b$, at first we +% increment $\page(q)$ by one for right \parapag{}e if it is \npaired, so +% that painting macros perform page-parity dependent operations correctly. +% +% Next, we put materials to be shipped out in the box $b$ as follows. +% First, if $\pp^f(q)\neq\bot$ to mean the page $q$ has \Scfnote{}, we paint +% their \bground{} with $\bgc_{\{N,n\}}$ by \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! letting the +% basic height \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! of the paining region +% $\bgr_{\{N,n\}}$ be the height-plus-depth of $\pp^f(q)$. +% We do the painting at this earliest stage of the image building in order +% to use the left-top corner of the text area where we are now at as the +% origin for painting, and to let the region may be overlaid by those of +% columns and \csepgap{}s. We also let $h=\pp^h(q)=\!\@tempdima!$ shrunk by +% the height-plus-depth by \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@ioutputelt#1#2#3{\setbox#3\vbox to\textheight{% + \ifpcol@paired\else\ifnum#1=\z@\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi\fi + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \def\pcol@bg@footnoteheight{\@elt{\ht\pcol@footins}\@elt{\dp\pcol@footins}}% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Nn}% + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@tempdima\pcol@footins\relax + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Second, if $f_{\it ns}=\false$ to mean $\pp(q)$ has \spanning{} in +% $\pp^b(q)$, we do one of the followings. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% If $\Cfrom=0$ to mean the target is the left \parapag{}e, $\pp^b(q)$ is +% put by \!\unvbox!, painting its \bground{} with $\bgc_{\{F,f\}}$ by +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! letting the basic height \!\pcol@bg@floatheight! of +% the paining region $\bgr_{\{F,f\}}$ be the height-plus-depth of $\pp^b(q)$ +% if $q$ is not the first page and thus $\pp^b(q)$ has \pwise{} floats. We +% also return the \!\insert! $\pp^i(q)$ to \!\@freelist! by \!\@cons!. +% +% \item +% If $\Cfrom\neq0$ to mean right \parapag{}e and $q$ is the first page, +% \!\pcol@rightpage! has \preenv{} in the right \parapag{}e. Therefore, we +% simply put the box but making its height and depth equal to those of +% $\pp^b(q)$, without painting because the box has already been painted, and +% with \!\nointerlineskip! to prevent baseline-skip insertion below the box. +% +% \item +% Otherwise, i.e., $\Cfrom\neq0$ and $q$ is not the first page, we put an +% empty box whose height and depth equal to those of $\pp^b(q)$ by +% \!\pcol@phantom!, with painting as done for floats in the left \parapag{}e +% and with \!\nointerlineskip!. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% Note that after putting \spanning{} and/or painting the \bground{}, we +% temporarily increment \!\topmargin! by the height-plus-depth of +% $\pp^b(q)$, so that painting macros for columns, \csepgap{}s and +% \mctext{}s assume the top edge of column area as that of text area when +% they extend the top edges of their regions upward to the page top. +%  +% \Index{extension of background painting region} +%  +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifpcol@nospan\else + \def\pcol@bg@floatheight{% + \@elt{\ht\pcol@spanning}\@elt{\dp\pcol@spanning}}% + \@tempdimb\ht\pcol@spanning \advance\@tempdimb\dp\pcol@spanning + \ifnum#1=\z@ + \ifpcol@firstpage\else \pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\fi + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@spanning \unvbox\pcol@spanning + \pcol@Fe{ioutputelt(spanning)}% + \else\ifpcol@firstpage + \ht\pcol@rightpage\ht\pcol@spanning + \dp\pcol@rightpage\dp\pcol@spanning + \box\pcol@rightpage \nointerlineskip + \else + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\pcol@phantom\pcol@spanning \nointerlineskip + \fi\fi + \advance\topmargin\@tempdimb + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Third, we invoke \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! giving it $h$ being $\pp^h(q)$ +% but possibly shrunk by \Scfnote{}s, the column range $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$, +% and \!\@maxdepth! to mean $q$ is non-\lpage, to draw a \cseprule{} +% possibly broken by the speces for \mctext{}s in the box \!\pcol@tempboxa! +% and to paint the \bground{}s of columns, \csepgap{}s and \mctext{} in the +% box \!\@tempboxa! which we put into $b$ immediately. +% +% Fourth, we put a \!\hbox! of \!\textwidth! wide having \!\hbox!es +% of $\w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% wide containing $\sigma_c$ followed by \!\hss! for all $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$, +% where $\sigma_c=\!\box!{\cdot}s_c(q)$ being the first element removed from +% $\S_c$ by \!\@next! and then returned to \!\@freelist! by \!\@cons! if it +% is not $\bot$, or \!\voidb@x! otherwise. We sepearate \!\hbox!es of +% $\sigma_c$ by making each \!\hbox! preceded by \Midx{\!\pcol@@hfil!} being +% \!\relax! for the first one and the macro \!\pcol@hfil! for others giving +% it an argument $c^g=\!\pcol@colsepid!\in\{c,c{-}1\}$ which we discuss +% shortly to put a gap of $\gap_{c^g}=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c^g$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% wide optionally having a \cseprule{} and being painted. +% +% Note that the scanning order of $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$ is usually ascending of +% course, but is descending if \cswap{} is specified and $\page(q)\bmod2=0$. +% For this ordering, we invoke +% $\!\pcol@swapcolumn!\arg{c'}\arg{c}\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>$ to have $c$ for +% the $(c'-\Cfrom)$-th iteration of the scanning where $c'=\!\@tempcnta!$ +% and $c=\!\@tempcntb!$. Another operation done by the macro is to let +% $c^g=c-1$ if swapped or $c^g=c$ otherwise, because if swapped the +% column-$c$ is followed by the gap which follows $c-1$ if not swapped. +%  +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \pcol@buildcolseprule\@tempdima#1#2\@maxdepth \unvbox\@tempboxa + \hb@xt@\textwidth{% + \let\pcol@@hfil\relax + \@tempcnta#1\relax \@whilenum\@tempcnta<#2\do{% + \pcol@swapcolumn\@tempcnta\@tempcntb#1#2\relax + \expandafter\@next\expandafter\@currbox + \csname pcol@shipped\number\@tempcntb\endcsname + \relax{\let\@currbox\voidb@x}% + \ifvoid\@currbox\else + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\@currbox + \pcol@Fe{ioutputelt(page)}% + \fi + \expandafter\@tempdima + \csname pcol@columnwidth\number\@tempcntb \endcsname + \pcol@@hfil \hb@xt@\@tempdima{\box\@currbox\hss}% + \edef\pcol@@hfil{\noexpand\pcol@hfil{\pcol@colsepid}}% + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Fifth, if $\pp^f(q)\neq\bot$ to mean the page $q$ has \Scfnote{}s, we put +% them at the bottom of \!\@outputbox! by \!\pcol@putfootins!, and return +% $\pp^f(q)$ to \!\@freelist!, if $\Cfrom=0$ meaning left \parapag{}e. +% Otherwise for the right \parapag{}e, we simply put an empty box whose +% height and depth equal to those of $\pp^f(q)$ by \!\pcol@phantom!, +% preceded by a vertical skip of $\!\skip!{\cdot}\pp^f(q)$ and then +% \!\nointerlineskip! to inhibit baseline skip insertion above the box, and +% followed by null \!\vskip! as done in \!\pcol@putfootins!. +% +% Sixth and finally\footnote{ +%  +% Not necessary to be finally, but we placed this assignment at the end of +% the box to make it clear the depth capping is only for the box.}, +%  +% we let $\!\boxmaxdepth!=\!\@maxdepth!$ to cap the depth of $b$ which we +% are now closing, as done for each \colpage{} and as expected to be applied +% to \Scfnote{}s. +%  +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \ifnum#1=\z@ + \pcol@Log\pcol@outputelt{output}\pcol@footins + \pcol@putfootins\pcol@footins + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@footins + \pcol@Fe{ioutputelt(footins)}% + \else + \vskip\skip\pcol@footins \nointerlineskip + \pcol@phantom\pcol@footins \vskip\z@ + \fi + \fi + \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@phantom} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for parallel-paging.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@phantom!$\$ is used in \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@output@end! to put an empty box, whose +% height and depth are equal to that of the argument box $b$ being a kind of +% \pwstuff, into \!\pcol@rightpage! for the right \parapag{}e whose left +% counterpart has $b$ in it. That is, the macro is used to make a region +% corresponding to $b$ blank. To put the empty box, we locally let +% \!\@tempboxa! have it setting its height and depth to those of $b$ and +% then put it. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@phantom#1{{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}\ht\@tempboxa\ht#1\dp\@tempboxa\dp#1\box\@tempboxa}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@buildcolseprule} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for column-separating rule drawing and background +% painting for columns, column-separating gaps and spanning texts.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for non-uniform column-separating gaps.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@tempbox} as \cs{pcol@tempboxa}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@buildcselt@S} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background under-painting for spanning texts.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@buildcselt} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for column-separating rule drawing and background +% painting for columns, column-separating gaps and spanning texts.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for non-uniform column-separating gaps.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@tempbox} as \cs{pcol@tempboxa}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@buildcolseprule!\\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\$ is +% used in \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and +% \!\pcol@iflushfloats! to build a box containing \cseprule{} possibly +% broken by \mctext{}s and to paint \bground{}s of columns and \csepgap{}s +% for $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$ and \mctext{}s in the \lpage{} ($d=0$) or non-last +% page ($d=\!\@maxdepth!$) $p$ having \colpage{}s of $H_{n+1}$ tall where +% $n=\Abs{\pp^s(p)}$. +% +% For initializing the drawing and painting process, we let +% $\!\@tempdimb!=H_0+h_0=0$, +% $(\!\pcol@bg@from!,\!\pcol@bg@to!)=(\CBfrom,\CBto)=(\Cfrom,\Cto)$, and +% make boxes $b_r=\!\pcol@tempboxa!$ for the rule and $b_b=\!\@tempboxa!$ for +% the \bground{} empty. Then we apply +% \!\pcol@buildcselt@S!$\\$ to each element $\spt(H_i,h_i)$ of +% $\pp^s(p)$ to under-paint the \bground{} of each \mctext{} by +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! defining its region $\bgr_S(i)$ by letting their top +% edge positions $y_0=\!\pcol@bg@spanningtop!=H_i$, and height +% $y_1-y_0=\!\pcol@bg@spanningheight!=h_i$ if $H_i+h_i\$ to each element $\spt(H_i,h_i)$ to +% do the followings. +%  +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item +% To $b_r$, add a vertical rule whose height is $H'_i=H_i-(H_{i-1}+h_{i-1})$ +% and width is \!\columnseprule! if $H'_i>0$, and then a vertical skip of +% $h_i$, as the rule segment between $(i{-}1)$-th and $i$-th \mctext{}s. +% Note that $H_i$ and $h_i$ are represented in the form of integers and thus +% we need |sp| to use them as dimensions. +% +% \item +% To $b_b$, add painted \bground{}s for all columns $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$ and +% \csepgap{}s $c\In\Cfrom{\Cto{-}1}$ by \!\pcol@bg@paintcolumns! defining +% their regions $\bgr_{\{c,g\}}^c(i)$ by letting common top edge position +% $y_0=\!\pcol@bg@columntop!=H_{i-1}+h_{i-1}$ and common height +% $y_1-y_0=\!\pcol@bg@columnheight!=H'_i$, if $H'_i>0$. Also add painted +% \bground{} for the $i$-th \mctext{} by \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! as we did for +% under-painting but this time the region is $\bgr_s(i)$. +% +% \item +% Let $\!\@tempdimb!=H_i+h_i$ for the next element $\spt(H_{i+1},h_{i+1})$. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% Then if $H'_{n+1}>0$, we add the last rule segment of $H'_{n+1}$ tall to +% $b_r$, and add painted \bground{}s for columns and \csepgap{}s as done in +% the step\Tie2 above but letting $y_1-y_0=H'_{n+1}+d$ to let the common +% bottom edge of the their regions reach the bottom of text area for +% non-\lpage{}s. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@buildcolseprule#1#2#3#4{% + \@tempdima#1\relax \dimen@#4\relax + \let\pcol@bg@from#2\relax \let\pcol@bg@to#3\relax + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{}\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}% + \let\@elt\pcol@buildcselt@S \pcol@sptextlist + \@tempdimb\z@ \let\@elt\pcol@buildcselt \pcol@sptextlist + \let\@elt\relax \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimb + \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@ + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@tempboxa + \hrule\@height\@tempdima\@width\columnseprule}% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa + \let\@elt\relax + \edef\pcol@bg@columntop{\number\@tempdimb sp}% + \edef\pcol@bg@columnheight{% + \@elt{\number\@tempdima sp}\@elt{\number\dimen@ sp}}% + \pcol@bg@paintcolumns}% + \fi} +\def\pcol@buildcselt@S#1#2{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa + \let\@elt\relax + \def\pcol@bg@spanningtop{\@elt{#1sp}}% + \advance\@tempdima-#1sp\relax \advance\@tempdima-#2sp\relax + \advance\dimen@\@tempdima + \edef\pcol@bg@spanningheight{\@elt{#2sp}% + \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@\else \@elt{\number\dimen@ sp}\fi}% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{S}}} +\def\pcol@buildcselt#1#2{% + \@tempdimc#1sp \advance\@tempdimc-\@tempdimb + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@tempboxa + \ifdim\@tempdimc>\z@ \hrule\@height\@tempdimc\@width\columnseprule \fi + \vskip#2sp}% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa + \let\@elt\relax + \edef\pcol@bg@columntop{\number\@tempdimb sp}% + \edef\pcol@bg@columnheight{\@elt{\number\@tempdimc sp}}% + \ifdim\@tempdimc>\z@ \pcol@bg@paintcolumns \fi + \def\pcol@bg@spanningtop{\@elt{#1sp}}% + \advance\@tempdima-#1sp\relax \advance\@tempdima-#2sp\relax + \advance\dimen@\@tempdima + \edef\pcol@bg@spanningheight{\@elt{#2sp}% + \ifdim\@tempdima>\z@\else \@elt{\number\dimen@ sp}\fi}% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{s}}% + \@tempdimb#1sp \advance\@tempdimb#2sp\relax} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@hfil} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for column-separating rule drawing.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for non-uniform column-separating gaps.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@tempbox} as \cs{pcol@tempboxa}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@hfil!\$ is used in \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@iflushfloats! to separate column +% $c{+}1$ and $c$ or $c$ and $c{+}1$ according as the columns are +% swapped or not in the page the caller macros are building. +%  +% \Index{column-swapping} +%  +% If $\!\columnseprule!=r>0$, the macro puts the followings; a horizontal +% space of $\gap_{c}/2=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c/2$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% followed by a skip $-r/2$ to nullify the width of the rule; the rule in +% \!\pcol@tempboxa! which \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! built, with color +% $|\pcol@colseprulecolor|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% or \!\pcol@colseprulecolor! according as the former is defined or not, +% i.e., \!\colseprulecolor!\oarg{mode}\ARg{color}$|[|c|]|$ is declared or +% not; and $\gap_c/2$ again but preceded by $-r/2$. On the other hand if +% $r=0$, we simply put a space of $\gap_c$. Note that the skips of +% $\gap_c/2$ and $\gap_c$ are accompanied by 1\,|fil| inifinit stretch to +% avoid underfull when $\sum_{c=\Cfrom}^{\Cto-2}(\w_c+\gap_c)+\w_{\Cto-1}<\WT$ +% where $(\Cfrom,\Cto)=\{(0,\CL),(\CL,C)\}$, due to arithmetic errors in +% calculations of $\w_c$ and $\gap_c$\footnote{ +%  +% It is assured the sum of $w_c$ and $\gap_c$ cannot exceed $\WT$ even with +% arithmetic errors and thus overfull never occurs.}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@hfil#1{{% + \@tempdima\csname pcol@columnsep#1\endcsname\relax + \ifdim\columnseprule>\z@ + \hskip.5\@tempdima\@plus1fil\relax + \hskip-.5\columnseprule + \@ifundefined{pcol@colseprulecolor#1}% + {\pcol@colseprulecolor}{\@nameuse{pcol@colseprulecolor#1}}% + \copy\pcol@tempboxa \hskip-.5\columnseprule + \hskip.5\@tempdima\@plus1fil\relax + \else \hskip\@tempdima\@plus1fil\relax + \fi}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@outputpage} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced keep the original definition of \cs{@outputpage}.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced keep the original definition of \cs{@outputpage}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced keep the original definition of \cs{@outputpage}.} +% \begin{macro}{\@outputpage} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Redefined for parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Redefined for background painting.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Redefined for marginal note placement.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@tempbox} as \cs{pcol@tempboxa}.} +%  +% The macro \!\@outputpage!, being our own version of \LaTeX's one kept in +% \!\pcol@@outputpage!, ships out a page $p$ or \parapag{}e pair in $p$. +% The reason why we redefine this macro is that we need a few special +% operations for \parapag{}ing and \bgpaint{} {\em outside} of \env{paracol} +% environments. Therefore, the macro is not only used in our own macros +% \!\pcol@outputelt!, \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@output@flush!, +% \!\pcol@output@clear!, \!\pcol@flushfloats! and \!\pcol@output@end!, but +% also in \LaTeX's \!\@opcol! and \!\@doclearpage!\footnote{ +%  +% And possibly in \CSIndex{@outputdblcol} if double-column typesetting is +% done outside \env{paracol}.} +%  +% invoked from our own or \LaTeX's \!\output! routine. +% +% First we calculate $H'_M=\!\topmargin!+\!\headheight!+\!\headsep!$ to place +% the origin of \bgpaint{} at the top edge of text area in what \LaTeX{} +% assumes as a page, i.e., shifted 1\,inch down from the real page. Then if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\true$ to mean this macro is used in a +% \env{paracol} environment, we build the painted \bground{}s of left and +% right \parapag{}es in $\!\pcol@tempboxa!=b_l$ and $\!\@tempboxa!=b_r$ by +% putting a vertical skip of $H'_M$, and invoking \!\pcol@bg@paintpage! +% with the setting $(\!\pcol@bg@from!,\!\pcol@bg@to!)=(\CBfrom,\CBto)$ be +% $(0,\CL)$ and $(\CL,\C)$ respectively. Note that \!\pcol@bg@paintpage! +% paints \bground{}s of regions $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ for all +% $a\in\{T,B,L,R,C,S,t,b,l,r\}$ and $c\In\CBfrom\CBto$, and for $b_r$ we +% temporarily increment $\page(p)$ by one if \npaired{} \parapag{}ing is in +% effect. +% +% Otherwise, i.e., if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\false$ indicating outside +% use, we build the painted \bground{}s in $b_l$ and $b_r$ similarly but +% with the following differences; \bgpaint{} is done if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@havelastpage}=\true$ to mean the page to be shipped has +% the \lpage{} of closed \env{paracol} as its part and +% $\!\set@color!\neq\!\relax!$ to mean some coloring package is loaded; +% page \bground{} painting is done by \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage! because +% \!\pcol@bg@paintpage! is not available outside \env{paracol} environments; +% the \bground{} of \postenv{} is painted by \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! for the +% region $\bgr_{\{P,p\}}=[(0,\WT)(\HB,\HT)]$ where +% $\HB=\!\pcol@bg@preposttop! +% \in\{\!\pcol@bg@preposttop@left!,\!\pcol@bg@preposttop@right!\}$ +% having the bottom edge of the last +% \env{paracol} environment (having right \parapag{}e for $b_r$). In +% addition, we examine if $\!\pcol@rightpage!\neq\bot$ to mean the right +% \parapag{}e was built by \!\pcol@output@end! when the last \env{paracol} +% environment was closed and, if so, make the box \!\textheight! tall adding +% \!\vfil! to its bottom. +% +% Then regardless of \CSIndex{ifpcol@output}, we do the followings; let the +% height and depth of $b_l$ and $b_r$ be 0 because they cannot occupy any +% real spaces in the ship-out image; temporarily let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}=\false$ if $\page(p)$ is odd, $\CL=\C$ to +% mean \parapag{}ing is not in effect\footnote{ +%  +% Since the assignments of $\CL$ and $\C$ in \CSIndex{pcol@zparacol} are +% \CSIndex{global} and they are not nodified anywhere else, examining their +% equality outside \env{paracol} environments is safe and meaningful.}, +%  +% \parapag{}ing is done in \npaired{} mode\footnote{ +%  +% We need this examination because $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}=\false$ for +% \npaired{} \parapag{}ing is made locally by \!\pcol@zparacol!.}, +%  +% or we are outside \env{paracol} environments and the page does not have +% anything produced in environments. That is, we let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}=\true$ if the page has something produced by +% a \env{paracol} environment, \cswap{} and \parapag{}ing are specified for +% the (last) environment\footnote{ +%  +% Column-swapping may be enabled {\em after} the last \env{paracol} +% environment was closed but we consider the enablement is effective for the +% page having the environment.}, +%  +% and the page number is even. Note that a page may have two or more +% (\lpage{}s of) \env{paracol} environements whose \parapag{}ing style can +% be inconsistent including the case some of them are not \parapag{}ed. If +% this inconsistency happens the page is shipped out following the style of +% the last environment. Also note that even if the last environment is not +% \parapag{}ed, the right \parapag{}e kept in \!\pcol@rightpage! is assuredly +% shipped out. +% +% Then if \cswap{} is in effect, we ship out the right \parapag{}e at first +% by \!\pcol@outputpage@r! and then the left one by \!\pcol@outputpage@l! to +% swap the left and right. Otherwise, the ship-out order is normal and thus +% the invocation order is \!\pcol@outputpage@l! then \!\pcol@outputpage@r!. +% Note that if \npaired{} \parapag{}ing is in effect, the page number to +% given to \!\pcol@outputpage@r! as its argument is $\page(p)+1$ if it is +% the second one, i.e., not swapped, while the argument in other cases and +% of \!\pcol@outputpage@l! are always $\page(p)$. Then finally, we +% \!\global!ly let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@havelastpage}=\false$ because so far the +% next page does not have \env{paracol}'s \lpage{} especially when we are +% outside it, let \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@left! and +% \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@right! have 0 because, if we are outside, the next +% \preenv{} should start from the top of a page, and let +% $\mpbout=\!\pcol@mparbottom@out!$ be $\mpboutz=\!\pcol@mparbottom@zero!$ +% because so far we have no marginal notes given in \env{paracol} +% environments\footnote{ +%  +% This assignment in a \env{paracol} environment is meaningless because +% $\mpbout$ is meaningless too, but not harmful.}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\pcol@@outputpage\@outputpage +\def\@outputpage{\begingroup + \@tempdima\topmargin \advance\@tempdima\headheight \advance\@tempdima\headsep + \ifpcol@output + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vtop{\vskip\@tempdima \global\pcol@bg@paintedfalse + \let\pcol@bg@from\z@ \let\pcol@bg@to\pcol@ncolleft + \pcol@bg@paintpage}% + \ifpcol@bg@painted \@tempswatrue \else \@tempswafalse \fi + \setbox\@tempboxa\vtop{\vskip\@tempdima \global\pcol@bg@paintedfalse + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \let\pcol@bg@from\pcol@ncolleft \let\pcol@bg@to\pcol@ncol + \pcol@bg@paintpage}% + \else + \def\reserved@a{\vskip\@tempdima \global\pcol@bg@paintedfalse + \ifpcol@havelastpage \ifx\set@color\relax\else + \pcol@bg@@paintpage \pcol@bg@@paintbox{Pp}% + \fi\fi}% + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{% + \let\pcol@bg@preposttop\pcol@bg@preposttop@left + \let\pcol@bg@from\z@ \let\pcol@bg@to\pcol@ncolleft \reserved@a}% + \ifpcol@bg@painted \@tempswatrue \else \@tempswafalse \fi + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \let\pcol@bg@preposttop\pcol@bg@preposttop@right + \let\pcol@bg@from\pcol@ncolleft \let\pcol@bg@to\pcol@ncol + \reserved@a}% + \ifvoid\pcol@rightpage\else + \pcol@Logstart{\@outputpage{rightset}}% + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox to\textheight{\unvbox\pcol@rightpage \vfil}% + \pcol@Logend{\@outputpage{rightset}}% + \fi + \fi + \ht\pcol@tempboxa\z@ \dp\pcol@tempboxa\z@ + \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@ + \ifodd\c@page \pcol@swapcolumnfalse \fi + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol\else \pcol@swapcolumnfalse \fi + \ifpcol@output\else \ifpcol@havelastpage\else \pcol@swapcolumnfalse \fi\fi + \@tempcnta\c@page + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\@tempcnta\@ne \pcol@swapcolumnfalse \fi + \ifpcol@swapcolumn \pcol@outputpage@r\c@page \pcol@outputpage@l\@tempcnta + \else \pcol@outputpage@l\c@page \pcol@outputpage@r\@tempcnta + \fi + \global\pcol@havelastpagefalse \gdef\pcol@bg@preposttop@left{0pt}% + \global\let\pcol@bg@preposttop@right\pcol@bg@preposttop@left + \global\let\pcol@mparbottom@out\pcol@mparbottom@zero + \endgroup} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@outputpage@l} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for shipping out left parallel-pages.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for column-separating rule drawing and background +% painting in left parallel-pages.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@tempbox} as \cs{pcol@tempboxa}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@outputpage@r} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for shipping out right parallel-pages.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for column-separating rule drawing and background +% painting in right parallel-pages.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@outputpage@ev} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@outputpage@l!\arg{page}$, used solely in our own +% version of \!\@outputpage!, at first lets \!\c@page! have $\arg{page}$ +% which definitely has the value that \!\c@page! had when we start +% \!\@outputpage!. That is, even when this macro is invoked after +% \!\pcol@outputpage@r! due to swapped \parapag{}ing, +%  +% \Index{column-swapping} +%  +% this assignment cancels the increment of \!\c@page! done in \LaTeX's +% \!\@outputpage! or in other word \!\pcol@@outputpage! because in this case +% \parapag{}es are \paired{}. Then we make \!\@themargin! \!\let!-equal to +% \!\evensidemargin! if two-side typesetting is in effect and \!\c@page! is +% even, or to \!\oddsidemargin! otherwise for the reference in +% \!\pcol@outputpage@ev! as shown shortly. +% +% Next, if \bgpaint{} took place in \!\@outputpage!, we let \!\everyvbox! +% have the macro invocation $\!\pcol@outputpage@ev!\$ to be expanded +% to the following sequence so that they are the leading materials in the +% \!\vbox! to be \!\shipout!; examination if the document is processed by a +% Japanese \LaTeX{} named p\LaTeX{} and then, if so, a control sequence +% \!\yoko! to put materials naturally; the painted \bground{} $b_l$ shifted +% right by \!\@themargin!; \!\nointerlineskip! to inhibit \!\baselineskip! +% insertion after $b_l$; emptying \!\everyvbox! to ensure nothing will be +% inserted into internal \!\vbox!es; and the assignment of \!\yoko! to +% \!\let! it be \!\relax! if necessary. This trick with \!\everyvbox! is +% necessary\footnote{ +%  +% Unless we rewrite \CSIndex{@outputpage}.} +%  +% because $b_l$ should be put {\em before} \!\pcol@@outputpage! puts the +% page header, or the header would be overlaid by regions, e.g., +% $\bgr_{\{t,T\}}$ in natural cases. +% +% The tricky elements to handle \!\yoko! in the sequence is necessary for +% p\LaTeX{} whose \!\@outputpage! has \!\yoko! as the first element of the +% \!\vbox! to be \!\shipout!, because \!\yoko! must be the first element of +% a box but our \!\everyvbox! to put \bground{} would make it non-first. +% That is by the tricky elements, the \!\vbox! should have \!\yoko! as the +% first element from \!\everyvbox! and then that put by p\LaTeX's +% \!\@outputpage! is nullified by \!\let!\!\yoko!\!\relax! in the +% \!\everyvbox! just for the \!\vbox! to be shipped out. On the other hand +% in ordinary \LaTeX, \!\yoko! does not appear in the \!\vbox! or is +% modified. The examination of the use of p\LaTeX{} is also trickily done +% by comparing the expansion results of \!\meaning!\!\yoko! and +% \!\string!\!\yoko!. Since the former results in the tokens ``\!\yoko!'' +% which \!\string!\!\yoko! gives us iff \!\yoko! is a primitive of +% underlying \TeX{} being p\TeX{} if so, the comparison should give us +% equality iff p\LaTeX{} is in use\footnote{ +%  +% Unless some other \TeX{} has a primitive named \CSIndex{yoko}. This +% examination is more strict than that with \CSIndex{pfmtname} for +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@bfbottom}.}. +% +% Then we invoke \!\pcol@@outputpage! being (p)\LaTeX's original version of +% \!\@outputpage! to ship out \!\@outputbox! finally. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@outputpage@r!$\arg{page}$ performs similar operations but +% it does them only when $\!\pcol@rightpage!\neq\bot$ to mean we are in an +% \env{paracol} environment with \parapag{}ing or outside it but in the page +% in which it resides. Other differences are as follows; $\arg{page}$ can +% be $\page(p)+1$ for \npaired{} right \parapag{}es; \!\@outputbox! is +% locally made \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@rightpage! prior to the invocation +% of \!\pcol@@outputpage!; and $b_r$ is given to \!\pcol@outputpage@ev! as +% its argument. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@outputpage@l#1{% + \pcol@Logstart{\@outputpage{left}}% + \global\c@page#1\relax + \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin + \if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else \let\@themargin\evensidemargin \fi\fi + \if@tempswa \everyvbox{\pcol@outputpage@ev\pcol@tempboxa}\fi + \pcol@@outputpage + \pcol@Logend{\@outputpage{left}}} +\def\pcol@outputpage@r#1{% + \begingroup + \ifvoid\pcol@rightpage\else + \global\c@page#1\relax + \let\@outputbox\pcol@rightpage + \pcol@Logstart{\@outputpage{right}}% + \let\@themargin\oddsidemargin + \if@twoside\ifodd\c@page\else \let\@themargin\evensidemargin \fi\fi + \ifpcol@bg@painted \everyvbox{\pcol@outputpage@ev\@tempboxa}\fi + \pcol@@outputpage + \pcol@Logend{\@outputpage{right}}% + \fi + \endgroup} +\def\pcol@outputpage@ev#1{% + \edef\reserved@a{\meaning\yoko}\edef\reserved@b{\string\yoko}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \yoko\fi + \moveright\@themargin\box#1\nointerlineskip \everyvbox{}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \let\yoko\relax \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \section{Starting New Column-Page} +% \label{sec:imp-startcolumn} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@startcolumn} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@colht} and \cs{@tempdimb} as the first and third argument of +% \cs{pcol@shrinkcolbyfn}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Fix the memory leak caused by mistakingly preserving $\pi^f(p)$ +% when $p\EQ p_t$.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@startcolumn!\arg{f}$ is invoked from \!\pcol@output! +% with $f=1$ and \!\pcol@freshpage! with $f=0$ to start a new \colpage. +% This macro has two additional functions to \LaTeX's \!\@startcolumn!, one +% for \Scfnote{}s and the other for coloring. +% +% First, if the page $p$ in which the new \colpage{} resides has \Scfnote{}s +% in $\pp^f(p)=\!\pcol@footins!$ because the column is not the leading one, +%  +% \Index{leading column} +%  +% we temporarily shrink \!\@colht! and \!\@colroom! by the space required to +% put $\pp^f(p)$ by \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! during the trial of deferred +% float placement, remembering the existence of the footnotes by letting +% $\!\@tempdimb!=-\!\skip!\!\pcol@footins!$ which should be 0 otherwise. +% This shrinkage is essentially required when $p<\ptop$ because $\pp^f(p)$ +% has been fixed to be a part of $p$ and thus deferred floats cannot push +% footnotes down to succeeding pages. In the case of $p=\ptop$, the +% shrinkage is also desirable to avoid unnecessary pushing down of footnotes +% which \TeX{} has decided to be in $p$. +% +% Then after trying put deferred floats in the \colpage{} by \!\@tryfcolumn! +% and \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! as done in \LaTeX's \!\@startcolumn!, we +% \!\insert! $\pp^f(p)$, if it is has some footnoes, by letting \!\footins! +% have it by \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! so that \TeX{} will be aware of the +% footnotes when it examines the page break of the \colpage{}. That is, if +% $p<\ptop$ the \!\insert!ion is to keep the vertical space for $\pp^f(p)$ in +% the building process of the \colpage{} in $p$ because any \Scfnote{s} +% cannot be added to $p$ any more, and thus $\pp^f(p)$ is preserved until +% the page $p$ is shipped out. On the other hand if $p=\ptop$, \Scfnote{s} +% in $p$ can grow further and thus \!\insert!ed footnotes will be captured +% again by \!\pcol@output@switch! or \!\pcol@startpage!. Therefore, if +% $p=\ptop$, we release $\pp^f(p)$ to \!\@freelist!. +% +% Then if $p=\ptop$, we also \!\insert! deferred footnotes in $\df$ until +% their total height reaches \!\@colht! by \!\pcol@deferredfootins! if $f=1$ +% to mean this macro is invoked from \!\pcol@output!\footnote{ +%  +% The \cs{insert}ion of $\pp^f(p)$ also requiers $f=1$ but this examination +% is redundant because $\pp^f(p)=\bot$ definately if $f=0$.}. +%  +% Note that the deferred footnote \!\insert!ion in the case of $f=0$ will +% be done afterward when \!\pcol@freshpage! does \!\pcol@restartcolumn! at +% its tail. Also note that \!\pcol@deferredfootins! examines if +% $\!\@tempdimb!=0$ to mean $\pp^f(p)=\bot$ and thus \!\skip!\!\footins! +% should be taken into account in its extraction of the footnotes from $\df$. +% +% Then after restoring \!\@colht! and canceling the temporary shrinkage of +% \!\@colroom!, we invoke \!\pcol@savecolorstack! to save \colpage{}'s +% \colorctext{} into $\csts$ so that coloring \!\special!s to reestablish +% $\csts$ will be put at its top if it has something when we leave it. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Starting New Column Page + +\def\pcol@startcolumn#1{% + \@tempdima\@colht \@tempdimb\z@ + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\pcol@footins\@tempdimb + \fi + \global\@colroom\@colht + \@tryfcolumn\@deferlist + \if@fcolmade\else + \pcol@trynextcolumn + \ifpcol@scfnote \ifnum#1>\z@ + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \edef\pcol@currfoot{\pcol@footins}% + \pcol@getcurrfoot\copy + \pcol@Log\pcol@startcolumn{insert}\footins + \insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}% + \ifnum\pcol@page=\pcol@toppage + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@footins + \pcol@Fe{startcolumn(pagefn)}% + \fi + \fi + \ifnum\pcol@page=\pcol@toppage + \pcol@deferredfootins\pcol@startcolumn \fi + \fi\fi + \fi + \advance\@tempdima-\@colht + \global\advance\@colroom\@tempdima + \global\advance\@colht\@tempdima + \pcol@savecolorstack} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@trynextcolumn} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {No change in the code itself but its explanation is modified +% according to the drastic redesign of \cs{pcol@startcolumn}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! is invoked from \!\pcol@startcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@flush~column! to try to move deferred floats in \!\@deferlist! +% into \!\@toplist! or \!\@botlist!. The body of this macro is perfectly +% equivalent to the \cs{else} part of \CSIndex{if@fcolmade} in \LaTeX's +% \!\@startcolumn!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@trynextcolumn{\begingroup + \let\reserved@b\@deferlist + \global\let\@deferlist\@empty + \let\@elt\@scolelt + \reserved@b + \endgroup} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Background Painting} +% \label{sec:imp-bgpaint} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@from} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@to} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The control sequence pair +% $(\!\pcol@bg@from!,\!\pcol@bg@to!)=(\Uidx\CBfrom,\Uidx\CBto)$ are made +% \!\let!-equal to $(0,\CL)$ or $(\CL,\C)$ by \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! and +% \!\@outputpage! for \bgpaint{} of columns and \csepgap{}s, and referred +% to by column scanning loops in \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! and +% \!\pcol@bg@columnleft!. The control sequence \!\pcol@bg@to! is also +% referred to by \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! to decrement it by one temporarily so +% that the loop in \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! scans $c\In\CBfrom{\CBto{-}1}$ +% rather than $\LBRP\CBfrom\CBto$. Since this decrement is done whenever a +% painting macro is used regardless some setting of $\CBto$, \!\pcol@bg@to! +% has default setting with $\C$ to avoid unbound reference at the +% decrement. Note that since this decrement is done in a \!\vbox! and an +% appropriate setting must have been done if $\CBto$ is referred in +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!, this decrement and default setting are safe. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Background Painting + +\let\pcol@bg@to\pcol@ncol +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{4} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paintpage} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@paintpage} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paintcolumns} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@paintcolumns} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paintbox} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@paintbox} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@@paintcolumns! and +% $\!\pcol@bg@@paintbox!\Arg{A}$ are made \!\let!-equal to their interface +% counterparts \!\pcol@bg@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@paint~columns! and +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! by \!\pcol@zparacol! if some coloring package has +% been loaded. Otherwise, these interface macros are \!\let!-equal to +% \!\relax! for first two and \!\@gobble! for the last, so that macros in +% \!\output! routine freely use them unaware of coloring capability. One +% exception is in \!\@outputpage! which uses \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage! and +% \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! explicitly when it is outside \env{paracol} +% environments, examining the availability of coloring. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@bg@paintpage! and \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage! are used in +% \!\@outputpage! to paint \bground{}s of regions $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ for all +% $a\in\{T,B,L,R,G,C,t,b,l,r\}$ and $c\In\CBfrom\CBto$ for $a=C$ while +% $c\In\CBfrom{\CBto{-}1}$ for $a=G$. Therefore, the macro invokes +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! with two +% $\!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!\Arg{A_b}\Arg{A_g}\Arg{A_c}$, letting +% $A_b=|TBLR|$, $A_g=|G|$ and $A_c=|C|$ in the first invocation and then +% $A_b=|tblr|$ and $A_g=A_c=\emptyset$ in the second. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@bg@paintcolumns! is used in \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! and +% \!\pcol@buildcselt! to paint \bground{}s of regions $\bgr_g^c(i)$ for +% $c\In\CBfrom{\CBto{-}1}$ and $\bgr_c^c(i)$ for $c\In\CBfrom\CBto$. +% Therefore, the macro invokes \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! with \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! +% giving it $A_b=\emptyset$, $A_g=|g|$ and $A_c=|c|$. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@paintbox!\Arg{A}$ is used in the following macros +% with $A$ shown in the parantheses to paint the \bground{}s of regions +% $\bgr_{\{a_1,a_2\}}$ where $(a_1,a_2)\in\{(S,s),(F,f),(N,n),\~(P,p)\}$. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@outputelt!\Tie(|Ff|), +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!\Tie(|Nn|, |Ff|), +% \!\pcol@buildcselt!\Tie(|Ss|), +% \!\pcol@output@start!\Tie(|Pp|), +% \!\pcol@output@clear!\Tie(|Ff|), +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!\Tie(|Ff|), +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!\Tie(|Nn|), +% \!\pcol@output@end!\Tie(|Nn|). +% \end{quote} +%  +% The macro \!\@outputpage! also uses the function but \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! +% explicitly with $A=|Pp|$. Therefore \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! invokes +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! with \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! giving it $A_b=A$ and +% $A_g=A_c=\emptyset$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@@paintpage{% + \pcol@bg@paint@i{% + \pcol@bg@paint@ii{TBLR}{G}{C}\pcol@bg@paint@ii{tblr}{}{}}} +\def\pcol@bg@@paintcolumns{\pcol@bg@paint@i{\pcol@bg@paint@ii{}{g}{c}}} +\def\pcol@bg@@paintbox#1{\pcol@bg@paint@i{\pcol@bg@paint@ii{#1}{}{}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paint@i} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@paint@i!\Arg{body}$ is used in +% \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@@paint~columns! and +% \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! to paint \bground{}s by a sequence of +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! specified in $\arg{body}$. The painted \bground{} is +% built in \!\@tempboxa! being a \!\vtop! having a null \!\vskip! as its +% first element so that everything put in the box is below its reference +% point at its top. Then, before invoking \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! in +% $\arg{body}$, we do the followings; \!\global!ly let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@painted}=\false$ to indicate so far any painted +% \bground{} are produced; make \!\pcol@bg@leftmargin! \!\let!-equal +% to \!\pcol@lrmargin! to use this \!\dimen! register locally with the +% more appropriate alias; negate \!\pagerim! locally to calculate $\HT$ +% easily; decrement $\CBto$ by one locally for the column scanning loop for +% $c\In\CBfrom{\CBto{-}1}$ in \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!; and \!\offinterlineskip! +% to inhbit inter-line \!\baselineskip! insertion in the box. Then after +% the invocation of the sequence of \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! in $\arg{body}$ and +% closing the box, we let the height, depth and width of the box be 0 so +% that it does not occupy any real space in the outer box in which the box +% is put. Finally, if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@painted}=\true$ meaning that some +% painted \bground{}s are built in the box, we put the box into the outer +% box surrounding it by \!\nointerlineskip! to inhibit inter-line +% \!\baselineskip! insertion before and after it. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@paint@i#1{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vtop{\vskip\z@ + \global\pcol@bg@paintedfalse + \let\pcol@bg@leftmargin\pcol@lrmargin + \pagerim-\pagerim \advance\pcol@bg@to\m@ne + \offinterlineskip #1}% + \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@ \wd\@tempboxa\z@ + \ifpcol@bg@painted \nointerlineskip \box\@tempboxa \nointerlineskip \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paint@ii} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!\Arg{A_b}\Arg{A_g}\Arg{A_c}$ appears only +% in the argument of \!\pcol@bg@paint@i! used in +% \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@@paintcolumns! and +% \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! to paint \bground{}s of regions $\bgr_a$ for +% $a\in{}A_b\subseteq\{T,B,L,R,S,F,N,P,t,b,l,r,s,f,n,p\}$, $\bgr_a^c$ for +% $a\in{}A_g\subseteq\{G,g\}$ and $c\In\CBfrom{\Cto{-}1}$, and $\bgr_a^c$ for +% $a\in A_c\subseteq\{C,c\}$ and $c\In\CBfrom\CBto$. +% +% First we invoke \!\pcol@bg@swappage! with \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@swap} to +% let \!\pcol@bg@left~margin! and \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@@swap} have values +% accorging to \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@swap}, \CSIndex{if@twoside} and the parity +% of $\page(p)$. Then we invoke $\!\pcol@bg@paintregion!\arg{a}\arg{c}$ for +% all $a\in A_b$ and $c=-1$ to paint the \bground{} of $\bgr_a$. Second, we +% invoke \!\pcol@bg@swappage! again but with \CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn} +% instead of \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@swap}, and \!\pcol@bg@paintregion! as well +% but for $a\in\{A_g,A_c\}$ and $c\In\CBfrom{\CBto{-}1}$. Third and +% finally, we make yet another invocation of \!\pcol@bg@paintregion! for +% $a\in A_c$ and $c=\CBto-1$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@paint@ii#1#2#3{% + \pcol@bg@swappage\ifpcol@bg@swap\fi + \@tfor\reserved@b:=#1\do{\pcol@bg@paintregion\reserved@b\m@ne}% + \pcol@bg@swappage\ifpcol@swapcolumn\fi + \@tfor\reserved@b:=#2#3\do{% + \pcol@currcol\pcol@bg@from \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@bg@to\do{% + \pcol@bg@paintregion\reserved@b\pcol@currcol + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}}% + \@tfor\reserved@b:=#3\do{\pcol@bg@paintregion\reserved@b\pcol@currcol}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@swappage} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@swappage!\arg{if}\cs{fi}$ is used solely in +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@ii! but twice with $\arg{if}=\CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@swap}$ +% and then with $\arg{if}=\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}$, to let +% \!\pcol@bg@leftmargin! and \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@@swap} have values for +% \mirror{}ing according to the truth values of $\arg{if}$ and +% \CSIndex{if@twoside} and the parity of $\page(p)$ of the page $p$ for +% which \bgpaint{} is taking place. That is, they are let have the values +% as follows. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% W&=&\cases{\CSIndex{oddsidemargin}& +% $\page(p)\bmod2=1\;\lor\CSIndex{if@twoside}=\false$\cr +% \CSIndex{evensidemargin}& +% $\page(p)\bmod2=0\;\land\CSIndex{if@twoside}=\true$}\\ +% \rlap{$\displaystyle(\!\pcol@bg@leftmargin!,\CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@@swap})$} +% \phantom{W}\\ +% &=&\cases{(W,\;\false)&$\page(p)\bmod2=1\lor\;\arg{if}=\false$\cr +% (\WP-(W+\WT+2\,|in|),\;\true)& +% $\page(p)\bmod2=\land\;\arg{if}=\true$} +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% Note that $\WP-(W+\WT+2\,|in|)$ means the right margin width minus 1\,|in| +% with given left margin width $W$, and thus +% $\WM=\!\pcol@bg@leftmargin!+1\,|in|$ gives us the right margin width we +% need in \mirror{}ed \bgpaint. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@swappage#1#2{% + \pcol@bg@leftmargin\oddsidemargin \pcol@bg@@swapfalse + \ifodd\c@page\else + \if@twoside \pcol@bg@leftmargin\evensidemargin \fi + #1% \ifpcol@{bg@swap,swapcolumn} + \pcol@bg@@swaptrue + \advance\pcol@bg@leftmargin\textwidth \advance\pcol@bg@leftmargin2in + \advance\pcol@bg@leftmargin-\paperwidth + \pcol@bg@leftmargin-\pcol@bg@leftmargin + #2% \fi + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paintregion} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paintregion@i} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@paintregion!\arg{a}\arg{c}$ is used only in +% $\!\pcol@bg@paint@ii!\Arg{A_b}\Arg{A_g}\Arg{A_c}$ but as many times as +% $\Abs{A_b}+\Abs{A_g}(\CBto-\CBfrom-1)+\Abs{A_c}(\CBto-\CBfrom)$ to paint +% \bground{} region $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ specified by $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@@} +%  +% with color $\bgc_a^c=|\pcol@bg@color@|{\cdot}a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +%  +% or, if it is undefined, $\bgc_a=|\pcol@bg@color@|{\cdot}a$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% +% If $\bgr_a^c$ or $\bgr_a$ is defined, the painted \bground{} is built in +% \!\@tempboxa! with \!\vtop! having null vertical skip at its top and by +% $\!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i!\Arg{F_x}\Arg{F_y}\Arg{F_w}\Arg{F_h}$ where +% the arguments are defined in the body of the macro $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@@} +%  +% and thus we need triple \!\expandafter! to give them to the macro. Prior +% to the invocatoin of the macro, we let $\!\reserved@a!=a'$ have +% $a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c$ if $\bgc_a^c$ is defined for $a\in\{G,C,g,c\}$, or +% $a$ otherwise definitely for $a\notin\{G,C,g,c\}$. +% +% Then \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! calculates $x_0=\!\@tempdima!$, +% $y_0=\!\@tempdimb!$, $x_1=\!\@tempdimc!$ and $y_1=\!\dimen@!$ of the +% region $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ by $\!\pcol@bg@calculate!\arg{z}\arg{z_0}\Arg{F}$ +% giving it +% $(z,z_0,F)\in\{(x_0,0,F_x),(y_0,0,F_y),(x_1,x_0,F_w),(y_1,y_0,F_h)\}$, +% where $(x_0,y_0)$ and $(x_1,y_1)$ is the left-top and right-bottom corner +% of the painting region in the text-area coordinate, i.e., left-right and +% top-down coordinate whose origin is at the left-top corner of the leftmost +% column. Next we modify $\{x,y\}_{\{0,1\}}$ for \bgext{} by +% $\!\pcol@bg@addext!\arg{z}\Arg{s}\Arg{d}$ with $(z,s,d)\in +% \{(x_0,\hbox{`|-|'},|l|),(y_0,\hbox{`|-|'},|t|), +% (x_1,\emptyset,|r|),\~(y_1,\emptyset,|b|)\}$. +% +% Now we have $[(x_0,y_0)(x_1,y_1)]$ and thus, if not \mirror{}ed, we place +% $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ at $(x_0,y_0)$ by a vertical skip of $y_0$ and shifting a +% \!\hbox! for the region right by $x_0$ by \!\moveright!, and paint the box +% putting a \!\vrule! of $(x_1-x_0)$ wide and $(y_1-y_0)$ tall, letting +% \!\current@color! have $\bgc_r^{[c]}=|\pcol@bg@colr|{\cdot}a'$ and then +% invoking \!\pcol@set@color! being the orinigal definition of +% \!\set@color!. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +%  +% On the other hand if \mirror{}ing is to be done, the region should be +% $[(\WT{-}x_1,y_0)(\WT{-}x_0,y_1)]$ and thus the shift amount for +% \!\moveright! of the \!\hbox! is $(\WT-x_1)$. +% +% Then after \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! finshes its work, +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion! lets the switch +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@painted}${}=\true$ because we painted $\bgr_a^{[c]}$, +% lets the height, depth and width of \!\@tempboxa! be 0 to make it a +% phantom, and then put it into the outside box opened by +% \!\pcol@bg@paint@i!. On the other hand, if neither $\bgc_r^c$ nor +% $\bgc_r$ defined to mean the \bgpaint{} of the region is not specified, we +% do nothing. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@paintregion#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{pcol@bg@color@#1@\number#2}% + {\def\reserved@a{#1}}{\edef\reserved@a{#1@\number#2}}% + \@ifundefined{pcol@bg@color@\reserved@a}\relax + {\setbox\@tempboxa\vtop{\vskip\z@ + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter + \pcol@bg@paintregion@i\csname pcol@bg@@#1\endcsname}% + \global\pcol@bg@paintedtrue + \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@ \wd\@tempboxa\z@ \box\@tempboxa}} +\def\pcol@bg@paintregion@i#1#2#3#4{% + \pcol@bg@calculate\@tempdima\z@{#1}% + \pcol@bg@calculate\@tempdimb\z@{#2}% + \pcol@bg@calculate\@tempdimc\@tempdima{#3}% + \pcol@bg@calculate\dimen@\@tempdimb{#4}% + \pcol@bg@addext\@tempdima{-}{l}\pcol@bg@addext\@tempdimc{}{r}% + \pcol@bg@addext\@tempdimb{-}{t}\pcol@bg@addext\dimen@{}{b}% + \vskip\@tempdimb + \ifpcol@bg@@swap + \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimc \@tempdima-\@tempdima + \advance\@tempdimc-\textwidth \@tempdimc-\@tempdimc + \moveright\@tempdimc\hbox{% + \advance\dimen@-\@tempdimb + \edef\current@color{\@nameuse{pcol@bg@color@\reserved@a}}\pcol@set@color + \vrule\@width\@tempdima\@height\dimen@}% + \else + \moveright\@tempdima\hbox{% + \advance\@tempdimc-\@tempdima \advance\dimen@-\@tempdimb + \edef\current@color{\@nameuse{pcol@bg@color@\reserved@a}}\pcol@set@color + \vrule\@width\@tempdimc\@height\dimen@}% + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@calculate} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@advance} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@negative} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@nadvance} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@dimen} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@calculate!\arg{z}\arg{z_0}\arg{F}$ is used in +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! and \!\pcol@bg@addext! to accumulate dimensional +% values specified in $F$ into a \!\dimen! register $z$ with initial value +% $z_0$. The specificatoin $F$ is a sequence of $\!\@elt!\Arg{f}$ to add $f$ +% to $z$, $\!\pcol@bg@negative!\Arg{F^-}$ to subtract the amount specified +% by $F^-$ from $z$, or macros expanded to either of them. +% +% The macro makes \!\pcol@bg@dimen! \!\let!-equal to $z$ and \!\@elt! to +% \!\pcol@bg@advance!, lets $z=z_0$, and then does what is specified in $F$\@. +% Therefore, $\!\@elt!\arg{f}$ appearing directly or indirectly in $F$ does +% $\!\advance!\arg{z}\arg{f}$ for the accumulation. On the other hand, +% \!\pcol@bg@negative! makes \!\@elt! \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@bg@nadvance! +% to let $\!\@elt!\arg{f}$ do $\!\advance!\arg{z}{-}\arg{f}$ for +% subtraction, does $F^-$, and then remake $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@bg@advance!$. +% Note that $f$ may be expanded to a negative amount having `|-|' its +% beginning to results in $\!\@elt!\arg{f}$ expanded to +% $\!\advance!\arg{z}{-}{-}\arg{f'}$ with some positive amount $f'$, but +% this double negation is legitimate in \TeX{} and is equivalent to +% $\!\advance!\arg{z}\arg{f'}$. The macro \!\pcol@bg@negative! is used in +% the following macros. +%  +% \begin{quote}\raggedright +% \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@l!, +% \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@r!, +% \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@t!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@t!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@b!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@l!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@r!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@n!, +% \!\pcol@bg@@p!. +% \end{quote} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@calculate#1#2#3{\let\pcol@bg@dimen#1\relax + \let\@elt\pcol@bg@advance \pcol@bg@dimen#2\relax #3} +\def\pcol@bg@negative#1{\let\@elt\pcol@bg@nadvance #1\relax + \let\@elt\pcol@bg@advance} +\def\pcol@bg@advance#1{\advance\pcol@bg@dimen#1\relax} +\def\pcol@bg@nadvance#1{\advance\pcol@bg@dimen-#1\relax} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@addext} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@ext@inf@l} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@ext@inf@r} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@ext@inf@t} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@ext@inf@b} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@addext!\arg{z}\Arg{s}\Arg{d}$ is used only in +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! but four times with $(z,s,d)\in +% \{(x_0,\hbox{`|-|'},|l|),(y_0,\hbox{`|-|'},|t|), +% (x_1,\emptyset,|r|),\~(y_1,\emptyset,|b|)\}$, to perform \bgext{} on a +% \!\dimen! register $z$. +% +% First the macro gets $e=|\pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}a' +% \in e_a^{[c]}(\{x,y\}^{\{{+},{-}\}})$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@} +% {\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +%  +% where $a'=\!\reserved@a!\~\in\{a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c,a\}$. Then if +% $e<9000\PT$ being a finite \bgext, we let $z\gets z\pm e$ +% according to $s$, i.e. $+$ if $s=\emptyset$ while $-$ if $s={}$`|-|'. +% Otherwise, i.e., $e\geq9000\PT$ for a infinite \bgext, let $e'$ +% be the value shown below by invoking $|\pcol@bg@ext@inf@|{\cdot}d$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{d}{\pcol@bg@ext@inf@} +% $$ +% e'=\cases{-(\WM-\WR)&$d=|l|$\cr +% \WP-(\WM-\WR)&$d=|r|$\cr +% -(\HM-\HR)&$d=|t|$\cr +% \HP-(\HM-\HR)&$d=|b|$\cr} +% $$ +% where $\WM-\WR$ is specified by \!\pcol@bg@pageleft! and $\HM-\HR$ by +% \!\pcol@bg@pagetop!. Then we let $z=e'\pm(e-10000\PT)$ according to $s$ +% again, i.e., move $z$ {\em inside\/} by $(10000\PT-e)$ from $e'$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@addext#1#2#3{% + \dimen@ii\@nameuse{pcol@bg@ext@#3@\reserved@a}\relax + \ifdim\dimen@ii<9000\p@\relax \advance#1#2\dimen@ii + \else + \pcol@bg@calculate#1\z@{\@nameuse{pcol@bg@ext@inf@#3}}% + \advance\dimen@ii-\@M\p@ \advance#1#2\dimen@ii + \fi} +\def\pcol@bg@ext@inf@l{\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pageleft} +\def\pcol@bg@ext@inf@r{\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pageleft + \pcol@bg@paperwidth} +\def\pcol@bg@ext@inf@t{\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pagetop} +\def\pcol@bg@ext@inf@b{\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pagetop + \pcol@bg@paperheight} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{7} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paperwidth} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@paperheight} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@pageleft} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@pagetop} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@textheight} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@columnleft} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@columnright} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@columnwidth} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@columnsep} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The following macros specify the whole or a part of +% $F\in\{F_x,F_y,F_w,F_h\}$ being the body of $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ for +% \bgpaint{} regions $\bgr_a^{[c]}$. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \!\pcol@bg@paperwidth!&=& \WP-2\WR=\!\paperwidth!-2\!\pagerim! +% \quad(t,T,b,B,r,R)\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@paperheight!&=& \HP-2\HR=\!\paperheight!-2\!\pagerim! +% \quad(b,B)\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@pageleft!&=& \WM-\WR= +% (\!\pcol@bg@leftmargin!+1\,|in|)-\!\pagerim!\\ +% & \rlap{$(t,T,b,B,l,L,r,R)$}\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@pagetop!&=& \HM-\WR\\ +% &=&(\!\topmargin!+\!\headheight!+\!\headsep!+1\,|in|)-\!\pagerim!\\ +% & \rlap{$(t,T,b,B)$}\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@textheight!&=& \HT=\!\textheight!+\!\@maxdepth!\\ +% & \rlap{$(b,B,l,L,r,R,C,G,n,N,p,P)$}\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@columnleft!&=& \W_c=\sum_{d=\CBfrom}^{c-1}(w_c+g_c) +% \quad(c,C)\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@columnright!&=& \W_c+w_c= +% \!\pcol@bg@columnleft!+\!\pcol@bg@columnwidth!\\ +% & \rlap{$(g,G)$}\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@columnwidth!&=& w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c +% \quad(c,C)\\ +% \!\pcol@bg@columnsep!&=& g_c=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c +% \quad(g,G) +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% Note that \!\pagerim! in $F$ means $-\!\pagerim!$ because its sign is +% reversed by \!\pcol@bg@paint@i!. The macros are used in +% $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@@} +%  +% whose region identifier $a$ is shown in paretheses above, but besides them +% \!\pcol@bg@paperwidth! is also used in \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@r!, +% \!\pcol@bg@paperheight! in \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@b!, \!\pcol@bg@pageleft! in +% \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@l! and \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@r!, and \!\pcol@bg@pagetop! +% in \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@t! and \!\pcol@bg@ext@inf@b!. Also note that +% \!\pcol@bg@textheight! is used in \!\pcol@output@clear! while it is +% temporarily redefined in \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@output@end!. +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@paperwidth{\@elt\paperwidth \@elt{2\pagerim}} +\def\pcol@bg@paperheight{\@elt\paperheight \@elt{2\pagerim}} +\def\pcol@bg@pageleft{\@elt{1in}\@elt\pcol@bg@leftmargin \@elt\pagerim} +\def\pcol@bg@pagetop{\@elt{1in}\@elt\topmargin \@elt\headheight \@elt\headsep + \@elt\pagerim} +\def\pcol@bg@textheight{\@elt\textheight \@elt\@maxdepth} +\def\pcol@bg@columnleft{% + \@tempcnta\pcol@bg@from \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\pcol@currcol\do{% + \@elt{\@nameuse{pcol@columnwidth\number\@tempcnta}}% + \@elt{\@nameuse{pcol@columnsep\number\@tempcnta}}% + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}} +\def\pcol@bg@columnright{\pcol@bg@columnleft \pcol@bg@columnwidth} +\def\pcol@bg@columnwidth{\@elt{\@nameuse{pcol@columnwidth\number\pcol@currcol}}} +\def\pcol@bg@columnsep{\@elt{\@nameuse{pcol@columnsep\number\pcol@currcol}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{7} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@preposttop} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@preposttop@left} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@preposttop@right} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@columntop} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@columnheight} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@floatheight} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@footnoteheight} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@spanningtop} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@spanningheight} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% Besides the macros shown above, $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ uses the following +% macros defined by macros using \!\pcol@bg@paintpage!, +% \!\pcol@bg@paintcolumns! or \!\pcol@bg@paintbox!. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@preposttop! being \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@left! or +% \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@right! for $a\in\{p,P\}$ by \!\@outputpage! and +% \!\pcol@output@end!, the latter of which may define only the left one if +% the closing environment is not \parapag{}ed. That is, both of left and +% right macros are usually equivalent, but the right one can be smaller than +% the left if we have two or more (\lpage{}s of) \env{paracol} environments +% in a page and the closing environment is not \parapag{}ed while some +% others are. In such case, \!\@outputpage! or \!\pcol@output@start!, +% another macro referring to them, must paint the region below +% \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@right! in the right page as a part of \preenv{} or +% \postenv{} by \!\let!ting \!\pcol@bg@preposttop! be +% \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@left! and \!\pcol@bg@preposttop@right! for the left +% and right \parapag{}es respectively. Both macros have common initial +% value 0. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@columntop! and \!\pcol@bg@columnheight! for $a\in\{c,g\}$ by +% \!\pcol@build~colseprule! and \!\pcol@buildcselt!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@spanningtop! and \!\pcol@bg@spanningheight! for $a\in\{s,S\}$ by +% \!\pcol@buildcselt!. +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@floatheight! for $a\in\{f,F\}$ by \!\pcol@outputelt!, +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@output@clear! and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! +% +% \item +% \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! for $a\in\{n,N\}$ by \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushed~page! and \!\pcol@output@end!. +% \end{itemize} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@preposttop@left{0pt} +\let\pcol@bg@preposttop@right\pcol@bg@preposttop@left + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{18} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@c} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@C} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@g} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@G} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@s} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@S} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@t} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@T} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@b} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@B} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@l} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@L} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@r} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@R} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@f} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@F} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@n} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@N} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@p} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@@P} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17}{Introduced for background painting.} +%  +% The macros $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@@} +%  +% define arguments $F_x$, $F_y$, $F_w$ and $F_h$ to be passed to +% \!\pcol@bg@paintregion@i! in their bodies to calculate $(x_0,y_0)$ and +% $(x_1{-}x_0,y_1{-}y_0)$ for regions $\bgr_a^{[c]}$ as shown below in the +% form of $(x_0,y_0)+(x_1{-}x_0,y_1{-}y_0)$ (to have $(x_1,y_1)$), where +% $H^c=\!\pcol@bg@columntop!$, $h^c=\!\pcol@bg@columnheight!$, +% $H^s=\!\pcol@bg@spanningtop!$, $h^s=\!\pcol@bg@spanningheight!$, +% $h^f=\!\pcol@bg@floatheight!$, $h^n=\!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight!$ and +% $H^p=\!\pcol@bg@preposttop!$ calculated by macros which invoke \bgpaint{} +% macros, while $s^n=\!\skip!\!\footins!$. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \bgr_c^c&\;:\;&(\W_c\;,\;H^c)\ +\ (w_c\;,\;h^c)\\ +% \bgr_C^c&:&(\W_c\;,\;0)\ +\ (w_c\;,\;\HT)\\ +% \bgr_g^c&:&((\W_c+w_c)\;,\;H^c)\ +\ (g_c\;,\;h^c)\\ +% \bgr_G^c&:&((\W_c+w_c)\;,\;0)\ +\ (g_c\;,\;\HT)\\ +% \bgr_{\{s,S\}}&:&(0\;,\;H^s)\ +\ (\WT\;,\;h^s)\\ +% \bgr_{\{t,T\}}&:&(-(\WM-\WR)\;,\;-(\HM-\HR))\ +\ ((\WP-2\WR)\;,\;\HM-\HR)\\ +% \bgr_{\{b,B\}}&:&(-(\WM-\WR)\;,\;\HT)\ +\ +% ((\WP-2\WR)\;,\;(\HP-2\HR)-((\HM-\HR)+\HT))\\ +% \bgr_{\{l,L\}}&:&(-(\WM-\WR)\;,\;0)\ +\ ((\WM-\WR)\;,\;\HT)\\ +% \bgr_{\{r,R\}}&:&(\WT\;,\;0)\ +\ ((\WP-2\WR)-((\WM-\WR)+\WT)\;,\;\HT)\\ +% \bgr_{\{f,F\}}&:&(0\;,\;0)\ +\ (\WT\;,\;h^f)\\ +% \bgr_{\{n,N\}}&:&(0\;,\;\HT-(h^n+s^n))\ +\ (\WT\;,\;h^n+s^n)\\ +% \bgr_{\{p,P\}}&:&(0\;,\;H^p)\ +\ (\WT\;,\;\HT-H^p) +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@@c{% + {\pcol@bg@columnleft}% + {\@elt\pcol@bg@columntop}% + {\pcol@bg@columnwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@columnheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@C{% + {\pcol@bg@columnleft}% + {}% + {\pcol@bg@columnwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@g{% + {\pcol@bg@columnright}% + {\@elt\pcol@bg@columntop}% + {\pcol@bg@columnsep}% + {\pcol@bg@columnheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@G{% + {\pcol@bg@columnright}% + {}% + {\pcol@bg@columnsep}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@s{% + {}% + {\pcol@bg@spanningtop}% + {\@elt\textwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@spanningheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@t{% + {\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pageleft}% + {\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pagetop}% + {\pcol@bg@paperwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@pagetop}} +\def\pcol@bg@@b{% + {\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pageleft}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight}% + {\pcol@bg@paperwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@paperheight + \pcol@bg@negative{\pcol@bg@pagetop \pcol@bg@textheight}}} +\def\pcol@bg@@l{% + {\pcol@bg@negative\pcol@bg@pageleft}% + {}% + {\pcol@bg@pageleft}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@r{% + {\@elt\textwidth}% + {}% + {\pcol@bg@paperwidth + \pcol@bg@negative{\pcol@bg@pageleft \@elt\textwidth}}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@f{% + {}% + {}% + {\@elt\textwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@floatheight}} +\def\pcol@bg@@n{% + {}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight + \pcol@bg@negative{\pcol@bg@footnoteheight \@elt{\skip\footins}}}% + {\@elt\textwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@footnoteheight \@elt{\skip\footins}}} +\def\pcol@bg@@p{% + {}% + {\@elt\pcol@bg@preposttop}% + {\@elt\textwidth}% + {\pcol@bg@textheight \pcol@bg@negative{\@elt\pcol@bg@preposttop}}} +\let\pcol@bg@@S\pcol@bg@@s +\let\pcol@bg@@T\pcol@bg@@t +\let\pcol@bg@@B\pcol@bg@@b +\let\pcol@bg@@L\pcol@bg@@l +\let\pcol@bg@@R\pcol@bg@@r +\let\pcol@bg@@F\pcol@bg@@f +\let\pcol@bg@@N\pcol@bg@@n +\let\pcol@bg@@P\pcol@bg@@p + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{10} +% \section{Special Output Routines} +% \label{sec:imp-sout} +% +% \subsection{Dispatcher} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-disp} +% +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@op@cpush} was introduced for output request to push color +% stack but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@cpush} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@op@cpop} was introduced for output request to pop color +% stack but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@cpop} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@op@cset} was introduced for output request to set +% $\gamma_0^c$ but removed in v1.34} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@cpop} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@op@start} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@op@switch} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@op@flush} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@op@clear} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@op@end} +%  +% The macro $|\pcol@op@|{\cdot}f$ where $f\in +% F=\{|start|,|switch|,|flush|,|clear|,|end|\}$ has +% our own \!\outputpenalty! code less than $-10000$ to invoke the +% corresponding macro $|\pcol@output@|{\cdot}f$. The code macros are given +% to \!\pcol@invokeoutput! as its argument by \!\pcol@zparacol! ($f=|start|$), +% \!\pcol@switchcol! ($f=|switch|$), \!\pcol@visitallcols! ($f=|switch|$), +% \!\pcol@com@flushpage! ($f=|flush|$), \!\pcol@com@clearpage! +% ($f=|clear|$), \!\pcol@flushclear! ($f=|switch|$), and \!\endparacol! +% ($f=|end|$) to set one of them into \!\outputpenalty!, so that the other +% user \!\pcol@specialoutput! examines which special function is invoked. +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@output@start} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@output@switch} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@output@flush} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@output@clear} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@output@end} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Dispatcher + +\def\pcol@op@start{-10010} +\def\pcol@op@switch{-10011} +\def\pcol@op@flush{-10012} +\def\pcol@op@clear{-10013} +\def\pcol@op@end{-10014} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpush} was introduced for coloring specified in math +% mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpush} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpush@pone} was introduced for coloring specified in +% math mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpush@pone} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpop} was introduced for coloring specified in math +% mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpop} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpop@pone} was introduced for coloring specified in +% math mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@op@mcpop@pone} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@specialoutput} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Remove unnecessary \cs{pcol@latex@specialoutput}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add footnote logging if $\cs{outputpenalty}\EQ-10004$.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Add the invocation of \cs{pcol@output@}${\cdot}f$ for +% $f\in\{\string\texttt{cpush},\string\texttt{cpop}, +% \string\texttt{cset}\}$} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {Add examination with $P_{\string\rm{push}}$ and $P_{\string\rm{pop}}$ +% and invocation of \cs{pcol@output@mcpush} and +% \cs{pcol@output@mcpop}.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Remove examinations related to $f\in\{{\tt cpush},{\tt cpop},{\tt +% mcpush},{\tt mcpop}\}$.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@specialoutput! is invoked solely in \!\pcol@output! to +% invoke our own or \LaTeX's special output routine. It examines if +% $P=\!\outputpenalty!\in\Set{\cs{pcol@op@}{\cdot}f}{f\in F}$ and then, if +% so, before invoking $|\pcol@output@|{\cdot}f$, we rebuild \!\@holdpg! +% removing \!\lastbox! and the last vertical skip as done in \LaTeX's +% \!\@specialoutput!. We also let $\!\outputpenalty!=-10000$\footnote{ +%  +% It can be any value larger than -10004.} +%  +% so that \!\vsize! is correctly set to \!\@colroom! in the second half of +% \!\pcol@output! after this macro finishes. +% +% \hfuzz9pt +% Otherwise, i.e., if $P\notin\Set{\cs{pcol@op@}{\cdot}f}{f\in{}F}$, +% we simply invokes \LaTeX's \!\@specialoutput!\footnote{ +%  +% With footnote logging if $\cs{outputpenalty}=-10004$.}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@specialoutput{% + \ifnum\outputpenalty=\pcol@op@start\relax + \let\reserved@a\pcol@output@start + \else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pcol@op@switch\relax + \let\reserved@a\pcol@output@switch + \else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pcol@op@flush\relax + \let\reserved@a\pcol@output@flush + \else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pcol@op@clear\relax + \let\reserved@a\pcol@output@clear + \else\ifnum\outputpenalty=\pcol@op@end\relax + \let\reserved@a\pcol@output@end + \else \let\reserved@a\@specialoutput + \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi + \ifnum\outputpenalty=-\@Miv\relax + \ifvoid\footins\else \pcol@Log\dummy{dummy}\footins \fi + \fi + \ifx\reserved@a\@specialoutput\else + \global\setbox\@holdpg\vbox{\unvbox\@holdpg \unvbox\@cclv + \setbox\@tempboxa\lastbox \unskip}% + \outputpenalty-\@M + \fi + \reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Building Starting Page} \label{sec:imp-sout-start} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@output@start} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Change the order of operations.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@maxpage} as \cs{pcol@toppage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add special operation in case of too small room for column-pages.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add initialization of $\string\mathit{\string\Phi}$ and +% page-wise footnote output operations, and revise reflecting +% the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@outputtrue} to solve the \cs{output} request sneaking.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Include the effect of the separation of pre-environment bottom +% floats and columns in the starting page into the check of too large +% pre-envronment stuff.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Change the page builder for too tall pre-environment stuff from +% \cs{pcol@makenormalcol} to \cs{@makecol} because the page should be +% built by the ordinary mechanism.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Let $\cs{ifpcol@output}\EQ\string\mathit{false}$ temporarily before +% the invocation of \cs{@outputpage} for too tall pre-environment +% stuff because the page is considered as outside +% \string\texttt{paracol} envrionments.} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add depth clearing of imported deferred floats in case that some of +% them has \texttt{1sp}.} +% \changes{v1.35-4}{2018/12/31} +% {Add \cs{belowfootnoteskip} to $H_f$ being the space for the +% non-merged pre-environment footnotes.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@output@start! is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! to process the special \!\output! request made in +% \!\pcol@zparacol! and to build the {\em\Uidx\spage} from which parallel +% columns start possibly with the stuff preceding \beginparacol{}, or +% {\em\Uidx\preenv} in short. First, we turn +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\true$ so that \!\output! requests for page +% breaks are processed by our own macros such as \!\pcol@makecol! hereafter. +% Then we let $p=\pbase={\ptop}=0$ and $\PP=\emptyset$ because we have +% nothing for $q<\ptop=0$. We also move \!\@deferlist! to \!\@dbldeferlist! +% and then let \!\@deferlist! be empty because all \cwise{} dererred floats +% become \pwise{}. In this float importation, as discussed in +% item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@output@start}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}, we force all floats in the list have +% depth 0 to ensure no one has |1sp| to conform our own and old-fashioned +% \pwise{} float placement mechanism\footnote{ +%  +% Though having \texttt{1sp} is almost imposiible.}. +%  +% We then and let $\df=\bot$ because we don't have any deferred footnotes. +% +% Next we caculate $H=H_r-(H_m+H_f+H_b)$ where $H_r=\!\@colroom!$; $H_m$ is +% the height-plus-depth of the main vertical list in \!\@holdpg!; $H_f$ is +% the sum of \!\skip!\!\footins!, the height-plus-depth of \!\footins! and +% \!\belowfootnoteskip!, if \!\footins! is not $\bot$ or 0 otherwise; and +% $H_b=\!\textfloatsep!$ if the \preenv{} has bottom floats or 0 otherwise. +% That is, $H$ is the room for each of \colpage{} in the \spage. Then we +% examine if $H<1.5\times\!\baselineskip!$ to mean \!\pcol@output! would +% force a page break with warning. If so, we assume we have a page break +% before \beginparacol{} to ship out \preenv{} to avoid the warning. +% Therefore, we invoke \LaTeX's \!\@makecol!\footnote{ +%  +% \Sloppy{2500}% +% We can be unaware of our customization for \sync{}ation in +% \CSIndex{pcol@combinefloats} because \CSIndex{pcol@textfloatsep} is +% made $\infty$ by \CSIndex{pcol@zparacol}.} +%  +% giving it \!\@holdpg! through \!\@cclv! to build the ship-out image in +% \!\@outputbox!. Then the box is passed to \!\@outputbox! for which we +% temporarily let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\false$ because the page is +% assumed to be outside the \env{paracol} environment having just started. +% +% After that we invoke \!\pcol@startpage! to let it produce $\pp(\ptop)$ for +% the \spage{} $\ptop=0$ letting $\!\pcol@currpage!$ be empty so that the +% macro will not refer to it. The page $\pp(0)$ is usually empty but can +% have non-empty $\pp^i(0)$ with imported deferred floats which are now +% \pwise. Moreover, we can have two or more pages if deferred \pwise{} +% floats produce \fpage{s}. However, we can be unaware of these effects of +% floats because the resulting $\PP^+$ with them is correct of course. +% +% Then let $\!\topskip!=\!\pcol@topskip!$ being the value at \beginparacol, +% and $\cs{ifpcol@}\~|firstpage|={\false}$, because we have the \spage{} +% without \preenv{} and thus the first item of each column will be at its +% top. +%  +% \CSINDEX{ifpcol@firstpage} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Building First Page + +\def\pcol@output@start{% + \global\pcol@outputtrue + \global\pcol@page\z@ \global\pcol@toppage\z@ \global\pcol@basepage\z@ + \global\let\pcol@pages\@empty + \global\let\@dbldeferlist\@deferlist \global\let\@deferlist\@empty + {\def\@elt##1{\global\dp##1\z@}\@dbldeferlist}% + \setbox\z@\box\pcol@topfnotes + \@tempdima\@colroom + \advance\@tempdima-\ht\@holdpg \advance\@tempdima-\dp\@holdpg + \ifvoid\footins\else + \advance\@tempdima-\skip\footins + \advance\@tempdima-\ht\footins \advance\@tempdima-\dp\footins + \advance\@tempdima-\belowfootnoteskip + \fi + \ifx\@botlist\@empty\else \advance\@tempdima-\textfloatsep \fi + \ifdim\@tempdima<1.5\baselineskip + \setbox\@cclv\box\@holdpg \@makecol + \pcol@outputfalse \@outputpage \pcol@outputtrue + \global\let\pcol@currpage\@empty \pcol@startpage + \global\topskip\pcol@topskip \global\pcol@firstpagefalse +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Otherwise, i.e., if $H\geq1.5\times\!\baselineskip!$, we invoke +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! to make the \preenv{} as the \spanning{} of the +% \spage. The macro is different from \!\@makecol! as follows; the height +% of resulting \!\@outputbox! is natural rather than \!\textheight!; +% \Mgfnote{}s is excluded if any; and the skip of \!\textfloatsep! is added +% below the bottom floats also if any, +% +% Then we let $h$ be the height-plus-depth of \!\@outputbox! being the +% \spanning{} and shrink \!\@colht! by $h$. Next if +% $h>\HB=\!\pcol@bg@preposttop! +% \in\{\!\pcol@bg@preposttop@left!,\~\!\pcol@bg@preposttop@right!\}$, being +% the bottom of the previous \env{paracol} environment (having right +% \parapag{}e) or 0 if the curret page does not have it, to mean we have +% ordinary single-columned stuff in \preenv{}, we paint its \bground{} by +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! temporarily letting $\!\pcol@bg@textheight!=h$ so +% that $y_0=\HB$ and $y_1=h$ for $\bgr_{\{p,P\}}$. This \bgpaint{} is not +% only for $\pp^b(0)$ which we acquire from from \!\@freelist! by \!\@next! +% and let have the \spanning, but also for \!\pcol@rightpage! if $\CL<\C$ to +% mean \parapag{}ing for which we temporarily increment \!\c@page! by one if +% \npaired. +% +% We also let $\pp^h(0)$ be the shrunk \!\@colht!, and $\pp^t(0)$ be +% \!\topskip! if $h=0$ assuming that the page does +% not have any \spanning{}\footnote{ +%  +% Checking the emptiness by \cs{pcol@ifempty} does not work well for the +% very first page of a document because it has a \cs{write} as the very +% first item.} +%  +% to typeset \colpage{}s from the top of the page, or otherwise be 0 +% together with \!\topskip! to inhibit the ordinary \!\topskip! insertion. +% +% As for $\pp^m(0)$, we define it as follows, referring to +% $\mpbout=\!\pcol@mparbottom@out!=\{\mpb_L^l,\mpb_L^r,\mpb_R^l,\mpb_R^r\}$, +% where $\mpb_X^x$ has exactly one element $\mpar(h,t)$ which may be the +% position of last marginal notes in the last \env{paracol} environment in +% the page we are working on, or $\mpb_X^x=\{\mpar(0,0)\}$ if such marginal +% note or the environment itself does not exist in the page. On the other +% hand, $B=\!\@mparbottom!$ may have non-zero for the bottom edge of the +% last marginal note in \preenv{} including the last \env{paracol} +% environment if any. Therefore, what we need to do is to let +% $\mpb_L^x=\{\mpar(0,B)\}$ to reflect the marginal node whose bottom is at +% $B$ and which can be different from what $\mpb_L^x$ had, where $x$ is the +% target margin in the \preenv{} determined by \CSIndex{if@mparswitch}, the +% parity of $\page(0)$ and \CSIndex{if@reversemargin}. +% +% The replacement is done by \!\pcol@do@mpbout! which invokes +% $\!\pcol@do@mpbout@whole!\arg{m_L^l}\~\arg{m_L^r}\arg{\mpb_R^l}\arg{\mpb_R^r}$ +% where $m_L^x\in\{M_L^x,\,\!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem!\arg{M_L^x}\}$ whose choice +% is made according that $x\in\{l,r\}$ is the target margin (latter) or not +% (former). Therefore, prior to the invocation of \!\pcol@do@mpbout!, we +% \!\def!fine \!\pcol@do@mpbout@whole! so that it \!\xdef!ines +% $\mpbout=\!\pcol@mparbottom@out!$ with its four arguments, and +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem! to let it be expanded to +% $\!\@elt!\Arg{0}\Arg{B}=\mpar(0,B)$. After that, we also invoke +% \!\pcol@bias@mpbout! giving it $-h$ to replace $\mpar(t,b)$ being the sole +% element of each $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$ in the resulting $\mpbout$ with +% $\mpar(t-h,b-h)$ to have what we give to $\pp^m(0)$. This replacement +% transforms the coordinates for text area to that for columns, and makes it +% possible for the first marginal note in each margin in the \env{paracol} +% environment we now start to exploit the space for \preenv{} even if it is +% tall extraordinarily. +% +% Then we let $\pp(0)$ have $\pp^i(0)$ and $\pp^m(0)$ shown above, and +% $\pp^p(0)=\!\c@page!$, $\pp^f(0)=\bot$ and $\pp^s(0)=\emptyset$ by +% \!\pcol@defcurrpage!, and let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@firstpage}=\true$ because +% $\pp^b(0)$ has \preenv. +%  +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Delete the argument of \cs{pcol@makenormalcol} because now it is +% not used too tall pre-environment stuff.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add background painting of pre-environment stuff.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add initialization of $\pi^m(0)$.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else + \pcol@makenormalcol + \@tempdima\ht\@outputbox \advance\@tempdima\dp\@outputbox + \global\advance\@colht-\@tempdima + \def\reserved@a{% + \ifdim\pcol@bg@preposttop=\@tempdima\else + \edef\pcol@bg@textheight{\@elt{\number\@tempdima sp}}% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Pp}% + \fi} + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox{% + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \let\pcol@bg@preposttop\pcol@bg@preposttop@right + \reserved@a \unvbox\pcol@rightpage}% + \fi + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{% + \let\pcol@bg@preposttop\pcol@bg@preposttop@left + \reserved@a \unvbox\@outputbox}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{output@start(preenv)}% + \global\dimen\@currbox\@colht + \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@ \@tempskipa\topskip \else \@tempskipa\z@ \fi + \global\skip\@currbox\@tempskipa \global\topskip\@tempskipa + \def\pcol@do@mpbout@whole##1##2##3##4{% + \xdef\pcol@mparbottom@out{{##1}{##2}{##3}{##4}}}% + \def\pcol@do@mpbout@elem\@elt##1##2{\@elt{0}{\number\@mparbottom}}% + \pcol@do@mpbout + \pcol@bias@mpbout{-\@tempdima}% + \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\c@page}\@currbox\voidb@x{}{\pcol@mparbottom@out}% + \global\pcol@firstpagetrue + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Then regardless of $H$, we do the followings for all columns $c\In0\C$ to +% build $\cc_c$, after initializing \!\@colroom! to be \!\@colht!, and +% invoking \!\pcol@floatplacement! to reinitialize the parameters of +% \cwise{} float placement. +% +% First, if we have let $\!\topskip!=0$ with the \preenv, +% we let $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ have an invisible \!\hrule! whose +% height and depth are 0 as the very first vertical item of the \colpage. +% When we visit the column $c$ for the first time afterward, we will +% \!\unvbox! the box to let \TeX's page builder have $\!\topskip!=0$ and the +% invisible rule. Then the first vertical item of the \colpage{} is added +% but it is recognized as non-first by \TeX's page builder and thus it +% inserts \!\baselineskip! referring to \!\prevdepth! as the depth of the +% last item. The important issue is that the \!\prevdepth! to be referred +% is assured having its value at \beginparacol, which is usually the depth +% of the last item of \spanning, by the following mechanism: (1) +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput! invoked in \!\pcol@zparacol! saves \!\prevdepth! in +% \!\pcol@prevdepth! before the \!\output! request for +% \!\pcol@output@start!; (2) \!\pcol@prevdepth! is saved in $\cc_c(\pd)$ by +% \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! invoked from \!\pcol@output@start! as discussed +% afterward; (3) when the column $c$ is visited for the first time, the +% special output routine \!\pcol@output@start! itself ($c=0$) or +% \!\pcol@output@switch! ($c>0$) restores \!\pcol@prevdepth! from +% $\cc_c(\pd)$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol!; (4) \!\pcol@invokeoutput! which made +% the \!\output! request for (3) lets \!\prevdepth! have the value of +% \!\pcol@prevdepth! after the request. Therefore, the baseline progress +% from the last line of the \spanning{} to the first line of each +% \colpage{} should be very natural as we see in the third and fourth lines +% of \secref{sec:man-close} of Part \ref{part:man}. +% +% Then we invoke \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! to save the following values for +% $\cc_c(e)$ ($e\neq\vb$); $\cc_c(\ft)=\!\voidb@x!$ because $c$ does not +% have \Mcfnote{}s so far; $\cc_c(\pd)=\!\prevdepth!$ as discussed above; +% $\cc_c(\tl)=\cc_c(\ml)=\cc_c(\bl)=\emptyset$ because +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol! and \!\@combinefloats! invoked from it emptied +% them; $\cc_c(\dl)=\emptyset$ as discussed above; +% $\cc_c(\tn)=\!\c@topnumber!$, $\cc_c(\bn)=\!\c@botnumber!$ and +% $\cc_c(\tn)=\!\c@totalnumber!$ as initialized by \!\@floatplacement! +% invoked from \!\pcol@floatplacement!; +% $\cc_c(\tr)=\!\topfraction!\times\!\@colht!$ and +% $\cc_c(\br)=\!\bottomfraction!\times\!\@colht!$ as initialized by +% \!\@floatplacement!; $\cc_c(\sw)$ is defined by \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and +% \cs{if@after}\~|indent| +%  +% \expandafter\SpecialIndex\csname if@afterindent\endcsname +%  +% at the time of \beginparacol; and +% $\cc_c(\ep)=\!\everypar!$ at the time of \beginparacol. We also let +% $\cc_c(\vb^p)=0$ because $p=0$ and $\cc_c(\vb^r)=\!\@colroom!$ defined +% above. In addition, we let $\S_c=\emptyset$ because we don't have any +% \colpage{} having been completed. +% +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +% We also examine if $\Celtshadow^c=\cs{pcol@columncolor}\cdot c$ is defined +% and, if so, acquire an \!\insert! from \!\@freelist! to let +% $\Celt^c=\cs{pcol@columncolor@box}\cdot c$ have the coloring \!\special! +% for the color defined in $\Celtshadow^c$ by invoking \!\pcol@set@color! +% being the origina \!\set@color! with nullification of \!\aftergroup!. +% Otherwise, we let $\Celt^c=\bot$ . +%  +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add clearing of $S_c$.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Add initialization of +% $\gamma_0^c\EQ\cs{pcol@columncolor@box}\cdot c$.}  +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\@colroom\@colht \pcol@floatplacement + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{% + \ifdim\topskip=\z@ \hrule\@height\z@\@width\z@ \fi}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{output@start(col)}% + \pcol@setcurrcolnf + \global\count\@currbox\z@ + \global\dimen\@currbox\@colroom + \expandafter\gdef\csname pcol@shipped\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname{}% + \pcol@ifccdefined + {\@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{% + \def\current@color{\pcol@ccuse{}}\let\aftergroup\@gobble + \pcol@set@color}}\pcol@ovf}% + {\def\@currbox{\voidb@x}}% + \pcol@ccxdef{\@currbox}% + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add emptying \cs{pcol@colorstack} and the invocation of +% \cs{pcol@savecolorstack} at the beginnig of the first +% column-page to be built.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add insertion of \cs{footins} having footnotes to be merged if it +% is not void.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Move emptying \cs{pcol@colorstack} to \cs{pcol@zparacol}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.35-1}{2018/12/31} +% {Add \cs{interlinepenalty} insertion for the first column to avoid +% vertical overfull due to the first item taller than the column +% room.} +%  +% Finally, we let $c=\!\pcol@currcol!=0$ for the first column, and regain the +% parameters in $\cc_0$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol!. Then before putting +% $\cc_0(\vb^b)$ to the main vertical list by \!\unvbox! returning +% $\cc_0(\vb)$ to \!\@freelist! by \!\@cons! because it has become useless +% so far, we save the \colorctext{} just with $\Celt^c$ into $\csts$ by +% \!\pcol@savecolorstack! because $\CST$ is emptied by \!\pcol@zparacol!. +% Then we \!\insert! \!\footins! through itself to the main vertical list if +% it is not $\bot$ and thus has footnotes to be \mgfnote{}. This +% \!\insert!ion is different from other footnote \!\insert!ion because +% \!\footins! is not \!\unvbox!ed but is put as a whole and is followed by +% \!\penalty!\!\interlinepenalty!, so that footnotes will not be broken by +% \TeX's page builder to prevent the reconnection of a broken footnote with +% innapropriate glue discarding, which we will discuss in +% \secref{sec:imp-fnote}. We also add a penalty 10000 or +% \!\interlinepenalty! according to $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$ or not to +% allow the first column to start from a new page when its first item is +% taller than the room in the \spage{}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\pcol@currcol\z@ + \pcol@getcurrcol + \pcol@savecolorstack + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\@currbox \unvbox\@currbox + \pcol@Fe{output@start(col)}% + \ifvoid\footins\else + \pcol@Log\pcol@output@start{insert}\footins + \insert\footins{\box\footins\penalty\interlinepenalty}% + \fi + \if@nobreak \nobreak \else \addpenalty\interlinepenalty \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@makenormalcol} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Replace the building operation of \cs{@outputbox} with footnotes +% with the invocation of \cs{pcol@combinefootins} and add the +% examination of \cs{ifpcol@mgfnote}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Turn \cs{ifpcol@lastpage} be $\string\true$ temporarily for +% \cs{pcol@combinefloats} to separate bottom floats in +% pre-environment stuff and the multi-column stuff in +% \string\texttt{paracol} environment by \cs{textfloatsep}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Completely redesigined to use \cs{@makecol} if pre-environment +% stuff has bottom floats.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@makenormalcol! is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@output@start! to let \!\@output~box! have the \preenv{} as +% \spanning{} of the \spage. The operations this macro performs are very +% similar to those of \!\@makecol!, which in fact is used in this macro +% itself, but has the following differences. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumi{(\arabic{enumi})} +% \item +% If $\CSIndex{ifpcol@mgfnote}=\true$, we exclude footnotes in \!\footins! +% from \!\@outputbox!, because they are \mgfnote{} with \Scfnote{}s given in +% columns, by saving it into \!\@tempboxa! during the building process and +% restoring it from the box register. +% +% \item +% If \preenv{} does not have bottom floats, we build \!\@outputbox! by +% ourselves without relying on \!\@makecol! because the skips put into the +% bottom (or near it) by the macro is harmful to making \preenv{} and +% parallel columns naturally connected. Therfore, we move +% \!\@holdpg! to \!\@outputbox! adding \!\footins! to its tail if any by +% \!\pcol@combinefootins!, and then combine top floats if any by +% \!\pcol@combinefloats!\footnote{ +%  +% Since we do not have bottom floats, the order of materials in the +% resulting \!\@outputbox! being top floats, main text and footnotes should +% be consistent with other pages with any \LaTeX{} including p\LaTeX.}. +%  +% In addition, we clear \!\@midlist! and retuns its contents to +% \!\@freelist! as \!\@makecol! does. +% +% \item +% If \preenv{} has bottom floats, on the other hand, we use \!\@makecol! to +% build \preenv{} in \!\@outputbox! moving \!\@holdpg! into \!\box!|255| +% prior to the invocation\footnote{ +%  +% Therefore the order of footnotes and bottom floats is consistent with +% other pages and columns, i.e., footnote-first in the native \LaTeX{} while +% float-first in p\LaTeX{}, for example.}. +%  +% Also before invocation in addition, we temporarily let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ to let +% $\!\@combinefloats!=\!\pcol@combinefloats!$ used in \!\@makecol! put a +% vertical skip of \!\textfloatsep! below the bottom floats so that the +% floats are well seperated from the top of multi-column stuff in the +% \spage. We also nullify \!\@textbottom! by making it \!\let!-equal to +% \!\relax! because it is unncessary to put an infinitely stretchable skip +% at the bottom\footnote{ +%  +% Even if unharmful.}, +%  +% and let $\!\vbadness!=10000$ to avoid an inevitable underfull message +% because \!\@makecol! lets \!\@outputbox! as tall as \!\textheight!. +% +% \item +% In both cases but especially that with bottom floats, resulting +% \!\@outputbox! is decapsulated by \!\unvbox! to make its height {\em +% natural}. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% Note that the special function for \sync{}ed \colpage{} in +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! used directly or indirectly in this macro, on the +% other hand, is not active in the invocation because \!\pcol@zparacol! +% initialized $\!\pcol@textfloatsep!=\infty$ to mean we have no \sync{}ation +% points. Also +% note that bottom floats and non-\mgfnote{} footnotes are put in +% \!\@outputbox! and thus they will not appear at the bottom of the page +% but above the \colpage{}s in the page\footnote{ +%  +% We could put them at the bottom by keeping them somewhere and insert them +% in \!\pcol@outputcolumns!, but it will cause another problem that the +% numbers of the figures and footnotes are smaller than those in \colpage{}s +% which are above them.}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@makenormalcol{% + \ifpcol@mgfnote \setbox\@tempboxa\box\footins \fi + \begingroup + \ifx\@botlist\@empty + \ifvoid\footins \setbox\@outputbox\box\@holdpg + \else \pcol@combinefootins\@holdpg\footins + \fi + \pcol@Fb + \let\@elt\relax \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@midlist}% + \pcol@Fe{makenormalcol}% + \global\let\@midlist\@empty + \pcol@combinefloats + \else + \pcol@lastpagetrue + \setbox\@cclv\box\@holdpg \let\@textbottom\relax \vbadness\@M + \@makecol + \fi + \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\unvbox\@outputbox}% + \endgroup + \ifpcol@mgfnote \setbox\footins\box\@tempboxa \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Column-Switching} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-switch} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@output@switch} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@clearcst@unvbox} to add coloring \cs{special}s at the +% top and bottom of the column-page to be saved.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the capture of a spanning text when it is closed.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\pi^s(p)\EQ\cs{pcol@sptextlist}$ to the argument of +% \cs{pcol@defcurrpage}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\pi^m(p)\EQ\cs{pcol@mparbottom}$ to the argument of +% \cs{pcol@defcurrpage}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Let \cs{dimen@} have the height of \cs{pcol@prespan} if it is not +% $\bot$, or 0 if $\bot$ for the sake of clarity.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@output@switch! is invoked from +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! to process the special \!\output! request made in +% \!\pcol@switchcol!, \!\pcol@visitallcols! and \!\pcol@flushclear!, for a +% \cswitch{} from $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ to $d=\!\pcol@nextcol!$ which can be +% $c$. The macro is also invoked from \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! to \sync{}e +% and to flush all \ccolpage{}s but staying in $c$. +% +% First, we examine if the \cswitch{} is to close a \mctext, i.e., +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext}={\true}$ and $c=0$, and if so we do the +% following; let $h_p$ be the height of \!\pcol@prespan! having \prespan{} +% if it is not $\bot$, or 0 if $\bot$ to mean we have had a page break in +% the \mctext; add $h_p$ to \!\@colroom! which we temporarily shrank when +% the \mctext{} starts; add an elemnent $\spt(H,h)$ to the tail of +% $\pp^s(\ptop)=\!\pcol@sptextlist!$ by \!\pcol@getcurrpage! and +% \!\pcol@defcurrpage!, where $H$ is $h_p$ plus the total height of top +% floats measured by \!\pcol@addflhd!, and $h$ is the height-plus-depth of +% \!\@holdpg! having (a part of) \mctext, represented in the form of +% integers and thus expanded with \!\number!; shift \!\@holdpg! left by +% \!\pcol@shiftspanning! if the column-0 is not the leftmost due to \cswap; +% and then put \prespan{} and (maybe shifted) \!\@holdpg! into \!\@holdpg! +% itself so as to let \!\@holdpg! have everything in the \colpage{} 0 as +% usual. +% +% Note that it can be $\!\pcol@prespan!=\bot$ if \mctext{} had a page break +% (or multiple ones) in it as shown above. This empty \prespan{}, however, +% does not always means that we have no top floats because the page break in +% the \mctext{} can produce a \colpage{} with top floats which are deferred +% from the previous page(s), or though unlikely the \mctext{} itself has +% float environments. Therefore, the measurement of the total height of top +% floats are always necessary. Also note that we perform these operations +% at the first \cswitch{} for \cscan{}ing from $c=0$ with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext}=\true$, i.e., prior to the \sync{}ation itself +% which takes place afterword, as explained shortly. +% +% Then regardless of the operations above, we acquire an \!\insert! from +% \!\@freelist! by \!\@next! for $\cc_c(\vb)$ to store the \ccolpage{} in +% (maybe modified) \!\@holdpg! by \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox! to add uncoloring +% \!\special!s to rewind the \colorstack{} $\CST^c$ at the bottom and +% possibly coloring ones to establish that saved in $\csts$ at the top as +% the \colorctext{} for the \colpage{} when it has the first item. +% +% Then if $\!\footins!\neq\bot$, we perform one of the followings. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% If \Scfnote{} typesetting is in effect and $p=\ptop$, we save \!\footins! +% into $\pp^f(p)$ by the sequence of \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! to get $\pp(p)$, +% \!\pcol@savefootins! to move it in $\pp^f(p)$, and \!\pcol@defcurrpage! to +% update $\pp(p)$ with $\pp^f(p)$. +% +% \item +% If \Scfnote{} typesetting is in effect but $p<\ptop$, we simply discard +% the contents of \!\footins! by making it $\bot$, because \!\footins! +% should have $\pp^f(p)$ which has been already fixed. +% +% \item +% If \Mcfnote{} typesettinng is in effect, by \!\pcol@savefootins! we save +% \!\footins! into \!\pcol@currfoot!, which should be $\bot$ in other cases, +% so that it will be saved into $\cc_c(\ft)$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcol! +% afterward. +% \end{itemize} +% % +% Then if $c=0$, we invoke \!\pcol@setpageno! to reflect the jump of +% \!\c@page! made in the building process of the \colpage{} to $\pp(q)$ for +% all $q\in[p,\ptop]$. After that, we save $c$'s \cctext{} into $\cc_c$ by +% \!\pcol@setcurrcol! and let $\cc_c(\vb^p)=p$ and +% $\cc_c(\vb^r)=\!\@colroom!$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Column-Switching + +\def\pcol@output@switch{% + \ifpcol@sptext\ifnum\pcol@currcol=\z@ + \ifvoid\pcol@prespan \dimen@\z@ \else \dimen@\ht\pcol@prespan \fi + \global\advance\@colroom\dimen@ + \pcol@addflhd\@toplist\pcol@textfloatsep + \pcol@getcurrpinfo\@tempcnta\@tempdima\@tempskipa + \@tempdimb\ht\@holdpg \advance\@tempdimb\dp\@holdpg + \@cons\pcol@sptextlist{{\number\dimen@}{\number\@tempdimb}}% + \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\@tempcnta}\pcol@spanning\pcol@footins + {\pcol@sptextlist}{\pcol@mparbottom}% + \pcol@shiftspanning\@holdpg + \setbox\@holdpg\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@prespan \unvbox\@holdpg}% + \fi\fi + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{ + \pcol@clearcst@unvbox\@holdpg}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{output@switch}% + \def\pcol@currfoot{\voidb@x}% + \ifvoid\footins\else + \ifpcol@scfnote + \ifnum\pcol@page=\pcol@toppage + \pcol@getcurrpinfo\@tempcnta\@tempdima\@tempskipa + \pcol@Log\pcol@output@switch{save}\footins + \pcol@Fb + \pcol@savefootins\pcol@footins + \pcol@Fe{output@switch(pagefn)}% + \pcol@defcurrpage{\number\@tempcnta}\pcol@spanning\pcol@footins + {\pcol@sptextlist}{\pcol@mparbottom}% + \else + \pcol@Log\pcol@output@switch{discard}\footins + \setbox\@tempboxa\box\footins + \fi + \else + \pcol@Log\pcol@output@switch{save}\footins + \pcol@Fb + \pcol@savefootins\pcol@currfoot + \pcol@Fe{output@switch(colfn)}% + \fi + \fi + \ifnum\pcol@currcol=\z@ \pcol@setpageno \fi + \pcol@setcurrcol + \global\count\@currbox\pcol@page + \global\dimen\@currbox\@colroom +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next, we examine if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext}=\true$ and $c=0$ again, and +% if so we {\em broadcast} \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and +% \CSIndex{if@afterindent}, or in other words $\cc_c(\sw)$, and tokens in +% $\!\everypar!=\cc_c(\ep)$, to pretend all columns follow the \mctext. +% That is, for each column $e$, we restore its \cctext{} from $\cc_e$ by +% \!\pcol@getcurrcol!, let \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and \CSIndex{if@afterindent} +% have the values for $c$ ($\in\{0,\C{-}1\}$) and $\!\everypar!=\cc_c(\ep)$, +% and then save the context to $\cc_e$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcol! so that +% $\cc_e(\sw)=\cc_c(\sw)$ and $\cc_e(\ep)=\cc_c(\ep)$. After that, we +% \!\global!ly turn $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext}=\false$ to give it the default +% state. +% +% Note that this broadcast is essential when the \mctext{} has sectioning +% commands to have consistent settings of the page break inhibition, the +% skip above the another sectioning command following them, and the +% indentation of the first paragraph, for all columns. On the other hand, +% broadcasting of \!\everypar! is natural even when it does not have +% sectioning commands because all columns may be considered following the +% \mctext. Also note that, as mentioned in the explanation of the first +% examination at the beginning of this macro, we perform these operations at +% the first \cswitch{} for \cscan{}ning from $c=0$ with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext}=\true$ prior to the \sync{ation} following the +% \mctext. This means, if $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}={\true}$, +% $\!\penalty!=10000$ is inserted at the top and bottom end of the space for +% \mctext{} in the columns such that $c\neq0$, the former by this \cscan{} +% and the latter by the \cswitch{} to $c$ made after the synchronization. +% Therefore, if our \sync{ation} mechanism and \TeX's page builder once +% agreed both end can be in a page, both end will not chosen as page +% break points\footnote{ +%  +% As for $c=0$, its top end of \mctext{} is a feasible break point to make +% the penalty insertion asymmetric. Therefore, we need to reinvestigate if +% the condition of the broadcast is really appropriate, and, if +% inappropriate, have to go back to the old implementation in which +% \cs{ifpcol@sync} is included in the condition. Otherwise, if proved +% appropriate, we will have to consider to make the penalty insertion +% symmetric by adding \cs{nobreak} at the top of \mctext{} in $c=0$.}. +%  +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Restrict the broadcast of \cs{if@nobreak} and \cs{everypar} only +% when a column-switching is accompanied with spanning text.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Modify broadcasting of $\kappa_c(\sigma)$ so that \cs{@afterindent} +% is broadcasted with \cs{@nobreak}.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@mctext} as \cs{ifpcol@sptext}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Modify the condition of broadcasting $\kappa_0(\sigma)$ and +% $\kappa_0(\varepsilon)$ accompanied with \cs{ifpcol@sptext} from +% \cs{ifpcol@sync} to $c\EQ0$ so that the broadcast is made in the +% first column-switching in column-scanning.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\reserved@a\@nobreakfalse \let\reserved@b\@afterindentfalse + \ifpcol@sptext\ifnum\pcol@currcol=\z@ + \if@nobreak \let\reserved@a\@nobreaktrue \fi + \if@afterindent \let\reserved@b\@afterindenttrue \fi + \@temptokena\everypar + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \pcol@getcurrcol \reserved@a \reserved@b \everypar\@temptokena + \pcol@setcurrcol + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}% + \global\pcol@sptextfalse + \fi\fi +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the case +% $\cs{ifpcol@clear}\EQ\cs{ifpcol@sync}\EQ\string\mathit{true}$ for +% the invocation of \cs{pcol@restartcolumn} for pre-flushing column +% height check.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Modify the code structure to let +% $\cs{if@tempswa}\EQ\string\mathit{true}$ according to the +% modification of the broadcast of $\kappa_0(\sigma)$ and +% $\kappa_0(\varepsilon)$.} +% +% Finally we invoke \!\pcol@sync! for the \sync{}ation if +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@sync} or \CSIndex{ifpcol@clear} is $\true$, and then +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! to restart the \ccolpage{} $d$ if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}={}\false$ to mean ordinary (but possibly +% \sync{}ed) \cswitch{} or $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}={}\true$ but +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}={}\true$ too to mean pre-flushing column height +% check, before finishing \!\output! routine letting +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\false$ for next \cswitch. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \@tempswafalse \ifpcol@sync \@tempswatrue \fi \ifpcol@clear \@tempswatrue \fi + \if@tempswa \pcol@sync \fi + \@tempswatrue + \ifpcol@clear \ifpcol@sync\else \@tempswafalse \fi\fi + \if@tempswa \pcol@restartcolumn \fi + \global\pcol@syncfalse} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@shiftspanning} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to shift a spanning text to left if the column-0 is not +% leftmost due to column-swapping.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@shiftspanning!\arg{b}$ is used in \!\pcol@makecol! and +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to let box register $b$ have itself but shifted +% left by $\WT-w_0=\!\textwidth!-\!\columnwidth!$ so that the left edge of +% its contents \mctext{} is aligned to the left edge of the leftmost column +% being different from column-0 due to \cswap, i.e., if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}=\true$ and $\!\c@page!\bmod2=0$. Note that +% \!\c@page! is {\em not} obtained from $\pp^p(p)$ by the invokers but have +% the value when the \!\output! request is made to let invokers work, and +% thus have the correct value even when a jump occurs prior to the request. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@shiftspanning#1{% + \ifpcol@swapcolumn\ifodd\c@page\else + \setbox#1\vbox{\@tempdima\textwidth \advance\@tempdima-\columnwidth + \moveleft\@tempdima\box#1} + \fi\fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@restartcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@getcurrfoot} to restore parameters of $\kappa_c(\tau)$ +% into \cs{footins}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@restartcolumn! is invoked from \!\pcol@output@switch! or +% \!\pcol@freshpage! to restart the \ccolpage{} $d=\!\pcol@nextcol!$ which +% becomes $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ by the very first assignment in this macro. +% Then we restore the \cctext{} in $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol! and let +% $p=\cc_c(\vb^p)$ and $\!\@colroom!=\cc_c(\vb^r)$ before returning +% $\cc_c(\vb)$ to \!\@freelist! by \!\@cons! because it has become useless +% so far. We also restore the \pctext{} of $p$ by \!\pcol@getcurrpage!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@restartcolumn{% + \global\pcol@currcol\pcol@nextcol + \pcol@getcurrcol + \global\pcol@page\count\@currbox + \global\@colroom\dimen\@currbox + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\@currbox + \pcol@Fe{restartcolumn(col)}% + \pcol@getcurrpage +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Redesign the footnote insertion mechanism to cope with +% page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@restorecst@restart} to return main vertical list +% with coloring operations.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@restorecst@restart} as \cs{pcol@putbackmvl}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Change the code structure to move the insertion of page break +% penalty for ordinary column-wise footnotes from below the main +% text to below the footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@colht} and \cs{@tempdimb} as the first and third argument +% of \cs{pcol@shrinkcolbyfn}.} +% +% Then we perform footnote \!\insert!ion as follows. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumi{(\arabic{enumi})} +% \item\label{item:scftop} +% If footnote typesetting is \scfnote{} and $p=\ptop$, we do the followings. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumii{(\alph{enumii})} +% \item\label{item:scftop-main} +% Put the contents of $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ by \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to make +% the \colorctext{} in |.dvi| consistent with the current |.tex|'s one, and +% to save \prespan{} into \!\pcol@prespan! if we are opening a \mctext{}. +% +% \item\label{item:scftop-pen} +% Put $\!\penalty!=10000$ by \!\nobreak! if $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$ or +% \!\interlinepenalty! by \!\addpenalty!\footnote{ +%  +% As done in \!\@specialoutput! but \!\penalty!\!\interlinepenalty! should +% be sufficient.} +%  +% otherwise, as the page break penalty at the returning point. Note that +% adding the \!\penalty! will be nullified by \TeX{} if $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ has +% nothing and thus, if the \colpage{} is still empty when we leave from it, +% its emptiness without any items is assured. Also note that the penalty +% insertion here {\em looks} essential to keep \TeX's page builder from +% confusing with \scfnote{} footnotes which it has not seen in a +% \colpage\footnote{ +%  +% At least a test with tall \scfnote{} footnotes gave us a confusing +% result.}. +% +% \item\label{item:scftop-fnote} +% If $\pp^f(p)\neq\bot$, let \!\pcol@currfoot! and then \!\footins! have +% the footnotes in it by an \!\edef! and \!\pcol@getcurrfoot!, return the +% \!\insert! for them to \!\@freelist!, invoke \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! to +% shrink \!\@colht! temporarily by their total height and to remember the +% exsistence of them with $\!\@tempdimb!=-\!\skip!\!\footins!$, and then +% \!\insert! the footnotes so that it contributes to the building process +% of the \colpage{} to be restarted. Otherwise, i.e. if $\pp^f(p)=\bot$, +% \!\@colht! is unchanged and $\!\@tempdimb!=0$. +% +% \item\label{item:scftop-defer} +% Invoke \!\pcol@deferredfootins! to \!\insert! deferred footnotes in $\df$ +% until their total height reaches (possibly shrunk) \!\@colht!. This +% height capping is to keep \TeX's page builder from holding too large +% number of footnotes unprocessed causing confused ordering on presenting +% them to \!\output! routine. +% \end{enumerate} +% +% \item +% If footnote typesetting is \scfnote{} but $p<\ptop$, we do the followings. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumii{(\alph{enumii})} +% \item +% If $\pp^f(p)\neq\bot$, get it into \!\footins! as done in +% (\ref{item:scftop-fnote}) but giving \!\copy! to \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! +% because $\pp^f(p)$ has been fixed and thus will be kept until it is +% shipped out, and then \!\insert! it. +% +% \item +% Put $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ and the penalty as done in (\ref{item:scftop-main}) and +% (\ref{item:scftop-pen}). +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% Thes order of footnotes, main vertical list and then penalty is essential +% to ensure that the \colpage{} in $p<\ptop$ has room for footnotes whose +% residence in $p$ has already been fixed. +% +% \item +% If footnote typesetting is \mcfnote{}, we do the followings. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumii{(\alph{enumii})} +% \item +% Put $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ as done in (\ref{item:scftop-main}). +% +% \item +% If $\cc_c(ft)\neq\bot$, get it by \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! returning the +% \!\insert! to \!\@freelist!, and then \!\insert! it. +% +% \item +% Put a penalty as done in (\ref{item:scftop-pen}). +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% The order of main vertical list, footnotes and then penalty is appropriate +% for \Mcfnote{}s because they definitely have space in the \colpage{} and +% \TeX{} will break the page below the insertion, possibly just below thanks +% to the penalty, to keep the footnotes and references to them in a page. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifpcol@scfnote + \edef\pcol@currfoot{\pcol@footins}% + \ifnum\pcol@page=\pcol@toppage + \@tempdima\@colht \@tempdimb\z@ + \pcol@putbackmvl + \if@nobreak \nobreak \else \addpenalty\interlinepenalty \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \pcol@Fb + \pcol@getcurrfoot\box \@cons\@freelist\pcol@currfoot + \pcol@Fe{restartcolumn(pagefn)}% + \pcol@Log\pcol@restartcolumn{insert}\footins + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\footins\@tempdimb + \insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}% + \fi + \pcol@deferredfootins\pcol@restartcolumn + \@colht\@tempdima + \else + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \pcol@getcurrfoot\copy + \pcol@Log\pcol@restartcolumn{insdmy}\footins + \insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}% + \fi + \pcol@putbackmvl + \if@nobreak \nobreak \else \addpenalty\interlinepenalty \fi + \fi + \else + \pcol@putbackmvl + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot\else + \pcol@Fb + \pcol@getcurrfoot\box \@cons\@freelist\pcol@currfoot + \pcol@Fe{restartcolumn(colfn)}% + \pcol@Log\pcol@restartcolumn{insert}\footins + \insert\footins{\unvbox\footins}% + \fi + \if@nobreak \nobreak \else \addpenalty\interlinepenalty \fi + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getcurrcol} +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Add assignment $w_c$ to \cs{columnwidth}, \cs{hsize} and +% \cs{linewidth}.} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Move assignment $w_c$ to \cs{hsize} and \cs{linewidth} to +% \cs{pcol@invokeoutput}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@igetcurrcol} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iigetcurrcol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add restoration of \cs{pcol@textfloatsep}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove the argument for $\kappa_c(\mu)\EQ\cs{@mparbottom}$ because it +% is no longer in the column context.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@getcurrcol! is invoked from the following macros to +% restore the typesetting parameters of the column $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ from +% $\cc_c$, and to let \!\columnwidth! have +% $\w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$\footnote{ +%  +% \cs{hsize} and \cs{linewidth} are let have $\w_c$ and $\w_c-\lrm$ +% respectively in \cs{pcol@invokeoutput}.}. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% \begin{itemize}\item[]\begin{tabular}{lll} +% \!\pcol@output@start!&\!\pcol@output@switch!&\!\pcol@restartcolumn!\\ +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!&\!\pcol@measurecolumn!&\!\pcol@synccolumn!\\ +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!&\!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!&\!\pcol@iflushfloats!\\ +% \!\pcol@freshpage!&\!\pcol@output@end! +% \end{tabular} +% \end{itemize} +%  +% Since we represent $\cc_c$ as; +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% &&\Arg{\cc_c(\vb)}\Arg{\cc_c(\ft)}\Arg{\cc_c(\pd)}\Arg{\cc_c(\tl)} +% \Arg{\cc_c(\ml)}\Arg{\cc_c(\bl)}\Arg{\cc_c(\dl)}\Arg{\cc_c(\tf)}|%|\\ +% &&\Arg{\Arg{\cc_c(\fh)}\Arg{\cc_c(\tn)}\Arg{\cc_c(\tr)} +% \Arg{\cc_c(\bn)}\Arg{\cc_c(\br)}\Arg{\cc_c(\cn)}\Arg{\cc_c(\sw)} +% \Arg{\cc_c(\ep)}} +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% in the body of $|\pcol@col|{\cdot}c$, +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@col} +%  +% we restore first eight by \!\pcol@igetcurrcol! giving everything above as +% its arguments by the expansion of +% $$ +% \!\csname!| pcol@col|\!\number!\!\pcol@currcol!\!\endcsname! +% $$ +% and then of the resulting control sequence. Then this macro gives its +% nineth argument to \!\pcol@iigetcurrcol! which restores the last eight. We +% also do +% $$ +% \!\global!\!\columnwidth!|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c +% $$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% by a pair of \!\expandafter! for the first two control sequences. +% +% Note that the restore operations are \!\global!, except for $\cc_c(\vb)$ +% and $\cc_d(\ft)$ because they are referred to only in \!\output!, +% including \CSIndex{if@nobreak} for which \!\@nobreaktrue! and +% \!\@nobreakfalse! are defined \!\global! by \LaTeX. Also note that +% \!\dimen!-type parameters are saved in the form of integers and thus +% restoring them needs to specify the unit |sp|. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@getcurrcol{% + \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\pcol@igetcurrcol + \csname pcol@col\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname + \expandafter\global\expandafter\columnwidth + \csname pcol@columnwidth\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname} +\def\pcol@igetcurrcol#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8#9{% + \def\@currbox{#1}\def\pcol@currfoot{#2}\global\pcol@prevdepth#3sp\relax + \gdef\@toplist{#4}\gdef\@midlist{#5}\gdef\@botlist{#6}\gdef\@deferlist{#7}% + \global\pcol@textfloatsep#8sp\pcol@iigetcurrcol#9} +\def\pcol@iigetcurrcol#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{% + \global\@textfloatsheight#1sp\relax + \global\@topnum#2\relax \global\@toproom#3sp\relax + \global\@botnum#4\relax \global\@botroom#5sp\relax + \global\@colnum#6\relax + \global\@afterindentfalse \@nobreaktrue + \ifcase#7 + \@nobreakfalse \or + \global\@afterindenttrue \else + \relax + \fi + \global\everypar{#8}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getcurrfoot} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add an argument being \cs{box} or \cs{copy}} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@getcurrfoot!\arg{com}$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@startcolumn! (\!\copy!, $\pp^f(p)$), +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! (\!\copy!\slash\!\box!, $\pp^f(p)$\slash$\cc_c(\ft)$), +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! (\!\box!, $\cc_c(\ft)$) and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! +% (\!\box!, $\cc_c(\ft)$) to put everything in $\!\pcol@currfoot!$, having +% the second element in the parens following macro names, into \!\footins! +% using $\arg{com}$ shown as the first element in parens for the \!\box! +% component. That is, if the source $\pp^f(p)$ or $\cc_c(\ft^b)$ is void, +% we let $\!\box!{\cdot}\!\footins!$ be so. Otherwise, we move \!\box!, +% \!\count!, \!\dimen! and \!\skip! of the source into those of +% \!\footins!\footnote{ +%  +% Moving \!\count!, \!\dimen! and \!\skip! is redundant almost always +% because it is very unlikely that these footnote parameters are modified +% dynamically. Moreover, dynamic modification of them is hardly consistent +% with repetitive self-\!\insert!ion of \!\footins! in +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! and \!\@reinserts! of \LaTeX. However, we dare to +% move them in order to, for example, allow each column has its own footnote +% parameters.}. +%  +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@getcurrfoot#1{% + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot \global\setbox\footins\box\voidb@x + \else + \global\setbox\footins#1\pcol@currfoot + \global\count\footins\count\pcol@currfoot + \global\dimen\footins\dimen\pcol@currfoot + \global\skip\footins\skip\pcol@currfoot + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcurrcol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add save of \cs{pcol@textfloatsep}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove $\kappa_c(\mu)\EQ\cs{@mparbottom}$ from the body of +% $\cs{pcol@col}{\cdot}c$ because it is no longer in the column +% context.} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcurrcolnf} +% The macro \!\pcol@setcurrcol! is invoked from \!\pcol@output@switch!, +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! and \!\pcol@synccolumn! to save \cctext{} of +% $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ in $\cc_c$. It is also used in \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! +% invoked from \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!, \!\pcol@iflushfloats! and \!\pcol@freshpage! for +% the saving when the \colpage{} is known to have no footnotes. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@setcurrcol! at first calculates the combined code for +% \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and \CSIndex{if@afterindent}, and then saves +% parameters into $\cc_c$ by \!\xdef! to have the sequence shown in the +% description of \!\pcol@getcurrcol!. Note that \!\dimen!-type parameters +% are saved by expansions with \!\number! and thus as decimal integers. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! \!\def!ines $\cc_c(\ft)=\!\pcol@currfoot!$ +% as \!\voidb@x!, and then invoke \!\pcol@setcurrcol! for saving. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcurrcol{{\let\@elt\relax + \@tempcnta\if@nobreak\if@afterindent\@ne\else\tw@\fi\else\z@\fi + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@col\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname{% + {\@currbox}{\pcol@currfoot}{\number\pcol@prevdepth}% + {\@toplist}{\@midlist}{\@botlist}{\@deferlist}{\number\pcol@textfloatsep}% + {{\number\@textfloatsheight}% + {\number\@topnum}{\number\@toproom}{\number\@botnum}{\number\@botroom}% + {\number\@colnum}{\number\@tempcnta}{\the\everypar}}}}} +\def\pcol@setcurrcolnf{\def\pcol@currfoot{\voidb@x}\pcol@setcurrcol} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@putbackmvl} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to restart a column with coloring.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@restorecst@restart} and the operations to +% save pre-spanning-text stuff is added.} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add {\tt\%} to the end of the line to open \cs{vbox} for +% \cs{pcol@prespan} to obey the coding convention.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Change nullification of +% $\mathit{\Gamma}_s\EQ\cs{pcol@colorstack@saved}$ from \cs{gdef} to +% \cs{box}-assignment of $\bot$ because it is now a \cs{vbox}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@putbackmvl!, solely used in +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, has two functions; \colorstack{} restoration and +% \prespan{} preservation. It examines the emptiness of the \colpage{} of the +% column $c$ to be restarted in $\cc_c(\vb)=\!\@currbox!$. If so, the +% \colorstack{} $\CST^c$ is saved into $\csts=\!\pcol@colorstack@saved!$ by +% \!\pcol@savecolorstack! as the opening \colorctext{} of the \colpage{}, +% and \!\pcol@prespan! for \prespan{} is made $\bot$. +% +% Otherwise, $\csts$ is let $\bot$ because the opening \colorctext{} has +% already been put when we left from the \colpage{}. Then if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\true$ to mean a \mctext{} is to start, we +% save $\cc_c(\vb)$ into \!\pcol@prespan! adding the colorling \!\special!s +% to restore \colorctext{} from $\CST^c$ by +% \!\pcol@restorecolorstack!\footnote{ +%  +% If \cs{pcol@prespan} is connected to (the first part of) the \mctext, +% the reestablishment of the \colorstack{} here correctly places coloring +% \cs{special}s in \texttt{.dvi}. On the other hand, if the \mctext{} is +% slown away to the next page as a whole, the reestablishment here is +% essential for the correct paring of the pushes and pops, the latter of +% which are at the bottom of the \colpage{} whose tail is \cs{pcol@prespan}.}. +%  +% We also shrink $\cc_c(\vb^r)=\!\@colroom!$ by the height of the \prespan{} +% so that \mctext{} will be captured by \!\pcol@makecol! if it is broken +% into two (or more) pages, and put a invisible \!\hrule! to the main +% vertical list letting $\!\topskip!=0$ to supress \!\topskip! insertion +% prior to the \mctext{} but instead to make the text led by +% \!\baselineskip! (or \!\lineskip!) according to the \!\prevdepth! being +% the depth of the tallest column and the height of the first \!\hbox! in +% the \mctext. Otherwise, i.e., if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\false$, +% we simply put back $\cc_c(\vb)$ into the main vertical list and then the +% coloring \!\special!s by \!\pcol@restorecolorstack!. +% +% Note that $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}$ is temporarily made $\false$ by +% this macro if the \!\pcol@output@switch! invoking \!\pcol@restartcolumn! +% did not make \sync{}ed \cswitch{}, i.e., if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\true$ +% to mean the page is flushed before the \sync{}ation, or +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\false$ for \cscan{}ning prior to the \sync{}ation. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@putbackmvl{% + \ifpcol@flush \pcol@sptextstartfalse \fi + \ifpcol@sync\else \pcol@sptextstartfalse \fi + \pcol@ifempty\@currbox + {\pcol@savecolorstack + \ifpcol@sptextstart \global\setbox\pcol@prespan\box\voidb@x \fi}% + {\global\setbox\pcol@colorstack@saved\box\voidb@x + \ifpcol@sptextstart + \global\setbox\pcol@prespan\vbox{% + \unvbox\@currbox \pcol@restorecolorstack}% + \global\advance\@colroom-\ht\pcol@prespan + \global\topskip\z@ \hrule\@height\z@\@width\z@ + \else + \unvbox\@currbox \pcol@restorecolorstack + \fi}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \subsection{Color Management} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-color} +%  +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the subsection ``Color Management'' to describe newly +% introduced macros for coloring.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Move commands outside \cs{output} routine to the newly introduced +% section ``Commands for Text Coloring'' to distinguish +% macros inside and outside \cs{output} routine.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@output@cpush} was introduced for color stack pushing but +% removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@cpush} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@output@icpush} was introduced to implement +% \cs{pcol@output@cpush} but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@icpush} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@output@mcpush} was introduced for coloring specified in +% math mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@mcpush} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@output@imcpush} was introduced for coloring specified in +% math mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@imcpush} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@output@cpop} was introduced for color stack popping but +% removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@cpop} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {\cs{pcol@reset@color@elt} was introduced to implement +% \cs{pcol@reset@color@pop} but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@reset@color@elt} was moved from the position where +% \cs{pcol@reset@color@pop} was defined +% because it became to be used only by \cs{pcol@output@cpop}, but +% removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@reset@color@elt} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@output@mcpop} was introduced for coloring specified in +% math mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@mcpop} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {\cs{pcol@output@mcpop@elt} was introduced for coloring specified in +% math mode but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@mcpop@elt} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@output@cset} was introduced to set $\gamma_0^c$ but +% removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@cset} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@output@icset} was introduced to implement +% \cs{pcol@output@cset} but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@output@icset} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@return@from@color} was introduced to implement +% \cs{pcol@output@cpush}, \cs{pcol@output@cpop} and +% \cs{pcol@output@cset} but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@return@from@color} is removed according to the change of +% text coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@magicpenalty} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ifempty} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to examine the emptiness of the box, extracting the code +% from \cs{pcol@measurecolumn} so as to be used for coloring as +% well.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ifempty!\arg{box}\arg{then}\arg{else}$ is used in +% \!\pcol@putbackmvl!, \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox! and +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! to examine if $\arg{box}$ is empty, and to perform +% $\arg{then}$ if so or $\arg{else}$ otherwise. Since \TeX{} does not +% provide any convenient way for the examination unfortunately, we perform a +% series of tricky operations to put the followings into \!\@tempboxa!; a +% penalty of $\!\pcol@magicpenalty!=12345$ whose existence in the +% $\arg{box}$ is (almost) impossible; contents of $\arg{box}$ put by +% \!\unvcopy!; and then a \!\global! \!\def!inition of \!\@gtempa! to let it +% have the decimal representation of \!\lastpenalty!. Since \!\lastpenalty! +% has $\arg{pen}$ if the last item is $\!\penalty!\arg{pen}$, or 0 +% otherwise, $\!\@gtempa!=\!\pcol@magicpenalty!$ iff $\arg{box}$ is empty. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Color Management + +\def\pcol@magicpenalty{12345} +\def\pcol@ifempty#1#2#3{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\penalty\pcol@magicpenalty + \unvcopy#1\xdef\@gtempa{\number\lastpenalty}}% + \ifnum\@gtempa=\pcol@magicpenalty\relax \def\reserved@a{#2}% + \else \def\reserved@a{#3}% + \fi + \reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@clearcst@unvbox} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to put coloring \cs{special}s above and below of a +% column-page.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@clearcolorstack} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to clear color context.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Completely change its definition according to the new text coloring +% with \cs{insert}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox!$\arg{box}$, invoked from \!\pcol@opcol! +% and \!\pcol@output@switch!, puts the following above and below +% $\arg{box}$ containing the main vertical list of a \colpage{} from which +% we are now leaving, if \!\pcol@ifempty! judges that $\arg{box}$ is not +% empty. Above the $\arg{box}$, we put coloring \!\special!s to establish +% the \colorstack{} of |.dvi| saved in $\csts=\!\pcol@colorstack@saved!$ by +% \!\pcol@restorecst! as the opening \colorctext{} of the \colpage{}. The +% stack $\csts$, however, can be $\bot$ if $\arg{box}$ already has the +% \!\special!s, i.e., when we visit the \colpage{} it had already had +% some items. Below $\arg{box}$, on the other hand, we put uncoloring +% \!\special!s by \!\pcol@clearcolorstack! to rewind $\CSTraw^c$ to clear the +% \colorctext{} of the \colpage{} in |.dvi| temporarily so that afterward it +% is made consistent with that in |.tex|. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@clearcolorstack!, solely invoked from +% \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox! shown above\footnote{ +%  +% But we have this macro to avoid the complication in \cs{def}ining +% \cs{reserved@a} and \cs{reserved@b} with an argument if we did it in the +% argument of \cs{pcol@ifempty} in \cs{pcol@clearcst@unvbox}.}, +%  +% scans $\CSTraw^c=(\Celt^c,\cstraw)$ by \!\pcol@scancst! giving +% $\cstraw=\!\pcol@colorins!$ to it as its argument. Since we gives +% $\cstraw$ to the macro, this scan includes removals of all $\celtpop_i$ +% and $\mceltpop_{i,m}$, all $\celt_i$ having matching $\celtpop_i$, all +% $\mcelt_{i,m}$ having matching $\mceltpop_{i,m}$, and all elements to +% update $\Celt^c$, from $\cstraw$ to let \!\pcol@colorins! have $\cst$. +% Prior to this invocation, we \!\def!ine $\!\reserved@a!\<\celt_i\>$ and +% $\!\reserved@b!\<\Celt^c\>$ to let them have \!\reset@color! so that +% uncoloring \!\special! will be put into the main vertical list for each +% $\celt_i\in\cst$ and $\Celt^c$ before update if any, regardless of +% coloring \!\special! they have. That is, we invoke \!\reset@color! as +% many times as the appearance of $\celt_i\in\cst$ and once if +% $\Celt^c\neq\bot$ before the invocation, ignoring the color information in +% each element and the order of elements, expecting \!\reset@color! just +% pops printer's \colorstack{} to rewind it as we intend. +% +% Note that in some printer |.def|inition could \!\def!ine \!\reset@color! to +% let printer's text color be \!\current@color! to make the stack rewinding +% resulting in the sequence of coloring operations with \!\current@color! at +% the invocation of \!\output!. This meaningless operations might cause a +% problem when a colored \colpage{} of $c_1$ is physically followed by another +% \colpage{} of the succeeding column $c_2$ without any coloring, because the +% \colpage{} of $c_2$ will be colored with \!\current@color! at the page break +% in $c_1$. If this problem is serious, we could initialize $\Celt^c$ with +% \!\current@color! at \beginparacol{} for all $c$ such that $\Celtshadow^c$ +% is undefined, in order to make sure that any \colpage{} has at least one +% coloring \!\special! with $\Celt^c$ at its beginning so that, for example, +% coloring operations at the tail of the \colpage{} of $c_1$ is overridden +% by that of the default color of $c_2$ placed at the head of its \colpage{}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@clearcst@unvbox#1{% + \pcol@ifempty#1\relax + {\pcol@restorecst\pcol@colorstack@saved \unvbox#1\pcol@clearcolorstack}} +\def\pcol@clearcolorstack{% + \def\reserved@a##1{\reset@color}\def\reserved@b##1{\reset@color}% + \pcol@scancst\pcol@colorins} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {\cs{pcol@set@color@elt} was introduced to implement color context +% reestablishment but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@set@color@elt} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@restorecolorstack} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to reestablish color context.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Completely change its definition according to the new text coloring +% with \cs{insert}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@restorecst} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to reestablish color context.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Completely change its definition according to the new text coloring +% with \cs{insert}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@restorecolorstack!, used in \!\pcol@putbackmvl! +% and \!\pcol@output@end!, makes \colorctext{} in +% |.dvi| consistent with that in |.tex| by giving $\cst=\!\pcol@colorins!$ +% to \!\pcol@restorecst! to let it scan $\CST^c=(\Celt^c,\cst)$. +% The callee macro $\!\pcol@restorecst!\arg{box}$, also used in +% \!\pcol@clearcst@unvbox! with $\arg{box}=\csts=\!\pcol@colorstack@saved!$, +% invokes \!\pcol@scancst! after \!\def!ining $\!\reserved@a!\<\celt_i\>$ to +% apply \!\unvbox! to $\celt_i$ in $\cst$ or $\csts$ and +% $\!\reserved@b!\<\Celt^c\>$ to apply \!\unvcopy! to $\Celt^c$ so that +% coloring \!\special!s they have will be put into the main vertical list. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@restorecolorstack{\pcol@restorecst\pcol@colorins} +\def\pcol@restorecst{% + \def\reserved@a##1{\unvbox##1}\def\reserved@b##1{\unvcopy##1}% + \pcol@scancst} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@scancst} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to implement new text coloring with \cs{insert}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iscancst} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to implement new text coloring with \cs{insert}.} +% +% \begin{Sloppy}{1500} +% The macro $\!\pcol@scancst!\arg{box}$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@clearcolorstack! and \!\pcol@restorecst!. In the former +% invocation, we have $\arg{box}=\cstraw=\!\pcol@colorins!$ to rewind +% $\CSTraw=(\Celt^c,\cstraw)$ with $\!\reserved@a!\arg{\celt_i}$ and +% $\!\reserved@b!\arg{\Celt^c}$ having \!\reset@color!. In the latter one, +% we have +% $\arg{box}\in\{\cst{=}\!\pcol@colorins!,\,\csts{=}\!\pcol@colorstack@saved!\}$ +% to reestablish $\CST^c=(\Celt^c,\cst)$ or $\csts$ with +% $\!\reserved@a!\arg{\celt_i}$ to apply \!\unvbox! to $\celt_i$ and +% $\!\reserved@b!\arg{\Celt^c}$ to apply \!\unvcopy! to $\Celt^c$. +% Therefore, if $\arg{box}=\!\pcol@colorins!$, we at first put (un)coloring +% \!\special! for $\Celt^c$, unless it is $\bot$, to the main vertical +% list applying \!\reserved@b! to it. This means the \!\special! for +% $\Celt^c$ is put first prior to those for elements in $\cstraw$ or $\cst$ +% consistently in reestablishing but not in rewinding. However as we +% discussed in the description of \!\pcol@clearcolorstack!, the order of +% rewinding does not affect the result for almost all printers because only +% the number of pop operations is siginficant for them\footnote{ +%  +% And even for the minority because multiple updates of printer's color with +% one particular color are independent of the order of them.}. +%  +% Then if $\arg{box}\neq\bot$ we invoke \!\pcol@iscancst! to examine the +% contents of $\arg{box}$ from its bottom to top. Prior to the invocation, +% we do the following; let \!\@tempboxa! have an empty \!\vbox! as its initial +% value of reformed $\arg{box}$; let \!\pcol@tempboxa! have an empty +% \!\vbox! as its initial value of the sequence of \!\special!s to be put +% into the main vertical list; let $\npop=\!\@tempcntb!=0$; let +% $M=\!\reserved@b!=()$ as its initial value of the list of identifiers of +% math-mode pops; $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ to mean the first \!\vbox! to +% update $\Celt^c$ found in the scan (i.e., the bottommost one) is +% effective. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% In the macro \!\pcol@iscancst!, we repeatedly examine the last \!\vbox! in +% $\arg{box}$ taken by \!\lastbox! into $\celt=\!\pcol@tempboxb!$ until +% $\celt$ becomes $\bot$, and perform one of the following for $\celt$. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumi{(\arabic{enumi})} +% \def\HT{\mathit{height}}\def\DP{\mathit{depth}}\def\WD{\mathit{width}} +% \item +% If $\HT(\celt)=0$ and $\WD(\celt)=0$ to mean $\celt=\celtpop_i$, increment +% $\npop$. +% +% \item +% If $\HT(\celt)=0$ and $\WD(\celt)=m>0$ to mean $\celt=\mceltpop_{i,m}$, let +% $M=(m,M)$. +% +% \item +% If $\HT(\celt)\neq0$, $\DP(\celt)=0$ and $\WD(\celt)=0$ to mean +% $\celt=\celt_i$, decrement $\npop$ if $\npop>0$, or otherwise add $\celt$ +% to the head of \!\@tempboxa! and apply $\!\reserved@a!\arg{\celt}$ to add +% its result to the head of \!\pcol@tempboxa!. +% +% \item +% If $\HT(\celt)\neq0$, $\DP(\celt)=0$ and $\WD(\celt)=m>0$ to mean +% $\celt=\mcelt_{i,m}$, do nothing if $m\in M$, or otherwise add $\celt$ +% to the head of \!\@tempboxa! and apply $\!\reserved@a!\arg{\celt}$ to add +% its result to the head of \!\pcol@tempboxa!. +% +% \item +% If $\HT(\celt)\neq0$, $\DP(\celt)\neq0$ to mean $\celt$ has a \!\special! +% with which $\Celt^c$ is updated. If $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ to mean +% $\celt$ is the first (bottommost) occurence, $\Celt^c$ is updated +% acquiring an \!\insert! from \!\@freelist! if it was $\bot$. In this +% case of $\bot$, we have to put an uncoloring \!\special! by +% \!\reset@color!, because \!\pcol@scancst! did not do it but +% \!\columncolor! or \!\normalcolumncolor! pushed the corresponding color +% \!\special!. Then we let $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\false$. +% +% Otherwise, i.e., if $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\false$ for second or succeeding +% occurences, we do nothing because updates by them are overridden by the +% first one. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% Note that the cases other than (3) and (4) happen only in rewinding, and +% thus in reestablishing we only have (3) and (4) with $\npop=0$ and $M=()$ +% always so that every $\celt$ is kept into new $\arg{box}$ and a coloring +% \!\special! for it will be put into the main vertical list. +% +% Then we go back to \!\pcol@scancst! to let $\arg{box}=\!\@tempboxa!$, +% meaningless in reestablishing but not harmful, and put the contents of +% \!\pcol@tempboxa! to the main vertical list. +% +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@scancst#1{% + \@tempcnta#1\relax + \ifnum\@tempcnta=\pcol@colorins + \ifvoid\pcol@ccuse{@box}\else + \reserved@b{\pcol@ccuse{@box}}\fi + \fi + \ifvoid\@tempcnta\else + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{}\setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{}\@tempcntb\z@ + \def\reserved@b{}\let\@elt\relax \@tempswatrue \pcol@iscancst + \global\setbox\@tempcnta\box\@tempboxa \unvbox\pcol@tempboxa + \fi} +\def\pcol@iscancst{% + \setbox\@tempcnta\vbox{% + \unvbox\@tempcnta \global\setbox\pcol@tempboxb\lastbox}% + \ifvoid\pcol@tempboxb \let\reserved@c\relax + \else + \let\reserved@c\pcol@iscancst + \ifdim\ht\pcol@tempboxb=\z@ + \ifdim\wd\pcol@tempboxb=\z@ \advance\@tempcntb\@ne + \else \edef\reserved@b{\@elt{\number\wd\pcol@tempboxb}\reserved@b}% + \fi + \else\ifdim\dp\pcol@tempboxb=\z@ + \ifdim\wd\pcol@tempboxb=\z@ + \ifnum\@tempcntb>\z@ \advance\@tempcntb\m@ne + \else + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\copy\pcol@tempboxb \unvbox\@tempboxa}% + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{% + \reserved@a\pcol@tempboxb \unvbox\pcol@tempboxa}% + \fi + \else + \count@\wd\pcol@tempboxb \chardef\reserved@d\z@ + \def\@elt##1{\ifnum##1=\count@ \chardef\reserved@d\@ne \fi}% + \reserved@b \let\@elt\relax + \ifnum\reserved@d=\z@ + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\copy\pcol@tempboxb \unvbox\@tempboxa}% + \setbox\pcol@tempboxa\vbox{% + \reserved@a\pcol@tempboxb \unvbox\pcol@tempboxa}% + \fi + \fi + \else\if@tempswa + \ifvoid\pcol@ccuse{@box}% + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@ccxdef{\@currbox}\reset@color + \fi + \global\setbox\pcol@ccuse{@box}\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@tempboxb}% + \@tempswafalse + \fi\fi\fi + \fi + \reserved@c} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@savecolorstack} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to save the opening color context of a column-page.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Completely change its definition according to the new text coloring +% with \cs{insert}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@savecolorstack! is used in \!\pcol@startcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@putbackmvl! to save the opening +% \colorctext{} in $\CST^c$ of a \ccolpage{} $c$ known to be or found empty +% into $\csts=\!\pcol@colorstack@saved!$. If both of +% $\Celt^c=|\pcol@columncolor@box|\cdot c$ and $\cst=\!\pcol@colorins!$ are +% $\bot$, $\csts$ is let be $\bot$. Otherwise, $\csts$ is let be a \!\vbox! +% having a \!\vbox! for $\Celt^c$ at the top if it is not $\bot$ and then the +% contents of $\cst$ if it is not $\bot$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@savecolorstack{% + \ifvoid\pcol@colorins \@tempswafalse \else \@tempswatrue \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@ccuse{@box}% + \setbox\@tempboxa\box\voidb@x + \else + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvcopy\pcol@ccuse{@box}}% + \ht\@tempboxa1sp \dp\@tempboxa\z@ \wd\@tempboxa\z@ + \@tempswatrue + \fi + \if@tempswa + \global\setbox\pcol@colorstack@saved\vbox{% + \ifvoid\@tempboxa\else \box\@tempboxa \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@colorins\else \unvcopy\pcol@colorins \fi} + \else \global\setbox\pcol@colorstack@saved\box\voidb@x + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {\cs{pcol@colorstack@full} was introduced to represent +% $\string\mathit{\Gamma}^c$ but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@colorstack@full} is removed according to the change of text +% coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +%  +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ccuse} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to implement new text coloring with \cs{insert}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ifccdefined} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to implement new text coloring with \cs{insert}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ccxdef} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Introduced to implement new text coloring with \cs{insert}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ccuse!\arg{pfx}$ is to expand a macro +% $|\pcol@columncolor|\cdot\arg{pfx}\cdot c$ for the current column $c$. It +% is used in \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@scancst@shadow! with +% $\arg{pfx}=\hbox{`'}$ to have $\Celtshadow^c$, and in \!\pcol@scancst!, +% \!\pcol@iscancst!, \!\pcol@savecolorstack!, \!\pcol@output@end! and +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! with $\arg{pfx}=|@box|$ to have $\Celt^c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@ifccdefined!\arg{then}\arg{else}$ is used in +% \!\pcol@output@start! and \!\pcol@scancst@shadow! to examine whether +% $\Celtshadow^c=|\pcol@columncolor|\cdot c$ is defined and to do +% $\arg{then}$ if so or $\arg{else}$ otherwise. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor} +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@ccxdef!\arg{body}$ \!\xdef!ines a macro +% $\Celt^c=|\pcol@columncolor@box|\cdot c$ as $\arg{body}$ for the current +% column $c$. It is used in \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@iscancst! and +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! with $\arg{body}=\!\@currbox!$ when an \!\insert! +% for $\Celt^c$ is acquired, and in \!\pcol@output@end! with +% $\arg{body}=\!\voidb@x!$ after releasing $\Celt^c$ to \!\@freelist!. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columncolor@box} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@ccuse#1{\@nameuse{pcol@columncolor#1\number\pcol@currcol}} +\def\pcol@ifccdefined#1#2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname pcol@columncolor\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname\relax + #2\else#1\fi} +\def\pcol@ccxdef#1{% + \expandafter\xdef + \csname pcol@columncolor@box\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname{#1}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Footnote Handling} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-scfnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the subsection ``Footnote Handling'' to describe newly +% introduced macros for page-wise footnotes.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@savefootins} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to save footnotes in multiple occasions.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@savefootins!\arg{cs}$, invoked from \!\pcol@makecol! +% for \Scfnote{}s and from \!\pcol@output@switch! for both \mcfnote{} and +% \Scfnote{}s, saves \!\footins! to an \!\insert! register obtained by +% \!\@next! from \!\@freelist!, and \!\def!ines $\arg{cs}$ being +% \!\pcol@currfoot! or \!\pcol@footins! so that it has the register as its +% body and the register is then saved into $\pp^f(p)$ or $\cc_c(\ft)$. We +% save not only \!\box! component of \!\footins! but also \!\count!, +% \!\dimen! and \!\skip!\footnote{ +%  +% Knowing these three components are virtually constants.}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Footnote Handling + +\def\pcol@savefootins#1{% + \@next#1\@freelist{% + \global\setbox#1\box\footins + \global\count#1\count\footins + \global\dimen#1\dimen\footins + \global\skip#1\skip\footins}{\def#1{\voidb@x}\pcol@ovf}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to shrink \cs{@colht} temporarily by the +% height-plus-depth of page-wise footnotes and the natural size +% of the skip above them.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the first argument $\langle\string\mathit{height}\rangle$ for +% the user \cs{pcol@ioutputelt}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the third argument $\langle\string\mathit{skip}\rangle$ to +% avoid accidental destruction of \cs{@tempdimb} which was modified +% unconditionally.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn!\arg{height}\arg{ins}\arg{skip}$, invoked +% from \!\pcol@makecol!, \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@startcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, \!\pcol@flushcolumn! and \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!, +% shrinks $\arg{height}\in\{\!\@colht!,\!\@tempdima!\}$ temporarily so that a +% column or the set of all columns resides in a page with \Scfnote{}s in the +% \!\insert! $\arg{ins}$. The shrinkage is calculated by adding the sum of +% the height plus depth of all footnotes, i.e., that of $\arg{ins}$, and the +% natural component of $\!\skip!\arg{ins}$, i.e., the vertical space +% inserted between the columns and the footnotes. Note that the stretch and +% shrink components of $\!\skip!\arg{ins}$ cannot be incorporated into the +% calculation but their contribution to each \colpage{} is taken care of by +% the following macro \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv! if required. Also note that the +% inverse of $\!\skip!\arg{ins}$ is kept in $\arg{skip}$ if it is not +% \!\relax! so that \!\pcol@deferredfootins! knows $\arg{ins}\neq\bot$ when +% this macro is invoked from \!\pcol@startcolumn! and +% \!\pcol@restartcolumn! with $\arg{skip}=\!\@tempdimb!$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn#1#2#3{% + \ifx#3\relax\else #3-\skip#2\relax \fi + \advance#1-\ht#2\advance#1-\dp#2\advance#1-\skip#2\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@unvbox@cclv} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to add stretch/shrink components of +% \cs{skip}\cs{footins} at the bottom of a column-page if the page has +% page-wise footnotes.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@unvbox@cclv!\arg{ins}$, invoked from \!\pcol@makecol! and +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! when they work on a column-page with \Scfnote{}s, +% adds the stretch and shrink components of $\!\skip!\arg{ins}$ at the end +% of \!\box!|255|, where $\arg{ins}$ is non-void $\pp^f(p)$ having +% \Scfnote{}s. Before the addition, the macro goes back to the baseline of +% \!\box!|255|\footnote{ +%  +% The comparison of the depth of \cs{box}\texttt{255} and \cs{@maxdepth} and +% taking the latter if it is smaller is really just-in-case.} +%  +% to nullify the baseline progress mechanism so as to make it sure the exact +% amount of the vertical skip is added. Then it adds the stretch and shrink +% by at first adding the skip itself and then the negative amount of its +% natural component. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@unvbox@cclv#1{% + \@tempdima\dp\@cclv \unvbox\@cclv + \vskip \ifdim\@tempdima>\@maxdepth -\@maxdepth \else -\@tempdima \fi + \vskip\skip#1\@tempdima\skip#1\vskip-\@tempdima} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@deferredfootins} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to insert deferred footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Fix the bug that the height cap was underestimated by the duplicated +% subtraction of \cs{skip}\cs{footins} if the page has already have +% non-deferred footnotes.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@deferredfootins!\arg{macro}$, invoked from +% \!\pcol@startcolumn! and \!\pcol@restartcolumn!, tries to \!\insert! some +% of leading deferred footnotes in $\df$ through \!\footins!\footnote{ +%  +% The argument $\arg{macro}$ has the invoker itself shown in debug +% messages.}. +%  +% In order to avoid that \!\footins! has footnotes across three or more +% pages to make confusion in the order of footnotes kept inside of \TeX, we +% cap the total height of footnotes by $h=\!\@colht!$ if it has already +% shrunk by non-deferred footnotes in the page we are working on indicated +% by $\!\@tempdimb!<0$, or $h=\!\@colht!-\!\skip!\!\footins!$ if the page +% does not have non-deferred footnotes indicated by $\!\@tempdimb!=0$. That +% is, we extract leading elements of $\df$ by \!\vsplit! until their total +% height reaches $h$ and, if some elements are obtained in \!\@tempboxa!, +% \!\insert! them through \!\footins!. As for the remaining elements if +% any, we add a leading \!\penalty!\!\interlinepenalty! which should have +% been removed by \!\vsplit!. +% +% Note that we temporarily let $\!\splitmaxdepth!=\!\@maxdepth!$, +% $\!\splittopskip!=0$ and $\!\vbadness!=\infty$ at the \!\vsplit! so that +% the depth of the split first half is \!\@maxdepth! at deepest, the second +% half does not have any skip at its top, and \TeX{} will not complain of +% (almost) inevitable underfull. Also note that the successful extraction +% of the leading elements is examined by checking \!\ht!\!\@tempboxa! and +% thus we need to \!\unvbox! it in itself because \!\vsplit! makes the +% height $h$ regardless of its contents. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@deferredfootins#1{% + \ifdim\@tempdimb=\z@ \@tempdimb\@colht \advance\@tempdimb-\skip\footins + \else \@tempdimb\@colht + \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@topfnotes\else \ifdim\@tempdimb>\z@ + \begingroup + \splitmaxdepth\@maxdepth \splittopskip\z@ \vbadness\@M + \setbox\@tempboxa\vsplit\pcol@topfnotes to\@tempdimb + \ifvoid\pcol@topfnotes\else + \global\setbox\pcol@topfnotes\vbox{\penalty\interlinepenalty + \unvbox\pcol@topfnotes}% + \fi + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\unvbox\@tempboxa}% + \ifdim\ht\@tempboxa>\z@ + \pcol@Log#1{add}\@tempboxa + \insert\footins{\unvbox\@tempboxa}% + \fi + \endgroup + \fi\fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@combinefootins} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to put footnotes into pre-environment stuff.} +% \changes{v1.35-4}{2018/12/31} +% {Add the insertion of vertical skip \cs{belowfootnoteskip}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@putfootins} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to put page-wise footnotes to a page.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Change users \cs{pcol@outputelt} to \cs{pcol@ioutputelt}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove \cs{pcol@output@end} from users.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@combinefootins!\arg{b}\arg{f}$, invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@makenormalcol!\footnote{ +%  +% And thus having the arguments $\arg{b}$ and $\arg{f}$ is unnecessary, but +% we keep this implementation to avoid unnecessary recoding from a +% development version.}, +%  +% constructs the \preenv{} in \!\@outputbox!, combining the stuff in the box +% $b$ and pre-environment footnotes in the \!\insert! $f$. It is almost +% equivalent to the \cs{else} part of \!\@makecol! in which the main +% vertical list and \Mcfnote{}s are combined. The operation to put +% footnotes is almost equivalent to the second half of the \cs{else} part +% except that \!\insert! is not always \!\footins! but $f$ and is done by +% \!\pcol@putfootins! in which a null vertical skip is added after $f$ but +% this skip is removed by \!\unskip! after the invocation. The other +% difference is that the vertical space of \!\belowfootnoteskip! is added if +% it is not 0\footnote{ +%  +% We avoid null space insertion to minimize the difference from older +% versions in traced output.} +%  +% to have some space between non-merged \Preenv{} footnotes and the first +% lines in a \env{paracol} environment. +% +% The null vertical skip is put for \Scfnote{}s, for which the macro +% \!\pcol@putfootins! is invoked from \!\pcol@ioutputelt! and +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!. Since we shrink the height of \colpage{}s by +% the height-plus-depth of \Scfnote{}s, the natural height of the box in +% which \colpage{}s and \Scfnote{}s are combined would be less than +% \!\textheight! due to the depth of the last footnote line if we simply +% made the footnotes the last items of the box. Though this shortage at +% most \!\maxdepth! is expected to be covered by the stretch factor of +% \!\skip!\!\footins! without too large badness causing an underfull +% message\footnote{ +%  +% With default settings of $\cs{maxdimen}=5\,|pt|$ and the stretch factor +% 4\,|pt| of \cs{skip}\cs{footins}, the badness $100\times(5/4)^3\approx195$ +% is significantly less than the default $\cs{vbadness}=1000$.}, +%  +% someday we could face an underfull with some unusual settings of +% \!\maxdimen!, \!\skip!\!\footins! and/or \!\vbadness!. Therefore, we put a +% null vertical skip so that the real bottom of the footnotes, instead of +% the last baseline, is placed at the baseline of the box, to make the +% natural height of the box is \!\textheight! exactly. Note that this +% shifting \Scfnote{}s up will not make last baselines of footnotes among +% pages unaligned, because the last line have a strut. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@combinefootins#1#2{% + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox{% + \boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \unvbox#1\relax + \pcol@putfootins#2\unskip + \ifdim\belowfootnoteskip=\z@\else \vskip\belowfootnoteskip \fi}} +\def\pcol@putfootins#1{% + \vskip\skip#1\relax + \color@begingroup + \normalcolor + \footnoterule + \unvbox#1\relax + \color@endgroup \vskip\z@} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \subsection{Marginal Notes} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-mpar} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add this section ``Marginal Notes''.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@addmarginpar} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@addmarginpar} in +% \string\texttt{paracol} environments.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@addmarginpar} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to make a margin sharable by marginal notes from +% different columns.} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Fix the bug referring to \cs{@marbox} inappropriately.} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Add vertical shifting of marginal note to emulate of +% \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@addmarginpar} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep the original definition of \cs{@addmarginpar}.} +% \def\swap{\mathit{swap}} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@addmarginpar! is our own version of \!\@addmarginpar!, +% which \!\pcol@zparacol! makes \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@addmarginpar! +% keeping its original definition in \!\pcol@@addmarginpar!. Therefore, in +% an \env{paracol} environment, the \!\output! request made by \LaTeX's +% \!\marginpar! in the column $c$ and page $p$ is processed by +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar! through our own \!\output! routine being +% \!\pcol@output!, \!\pcol@specialoutput! and \LaTeX's \!\@specialoutput!. +% What we do in this macro are as follows; determine the margin which a +% marginal note goes to; temporarily modify the parameter +% $m_w=\!\marginparwidth!$ or $m_s=\!\marginparsep!$ according to the margin +% and the column; determine the position to place the marginal note +% consulting $\pp^m(p)=\!\pcol@mparbottom!$ obtained by +% \!\pcol@getcurrpage!: and update $\pp^m(p)$ according to the postion. +% +% First, there are the following parameters to determine the margin, and thus +% the value of $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}$ referred to in \LaTeX's +% \!\@addmarginpar! and meaning left if $\true$ or right if $\false$. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumi{(\arabic{enumi})} +% \item +% The macros \!\pcol@mpthreshold@l! and \!\pcol@mpthreshold@r! defined by +% \!\marginpar~threshold!\ give us the threshold of the column number to let +% columns less than it go to the left margin while those equal to or greater +% than it to the right, according to the \parapag{}e the column belongs to. +% Therefore, we let $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}=\true$ iff +% $c<\!\pcol@mpthreshold@l!\land c<\CL$ or $c<\!\pcol@mpthreshold@r!\land +% c\geq\CL$, as the fundamental setting. +% +% \item +% If $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapmarginpar}=\true$ because the specifier `|m|' is +% given to \!\twosided! explicitly or implicitly, the decision in (1) is +% reversed if $\page(p)\bmod2=0$, and then this decision is reversed again +% if $c\geq\CL$ and $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}=\false$ to mean $c$ is in a +% \npaired{} right \parapag{}e. The second reversal is done because +% $\page(p)$ is \emph{common} to both left and right \parapag{}es and is for +% the left page in usual cases without page number jumps. Therefore, +% $(\page(p)\bmod2)$ is for left \parapag{}es and thus for right counterparts +% the decision should be made by $((\page(p)+1)\bmod2)$ and thus the result +% should be reversed. +% +% \item +% If \CSIndex{if@reversemargin} is made $\true$ by \LaTeX's +% \!\reversemarginpar!, the decision made by (1) and then possibly reversed +% by (2) is finally reversed. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% Second, we calculate +% $$ +% D=\!\@tempdima!=\sum_{d=\Cfrom}^{\swap(c)-1}(w_{\swap(d)}+g_{\swap'(d)}) +% $$ +% where $x'=swap(x)$ is given by +% $\!\pcol@swapcolumn!\\\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>$ to let +% $x'=\Cto-(x-\Cfrom)-1$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}=\true$ and +% $\page(p)\bmod2=0$ or $x'=x$ otherwise, +% $\swap'(x)=\!\pcol@colsepid!\in\{\swap(x)-1,x\}$ according to swapped or +% not, $(\Cfrom,\Cto)\in\{(0,\CL),(\CL,\C)\}$ according to $c<\CL$ or not, +% and $\w_x$ and $\gap_x$ are the width of $x$-th column and gap given by +% $|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}x$ and $|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}x$ +% respectively. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% That is, $D$ is the distance from the left edge of the column $c$ to that +% of leftmost column in the (paralell-) +%  +% \Index{parallel-paging} +%  +% page in which $c$ resides. Then if $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}=\true$ to +% let the margial note go to the left margin, we add $D$ to +% $m_w=\!\marginparwidth!$ so that \LaTeX's \!\@addmarginpar! being +% \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! aligns the left edge of the marginal note at the +% point apart from the column's left edge by $(D+m_w)+m_s$ rather than +% $m_w+m_s$, or in other words $m_w+m_s$ apart from the left edge of the +% leftmost column. On the other hand if $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}=\false$, +% we add $\WT-(D+w_c)$ where $\WT$ is \!\textwidth!, being the distance from +% the right edge of the column $c$ to that of the rightmost column, to +% $m_s=\!\marginparsep!$ so that \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! aligns the left +% edge of the marginal note at the point apart from the column's right edge +% by $\WT-(D+w_c)+m_s$ rather than $m_s$, or in other words $m_s$ apart from +% the right edge of the rightmost column. +% +% Third, we let \Midx{\!\pcol@marbox!} be the first element of \!\@currlist! +% obtained by \!\@xnext! for the right marginal note if +% $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}=\false$, or \!\@currbox! for the left marginal +% note otherwise. Then we let $t=\!\@tempdima!$ be the distance from the +% top edge of the column to that of the marginal note, namely \!\@pageht! +% minus the height of \!\pcol@marbox! plus |\dimen|\!\@currbox! being +% downward shift amount optionally given by \!\marginnote!. We also let +% $h=\!\@tempdimb!$ be the height-plus-depth of the box \!\pcol@marbox! +% plus \!\marginparpush!, or in other words the vertical space the marginal +% note requires. Then we give $t$ and $h$ to \!\pcol@getmparbottom! to let +% \!\@mparbottom! have the bottom of the exisiting marginal text below which +% we put the margial text in \!\pcol@marbox!, and to let \!\pcol@mpblist! +% have the new list to be replaced with $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$ in +% $\pp^m(p)$. +% +% Forth, we update $\pp^m(p)$ with the new list in \!\pcol@mpblist! by a +% process similar to \!\pcol@setpageno! but with \!\pcol@setmpbelt! to scan +% the list of pages $\PPP$. +% +% Fifth, we shift down \!\pcol@marbox! by |\dimen|\!\@currbox! and, if the +% shift amount is greater than the height of the box and thus the height of +% shifting result is zero, decrement \!\@mparbottom! by the amount to +% deceive \LaTeX's \!\@addmarginpar! into believing \!\@mparbottom! is above +% the real one by the amount. In other words, by the decrement we let +% \!\@addmarginpar! see the top edge of the shifted marginal note in the +% box, rather than that of the box itself, for the placement with +% \!\@mparbottom!. +% +% Finally, we invoke \LaTeX's original \!\@addmarginpar! being +% \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! to put the marginal note according to +% \CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}, temporarily modified \!\marginparsep! and +% \!\marginparwidth!, and \!\@mparbottom!. Note that since +% \!\pcol@zparacol! lets $\CSIndex{if@twocolumn}\~=\true$, +% \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! determine the margin only by +% \CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}. Also note that it can be $\!\@mparbottom!>t$ +% (before decrement with the positive shift amount) to mean the marginal +% note should be shifted down from its natural position, and if so +% \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! will give us a warning as the correct consequence +% of the placement. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Marginal Notes + +\def\pcol@addmarginpar{% + \pcol@getcurrpage \@firstcolumntrue + \ifnum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncolleft + \let\reserved@a\z@ \let\reserved@b\pcol@ncolleft + \ifnum\pcol@mpthreshold@l>\pcol@currcol\else \@firstcolumnfalse \fi + \else + \let\reserved@a\pcol@ncolleft \let\reserved@b\pcol@ncol + \ifnum\pcol@mpthreshold@r>\pcol@currcol\else \@firstcolumnfalse \fi + \fi + \ifpcol@swapmarginpar + \ifodd\c@page\else + \if@firstcolumn \@firstcolumnfalse \else \@firstcolumntrue \fi + \fi + \ifpcol@paired\else \ifnum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncolleft\else + \if@firstcolumn \@firstcolumnfalse \else \@firstcolumntrue \fi + \fi\fi + \fi + \if@reversemargin + \if@firstcolumn \@firstcolumnfalse \else \@firstcolumntrue \fi + \fi + \pcol@swapcolumn\pcol@currcol\count@\reserved@a\reserved@b + \@tempdima\z@ + \@tempcnta\reserved@a \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\count@\do{% + \pcol@swapcolumn\@tempcnta\@tempcntb\reserved@a\reserved@b + \advance\@tempdima\csname pcol@columnwidth\number\@tempcntb\endcsname\relax + \advance\@tempdima\csname pcol@columnsep\pcol@colsepid\endcsname\relax + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}% + \if@firstcolumn \advance\marginparwidth\@tempdima + \else + \advance\marginparsep\textwidth \advance\marginparsep-\@tempdima + \advance\marginparsep-\columnwidth + \fi + \expandafter\@xnext\@currlist\@@\pcol@marbox\@gtempa + \if@firstcolumn\let\pcol@marbox\@currbox \fi + \@tempdima\@pageht \advance\@tempdima-\ht\pcol@marbox + \advance\@tempdima\dimen\@currbox + \@tempdimb\ht\pcol@marbox \advance\@tempdimb\dp\pcol@marbox + \advance\@tempdimb\marginparpush + \pcol@getmparbottom\@tempdima\@tempdimb + \begingroup + \@tempcnta\pcol@page \advance\@tempcnta-\pcol@basepage + \edef\reserved@a{\pcol@pages\pcol@currpage}% + \global\let\pcol@pages\@empty \global\let\pcol@currpage\@empty + \let\@elt\pcol@setmpbelt \reserved@a + \endgroup + \ifdim\dimen\@currbox=\z@\else + \ifdim\dimen\@currbox>\ht\pcol@marbox + \advance\@mparbottom-\dimen\pcol@marbox + \fi + \setbox\pcol@marbox\hbox{\lower\dimen\@currbox\box\pcol@marbox}% + \fi + \pcol@@addmarginpar} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getmparbottom} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to find the space where a marginal note is placed.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getmparbottom@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to find the space where a marginal note is placed.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getmpbelt} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to find the space where a marginal note is placed.} +% \changes{v1.33-1}{2016/11/19} +% {Fix the bug by which $t_k$ such that $t_k\geq t$ and $t_k-t\geq h$ +% but $t_k-b_{k-1}\$ is solely used in +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar!\footnote{ +%  +% Thus giving $t$ and $h$ as arguments is not necessary but we dare to do +% it.} +%  +% to let $B=\!\@mparbottom!$ point the bottom of the marginal note below +% which a new marginal note $m$, whose natural top is at $t$ and occupancy +% height is $h$, in the current column $c$ and the page $p$ is placed, or 0 +% if the side margin has had no marginal notes yet. It is also \!\def!ines +% $M'=\Midx{\!\pcol@mpblist!}$ having $\mpar(t',t'{+}h)$ for the new marginal +% note $m$ placed at $t'$ in it and being replaced with one of +% $\mpb_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$ in $\pp^m(p)$ by \!\pcol@setmpbelt!. +% +% First we examine if $\pp^m(p)=\!\pcol@mparbottom!$ is empty and if so we +% simply let $B=0$ and $M'=(\mpar(t,t+h))$ because there are no marginal +% notes in the page $p$ at all. Otherwise we obtain +% $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},\;x\in\{l,r\}}$ in \!\reserved@a! according +% to the side margin to which the new marginal note $m$ goes to, i.e., +% according to $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}$ and $c<\CL$ or not, by +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom@i! giving it the body of $\pp^m(p)$ by +% \!\expandafter!. Then we apply $\!\pcol@getmpbelt!$ to each +% $\mpar(t_i,b_i)\in M$ to have +% $t_k=\min\Set{t_i}{t_i\geq{t},\;t_i-\max(t,b_{i-1})\geq{h}}$ and let +% $B=b_{k-1}$ and +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% M'&=&(\mpar(t_1,b_1),\;\ldots,\;\mpar(t_{k-1},b_{k-1}),\; +% \mpar(\max(t,B),\,\max(t,B)+h),\\ +% &&\phantom{\LP} +% \mpar(t_k,b_k),\;\ldots,\;\mpar(t_n,b_n)) +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% where $n=\Abs{M}$, assuming $b_0=0$. That is, we try to find the first +% avilable gap between marginal notes below $t$ to accommodate the +% marginal note $m$ of $h$ tall. Then if such $t_k$ is not found because +% $t>t_n$ to mean $m$ appears below the last marginal note as in natural +% cases, or $t_i-\max(t,b_{i-1})t$ to mean +% there are no available gaps, we let $B=t_n$ and +% $M'=(M,\mpar(\max(t,B),\,\max(t,B)+h))$ to place $m$ at the bottom. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@getmparbottom#1#2{% + \global\@mparbottom\z@ + \ifx\pcol@mparbottom\@empty + \begingroup + \@tempdimc#2\relax \advance\@tempdimc#1\relax \let\@elt\relax + \xdef\pcol@mpblist{\@elt{\number#1}{\number\@tempdimc}}% + \endgroup + \else + \expandafter\pcol@getmparbottom@i\pcol@mparbottom + \begingroup + \@tempdima#1\relax \@tempdimb#2\relax \@tempswafalse + \let\@elt\pcol@getmpbelt \global\let\pcol@mpblist\@empty \reserved@a + \if@tempswa\else + \ifdim\@tempdima<\@mparbottom \@tempdima\@mparbottom \fi + \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima + \@cons\pcol@mpblist{{\number\@tempdima}{\number\@tempdimb}}% + \fi + \endgroup + \fi} +\def\pcol@getmparbottom@i#1#2#3#4{% + \ifnum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncolleft + \if@firstcolumn \def\reserved@a{#1}\else\def\reserved@a{#2}\fi + \else + \if@firstcolumn \def\reserved@a{#3}\else\def\reserved@a{#4}\fi + \fi} +\def\pcol@getmpbelt#1#2{% + \ifdim#1sp<\@tempdima + \global\@mparbottom#2sp\relax \@cons\pcol@mpblist{{#1}{#2}}% + \ifdim\@tempdima<#2sp\relax \@tempdima#2sp\relax \fi + \else + \@tempdimc\@tempdima \advance\@tempdimc\@tempdimb + \ifdim#1sp<\@tempdimc + \@tempdima#2sp\relax \global\@mparbottom#2sp\relax + \@cons\pcol@mpblist{{#1}{#2}}% + \else + \@cons\pcol@mpblist{{\number\@tempdima}{\number\@tempdimc}\@elt{#1}{#2}}% + \@tempswatrue + \def\pcol@getmpbelt##1##2{\@cons\pcol@mpblist{{##1}{##2}}} + \fi + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setmpbelt} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to update $\pi^m(p)$.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setmpbelt@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to update $\pi^m(p)$.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@setmpbelt! +% \Arg{\pp^p(q)}\<\pp^i(q)\>\<\pp^f(q)\>\Arg{\pp^s(q)}\Arg{\pp^m(q)}$ is +% used solely in \!\pcol@addmarginpar! and is applied to $\PPP$ to update an +% element $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x\in{l,r}}$ in $\pp^m(p)$ with +% $M'=\!\pcol@mpblist!$ given by \!\pcol@getmparbottom!. The structure of +% the macro is similar to \!\pcol@setpnoelt! to upadate $\pp^p(q)$ s.t.\ +% $q\geq p$, but in this macro the target of the update is only $p$. Then +% for $q=p$, we invoke \!\pcol@setmpbelt@i! giving it the body of $\pp^m(p)$ +% being +% $\Arg{\mpb_L^l}\Arg{\mpb_L^r}\Arg{\mpb_R^l}\Arg{\mpb_R^r}$, or +% $\<\emptyset\>\<\emptyset\>\<\emptyset\>\<\emptyset\>$ if +% $\pp^m(p)=\emptyset$, to obtain what $\pp^m(p)$ should have in +% $\pp_{\mathit{new}}^m(p)=\!\reserved@a!$ in which $\mpb_X^x$ is replaced +% with $M'$, where $X=L$ or $X=R$ if $c<\CL$ or not respectively, and $x=l$ +% or $x=r$ if $\CSIndex{if@firstcolumn}=\true$ or not respectively, and then +% update $\pp^m(p)$ by $\!\pcol@defcurrpage! +% \Arg{\pp^p(p)}\<\pp^i(p)\>\<\pp^f(p)\>\Arg{\pp^s(p)} +% \Arg{\pp_{\mathit{new}}^m(q)}$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setmpbelt#1#2#3#4#5{% + {\let\@elt\relax \xdef\pcol@pages{\pcol@pages\pcol@currpage}}% + \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@ + \def\reserved@a{#5}% + \ifx\reserved@a\@empty \pcol@setmpbelt@i{}{}{}{}\else \pcol@setmpbelt@i#5\fi + \pcol@defcurrpage{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{\reserved@a}% + \else \gdef\pcol@currpage{\@elt{#1}#2#3{#4}{#5}}% + \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\m@ne} +\def\pcol@setmpbelt@i#1#2#3#4{% + \ifnum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncolleft + \if@firstcolumn \def\reserved@a{{\pcol@mpblist}{#2}{#3}{#4}}% + \else \def\reserved@a{{#1}{\pcol@mpblist}{#3}{#4}}% + \fi + \else + \if@firstcolumn \def\reserved@a{{#1}{#2}{\pcol@mpblist}{#4}}% + \else \def\reserved@a{{#1}{#2}{#3}{\pcol@mpblist}}% + \fi + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mparbottom@zero} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to give the default of \cs{pcol@mparbottom@out}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mparbottom@out} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep the last elements of $\pi^m(p_t)$ at +% \cs{end}\string\texttt{\char`\{paracol\char`\}.}} +%  +% The macro $\Uidx\mpboutz=\!\pcol@mparbottom@zero!$ is used in +% \!\@outputpage!, \!\pcol@getmparbottom@last! and \!\pcol@output@end! to +% give the default value of $\Uidx\mpbout=\!\pcol@mparbottom@out!$ with +% $\mpar(0,0)$ for all elements $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x=\{l,r\}}$ +% to mean a page has no marginal notes carrying over from the preceding +% \env{paracol} environments. +% +% As for $\mpbout$, besides the top level initialization to make it +% $\mpboutz$, it is updated in \!\pcol@output@end! through macros +% \!\pcol@getmparbottom@last! and \!\pcol@bias@mpbout! to have the last +% element of each $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x=\{l,r\}}$ in +% $\pp^m(\ptop)$ with transformation from coordinates of columns to that of +% text area, or directly with $\mpboutz$ if the \lpage{} will not have +% \postenv. The resulting $\mpbout$ is at first used in \!\pcol@output@end! +% itself through \!\pcol@do@mpbout! to let \!\@mparbottom! have the value +% $b$ of $\mpar(t,b)$ in $\mpb_L^l$ or $\mpb_L^r$ according to the side +% margin which marginal notes in \postenv{} goes to. +% +% Then $\mpbout$ is passed to the next \env{paracol} environment if it +% resides in the page where the previous environment also resides, to be +% referred to by \!\pcol@output@start! which also performs +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout! and \!\pcol@bias@mpbout! to let $\pp^m(0)$ have the +% lists according to $\mpbout$ and $\!\@mparbottom!$ which can be modified +% in \postenv{} of the previous environment or in other word +% in \preenv{} of starting envionment. By this setting of $\pp^m(0)$, +% marginal note placement in the \spage{} is aware of the marginal notes +% having been placed in previous environments and in \preenv{} and thus can +% correctly examines if a marginal note to be added in a margin collide +% the last one in the margin. On the other hand, if the \postenv{} +% encounters a page break before a new environment starts, our own +% \!\@outputpage! should be invoked at the page break to let +% $\mpbout=\mpboutz$ because the marginal notes in previous environments do +% not afffect those in the new environment. +% +% Note that $\mpbout$ is also referred to and updated by +% \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@i! and \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii! because they are used in +% \!\pcol@bias@mpbout! and \!\pcol@getmparbottom@last! through +% \!\pcol@do@mpb@all!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\gdef\pcol@mparbottom@zero{{\@elt{0}{0}}{\@elt{0}{0}}{\@elt{0}{0}}{\@elt{0}{0}}} +\global\let\pcol@mparbottom@out\pcol@mparbottom@zero + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpbout} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to do specified operations on $\string\cal{M}$ and its +% element $M_L^x$ acccording to the side margin for marginal notes +% outside \texttt{paracol} environments.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpbout@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to do specified operations on $\string\cal{M}$ and its +% element $M_L^x$ acccording to the side margin for marginal notes +% outside \texttt{paracol} environments.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpbout@whole} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to do a specified operation on $\string\cal{M}$.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpbout@elem} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to do a specified operation on an element $M_L^x$ in +% $\string\cal{M}$.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@do@mpbout! is used in \!\pcol@output@start! and +% \!\pcol@output@end! to perform operations specified by +% \!\pcol@do@mpbout@whole! and \!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem!. The macro just +% invokes \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i! giving it all +% $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x\in\{l,r\}}$ by \!\expandafter!. +% +% Then \!\pcol@do@mpbout@i! determines the side margin $x\in\{l,r\}$ letting +% $x=l$ iff $\CSIndex{if@mparswitch}=\true$, $\page(p)\bmod2=0$ and +% $\CSIndex{if@reversemargin}=\false$, to invoke \!\pcol@do@mpbout@whole! +% giving it all $M$ but $\mpb_L^x$ whose sole element $\mpar(t,b)$ +% may be modified by $\!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem!\!\@elt!\Arg{t}\Arg{b}$. +% +% In \!\pcol@output@start!, \!\pcol@do@mpbout@whole! is to \!\xdef!ine +% $\mpbout$ with all $M$ and \!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem! is expanded to +% $\mpar(0,B)$, where $B=\!\@mparbottom!$, regardless of $\mpb_L^x$ so that +% it is replaced with $(\mpar(0,B))$ in the modified $\mpbout$ keeping other +% elements unchanged. In \!\pcol@output@end!, \!\pcol@do@mpbout@whole! is +% to throw all $M$ away into a \!\hbox! while \!\pcol@do@mpbout@elem! lets +% $B=b$ so that the bottom of the last marginal note in the side margin +% specified by $x$ is passed to \postenv{} through \!\@mparbottom!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@do@mpbout{\expandafter\pcol@do@mpbout@i\pcol@mparbottom@out} +\def\pcol@do@mpbout@i#1#2#3#4{\@tempcnta\@ne + \if@mparswitch \ifodd\c@page\else \@tempcnta\m@ne \fi\fi + \if@reversemargin \@tempcnta-\@tempcnta \fi + \ifnum\@tempcnta<\z@ + \pcol@do@mpbout@whole{\pcol@do@mpbout@elem#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}% + \else + \pcol@do@mpbout@whole{#1}{\pcol@do@mpbout@elem#2}{#3}{#4}% + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bias@mpbout} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to perform coordinate transformation of the elements in +% $\string\cal{M}$.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bias@mpbout@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to perform coordinate transformation of the elements in +% $\string\cal{M}$.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout!\Arg{y}$ is used in \!\pcol@output@start! +% with $-y$ being the heigh-plus-depth of \preenv{}, in +% \!\pcol@output@end! with $y$ being that of \spanning{} in the \lpage, and +% in $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last!\Arg{y}$ with its argument $y$. The macro +% modifies $\mpar(t,b)$ in all $M\in\Set{\mpb_X^x}{X\in\{L,R\},x\in\{l,r\}}$ +% of $\mpbout$ so that they have $\mpar(t{+}y,b{+}y)$ for the transformation +% from text area coordinates to columns in the first and third, while for +% the reverse transformation in the second, by invoking \!\pcol@do@mpb@all! +% giving it $\mpbout$ and letting \!\reserved@a! have +% $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}$. That is, +% $\!\pcol@bias@mpbout@i!\Arg{y}\!\@elt!\Arg{t}\Arg{b}\!\@nil!$ is then +% invoked in \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii! with $t$ and $b$ from $\mpar(t,b)$ in +% each $M$, and then it \!\def!ines \!\reserved@b! with $\mpar(t{+}y,b{+}y)$ +% so that updated $M$ has it. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bias@mpbout#1{\def\reserved@a{\pcol@bias@mpbout@i{#1}}% + \pcol@do@mpb@all\pcol@mparbottom@out} +\def\pcol@bias@mpbout@i#1\@elt#2#3\@nil{% + \dimen@#2sp\relax \advance\dimen@#1\relax + \dimen@ii#3sp\relax \advance\dimen@ii#1\relax + \def\reserved@b{\@elt{\number\dimen@}{\number\dimen@ii}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getmparbottom@last} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to let $\string\cal{M}$ have the occupancy information of +% the bottom marginal note in each margin.} +% \begingroup\let\small\footnotesize +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to let $\string\cal{M}$ have the occupancy information of +% the bottom marginal note in each margin.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last!\Arg{y}$ is used solely in +% \!\pcol@output@end! to let +% $\mpbout=\Arg{m_L^l}\Arg{m_L^r}\Arg{m_R^l}\Arg{m_R^r}$, where +% $m_X^x=\mpar(t_n,b_n)\in\mpb_X^x$, $n=\Abs{\mpb_X^x}$ asuming +% $\mpar(t_0,b_0)={\mpar}(y,y)$, and $y$ is the negative counterpart of the +% height-plus-depth of the \spanning{} in the \lpage. Therefore, $\mpbout$ +% is let have the occupancy information of the last marginal note if any, or +% the top edge of text area otherwise, in each margin. +% +% The macro at first examines if $\pp^m(\ptop)=\emptyset$ and, if so, lets +% all elements in $\mpbout$ have $(\mpar(y,y))$ by letting it $\mpboutz$ and +% then adding $y$ to each $t=b=0$ by \!\pcol@bias@mpbout! giving it $y$. +% Otherwise, i.e., if $\pp^m(\ptop)\neq\emptyset$, it invokes +% \!\pcol@do@mpb@all! giving it $\pp^m(\ptop)$ and letting \!\reserved@a! +% have $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i!\Arg{y}$. That is, +% $\!\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i!\Arg{y}\~\mpar(t_1,b_1)\cdots +% \mpar(t_n,b_n)\!\@nil!$ is then invoked in \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii! for each +% $\mpb_X^x$ to let \!\reserved@b! have $\mpar(y,y)$ at first and then to +% let it have $\mpar(t_i,b_i)$ for all $i\in[1,n]$. Therefore, +% \!\reserved@b! should finally have $\mpar(t_n,b_n)$ assuming $t_0=b_0=y$, +% and then becomes $m_X^x$. +% \end{macro}\endgroup +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@getmparbottom@last#1{% + \ifx\pcol@mparbottom\@empty + \global\let\pcol@mparbottom@out\pcol@mparbottom@zero + \pcol@bias@mpbout{#1}% + \else + \def\reserved@a{\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i{#1}}% + \pcol@do@mpb@all\pcol@mparbottom + \fi} +\def\pcol@getmparbottom@last@i#1#2\@nil{% + \edef\reserved@b{\@elt{\number#1}{\number#1}}% + \def\@elt##1##2{\def\reserved@b{\@elt{##1}{##2}}}% + #2\let\@elt\relax} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpb@all} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{pcol@bias@mpbout} and +% \cs{pcol@getmparbottom@last}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpb@all@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{pcol@bias@mpbout} and +% \cs{pcol@getmparbottom@last}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{pcol@bias@mpbout} and +% \cs{pcol@getmparbottom@last}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@do@mpb@all!\$ is used in \!\pcol@bias@mpbout! with +% $L=\mpbout$ and in \!\pcol@getmparbottom@last! with $L=\pp^m(\ptop)$, to +% process all four elements $\mpb_X^x$ in $L$ applying \!\reserved@a! to +% each of them and to let $\mpbout$ have the result through \!\reserved@b!. +% The macro simply invokes \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@i! giving it the body of $L$ +% by \!\expandafter!. Then $\!\pcol@do@mpb@all@i! +% \Arg{\mpb_L^l}\Arg{\mpb_L^r}\Arg{\mpb_R^l}\Arg{\mpb_R^r}$ initialize +% $\mpbout=\emptyset$ and then invokes \!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii! four times +% giving it each $\mpb_X^x$. Then +% $\!\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii!\,\mpar(t_1,b_1)\cdots\~{\mpar}(t_n,b_n)\!\@nil!$ +% invokes \!\reserved@a! giving it all of $\mpar(t_i,b_1)$ at once to +% process them and to have the result in \!\reserved@b! being added to +% $\mpbout$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@do@mpb@all#1{\expandafter\pcol@do@mpb@all@i#1} +\def\pcol@do@mpb@all@i#1#2#3#4{\begingroup \let\@elt\relax + \gdef\pcol@mparbottom@out{}% + \pcol@do@mpb@all@ii#1\@nil\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii#2\@nil + \pcol@do@mpb@all@ii#3\@nil\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii#4\@nil + \endgroup} +\def\pcol@do@mpb@all@ii#1\@nil{% + \reserved@a#1\@nil + \xdef\pcol@mparbottom@out{\pcol@mparbottom@out{\reserved@b}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Synchronization} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-sync} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@sync} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add measurement of $D_T$.} +% \changes{v1.2-3}{2013/05/11} +% {Modify the action on the page overflow to return from \cs{output} +% without flushing so that the page is broken outside \cs{output} to +% place top floats above the synchronization point set in the next +% page.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add pre-flushing column height check taking page-wise +% footnotes into account.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the initialization of +% $\cs{ifpcol@dfloats}\EQ\string\mathit{false}$ before invoking +% \cs{pcol@measurecolumn}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@sync! is invoked solely from \!\pcol@output@switch! for +% \exsync{} in the following three cases in which +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}\lor\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\true$ commonly. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}\land\lnot\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}$ to mean ordinary +% \sync{}ed \cswitch. +% +% \item +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}\land\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}$ to mean \pfcheck. +% +% \item +% $\lnot\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}\land\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}$ to mean page +% flushing. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% In any cases\footnote{ +%  +% In the last case of page flushing, invoking \!\pcol@flushcolumn! is +% redundant because it is made $p=\ptop$ by \pfcheck{} always preceding the +% flushing, but the invocation is harmless.}, +%  +% first we invoke \!\pcol@flushcolumn! for all $c\In0\C$ to flush the +% \ccolpage{} of $c$ into $\S_c$ if the \colpage{} is not in $\ptop$, i.e., +% $\cc_c(\vb^p)<\ptop$ and then, if we have deferred floats, to ship out +% following \fpage{}s up to $\ptop-1$ into $\S_c$ and to place them in +% $\ptop$. This float placement in $\ptop$ is only for top and bottom +% floats in \sync{}ed \cswitch{}, while a \fcolumn{} may be made in other +% cases. Then we ship out all pages $p$ such that $p<\ptop$ by +% \!\pcol@outputcolumns! giving argument 1. After that, we obtain the +% \pctext{} of $\ptop$ by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo!. +% +% Next, we measure the vertical sizes of the contents in the \ccolpage{} of +% $c$ which is now in $\ptop$ for all $c\In0\C$ by \!\pcol@measurecolumn! as +% follows, where $h(x)$ and $d(x)$ are the height and depth of an object $x$ +% respectively. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% \sigma&=&\rlap{\!\floatsep!}\hskip8em +% \sigma_t=\cases{\cc_c(\tf)& $\cc_c(\tf)<\infty$\cr +% \!\textfloatsep!&$\cc_c(\tf)=\infty$}\qquad +% \sigma_b=\!\textfloatsep!\\ +% \Uidx\fc(t)&=&\rlap{$\displaystyle(\cc_c(\tl)\neq())$}\hskip8em +% \fc(m)=(\cc_c(\vb)\neq\!\vbox!|{}|)\\ +% \fc(f)&=&\rlap{$\displaystyle(\cc_c(\ft)\neq\bot)$}\hskip8em +% \fc(b)=\fc(b')=(\cc_c(\bl)\neq())\\ +% \Uidx\Fc(X)&=&\rlap{$\displaystyle\exists x\in X:\fc(x)$}\hskip8em +% f_b=\CSIndex{ifpcol@bfbottom}\\ +% \Uidx\vc(t)&=&\!\skip!{\cdot}\cc_c(\vb)= +% \sum_{\Sub{\phi\in\cc_c(\tl)}}(h(\phi)+d(\phi))+ +% (\Abs{\cc_c(\tl)}-1)\cdot\sigma+\sigma_t\\ +% \vc(m)&=&h(\cc_c(\vb))+d(\cc_c(\vb))\\ +% \vc(f)&=&h(\cc_c(\ft))+d(\cc_c(\ft))\\ +% \vc(b)&=&\sum_{\Sub{\phi\in\cc_c(\bl)}}(h(\phi)+d(\phi))+ +% (\Abs{\cc_c(\bl)}-1)\cdot\sigma+\sigma_b\\ +% \vc(b')&=&\vc(b)+\sigma_b\\ +% \pd_c&=&\cases{\cc_c(\pd)&$\fc(m)$\cr +% \infty &$\lnot \fc(m)$}\\ +% \Uidx\size_c(x)&=&\cases{\vc(x)&$\fc(x)$\cr +% 0 &$\lnot \fc(x)$}\\ +% \Uidx\Size_c(X)&=&\cases{\displaystyle\sum_{x\in X}\size_c(x)&$\Fc(X)$\cr +% -\infty& $\lnot \Fc(X)$}\\ +% \Uidx\VT&=&\!\@tempdima!=\max_{0\leq c<\C}\{\Size_c(\{t,m\})\}\\ +% \Uidx\VB&=&\!\@tempdimb!=\max_{0\leq c<\C}\{\size_c(f)+\size_c(b)\}\\ +% \Uidx\VP&=&\!\@pageht!=\max_{0\leq c<\C}\{\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b\})\}\\ +% \Uidx\VPP&=&\!\pcol@colht!=\max_{0\leq c<\C}\{\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'\})\}\\ +% \Uidx\DT&=&\!\@tempdimc!=\min\Set{\pd_c}{\Size_c{\{t,m\}=\VT}}\\ +% \Uidx\dc&=&\cases{ +% 0& $\fc(b)\land(\lnot \fc(f)\lor f_b)$\cr +% d(\cc_c(\ft))& $\fc(f)\land(\lnot \fc(b)\lor\lnot f_b)$\cr +% d(\cc_c(\pd))& $\lnot \fc(b)\land\lnot \fc(f)$}\\ +% \Uidx\DP&=&\!\@pagedp!=\min\Set{\dc}{\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'\})=\VPP}\\ +% \Uidx\cmax&=&\!\@tempcntb!=\ARG\max_{0\leq c<\C}\{\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b\})\} +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% That is, $\VT$ is the maximum of combined vertical size (height plus +% depth) of the top floats and the main vertical list, $\VB$ is that of +% the footnotes and bottom floats, and $\VP$ is that of all items. +% $\VPP$ is similar to $\VP$ but we add \!\textfloatsep! to the size of +% bottom floats. Note that $\VT$, $\VP$ and $\VPP$ are $-\infty$ if any +% \colpage{}s don't have corresponding items, while $\VB=0$ if so. +% Also note that $\cmax$ is the ordinal of the column whose size is $\VP$. +% +% $\DT$ and $\DP$ are the minimum $\pd_c$ and $\dc$ respectively among those +% gives $\VT$ and $\VPP$ respectively, where $\pd_c$ is $\cc_c(\pd)$ if +% $f_m=\true$ or $\infty$ otherwise, and $\dc$ is 0 if $c$ has bottom float, +% or the depth of the last footnote if any and without any bottom float, or +% $\cc_c(\pd)$ otherwise. The reason why $\DT$ and $\DP$ have minimums is +% that they are set into \!\prevdepth! for the items just following the +% \sync{}ation point, and thus a smaller value results in a larger interline +% skip and the special value $-1000\,|pt|$ to inhibit the skip by, e.g., +% \!\nointerlineskip!, is given the highest priority. +% +% Note that $\VPP$ and $\DP$ are only for the \lpage{} and thus referred to +% by \!\pcol@output@end! to close the environment, and the former is done by +% \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! if it works on the page. The reason why we add +% \!\textfloatsep! to $\VPP$ is to make the last page well separated from +% the \postenv{} if the tallest column, taking the addition into account, +% has bottom floats. Also note that we let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\false$ before scanning columns with +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! so that the switch becomes $\true$ after the scan +% iff a column has deferred floats (in the \lpage{}). +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Synchronization + +\def\pcol@sync{% + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do\pcol@flushcolumn + \pcol@outputcolumns\@ne + \pcol@getcurrpinfo{\global\c@page}{\global\@colht}{\global\topskip}% + \@tempdima-\maxdimen \@tempdimb-\maxdimen \pcol@colht-\maxdimen + \@pageht-\maxdimen \@tempdimc\maxdimen \@pagedp\maxdimen \@tempcntb\z@ + \pcol@dfloatsfalse + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do\pcol@measurecolumn +% \end{macrocode} +% +% As described above, any items can be empty, naturally for top floats, +% footnotes and bottom floats, but also including main vertical lists if the +% \ccolpage{}s were not in $\ptop$ before the invocation of +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn!. Moreover, all main vertical lists can be empty if +% all \lcolpage{}s just have started (by \!\newpage!, for example). More +% weirdly, the case of all-empty main vertical lists can be accompanied with +% other non-empty items when columns have floats or footnotes which cannot +% be in $\ptop-1$ but are found their places in $\ptop$. +% +% Taking it into account that any items can be empty and the other item +% of \Scfnote{}s, we have to determine whether the following two operations +% are taken; invocation of \!\pcol@synccolumn! for each \colpage{} to set a +% \sync{}ation point or to add an infinite stretch (and shrink) to its +% bottom; and the examination of the height of each \colpage{}, taking the +% \sync{}ation point to be set into account, to tell the necessity of +% explicit page break with $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\true$. For the latter +% we calculate the examination target $V=\!\@tempdimb!$ to be compared with +% $\pp^h(\ptop)$, while for the former we determine the value of a switch +% $f=\CSIndex{if@tempswa}$ so that we invoke \!\pcol@synccolumn! iff +% $f=\true$ and $V\geq0$. +% +% For \sync{}ed \cswitch{} with $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\false$, we let +% $f=(\VT\geq0)$ to mean at least one \colpage{} has a top float or +% non-empty main vertical list, i.e., $\Fc(\{t,m\})={\true}$ for some +% $c\In0\C$. That is if $\VT<0$, since the next items added to all +% \colpage{}s are placed at the top of the page\footnote{ +%  +% In usual cases, but it can mean some of them have negative vertical +% sizes. Even though we can detect such a very unlikely special case, it is +% very tough to define the reasonable \sync{}ation point above the top of +% $\ptop$. Therefore, we assume the point is at the top of $\ptop$ and thus +% do nothing.}, +%  +% we don't need to set \sync{}ation points in them. As for $V$, we let +% $V=\max(\VT,0)+\max(\VB,0)+v^f$ where $v^f$ is the sum of +% height-plus-depth of $\pp^f(\ptop)$ and $\!\skip!{\cdot}\pp^f(\ptop)$ if +% $\ptop$ has \Scfnote{}s, or 0 otherwise\footnote{ +%  +% In the real implementation, $V=-\infty$ if $\VT=\VB=-\infty$ and no +% \Scfnote{}s are presented, but this difference does not affect the +% decisoins because $f\land(V\geq0)=(\VT<0)\land(V\geq0)=\false$ and +% $V\leq\pp^f(\ptop)$ with either $V=0$ or $V=-\infty$.}. +%  +% Note that it can be $\VP+v^f\leq\pp^h(\ptop)<\VT+\VB+v^f=V$ to mean +% setting the \sync{}ation point at $\VT$ below $\ptop$'s top edge would +% push bottom stuff beyond its bottom edge and thus we need an explicit page +% break to place the point at the top of $\ptop+1$ (in usual cases). +% +% For \pfcheck{} or page flushing with $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\true$ on +% the other hand, we let $f=\lnot\!\pcol@sync!$ to invoke \!\pcol@synccolumn! +% only for page flushing and thus not for \pfcheck{}. As for $V$, we let +% $V'=\VPP$ or $V'=\VP$ according as we working on \lpage{} or not, and +% then let $V=\max(V',0)+v^f$ or $V=V'$ according as $\ptop$ has \Scfnote{}s +% or not. That is, we have to invoke \!\pcol@synccolumn! unless $\ptop$ is +% perfectly empty. +% +% Then if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\false$ and +% $\max(V,\;V-D'_T+\VE)>\pp^h(\ptop)$ where $D'_T=\DT$ if $0\leq\DT<\infty$ or +% 0 otherwise, or $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\true$ and +% $V>\pp^h(\ptop)$\footnote{ +%  +% The examination is redundant in page flushing with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\false$ because it is assured that no overflow +% happens in any \colpage{} by \pfcheck{} and explicit page breaking, but is +% not harmful.}, +%  +% we flush the page. That is, if the condition above holds, +% we let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\true$ and $d=\!\pcol@nextcol!={\cmax}$ to +% tell \!\pcol@switchcol! or \!\pcol@flushclear! to make an explicit page +% break in the column $\cmax$ from which we restart, and $f=\false$ to skip +% \!\pcol@synccolumn! to postpone the \exsync{}. Note that the bias +% $\VE=\!\pcol@@ensurevspace!$ in \sync{}ed \cswitch{} is to avoid breaking a +% \colpage{} just below the \sync{}ation point due to too small space below +% the point, less than \!\baselineskip! in default but can be other +% threshold explicitly defined by \!\ensurevspace!. That is, +% since $V-\DT+k\!\baselineskip!$ usually means the vertical position at +% which $k$-th baseline below the \sync{}ation point is placed, the flushing +% condition with $\VE=k\!\baselineskip!$ ensures that the page is flushed +% iff the space below the point cannot accommodate $k$ lines. Also note that +% necessary flushing with $V>\pp^h(p)$ assuredly takes place even when +% $\DT$ is unusually large and/or $\VE$ is negative to make $-\DT+\VE<0$. +% +% Finally if $V\geq0$ and $f=\true$, we invoke \!\pcol@synccolumn! for each +% column $c\In0\C$ to set a \sync{}ation point in it or to add an infinite +% stretch (and shrink) at its bottom for flushing. +%  +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Modify the flushing condition of synchronized column switching from +% $V\GT\pi^h(p)$ to $\max(V,V-D_T+V_E)\GT\pi^h(p)$ to avoid page +% break just below the synchronization point as much as possible.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \@tempswatrue \global\pcol@flushfalse + \ifpcol@clear + \ifpcol@lastpage \@tempdimb\pcol@colht \else \@tempdimb\@pageht \fi + \ifpcol@sync \@tempswafalse \fi + \else + \ifdim\@tempdima<\z@ \@tempswafalse + \else\ifdim\@tempdimb<\z@ \@tempdimb\@tempdima + \else \advance\@tempdimb\@tempdima + \fi\fi + \fi + \ifpcol@scfnote\ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \ifdim\@tempdimb<\z@ \@tempdimb\z@ \fi + \advance\@tempdimb\ht\pcol@footins \advance\@tempdimb\dp\pcol@footins + \advance\@tempdimb\skip\pcol@footins + \fi\fi + \dimen@\@tempdimb + \ifpcol@clear\else \ifdim\dimen@<\z@\else + \ifdim\@tempdimc=\maxdimen\else \ifdim\@tempdimc<\z@\else + \advance\dimen@-\@tempdimc + \fi\fi + \advance\dimen@\pcol@@ensurevspace + \ifdim\dimen@<\@tempdimb \dimen@\@tempdimb \fi + \fi\fi + \ifdim\dimen@>\@colht + \global\pcol@flushtrue \@tempswafalse \pcol@nextcol\@tempcntb + \fi + \ifdim\@tempdimb<\z@\else \if@tempswa + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do\pcol@synccolumn + \fi\fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@flushcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@maxpage} as \cs{pcol@toppage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add \cs{vfil} at the bottom of flushed column-page.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Change order of the garbage collection of \cs{pcol@currfoot} and +% \cs{pcol@getcurrfoot}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of \cs{pcol@getcurrfoot}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add operations for page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the examination of $\kappa_c(\rho)\EQ\infty$ to cope with a +% rare-case interaction of pre-flushing column height check and float +% columns in last pages.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Save \cs{ifpcol@lastpage} into \cs{ifpcol@lastpagesave} and turn +% \cs{ifpcol@lastpage} $\string\mathit{false}$ temporarily during +% the macro works on non-top and thus non-last pages to fix the bug +% that \cs{@makecol} and \cs{pcol@makefcolumn} misunderstand the page +% they work on is last.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Replace \cs{@makecol} with \cs{pcol@@makecol} to cap the depth of +% \cs{@outputbox} by \cs{@maxdepth} even with p\string\LaTeX.} +% \changes{v1.21}{2013/06/06} +% {Add page and column numbers to logging.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Fix the problem that a flushed column in a non-top page causes +% overfull due to its hight-plus-depth greater than $\pi^h(p)$.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@colht} and \cs{relax} as the first and third argument +% of \cs{pcol@shrinkcolbyfn} for all of three invocations of it.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@maxdepth} as the first argument of \cs{pcol@@makecol}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@flushcolumn! is invoked for each column $c\In0\C$ from +% \!\pcol@sync! to ship out the \ccolpage{} of $c$ into $\S_c$ if it is not +% leading one\Index{leading column-page}, i.e., $p=\cc_c(\vb^p)<\ptop$. The +% macro also ships out \fpage{}s from $p+1$ up to $\ptop-1$ if we have +% deferred floats to fill them and, if this float flushing still leaves +% deferred floats, puts some of them to the \lcolpage{} being +% current\Index{current column-page}{} now as its top and/or bottom floats. +% +% First we obtain the \cctext{} in $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol! and +% examines if $p=\cc_c(\vb^p)<\ptop$. If it does not hold to mean $c$ has +% \lcolpage{}, we do nothing. +% +% Otherwise, we save \CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage} into +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpagesave} turning the former switch $\false$ because we +% are working on a non-\lcolpage{} definitely in a non-\lpage. Then we put +% the contents of the \ccolpage{} $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ adding \!\vfil! at its tail +% into \!\box!|255| being the \TeX's standard interface to carry the main +% vertical list for \!\output! routine. We also move everything in +% $\cc_c(\ft)$ obtained by \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! into \!\footins! and return +% $\cc_c(\ft)$ to \!\@freelist! if $\cc_c(\ft^b)$ is not void. +% +% Then we obtain $p$'s \pctext{} by \!\pcol@getcurrpage! and, if it has +% \Scfnote{}s in $\pp^f(p)$, we shrink \!\@colht! by the space required for +% the footnotes using \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! and add the stretch\slash +% shrink compontents of $\!\skip!\cdot\pp^f(p)$ at the bottom of +% \!\box!|255| by \!\pcol@unvbox@cclv!, as we did in \!\pcol@makecol!. +% Otherwise we take a special care of the case that the height-plus-depth of +% $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ is greater than $\pp^h(p)$ due to that its height is almost +% equal to $\pi^h(p)$ and thus its depth makes the hight-plus-depth +% exceeding $\pi^h(p)$. This excess is revealed by the \!\vfil! we just +% have added making the height-plus-depth the height of \!\box!|255|, and +% would cause overfull in \!\@makecol! and \!\pcol@@makecol! because they +% need the height, i.e., not height-plus-depth, of \!\box!|255| not +% exceeding $\pp^h(p)$. Therefore if it happens, we we remove the \!\vfil! +% and cap the height of \!\box!|255| by \!\@maxdepth! to pretend as if the +% box is directly passed from \TeX's page builder. +% +% Next we examine if $\cc_c(\tr)$ was made $\infty$ by \!\pcol@makefcolumn! +% invoked from this macro itself when it processed the \colpage{} in the +% previous \pfcheck{} for environment closing, which found a page break +% should be done. That is, $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ means the \ccolpage{} was +% once judged to be in the \lpage{} but \pfcheck{} forced a page break to +% make it non-last, it should have all deferred floats now listed in +% $\cc_c(\tl)$ at \Endparacol{}, but their total size is less than the +% threshold to make a usual \fcolumn{} for the \lpage. If so, since the page +% is not last now, we put all floats in $\cc_c(\tl)$ by \!\pcol@makefcolpage! +% as the ship-out image in \!\@outputbox!, ignoring the contents added to +% \!\box!|255| in the operations above because $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ should be +% empty, and letting $\cc_c(\tr)=0$ to mean the floats have been +% processed\footnote{ +%  +% $\cc_c(\tl)$ can have any values other than $\infty$ because definitely it +% will not be referred to in its inherent sense in the situation with no +% further float additions and no deferred floats.}. +% +% Otherwise, since the \colpage{} can be put as usual, we invoke +% \!\pcol@@makecol!\footnote{ +%  +% Neither \cs{pcol@makecol} because \!\box!\texttt{255} has \!\vfil! at its +% tail and the \colpage{} should be short enough, nor \cs{@makecol} because +% we need to ensure the depth of resulting \cs{@outputbox} is capped.} +%  +% giving \!\@maxdepth! to it to build the complete \colpage{} in +% \!\@outputbox! with depth capping and with the following setting\footnote{ +%  +% \LaTeX's has another \!\insert! named \!\@kludgeins! for \!\enlargepage! +% but \Paracol{} does not cares about it.}. +% $$ +% \begin{array}{lll} +% \!\box!|255|=\cc_c(\vb^b)& +% \!\footins!=\cc_c(\ft)& +% \!\@colht!=\pp^h(\cc_c(\vb^p))\\ +% \!\@midlist!=\cc_c(\ml)& +% \!\@toplist!=\cc_c(\tl)& +% \!\@botlist!=\cc_c(\bl) +% \end{array} +% $$ +% Finally, regardless of $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ or not, the resulting +% \!\@outputbox! becomes $\s_c(p)$ and is added to the tail of $\S_c$ +% by \!\@cons!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@flushcolumn{% + \pcol@getcurrcol + \ifnum\count\@currbox<\pcol@toppage + \ifpcol@lastpage \pcol@lastpagesavetrue \else \pcol@lastpagesavefalse \fi + \pcol@lastpagefalse + \pcol@page\count\@currbox + \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\unvbox\@currbox \vfil}% + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot\else + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@currfoot + \pcol@Fe{flushcolumn(colfn)}% + \fi + \pcol@getcurrfoot\box + \pcol@getcurrpage + \ifvoid\pcol@footins + \ifdim\ht\@cclv>\@colht + \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth \unvbox\@cclv \unskip}% + \fi + \else + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\pcol@footins\relax + \setbox\@cclv\vbox{\pcol@unvbox@cclv\pcol@footins}% + \fi + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@flushcolumn(\number\c@page:\number\pcol@currcol)} + \ifdim\@toproom=\maxdimen + \setbox\@outputbox\pcol@makefcolpage \global\@toproom\z@ + \else + \pcol@@makecol\@maxdepth + \fi + \pcol@Logend\pcol@flushcolumn + \global\setbox\@currbox\box\@outputbox + \expandafter\@cons\csname pcol@shipped\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname + \@currbox +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Then for each $q\in[p{+}1,\ptop{-}1]$, we repeat the followings; get $q$'s +% \pctext{} by \!\pcol@getcurrpage!; shrink \!\@colht! by +% \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! if $q$ has \Scfnote{}s; try to make a \fcolumn{} in +% \!\@outputbox! by \!\@makefcolumn! giving it \!\@deferlist! being +% $\cc_c(\dl)$ at initial but will be shrunk; if the \fcolumn{} is made, +% acquire an \!\insert! by \!\@next! to keep the contents of \!\@outputbox! +% and to be added to the tail of $\S_c$ by \!\@cons!. +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{@colht} shrinking by page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \advance\pcol@page\@ne + \ifx\@deferlist\@empty\else + \@whilenum\pcol@page<\pcol@toppage\do{% + \pcol@getcurrpage + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\pcol@footins\relax + \fi + \@makefcolumn\@deferlist + \if@fcolmade + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\box\@outputbox}% + \pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{flushcolumn(fcol)}% + \expandafter\@cons + \csname pcol@shipped\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname\@currbox + \fi + \advance\pcol@page\@ne}% + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next, since we reach $\ptop$ and thus restore \CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage} +% from \CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpagesave} because the \tpage{} can be last. +% Then we acquire the \ccolpage{} of $c$ which is now in $\ptop$ and thus +% empty, by \!\@next!. Then we let $\!\@colht!=\!\@colroom!=\pp^h(\ptop)$ +% by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo! but shrinking them by \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! if +% $\ptop$ has \Scfnote{}s, and reinitialize the float placement parameters by +% \!\pcol@floatplacement!. Then, if $\cc_c(\dl)$ still has some floats, +% we make a \fcolumn{} for some of them in the \tpage{} by +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}={}\true$ meaning flushing, +% or try to move some of them to $\cc_c(\tl)=\!\@toplist!$ and/or +% $\cc_c(\bl)=\!\@botlist!$ by \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! otherwise. Note that +% since \!\@colroom! is used in \!\pcol@makefcolumn! as a working register, +% we let $\!\@colroom!=\pp^h(\ptop)$ again after its invocation. After that +% we save \cctext{} including those given by \!\pcol@floatplacement! and +% modified by \!\pcol@makefcolumn! or \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! into $\cc_c$ by +% \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! because all footnotes are shipped out, and let +% $\cc_c(\vb^p)=\ptop$. We also let $\cc_c(\vb^r)=\!\@colroom!$ possibly +% modified by \!\pcol@trynextcolumn! but after canceling the shrinkage of +% \!\@colht! due to \Scfnote{}s, i.e., +% $\cc_c(\vb^r)\gets\cc_c(\vb^r)+(H-H')$ where $H$ and $H'$ are \!\@colht! +% before and after the shrinkage respectively. +%  +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add $\cs{@colht}\EQ\pi^h(p)$.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{pcol@trynextcolumn} with \cs{pcol@makefcolumn} for the +% case of $\cs{ifpcol@clear}\EQ\mathit{true}$.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{@colht} shrinking by page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the restore of \cs{ifpcol@lastpage} from +% \cs{ifpcol@lastpagesave}.} +% \changes{v1.21}{2013/06/06} +% {Fix the bug that $\kappa_c(\beta^p)$ is let have \cs{pcol@page}, +% which can be less than $p_t\EQ\cs{pcol@toppage}$, to cause the column +% $c$ is lost or moved to a wrong page.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifpcol@lastpagesave \pcol@lastpagetrue \fi + \pcol@Fb + \@next\@currbox\@freelist{\global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{flushcolumn(col)}% + \pcol@getcurrpinfo\@tempcnta{\global\@colht}\@tempskipa + \@pageht\@colht + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\pcol@footins\relax \fi + \global\@colroom\@colht \pcol@floatplacement + \ifx\@deferlist\@empty\else + \ifpcol@clear + \pcol@makefcolumn \global\@colroom\@colht + \else + \pcol@trynextcolumn + \fi\fi + \pcol@setcurrcolnf + \global\count\@currbox\pcol@toppage + \advance\@pageht-\@colht \advance\@pageht\@colroom + \global\dimen\@currbox\@pageht + \fi %\ifnum\count\@currbox<\pcol@toppage + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@makefcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to take special care of the float-column in the last +% page. } +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Encapsulate the float column in a \cs{vbox} of \cs{@colht} so that +% vertical skips at the top and bottom are not lost when the column +% is put back to the main vertical list, and makes the assignment to +% \cs{@currbox} global because the box is now referred to after +% \cs{output} is completed.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Replace the sequence of operations to make a usual float column +% with \cs{@toplist} with the newly introduced +% \cs{pcol@makefcolpage}.} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Remove a space after the \cs{vbox} to be assigned to \cs{@currbox} +% to obey the coding convention.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@makefcolumn! is invoked solely from \!\pcol@flushcolumn! +% to put deferred floats in the currently empty \colpage{} of $c$ in the +% \tpage{} $\ptop$ which is being flushed. Since we have to take special care +% of the case of environment closing, we cannot do this operation by +% \!\@makefcolumn!, while in other cases for \!\flushpage! and \!\clearpage! +% we also have to pay a small attention. +% +% First, we scan the copy of $\cc_c(\dl)$ applying \!\pcol@makefcolelt! to +% each element to have the floats to be put in \!\@toplist!, which is +% assuredly empty because the \ccolpage{} of $c$ has already been shipped +% out to empty it, and those still deferred in $\cc_c(\dl)$. Prior to scan, +% we let $H_r=\pp^h(\ptop)\footnotemark+\alpha$\footnotetext{ +%  +% $\pp^h(\ptop)$ referred in this macro may have been shrunk by \Scfnote{}s +% in \cs{pcol@flushcolumn}.}, +%  +% as the space initially available for +% floats each of which being $\phi$ is assumed to consume +% $v(\phi)=h(\phi)+d(\phi)+\alpha$, and $H_t=\!\@colroom!=-\alpha$ as the +% initial value of the accumulated size of $v(\phi)$ for all $\phi$ to be +% put, where $\alpha=\!\floatsep!$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ifpcol@lastpage} +%  +% as discussed afterward, or $\alpha=\!\@fpsep!$ otherwise. +% +% Then if the resulting \!\@toplist! is not empty\footnote{ +%  +% It can happen if the first float is larger than $\pp^h(\ptop)$.}, +%  +% we examine if $\ptop$ is the \lpage{} ($|\ifpcol@|\~|lastpage|=\true$) +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ifpcol@lastpage} +%  +% and $\cc_c(\dl)$ is empty to mean the last \colpage{} have all deferred +% floats. This case is subtle because if we make the \colpage{} a \fcolumn{} +% it can be sparse and unnecessarily throw the \postenv{} to the next +% page. Therefore, we intend to pack floats to the page top as top floats +% and thus have let $\alpha=\!\floatsep!$ in the building process of +% \!\@toplist! above\footnote{ +%  +% We dare to do it knowing the natural component of \!\floatsep! is a little +% bit (4pt) larger than that \!\@fpsep! and the possibility of having +% fewer floats than those given by \!\@makefcolumn!.}, +%  +% but it may make a too tall \colpage{} only having floats shrinking +% the \postenv{} in the page. In addition, if other columns have +% \fpage{}s in the \lpage, packing the floats as top floats should give +% inconsistent appearance but we don't know whether the columns following +% $c$ has \fpage{}s. Therefore, we performs this float packing if making +% the \fpage{} gives too sparse, more specifically if +% $H_t<\!\floatpagefraction!\times\pp^h(\ptop)=\!\@fpmin!$, but postpone the +% final decision until the \colpage{} is eventually shipped out by +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! or \!\pcol@makeflushedpage!. That is, if the all +% conditions above hold, we keep \!\@toplist! so that it is saved in +% $\cc_c(\tl)$ and let $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ to indicate that the column has +% pending floats. Note that the floats are shipped out by +% \!\pcol@flushcolumn! if the \pfcheck{} currently being performed finds a +% too tall column in $\ptop$ to force a page break making $\ptop$ non-last. +% Also note that, in any cases, letting $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ is safe because +% no longer we will have any float additions to the \colpage. +% +% Otherwise, i.e., if we are working on a non-\lpage{} to be flushed or a +% \fcolumn{} is to be made for the \lpage, we put all floats in \!\@toplist! +% in a \!\vbox! of $\pp^h(\ptop)$ tall by \!\pcol@makefcolpage! and then +% let $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ be another \!\vbox! having it. This encapsulation of +% the \fcolumn{} is necessary because $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ can be put back to the +% main vertical list after the \pfcheck{} to remove skips above and below +% the floats, namely \!\@fptop! and \!\@fpbot!, if the contents were not +% encapsulated. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@makefcolumn{% + \ifpcol@lastpage \@tempdimc\floatsep \else \@tempdimc\@fpsep \fi + \@tempdima\@colht \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimc \global\@colroom-\@tempdimc + \begingroup + \let\@elt\pcol@makefcolelt + \let\reserved@b\@deferlist + \global\let\@deferlist\@empty + \reserved@b + \endgroup + \ifx\@toplist\@empty\else + \@tempswatrue + \ifpcol@lastpage \ifx\@deferlist\@empty \ifdim\@colroom<\@fpmin + \@tempswafalse \global\@toproom\maxdimen + \fi\fi\fi + \if@tempswa \global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\pcol@makefcolpage}\fi + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@makefcolelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to take special care of the float-column in the last +% page. } +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@makefcolelt!\<\phi\>$ is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! to be applied to each float element $\phi$ in (the +% copy of) $\cc_c(\dl)$. We examine if $v(\phi)=h(\phi)+d(\phi)+\alpha\leq +% H_r$ to mean the \fcolumn{} being built has room large enough for the float +% $\phi$. If so, we add $\phi$ to \!\@toplist! by \!\@cons!, and let +% $H_r\gets H_r-v(\phi)$ and $H_t\gets H_t+v(\phi)$. Otherwise, we add +% $\phi$ to $\cc_c(\dl)$ by \!\@cons! to make it deferred again, and +% let $H_r=-\infty$ so that the examinations for any succeeding elements +% fail. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@makefcolelt#1{% + \@tempdimb\ht#1{}\advance\@tempdimb\dp#1{}\advance\@tempdimb\@tempdimc + \ifdim\@tempdimb>\@tempdima \@cons\@deferlist#1\relax + \@tempdima-\maxdimen + \else \@cons\@toplist#1\relax + \advance\@tempdima-\@tempdimb \global\advance\@colroom\@tempdimb + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@makefcolpage} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to implement the operations to make a float column +% performed in three macros.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add {\tt\%} to the end of the line to open \cs{vbox} to obey the +% coding convention.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@makefcolpage! is invoked from \!\pcol@flushcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@makefcolumn! and \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! to build a \fcolumn{} +% having floats in \!\@toplist!, which is then returned to \!\@freelist! and +% then emptied. The floats are put in a \!\vbox! of \!\@colht! tall with +% vertical skips of \!\@fptop!, \!\@fpsep! and \!\@fpbot! above, between and +% below them respectively. The box is then let be $\s_c(p)$ or +% $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ explictly or implicitly by the invokers, with an +% encapsulation in the case of \!\pcol@makefcolumn!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@makefcolpage{\vbox to\@colht{% + \vskip\@fptop \vskip-\@fpsep + \def\@elt##1{\vskip\@fpsep\box##1}\@toplist \vskip\@fpbot}% + \pcol@Fb + \xdef\@freelist{\@freelist\@toplist}\global\let\@toplist\@empty + \pcol@Fe{makefcolpage}% +} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@measurecolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Drastically changed to measure $D_T$, to deal with empty +% main vertical list, and to omit \cs{topfigrule} and \cs{botfigrule} +% from float size measurement.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@measurecolumn! is invoked for each column $c\In0\C$ from +% \!\pcol@sync! to measure the sizes of the top floats $\size_c(t)$, main +% vertical list $\size_c(m)$, footnotes $\size_c(f)$ and bottom floats +% $\size_c(b)$ in the \ccolpage{} in the page $\ptop$. After obtaining the +% \cctext{} in $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol!, we calculate +% $\size_c(t)=\!\skip!{\cdot}\cc_c(\vb)$ by \!\pcol@addflhd! giving it +% $\cc_c(\tl)$ and $\cc_c(\tf)=\!\pcol@textfloatsep!$ as its arguments also +% to have $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}={\fc(t)}$. Note that $\cc_c(\tf)=\infty$ means +% the \colpage{} does not have any \sync{}ation points yet and thus +% \!\textfloatsep! is used in the calculation as the skip between the top +% floats and main vertical list, while the value itself possibly for a +% \mvlfloat{} discussed later is used if $\cc_c(\tf)<\infty$. We also +% calculate $\size_c(m)=h(\cc_c(\vb))+d(\cc_c(\vb))$, and then the sum of it +% and $\size_c(t)$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@measurecolumn{% + \pcol@getcurrcol + \@tempswafalse + \dimen@\z@ \pcol@addflhd\@toplist\pcol@textfloatsep + \global\skip\@currbox\dimen@ + \advance\dimen@\ht\@currbox \advance\dimen@\dp\@currbox \dimen@ii\dimen@ +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next we examine if the main vertical list $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ is empty by +% \!\pcol@ifempty! and, if so, we let $\pd_c=\cc_c(\pd)=\infty$ and save it +% (together with others) by \!\pcol@setcurrcol! so that, if the column +% defines the $\VT$ finally by its top floats, $\DT$ is let $\infty$ and the +% fact that the column has empty list is remembered. Otherwise, we let +% $\pd_c=\cc_c(\pd)$ and $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ to represent +% $\Fc(\{t,m\})=f_t\lor f_m$ because $f_m=\true$. Then we invoke +% \!\pcol@measureupdate! to let $\VT=\size_c(t)+\size_c(m)=\Size_c(\{t,m\})$ +% and $\DT=\pd_c$ if $\Fc(\{t,m\})=\true$ and $\VT<\Size_c(\{t,m\})$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \pcol@ifempty\@currbox + {\global\pcol@prevdepth\maxdimen \pcol@setcurrcol}% + {\@tempswatrue}% + \pcol@measureupdate\@tempdima\dimen@ii\@tempdimc\pcol@prevdepth +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add calculation of $V_P$ and $c_{\string\max}$.} +% +% Next we let $\size_c(f)=0$ if $\cc_c(\ft^b)$ is void, or otherwise let +% $\size_c(f)=h(\cc_c(\ft^b))+d(\cc_c(\ft^b))+{}\cc_c(\ft^s)$\footnote{ +%  +% We ignore the height and depth of \!\footnoterule! because they are +% expected to be 0 and are so in the default setting.} +%  +% and $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ because $\fc(f)=\true$ and thus +% $\Fc(\{t,m,f\})=\true$. After that, we calculate $\size_c(f)+\size_c(b)$ +% by \!\pcol@addflhd! giving it $\cc_c(\bl)$ and $\infty$ to mean +% \!\textfloatsep! should be used for the calculation as its argument also +% to have $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}={\Fc}(\{t,m,f,b\})$. Then we let +% $\VB=\size_c(f)+\size_c(b)$ if $\VB<\size_c(f)+\size_c(b)$, and let +% $\VP=\size_c(t)+\size_c(m)+\size_c(f)+\size_c(b)=\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b\})$ and +% $c_{\max}=c$ if $\Fc(\{t,m,f,b\})=\true$ and $\VP<\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b\})$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot \dimen@\z@ + \else + \dimen@\ht\pcol@currfoot \advance\dimen@\dp\pcol@currfoot + \advance\dimen@\skip\pcol@currfoot + \@tempswatrue + \fi + \pcol@addflhd\@botlist\maxdimen + \ifdim\dimen@>\@tempdimb \@tempdimb\dimen@ \fi + \advance\dimen@\dimen@ii + \if@tempswa \ifdim\dimen@>\@pageht + \@pageht\dimen@ \@tempcntb\pcol@currcol + \fi\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next, we let $\dc$ be the depth of the lowest non-empty items among the +% main vertical list, footnotes and bottom floats. That is, we let +% $\dc\gets\cc_c(\pd)$ at first, and then, if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@bfbottom}={\true}$, override it by $\dc\gets +% d(\cc_c(\ft^b))$ if there are footnotes, and finally override it by +% $\dc\gets0$ for the bottom floats if exist adding \!\textfloatsep! to +% $\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b\})$ to have $\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'\})$. This overriding +% order of $d(\cc_c(\ft^b))$ and then 0 by bottom floats is reversed when +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@bfbottom}=\false$ according to the implementation of +% \!\@makecol!. Then, we invoke \!\pcol@measureupdate! again to let +% $\VPP=\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'\})$ and $\DP=\dc$ if $\Fc(\{t,m,f,b\})=\true$ and +% $\VPP<\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'\})$. It also lets $\DP=\dc$ if +% $\Fc(\{t,m,f,b\})=\true$, $\VPP=\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'\})$ and $\DP>\dc$. +% +% Finally, we let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\true$ if +% $\cc_c(\dl)\neq\emptyset$ to tell \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! that the +% \lpage{} must be {\em full size} and \!\pcol@output@end! to flush the +% deferred \cwise{} floats. +%  +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise the mechanism to tell \cs{pcol@makeflushedpage} and +% \cs{pcol@output@end} that a column in a last page has deferred +% column-wise floats with newly introduced \cs{ifpcol@dfloats}.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \dimen@ii\pcol@prevdepth + \ifpcol@bfbottom + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot\else \dimen@ii\dp\pcol@currfoot \fi + \ifx\@botlist\@empty\else \dimen@ii\z@ \advance\dimen@\textfloatsep \fi + \else + \ifx\@botlist\@empty\else \dimen@ii\z@ \advance\dimen@\textfloatsep \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot\else \dimen@ii\dp\pcol@currfoot \fi + \fi + \pcol@measureupdate\pcol@colht\dimen@\@pagedp\dimen@ii + \ifx\@deferlist\@empty\else \pcol@dfloatstrue \fi + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@addflhd} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Drastically changed to omit \cs{topfigrule} and \cs{botfigrule} +% from float size measurement, to take care of top float enlargement, +% to add the measurement of $D_T$, and to revise the definition of +% $D_P$.} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@hdflelt} +% \def\xl{\lambda_x} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a user \cs{pcol@makecol}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@addflhd!\arg{list}\arg{tfs}$ is invoked twice from +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn! for a column $c$ to measure $\size_c(x)$ +% ($x\in\{t,b\}$) of top ($x=t$) or bottom ($x=b$) floats. +% The arguments and registers referred to in the macro have the folloiwngs +% according to $x=t$ or $x=b$. +% $$ +% \nosv\begin{array}{l|ll} +% & x=t& x=b\\\hline +% \arg{list}& \cc_c(\tl)& \cc_c(\bl)\\ +% \arg{tfs}& \!\pcol@textfloatsep!& \!\maxdimen!\\ +% \CSIndex{if@tempswa}& +% \false& \Fc(\{t,m,f\})\\ +% \!\dimen@!& 0& \size(f) +% \end{array} +% $$ +% The macro is also used in \!\pcol@makecol! and \!\pcol@output@switch! for +% $x=t$ but with \!\dimen@! having the height of \!\pcol@prespan! for the +% measurement of the total height of \prespan{} including top +% floats\footnote{ +%  +% In these invocations, \CSIndex{if@tempswa} is meaningless and not examined +% by the invokers.}. +% +% The macro at first examines if $\cc_c(\xl)=\arg{list}$ is empty and does +% nothing if so. Otherwise, \CSIndex{if@tempswa} is turned $\true$ to have +% $\fc(t)=\true$ for $x=t$ or $\Fc(\{t,m,f,b\})=\true$ for $x=b$. Then we +% scan all floats in $\arg{list}$ applying \!\pcol@hdflelt! to each float +% $\phi$ to add $h(\phi)+d(\phi)+\!\floatsep!$ to \!\dimen@!, from/to which +% we then subtract \!\floatsep! and add $\sigma_x$ because the last\slash +% first float is followed\slash preceded by the vertical skip of $\sigma_x$ +% instead of \!\floatsep!, to have $\size_c(t)$ for $x=t$ or +% $\size_c(f)+\size_c(b)$ for $x=b$ being {\em returned} to +% \!\pcol@measurecolumn!. +% +% Note that $\sigma_t$ is $\arg{tfs}=\!\pcol@textfloatsep!$ if it is less +% than $\infty$ or \!\textfloatsep! otherwise, while +% $\sigma_b=\!\textfloatsep!$ always because $\arg{tfs}=\!\maxdimen!$. Also +% note that $\sigma_t$ can be biased by 10000\,|pt| and thus larger than +% 5000\,|pt|, if we have a \mvlfloat{} in top floats as discussed later. +% Another caution is that we ignore the contribution by \!\topfigrule! nor +% \!\botfigrule! because they should insert vertical items whose total +% height and depth are 0. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@addflhd#1#2{% + \ifx#1\@empty\else + \@tempswatrue + \let\@elt\pcol@hdflelt + #1\advance\dimen@-\floatsep + \ifdim#2=\maxdimen \advance\dimen@\textfloatsep + \else + \advance\dimen@\pcol@textfloatsep + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep>5000\p@ \advance\dimen@-\@M\p@ \fi + \fi + \let\@elt\relax + \fi} +\def\pcol@hdflelt#1{\advance\dimen@\ht#1\advance\dimen@\dp#1% + \advance\dimen@\floatsep} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@measureupdate} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to let $D_T$ and $D_P$ have the minimum depth of items +% among those which give $V_T$ and $V_P$.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@measureupdate!\\\\$ is invoked +% twice in \!\pcol@measurecolumn! for $c$ to update $V\in\{\VT,\VPP\}$ +% and $D=\{\DT,\DP\}$ as follows if \CSIndex{if@tempswa}, being +% $\Fc(\{t,m\})$ for $V=\VT$ or $\Fc(\{t,m,f,b\})$ for $V=\VPP$, is $\true$. +% $$ +% V\gets\max(V,v)\qquad +% D\gets\cases{\min(D,d)&$V=v$\cr +% D& $V\neq v$} +% $$ +% The arguments $v$ and $d$ have the followings according to $V$. +% $$ +% \arraycolsep0pt +% \begin{array}{rll} +% V=\VT \;{:}\;&v=\Size_c(\{t,m\})&\quad d=\delta_c\\ +% V=\VPP\;{:}\;&v=\Size_c(\{t,m,f,b'))&\quad d=\dc +% \end{array} +% $$ +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@measureupdate#1#2#3#4{\if@tempswa + \ifdim#1<#2\relax#1#2\relax#3#4\relax + \else\ifdim#1=#2\ifdim#3>#4\relax#3#4\fi\fi\fi\fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@synccolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Drastically changed to correctly implement the top float +% enlargement and MVL-float.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Change code structure removing the case for overflown synchronized +% pages.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove \cs{penalty}\string\texttt{-10000} made unnecessary by the +% redesign of overflow synchronized pages.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add an shrink of $1/10000\,\string\texttt{fil}$ to the bottom of +% flushed column pages to cancel finite shrinks just below +% synchronization points.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@synccolumn! is invoked for each column $c\In0\C$ from +% \!\pcol@sync! to set a \sync{}ation point at $\VT$ from the top of the +% \ccolpage{} of $c$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}={\false}$, or flush it +% otherwise. After obtaining $c$'s \cctext{} $\cc_c$ by +% \!\pcol@getcurrcol!, we process one of the following three cases. +% +% The first case is for flushing with $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\true$. In +% this case we simply add \!\vfil! at the tail of the main vertical list in +% $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ to make the whole \colpage{} possibly with other items fit +% in a box of \!\@colht! tall and, if $\cc_c(\tf)\neq\infty$ to mean the +% column to be flushed has a \sync{}ation point, we also add an infitite +% shrink of $1/10000\,|fil|$ so as to cancel a finite shrink just below the +% point, as done in \!\pcol@makecol!\footnote{ +%  +% Just in case, because it looks impossible that the natural height of the +% \colpage{} exceeds $\pp^h(\ptop)$ with \pfcheck.}. +%  +% We also let $\cc_c(\pd)=1000\,|pt|$ to mimic \TeX's mechanism of +% \!\prevdepth! with the empty main vertical list in the next +% \colpage{}\footnote{ +%  +% The author is not sure if this setting is really necessary but, at least, +% it looks working well (though other setting looks all right too).}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@synccolumn{% + \pcol@getcurrcol + \ifpcol@clear + \global\pcol@prevdepth\@m\p@ + \global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{\unvbox\@currbox + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep=\maxdimen \vfil + \else \vskip\z@\@plus1fil\@minus.0001fil + \fi}% +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% The second and third cases are for \sync{}ed \cswitch{}. The second case +% is for $\DT=\infty$ to mean the \sync{}ation point is set just below the +% top floats of a column whose main vertical list is empty because it is +% definitely $\VT\geq0>-\infty$. In this case, we should not put anything +% back to the main vertical list, because the column having defined the +% point will restart from the top of its \colpage{} with \!\topskip! and +% thus other columns should do so for the stuff following the point. +% Therefore, we put $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ as the last top float, namely +% {\em\Uidx\mvlfloat} because it is for the main vertical list, acquiring an +% \!\insert! from \!\@freelist! by \!\@next! and assigning it to +% \Midx{\!\pcol@float!} so that we pretend main vertical lists of all +% columns are empty. +% +% The float has zero height and depth, and contains the +% followings if we have some real floats; a vertical skip of $-\!\floatsep!$ +% to go back to the bottom of the last real float; \!\topfigrule! and a skip +% of \!\textfloatsep! to separate $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ from the last real float; +% and $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ followed by \!\vss! to avoid overfull and underfull. +% Otherwise, i.e., we don't have any real floats, neither of the skips nor +% \!\topfigrule! are put in the \mvlfloat{} because we let +% $\!\floatsep!=\!\textfloatsep!=0$ and $\!\topfigrule!=\!\relax!$ +% temporarily in a group. Then we set the \sync{}ation point by enlarging +% the space below the \mvlfloat{} so that the total size of all floats +% including \!\floatsep! and \!\textfloatsep!, which may be 0 as set in the +% process above, is equal to $\VT$. This enlarging is done by letting +% $\cc_c(\tf)=\VT-(\vc(t)-\!\textfloatsep!+\!\floatsep!)$, the second term +% of which is the vertical size of the top float sequence up to the +% \mvlfloat, and by replacing \!\textfloatsep! with $\cc_c(\tf)$ in the top +% float insertion process in \!\pcol@cflt! so that the top floats including +% the \mvlfloat{} consumes $\VT$ as a whole\footnote{ +%  +% This enlarging cannot be done by making the float's height +% $\VT-\vc(t)-\!\floatsep!$ (or \!\textfloatsep!) because the height can be +% negative.}. +% +% Note that the process above involves \!\floatsep! and \!\textfloatsep! +% with some finite stretch and shrink, but these factors will not contribute +% the final result because they are canceled by \!\vss! in the \mvlfloat{} +% and by the small inifinite stretch and shrink put by \!\pcol@makecol! and +% this macro for flushing. Also note that $\cc_c(\tf)$ is then biased by +% 10000\,|pt| so that \!\pcol@cflt! will not put \!\topfigrule! because it +% has been already put as a part of the \mvlfloat{} or we don't have any +% real floats. We also let $\cc_c(\pd)=1000$ to mean the \colpage{}'s main +% vertical list is empty, so as to mimic \TeX's mechanism of \!\prevdepth! +% with an empty list again. +% +% Another attention we have to pay is that \colpage{}s with +% $\cc_c(\tf)=\infty$ does not have any \sync{}ation points, and thus +% $\cc_c(\tf)<\infty$ means a \sync{}ation has already taken place in them. +% If this $\cc_c(\tf)<\infty$ happens with $\DT=\infty$\footnote{ +%  +% This can happen when a \sync{}ation with $\DT=\infty$ is immediately +% followed by another \sync{}ation or, more unlikely, by additions of +% items whose total amount is negative and then a \sync{}ation.}, +%  +% we cannot update $\cc_c(\tf)$ because \!\pcol@measurecolumn! took care of +% its value on measuring $\vc(t)$. Therefore, we do nothing if +% $\cc_c(\tf)<\infty$ but just let succeeding stuff be added to the main +% vertical list as in \cswitch{} without \sync{}ation. +%  +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add {\tt\%} to the end of the line to open \cs{vbox} for +% \cs{pcol@float} to obey the coding convention.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else + \@tempdimb\@tempdima + \advance\@tempdimb-\skip\@currbox + \ifdim\@tempdimc=\maxdimen + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep=\maxdimen \begingroup + \ifx\@toplist\@empty + \textfloatsep\z@ \floatsep\z@ \let\topfigrule\relax + \fi + \pcol@Fb + \@next\pcol@float\@freelist{\global\setbox\pcol@float\vbox to\z@{% + \vskip-\floatsep \topfigrule \vskip\textfloatsep + \unvbox\@currbox \vss}}\pcol@ovf + \pcol@Fe{synccolumn(topfloat)}% + \@cons\@toplist\pcol@float + \advance\@tempdimb\textfloatsep \advance\@tempdimb-\floatsep + \advance\@tempdimb\@M\p@ + \global\pcol@prevdepth\@m\p@ + \global\pcol@textfloatsep\@tempdimb + \endgroup \fi +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% The third and last case is for $\DT<\infty$ and thus most usual. In this +% case, we enclose everything in $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ in a \!\vbox! whose height +% is $h_c^v=\VT-\vc(t)$ and let $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ have it so that the item +% following the \sync{}ation point start at $\VT$. An attention we have to +% pay is that it can be $h_c^v<\!\topskip!$ to let \TeX{} insert a vertical +% skip of the difference between them when the box is returned to the main +% vertical list pushing down the \sync{}ation point a little bit\footnote{ +%  +% This can happen not very unlikely especially with $\vc(t)$ a little bit +% less than $\VT$ and $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ being empty.}. +%  +% Therefore, if so, we let $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ have the followings; a \!\vbox! of +% \!\topskip! tall having its old contents at its top above which no +% vertical skip will be inserted; a vertical skip $-\!\topskip!$ going back +% to the page top; and a vertical skip $h_c^v$ going down to the +% \sync{}ation point. +% +% The encapsulation of the old contents $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ in the box of $h_c^v$ +% tall gives us the following two features desirable for \sync{}ation. +% First, all vertical glues in the box are {\em frozen}, nullifying finite +% stretches in them because we insert an infinite stretch of +% $1/10000\,|fil|$ at the bottom of $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ to push up its old +% contents respecting other infinite stretches if any, as done by +% \!\raggedbottom!, and also nullifying finite and infinite shrinks because +% $h_c^v\geq\vc(m)$ definitely. This freezing and nullification keeps +% \sync{}ation points already in $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ from being observed moving a +% little bit vertically. That is, if we have a glue just below a +% \sync{}ation point and it were {\em visible} to \TeX's page builder, the +% item below the glue could move up/down when the builder found a break +% point with some shrink\slash stretch. Though this moving up/down is +% inhibited by the small infinite stretch\slash shrink which the \colpage{} +% will at its bottom finally, it is undesirable to make \TeX{} +% misunderstanding that the glues are strethable\slash shrinkable though +% they are not in reality. +% +% Second, since the boxes in all \colpage{} are zero deep due to the +% infinite stretch at their bottoms and these bottoms are aligned at the +% \sync{}ation point, we have a clear view of the baseline progress after +% the \sync{}ation regardless of their contents. That is, we let +% $\cc_c(\pd)=\DT$ to {\em broadcast} $\DT$ to all columns, so that +% the baselines of first items following the \sync{}ation +% point are aligned \!\baselineskip! below the bottom baseline of the column +% which defines $\DT$\footnote{ +%  +% Since $\DT$ is given by one of the tallest columns whose depth is smallest +% among them, it is very likely that the bottom baseline of the column is +% lowest among all columns. However, another column can have the lowest one +% when its vertical size is a little bit shorter than $\VT$ and its depth is +% small (e.g., 0). Though of course we can define $\DT$ being $\VT$ minus +% the height of the column having the largest height to make the first +% baseline below the \sync{}ation point apart from the lowest one by +% \cs{baselineskip}, we dare to choose the definition of $\DT$ because such +% lowest baseline often means that the column have some skip at its bottom +% to give us the impressoin that the space between the baselines of the +% tallest column and its first item is a little bit too large.}, +%  +% if $\DT$ plus the hight of each item is less than \!\baselineskip!. +% +% In addition, we let $\cc_c(\tf)=\!\textfloatsep!$ to +% indicate the \colpage{} has the \sync{}ation point we just have set, if it +% was $\infty$ to mean the point is the first one. By this setting, +% \!\pcol@makecol! and this macro itself will know that the \colpage{} needs +% to have a small infinite shrink at its bottom to cancel finite ones below +% the \sync{}ation point, while \!\pcol@cflt! acts as \LaTeX's \!\@cflt! +% because it should be $\cc_c(\tf)\leq5000\,|pt|$ to mean the \colpage{} +% does not have a \mvlfloat. +%  +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Add {\tt\%} to the end of the line to open \cs{vbox} for +% \cs{@currbox} and two lines for \cs{vbox}es in it to obey the +% coding convention.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else + \global\pcol@prevdepth\@tempdimc + \ifdim\pcol@textfloatsep=\maxdimen + \global\pcol@textfloatsep\textfloatsep \fi + \global\setbox\@currbox\vbox{% + \ifdim\@tempdimb<\topskip + \vbox to\topskip{\unvbox\@currbox \vskip\z@\@plus.0001fil}% + \vskip-\topskip \vskip\@tempdimb + \else + \vbox to\@tempdimb{\unvbox\@currbox \vskip\z@\@plus.0001fil}% + \fi}% + \fi + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% Finally, we let $\cc_c(\tn)=0$ to inhibit futher addition of top floats +% because we have fixed the space for them\footnote{ +%  +% Allowing the addition is tremendously tough even when the \colpage{} has +% sufficiently large space above the \sync{}ation point.}, +%  +% and save it and other \cctext{} members into $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcol!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\@topnum\z@ \pcol@setcurrcol + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Page Flushing} +% \label{sec:imp-sout-flush} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@output@flush} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@makelastpage} as \cs{pcol@makeflushedpage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Remove unnecessary assignment of \cs{@colht}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Logstart} and \cs{pcol@Logend}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add $\cs{boxmaxdepth}\EQ\cs{@maxdepth}$ for depth capping.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add $\cs{boxmaxdepth}\EQ\cs{@maxdepth}$ for depth capping.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add depth capping of \cs{pcol@rightpage}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@output@flush! is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! to process the \!\output! request made by +% \!\flushpage!. We invoke \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! giving it \!\@colht! as +% the height of each \colpage{} to have the ship-out image of the +% \tpage{} including its \spanning{} and \Scfnote{}s in \!\@outputbox! whose +% height is then set to be \!\textheight!\footnote{ +%  +% Just in case because the height of source \cs{@outputbox} should be exactly +% \cs{textheight} though not specified so on its construction in +% \cs{pcol@makeflushedpage}.}, +%  +% ensureing that its depth is capped by $\!\boxmaxdepth!=\!\@maxdepth!$. We +% also perform these height setting and depth capping on \!\pcol@rightpage! +% if $\CL<\C$ to mean \parapag{}ing. Then we invoke \!\@outputpage! for +% shipping out, and then finally \!\pcol@freshpage! to have a new page to +% start new \colpage{}s in it. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Special Output Routines: Page Flushing + +\def\pcol@output@flush{% + \pcol@makeflushedpage\@colht + \pcol@Logstart\pcol@output@flush + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\textheight{\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \unvbox\@outputbox}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox to\textheight{\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \unvbox\pcol@rightpage}% + \fi + \pcol@Logend\pcol@output@flush + \@outputpage + \pcol@freshpage} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@output@clear} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@makelastpage} as \cs{pcol@makeflushedpage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Remove unnecessary increment of \cs{pcol@page} and assignment of +% \cs{@colht}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Logstart} and \cs{pcol@Logend}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add $\cs{boxmaxdepth}\EQ\cs{@maxdepth}$ for depth capping.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add depth capping of \cs{pcol@rightpage} and building an empty +% right parallel-page for each page-wise float page.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add background painting of float pages.} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add $\hbox{\cs{f@depth}}\EQ0$ to override +% $\hbox{\cs{f@depth}}\EQ\hbox{\texttt{1sp}}$ done by +% \cs{@dblfloatplacement}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@output@clear! is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@specialoutput! to process the \!\output! request made by +% \!\clearpage!. The first part up to \!\@outputpage! and the last line of +% this macro are same as \!\pcol@output@flush! to flush the \tpage{} and to +% have a newpage. In the remaining mid part, we invoke \!\pcol@flushfloats! +% to ship out all deferred \cwise{} floats in all columns if any, and +% then do it for \pwise{} floats by the following invocations enclosed in a +% group; letting $\!\pcol@rightpage!=\bot$ for ordinary paging; +% \!\@dblfloatplacement! to set up placement parameters followed by +% $\!\f@depth!=0$ to nullify the setting $\!\f@depth!=|1sp|$ possiblly done +% by it as discussed in the item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-@dblfloatplacement}) +% of \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}; \!\@makefcolumn! with +% \!\@dbldeferlist! to have a \fpage{} in \!\@outputbox! if any; and a loop +% of \bgpaint{} of \!\@outputbox! and, if $\CL<\C$, of empty +% \!\pcol@rightpage!, and \!\@outputpage! followed by \!\@makefcolumn! +% repeated while we have a \fpage{}, i.e., $\CSIndex{if@fcolmade}=\true$. +% +% Note that the mid part is same as that found in \!\@doclearpage! but we +% omit various adjuncts surrouding it as follows; examination of +% \CSIndex{if@twocolumn} because we should have multiple columns; +% examination of \CSIndex{if@firstcolumn} because we have to clear the page +% immediately even when we are not in the first column; concatenating +% \!\@dbltoplist! with \!\@dbldeferlist! and clearing it because the author +% believes \!\@dbltoplist! must be empty on the invocation of this macro; +% and letting $\!\@colht!=\!\textheight!$ because \!\pcol@flushfloats! did +% it. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@output@clear{% + \pcol@makeflushedpage\@colht + \pcol@Logstart\pcol@output@clear + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\textheight{\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \unvbox\@outputbox}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox to\textheight{\boxmaxdepth\@maxdepth + \unvbox\pcol@rightpage}% + \fi + \pcol@Logend\pcol@output@clear + \@outputpage + \pcol@flushfloats + \begingroup + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\box\voidb@x + \@dblfloatplacement \let\f@depth\z@ + \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist + \@whilesw\if@fcolmade\fi{% + \def\pcol@bg@floatheight{\pcol@bg@textheight}% + \setbox\@outputbox\vbox to\textheight{% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\unvbox\@outputbox}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox to\textheight{\pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\vfil}% + \fi + \@outputpage + \@makefcolumn\@dbldeferlist}% + \endgroup + \pcol@freshpage} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@makeflushedpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@makelastpage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{ifpcol@textonly} as \cs{ifpcol@nospan}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Judge the last page is empty if $V_P\EQ-\infty$ instead of $V_P<0$.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of page context.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Completely redesigned with new macro \cs{pcol@imakeflushedpage}.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add background painting of page-wise floats, and a part of +% opreations for column-separation rule drawing and background +% painting of page-wise footnotes.}  +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise the mechanism of special care about last page introducing +% \cs{ifpcol@dfloats}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@makeflushedpage!\arg{ht}$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@output@flush! or \!\pcol@output@clear! with $\arg{ht}=\!\@colht!$ +% and from \!\pcol@output@end! with $\arg{ht}=\!\pcol@colht!$. At first, we +% invoke \!\pcol@output@switch! with setting $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=\true$ +% to flush all pages up to $\ptop-1$ and to let $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ have the +% ship-out image of the main vertical list of each \colpage{} $c$ in +% $\ptop$. This invocatoin also lets $\!\pcol@colht!=\VPP$ so that hereafter +% we will refer $\VPP$ throuth $\arg{ht}$ if it is $\!\pcol@colht!$ for +% \lpage. Then after obtaining $\ptop$'s \pctext{} to have +% $\page(\ptop)=\pp^p(\ptop)$, $\!\@colht!=\pp^h(\ptop)$ and +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@nospan} by \!\pcol@getcurrpinfo!, we build the ship-out +% image of $\ptop$ in \!\@outputbox!, and \!\pcol@rightpage! if +% \parapag{}ing, taking special care of the \lpage{} case as follows. +%  +% \begin{enumerate}\def\labelenumi{(\arabic{enumi})} +% \item\label{item:mfp-nonlast} +% If $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\false$, each of $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ has ship-out +% image even if some or all of them are empty. It is unecessary to be aware +% of the perfectly empty case because it should mean the page $\ptop$ is +% made blank intentionally. +% +% \item\label{item:mfp-last-dfloats} +% If $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ but $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\true$ +% too, the last page must have {\em full size} because we will have parallel +% columned pages having \fcolumn{}s for deferred floats. However, if the +% page has nothing, i.e., $\pp^i(\ptop)=\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$ and +% $\VPP=-\infty$, we must let $\!\@outputbox!=\bot$ (and +% $\!\pcol@rightpage!=\bot$ as well) to avoid an unnecessary blank page is +% shipped out. On the other hand, if $\pp^i(\ptop)\neq\bot$ or +% $\pp^f(\ptop)\neq\bot$ while $\VPP=-\infty$, we build a full size page as +% usual but letting $\!\@textbottom!=\!\vfil!$ temporarily to avoid underfull +% in the process of building columns. Note that if $\pp^f(\ptop)\neq\bot$, +% the \Scfnote{}s are always put into \!\@outputbox! regardless +% \CSIndex{ifpcol@mgfnote} because the \lpage{} is not combined with +% \postenv. +% +% \item\label{item:mfp-last-empty} +% If $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$, $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\false$ +% and $\VPP=-\infty$, we have to let $\!\@outputbox!=\bot$ unless +% $\pp^i(\ptop)\neq\bot$ or $\pp^f(\ptop)\neq\bot$ having non-\Mgfnote{}s. +% If $\pp^f(\ptop)$ has non-\Mgfnote{}s, \!\@outputbox! and +% \!\pcol@rightpage! must have $\pp^f(\ptop)$ possibly with $\pp^i(\ptop)$ +% but without any columns, and must be put into the main vertical list as +% the leading part of \postenv{} by modifying $\VPP=0$. On the other hand +% $\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$ or it has \Mgfnote{}s, \!\@outputbox! must have only +% $\pp^i(\ptop)$\footnote{ +%  +% \!\pcol@rightpage! must have the couterpart in right \parapag{}e if the +% \spanning{} is \preenv, while it is made $\bot$ by \!\pcol@output@end! if +% the \spanning{} are \pwise{} floats.}. +%  +% Since \pwise{} floats become ordinary floats in \postenv, we cannot paint +% its \bground{} and must remove \!\dbltextfloatsep! at the bottom of +% $\pp^i(\ptop)$. +% +% \item\label{item:mfp-last-nonempty} +% If $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$, $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\false$ +% and $\VPP>-\infty$, \!\@outputpage! and \!\pcol@rightpage! must have short +% columns of $\VPP$ tall, together with $\pp^i(\ptop)$ as in non-\lpage{}s +% but without $\pp^f(\ptop)$ if it has \Mgfnote{}s. +% \end{enumerate} +%  +% To implement a part of special cares above, we at first let +% $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ iff $\cs{ifpcol@}\~|lastpage|=\false$, +%  +% \CSINDEX{ifpcol@lastpage} +%  +% $\VPP>-\infty$ or $\pp^f(\ptop)\neq\bot$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@makeflushedpage#1{% + \pcol@cleartrue \pcol@output@switch \pcol@clearfalse + \pcol@getcurrpinfo{\global\c@page}{\global\@colht}\@tempskipa + \ifpcol@lastpage \@tempswafalse \else \@tempswatrue \fi + \ifdim\pcol@colht=-\maxdimen\else \@tempswatrue \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else \@tempswatrue \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next, if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@nospan}=\true$ to mean the page $\ptop$ does not +% have \spanning{} in $\pp^i(\ptop)$, we initialize both \!\@outputbox! and +% \!\pcol@rightpage! to be $\bot$. Otherwise, after letting +% $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\true$ to make the +% \lpage{} full size if we are working on it as discussed in\Tie +% (\ref{item:mfp-last-dfloats}), we put $\pp^i(\ptop)$ in \!\@outputbox!, +% and paint its \bground{} by \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! \!\edef!ining the height +% paramenter \!\pcol@bg@floatheight! with $h$ being the height-plus-depth of +% $\pp^i(\ptop)$ with the following two exceptions; one is the case of +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@firstpage}={\true}$ to mean we are in \spage{} and thus +% the \spanning{} is \preenv{} having already been painted by +% \!\pcol@output@start!; and the other is the case of +% $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\false$ to mean we are working on a truly \lpage{} +% being empty except for the \spanning{} itself and thus the \pwise{} +% floats become a part of deferred floats in \postenv{} as discussed in\Tie +% (\ref{item:mfp-last-empty}). In the latter exceptional case, excluding +% the case that the \lpage{} is also the \spage\footnote{ +%  +% Extremely exceptional because the closing environment does not have +% anything.}, +%  +% we also remove the last skip being \!\dbltextfloatsep! so that those +% floats are naturally connected with other floats given in +% \postenv{} also as discussed in\Tie(\ref{item:mfp-last-empty}). Then we +% {\em pack} the \!\@outputbox! in itself by \!\vbox! so that any +% stretch\slash shrink factors in it cannot affect the ship-out image +% especially when we paint its \bground{}\footnote{ +%  +% Though that hardly happens.}. +%  +% Then we do the similar procedure for \!\pcol@rightpage! and make its height +% and depth equal to those of \!\@outputbox!\footnote{ +%  +% If \pwise{} floats become a part of \postenv's floats, \!\pcol@rightpage! +% will be made $\bot$ by \!\pcol@output@end! afterward.}. +%  +% Finally we temporarily add $h$ to \!\topmargin! as done in +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt! so that \bgpaint{} of columns and so on with +% \bginfext{} can reach the paper top edge. +%  +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise the condition of leaving page-wise floats as ordinary +% post-environment floats using \cs{if@tempswa} with +% \cs{ifpcol@dfloats}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \begingroup + \ifpcol@nospan + \global\setbox\@outputbox\box\voidb@x + \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\box\voidb@x + \else + \ifpcol@dfloats \@tempswatrue \fi + \let\@elt\relax + \edef\pcol@bg@floatheight{% + \@elt{\number\ht\pcol@spanning sp}\@elt{\number\dp\pcol@spanning sp}}% + \def\reserved@a{% + \ifpcol@firstpage\else \if@tempswa \pcol@bg@paintbox{Ff}\fi\fi}% + \@tempdima\ht\pcol@spanning \advance\@tempdima\dp\pcol@spanning + \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{% + \reserved@a \unvbox\pcol@spanning + \ifpcol@firstpage\else \if@tempswa\else \unskip \fi\fi}% + \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{\box\@outputbox}% + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@spanning + \pcol@Fe{makeflushedpage(spanning)}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox{% + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \reserved@a \unvbox\pcol@rightpage}% + \global\ht\pcol@rightpage\ht\@outputbox + \global\dp\pcol@rightpage\dp\@outputbox + \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox{\box\pcol@rightpage}% + \fi + \advance\topmargin\@tempdima + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Next, after \!\global!ly letting $\CSIndex{ifpcol@firstpage}=\false$ because +% we will ship a page which may be the \spage{} shortly, we build the +% ship-out image of columns if required fundamentally by +% $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$. First, +% if the page $\ptop$ has \Scfnote{}s, we shrink +% $\!\@colht!={\pp^h}(\ptop)$ by \!\pcol@shrinkcolbyfn! to keep the room for +% the footnotes, to have $H=\!\@pageht!$ being the possibly shrunk +% $\pp^h(\ptop)$ for the reference +% in \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! after the further possible modification of +% \!\@colht! we will make shortly. Second, if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ but $\CSIndex{ifpcol@dfloats}=\true$ +% too, we turn $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\false$ because we need a +% full-sized \lpage{}, temporarily letting $\!\@textbottom!=\!\vfil!$ if +% $\VPP=-\infty$ to avoid underfull due to perfectly empty \colpage{}s as +% discussed in\Tie(\ref{item:mfp-last-dfloats})\footnote{ +%  +% Each \colpage{} $cc_c(\vb^b)$ itself exists because the empty \colpage{} +% has been visited by \cscan{} prior to \!\output! request for environment +% closing.}. +%  +% Third, if we are working on a truly \lpage{} and $\arg{ht}\<\Cto\>\$ once or twice, to put +% columns in right \parapag{}e to $b=\!\pcol@rightpage!$ with +% $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto=\LBRP\CL\C$ if $\CL<\C$, and then to put left ones in +% $b=\!\@outputbox!$ with $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto=\LBRP0\CL$ always\footnote{ +%  +% The order of right to left is not essential in this macro but we follow +% the convention in \!\pcol@outputelt!.}. +%  +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Let \cs{@colht} be $\langle\mathit{ht}\rangle$ if the former is +% less than the latter.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add special care of the float column in the last page.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{@colht} shrinking by page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@colht} and \cs{relax} as the first and third argument +% of \cs{pcol@shrinkcolbyfn} for all of three invocations of it.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove empty column scan for \cs{if@fcolmade} because it is now +% unnecessary thanks to \cs{ifpcol@dfloats}.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise the condition of column-page building and setting of +% \cs{@colht}.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\pcol@firstpagefalse + \if@tempswa + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \pcol@shrinkcolbyfn\@colht\pcol@footins\relax + \fi + \let\pcol@@hfil\relax \@pageht\@colht + \ifpcol@lastpage \ifpcol@dfloats + \ifdim\pcol@colht<\z@ \def\@textbottom{\vfil}\fi + \pcol@lastpagefalse + \fi\fi + \ifpcol@lastpage \ifdim#1<\@colht \@colht#1\fi\fi + \ifdim\@colht<\z@ \else + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \pcol@imakeflushedpage\pcol@ncolleft\pcol@ncol\pcol@rightpage + \fi + \pcol@imakeflushedpage\z@\pcol@ncolleft\@outputbox + \fi + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% After putting all \colpage{}s, we examine if the page $\ptop$ has +% \Scfnote{}s in $\pp^f(\ptop)$. If so, and unless $\ptop$ is a truly +% \lpage{} and \Mgfnote{} typesetting is in effect to mean the \Scfnote{}s +% will be merged with \postenv{}, we put the footnotes in $\pp^f(\ptop)$ +% below the \colpage{}s. Prior to this however, we let +% \Midx{\!\pcol@fnheight@lpage!} have the height-plus-depth of the footnote, +% so that \!\pcol@output@end! know the size for the \bgpaint{} of the +% footnotes, which \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! performed for non-\lpage{}s. +% We also put an empty box of the size into \!\pcol@rightpage! by +% \!\pcol@phantom! together with the \!\skip! component of $\pp^f(\ptop)$ to +% keep the space necessary especially when $\ptop$ is the \lpage. Then we +% put the footnotes in $\pp^f(\ptop)$ into \!\@outputpage! by +% \!\pcol@putfootins!, reclaiming the contents of $\pp^f(\ptop)$ and letting +% $\pp^f(\ptop)=\bot$ so that \!\pcol@output@end! will be unaware of the +% footnotes. We also let $\VPP=\!\pcol@colht!=0$ if $\ptop$ is a truly +% \lpage{} and it had $-\infty$ to indicate that the \lpage{} is not empty +% but has footnotes as discussed in\Tie(\ref{item:mfp-last-empty}). +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add incorporation of page-wise footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {page-wise footnotes for the last page followed by pages for +% deferred column-wise floats are now put by this macro.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \gdef\pcol@fnheight@lpage{0pt}% + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \@tempswatrue \ifpcol@lastpage \ifpcol@mgfnote \@tempswafalse \fi\fi + \if@tempswa + \pcol@Log\pcol@makeflushedpage{output}\pcol@footins + \@tempdima\ht\pcol@footins \advance\@tempdima\dp\pcol@footins + \xdef\pcol@fnheight@lpage{\number\@tempdima sp}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@rightpage + \vskip\skip\pcol@footins \nointerlineskip + \pcol@phantom\pcol@footins \vskip\z@}% + \fi + \global\setbox\@outputbox\vbox{% + \unvbox\@outputbox \pcol@putfootins\pcol@footins}% + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@footins \gdef\pcol@footins{\voidb@x}% + \pcol@Fe{makeflushedpage(pagefn)}% + \ifdim\pcol@colht=-\maxdimen \global\pcol@colht\z@ \fi + \fi + \fi + \endgroup} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@imakeflushedpage} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Implement column-separating rule and background paiting of +% columns, column-separating gaps, spanning texts and page-wise +% footnotes.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Implement variable-width column-separating gaps.} +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@imakeflushedpage!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\arg{b}$ is invoked +% solely in \!\pcol@makeflushedpage! but can be twice with +% $(\Cfrom,\Cto,b)=(\CL,\C,\!\pcol@rightpage!)$ if \parapag{}ing is in effect +% and with $(\Cfrom,\Cto,b)=(0,\CL,\!\@outputbox!)$ always, to build the +% ship-out image of the right or left \parapag{}e $\ptop$ in the box $b$ +% already having \spanning{} or its blank counterpart if any, respectively. +% +% After opening the \!\vbox! of the ship-out image for $b$, at first we +% examine if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}={\false}$ and $\Cfrom>0$, and if so we +% temporarily increment $\page(\ptop)$ by one so that we check its parity +% for \mirror{}ed \bgpaint{} correctly. Then if the page $\ptop$ has +% \Scfnote{}s in $\pp^f(\ptop)$, we paint its \bground, or that of its blank +% counterpart, by \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! \!\def!ining the parameter +% \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! with the height-plus-depth of $\pp^f(\ptop)$, +% as the very first element of the ship-out image as done in +% \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, unless $\ptop$ is the truely \lpage{} for which the +% \bgpaint{} is done in \!\pcol@output@end!. Then we put \spanning{} in $b$ +% itself if any. +% +% Next, we invoke \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! for \cseprule{} drawing and +% \bgpaint{} giving it $H$ in \!\@colht! possibly shurnk from $\pp^h(\ptop)$ +% by \Scfnote{}s, $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$ for the set of columns to be put, and +% \!\@maxdepth! for non-\lpage{}s to paint the \bground{}s of columns and +% \csepgap{}s so that those of the last segment reach the page bottom, while +% for \lpage{} we give 0 to let the bottom be the real bottom of the +% columns. Then we put the painted \bground{}s in \!\@tempboxa! +% immediately. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@imakeflushedpage#1#2#3{\global\setbox#3\vbox{% + \ifpcol@paired\else\ifnum#1=\z@\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi\fi + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else \ifpcol@lastpage\else + \def\pcol@bg@footnoteheight{% + \@elt{\ht\pcol@footins}\@elt{\dp\pcol@footins}}% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Nn}% + \fi\fi + \unvbox#3\nointerlineskip + \ifpcol@lastpage \pcol@buildcolseprule\@colht#1#2\z@ + \else \pcol@buildcolseprule\@colht#1#2\@maxdepth + \fi + \unvbox\@tempboxa +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Now we put columns in a \!\hbox! of $\WT=\!\textwidth!$ wide. That is, +% for each $c$, being $c'$ or $\C-1-c'$ for the $c'$-th iteration determined +% by \!\pcol@swapcolumn! according to the effectiveness of \cswap{} and the +% parity of $\page(\ptop)$, we obtain $c$'s \cctext{} $\cc_c$ by +% \!\pcol@getcurrcol!, move $\cc_c(\vb^b)$ into \!\box!|255|, and let +% $\!\footins!=\cc_c(\ft)$ by \!\pcol@getcurrfoot! returning it to +% \!\@freelist! if $c$ has \Mcfnote{}s. +% +% After that we examine if $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ to mean we are working on the +% \lpage{} and the \colpage{} is for a \fcolumn{} whose floats can be put as +% top floats, and let $\!\topfigrule!=\!\relax!$ temporarily because the +% floats are not top ones in reality, if so. Note that the abnormal setting +% $\cc_c(\tr)=\infty$ is not recovered because it will never be referred to +% and the register \!\@toproom! it represents will be updated with correct +% value before it is referred to in \postenv. Then we also check +% $\arg{ht}=H$ to mean the \lpage{} is full size. If both of them hold, +% the floats in $\cc_c(\tl)$ should be (or may be) put in the \fcolumn{} as +% usual and thus we put them in \!\@outputbox! of $H$ tall by +% \!\pcol@makefcolpage!. Otherwise we invoke \!\pcol@@makecol!\footnote{ +%  +% Not \cs{pcol@makecol} because the main vertical list has \!\vfil! and, if +% it has a \sync{}ation point, a infinite shrink by \cs{pcol@synccolumn} at +% its tail already, and we should not do any special operations for +% \Scfnote{}s. Also it is not \cs{@makecol} because we need to ensure the +% depth of resulting \cs{@outputbox} is capped.}, +%  +% to have the ship-out image of the \colpage{} in \!\@outputbox!, possibily +% only for the deferred floats in $\cc_c(\tl)$ but without \!\topfigrule! in +% this case. Note that we don't take care of the stretch\slash shrink of +% \!\skip!\!\footins! for \Scfnote{}s because \pfcheck{} on the \colpage{} +% makes it sure that the natural height of the \colpage{} cannot be greater +% than \!\@colht!. Also note that we give \!\@maxdepth! to +% \!\pcol@@makecol! for non-\lpage{}s for depth capping, but for the +% \lpage{} we pass 0 to the macro because $H=\!\@colht!$ should be large +% enough to accommodate everything in the column including its last box even +% if the box is unusually deep. +% +% Then we put the \!\@outputbox! above in a \!\hbox! of \!\columnwidth! wide +% preceded by \!\pcol@@hfil! being \!\relax! for the first column, while +% it is $\!\pcol@hfil!\$, where $c^g=\!\pcol@colsepid!$ being $c$ or +% $c-1$ without or with \cswap{} respectively, to put a \csepgap{} possibly +% with \cseprule{} segments in \!\pcol@tempboxa! built by +% \!\pcol@buildcolseprule!. Finally, we save \cctext{} especially those +% for float parameters into $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! because all +% \Mcfnote{}s have been shipped out. +%  +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add column-swapping for even pages if specified.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Revise reflecting the redesign of \cs{pcol@getcurrfoot}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Logstart} and \cs{pcol@Logend}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Enclose the column-page building process in a group to fix the bug +% which lets $\cs{topfigrule}\EQ\cs{relax}$ affecting to another +% column.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Replace the sequence of operations to make a usual float column +% with \cs{@toplist} with the newly introduced +% \cs{pcol@makefcolpage}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Replace \cs{@makecol} with \cs{pcol@@makecol} to cap the depth of +% \cs{@outputbox} by \cs{@maxdepth} even with p\string\LaTeX.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@maxdepth} or 0 as the argument of \cs{pcol@@makecol} to +% fix the problem that the last page is too large due to +% \cs{@maxdepth}, by the latter.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove the examination of $\kappa_c(\lambda_d)$ for +% \cs{if@fcolmade} because it is made unnecesary now by +% \cs{ifpcol@dfloats}.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \hb@xt@\textwidth{% + \@tempcntb#1\@whilenum\@tempcntb<#2\do{% + \pcol@swapcolumn\@tempcntb\pcol@currcol#1#2\relax + \pcol@getcurrcol + \setbox\@cclv\box\@currbox + \ifvoid\pcol@currfoot\else + \pcol@Fb + \@cons\@freelist\pcol@currfoot + \pcol@Fe{imakeflushedpage(colfn)}% + \fi + \pcol@getcurrfoot\box + \@tempswafalse + \begingroup + \ifdim\@toproom=\maxdimen + \let\topfigrule\relax \ifdim\@colht=\@pageht \@tempswatrue \fi + \fi + \if@tempswa + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@makeflushedpage(1)}% + \setbox\@outputbox\pcol@makefcolpage + \pcol@Logend{\pcol@makeflushedpage(1)}% + \else + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@makeflushedpage(2)}% + \ifpcol@lastpage \pcol@@makecol\z@ \else \pcol@@makecol\@maxdepth \fi + \pcol@Logend{\pcol@makeflushedpage(2)}% + \fi + \pcol@@hfil \hb@xt@\columnwidth{\box\@outputbox\hss}% + \endgroup + \edef\pcol@@hfil{\noexpand\pcol@hfil{\pcol@colsepid}}% + \pcol@setcurrcolnf + \advance\@tempcntb\@ne}}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@flushfloats} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add reinitialization of \cs{@colht}.} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add column-swapping for even pages if specified.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Completely redesigned with new macro \cs{pcol@iflushfloats}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iflushfloats} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Implement column-separating rule and background paiting of +% columns and column-separating gaps} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Implement variable-width column-separating gaps.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@flushfloats! is invoked from \!\pcol@output@clear! and +% \!\pcol@output@end! to flush all deferred \cwise{} floats in each +% column if any. After letting $\!\@colht!=\!\textheight!$ for +% \fcolumn{}s, we iterate shipping out a page having \fcolumn{}s while +% $\CSIndex{if@fcolmade}=\exists c\In0\C:(\cc_c(\dl)\neq())$. +% +% In the loop, we initialize $\CSIndex{if@fcolmade}=\false$, and then +% invoke \!\pcol@iflushfloats! twice or once according to $\CL<\C$ or not to +% mean \parapag{}ing is in effect or not, respectively. That is, if +% $\CL<\C$ we invoke the macro with $\LBRP\CL\C$ and \!\pcol@rightpage! for +% the right \parapag{}e, and do it with $\LBRP0\CL$ and \!\@outputbox! +% always. Note that if $\CL=\C$, we let $\!\pcol@rightpage!=\bot$ to tell +% \!\@outputpage!, which we invoke at the end of the loop to ship out a page +% or a \parapag{}e pair, that the \parapag{}ing is not in effect. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@iflushfloats!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\$ opens +% a \!\vbox! to be set into $b$. Then if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}={\false}$ +% and $\Cfrom>0$ to mean we are working on a right \npaired{} \parapag{}e, +% we temporarily add \!\c@page! by one for page parity examination for +% \mirror{}ed \bgpaint. Then, the macro \!\pcol@buildcolseprule! is invoked +% with $\!\@colht!=\!\textheight!$ and $\LBRP\Cfrom\Cto$ for \cseprule{} +% drawing in \!\pcol@tempboxa! and \bgpaint{} for columns and \csepgap{}s in +% \!\@tempboxa! put into $b$ immediately. +% +% Then we open a \!\hbox! of \!\textwidth! wide and initialize +% $f=\CSIndex{if@tempswa}$ to be \CSIndex{if@fcolmade}. Then for each +% $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$, being $c'$ or $\C-1-c'$ for the $c'$-th iteration +% determined by \!\pcol@swapcolumn! according to the effectiveness of +% \cswap{} and the parity of \!\c@page!, we put an inner \!\hbox! of +% $\!\columnwidth!=\w_c$ wide preceded by \!\pcol@@hfil! being \!\relax! at +% initial or $\!\pcol@hfil!\$ otherwise for a \csepgap{} and +% \cseprule{}, where $c_g\in\{c,c{-}1\}$ without or with \cswap{} +% respectively. That is, at first we obtain $c$'s \cctext{} including +% $\cc_c(\dl)$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol! and pass $\cc_c(\dl)$ to +% \!\@makefcolumn! to produce a \fcolumn{} in \!\@outputbox! to be put into +% the inner \!\hbox!. Then we do $f\gets f\lor(\cc_d(\dl)\neq\emptyset)$ +% with $\cc_d(\dl)$ shrunk by \!\@makefcolumn! to let $f$ have +% $\exists{}c\In0\Cto:(\cc_c(\dl)\neq\emptyset)$ at the end of the loop for +% $c$, and then save the \cctext{} into $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@setcurrcolnf! +% because we have no footnotes in $c$. +% +% After the end of the loop, we move $f$ to \CSIndex{if@fcolmade} for +% the termination check of the loop in \!\pcol@flushfloats!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@flushfloats{% + \global\@colht\textheight + \@whilesw\if@fcolmade\fi{% + \global\@fcolmadefalse + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \pcol@iflushfloats\pcol@ncolleft\pcol@ncol\pcol@rightpage + \else + \setbox\pcol@rightpage\box\voidb@x + \fi + \pcol@iflushfloats\z@\pcol@ncolleft\@outputbox + \@outputpage}} +\def\pcol@iflushfloats#1#2#3{\setbox#3\vbox{% + \ifpcol@paired\else\ifnum#1=\z@\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi\fi + \pcol@buildcolseprule\@colht#1#2\@maxdepth \unvbox\@tempboxa + \hb@xt@\textwidth{% + \let\pcol@@hfil\relax + \if@fcolmade \@tempswatrue \else \@tempswafalse \fi + \@tempcntb#1\@whilenum\@tempcntb<#2\do{% + \pcol@swapcolumn\@tempcntb\pcol@currcol#1#2\relax + \pcol@getcurrcol + \@makefcolumn\@deferlist + \pcol@@hfil \hb@xt@\columnwidth{% + \if@fcolmade \box\@outputbox \else \vbox to\@colht{}\fi \hss}% + \ifx\@deferlist\@empty\else \@tempswatrue \fi + \edef\pcol@@hfil{\noexpand\pcol@hfil{\pcol@colsepid}}% + \pcol@setcurrcolnf + \advance\@tempcntb\@ne}% + \if@tempswa \global\@fcolmadetrue \else \global\@fcolmadefalse \fi}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@freshpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Rename \cs{pcol@maxpage} as \cs{pcol@toppage}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add save and restore of \cs{@currbox}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Remove unnecessary assignment of \cs{pcol@currcol}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add argument 0 for the invocations of \cs{pcol@startcolumn} to +% inhibit inserting deferred page-wise footnotes.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@freshpage! is invoked from \!\pcol@output@flush! and +% \!\pcol@output@clear! to start a new page after column flushing. At +% first, we let $p=\pbase=\ptop=0$ and $\PP=\emptyset$ because we know no +% pages are kept. Then we invoke \!\pcol@startpage! to start a new page +% with a \!\def!inition of $\!\pcol@currpage!=|{}|$ to indicate the invoker +% is this macro (i.e., not \!\pcol@opcol!). Then after keeping \!\@colht! +% in $h=\!\pcol@colht!$, we do the followings for each column $c\In0\C$. +% +% First we obtain $c$'s \cctext{} in $\cc_c$ by \!\pcol@getcurrcol! but let +% $p=0$ and $\!\@colroom!=h$, which can be modified by $c'0$ to mean we have +% footnotes whose total height-plus-depth is in the macro, we paint their +% \bground{} by \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! \!\def!ining \!\pcol@bg@footnoteheight! +% with the size and temporarily re\!\def!ining \!\pcol@bg@textheight! to be +% the height-plus-depth of \!\@outputbox! because the foontnotes are at the +% bottom of the box instead of the page. Note that the order of painting is +% right first and then left second if we have \parapag{}es because we refer +% the height-plus-depth of \!\@outputbox! being put into the main vertical +% list making the box $\bot$. Also note that if the right \parapag{}e is +% \npaired, we temporarily increment \!\c@page! in \!\pcol@rightpage! to let +% \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! handle \bginfext{} to side margins correctly. +% Another remark is that we don't modify $\pd=\!\@pagedp!$ and thus it keeps +% $\DP$ in this case, and $f_{sp}$ is kept $\false$. +%  +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add background painting of page-wise footnotes.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \else + \global\pcol@havelastpagetrue + \@tempdima\ht\@outputbox \advance\@tempdima\dp\@outputbox + \xdef\pcol@bg@preposttop@left{\number\@tempdima sp}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \global\let\pcol@bg@preposttop@right\pcol@bg@preposttop@left + \fi + \def\pcol@bg@textheight{\@elt{\ht\@outputbox}\@elt{\dp\@outputbox}}% + \def\reserved@a{% + \ifdim\pcol@fnheight@lpage>\z@ + \def\pcol@bg@footnoteheight{\@elt\pcol@fnheight@lpage}% + \pcol@bg@paintbox{Nn}% + \fi}% + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \global\setbox\pcol@rightpage\vbox{% + \ifpcol@paired\else \advance\c@page\@ne \fi + \reserved@a \unvbox\pcol@rightpage}% + \fi + \topskip\z@ \vbox{\reserved@a \unvbox\@outputbox}% + \fi + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Now we have put almost everything in the \lpage{} but we may still have +% \Scfnote{}s in $\pp^f(\ptop)$ to be merged with those in \postenv. +% Therefore, we \!\insert! them through \!\footins! as a part of \postenv, +% and then do that for deferred footnotes in $\df=\!\pcol@topfnotes!$ +% without using \!\pcol@deferredfootins! because we don't need the height +% capping. +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add insertion of page-wise footnotes to be merged.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifvoid\pcol@footins\else + \pcol@Log\pcol@output@end{insert}\pcol@footins + \pcol@Fb + \insert\footins{\unvbox\pcol@footins}\@cons\@freelist\pcol@footins + \pcol@Fe{output@end(pagefn)}% + \fi + \ifvoid\pcol@topfnotes\else \insert\footins{\unvbox\pcol@topfnotes}\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The following operationss are for clean-up and set-up for the \postenv; +% for all c, return $\cc_c(\vb)$ obtained by \!\pcol@getcurrcol! and +% $\Celt^c\neq\bot$ letting it $\bot$ to \!\@freelist!; reestablish the +% \colorstack{} by \!\pcol@restorecolorstack! for column-0\footnote{ +%  +% It can be any other column.} +%  +% so that the \colorstack{} is just $\cst$ and is rewinded at \Endparacol, +% and let $\cst=\bot$; reload $\cc_d$ for $d=\!\pcol@lastcol!$ being the +% column in which \Endparacol{} occurs to let $\!\everypar!=\cc_d(\ep)$ and +% to let \CSIndex{if@nobreak} and \CSIndex{if@afterindent} have the value +% represented by $\cc_d(\sw)$, so that the first paragraph of the \postenv{} +% is typeset following them\footnote{ +%  +% For rare cases that the last item of the closing environment is a +% sectioning command, but a user has such very unusual usage.}; +%  +% let $\!\pcol@prevdepth!=\pd$ so that it is set to \!\prevdepth! by +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput!; let $\!\@colht!=\!\@colroom!=\!\textheight!$ to +% mean the single-column page does not have any floats so far because those +% produced in or before the environment have already been shipped out, are +% put to the main vertical list packed in \!\@outputbox!, or are in +% \!\@dbldeferlist!. +% +% As for deferred \pwise{} floats produced in the environment, including +% those once put in the \lpage{} but returned to the list by the operation +% described above, we move them to \!\@deferlist! because they are now +% \cwise{} floats. Then we invoke \!\pcol@floatplacement! to +% reinitialize float placement parameters. Finally, if $f_{\it sp}=\true$, +% we invoke \!\@startcolumn! and then repeat invocations of \!\@opcol! and +% \!\@startcolumn! while \fpage{}s are produced, after letting +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\false$ to make \!\@combinefloats! work as +% \LaTeX's original\footnote{ +%  +% Letting $\!\pcol@textfloatsep!=\infty$ is done by \!\pcol@floatplacement!.}. +%  +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add color resetting.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@getcurrcol} for the column specified by +% \cs{pcol@lastcol} to pass \cs{if@nobreak}, \cs{if@afterindent} and +% \cs{everypar} of the column to post-environment stuff.} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@Fb}/\cs{pcol@Fe} pair(s).} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Remove nullification of $\gamma_0^0$ because it is not meaningless +% now, add release of $\gamma_0^c\NEQ\bot$ and then nullification of +% it for all $c$, move color stack reestablishment down to the loop +% with $c$ to ensure $\gamma_0^0\EQ\bot$, and add nullification of +% $\mathit{\Gamma}$.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \pcol@Fb + \pcol@getcurrcol \@cons\@freelist\@currbox + \ifvoid\pcol@ccuse{@box}\else + \@cons\@freelist{\pcol@ccuse{@box}}% + \pcol@ccxdef{\voidb@x}% + \fi + \pcol@Fe{output@end(col)}% + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}% + \pcol@currcol\z@ \pcol@restorecolorstack + \global\setbox\pcol@colorins\box\voidb@x + \pcol@currcol\pcol@lastcol\relax \pcol@getcurrcol + \global\pcol@prevdepth\@pagedp + \global\@colht\textheight + \global\@colroom\textheight + \global\let\@deferlist\@dbldeferlist \gdef\@dbldeferlist{}% + \pcol@floatplacement + \pcol@lastpagefalse + \if@tempswa + \@startcolumn \@whilesw\if@fcolmade\fi{\@opcol\@startcolumn}% + \fi + \pcol@Logend\pcol@output@end +} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Starting Environment} +% \label{sec:imp-startenv} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@invokeoutput} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Let \cs{pcol@prevdepth} have \cs{prevdepth} directly instead of via +% \cs{tempdima}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add logging.} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Move the setting of \cs{linewidth} and \cs{hsize} from +% \cs{pcol@getcurrcol} to this macro and add \cs{parshape}.} +% \changes{v1.21}{2013/06/06} +% {Add zero-clearing of \cs{deadcycles}.} +%  +% Before giving the definition of \env{paracol} environment and commands +% used in it, we define the macro $\!\pcol@invokeoutput!\arg{pen}$ invoked +% from them to make an \!\output!-request with \!\penalty! of +% $\arg{pen}=|\pcol@op@|{\cdot}f$. The macro's structure is similar to that +% for the request sequence in \!\end@float! as follows; insert a \!\penalty! +% of $-10004$ to save the main vertical list in \!\@holdpg!; save +% \!\prevdepth!; insert a \!\vbox! to make it sure the following \!\penalty! +% of $\arg{pen}$ is kept even when we are at the top of a page; and finally +% restore \!\prevdepth!. +% +% A difference is that we zero-clear \!\deadcycles! because it can be reach +% $\!\maxdeadcycles!=100$ easily if a page has many \sync{}ations and many +% columns. Another and more important difference is in the save\slash +% restore of \!\prevdepth!. First, the value of the register is saved in +% our own \!\pcol@prevdepth! instead of \!\@tempdima! by a \!\global! +% assignment so that \!\output!-routine refers to it\footnote{ +%  +% The assignment is not necessary to be done \!\global!ly but we dare to do +% it to make all assignments to \!\pcol@prevdepth! being \!\global! +% consistently.}. +%  +% Second, the value restored to \!\prevdepth! may be different from that we +% just have saved because \!\output!-routine may update \!\pcol@prevdepth! +% to have, for example, the value saved in $\cc_c(\pd)$ when we left from +% $c$ which we are now restarting. +% +% In addition to above, after the invocatoin of \!\output!-routine, we let +% $\!\linewidth!=\w_c-\lrm$ so that the register is shrunk from $\w_c$ by the +% total width of left and right margins of the \env{list}-like environment +% surrounding \env{paracol} if $\lrm=\!\pcol@lrmargin!>0$ to mean that. +% Then if so, we set \!\parshape! to let every line of paragraphs in the +% column $c$ is indented by \!\@totalleftmargin! and has width of +% \!\linewidth!, as \LaTeX's \!\list! does. We also let $\!\hsize!=\w_c$ +% because it should have the width of the column even in a \env{list}-like +% environment. +% +% The macro is invoked from \!\pcol@zparacol! ($f=|start|$), +% \!\pcol@switchcol! for \!\switch~column! and \csenv{}s ($f=|switch|$), +% \!\pcol@visitallcols! for \cscan{} prior to \sync{}ed \cswitch{} and page +% flushing ($f=|switch|$), \!\pcol@flushclear! for \pfcheck{} +% ($f=|switch|$), \!\pcol@com@flushpage! for \!\flushpage! ($f=|flush|$), +% \!\pcol@com@clearpage! for \!\clearpage! ($f=|clear|$), and +% \!\endparacol! ($f=|end|$). +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@op@start} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@op@switch} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@op@flush} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@op@clear} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@op@end} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Starting Environment + +\def\pcol@invokeoutput#1{\deadcycles\z@ + \pcol@Logstart{\pcol@invokeoutput + {#1:\the\pcol@currcol/\the\pcol@nextcol% + \ifnum#1=-10011:\ifpcol@sync s\fi \ifpcol@clear c\fi\fi}}% + \penalty-\@Miv \global\pcol@prevdepth\prevdepth \vbox{}% + \penalty#1\relax \prevdepth\pcol@prevdepth + \linewidth\columnwidth \advance\linewidth-\pcol@lrmargin + \ifdim\pcol@lrmargin>\z@ \parshape\@ne\@totalleftmargin\linewidth \fi + \hsize\columnwidth + \pcol@Logend{\pcol@invokeoutput{#1}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\paracol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Change the order of operations for sake of clarity.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add the mechanism of inter-environment local counter conservation.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Let $\cs{col@number}\EQ1$ instead of $C$ to keep \cs{maketitle} from +% producing title with \cs{twocolumn}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add initialization of \cs{pcol@textfloatsep}, \cs{ifpcol@lastpage}, +% \cs{pcol@firstprevdepth} and \cs{@combinefloats}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Make API commands environment-local and inhibit nesting of +% \texttt{paracol}.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Modify to add the optinal argument $C_L$ and optional +% `\string\texttt{*}' for parallel-paging.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@xparacol} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to let $C_L\EQ C$ if the optional argument $C_L$ is not +% given to \cs{paracol}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@yparacol} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to process the optional `\string\texttt{*}' given with +% the optioal argument $C_L$ of \cs{paracol}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@zparacol} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to add the optinal argument $C_L$ and optional +% `\string\texttt{*}' to \cs{paracol} for parallel-paging and to do +% what had done by \cs{paracol}.} +%  +% The API macro $\!\paracol!|[|\CL|][*]|\Arg{\C}$\oarg{text} is invoked by +% \beginparacol{} to start a \Midx{\env{paracol}} environment. The macro +% sipmly examines the existence of the optional argument $\CL$, whose +% default value $\C$ is given by \!\pcol@xparacol!, to decide the +% number of columns in left \parapag{}es. Then if the optional argument is +% given, \!\pcol@yparacol! examines the existence of `|*|' following it for +% \npaired{} \parapag{}ing to let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}=\false$, while +% \!\paracol! gave the default $\true$ for \paired{} one to the switch. +% Then the all other operations to start the environment is doen by +% \!\pcol@zparacol!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\paracol{\global\pcol@pairedtrue \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@yparacol\pcol@xparacol} +\def\pcol@xparacol#1{\pcol@zparacol[#1]{#1}} +\def\pcol@yparacol[#1]{% + \@ifstar{\global\pcol@pairedfalse \pcol@zparacol[#1]}% + {\pcol@zparacol[#1]}} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% In \!\pcol@zparacol!, after making it sure to be in vertical mode by +% \CSIndex{par}, at first we examine if we are neither in a box by +% \CSIndex{ifinner} nor with ordinary two-column typesetting by +% \CSIndex{if@twocolumn}, and complain about inappropriateness unless our +% expectation is satisfied. Then we let $\CL$ and $\C$ have the value given +% through the corresponding arguments, unless $\CL>\C$ to let us make +% $\CL=\C$ silently. Next we examine $\CL<\C$, and if not we let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}=\true$ regardless the setting in +% \!\pcol@yparacol! because \npaired{} typesetting is meaningless without +% \parapag{}ing. On the other hand, if \npaired{} typesetting is specified, +% we let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}={\false}$ but {\em not} \!\global!ly +% because \cswap{} is meaningless in \npaired{} mode in the environment now +% starting. +% +% Second, we perform the operations done by \!\item! if +% $\CSIndex{if@newlist}=\true$ and $\CSIndex{if@inlabel}\~=\false$ to mean +% the first one in a \env{list}-like environment will appear at the very +% first line of the leftmost column. That is, we invoke \!\@nbitem! if +% $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$, or add a penalty \!\@beginparpenalty! and a +% vertical skip $\!\@topsep!-\!\parskip!-\!\itemsep!$ so that the first +% \!\item! is \!\@topsep! apart from the last line above the environment, +% and then let $\CSIndex{if@newlist}=\false$. The reason why we do these +% operations here is that, if the \env{paracol} environment is enclosed in a +% \env{list}-like environment without anything between two \!\begin! for +% environments, we have to align all first \!\item!s in all columns. That +% is, if we did not do that, the {\em literally first} \!\item! would do +% that resulting in the column having the \!\item! led by the vertical skip +% of \!\@topsep! while others should have ordinary inter-\!\item! skips. +% Therefore, we perform the operations on behalf of all first \!\item!s in +% all columns to have the skip of \!\@topsep! {\em above} the \env{paracol} +% environment we are opening. Note that if \beginparacol{} immediately +% follows a \!\begin! for a \env{trivlist}-like environment, +% $\CSIndex{if@inlabel}=\true$ because the first \!\item! was given in the +% opening macro and thus the operations shown above has already been +% performed. +%  +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add operations for the vertical skips at the beginning of a +% \texttt{list}-like environment.} +% \changes{v1.35-6}{2018/12/31} +% {Add error check with \cs{ifinner} and \cs{if@twocolumn}.} +% \changes{v1.35-2}{2018/12/31} +% {Add $\lnot$\cs{if@inlabel} to the condition to perform operations +% for first \cs{item}.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@zparacol[#1]#2{\par + \ifinner \@parmoderr \fi + \if@twocolumn \PackageError{paracol}{% + Environment paracol cannot work with ordinary two-column + typesetting.}\@ehb\fi + \global\pcol@ncolleft#1\relax \global\pcol@ncol#2\relax + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft>\pcol@ncol \global\pcol@ncolleft\pcol@ncol \fi + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol\else \global\pcol@pairedtrue \fi + \ifpcol@paired\else \pcol@swapcolumnfalse \fi + \if@newlist \if@inlabel\else + \if@nobreak \@nbitem + \else + \addpenalty\@beginparpenalty + \addvspace\@topsep + \addvspace{-\parskip}\addvspace{-\itemsep}% + \fi + \global\@newlistfalse + \fi\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% +% The third operation group is to set up lists for counters as follows. +% First we obtain $\CC=\!\cl@@ckpt!$ to have all counters defined by +% \!\newcounter! and \counter{page}. Then we scan $\CG=\!\pcol@gcounters!$ +% applying \!\pcol@remctrelt! to each element to have +% $\CTL=\!\pcol@counters!$ for all \lcounter{}s by removing all $\cg\in\CG$ +% from $\CC$, and to move $\clist(\cg)=|\cl@|{\cdot}\cg$ to +% $|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\cg$ redefining +% $|\cl@|{\cdot}\cg=\!\pcol@stepcounter!\Arg{\cg}$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +%  +% to clear descendant \lcounter{}s of $\cg$, i.e., those in $\clist(\cg)$. +% +% Next we scan $\CTL$ applying \!\pcol@thectrelt! to each element $\cl\in\CTL$ +% to let $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\~\cl=|\the|{\cdot}\cl$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@thectr@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% so that the former has the {\em default} \lrep{} of $\cl$. The macro +% \!\pcol@thectrelt! also lets +% $|\the|{\cdot}\cl=|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}0$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% if the \lrep{} for $\cl$ and $c=0$ has been defined by +% \!\definethecounter!. This is necessary because in the first visit to the +% leftmost column 0 we will neither invoke \!\pcol@switchcol! nor thus scan +% $\CTL$ with \!\pcol@setctrelt! which defines \lrep{}s, unless a \mctext{} +% is specified with \beginparacol. +% +% Next we give the initial value of $\val_c(\cl)$ for each column $c$ and +% \lcounter{} $\cl\in\CTL$ by the followings enclosed in a group. First we +% scan $\Cc_0$ applying \!\pcol@loadctrelt! to each +% $\cl\in\Cc'_0=\Set{\theta}{\<\theta,\val_0(\theta)\>\in\Cc_0}$ to have +% the value $\val_0(\cl)$ in $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\cl$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +%  +% temporarily. Next we scan $\CTL$ to pick \lcounter{}s $\theta$ such that +% $\Uidx\Val(\theta)\neq\val_0(\theta)$ where $\Val(\theta)$ is the value of +% $\theta$ outside \env{paracol} environment, or $\theta\notin\Cc'_0$, to +% let them be listed in \!\@gtempa!. That is, we pick \lcounter{}s which +% have been updated or defined after the closing of the previous +% \env{paracol}, or everything in $\CTL$ at the first \beginparacol{} because +% $\Cc_0=\emptyset$\footnote{ +%  +% Undefined in fact.}. +%  +% Finally, we invoke \!\pcol@synccounter! giving it \!\@gtempa! as its +% argument to let $\val_c(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ for all $c$ and for each +% $\theta$ in \!\@gtempa!. That is, when \env{paracol} environment appears +% two or more times, the value of a \lcounter{} at the beginning of the +% second or succeeding environment is kept unchanged from that at the end of +% the previous environment, unless it has been updated between them. Note +% that these scans above are enclosed in a group in order to make +% $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\cl$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +%  +% local and thus collected as a garbage at \!\endgroup!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\let\pcol@counters\cl@@ckpt + \let\@elt\pcol@remctrelt \pcol@gcounters + \let\@elt\pcol@thectrelt \pcol@counters + \begingroup + \let\@elt\pcol@loadctrelt \csname pcol@counters0\endcsname + \let\@elt\pcol@cmpctrelt \global\let\@gtempa\@empty \pcol@counters + \pcol@synccounter\@gtempa + \endgroup +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% Fourth, we set up a few \LaTeX's typesetting parameters which should have +% appropriate values in the environment. We let +% $\CSIndex{if@twocolumn}=\true$ so that \textit{float}|*| environments work +% for \pwise{} floats and LaTeX's \!\@addmarginpar! determine the margin +% for marginal notes by \CSIndex{if@firstcolumn} whose truth value is +% determined by our own \!\@addmarginpar!. We also let $\!\col@number!=1$ +% instead of $\C$ so that its (almost surely) sole user \!\maketitle! will +% not produce the title with \!\twocolumn! which cannot be in the +% environment. +% +% Then we invoke $\!\pcol@setcolumnwidth!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\\$ once +% or twice with +% $(\Cfrom,\Cto,r,s)=(0,\CL,\!\pcol@columnratioleft!,\!\pcol@colwidthspecleft!)$ +% always for left \parapag{}e, and with +% $(\CL,\C,\!\pcol@columnratioright!,\!\pcol@colwidthspecright!)$ for right +% one if $\CL<\C$ to define column widths $\w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% and that of \csepgap{}s $\gap_c=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% for all $c\In0\C=\LBRP0\CL\cup\LBRP\CL\C$. +% +% Then we initialize other variables as follows; +% $\lrm=\!\pcol@lrmargin!=\!\textwidth!-\!\linewidth!$ so that, if $\lrm>0$, +% \!\linewidth! for $c$ has $\w_c-\lrm$ reflecting the paragraph shape of the +% \env{list}-like environment surrounding \env{paracol} environment; +% $\!\pcol@topskip!=\!\topskip!$ for the second and succeeding pages; +% $\!\pcol@textfloatsep!=\infty$ to mean we don't have any \sync{}ation +% points so far; $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\false$ because the \spage{} is +% not the last so far; and $\!\pcol@firstprevdepth!=\!\prevdepth!$ in +% decimal integer form for the extreme empty case. +% +% We also make the macro \!\@combinefloats! \!\let!-equal to our own +% \!\pcol@combinefloats! throughout the environment, after saving its +% original definition into \Midx{\!\pcol@@combinefloats!} for processing +% \!\output! request sneaked from outsied of environment, so that our +% customization is in effect for any invocations including those from +% \LaTeX's own macros. Similarly, \!\@addmarginpar! is made \!\let!-equal +% to our own \!\pcol@addmarginpar! while its orginal definition is saved +% into \!\pcol@@addmarginpar! but in this case we need the original for the +% implementaion of our own. On the other hand, \!\end@dblfloat! is simply +% replaced with our own \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! being what \LaTeX{} had had until +% 2014 as discussed in item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-end@dblfloat}) of +% \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}. +%  +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Replace the calculation of \cs{columnwidth} with the call of +% \cs{pcol@setcolumnwidth} and the assignment of $w_0$ to it.} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Modify the setting of \cs{if@firstcolumn} according to +% column-swapping.} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove the setting \cs{columnwidth}, \cs{hsize} and \cs{linewidth} +% because they are properly set in and after \cs{pcol@output@start}.} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the setting of \cs{pcol@lrmargin}.} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the saving of \cs{@combinefloats}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Revise the mechanism to define the width of columns and +% column-separating gaps, and add local overriding definition of +% \cs{@addmarginpar}.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add operations to define the width of columns and column-separating +% gaps in right parallel-pages.} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add replacement of \cs{end@dblfloat} with \cs{pcol@end@dblfloat}.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\@twocolumntrue \col@number\@ne + \pcol@setcolumnwidth\z@\pcol@ncolleft + \pcol@columnratioleft\pcol@colwidthspecleft + \ifnum\pcol@ncolleft<\pcol@ncol + \pcol@setcolumnwidth\pcol@ncolleft\pcol@ncol + \pcol@columnratioright\pcol@colwidthspecright + \fi + \pcol@lrmargin\textwidth \advance\pcol@lrmargin-\linewidth + \global\pcol@topskip\topskip + \global\pcol@textfloatsep\maxdimen + \pcol@lastpagefalse \xdef\pcol@firstprevdepth{\number\prevdepth}% + \let\pcol@@combinefloats\@combinefloats \let\@combinefloats\pcol@combinefloats + \let\pcol@@addmarginpar\@addmarginpar \let\@addmarginpar\pcol@addmarginpar + \let\end@dblfloat\pcol@end@dblfloat +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Fifth, we save the original definition of \!\set@color! into +% \!\pcol@set@color!, and then examine if $\!\set@color!\neq\!\relax!$ +% meaning some coloring package is loaded. If any coloring packages are not +% loaded, we make macros for \bgpaint{}, namely \!\pcol@bg@paintpage!, +% \!\pcol@bg@paintcolumns! and \!\pcol@bg@paintbox!, \!\let!-equal to +% \!\relax! for the first two and to \!\@gobble! for the last so that they do +% nothing without coloring package. +% +% If the coloring is enabled, on the other hand, we redefine \LaTeX's +% \!\set@color! so that it works as \!\pcol@set@color@push! with +% \colorstack. We also prepare the text colring mechanism to let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@inner}=\true$ in every \!\vbox! in the \env{paracol} +% environment as follows. First, we let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@inner}=\false$ +% because we are not in any \!\vbox!es obviously. Then, to use +% \!\everyvbox! for our own pupose, we do the followings; (1) \!\global!ly +% assign a token \Midx{\!\pcol@dummytoken!}, which should never occurs, to +% \!\pcol@everyvbox!; (2) save \!\everyvbox! into \!\pcol@everyvbox! +% locally; (3) let \!\everyvbox! have a \!\the!-reference to +% \!\pcol@everyvbox! and |\pcol@innerture| to let +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@inner}={\true}$; and then (4) make \!\everyvbox! +% \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@everyvbox!. By the last operation (4), any +% \!\everyvbox! appearing in the \env{paracol} environment is replaced with +% \!\pcol@everyvbox! to keep the real \!\everyvbox! from modified nullifying +% our own operation |\pcol@innertrue|. On the other hand, since both +% \!\everyvbox! and \!\pcol@everyvbox! are registers to hold tokens and +% thus any operations applicable to \!\everyvbox! are also applicable to +% \!\pcol@everyvbox!, any updates on \!\everyvbox! and explicit references +% to it are simulated by \!\pcol@everyvbox!. Then the initial tokens given +% to \!\pcol@everyvbox! by the saving operation (2) or tokens given inside +% the environment are correctly processed whenever a \!\vbox! is opened, +% toghether with |\pcol@innertrue| to fulfill our own purpose, because the +% real \!\everyvbox! is let have a \!\the!-reference to \!\pcol@everyvbox! +% by (3). We also reserve the invocation of \!\pcol@restoreeveryvbox! by +% \!\aftergroup! so that the macro is invoked just after \Endparacol{} to +% examine if any \!\global! assignments to \!\everyvbox! has been made in +% the environment. The funny \!\global! assignment (1) is done for this +% examination so that we detect global assignments done in the environment +% having been closed because they should have changed the global value of +% \!\pcol@everyvbox! to something different from \!\pcol@dummytoken!. +% +% Then we continue the case having some coloring package to make \bgpaint{} +% macros \!\pcol@bg@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@paintbox! and +% \!\pcol@bg@paintcolumns! activated by making them \!\let!-equal to thier +% |@@| counterparts namely \!\pcol@bg@@paintpage!, \!\pcol@bg@@paintbox! and +% \!\pcol@bg@@paintcolumns! which implement \bgpaint{}. +% +% Finally we empty the shadow \colorstack{} +% $\cstshadow={}$\!\pcol@colorstack@shadow! to give it initial value +% regardless of the availability of coloring package. +%  +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Add redefinitions of \cs{set@color} and \cs{reset@color}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Add a trick with \cs{everyvbox} to turn on \cs{ifpcol@inner} in +% every \cs{vbox}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Move initial emptying of $\string\mathit{\Gamma}$ from +% \cs{pcol@output@start} to \cs{pcol@zparacol}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Add initial emptying of $\string\hat{\mathit{\Gamma}}$ and $\chi$.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add definition of painting macros dependent to the availability of +% a coloring package.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Remove the initializations of \cs{pcol@colorstack} and +% \cs{pcol@colorstack@buf} because they no longer exist.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \global\let\pcol@set@color\set@color + \ifx\set@color\relax + \let\pcol@bg@paintpage\relax \let\pcol@bg@paintbox\@gobble + \let\pcol@bg@paintcolumns\relax + \else + \let\set@color\pcol@set@color@push + \pcol@innerfalse + \global\pcol@everyvbox{\pcol@dummytoken}% + \pcol@everyvbox\everyvbox + \everyvbox{\the\pcol@everyvbox \pcol@innertrue} + \let\everyvbox\pcol@everyvbox + \aftergroup\pcol@restoreeveryvbox + \let\pcol@bg@paintpage\pcol@bg@@paintpage + \let\pcol@bg@paintbox\pcol@bg@@paintbox + \let\pcol@bg@paintcolumns\pcol@bg@@paintcolumns + \fi + \gdef\pcol@colorstack@shadow{}% +% \end{macrocode} +%  +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add initialization of \cs{pcol@footnotebase} and +% \cs{pcol@nfootnotes}, and redefinitions of \cs{footnote}, +% \cs{footnotemark}, \cs{footnotetext} and \cs{@footnotetext}.} +% +% The sixth settings are for (mainly \mcfnote) footnotes. We initialize two +% footnote-related count registers letting $\bf=\!\pcol@footnotebase!$ have +% \!\c@footnote! and zero-clearing $\nf=\!\pcol@nfootnotes!$. Then we +% redefine \LaTeX's API macros \!\footnote!, \!\footnotemark! and +% \!\footnotetext! to let them be our own \!\pcol@footnote!, +% \!\pcol@footnotemark! and \!\pcol@footnotetext! so that they have +% starred-versions. The other API macro to be redefined, if \Scfnote{} +% typesetting is in effect, is \!\footnoterule! which lets +% $\!\columnwidth!=\!\textwidth!$ before invoking its original version saved +% in \!\pcol@footnoterule! so that it acts as in single-columned typesetting +% rateher than multi-columned. Then we redefine \LaTeX's internal macro +% \!\@footnotetext! letting it be our own \!\pcol@fntext! for encapsulating +% a footnote in a \!\vbox! and for deferred \!\insert!ion with \Scfnote{} +% typesetting. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \pcol@footnotebase\c@footnote \global\pcol@nfootnotes\z@ + \let\footnote\pcol@footnote + \let\footnotemark\pcol@footnotemark + \let\footnotetext\pcol@footnotetext + \ifpcol@scfnote + \def\footnoterule{{\columnwidth\textwidth \pcol@footnoterule}}% + \fi + \let\@footnotetext\pcol@fntext +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Seventh, we let \!\marginpar!, \!\@mn@@marginnote! and \!\@xympar! be our +% own versions \!\pcol@marginpar!, \!\pcol@marginnote! and \!\pcol@xympar! +% respectively for the emulation of \!\marginnote!, saving the original +% version of the first and third into \!\pcol@@marginpar! and +% \!\pcol@@xympar!. Then we inactivate API macros \!\twosided! and +% \!\footnotelayout! together with their backward-compatible macros +% \!\swapcolumninevenpages!, \!\noswapcolumnineven~pages!, +% \!\multi~columnfootnotes!, \!\singlecolumnfootnotes! and +% \!\mergedfootnotes!, so that they commonly invoke \!\pcol@ignore! because +% their inherent operations turning corresponding switches are harmful in +% \env{paracol} environment. Note that the inactivation of \!\twosided! is +% done by redefinition of \!\pcol@twosided! because we need optional +% argument processing by \!\twosided! even when it is inactivated. +%  +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add nullificaion of \cs{[no]swapcolumninevenpages}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add nullificaton of API macros of footnote typesetting definition.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add new API inactivation for \cs{pcol@twosided}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add new API inactivation for \cs{pcol@twosided}.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Add new API inactivation for \cs{footnotelayout}.} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Add local modifications of \cs{marginpar}, \cs{@mn@@marginnote} and +% \cs{@xympar} for the emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\pcol@@marginpar\marginpar \let\marginpar\pcol@marginpar + \let\@mn@@marginnote\pcol@marginnote + \let\pcol@@xympar\@xympar \let\@xympar\pcol@xympar + \def\pcol@twosided[#1]{\pcol@ignore\twosided}% + \def\swapcolumninevenpages{\pcol@ignore\swapcolumninevenpages}% + \def\noswapcolumninevenpages{\pcol@ignore\noswapcolumninevenpages}% + \def\footnotelayout#1{\pcol@ignore\footnotelayout}% + \def\multicolumnfootnotes{\pcol@ignore\multicolumnfootnotes}% + \def\singlecolumnfootnotes{\pcol@ignore\singlecolumnfootnotes}% + \def\mergedfootnotes{\pcol@ignore\mergedfootnotes}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Eigth, we scan the list \!\pcol@localcommands! of $\arg{com}$ being the +% name of commands, e.g., |switchcolumn|, available only in the environment +% or customized for the environment, applying \!\pcol@defcomelt! to each +% $\arg{com}$ to let $|\|\arg{com}=|\pcol@com@|{\cdot}\arg{com}$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\<\string\mathit{com}\>}{\pcol@com@} +%  +% the latter of which is the real implementation of the former. Note that +% the list does not have all \elocal{} API commands but we omit +% \!\column!(|*|) for \env{column}(|*|) environments because their +% implementations \!\pcol@com@column!(|*|) are modified after the first +% invocation. Therefore, we \!\def!ine \!\column!(|*|) to have +% \!\pcol@com@column!(|*|) in their bodies\footnote{ +%  +% We can do this for other commands instead of adhearing to \cs{let} to +% eliminate the execption, but the author loves to use \cs{let} as much as +% possible.}. +%  +% We also give the first \!\def!initions of +% \!\pcol@com@column!(|*|) to let them do nothing but re\!\def!ine +% themselves by \!\pcol@defcolumn! unless +% \!\pcol@com@column*! is given an optional \mctext{} argument which is +% directly processed by \!\pcol@sptext!, if they appear as the first +% \cswitch{} command\slash environment after \beginparacol. Then we +% re\!\def!ine \!\paracol! itself so that it will complain of illegal +% nesting by \!\PackageError!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@elt\pcol@defcomelt \pcol@localcommands + \def\column{\pcol@com@column}% + \@namedef{column*}{\@nameuse{pcol@com@column*}}% + \global\let\pcol@com@column\pcol@defcolumn + \global\@namedef{pcol@com@column*}{\pcol@defcolumn + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@sptext\relax}% + \def\paracol##1{\PackageError{paracol}{% + Environment paracol cannot be nested.}\@eha}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Ninth, we let \!\output! have our output routine \!\pcol@output! as its sole +% token, and then make \!\output! request with +% $\!\penalty!=\!\pcol@op@start!$ by \!\pcol@invokeoutput! to invoke +% \!\pcol@output@start! for initialization, after letting +% $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to make it sure that any lists can be manipulated +% without unexpected application of a macro to their elements. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \output{\pcol@output}% + \let\@elt\relax + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@start +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Tenth and finally, we let $\!\pcol@nextcol!=0$ in case \beginparacol{} has +% the optional argument for \mctext{}, and invoke \!\pcol@sptext! if it has. +% Otherwise, we invoke $|\pcol@colpream|{\cdot}0$ being the \colpream{} of +% the first column 0, which will be invoked by \!\pcol@switchcol! if +% \mctext{} is given. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colpream} +%  +% \changes{v1.35-5}{2018/12/31} +% {Add the invocation of $\cs{pcol@colpream}{\cdot}0$.} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} + \pcol@nextcol\z@ + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@sptext{\@nameuse{pcol@colpream0}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@paracol} +% The macro \!\pcol@paracol! has the definition of \!\paracol!, which is +% redefined in the macro itself, so that the only referrer +% \!\pcol@icolumncolor! examines if it appears in \env{paracol}, i.e., +% $\!\pcol@paracol!\neq\!\paracol!$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\pcol@paracol\paracol + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\thecolumn} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to let users know which column they are working in.} +%  +% The API macro \!\thecolumn! gives the value of \!\pcol@currcol! to users +% to let them know which column they are working in so that, for example, +% they do some column-dependent opreations. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\thecolumn{\number\pcol@currcol} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ignore} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for nullificaion of \cs{[no]swapcolumninevenpages}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for nullificaton of API macros of footnote typesetting +% definition.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@ignore!$\arg{macro}$ is to complain that the +% $\arg{macro}$ being one of the followings appears in \env{paracol} +% environment. +%  +% \begin{itemize}\raggedright\item[] +% \!\twosided!, +% \!\swapcolumninevenpages!, +% \!\noswapcolumninevenpages!, +% \!\footnotelayout!, +% \!\multicolumnfootnotes!, +% \!\singlecolumnfootnotes!, +% \!\mergedfootnotes! +% \end{itemize} +%  +% That is, these macros, except for \!\twosided!, are re\!\def!ined in +% \!\pcol@zparacol! to invoke this macro with the argument identifying +% themselves, which is shown in the warning message given by +% \!\PackageWarning!. As for \!\twosided!, the target of the +% re\!\def!inition is \!\pcol@twosided! so that its optional argument is +% captured before the complaint. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@ignore#1{\PackageWarning{paracol}{The command \string#1 is not + effective in paracol environment and thus ignored}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@localcommands} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to make API commands environment-local.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Add \cs{@elt}\string\texttt{\char`\{cleardoublepage\char`\}} for +% \cs{cleardoublepage}.}  +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@localcommands! is the list of the names of the following +% {\em\Uidx\elocal} API commands (or {\em\Uidx\lcommand{}s} in short) and is +% solely referred to by \!\pcol@zparacol!. +%  +% \begin{center}\begin{tabular}{llll} +% \!\switchcolumn!& +% \!\endcolumn!(|*|)& +% \!\nthcolumn!(|*|)&\!\endnthcolumn!(|*|)\\ +% \!\leftcolumn!(|*|)&\!\endleftcolumn!(|*|)& +% \!\rightcolumn!(|*|)&\!\endrightcolumn!(|*|)\\ +% \!\flushpage!& +% \!\clearpage!& +% \!\cleardoublepage!\\ +% \!\synccounter!& +% \!\syncallcounters! +% \end{tabular}\end{center} +%  +% Note that we omit \!\column!(|*|) from the list as discussed in the +% description of \!\pcol@zparacol!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@localcommands{% + \@elt{switchcolumn}% + \@elt{endcolumn}\@elt{endcolumn*}% + \@elt{nthcolumn}\@elt{endnthcolumn}\@elt{nthcolumn*}\@elt{endnthcolumn*}% + \@elt{leftcolumn}\@elt{endleftcolumn}\@elt{leftcolumn*}\@elt{endleftcolumn*}% + \@elt{rightcolumn}\@elt{endrightcolumn}% + \@elt{rightcolumn*}\@elt{endrightcolumn*}% + \@elt{flushpage}\@elt{clearpage}\@elt{cleardoublepage}% + \@elt{synccounter}\@elt{syncallcounters}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcomelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to make API commands environment-local.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@defcomelt! is invoked solely from \!\pcol@zparacol! to be +% applied to each element $\arg{com}$ in \!\pcol@localcommands!. Two +% lengthy \!\let!s with \!\expandafter!s are for doing +% $\!\let!|\|\arg{com}|=\pcol@com@|{\cdot}\arg{com}$ to bind the \elocal{} +% API command $|\|\arg{com}$ and its implementation +% $|\pcol@com@|{\cdot}\arg{com}$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\<\string\mathit{com}\>}{\pcol@com@} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@defcomelt#1{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a\csname pcol@com@#1\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname\reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@dbldeferlist} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add top-level definition in case that future \LaTeX{} removes it at +% all.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@end@dblfloat} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Added to go back to old mechanism.} +% As discussed in \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}, 2015 version of \LaTeX{} +% no longer uses \!\@dbldeferlist! but the macro itself is still kept in +% \LaTeX{}. However it will be removed in future to make the first +% \!\@cons! with it resulting in an error. Therefore, here we have its top +% level definition with empty duplicatedly in case of its future +% elimination. The macro \!\end@dblfloat!, on the other hand, is replaced +% with a new definition in the new \LaTeX{} of course, and thus we define +% \!\pcol@end@dblfloat! here to keep its old definition and to replace the +% new one in \env{paracol} environment as discussed in +% item-(\ref{item:ovv-float-end@dblfloat}) of \secref{sec:imp-ovv-float}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\gdef\@dbldeferlist{} +\def\pcol@end@dblfloat{% + \if@twocolumn + \@endfloatbox + \ifnum\@floatpenalty <\z@ + \@largefloatcheck + \@cons\@dbldeferlist\@currbox + \fi + \ifnum \@floatpenalty =-\@Mii \@Esphack\fi + \else + \end@float + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{6} +% \section{Column Width Setting} +% \label{sec:imp-cwidth} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the secion ``Column Width Setting'' mainly to discuss the new +% API \cs{setcolumnwidth}.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\columnratio} +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Introduced to specify column width fractions.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add optional second argument for fractions in right +% parallel-pages.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@icolumnratio} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to process the optional second argument of +% \cs{columnratio}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@columnratioleft} +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Introduced to keep column width fractions.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@columnratio} to clarify it has fractions for +% left parallel-pages.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@columnratioright} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep column width fractions for right +% parallel-pages.} +%  +% The API macro $\!\columnratio! +% \Arg{r^l_0,r^l_1,\cdots,r^l_{k^l-1}}|[|r^r_0,r^r_1,\cdots,r^r_{k^r-1}|]|$ +% defines the column width fraction $r^l_c$ for column $c$ in left +% \parapag{}es and optionally $r^r_c$ for those in right \parapag{}es. This +% macro and its callee \!\pcol@icolumnratio! just \!\global!y \!\def!ine +% macros \!\pcol@columnratioleft! and \!\pcol@columnratioright! whose +% bodies have the first and second arguments respectively, or commonly have +% the first if the second optional one is not given, so that they are given +% to \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! as its third argument through +% \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth! invoked in \!\pcol@zparacol!. Both of +% \!\pcol@columnratioleft! and \!\pcol@columnratioright! are initialized to +% be empty so that all columns have same width and are separated by +% \!\columnsep! as default. Note that \!\pcol@columnratioleft! can be made +% \!\let!-equial to \!\relax! by the related API macro \!\setcolumnwidth! so +% that \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth! knows which of specifications given by two +% API macros is effective and chooses \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! or +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Column Width Setting + +\def\columnratio#1{\global\let\pcol@colwidthspecleft\relax + \gdef\pcol@columnratioleft{#1}% + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@icolumnratio{\gdef\pcol@columnratioright{#1}}} +\def\pcol@icolumnratio[#1]{\gdef\pcol@columnratioright{#1}} +\columnratio{}\relax + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\setcolumnwidth} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to specify column widths and column-separating gaps more +% detailedly.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@isetcolumnwidth} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to process the optional second argument of +% \cs{setcolumnwidth}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@colwidthspecleft} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep column width specifications for left +% parallel-pages.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@colwidthspecright} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep column width specifications for right +% parallel-pages.} +%  +% The API macro $\!\setcolumnwidth! +% \Arg{s^l_0,s^l_1,\cdots,s^l_{k^l-1}}|[|s^r_0,s^r_1,\cdots,s^r_{k^r-1}|]|$ +% defines the column width specification $s^l_c$ for column $c$ in left +% \parapag{}es and optionally $s^r_c$ for those in right \parapag{}es, where +% each specification $s^x_c$ has the form of $|[|w_c|][/[|g_c|]]|$ for width +% and gap specifier $\w_c$ and $\gap_c$. After \!\let!ting +% $\!\pcol@columnratioleft!=\!\relax!$ to disable the setting by +% \!\columnratio! and to enable that done by this macro, the macro and its +% callee \!\pcol@isetcolumnwidth! just \!\global!y \!\def!ine macros +% \!\pcol@colwidthspecleft! and \!\pcol@colwidthspecright! whose bodies have +% the first and second arguments respectively, or commonly have the first if +% the second optional one is not given, so that they are given to +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s! as its fourth argument through +% \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth! invoked in \!\pcol@zparacol!. Both of +% \!\pcol@colwidthspecleft! and \!\pcol@colwidthspecright! are initially +% undefined because the default specification is given by +% \!\columnratio!|{}|. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\setcolumnwidth#1{\global\let\pcol@columnratioleft\relax + \gdef\pcol@colwidthspecleft{#1}% + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@isetcolumnwidth{\gdef\pcol@colwidthspecright{#1}}} +\def\pcol@isetcolumnwidth[#1]{\gdef\pcol@colwidthspecright{#1}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcolumnwidth} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Move original functions to \cs{pcol@setcolumnwidth@r} and redefine +% this macro to switch \cs{pcol@setcolumnwidth@r} and +% \cs{pcol@setcolumnwidth@s}.} +%  +% \begin{Sloppy}{1500} +% The macro $\!\pcol@setcolumnwidth!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\arg{ratio}\arg{spec}$ +% is invoked solely from \!\pcol@zparacol! but can be twice, with; +% $$ +% (\Cfrom,\Cto,\arg{ratio},\arg{spec})= +% (0,\CL,\!\pcol@columnratioleft!,\!\pcol@colwidthspecleft!) +% $$ +% always and with; +% $$ +% (\Cfrom,\Cto,\arg{ratio},\arg{spec})= +% (\CL,\C,\!\pcol@columnratioright!,\!\pcol@colwidthspecright!) +% $$ +% if $\CL<\C$ for \parapag{}ing. The macro simply invokes +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s! if $\!\pcol@columnratioleft!=\!\relax!$ because +% \!\setcolumnwidth! did so, or \!\pcol@setcolwidth@r! otherwise, with all +% arguments given by \!\pcol@zparacol!. +% \end{Sloppy} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcolumnwidth{% + \ifx\pcol@columnratioleft\relax \let\reserved@a\pcol@setcolwidth@s + \else \let\reserved@a\pcol@setcolwidth@r + \fi + \reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcolwidth@r} +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Introduced to calculate $w_c$.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Renamed from \cs{pcol@setcolumnwidth} to make it clear what the +% marco works for.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add arguments $C^0$, $C^1$, $\langle\string\mathit{ratio}\rangle$ +% and $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ for columns in right +% parallel-pages.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add setting of $g_c\EQ\cs{pcol@columnsep}{\cdot}c=\cs{columnsep}.} +%  +% \begin{Hfuzz}{0.3pt}% +% The macro $\!\pcol@setcolwidth@r!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\arg{ratio}\arg{spec}$ +% is invoked solely from \!\pcol@zparacol! through \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth! +% once or twice with the arguments described in the explanation of the +% latter macro. The macro calculates $\w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% for all $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$, from the fractions $r_0$, $r_1$, \ldots, +% $r_{k-1}$ given through the third argument $\arg{ratio}$, which was given +% to \!\columnratio! and then kept in \!\pcol@columnratioleft! or +% \!\pcol@columnratioright!. The macro also lets +% $\gap_c=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c=\!\columnsep!$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% for all $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% +% First, we calculate $W=\!\textwidth!-(\Cto-\Cfrom-1)\times\!\columnsep!$ +% being the sum of $\w_c$ for all $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$. Then we let +% $\w_c=r_d{}W$ and $\gap_c=\!\columnsep!$ for all $c\In\Cfrom{k'}$ where +% $k'=\min(k,\Cto-1)$, in the \!\@for! loop scanning $r_d$ for all +% $d=c-\Cfrom\In0k$. Finally, we let +% $\w_c=(W-\sum_{d=\Cfrom}^{k'-1}w_d)/(\Cto-\Cfrom-k')$ and +% $\gap_c=\!\columnsep!$ for all $c\In{k'}\Cto$. Note that +% $|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ and $|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$ are macros +% having the integer representations of $\w_c$ and $\gap_c$ with the unit +% |sp|. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcolwidth@r#1#2#3#4{% + \@tempcntb#2\advance\@tempcntb-#1\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne + \@tempdima-\columnsep \multiply\@tempdima\@tempcntb + \advance\@tempdima\textwidth \@tempdimb\@tempdima + \@tempcnta#1\relax\@tempcntb#2\advance\@tempcntb\m@ne + \@for\reserved@a:=#3\do{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta<\@tempcntb + \@tempdimc\reserved@a\@tempdima + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@columnwidth\number\@tempcnta\endcsname{% + \number\@tempdimc sp}% + \global\@namedef{pcol@columnsep\number\@tempcnta}{\columnsep}% + \advance\@tempdimb-\@tempdimc + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne + \fi}% + \@tempcntb#2\advance\@tempcntb-\@tempcnta + \divide\@tempdimb\@tempcntb + \@whilenum\@tempcnta<#2\do{% + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@columnwidth\number\@tempcnta\endcsname{% + \number\@tempdimb sp}% + \global\@namedef{pcol@columnsep\number\@tempcnta}{\columnsep}% + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}% +} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcolwidth@s} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to calculate $w_c$ and $g_c$.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@c} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to process column width components in the argument +% $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@s} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to process column-separating gap components in the +% argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@filunit} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define the unit of infinite stretch factors in the +% argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +%  +% \begin{Hfuzz}{0.3pt}% +% The macro $\!\pcol@setcolwidth@s!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\arg{ratio}\arg{spec}$ +% is invoked solely from \!\pcol@zparacol! through \!\pcol@setcolumnwidth! +% once or twice with the arguments described in the explanation of the +% latter macro. The macro calculates $\w_c=|\pcol@columnwidth|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +%  +% for all $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$ and $\gap_c=|\pcol@columnsep|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% for all $c\In\Cfrom{\Cto{-}1}$, from the column\slash gap specifications +% $s_0$, $s_1$, \ldots, $s_{k-1}$ given through the fourth argument +% $\arg{spec}$, which was given to \!\setcolumnwidth! and then kept in +% \!\pcol@colwidthspecleft! or \!\pcol@colwidthspecright!. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% +% Each specification $s_d$ for $\w_c$ and $\gap_c$ where $c=\Cfrom+d$ has +% the form $|[|w'_d|][/[|g'_d|]]|$ to specify the natural width $w^n_d$ and +% $g^n_d$ and inifite stretch factor $w^f_d$ and $g^f_d$ of column\slash gap +% sepcfication as follows; +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% w^n_d&=&\cases{0&$w'_d=\emptyset$\cr +% 0&$w'_d=f\!\fill!$\cr +% \mathit{natural}(w'_d)&otherwise}\qquad +% w^f_d = \cases{1&$w'_d=\emptyset$\cr +% f&$w'_d=f\!\fill!$\cr +% \mathit{stretch}(w'_d)&otherwise}\\[1ex] +% g^n_d&=&\cases{\!\columnsep!&$g'_d=\emptyset$\cr +% 0&$g'_d=f\!\fill!$\cr +% \mathit{natural}(g'_d)&otherwise}\qquad +% g^f_d = \cases{0&$g'_d=\emptyset$\cr +% f&$g'_d=f\!\fill!$\cr +% \mathit{stretch}(g'_d)&otherwise} +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% where $\mathit{natural}(x)$ is the natural width of the skip $x$ and +% $\mathit{stretch}(x)$ is the infinite stretch factor of $x$. Note that +% any finite stretch factors or any shirnk factors do not affect them, and +% infinite strech units |fil|, |fill| and |filll| are not distinguished. +% From factors above, we determine $w_c$ and $\gap_c$ as follows; +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% W&=&\sum_{d=0}^{m-2}(w^n_d+g^n_d)+w^n_{m-1}\\ +% F&=&\sum_{d=0}^{m-2}(w^f_d+g^f_d)+w^f_{m-1}\\ +% x_c&=&\cases{(\WT/W)x^n_{c-\Cfrom}&$W\geq\WT\;\lor\;F\leq0$\cr +% x^n_{c-\Cfrom}+(x^f_{c-\Cfrom}/F)(\WT-W)&$W<\WT\;\land\;F>0$} +% \qquad(x\in{\w,\gap}) +% \end{eqnarray*} +% where $\WT=\!\textwidth!$ and $m=\Cto-\Cfrom$. +% +% To perform the assignments above, the macro at first invoke +% $\!\pcol@setcw@scan!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\~\ARg{spec}$ letting +% $\!\pcol@setcw@c!=\!\pcol@setcw@s!=\!\pcol@setcw@accumwd!$ and +% \!\pcol@setcw@filunit!${}=1$\,pt to scan $s_d$ for all $d\In0{m}$ and to +% accumulate $W+g^n_{m-1}$ and $F+g^f_{m-1}$ in \!\dimen@! and \!\dimen@ii! +% and then subtract $g^n_{m-1}$ and $g^f_{m-1}$ from them to have $W$ and +% $F$. Note that $F$ is represented by a dimension with the unit of pt by +% the definition of \!\pcol@setcw@filunit!. Then we invoke +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! to calculate $(\WT/W)=\!\pcol@setcw@scale!$ and +% $(\WT-W)/F=\!\@tempdimb!$. Finally we scan $s_d$ again but in this case +% we let $\!\pcol@setcw@c!=\!\pcol@setcw@set!|{width}|$, +% $\!\pcol@setcw@s!=\!\pcol@setcw@set!|{sep}|$ and +% $\!\pcol@setcw@filunit!=\!\@tempdimb!=(\WT-W)/F$ to let $w_c$ and $\gap_c$ +% have the values shown above. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcolwidth@s#1#2#3#4{\begingroup + \dimen@\z@ \dimen@ii\z@ \def\pcol@setcw@filunit{\@ne\p@}% + \let\pcol@setcw@c\pcol@setcw@accumwd \let\pcol@setcw@s\pcol@setcw@accumwd + \pcol@setcw@scan#1#2{#4}% + \advance\dimen@-\@tempdima \advance\dimen@ii-\@tempdimb + \pcol@setcw@calcfactors + \def\pcol@setcw@c{\pcol@setcw@set{width}}% + \def\pcol@setcw@s{\pcol@setcw@set{sep}}% + \let\pcol@setcw@filunit\dimen@ii + \pcol@setcw@scan#1#2{#4}% + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@scan} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to scan the argument +% $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@setcw@scan!\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>\~\ARg{spec}$ is to scan +% first $m=\Cto-\Cfrom$ elements in $\arg{spec}=s_0,s_1,\ldots$ being the +% column\slash gap specifications given to \!\setcolumnwidth!. At first we +% add `,' as many as $m$ to the tail of $\arg{spec}$ to make it sure the +% resulting $\arg{spec}$ has $m$ or more elements. Then we scan all +% elements in the extended $\arg{spec}$ by a \!\@for! loop having many +% \!\expandafter! but equivalent to; +%  +% \begin{quote} +% |\@for\reserved@a:=|$s_0,s_1,\ldots$|\do{|\textit{body}|}| +% \end{quote} +%  +% In the \textit{body} above, we invoke +% $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec!\;s_i|//|\!\@nil!$ to parse $s_i$ to have $w^n_i$, +% $w^f_i$ to be processed by \!\pcol@setcw@c! and $g^n_i$ and $g^f_i$ by +% \!\pcol@setcw@s!, for all $i\In0m$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcw@scan#1#2#3{\def\reserved@a{#3}% + \@tempcnta#1\relax \@whilenum\@tempcnta<#2\do{ + \edef\reserved@a{\reserved@a,}\advance\@tempcnta\@ne}% + \@tempcnta#1\relax + \expandafter\@for\expandafter\reserved@a\expandafter:\expandafter=\reserved@a + \do{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta<#2\relax + \expandafter\pcol@setcw@getspec\reserved@a//\@nil + \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@getspec} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to parse an element in the argument +% $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@getspec@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to parse an element in the argument +% $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@fill} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to extract \cs{fill} factor from an element in the +% argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +%  +% The macro +% $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec!\|/|\|/|\arg{garbage}\!\@nil!$ is +% used solely in \!\pcol@setcw@scan! to parse a column\slash gap +% specification $s_d=|[|w'_d|][/[|g'_d|]]|$, to extract factors $w_d^n$, +% $w_d^f$, $g_d^n$ and $g_d^f$, and to process width factors by +% \!\pcol@setcw@c! and gap factors by \!\pcol@setcw@s!. Since the macro is +% invoked with arguments in the form of $s_d|//|\!\@nil!$, if $s_d$ has +% `|/|' in it $w'_d$ and $g'_d$ should have everything preceeding and +% following the `|/|' respectively while $\arg{garbage}$ should have the +% redundant `|/|'. Otherwise, i.e., if $s_d$ does not have `|/|', +% $w'_d=s_d$ and $g'_d=\emptyset$ while $\arg{garbage}=\emptyset$\footnote{ +%  +% If $s_d$ have two or more `|/|', everything following the second one is +% thrown away into $\arg{garbage}$ together with `|//|'. Therefore we could +% check if $s_d$ has at most one `|/|' by examining $\arg{garbage}$ but we +% abandon it simply ingoring $\arg{garbage}$.}. +%  +% Therefore, we invoke $\!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i!\arg{default}\Arg{x'_d}$ twice +% with $(\arg{default},x'_d)=(\!\fill!,w'_d)$ for a column and +% $(\arg{default},x'_d)=(\!\columnsep!,g'_d)$ for a gap, and \!\pcol@setcw@c! +% and \!\pcol@setcw@s! after each invocation respectively. +% +% In this macro, at first we scan all tokens in $x'_d$ by \!\@tfor! to +% remove all space tokens in it\footnote{ +%  +% A proper skip specification and ``$f\!\fill!$'' is always proper without +% space tokens in them.}. +%  +% Then if $x'_d$ after the space removal has nothing, we let +% $x'_d=\arg{default}$. Next we examine if $x'_d=f\!\fill!$ in a trickey +% way by temporarily \!\let!ting $\!\@gtempa!=\!\relax!$, defining \!\fill! +% as ``|1pt|\!\gdef!\!\@gtempa!|{}|'' and making an assignment +% ``\!\@tempskipa! $x'_d$''. That is, if $x'_d=f\!\fill!$, \!\@tempskipa! +% will have $f{\cdot}|1pt|$ being a proper dimension and \!\@gtempa! is made +% empty. Otherwise, \!\@tempskipa! should have $x'_d$ which must be a +% proper skip and \!\@gtempa! remains unchanged from \!\relax!. Therefore, +% if $\!\@gtempa!=\!\relax!$ we let $\!\@tempskipa!=x'_d$ again\footnote{ +%  +% Because the first assignment is done in a group.}. +%  +% Otherwise, we invoke $\!\pcol@setcw@fill!\;x'_d$ to let +% \!\@tempskipa! have $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ f\,|fil|$ where $f$ is replaced by 1 +% if $f=\emptyset$. +% +% Now \!\@tempskipa! has $x_d^n$ as its natural component and may have some +% infinite strectch component $x_d^f$ specified explicitly or with \!\fill!. +% Therefore, we assign \!\@tempskipa! to \!\@tempdima! so that it has +% $x_d^n$, and then, after adding 0\,|pt| |plus| 1000\,|pt| |minus| +% 1000\,|pt| to \!\@tempskipa! to make it sure it has both strech and shrink +% components\footnote{ +%  +% Almost sure becaues they could be $-1000$\,pt, but we ignore the +% possibility.} +%  +% keeping infinite stretch factor if any, invoke \!\pcol@extract@fil! giving +% it \!\the!-expansion of \!\@tempskipa! as the argument to let +% $\!\@tempdimb!=x_d^f\times\!\pcol@setcw@filunit!$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcw@getspec#1/#2/#3\@nil{% + \pcol@setcw@getspec@i\fill{#1}\pcol@setcw@c + \pcol@setcw@getspec@i\columnsep{#2}\pcol@setcw@s} +\def\pcol@setcw@getspec@i#1#2{% + \def\reserved@a{}% + \@tfor\reserved@b:=#2\do{\edef\reserved@a{\reserved@a\reserved@b}} + \ifx\reserved@a\@empty \let\reserved@a#1\fi + \let\@gtempa\relax + {\def\fill{1\p@\gdef\@gtempa{}}\@tempskipa\reserved@a}% + \ifx\@gtempa\relax \@tempskipa\reserved@a\relax + \else \expandafter\pcol@setcw@fill\reserved@a + \fi + \@tempdima\@tempskipa + \advance\@tempskipa0\p@\@plus\@m\p@\@minus\@m\p@\relax + \expandafter\pcol@extract@fil\the\@tempskipa\@nil} +\def\pcol@setcw@fill#1\fill{\def\reserved@b{#1}% + \ifx\reserved@b\@empty \let\reserved@b\@ne \fi + \@tempskipa0\p@\@plus\reserved@b fil\relax} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@accumwd} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to accumulate natural and fill factors of the element in +% the argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@setcw@accumwd! is made \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@setcw@c! +% and \!\pcol@setcw@s! commonly and thus invoked from \!\pcol@setcw@getspec! +% with setting $\!\@tempdima!=x_d^n$ and $\!\@tempdimb!=x_d^f\times1\,|pt|$, +% where $x\in\{w,g\}$. The macro simply add them to \!\dimen@! and +% \!\dimen@ii! repsectively to accumurate $x_d^n$ and $x_d^f$ in them. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcw@accumwd{\advance\dimen@\@tempdima \advance\dimen@ii\@tempdimb} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@set} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define $w_c$ and $g_c$ according to the element in +% the argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@setcw@set!\ARg{wors}$ is made the body of +% \!\pcol@setcw@c! with $\arg{wors}=|width|$ and of +% \!\pcol@setcw@s! with $\arg{wors}=|sep|$ and thus invoked from +% \!\pcol@setcw@getspec! with setting $\!\@tempdima!=x_d^n$ and +% $$ +% (\!\pcol@setcw@scale!,\!\@tempdimb!) +% \in\{(\emptyset,\,(x_d^f/F)(\WT-W)),\;(\WT/W,\,0)\} +% $$ +% Therefore, we calculate +% $x_c=\!\pcol@setcw@scale!\times\!\@tempdima!+\!\@tempdimb!$ and +% \!\xdef!ine $|\pcol@column|{\cdot}\{\cdot}c$ to let it have the +% integer representation of $x_c$ with the unit |sp|. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnwidth} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@columnsep} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcw@set#1{% + \@tempdima\pcol@setcw@scale\@tempdima \advance\@tempdima\@tempdimb + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@column#1\number\@tempcnta\endcsname{% + \number\@tempdima sp}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@calcfactors} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to caclulate scaling and stretch factors from +% the argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@calcf} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to caclulate scaling or stretch factor from +% the argument $\langle\string\mathit{spec}\rangle$ of +% \cs{pcol@setcolwidth@s}.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Capitalize the first word of the error message for consistency.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setcw@scale} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have the scaling factor of $w_c$ and $g_c$.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@setcw@calcfactors! is used solely in +% \!\pcol@setcolwidth@s! to calculate $\phi_s=\!\pcol@setcw@scale!$ and +% $\phi_f=\!\dimen@ii!$ as follows +% $$ +% (\phi_s,\phi_f)=\cases{(\WT/\W,\;0)& $W\geq\WT\;\lor\;F\leq0$\cr +% (1,\;(\WT-W)/F)&$W<\WT\;\land\;F>0$} +% $$ +% where $W=\!\dimen@!$, $F\times1\,|pt|=\!\dimen@ii!$ and $\WT=\!\textwidth!$, +% and $\phi_s=1$ is represented by empty body of \!\pcol@setcw@scale!. +% First we deal with the special and trivial case of $W=\WT$ to let +% $\phi_s=1$ and $\phi_f=0$ so as to avoid arithmetic error in the +% calculation of $\WT/W$. If $W\neq\WT$ on the other hand, we calculate +% $\WT/W$ by $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\<\WT\>\\<\phi_s\>$ to have a +% provisional result. Then if $W<\WT$ and $F>0$, we let $\phi_s=1$ and +% invoke \!\pcol@setcw@calcf! again giving it $(\WT-W)$ and $F\times1\,|pt|$ +% but throw away the result $(\WT-W)/(F\times1\,|pt|)$ because \!\@tempdimb! +% should have $(\WT-W)/F$ which is then set into $\phi_f=\!\dimen@ii!$. +% Otherwise, we keep the provisional result of $\phi_s$ as the final one and +% let $\phi_f=\!\dimen@ii!=0$. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@setcw@calcf!\\\$ caclulates $z\approx x/y$ +% and let $\!\@tempdimb!=Z=z\times1\,|pt|$ as follows. First we find the +% following three parameters. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% k_1&=&\min\Set{k}{k\geq0,\;x\cdot2^k\geq2^{13}\,|pt|}\\ +% k_2&=&\max\Set{k}{y\bmod2^k=0}\\ +% k_3&=&\min\Set{k}{k\geq0,\;\lceil y/2^{k_2+k}\rceil\leq2^{15}} +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% With these parameters, we calculate $z'=\lfloor(x\cdot2^{k_1})/\lceil +% y/2^{k_2+k_3}\rceil\rfloor$ to have a good approximation of +% $(x/y)\cdot2^{k}$ where $k=k_1+k_2+k_3$ without arithmetic overflow. Then +% if $z'/2^k\geq2^{14}$ or in other words $Z$ is larger than \!\maxdimen!, +% we complain that by \!\PackageError! and, in case a user dare to +% continue the typesetting process, we let $Z=10000\,|pt|$. Otherwise, we +% calculate $Z=(z'/2^k)\cdot2^{16}=z'\cdot2^{16-k}$ to have it in +% \!\@tempdimb! by $Z=z'\times2^{16-k}$ if $k<16$, or by $Z=z'/2^{k-16}$ +% otherwise. Finally we invoke \!\pcol@extract@pt! giving it +% \!\the!-representaion of $Z$ to have $z$. +% +% Note that it is assured $z\leq x/y$ regardless of successfulness of the +% calculation and thus the scaling $\phi_s x_d^n$ and strething +% $x_d^n+\phi_f x_d^f$ cannot exceed their exact value to make it also sure +% that $\sum_{c=\Cfrom}^{\Cto-2}(\w_c+\gap_c)+\w_{\Cto-1}\leq\WT$ and thus +% the series of columns and \csepgap{}s should not cause overfull when a +% page is shipped out with \!\hfil! added to each \csepgap{} for underfull +% avoidance. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setcw@calcfactors{% + \ifdim\dimen@=\textwidth \def\pcol@setcw@scale{}\dimen@ii\z@ + \else + \pcol@setcw@calcf\textwidth\dimen@\pcol@setcw@scale + \ifdim\dimen@<\textwidth \ifdim\dimen@ii>\z@ + \def\pcol@setcw@scale{}% + \@tempdimc\textwidth \advance\@tempdimc-\dimen@ + \pcol@setcw@calcf\@tempdimc\dimen@ii\reserved@a \dimen@ii\@tempdimb + \else \dimen@ii\z@ \fi + \else \dimen@ii\z@ \fi + \fi} +\def\pcol@setcw@calcf#1#2#3{% + \@tempdimb#1\@tempdima#2\@tempcnta\z@ + \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@ \@tempdima1sp\relax\fi + \@whiledim\@tempdimb<8192\p@\do{% + \multiply\@tempdimb\tw@ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}% + \@tempdimc\@tempdima + \@whiledim\@tempdima=\@tempdimc\do{% + \divide\@tempdimc\tw@ \multiply\@tempdimc\tw@ + \ifdim\@tempdima=\@tempdimc + \divide\@tempdima\tw@ \divide\@tempdimc\tw@ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne + \fi} + \advance\@tempdima-1sp\relax + \@whilenum\@tempdima>32768\do{\divide\@tempdima\tw@ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}% + \advance\@tempdima1sp\relax + \divide\@tempdimb\@tempdima \@tempdimc\@tempdimb \@tempcntb\@tempcnta + \@whilenum\@tempcntb>\z@\do{\divide\@tempdimc\tw@ \advance\@tempcntb\m@ne} + \ifnum\@tempdimc>16383\relax + \PackageError{% + Scaling/filling factor for column/gap width is too large.}\@eha + \@tempdimb\@M\p@ + \else + \@tempcntb\sixt@@n \advance\@tempcntb-\@tempcnta + \ifnum\@tempcntb<\z@ + \@whilenum\@tempcntb<\z@\do{\divide\@tempdimb\tw@ \advance\@tempcntb\@ne}% + \else + \@whilenum\@tempcntb>\z@\do{% + \multiply\@tempdimb\tw@ \advance\@tempcntb\m@ne}% + \fi + \fi + \expandafter\pcol@extract@pt\the\@tempdimb#3} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defkw} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define $\cs{pcol@kw@}{\cdot}k$ where +% $k\in\{\string\texttt{pt},\string\texttt{plus},\string\texttt{minus}, +% \string\texttt{fil}\}$.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@kw@pt} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have the keyword \string\texttt{pt}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@kw@plus} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have the keyword \string\texttt{plus}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@kw@minus} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have the keyword \string\texttt{minus}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@kw@fil} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to have the keyword \string\texttt{fil}.} +%  +% The macro +% $\!\pcol@defkw!|1.0|\arg{pt}\verb*| |\arg{plus}\verb*| 1.0|\arg{fil} +% \verb*| |\arg{minus}\verb*| 1.0|\arg{garbage}\!\@nil!$ is used just once at +% the top level to \!\def!ine \!\pcol@kw@pt!, \!\pcol@kw@plus!, +% \!\pcol@kw@minus! and \!\pcol@kw@fil! letting them have $\arg{pt}=|pt|$, +% $\arg{plus}=|plus|$, $\arg{minus}=|minus|$ and $\arg{fil}=|fil|$ in their +% body respectively but with $\!\catcode!=12$ (other) which is used in +% \!\the!-representation of glues. For the definition, we invoke +% \!\pcol@defkw! giving it \!\the!-representation of \!\@tempskipa! letting +% it have $1\,|pt|\ |plus|\ 1\,|fil|\ |minus|\ 1\,|fil|$ having all keywards +% we need to have\footnote{ +%  +% We can do what \!\pcol@defkw! does by temporarily giving $\!\catcode!=12$ +% to the characters for the keywords of course, but this method is much +% easier.}. +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@kw@pt! is used in +% $\!\pcol@extract@fil@ii!\arg{unit}\!\@nil!$ to examine if +% $\arg{unit}=|pt|$, and in \!\pcol@def@extract@pt! to \!\def!ine +% \!\pcol@extract@pt! having |pt| in its argument specification. The macros +% \!\pcol@kw@plus! and \!\pcol@kw@minus! are used only in +% \!\pcol@def@extract@fil!, and +% \!\pcol@kw@fil! only in \!\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii!, to \!\def!ine +% \!\pcol@extract@fil! having |plus| and |minus|, and +% \!\pcol@extract@fil@iii! having |fil|, in their argument specifications +% respectively. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\@tempskipa 1\p@\@plus1fil\@minus1fil\relax +\def\pcol@defkw1.0#1 #2 1.0#3 #4 1.0#5\@nil{% + \def\pcol@kw@pt{#1}\def\pcol@kw@plus{#2}\def\pcol@kw@fil{#3}% + \def\pcol@kw@minus{#4}} +\expandafter\pcol@defkw\the\@tempskipa\@nil + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{4} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@def@extract@fil} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define \cs{pcol@extract@fil}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@extract@fil} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to extract infinite stretch factor from a skip if any.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@extract@fil@i} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to extract the factor of \string\texttt{fil} from the +% stretch factor in a skip if any.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@extract@fil@ii} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to extract the factor of \string\texttt{fil} from the +% stretch factor in a skip if any.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define \cs{pcol@extract@fil@iii}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@extract@fil@iii} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to extract the factor of \string\texttt{fil} from the +% stretch factor in a skip.} +%  +% The macro +% $\!\pcol@extract@fil!\<\mathit{garbge}_1\>\verb*| plus |\\verb*| minus| +% \<\mathit{garbage}_2\>\!\@nil!$ is used solely in \!\pcol@setcw@getspec@i! +% to extract the infinite stretch factor $f$ in the stretch component $s$ of +% a column\slash gap specification $x'_d$ and to let +% $\!\@tempdimb!=f\cdot{}u$ where +% $u=\!\pcol@setcw@filunit!\in\{1\,|pt|,\;\phi_f=\!\dimen@ii!\}$ if $f$ +% exist or $\!\@tempdimb!=0$ otherwise. First of all, since the macro has +% keywords |plus| and |minus| in $\!\catcode!=12$ in its argument +% specification, we \!\def!ine it using \!\pcol@def@extract@fil!, whose body +% is equivalent to +%  +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% \let\@sverb\latex@sverb +% \verb*|\def\pcol@extract@fil#1 plus #2 minus#3\@nil| +% |{\pcol@extract@fil@i#2\@nil}| +% \end{itemize} +%  +% just once at the top level. Then since $s$ should have the form +% $\|.|\\arg{unit}$ where $n$ and $m$ are decimal digit sequences and +% $\arg{unit}\in\{|pt|,|fil|,|fill|,|filll|\}$, we examine if +% $\arg{unit}=|pt|$ or not by a trickey way in +% $\!\pcol@extract@fil@i!\|.|\\!\@nil!$. That +% is, we do $\!\count@!\\!\@nil!$ with +% \!\afterassignment! to invoke $\!\pcol@extract@fil@ii!\arg{unit}\!\@nil!$ +% after $m$ is assigned to \!\count@! to capture $\arg{unit}$. Then if it +% is |pt| we let $\!\@tempdimb!=0$, or otherwise invoke +% $\!\pcol@extract@fil@iii!\|fil|\arg{garbage}\!\@nil!$ giving it $s$ +% because it should have a postfix being |fil|, |fill| or |filll|, to have +% $\!\@tempdimb!=f\cdot u$ finally. Note that since +% \!\pcol@extract@fil@iii! also has the keyword |fil| in its argument +% specification, we \!\def!ine it using \!\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii!, whose +% body is equivalent to +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \let\@sverb\latex@sverb +% \verb*|\def\pcol@extract@fil@iii#1fil#2\@nil{%|\\ +% | \@tempdimb\pcol@setcw@filunit\relax \@tempdimb#1\@tempdimb}| +% \end{quote} +%  +% just once at the top level too. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\pcol@def@extract@fil{% + \def\noexpand\pcol@extract@fil + ##1\space\pcol@kw@plus\space##2\space\pcol@kw@minus##3\noexpand\@nil{% + \noexpand\pcol@extract@fil@i##2\noexpand\@nil}} +\pcol@def@extract@fil +\def\pcol@extract@fil@i#1.#2\@nil{\def\reserved@a{#1.#2}% + \afterassignment\pcol@extract@fil@ii\count@#2\@nil} +\def\pcol@extract@fil@ii#1\@nil{\def\reserved@b{#1}% + \ifx\reserved@b\pcol@kw@pt \@tempdimb\z@ + \else \expandafter\pcol@extract@fil@iii\reserved@a\@nil + \fi} +\edef\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii{% + \def\noexpand\pcol@extract@fil@iii##1\pcol@kw@fil##2\noexpand\@nil{% + \@tempdimb\noexpand\pcol@setcw@filunit\relax \@tempdimb##1\@tempdimb}} +\pcol@def@extract@fil@iii + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@def@extract@pt} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define \cs{pcol@extract@pt}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@extract@pt} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to extract the factor of \string\texttt{pt} from the +% \cs{the} representaion of a dimension.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@extract@pt!\|pt|\$ is solely used in +% \!\pcol@setcw@calcf! to extract $f$ from a dimension in the form of +% $f|pt|$ and to let the macro $\$ have $f$. Since this macro has +% the keyword |pt| in its argument specification, we \!\def!ine it using +% \!\pcol@def@extract@pt!, whose body is equivalent to +%  +% \begin{quote} +% \let\@sverb\latex@sverb +% |\def\pcol@extract@pt#1pt#2{\def#2{#1}}| +% \end{quote} +% just once at the top level again. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\pcol@def@extract@pt{% + \def\noexpand\pcol@extract@pt##1\pcol@kw@pt##2{\def##2{##1}}} +\pcol@def@extract@pt + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Counter Operations} +% \label{sec:imp-counter} +% +% \begin{macro}{\globalcounter} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Examine if the argument counter is already in +% $\string\mathit{\Theta}^g$ to avoid the duplicatoin in the list +% which caused a bug.} +% \changes{v1.32-1}{2015/10/10} +% {Modified according to the introduction of \cs{globalcounter*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@globalcounter@s} +% \changes{v1.32-1}{2015/10/10} +% {Added for \cs{globalcounter*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@globalcounter} +% \changes{v1.32-1}{2015/10/10} +% {Renamed from \cs{globalcounter} according to the introduction of +% \cs{globalcounter*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@gcounters} +% The API macro $\!\globalcounter!\ARg{ctr}$, implemented by +% \!\pcol@globalcounter! and also used in \!\pcol@fnlayout@p! to globalize the +% counter \counter{footnote}, defines that $\arg{ctr}$ is a \gcounter, and +% thus adds it to $\CG=\Midx{\!\pcol@gcounters!}$, which has \counter{page} +% at initial. Note that we examines if $\arg{ctr}\in\CG$ prior to the +% addition to avoid the duplication in $\CG$. Also note that initial +% definition of \!\pcol@gcounters! is done by \!\gdef! just for consistent +% \!\global! assignments to it. On the other hand \!\globalcounter!|*|, +% implemented by \!\pcol@globalcounter@s!, makes all counters kept in +% \!\cl@@ckpt! global by letting \!\pcol@gcounters! have the list. +% Switching these two functionality is done by \!\globalcounter! examining +% if it is followed by a |*| by \!\@ifstar!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Counter Operations + +\def\globalcounter{\@ifstar\pcol@globalcounter@s\pcol@globalcounter} +\def\pcol@globalcounter@s{\global\let\pcol@gcounters\cl@@ckpt} +\def\pcol@globalcounter#1{{% + \@tempswafalse \def\reserved@a{#1}% + \def\@elt##1{\def\reserved@b{##1}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \@tempswatrue \fi}% + \pcol@gcounters + \if@tempswa\else \@cons\pcol@gcounters{{#1}}\fi}} +\gdef\pcol@gcounters{\@elt{page}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\localcounter} +% \changes{v1.2-6}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to remove the argument counter from +% $\string\mathit{\Theta}^g$.} +%  +% The API macro \!\localcounter!\marg{ctr}, also used in +% \!\pcol@fnlayout@c! to localize the counter \counter{footnote}, +% declares that $\arg{ctr}$ is a \lcounter, and thus removes it from $\CG$ +% by \!\pcol@removecounter! if $\arg{ctr}\neq\counter{page}$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\localcounter#1{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname c@#1\endcsname\c@page\else + \pcol@removecounter\pcol@gcounters{#1}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@remctrelt} +% \changes{v1.2-6}{2013/05/11} +% {Recode to use newly introduced \cs{pcol@removecounter}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@removecounter} +% \changes{v1.2-6}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for the counter removal operation in +% \cs{localcounter} and \cs{pcol@remctrelt}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iremctrelt} +% \changes{v1.2-6}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the first argument $\string\mathit{\Theta}'$ as the counter +% list from which the second argument $\theta$ is removed.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@remctrelt!\Arg\cg$ is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@zparacol! and is applied to each \gcounter{} $\cg\in\CG$ to +% remove it from $\CC=\!\pcol@counters!$ in which we have $\CTL$ finally. +% The macro also moves $|\cl@|{\cdot}\cg=\clist(\cg)$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +%  +% to $|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\cg$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta}{\pcol@cl@} +%  +% to keep the list of the descendant \lcounter{}s of $\cg$ in it, and then +% re\!\def!ines $|\cl@|{\cdot}\cg=\!\pcol@stepcounter!\Arg\cg$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +%  +% so that it is invoked on $\!\stepcounter!\Arg\cg$ to let $\val_c(\cl)=0$ +% for all $c\In0\C$ and $\cl\in\clist(\cg)$, if $\cg\neq\counter{page}$. +% These operations are performed by a lengthy sequence with many occurrences +% of \!\expandafter!, \!\csname! and \!\endcsname! but the sequence is +% equivalent to the following. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% $\!\let!|\pcol@cl@|{\cdot}\cg|=\cl@|{\cdot}\cg$\\ +% $\CSIndex{ifx}|\c@|{\cdot}\cg\!\c@page!|\else | +% |\def\cl@|{\cdot}\cg|{|\!\pcol@stepcounter!|{|\cg|}}\fi|$ +% \end{quote} +%  +% As for the removal of $\cg$ from $\CC$, we invoke +% $\!\pcol@removecounter!\<\mathit{\Theta}'\>\Arg{\theta}$ giving it +% $\mathit{\Theta}'=\CC$ and $\theta=\cg$. This macro, also invoked from +% $\!\localcounter!\Arg\cl$ with $\mathit{\Theta}'=\CG$ and $\theta=\cl$, +% does $\mathit{\Theta}''\gets\mathit{\Theta}'$, +% $\mathit{\Theta}'=\emptyset$, and then apply +% $\!\pcol@iremctrelt!\arg{\mathit{\Theta}'}$ to each +% $\theta'\in\mathit{\Theta}''$ to let +% $\mathit{\Theta}'\gets\mathit{\Theta}'\cup\{\theta'\}$ by \!\@cons! if +% $\theta'\neq\theta$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@remctrelt#1{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a\csname cl@#1\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname pcol@cl@#1\endcsname\reserved@a + \expandafter\ifx\csname c@#1\endcsname\c@page\else + \@namedef{cl@#1}{\pcol@stepcounter{#1}}% + \fi + \pcol@removecounter\pcol@counters{#1}} +\def\pcol@removecounter#1#2{% + \def\reserved@a{#2}\let\reserved@b#1\relax \global\let#1\@empty + {\def\@elt{\pcol@iremctrelt#1}\reserved@b}} +\def\pcol@iremctrelt#1#2{% + \def\reserved@b{#2}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\else \@cons#1{{#2}}\fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\definethecounter} +% The API macro $\!\definethecounter!\<\cl\>\\arg{rep}$ define the +% \lrep{} $\arg{rep}$ for a \lcounter{} $\cl$ in a column $c$. It +% \!\def!ines $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% to have $\arg{rep}$ in its body. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\definethecounter#1#2#3{\@namedef{pcol@thectr@#1#2}{#3}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@thectrelt} +% The macro $\!\pcol@thectrelt!\<\cl\>$ is invoked solely in \!\pcol@zparacol! +% and is applied to each $\cl\in\CTL$ to define its \lrep{} of +% default and that of the leftmost column 0. It performs a lengthy sequence +% with many occurrences of \!\expandafter!, \!\csname! and \!\endcsname! but +% the sequence is equivalent to the followings. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% $\!\let!|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl|=\the|{\cdot}\cl$\\ +% $\CSIndex{ifx}|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}0\!\relax!|\else | +% \!\let!|\the|{\cdot}\cl|=\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}0| \fi|$ +% \end{quote} +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta}{\pcol@thectr@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@thectrelt#1{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a\csname the#1\endcsname + \expandafter\let\csname pcol@thectr@#1\endcsname\reserved@a + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a\csname pcol@thectr@#10\endcsname + \ifx\reserved@a\relax\else + \expandafter\let\csname the#1\endcsname\reserved@a + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@loadctrelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for inter-environment local counter conservation.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@storecounters} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for inter-environment local counter conservation.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@storectrelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for inter-environment local counter conservation.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@loadctrelt!\<\cl\>\<\val_c(\cl)\>$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@zparacol! and \!\pcol@synccounter! and is applied to each element +% $\<\cl,\val_c(\cl)\>\in\Cc_c$ for a column $c$ to define a macro +% $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\cl=v(\cl)$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +%  +% having $\val_c(\cl)$ in its body for a temporary use. This macro or its +% redefined version is then referred to by $\!\pcol@cmpctrelt!\<\cl\>$ or +% $\!\pcol@storectrelt!\<\cl\>$. The latter is invoked from +% \!\pcol@storecounters! via \!\pcol@sscounters! to add $\<\cl,v(\cl)\>$ to +% \!\@gtempa! by \!\@cons! to rebuild $\CC_c$ for a column $c$ in +% \!\@gtempa!. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@storecounters! is invoked solely from +% $\!\pcol@synccounter!\<\theta\>$ to update a \lcounter{} $\theta$ with +% $\Val(\theta)$ for \csync. That is, \!\pcol@storecounters! is used to add +% $\<\cl,v(\cl)\>$ to \!\@gtempa! for all $\cl\in\CTL$ by \!\pcol@sscounters! +% giving it \!\pcol@storectrelt! as its argument, where $v(\cl)$ is modified +% if $\cl=\theta$ or unmodifed otherwise after it is defined by +% \!\pcol@loadctrelt!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@loadctrelt#1#2{\@namedef{pcol@ctr@#1}{#2}} +\def\pcol@storecounters{\pcol@sscounters\pcol@storectrelt} +\def\pcol@storectrelt#1{\@cons\@gtempa{{#1}{\@nameuse{pcol@ctr@#1}}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@savecounters} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Move the body to \cs{pcol@sscounters}.} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@savectrelt} +% The macro \!\pcol@savecounters! is invoked from +% \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, \!\pcol@stepcounter! and \!\pcol@switchcol! +% to let $\CC_c$ for a column $c$ have the list of $\<\cl,\val_c(\cl)\>$ +% where $\val_c(\cl)$ is the value of $|\c@|{\cdot}\cl$ to be saved in +% the list. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\c@} +%  +% It does this operation invoking \!\pcol@sscounters! giving it +% \!\pcol@savectrelt! as its argument. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@savectrelt!\<\cl\>$ adds $\<\cl,\val_c(\cl)\>$ to +% \!\@gtempa! by \!\@cons! to rebuild $\CC_c$ for a column $c$ in +% \!\@gtempa!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@savecounters{\pcol@sscounters\pcol@savectrelt} +\def\pcol@savectrelt#1{\@cons\@gtempa{{#1}{\number\csname c@#1\endcsname}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@sscounters} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to implement the common operations of +% \cs{pcol@storecounters} and \cs{pcol@savecounters}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@sscounters!\arg{elt}$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@storecounters! with $\arg{elt}=\!\pcol@storectrelt!$ or +% \!\pcol@savecounters! with $\arg{elt}=\!\pcol@savectrelt!$ to build +% $\CC_c=|\pcol@counters|{\cdot}c$ for a column $c$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@counters} +%  +% To do that, it lets $\!\@gtempa!=()$ and then apply $\arg{elt}$ to all +% $\cl\in\CTL=\!\pcol@counters!$ to have updated $\CC_c$ in \!\@gtempa!. +% Then finally, \!\@gtempa! is moved into $\CC_c$ by \!\xdef!\footnote{ +%  +% It can be done by \cs{global}\cs{let} more efficiently but it is lengthy +% due to two \cs{expandafter}.}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@sscounters#1{\begingroup + \global\let\@gtempa\@empty + \let\@elt#1\relax \pcol@counters + \let\@elt\relax + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@counters\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname{% + \@gtempa}% + \endgroup} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@cmpctrelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for inter-environment local counter conservation.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@cmpctrelt!\<\theta\>$ is invoked solely from +% \!\pcol@zparacol! and is applied to each $\theta\in\CC$ to examine if +% $\val_0(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ where $\val_0(\theta)$ is in +% $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +%  +% If the examination fails including due to that $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\theta$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +%  +% is undefined, we add $\theta$ to the list \!\@gtempa! by \!\@cons!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@cmpctrelt#1{\@tempswafalse \@tempcnta\@nameuse{c@#1}% + \expandafter\ifx\csname pcol@ctr@#1\endcsname\relax \@tempswatrue + \else\ifnum\@nameuse{pcol@ctr@#1}=\@tempcnta\else \@tempswatrue + \fi\fi + \if@tempswa \@cons\@gtempa{{#1}}\fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\synccounter} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as an environment-local API command.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@synccounter} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for the implementation of the new API command +% \cs{synccounter}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@com@synccounter!\<\theta\>$, being the implementation +% of the \elocal{} API macro \!\synccounter!, lets +% $\val_c(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ for all $c\In0\C$. That is, the value of +% the counter $\theta$ is {\em broadcasted} to all columns for the +% {\em\Uidx\csync} of $\theta$. This broadcast is done by +% \!\pcol@synccounter! with an argument $\!\@elt!|{|\theta|}|$ so that it +% works only on $\theta$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@com@synccounter#1{\pcol@synccounter{\@elt{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@synccounter} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for \cs{synccounter} and inter-environment local counter +% conservation.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@syncctrelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for \cs{synccounter} and inter-environment local counter +% conservation.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@synccounter!\arg{lst}$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@zparacol! with $\arg{lst}=\!\@gtempa!$ and from +% $\!\pcol@com@synccounter!\arg{ctr}$ with $\arg{lst}=\!\@elt!\Arg{ctr}$, to +% let $\val_c(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$ for all $c\In0\C$ and all $\theta$ in +% $\arg{lst}$. To do that, at first we move $\arg{lst}$ into \!\reserved@a! +% in order to make \!\@gtempa! free so that it can be used in +% \!\pcol@storecounters!. Next, for each $c\In0\C$, we let +% $v(\cl)=\val_c(\cl)$ by applying \!\pcol@loadctrelt! to all +% $\<\cl,\val_c(\cl)\>\in\Cc_c$, then scan $\arg{lst}$ applying +% $\!\pcol@syncctrelt!\<\theta\>$ for each $\theta$ in $\arg{lst}$ to let +% $v(\theta)=\Val(\theta)$, and finally store all $v(\cl)$ back to $\Cc_c$ +% by \!\pcol@storecounters!, where $v(\theta)$ is +% $|\pcol@ctr@|{\cdot}\theta$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\pcol@ctr@} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@synccounter#1{{% + \let\@elt\relax \edef\reserved@a{#1}% + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \let\@elt\pcol@loadctrelt \@nameuse{pcol@counters\number\pcol@currcol}% + \let\@elt\pcol@syncctrelt \reserved@a + \pcol@storecounters + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}}} +\def\pcol@syncctrelt#1{% + \expandafter\edef\csname pcol@ctr@#1\endcsname{\number\@nameuse{c@#1}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\syncallcounters} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as an environment-local API command.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@syncallcounters} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for the implementation of the new API command +% \cs{syncallcounters}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@com@syncallcounters!, being the implementation of the +% \elocal{} API macro \!\syncallcounters!, makes all \lcounter{}s in all +% columns have the value in the current column. That is, for each +% $c\In0\C$, we invoke \!\pcol@savecounters! to let $\val_c(\cl)={\Val}(\cl)$ +% for all $\cl\in\CTL$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@com@syncallcounters{{% + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \pcol@savecounters \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@setctrelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{setcounter} with direct assignment with \cs{csname} and +% \cs{endcsname}} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@setctrelt!\<\cl\>\<\val_c(\cl)\>$ is solely inovked +% from \!\pcol@switchcol! to swich to a column $c$ and is applied to each +% $\<\cl,\val_c(\cl)\>\in\Cc_c$ to let $\Val(\cl)=\val_c(\cl)$ \!\global!ly. +% It also define the \lrep{} of $\cl$, being $|\the|{\cdot}\cl$, +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% to be $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta{\cdot}c}{\pcol@thectr@} +%  +% if it is defined, or otherwise to be $|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl$ which keeps +% the original $|\the|{\cdot}\cl$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\the} +%  +% This \lrep{} definition is done by a lengthy sequence with many occurrences +% of \!\expandafter!, \!\csname! and \!\endcsname!, but it is equivalent to +% the followings. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% $\CSIndex{ifx}|\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}c\!\relax!| | +% \!\let!|\the|{\cdot}\cl|=\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl$\\ +% $|\else |\!\let!|\the|{\cdot}\cl|=\pcol@thectr@|{\cdot}\cl{\cdot}c$\\ +% |\fi| +% \end{quote} +% %  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@setctrelt#1#2{% + \global\csname c@#1\endcsname#2\relax + \expandafter\ifx\csname pcol@thectr@#1\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname\relax + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a\csname pcol@thectr@#1\endcsname + \else + \expandafter\let\expandafter\reserved@a + \csname pcol@thectr@#1\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname + \fi + \expandafter\let\csname the#1\endcsname\reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@stepcounter} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Change the order of operations.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{csname}/\cs{endcsname} with \cs{@nameuse}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@stpldelt} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@stpclelt} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@stepcounter!\<\cg\>$ is invoked from +% $\!\stepcounter!\<\cg\>$ for a \gcounter{} $\cg$ because +% $|\cl@|{\cdot}\cg$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{\theta}{\cl@} +%  +% is modified by \!\pcol@remctrelt! so as to invoke this macro to zero-clear +% \lcounter{}s $\theta\in\clist(\cg)$. To do that, we do the followings in +% a group for each $c\In0\C$. First we apply +% $\!\pcol@stpldelt!\<\cl\>\<\val_c(\cl)\>$ to each +% $\<\cl,\val_c(\cl)\>\in\Cc_c$ to let $\Val(\cl)=\val_c(\cl)$ locally. +% Then we apply $\!\pcol@stpclelt!\<\theta\>$ to each $\theta\in\clist(\cg)$ +% to let $\Val(\theta)=0$. Finally, we invoke \!\pcol@savecounters! to let +% $\val_c(\cl)=\Val(\cl)$ for all $\cl\in\CTL$ to reflect the zero-clear of +% $\theta\in\clist(\cg)$. +% +% After the operations above, we apply $\!\@stpelt!\<\theta\>$ to each +% $\theta\in\clist(\cg)$ for \!\global! zero-clearing. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@stepcounter#1{\begingroup + \pcol@currcol\z@ \@whilenum\pcol@currcol<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \let\@elt\pcol@stpldelt \@nameuse{pcol@counters\number\pcol@currcol}% + \let\@elt\pcol@stpclelt \@nameuse{pcol@cl@#1}% + \pcol@savecounters + \advance\pcol@currcol\@ne}% + \endgroup + \let\@elt\@stpelt \@nameuse{pcol@cl@#1}} +\def\pcol@stpldelt#1#2{\csname c@#1\endcsname#2\relax} +\def\pcol@stpclelt#1{\csname c@#1\endcsname\z@} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Column-Switching Commands and Environments} +% \label{sec:imp-switch} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@par} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for \cs{par}-if-necessary operation.} +%  +% Before giving the definition of \cswitch{} commands and environments, we +% define a commonly used macro \!\pcol@par!, which do \CSIndex{par} if +% necessary, i.e., we are not in vertical mode. The reason why we don't +% simply do \CSIndex{par} is that it may have some definition different from +% \!\@@par! and thus an incautious repetition of \CSIndex{par} may cause +% undesirable results. This macro is used in \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@sptext!, \!\pcol@com@endcolumn!, \!\pcol@flushclear!, +% and \!\endparacol!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Column-Switching Commands and Environments + +\def\pcol@par{\ifvmode\else \par \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\switchcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@switchcolumn} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@switchcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implementation of \cs{switchcolumn}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@defcolumn} to clarify the behavior of \texttt{column}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@switchcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add the check of $d\geq0$.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Add a space before the number of columns in the error message.} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iswitchcolumn} +% The macro $\!\pcol@com@switchcolumn!|[|d|]|$, being the implementation of the +% \elocal{} API macro \!\switchcolumn!, switches to the column $d$ if provided +% through its optional argument, or to $d=(c+1)\bmod\C$ otherwise where $c$ +% is the ordinal of the current column. After making it sure to be in +% vertical mode by \!\pcol@par!, it invokes \!\pcol@defcolumn! to give +% \!\pcol@com@column!(|*|) their +% \!\def!initions for occurrences not as the very first \cswitch{} command +% or environment of the current \env{paracol} environment. Then, after +% calculating $d=(c+1)\bmod\C$, this macro simply invokes +% $\!\pcol@switchcol!|[|d|]|$ with or without the calculated $d$ depending +% on the existance of the optional argument delimitor `|[|'. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@switchcolumn!|[|d|]|$ lets $\!\pcol@nextcol!=d$ and +% confirms $0\leq d<\C$ or abort the execution by \!\PackageError! if it +% does not hold. Then it invokes \!\pcol@iswitchcolumn! if +% $\!\switchcolumn!|[|d|]|$ is followed by a `|*|', or \!\pcol@switchcol! +% othewise. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@iswitchcolumn!|[|\arg{text}|]|$ invokes +% $\!\pcol@sptext!|[|\arg{text}|]|$ if the optional argument is provided, or +% \!\pcol@switchcol! otherwise, after letting $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\true$ +% for \exsync{}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@com@switchcolumn{\pcol@par + \pcol@defcolumn + \@tempcnta\pcol@currcol \advance\@tempcnta\@ne + \ifnum\@tempcnta<\pcol@ncol\else \@tempcnta\z@ \fi + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@switchcolumn{\pcol@switchcolumn[\@tempcnta]}} +\def\pcol@switchcolumn[#1]{% + \pcol@nextcol#1\relax + \@tempswafalse + \ifnum#1<\z@ \@tempswatrue \fi + \ifnum#1<\pcol@ncol\else \@tempswatrue \fi + \if@tempswa + \PackageError{paracol}{% + Column number \number#1 must be less than \number\pcol@ncol}\@eha + \pcol@nextcol\z@ + \fi + \@ifstar\pcol@iswitchcolumn\pcol@switchcol} +\def\pcol@iswitchcolumn{% + \global\pcol@synctrue + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@sptext\pcol@switchcol} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@sptext} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{long} to allow \cs{par} in its argument.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{par} with \cs{pcol@par}.} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add $\cs{ifpcol@mctext}\EQ\mathit{true}$ for restriction of the +% broadcast of \cs{if@nobreak} and \cs{everypar}.} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@swapcolumn} for column-swapping.} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Add setting of \cs{columnwidth}, \cs{linewidth} and \cs{parshape} +% to have indented spanning text with surrounding +% \string\texttt{list}-like environments.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Add $\cs{ifpcol@sptextstart}\EQ\string\mathit{true}$ before first +% synchronized column-switching to let \cs{pcol@output@switch} save +% pre-spanning-text stuff, move the timing of +% $\cs{ifpcol@sptext}\EQ\string\mathit{true}$ from the end of +% spanning text to the beginning so that \cs{output} routine for a +% page break in the text capture the pre-break portion, and remove +% the invocation of \cs{pcol@swapcolumn} because spanning texts are +% now always put into the column-0.} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Add globalization of \cs{@svsechd} and \cs{@svsec}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@sptext!|[|\arg{text}|]|$ is invoked from +% \!\pcol@zparacol! and \!\pcol@iswitchcolumn! to put a \Uidx\mctext{} +% $\arg{text}$ given as the optional argument of the former or that of +% \!\switchcolumn!|*| and its relative envrironment openers for the latter. +% The macro has \!\long! attribute because the \mctext{} may have +% \CSIndex{par}. Since the text is put in the column-0 regardless of its +% physical position, we let \!\pcol@nextcol! have 0 after saving the target +% column $d=\!\pcol@nextcol!$ in \!\@tempcnta!. Then we switch to the +% column by \!\pcol@switchcol!, after turning $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\true$ +% to set a \sync{}ation point above the text and +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\true$ to tell \!\pcol@output@switch! to +% prepare the capture of \mctext{} saveing the \prespan{}. +% +% Next, we let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\false$ and +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptext}=\true$ to indicate the main vertical list +% contains only the \mctext{} and it is to be captured by \!\output! +% routine. Then the $\arg{text}$ is put in a group in which we let +% $\!\columnwidth!=\!\hsize!=\!\textwidth!$ and +% $\!\linewidth!=\!\textwidth!-\lrm$ with \!\parshape! to indent lines by +% \!\@totalleftmargin! if $\lrm>0$, to let \mctext{} span across all columns +% reflecting the indentation in the \env{list}-like environments surrounding +% \env{paracol} if any. We also let $\!\col@number!=1$ to ensure again that +% \!\maketitle! produces a title without \!\twocolumn! if it is in the +% \mctext. +% +% Then, after invoking \!\pcol@par! to ensure to be in vertical +% mode, we \!\global!ize \!\@svsechd! and \!\@svsec! which may be defined in +% a lower-level sectioning command such as \!\paragraph! in the \mctext{} so +% that they are properly expanded in \!\everypar! inserted at the beginning +% of the first paragraph of the column to which we switch shortly, even when +% the sectioning command is used inappropriately in the \mctext. +% We also \!\global!ize \!\everypar! by a sequence with three +% \!\expandafter! so that \!\pcol@output@switch! for the \sync{}ed +% \cswitch{} we make shortly broadcasts it to other columns. Finally after +% closing the group, we let $\!\pcol@nextcol!=d$ and +% $\CSIndex{pcol@sync}=\true$ to set another \sync{}ation point below the +% \mctext{} and to make the captured text combined with \prespan, and then +% invoke \!\pcol@switchcol! to switch the coloumn $d$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\pcol@sptext[#1]{% + \@tempcnta\pcol@nextcol + \global\pcol@synctrue \pcol@nextcol\z@ + \global\pcol@sptextstarttrue + \pcol@switchcol + \global\pcol@sptextstartfalse \global\pcol@sptexttrue + \begingroup + \columnwidth\textwidth \hsize\columnwidth + \linewidth\columnwidth \advance\linewidth-\pcol@lrmargin + \ifdim\pcol@lrmargin>\z@ \parshape\@ne\@totalleftmargin\linewidth \fi + \col@number\@ne #1\pcol@par + \global\let\@svsechd\@svsechd \global\let\@svsec\@svsec + \expandafter\global\expandafter\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypar}% + \endgroup + \pcol@nextcol\@tempcnta \global\pcol@synctrue \pcol@switchcol} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@switchcol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add \cs{pcol@aconly} for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add column-scanning and page-overflow check for synchronized +% column-switching.} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{pcol@swapcolumn} for column-swapping to turn +% \cs{if@firstcolumn}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove settig \cs{if@firstcolumn} and the invocation of +% \cs{pcol@swapcolumn} for it because the position of marginal notes +% are now controlled by \cs{pcol@addmarginpar}.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Add setting $V_E\EQ\cs{pcol@@ensurevspace}$ and reinitialization of +% \cs{pcol@ensurevspace} for avoidance of post-synchronization +% inconsistent page break.} +% \changes{v1.35-5}{2018/12/31} +% {Add the invocation of $\cs{pcol@colpream}\cdot c$.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@switchcol! is invoked from \!\pcol@switchcolumn!, +% \!\pcol@iswitchcolumn!, \!\pcol@sptext! and \!\endparacol! to switch the +% column $d=\!\pcol@nextcol!$. First, we save \lcounter{}s in the current +% column $c$ into $\Cc_c$ by \!\pcol@savecounters!. +% +% Next, if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\true$, we do the followings. At first we +% let $\VE={}$\!\pcol@@ensure~vspace! have the natrual component of +% \!\pcol@ensurevspace! which can have a glue specified by \!\ensurevspace!, +% so that it is referred to by \!\pcol@sync! as the minimum space required +% below the \sync{}ation point we are now setting. Second, we invoke +% \!\pcol@visitallcols! temporarily turning $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\false$ +% for \cscan{}ning to visit all columns but current one to give \TeX's page +% builder the chance to break \colpage{}s in the \tpage{} with \Scfnote{}s +% which could have not been presented in the last visit of the columns. +% Third, we make an \!\output! request with $\!\penalty!=\!\pcol@op@switch!$ +% to invoke \!\pcol@output@switch! by \!\pcol@invokeoutput! with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\true$ to make \sync{}ed switch to the column $d$. +% This invocation may result in $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\true$ to mean the +% \tpage{} should be broken before setting the \sync{}ation point. +% Therefore if so, since \!\pcol@output@switch! switched to the tallest +% column rather than $d$, we put \!\vfil! and \!\penalty!|-10000| to force +% page break, make \cscan{} with \!\newpage! put into each column to have +% some floats in the column in the new \tpage{}, and then invoke +% \!\pcol@output@switch! again until it returns +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\false$ telling us it successfully sets the +% \sync{}ation point switching to the column $d$. Then as the last operation +% specific to \sync{}ed \cswitch{}, we invoke \!\ensurevspace! with +% \!\baselineskip! to give the default of $\VE$ for the next \sync{}ation. +% +% Otherwise, i.e., if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sync}=\false$, we simply make the +% \!\output! request for \!\pcol@output@switch! to switch to the column $d$. +% +% Then we scan $\Cc_d$ applying \!\pcol@setctrelt! to each +% $\<\cl,\val_d(\cl)\>\in\Cc_d$ to let $\Val(\cl)={\val_d(\cl)}$. We also +% scan $\T=\!\pcol@aconly!$ applying \!\pcol@aconlyelt! to each +% $\\in T$ to inhibit \!\addcontentsline! to the contents file of +% type $t_d$ as specified so by $\!\addcontentsonly!\arg{t_d}\~\arg{d}$. +% After that, we let $\!\@elt!=\!\relax!$ to make it sure that any lists can +% be manipulated without unexpected application of a macro to their +% elements. +% +% Finally, we invoke $|\pcol@colpream|{\cdot}c$, where $c=-1$ if +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@sptextstart}=\true$ to mean the \cswitch{} is for a +% \sptext{}, or $c=d$ otherwise. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colpream} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@switchcol{% + \pcol@savecounters + \ifpcol@sync + \@tempdima\pcol@ensurevspace\relax + \edef\pcol@@ensurevspace{\number\@tempdima sp\relax}% + \global\pcol@syncfalse \pcol@visitallcols\@@par \global\pcol@synctrue + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch + \@whilesw\ifpcol@flush\fi{% + \vfil \penalty-\@M + \global\pcol@syncfalse \pcol@visitallcols\newpage \global\pcol@synctrue + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch}% + \ensurevspace{\baselineskip}% + \else + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch + \fi + \let\@elt\pcol@setctrelt + \csname pcol@counters\number\pcol@currcol\endcsname + \let\@elt\pcol@aconlyelt \pcol@aconly \let\@elt\relax + \@nameuse{pcol@colpream\ifpcol@sptextstart-1\else\number\pcol@currcol\fi}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@visitallcols} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for column-scanning in synchronized column-switching and +% page flushing.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@visitallcols!\arg{cs}$, invoked from \!\pcol@switchcol! +% and \!\pcol@flushclear!, performs \cscan{}ning putting $\arg{cs}$ into the +% visited columns. That is, we repeat the invocation of +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to visit $d$ through \!\pcol@invokeoutput! with +% $\!\penalty!=\!\pcol@op@switch!$ for all $d\In0\C-\{c\}$. In each visit, +% we put $\arg{cs}\in\{\!\@@par!,\!\newpage!\}$ to have a chance of or to +% force page break in each visited \colpage{}. Finally we go back to $c$ to +% restore its \cctext{} especially when we are leaving the column 0 for +% \mctext. That is, $\cc_c(\sw)$ and $\cc_c(\ep)$ should be presented to +% \!\pcol@output@switch! to broadcast them to other columns. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@visitallcols#1{\begingroup + \@tempcnta\z@ \@tempcntb\pcol@currcol + \@whilenum\@tempcnta<\pcol@ncol\do{% + \ifnum\@tempcnta=\@tempcntb\else + \pcol@nextcol\@tempcnta \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch #1% + \fi + \advance\@tempcnta\@ne}% + \pcol@nextcol\@tempcntb \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch + \endgroup} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{3} +% \begin{macro}{\column} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@column} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\column*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@column*} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@column} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{column}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@column*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{column*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{column} with \cs{pcol@com@column} and \cs{switchcolumn} +% with \cs{pcol@switchenv}.} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@com@column!(|*|), the implementations of the \elocal{} +% API commands \!\column!(*), starts the environment |column(*)|. +%  +% \Midx{\EnvIndex{column}}\Midx{\EnvIndex{column*}} +%  +% Basically, the macros do \!\switch~column!\~(|*|), but if the environment +% starts just after \beginparacol{} the macro have to switch to the column +% 0. Therefore, the definitions for this very-beginning appearance are +% given in \!\pcol@zparacol! to do (almost) nothing, and then those for +% other ones are given by \!\pcol@defcolumn! invoked in +% \!\pcol@com@switchcolumn! to invoke +% \!\pcol@switchenv!|{column|(|*|)|}|(|*|) which then invokes +% \!\switchcolumn!. Note that the definition of non-starred +% \!\pcol@com@column! has \!\relax! after the invocatoin of +% \!\pcol@switchenv! so that \!\@ifnextchar! and \!\@ifstar! to examine the +% existence of `|[|' and `|*|' definitely tells us no even if the body of the +% environment starts with a `|[|' or `|*|'. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@defcolumn{% + \gdef\pcol@com@column{\pcol@switchenv{column}\relax}% + \global\@namedef{pcol@com@column*}{\pcol@switchenv{column*}*}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{10} +% \begin{macro}{\nthcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@nthcolumn} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\nthcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@nthcolumn*} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@nthcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{nthcolumn} with the +% inhibition of column-switching in the environment.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@nthcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{nthcolumn*} with the +% inhibition of column-switching in the environment.} +% \begin{macro}{\leftcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@leftcolumn} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\leftcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@leftcolumn*} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@leftcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{leftcolumn} with the +% inhibition of column-switching in the environment.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@leftcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{leftcolumn*} with the +% inhibition of column-switching in the environment.} +% \begin{macro}{\rightcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@rightcolumn} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\rightcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@rightcolumn*} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@rightcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{rightcolumn} with the +% inhibition of column-switching in the environment.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@rightcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{rightcolumn*} with the +% inhibition of column-switching in the environment.} +%  +% The macros $\!\pcol@com@nthcolumn!(|*|)\arg{d}$, +% \!\pcol@com@leftcolumn!(|*|) and |\pcol@com@right|\~|column|(|*|) are the +% implementations of \elocal{} API macros \!\nthcolumn!(|*|)$\arg{d}$, +% \!\leftcolumn!(|*|) and \!\rightcolumn!(|*|) respectively. They start +% corresponding environments |nthcolumn|(|*|), |leftcolumn|(|*|), and +% |rightcolumn|(|*|) +%  +% \Midx{\EnvIndex{nthcolumn}}\Midx{\EnvIndex{nthcolumn*}} +% \Midx{\EnvIndex{leftcolumn}}\Midx{\EnvIndex{leftcolumn*}} +% \Midx{\EnvIndex{rightcolumn}}\Midx{\EnvIndex{rightcolumn*}} +%  +% simply invoking \!\pcol@switchenv!$\Arg{env}$\~(|*|), where $\arg{env}$ is +% the name of each environment, giving it $d$, 0 and 1 repectively as its +% optional argument for the target column. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@com@nthcolumn#1{\pcol@switchenv{nthcolumn}[#1]\relax} +\@namedef{pcol@com@nthcolumn*}#1{\pcol@switchenv{nthcolumn*}[#1]*} +\def\pcol@com@leftcolumn{\pcol@switchenv{leftcolumn}[0]\relax} +\@namedef{pcol@com@leftcolumn*}{\pcol@switchenv{leftcolumn*}[0]*} +\def\pcol@com@rightcolumn{\pcol@switchenv{rightcolumn}[1]\relax} +\@namedef{pcol@com@rightcolumn*}{\pcol@switchenv{rightcolumn*}[1]*} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@switchenv} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced to inhibit column-switching in the environment.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Fix the misspell ``swicthing'' in the error message.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@switchenv!\arg{env}$ is invoked from +% $|\pcol@com@|{\cdot}\arg{env}$ where $\arg{env}\in +% \{\env{column}\~(|*|),\env{nthcolumn}(|*|),\env{leftcolumn}(|*|), +% \env{rightcolumn}(|*|)\}$ to invoke \!\switchcolumn! with the arguments +% following $\arg{env}$ given by the invoker macros. Before invoking +% \!\switchcolumn!, we save it in \!\reserved@a! for the invocation and +% re\!\def!ine it so that it will complain the illegal usage of \cswitch{} +% commands\slash environments in the environment $\arg{env}$ by +% \!\PackageError!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@switchenv#1{\let\reserved@a\switchcolumn + \def\switchcolumn{\PackageError{paracol}{% + Column switching commands and environments cannot be used in #1}\@eha} + \reserved@a} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{14} +% \begin{macro}{\endcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endcolumn} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\endcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endcolumn*} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endcolumn} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endcolumn*} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\endnthcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endnthcolumn} for localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\endnthcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endnthcolumn*} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endnthcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endnthcolumn} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endnthcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endnthcolumn*} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\endleftcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endleftcolumn} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\endleftcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endleftcolumn*} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endleftcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endleftcolumn} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endleftcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endleftcolumn*} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\endrightcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endrightcolumn} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\endrightcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@endrightcolumn*} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endrightcolumn} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endrightcolumn} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@endrightcolumn*} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{endrightcolumn*} with the +% globalizatoin of \cs{everypar}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@com@endcolumn! is the implementation of the \elocal{} +% API macro \!\endcolumn! to close \env{column} environment. The macro +% makes it sure we are in vertical mode by \!\pcol@par! and \!\global!ize +% \!\everypar! so that it is saved in $\cc_c(\ep)$ of the current column +% $c$ on the switch to another column. The macro also gives the commmon +% definition of \!\pcol@com@endcolumn*! for \!\endcolumn*!, +% \!\pcol@com@endnthcolumn!(|*|) for \!\endnthcolumn!(|*|), +% \!\pcol@com@endleftcolumn!(|*|) for \!\endleftcolumn!(|*|), and +% \!\pcol@com@endrightcolumn!(|*|) for \!\endrightcolumn!(|*|). +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@com@endcolumn{\pcol@par + \expandafter\global\expandafter\everypar\expandafter{\the\everypar}} +\expandafter\let\csname pcol@com@endcolumn*\endcsname\pcol@com@endcolumn +\let\pcol@com@endnthcolumn\pcol@com@endcolumn +\expandafter\let\csname pcol@com@endnthcolumn*\endcsname\pcol@com@endcolumn +\let\pcol@com@endleftcolumn\pcol@com@endcolumn +\expandafter\let\csname pcol@com@endleftcolumn*\endcsname\pcol@com@endcolumn +\let\pcol@com@endrightcolumn\pcol@com@endcolumn +\expandafter\let\csname pcol@com@endrightcolumn*\endcsname\pcol@com@endcolumn + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\definecolumnpreamble} +% \changes{v1.35-5}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced to define a column preamble.} +%  +% The API macro \!\definecolumnpreamble!\marg{c}\marg{pream} is to define +% the \colpream{} $\arg{pream}$ for the column $c$ or that for \sptext{}s if +% $c=-1$. After assiging $c$ to \!\@tempcnta! to ensure $c$ is a number, +% the macro $|\pcol@colpream|{\cdot}c$ is |\def|ined to have $\arg{pream}$. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@colpream} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\definecolumnpreamble#1#2{\@tempcnta#1\relax + \expandafter\gdef\csname pcol@colpream\number\@tempcnta\endcsname{#2}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% \begin{macro}{\ensurevspace} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to declare the minimum space $V_E$ below a +% synchronization point to let it stay in a page.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ensurevspace} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep $V_E$ declared by \cs{ensurevspace}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@ensurevspace} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to pass $V_E$ declared by \cs{ensurevspace} to +% \cs{output} routine.} +%  +% The API macro $\!\ensurevspace!\ARg{space}$ is to declare that the +% \sync{}ation point following it must be thrown to the next page unless the +% page has the vertical $\arg{space}$ below the \sync{}ation point. The +% macro makes a dummy assignment of $\arg{space}$ to \!\@tempdima! to ensure +% the argument is a dimension including forced one, or in other words to +% raise an error if not in this macro rather than at the time $\arg{space}$ +% is {\em evaluated} in \!\pcol@switchcol!. Then $\arg{space}$ is kept in +% \!\pcol@ensurevspace! so that $\arg{space}$ is evaluated in +% \!\pcol@switchcol! for the \sync{}ation in question to pass the value to +% \!\pcol@sync! through the macro $\!\pcol@@ensurevspace!=\Uidx\VE$, +% especially when it has register references, for example to +% \!\baselineskip!. To give the default of \!\pcol@ensurevspace!, we invoke +% \!\ensurevspace! at the top level with \!\baselineskip!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\ensurevspace#1{{\@tempdima#1\relax \gdef\pcol@ensurevspace{#1}}} +\ensurevspace{\baselineskip} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Disabling \cs{addcontentsline}} +% \label{sec:imp-aconly} +% +% \begin{macro}{\addcontentsonly} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@aconly} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +%  +% The API macro $\!\addcontentsonly!\arg{t}\arg{c}$ makes the type $t$ +% contents file written by commands appearing only in the column $c$. The +% macro simply add the pair $\$ to the list $\Uidx\T=\!\pcol@aconly!$ +% being empty at initial, after confirming we know the type $t$, one of +% |toc|, |lof| and |lot| so far, by the fact $|\pcol@ac@def|{\cdot}t$ is +% defined, or abort execution by \!\PackageError!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Disabling \addcontentsline + +\def\addcontentsonly#1#2{% + \@ifundefined{pcol@ac@def@#1} + {\PackageError{paracol}{Unknown contents type #1}\@eha}\relax + \@cons\pcol@aconly{{#1}{#2}}} +\gdef\pcol@aconly{} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@aconlyelt} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@aconlyelt!\arg{t_d}\arg{d}$ is invoked solely in +% \!\pcol@switchcol! for the \cswitch{} to column $c$, and is applied to +% each $\\in\T$ to enable \!\addcontentsline! for $t_d$ if $d=c$ by +% the invocation of $|\pcol@ac@def@|{\cdot}t_d$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{t}{\pcol@ac@def@} +%  +% with an argument |enable|, or to disable if $d\neq c$ with |disable|. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@aconlyelt#1#2{% + \ifnum#2=\pcol@currcol \@nameuse{pcol@ac@def@#1}{enable}% + \else \@nameuse{pcol@ac@def@#1}{disable}% + \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@gobblethree} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@addcontentsline} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +%  +% \hfuzz0.39pt +% The macro $\!\pcol@gobblethree!\arg{file}\arg{sec}\arg{entry}$ is used in +% \!\pcol@ac@disable@toc! and \!\pcol@ac@caption! to make +% \!\addcontentsline! \!\let!-equal to this macro, which does nothing but +% discarding three arguments, for disabling. The macro +% \!\pcol@addcontentsline! is the \LaTeX's original \!\addcontentsline! and +% is used in the macros mentioned above to let \!\addcontentsline! act as +% original. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@gobblethree#1#2#3{} +\let\pcol@addcontentsline\addcontentsline + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@def@toc} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@enable@toc} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@disable@toc} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ac@def@toc!\arg{eord}$ is invoked solely in +% $\!\pcol@aconlyelt!|{toc}|\arg{c}$ to enable or disable +% \!\addcontentsline! according to $\arg{eord}$ by making \!\@sect! +% \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@ac@enable@toc! which is the \LaTeX's original +% \!\@sect!, or to \!\pcol@ac@disable@toc! respectively. The macro +% $\!\pcol@ac@disable@toc! +% \\\\\\|[|\|]|\$ at first +% disables \!\addcontentsline! by making it \!\let!-equal to +% \!\pcol@gobblethree!, then invokes the original \!\@sect! saved in +% \!\pcol@ac@enable@toc! ginving it all arguments $a_1$ to $a_8$, and +% finally enables it by making it \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@addcontentsline!. +% Note that the argument $a_7$ is surrounded by |{| and |}| on the +% invocation of \!\@sect! to conceal `|]|' in $a_7$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@ac@def@toc#1{% + \expandafter\let\expandafter\@sect\csname pcol@ac@#1@toc\endcsname} +\let\pcol@ac@enable@toc\@sect +\def\pcol@ac@disable@toc#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{% + \let\addcontentsline\pcol@gobblethree + \pcol@ac@enable@toc{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}[{#7}]{#8}% + \let\addcontentsline\pcol@addcontentsline} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{5} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@def@lof} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@def@lot} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption@enable} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption@disable} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption@def} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption@if@lof} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption@if@lot} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ac@def@lof!\arg{eord}$ and +% $\!\pcol@ac@def@lot!\arg{eord}$ are invoked solely in +% $\!\pcol@aconlyelt!\\$ when $t$ is |lof| or |lot| +% respectively. They invoke \!\pcol@ac@caption@enable!$\$ or +% $\!\pcol@ac@caption@disable!\$ according to $\arg{eord}$, and then +% these macros invoke $\!\pcol@ac@caption@def!\\$ where +% $s=\!\@tempswatrue!$ or $s=\!\@tempswafalse!$ respectievely to let +% $\!\@caption!=\!\pcol@ac@caption!$ and $|\pcol@ac@caption@if@|{\cdot}t=s$ +% which are \!\let!-equal to \!\@tempswatrue! in default. That is, +% $|\pcol@ac@catption@if@|{\cdot}t$ lets $\CSIndex{if@tempswa}={}\true$ iff +% \!\addcontentsline! for $t$ is to be enable. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@ac@def@lof#1{\@nameuse{pcol@ac@caption@#1}{lof}} +\def\pcol@ac@def@lot#1{\@nameuse{pcol@ac@caption@#1}{lot}} +\def\pcol@ac@caption@enable{\pcol@ac@caption@def\@tempswatrue} +\def\pcol@ac@caption@disable{\pcol@ac@caption@def\@tempswafalse} +\def\pcol@ac@caption@def#1#2{\let\@caption\pcol@ac@caption + \expandafter\let\csname pcol@ac@caption@if@#2\endcsname#1} +\let\pcol@ac@caption@if@lof\@tempswatrue +\let\pcol@ac@caption@if@lot\@tempswatrue +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ac@caption@latex} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced for disabling \cs{addcontentsline}.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@ac@caption!\arg{type}|[|\arg{lcap}|]|\$ is made +% \!\let!-equal to \!\@caption! by \!\pcol@ac@caption@def! to do what +% \!\@caption! do but with enabling\slash disabling \!\addcontentsline!. At +% first, it invokes $|\pcol@ac@cation@if@|{\cdot}t$ where +% $t=|\ext@|{\cdot}\arg{type}$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ext@figure}\SpecialIndex{\ext@table} +%  +% to let \CSIndex{if@tempswa} be $\true$ or $\false$ according to the +% enable\slash disable status of $t$. Then, after letting +% $\!\addcontentsline!=\!\pcol@gobblethree!$ for disabling if $\false$, we +% invoke \!\pcol@ac@caption@latex!, being the \LaTeX's orignial \!\@caption!, +% giving all three arguments of \!\pcol@ac@caption! itself surrounding +% $\arg{lcap}$ with |{| and |}| for the concealment of `|]|'. Finally, we +% let $\!\addcontentsline!=\!\pcol@addcontentsline!$ so that other macros +% uses it with its original definition. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\pcol@ac@caption#1[#2]#3{% + \@nameuse{pcol@ac@caption@if@\@nameuse{ext@#1}}% + \if@tempswa\else \let\addcontentsline\pcol@gobblethree \fi + \pcol@ac@caption@latex{#1}[{#2}]{#3}% + \let\addcontentsline\pcol@addcontentsline} +\let\pcol@ac@caption@latex\@caption + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{7} +% \section{Page Flushing Commands} +% \label{sec:imp-flush} +% +% \begin{macro}{\flushpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@flushpage} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@flushpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{flushpage} with the +% replacement of \cs{par} with \cs{pcol@par}.} +% \begin{macro}{\clearpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Made \cs{let}-equal to \cs{pcol@com@clearpage} for +% localization.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@clearpage} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{clearpage} with the +% replacement of \cs{par} with \cs{pcol@par}.} +% \begin{macro}{\cleardoublepage} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Added as a member of local commands and made \cs{let}-equal to +% \cs{pcol@com@cleardoublepage}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@com@cleardoublepage} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced as the implemenatation of \cs{cleardoulbepage}.} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@com@flushpage!, \!\pcol@com@clearpage! and +% \!\pcol@com@cleardoublepage! are the implementations of \elocal{} API +% macro \!\flushpage!, \!\clearpage! and \!\cleardoublepage! respectively. +% The first two have a common structure in which we at first invoke +% \!\pcol@flushclear! for \cscan{} and \pfcheck, and then make an \!\output! +% request by \!\pcol@invokeoutput! with \!\penalty! being \!\pcol@op@flush! +% or \!\pcol@op@clear! according to the commands. On the other hand the +% last one simply invokes \!\pcol@com@clearpage! unconditionally, and then +% \!\pcol@com@flushpage!\footnote{ +%  +% Unlike \LaTeX's \!\cleardoublepage!, it is unnecessary to put an empty +% \!\hbox! before \!\flushpage! because it is active even at the top of a +% page.} +%  +% if two-sided paging is enabled by $\CSIndex{if@twoside}=\true$, we are +% in an even-numbered page, and $\CSIndex{ifpcol@paired}=\false$ to mean we +% are not doing \npaired{} \parapag{}ing. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Page Flushing Commands + +\def\pcol@com@flushpage{\pcol@flushclear\voidb@x + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@flush} +\def\pcol@com@clearpage{\pcol@flushclear\voidb@x + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@clear} +\def\pcol@com@cleardoublepage{\pcol@com@clearpage + \if@twoside \ifodd\c@page\else \ifpcol@paired\else \pcol@com@flushpage + \fi\fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@flushclear} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for column-scanning in synchronized column-switching and +% page flushing.} +%  +% The macro $\!\pcol@flushclear!\arg{box}$, invoked from +% \!\pcol@com@flushpage!, \!\pcol@com@clear~page! and \!\endparacol!, +% performs \cscan{} and \pfcheck{} prior to page flushing or environment +% closing. After confirming we are in vertical mode by \!\pcol@par! and +% letting $d=\!\pcol@nextcol!$ be $c=\!\pcol@currcol!$ to stay in $c$, we +% invoke \!\pcol@visitallcols! for \cscan{} to give \TeX's page builder the +% chance to break the \tpage{} prior to flushing it. +% +% Then we repeat \pfcheck{} invoking \!\pcol@output@switch! through +% \!\pcol@invokeoutput! with $\!\penalty!=\!\pcol@op@switch!$ and +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}=|\ifpcol@|\~|sync|=\true$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ifpcol@sync} +%  +% until the special \!\output! routine finishes with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@flush}=\false$ and $\arg{box}=\bot$, where +% $\arg{box}=\df=\!\pcol@topfnotes!$ if this macro is invoked from +% \!\endparacol! with non-merged \Scfnote{} typesetting. In the repetition, +% we put \!\vfil! and \!\penalty!|-10000| to force page break into the +% tallest column, temporarily turning $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\false$ +% using \!\ifpcol@lastpagesave! because the broken page is not last one, +% each time the \pfcheck{} tells us to do it. That is, we repeat the check +% while we have too tall columns due to \Scfnote{}s or, when closing +% \env{paracol} environment, deferred non-merged \Scfnote{}s. +% +% Finally we let $\CSIndex{ifpcol@clear}$ have its default setting, i.e., +% $\false$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@flushclear#1{\pcol@par + \pcol@nextcol\pcol@currcol + \pcol@visitallcols\@@par + \pcol@cleartrue \global\pcol@synctrue + \ifpcol@lastpage \pcol@lastpagesavetrue \else \pcol@lastpagesavefalse \fi + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch \ifvoid#1\else \global\pcol@flushtrue \fi + \@whilesw\ifpcol@flush\fi{% + \pcol@lastpagefalse + \vfil \penalty-\@M \pcol@cleartrue \global\pcol@synctrue + \ifpcol@lastpagesave \pcol@lastpagetrue \fi + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@switch + \ifvoid#1\else \global\pcol@flushtrue \fi}% + \pcol@clearfalse} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{8} +% \section{Commands for Footnotes} +% \label{sec:imp-fnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the subsection ``Commands for Footnotes'' to describe newly +% introduced macros for page-wise footnotes.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\footnotelayout} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for easier declaration of footnote layout.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fnlayout@c} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for easier declaration of column-wise footnotes.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fnlayout@p} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for easier declaration of page-wise footnotes.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fnlayout@m} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for easier declaration of merged footnotes.} +% \begin{macro}{\multicolumnfootnotes} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to delclare the defalut column-wise footnote +% typesetting explicitly.} +% \begin{macro}{\singlecolumnfootnotes} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to delclare the page-wise but non-merged footnote +% typesetting.} +% \begin{macro}{\mergedfootnotes} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to delclare the page-wise and merged footnote +% typesetting.} +%  +% The API macros $\!\footnotelayout!\Arg{l}$ is to determine that footnotes +% are \mcfnote{} ($l=|c|$), \scfnote{} without merging ($l=|p|$), or +% \mgfnote{} and \scfnote{} ($l=m$). The macro examines if +% $l\in\{|c|,|p|,|m|\}$ by the existence of the corresponding macro +% $|\pcol@fnlayout@|{\cdot}l$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{l}{\pcol@fnlayout@} +%  +% and invokes it, or complains if not by \!\PackageError!. +% +% The macros \!\pcol@fnlayout@c!, \!\pcol@fnlayout@p! and +% \!\pcol@fnlayout@m! turn switches $f_s=\CSIndex{ifpcol@scfnote}$, +% $f_m=\CSIndex{ifpcol@mgfnote}$ and +% $f_a=\CSIndex{ifpcol@fncounteradjustment}$ and make the counter +% \counter{footnote} global or local as follows. +% $$ +% \nosv\begin{array}{l|llll} +% l&f_s&f_m&f_a&\counter{footnote}\\\hline +% \verb|c|&\false&\false&\false&\hbox{local}\\ +% \verb|p|&\true&\false&\true&\hbox{global}\\ +% \verb|m|&\true&\true&\true&\hbox{global} +% \end{array} +% $$ +% Note that turning \CSIndex{ifpcol@fncounteradjustment} is done by +% \!\fncounteradjustment! ($\true$) or \!\nofncounteradjustment! ($\false$). +% Also note that the setting of |\ifpcol@fncounter|\~|adjustment| +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ifpcol@fncounteradjustment} +%  +% and the globalization\slash localization of \counter{footnote} are just to +% give defaults and thus can be overridden by API macros giving non-default +% settings. Another remark is that backward-compatible macros +% \!\multicolumnfootnotes!, \!\singlecolumnfootnotes! and +% \!\mergedfootnotes! are \!\let!-equal to \!\pcol@fnlayout@c!, +% \!\pcol@fnlayout@p! and \!\pcol@fnlayout@m! respectively. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Commands for Footnotes + +\def\footnotelayout#1{\@ifundefined{pcol@fnlayout@#1}% + {\PackageError{paracol}{Unknown footnote layout specifier #1}}% + {\@nameuse{pcol@fnlayout@#1}}} +\def\pcol@fnlayout@c{\global\pcol@scfnotefalse \global\pcol@mgfnotefalse + \localcounter{footnote}\nofncounteradjustment} +\def\pcol@fnlayout@p{\global\pcol@scfnotetrue \global\pcol@mgfnotefalse + \globalcounter{footnote}\fncounteradjustment} +\def\pcol@fnlayout@m{\pcol@fnlayout@p\global\pcol@mgfnotetrue} + +\let\multicolumnfootnotes\pcol@fnlayout@c +\let\singlecolumnfootnotes\pcol@fnlayout@p +\let\mergedfootnotes\pcol@fnlayout@m + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\@footnotetext} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fntext} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for footnote encapsulation and deferring.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fntexttop} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for footnote encapsulation.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fntextother} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for footnote encapsulation and deferring.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@fntext!\marg{text} is our own version of \LaTeX's +% \!\@footnotetext! used in \!\footnote! and \!\footnotetext! to \!\insert! +% the footnote $\arg{text}$ through \!\footins!. Since the original and our +% own are made \!\let!-equal by \!\pcol@zparacol!, our own is active +% throughout the environment. The customization is done to examine if the +% footnote should be deferred and to encapsulate the footnote in a \!\vbox!. +% +% The deferred footnote insertion is in effect if the footnote typesetting +% is \scfnote{} and \!\footnote! or \!\footnotetext! appears in a page +% $p<\ptop$. If so, we put the footnote $\arg{text}$ encapsulated in a +% \!\vbox! by \!\pcol@fntextbody! to the tail of $\df=\!\pcol@topfnotes!$ +% with \!\penalty!\!\interlinepenalty! preceding it for the split in +% \!\pcol@deferredfootins!, using \!\pcol@fntextother!\marg{text} whose sole +% user is this macro. Note that the decision of deferring is done based on +% $p=\!\pcol@page!$ which could be less than that of the page in which the +% footnoted text appears because the paragraph having the text will have a +% page break before the text. Therefore, $p$ for the footnote can be +% $\ptop$, but this misjudment will not cause problems because the footnote +% will eventually be put in $\ptop$ through $\df$ when the page break +% occurs. +% +% Otherwise the footnote $\arg{text}$ is processed by +% \!\pcol@fntexttop!\marg{text}, also used solely in this macro, to +% \!\insert! it through \!\footins! as usual but after the encapsulation by +% \!\pcol@fntextbody! and with \!\penalty!\!\interlinepenalty! following it +% to allow \TeX's page builder to split footnotes. +% +% Note that \!\pcol@fntexttop! and \!\pcol@fntextother! have \!\long! +% property because $\arg{text}$ may have two or more paragraphs. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@fntext{% + \let\reserved@a\pcol@fntexttop + \ifpcol@scfnote \ifnum\pcol@page<\pcol@toppage + \let\reserved@a\pcol@fntextother + \fi\fi + \reserved@a} +\long\def\pcol@fntexttop#1{% + \pcol@Logfn{\pcol@fntexttop{\@thefnmark}}% + \insert\footins{\pcol@fntextbody{#1}\penalty\interlinepenalty}} +\long\def\pcol@fntextother#1{% + \global\setbox\pcol@topfnotes\vbox{\unvbox\pcol@topfnotes + \penalty\interlinepenalty\pcol@fntextbody{#1}}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fntextbody} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for footnote encapsulation and height capping.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@fntextbody!\marg{text}, invoked from \!\pcol@fntexttop! +% and \!\pcol@fntext~other!, encapsulates the footnote $\arg{text}$ in a +% \!\vbox! whose height is $h_{\max}=\!\textheight!-\!\skip!\~\!\footins!$ at +% tallest. The encapsulation is to inhibit page breaks in a footnote +% because the split by the break will make some skips and other items +% eliminated causing a weird result when split portions are {\em joined}. +% The height capping is thus required to find a page in which the footnote +% resides. +% +% The macro at first does operations done in \LaTeX's +% \!\@footnotetext! to put $\arg{text}$ in \!\@tempboxa! but with one +% exception that $\!\hsize!=\!\textwidth!$ rather than \!\columnwidth! when +% \Scfnote{} typesetting is in effect. Note that this part is blindly copied +% from the original though it should be meaningless to set +% \!\interlinepenalty!, \!\splittopskip!, \!\splitmaxdepth! and +% \!\floatingpenalty! because $\arg{text}$ is encapsulated. +% +% Then the height-plus-depth of the box is compared with $h_{\max}$ and, if +% it exceeds the limit, the height of the box is set $h_{\max}$, the +% footnote is made followed by a \!\vss! to avoid overfull, and a warning +% message of too tall is put by \!\PackageWarning!. Finally, the box is put +% into \!\footins! or $\df$ by the invoker of this macro. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\long\def\pcol@fntextbody#1{\setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty\@MM + \hsize \ifpcol@scfnote \textwidth \else \columnwidth \fi + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{\p@footnote\@thefnmark}% + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces#1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}% + \@tempdima\ht\@tempboxa \advance\@tempdima\dp\@tempboxa + \@tempdimb\textheight \advance\@tempdimb-\skip\footins + \ifdim\@tempdima>\@tempdimb + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox to\@tempdimb{\unvbox\@tempboxa\vss}% + \PackageWarning{paracol}{Too tall footnote}% + \fi + \box\@tempboxa} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\fncounteradjustment} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to make \string\texttt{footnote} counter is consistent +% with its origin at the beginning of \string\texttt{paracol} and the +% number of footnotes given in the environment at its end.} +% \begin{macro}{\nofncounteradjustment} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to disable the footnote counter adjustment.} +%  +% The API macros \!\fncounteradjustment! and \!\nofncounteradjustment! turns +% |\ifpcol@|\~|fncounteradjustment| +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\ifpcol@fncounteradjustment} +%  +% $\true$ or $\false$, to enable or disable the \counter{footnote} counter +% adjustment letting $\!\c@footnote!=\bf+\nf$ in \Endparacol, respectively. +% After the definition we disable the adjustment to give the default setting. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\fncounteradjustment{\global\pcol@fncounteradjustmenttrue} +\def\nofncounteradjustment{\global\pcol@fncounteradjustmentfalse} +\nofncounteradjustment + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@footnoterule} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to keep the original definition of \cs{footnoterule}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@footnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to keep the original definition of \cs{footnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@footnotemark} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to keep the original definition of \cs{footnotemark}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@footnotetext} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to keep the original definition of \cs{footnotetext}.} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@footnoterule!, \!\pcol@@footnote!, +% \!\pcol@@footnotemark! and \!\pcol@@footnotetext! are to keep the original +% defitions of \!\footnoterule!, \!\footnote!, \!\footnotemark! and +% \!\footnotetext! in them, respectively, so that we define our own versions +% with references to the originals. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\pcol@footnoterule\footnoterule +\let\pcol@@footnote\footnote +\let\pcol@@footnotemark\footnotemark +\let\pcol@@footnotetext\footnotetext +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{4} +% \begin{macro}{\footnote} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@footnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnote*} and footnote counter adjustment.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ifootnote} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnote*} and footnote counter adjustment.} +% \begin{macro}{\footnotemark} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@footnotemark} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnotemark*} and footnote counter adjustment.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ifootnotemark} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnotemark*} and footnote counter adjustment.} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@footnote! and \!\pcol@footnotemark! are the +% implementations of our own versions of \!\footnote! and \!\footnotemark! +% which are made \!\let!-equal to them by \!\pcol@zparacol!, respectively. +% The reasons why we need to have our own are two-fold; to have starred +% version of them; and to maintain $\nf=\!\pcol@nfootnotes!$ for the +% \counter{footnote} counter adjustment. +% +% The implementations of the starred versions +% \!\footnote!|*|\oarg{num}\marg{text} and +% \!\footnotemark!|*|\~\oarg{num} have common structure in which we invoke +% \!\pcol@adjustfnctr!$\arg{macro}$\oarg{num} if `|*|' is given, to let +% \!\c@footnote! have the number relative to $\bf=\!\pcol@footnotebase!$ or +% to itself. Then the macros \!\pcol@ifootnote! or \!\pcol@ifootnotemark! +% are invoked from \!\pcol@adjustfnctr! or the else-part of \!\@ifstar! to +% perform the operations common to both cases with and without `|*|', i.e., +% invoking the original version \!\pcol@@footnote! or \!\pcol@@footnotemark! +% after incrementing $\nf$. One caution is that +% $\arg{macro}=\!\pcol@ifootnote!$ for \!\footnote!, but +% $\arg{macro}=|{|\!\pcol@ifootnotemark!\!\relax!|}|$ for \!\footnotemark! +% so that \!\@ifnextchar! in \!\pcol@@footnotemark! invoked from +% \!\pcol@ifootnotemark! eats \!\relax! to terminate space skipping and thus +% spaces following \oarg{num} are kept. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@footnote{\@ifstar{\pcol@adjustfnctr\pcol@ifootnote}\pcol@ifootnote} +\def\pcol@ifootnote{\global\advance\pcol@nfootnotes\@ne \pcol@@footnote} +\def\pcol@footnotemark{\@ifstar + {\pcol@adjustfnctr{\pcol@ifootnotemark\relax}}% + \pcol@ifootnotemark} +\def\pcol@ifootnotemark{\global\advance\pcol@nfootnotes\@ne + \pcol@@footnotemark} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@adjustfnctr} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnote*} and \cs{footnotemark*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iadjustfnctr} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnote*} and \cs{footnotemark*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@calcfnctr} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnote*}, \cs{footnotemark*} and +% \cs{footnotetext*}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@adjustfnctr!$\arg{macro}$\oarg{num}, invoked from the +% then-part of \!\@ifstar! in \!\pcol@footnote! and \!\pcol@footnotemark!, +% calculates the number to be set into \!\c@footnote! by +% \!\pcol@calcfnctr!$\arg{num}$\!\@nil! after processing the optional +% argument $\arg{num}$ by \!\pcol@iadjustfnctr! with default `|+1|', and +% then invoke $\arg{macro}$ being \!\pcol@ifootnote! or +% \!\pcol@ifootnotemark!\!\relax!. Since \!\pcol@calcfnctr! returns the +% number \!\c@footnote! should have and the counter is incremented by +% \!\stepcounter! in \!\pcol@@footnote! or \!\pcol@@footnotemark!, we +% decrement the counter prior to invoke $\arg{macro}$. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@calcfnctr!$\arg{num}$\!\@nil!, also invoked from +% \!\pcol@iifootnotetext!, calculate $m$ specified by $\arg{num}$ as follows, +% where $f=\!\c@footnote!$, to return it through \!\@tempcnta!. +% $$ +% m=\cases{f+k&$\arg{num}=|+|k$\cr +% f-k&$\arg{num}=|-|k$\cr +% \bf+k&$\arg{num}=k$} +% $$ +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@adjustfnctr#1{\@ifnextchar[%] + {\pcol@iadjustfnctr{#1}}{\pcol@iadjustfnctr{#1}[+1]}} +\def\pcol@iadjustfnctr#1[#2]{\pcol@calcfnctr#2\@nil + \global\c@footnote\@tempcnta \global\advance\c@footnote\m@ne#1} +\def\pcol@calcfnctr#1#2\@nil{\@tempcnta\c@footnote + \def\reserved@a{#1}\def\reserved@b{+}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \advance\@tempcnta#2\relax + \else \def\reserved@b{-}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b \advance\@tempcnta-#2\relax + \else \@tempcnta\pcol@footnotebase \advance\@tempcnta#1#2\relax + \fi\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\footnotetext} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@footnotetext} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnotetext*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@ifootnotetext} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnotetext*}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@iifootnotetext} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced for \cs{footnotetext*}.} +%  +% The macros \!\pcol@footnotetext! is the implementation of our own versions +% of \!\footnotetext! which is made \!\let!-equal to it by +% \!\pcol@zparacol!. The reasons why we need to have our own is to have the +% starred version. That is, if `|*|' is not given, we simply invoke the +% original version \!\pcol@@footnotetext!. Otherwise we invoke +% \!\pcol@ifootnotetext! which then examines if the optional argument +% \oarg{num} is presented. If so, we invoke \!\pcol@iifootnotetext! in +% which \!\pcol@calcfnctr!$\arg{num}$\!\@nil! is invoked to have the value +% $m$ being the footnote ordinal with which we invoke +% \!\pcol@@footnotetext!\oarg{\mbox{$m$}} with two \!\expandafter!s to +% extract $m$ from \!\@tempcnta!. Otherwise, i.e., \oarg{num} is not given, +% we increment \!\c@footnote! by \!\stepcounter! before invoking +% \!\pcol@@footnotetext!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@footnotetext{\@ifstar\pcol@ifootnotetext\pcol@@footnotetext} +\def\pcol@ifootnotetext{\@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@iifootnotetext{\stepcounter{footnote}\pcol@@footnotetext}} +\def\pcol@iifootnotetext[#1]{\pcol@calcfnctr#1\@nil + \expandafter\pcol@@footnotetext\expandafter[\number\@tempcnta]} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{13} +% \section{Commands for Marginal Notes} +% \label{sec:imp-mpar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Add the section ``Commands for Marginal Notes'' to describe newly +% introduced macros for the emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\marginpar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Locally modified in \cs{pcol@zparacol} for the emulation of +% \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@marginpar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced as the in-\texttt{paracol} version of \cs{marginpar} for +% the emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@marginpar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced to keep the orginal version of \cs{marginpar} for +% the emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\@mn@@marginnote} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Locally modified in \cs{pcol@zparacol} for the emulation of +% \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@marginnote} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced as the in-\texttt{paracol} version of +% \cs{@mn@@marginnote} for the emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mn@warning} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced to put a warning message to show \cs{marginnote} is +% emulated.} +% \begin{macro}{\@xympar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Locally modified in \cs{pcol@zparacol} for the emulation of +% \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@xympar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced as the in-\texttt{paracol} version of +% \cs{@xympar} for the emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@@xympar} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced to keep the orginal version of \cs{@xympar} for the +% emulation of \cs{marginnote}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mparoffset} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Introduced to have the vertical offset for the emulation of +% \cs{marginnote}.} +% The API macro \!\marginnote!\oarg{left}\marg{right}\oarg{voffset} given by +% the package \textsf{marginnote} is emulated using +% \!\marginpar!\oarg{left}\marg{right} and \!\pcol@addmarginpar! in +% \!\output! routine. The basic mechanism is to pass the vertical offset +% $\arg{voffset}$ to \!\pcol@addmarginpar! through $|\dimen|\arg{b}$ where +% $b$ is the \!\insert! to carry $\arg{left}$. The offset passing is +% implemented as follows. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% \!\marginpar! is made \!\let!-equal to our own version \!\pcol@marginpar! +% in \!\pcol@zparacol! so that it \!\let! the macro \!\pcol@mparoffset! be +% \!\z@! and then invoke \LaTeX's origincal version kept in +% \!\pcol@@marginpar!, because the marginal note given by \!\marginpar! will +% not be shifted. +% +% \item +% The internal macro +% \!\@mn@@marginnote!\oarg{left}\marg{right}\oarg{voffset} defined in +% \textsf{marginnote} is made \!\let!-equal to our own version +% \!\pcol@marginnote! in \!\pcol@zparacol! so that it |\def|ines +% \!\pcol@mparoffset! to have $\arg{voffset}$ and then invoke +% \!\pcol@@marginpar!\oarg{left}\~\marg{right} for the emulation. In the +% invokation, \textsf{marginnote}'s typesetting macros \!\margin~font!, +% \!\raggedleftmarginnote! and \!\raggedrightmarginnote! are attached to +% $\arg{left}$ and $\arg{right}$. +% +% \item +% \LaTeX's internal macro \!\@xympar! for the last operations of +% \!\marginpar! is made \!\let!-equal to our own version in +% \!\pcol@zparacol! so that it assigns the offset in \!\pcol@mparoffset! to +% |\dimen|\!\@marbox! for $\arg{left}$, if $\!\@floatpenalty!<0$ to mean +% other macros for \!\marginpar! have not detected any errors. +% \end{itemize} +%  +% In addition, we raise a warning that \!\marginnote! is emulated by +% \!\pcol@mn@warning!, which is made \!\let!-equal to \!\relax! in the caller +% \!\pcol@marginnote! after the invokation so that the warning message is +% put just once. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Commands for Marginal Notes + +\def\pcol@marginpar{\let\pcol@mparoffset\z@ \pcol@@marginpar} +\long\def\pcol@marginnote[#1]#2[#3]{\endgroup + \pcol@mn@warning \global\let\pcol@mn@warning\relax + \def\pcol@mparoffset{#3}% + \pcol@@marginpar[\marginfont\raggedleftmarginnote#1]% + {\marginfont\raggedrightmarginnote#2}} +\def\pcol@mn@warning{% + \PackageWarning{paracol}{\string\margninnote\space is emulated by + \string\marginpar.}} +\def\pcol@xympar{% + \ifnum\@floatpenalty<\z@ \global\dimen\@marbox\pcol@mparoffset\relax \fi + \pcol@@xympar} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% \KeepSpace{9} +% \section{Two-Sided Typesetting} +% \label{sec:imp-swap} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the section ``Column-Swapping'' to describe newly +% introduced macros for column-swapping.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Rename the section title from ``Column-Swapping'' to ``Two-Sided +% Typesetting''.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\twosided} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced as an easier API for various two-sided typesetting.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add two-sided background painting.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add two-sided marginal note placement.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@twosided} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{twosided}.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Fix spelling ``twosiding'' replacing it with ``two-siding'' in the +% error message.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@twosided@p} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{twosided} with \string\texttt{[p]}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@twosided@c} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{twosided} with \string\texttt{[c]}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@twosided@m} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{twosided} with \string\texttt{[m]}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for two-sided marginal note placement.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@twosided@b} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{twosided} with \string\texttt{[b]}.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced for two-sided background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\swapcolumninevenpages} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to enable column-swapping.} +% \begin{macro}{\noswapcolumninevenpages} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to disable column-swapping.} +%  +% \def\inornot{\mathrel{{\in}/{\notin}}} +%  +% The API macro $\!\twosided!|[|T|]|$ where $T=t_1t_2\cdots$ is to +% enable\slash disable two-sided paging with +% $\CSIndex{if@twoside}=\true/\false$ ($|p|\inornot T$), two-sided \cswap{} +% with $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}\~={\true/\false}$ ($|c|\inornot T$), +% two-sided % marginal note placement with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapmarginpar}={\true/\false}$ ($|m|\inornot T$), and/or +% two-sided \bgpaint{} with $\CSIndex{ifpcol@bg@swap}={\true/\false}$ +% ($|b|\inornot{}T$) individually, or to enable all of them as a whole +% when the optional argument is not given. +% +% The macro invokes \!\pcol@twosided! with the optional argument $T$ if +% provided, or with $T=|pcmb|$ otherwise to enable all features. Then +% \!\pcol@twosided! at first turns all the switches $\false$ an then scans +% all non-space tokens $t\in T$ invoking $|\pcol@twosided@|{\cdot}t$ if it +% is defined and thus $t\in\{|p|,|c|,|m|,|b|\}$ to turn the corresponding +% switch $\true$, or complains that the feature $t$ is unknown. +% +% Note that backward-compatible API macros +% \!\swapcolumninevenpages! and \!\noswapcolumn~inevenpages! are still +% availabel to turn $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}$ $\true$ an $\false$ +% respectivey. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Column Swapping + +\def\twosided{\@ifnextchar[%] + {\pcol@twosided}{\pcol@twosided[pcmb]}} +\def\pcol@twosided[#1]{% + \global\@twosidefalse \global\pcol@swapcolumnfalse + \global\pcol@swapmarginparfalse \global\pcol@bg@swapfalse + \@tfor\reserved@a:=#1\do{% + \@ifundefined{pcol@twosided@\reserved@a}% + {\PackageError{paracol}{Unknown two-siding feature \reserved@a}}% + {\@nameuse{pcol@twosided@\reserved@a}}}} +\def\pcol@twosided@p{\global\@twosidetrue} +\def\pcol@twosided@c{\global\pcol@swapcolumntrue} +\def\pcol@twosided@m{\global\pcol@swapmarginpartrue} +\def\pcol@twosided@b{\global\pcol@bg@swaptrue} + +\def\swapcolumninevenpages{\global\pcol@swapcolumntrue} +\def\noswapcolumninevenpages{\global\pcol@swapcolumnfalse} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@swapcolumn} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to convert column ordinal and its position.} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add two arguments $C^0$ and $C^1$ as the third and fourth ones to +% modifiy the calculation of $c_2$ with them for column-swapping with +% parallel-paging.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the assignment of \cs{pcol@colsepid} to let it have $c_2-1$ if +% swapped or $c_2$ otherwise.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add a user \cs{pcol@addmarginpar} and remove \cs{paracol}, +% \cs{pcol@sptxt} and \cs{pcol@switchcol}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@colsepid} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to be let have $c_2-1$ if swapped or $c_2$ otherwise by +% \cs{pcol@swapcolumn}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@swapcolumn!$\\\<\Cfrom\>\<\Cto\>$ converts +% the column ordinal $c$ or position $c'$ in the \!\count! +% register\footnote{ +%  +% Or the \!\dimen! register \!\z@!.} +%  +% $c_1$ to the position or ordinal to set it in the \!\count! register +% $c_2$, for a \parapag{}e having columns $c\In\Cfrom\Cto$. That is, we let +% $c_2=(\Cto-1)-(c_1-\Cfrom)$ if $\CSIndex{ifpcol@swapcolumn}=\true$ to mean +% the \cswap{} is in effect and \!\c@page! is even, while $c_2=c_1$ +% otherwise. We also let $c^g=\!\pcol@colsepid!=c_2-1$ if swapped, or +% $c^g=c_2$ otherwise, so that it has the ordinal of the \csepgap{} +% {\em physically} following the column $c_2$. +% +% The macro is used in \!\pcol@ioutputelt!, \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, +% \!\pcol@imakeflushedpage! and \!\pcol@iflushfloats! with +% $(c_1,c_2)=(c',c)$, and in \!\pcol@addmarginpar! (another use) with +% $(c_1,c_2)=(c,c')$. Note that in the uses in the macros above except for +% \!\pcol@addmarginpar!, \!\c@page! definitely has the page number for the +% page to be shipped out. As for \!\pcol@addmarginpar! on the other hand, +% \!\c@page! can be different from the ship-out page number to produce a +% weird result if their parities are different, due to page jump. However +% this problem is not so severe because it just affects the position of +% marginal notes which \LaTeX{} itself may misplace. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@swapcolumn#1#2#3#4{% + \edef\pcol@colsepid{\number#1}% + \ifpcol@swapcolumn + \ifodd\c@page\relax #2#1\relax + \else + #2#4\relax \advance#2-#1\relax \advance#2#3\relax \advance#2-\tw@ + \edef\pcol@colsepid{\number#2}% + \advance#2\@ne + \fi + \else #2#1\relax + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\marginparthreshold} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to spacify the smallest ordinal of columns whose marginal +% notes go to the right margin if not swapped.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@marginparthreshold} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{marginparthreshold}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mpthreshold@l} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep the value specified by \cs{marginparthreshold} +% for columns in left parallel-pages.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@mpthreshold@r} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep the value specified by \cs{marginparthreshold} +% for columns in right parallel-pages.} +%  +% The API macro $\!\marginparthreshold!\Arg{t_l}|[|t_r|]|$ determines the +% smallest ordinal $t_l$ of columns in left \parapag{}es whose marginal +% notes go to the right margin in fundamental setting of marginal note +% positioning, while the threshold in right \parapag{}es is given by $t_r$ +% if provided or by $t_l$ otherwise. That is, marginal notes given in a +% column $c$ in a page $p$ s.t.\ $c\In0\CL$ (resp.\ $\LBRP\CL\C$) go left if +% $c\!\pcol@mcpushlimit!=1000$, and if so +% we stop the execution with \!\PackageError!\footnote{ +%  +% And let $m=1$ to allow a user to continue the execution bravely.} +%  +% in order to avoid too many macros $|\pcol@reset@color@mpop@|\cdot m$ are +% defined\footnote{ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{m}{\pcol@reset@color@mpop@} +%  +% We could make the number of math-mode coloring operations virtually +% unlimited by putting all digits of the decimal representation of $m$ +% followed by a terminator by multiple +% \cs{aftergroup}s so that \cs{pcol@reset@color@mpop} is put by +% \cs{aftergroup} prior to them to capture them as its argument, but +% limiting with $2^{31}-1$ is still necessary and that with 1000 is +% reasonable.}. +%  +% Otherwise, i.e., if $m\leq\!\pcol@mcpushlimit!$, we +% reserve the invocation of the macro $|\pcol@reset@color@mpop@|{\cdot}i$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{m}{\pcol@reset@color@mpop@} +%  +% for our own pop by \!\aftergroup! defining the macro as +% $\!\pcol@reset@color@mpop!\Arg{m}$. If we are not in math mode, on the +% other hand, and neither in a \!\vbox! nor in restricted horizontal mode, +% we simply reserve the invocation of the macro $\pcol@reset@color@pop$. +% +% Then, regardless that we are in math mode or not, we push the contents of +% \!\current@color!, which \!\set@color! should refer to as the color +% information to be set, into the shadow \colorstack{} +% $\cstshadow=\!\pcol@colorstack@shadow!$ for the stack rewinding\slash +% reestablishing in \!\columncolor! and \!\normalcolumncolor!. Since this +% push is done non-\!\global!ly with \!\edef!, we save\slash restore the +% definition of \!\@elt! to\slash from \Midx{\!\pcol@elt@save!} before\slash +% after the push, resepctively\footnote{ +%  +% Just in case.}. +%  +% Then we \!\insert! a \!\vbox! through \!\pcol@colorins! for the push of +% $\celt_i$ or $\mcelt_{i,m}$ to $\cstraw$ synchronous with a page break or +% \cswitch{}. The height of the \!\vbox! is 1\,|pt|, depth is 0 and +% width is $m$\,|sp| if we are in math mode or 0 otherwise, and its +% contents is the coloring \!\special! given by \!\pcol@set@color! so that +% the \!\special! is what the macro put at the beginning of this macro but +% without the reservation of \!\reset@color!. After the insertion, we put +% \!\pcol@fcwhyphenate!, being \!\hskip!\!\z@! when +% \!\coloredwordhyphenated! is effective, to split the coloring \!\special! +% from the first colored word so that the word may be hyphenated if we are +% in horizontal mode. If we are in vertical mode, on the other hand, we do +% \!\nobreak! if $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$ to keep the \!\insert!ion from +% being followed by a page break. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@mcpushlimit{1000} +\def\pcol@set@color@push{\pcol@set@color + \ifmmode\else\ifinner \pcol@innertrue \fi\fi + \ifpcol@inner\else + \ifmmode + \global\advance\pcol@mcid\@ne + \ifnum \pcol@mcid>\pcol@mcpushlimit\relax + \PackageError{paracol}{Too many coloring commands in math mode}\@ehb + \global\pcol@mdid\@ne + \fi + \@tempdima\pcol@mcid sp\relax + \expandafter\aftergroup + \csname pcol@reset@color@mpop@\number\pcol@mcid\endcsname + \expandafter\xdef + \csname pcol@reset@color@mpop@\number\pcol@mcid\endcsname + {\noexpand\pcol@reset@color@mpop{\number\pcol@mcid}}% + \else + \aftergroup\pcol@reset@color@pop \@tempdima\z@ + \fi + \let\pcol@elt@save\@elt \let\@elt\relax + \edef\pcol@colorstack@shadow{\pcol@colorstack@shadow\@elt{\current@color}}% + \let\@elt\pcol@elt@save + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\let\aftergroup\@gobble \pcol@set@color}% + \ht\@tempboxa1sp \dp\@tempboxa\z@ \wd\@tempboxa\@tempdima + \insert\pcol@colorins{\box\@tempboxa}\ifhmode \pcol@fcwhyphenate \fi + \ifvmode\if@nobreak \nobreak \fi\fi + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@reset@color@pop} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Introduced to work as \cs{reset@color}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Modified to pop color stack by \cs{output} and to examine if +% $\cs{ifpcol@output}\EQ\mathit{true}$.} +% \changes{v1.23}{2013/07/08} +% {Add an argument of \cs{relax} to \cs{pcol@color@invokeoutput} +% so that the last word of a colored text is not followed by a line +% break candidate.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Completely change its definition according to the new text coloring +% with \cs{insert}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@reset@color@mpop} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {Introduced for coloring specified in math mode.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Completely change its definition according to the new text coloring +% with \cs{insert}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! and its math-mode relative +% $\!\pcol@reset@color@mpop!\~\Arg{m}$ are invoked by +% \!\aftergroup! mechanism in \!\pcol@set@color@push!, directly for the +% former and through the macro $|\pcol@reset@color@mpop@|{\cdot}m$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{m}{\pcol@reset@color@mpop@} +%  +% for the latter. They \!\insert! a \!\vbox! for $\celtpop_i$ or +% $\mceltpop_{i,m}$ to add it to $\cstraw$ synchronously with a page break +% or \cswitch{}. Therefore, the height and depth of the \!\vbox! are 0 and +% width is 0 for $\celtpop_i$ or $m$\,|sp| for $\mceltpop_{i,m}$. The +% contents of the \!\vbox! is an uncoloring \!\special! given by +% \!\reset@color! but this is done just for debugging to show what +% \!\pcol@colorins! has by, for example, \!\pcol@ShowBox!. Then if we are +% in vertical mode and $\CSIndex{if@nobreak}=\true$, we do \!\nobreak! to +% keep the \!\insert!ion from being followed by a page break even in +% \!\pcol@reset@color@mpop! because its corresponding +% \!\pcol@set@color@push! may have been in a displayed math construct after +% which we are in vertical mode. +% +% One caution is that \!\pcol@reset@color@pop! can be invoked outside the +% \env{paracol} environment in which the corresponding +% \!\pcol@set@color@push! appears. In this case with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@output}=\false$, we don't need to do the pop operation +% and cannot make the \!\insert!ion for it because \!\output! is not for +% \env{paracol}. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@reset@color@pop{% + \ifpcol@output + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\reset@color}% + \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@ \wd\@tempboxa\z@ + \insert\pcol@colorins{\box\@tempboxa}% + \ifvmode\if@nobreak \nobreak \fi\fi + \fi} +\def\pcol@reset@color@mpop#1{% + \setbox\@tempboxa\vbox{\reset@color}% + \ht\@tempboxa\z@ \dp\@tempboxa\z@ \wd\@tempboxa#1sp\relax + \insert\pcol@colorins{\box\@tempboxa}% + \ifvmode\if@nobreak \nobreak \fi\fi +} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@color@invokeoutput} was introduced for \cs{output} +% request for coloring but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.23}{2013/07/08} +% {\cs{pcol@color@invokeoutput} was modified to add second argument +% $s$ to insert a null skip after \cs{vadjust} only when the macro is +% invoked from \cs{pcol@set@color@push} in horizontal mode.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@color@invokeoutput} is removed according to the change of +% text coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {\cs{pcol@color@invokeoutput@v} was introduced for \cs{output} +% request for coloring but removed in v1.34.} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {\cs{pcol@color@invokeoutput@v} is removed according to the change of +% text coloring from \cs{output} to \cs{insert}.} +% +% \KeepSpace{1} +% \begin{macro}{\coloredwordhyphenated} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to enable null skip insertion before the first word +% after a coloring command not always but conditionally.} +% \begin{macro}{\nocoloredwordhyphenated} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to disable null skip insertion before the first word +% after a coloring command.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@fcwhyphenate} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to enable null skip insertion before the first word +% after a coloring command not always but conditionally.} +%  +% The API macro \!\coloredwordhyphenated! \!\def!ines the macro +% \!\pcol@fcwhyphenate! being \!\hskip!\!\z@! so that the null space is +% inserted after the coloring \!\special! and \!\insert! put by +% \!\pcol@set@color@push! if we are in horizontal mode, so that the word +% following them can be hyphenated. The other API macro +% \!\nocoloredwordhyphenated! makes $\!\pcol@fcwhyphenate!=\!\relax!$ to +% inhibit the insertion. Since the null skip is a line break candidate, the +% skip might cause an unexpected and undesirable line break. However, this +% demerit is less important than the merit of making it possible to +% hyphenate the first word in multi-column documents with narrow lines, and +% thus we make \!\coloredwordhyphenated! effective in default while giving +% users a means to disable the insertion (occasionally) by +% \!\nocoloredwordhyphenated!. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\coloredwordhyphenated{\def\pcol@fcwhyphenate{\hskip\z@}} +\def\nocoloredwordhyphenated{\let\pcol@fcwhyphenate\relax} +\coloredwordhyphenated + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \KeepSpace{8} +% \section{Commands for Column-Separating Rule Color and Background Painting} +% \label{sec:imp-commbg} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the subsection ``Commands for Column-Separating Rule Color and +% Background Painting'' to describe newly +% introduced API macros to specify colors of column-separating rules +% and background painting.} +% +% \begin{macro}{\colseprulecolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to spcify the colors of column-separating rules.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcseprulecolor@x} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{colseprulecolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcseprulecolor@y} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{colseprulecolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcseprulecolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{colseprulecolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\normalcolseprulecolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to spcify that color of column-separating rules is normal.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{colseprulecolor} and +% \cs{normalcolseprulecolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to keep the color for all column-separating rules.} +%  +% The macro \!\colseprulecolor!\oarg{mode}\marg{color}$|[|c|]|$ \!\def!ines +% \!\pcol@colseprulecolor! to have the $\arg{color}$ optionally with +% coloring $\arg{mode}$ of all \cseprule{}s if the optional argument $c$ is +% not provided, or $|\pcol@colseprulecolor|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{c}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +%  +% that of the rule drawn between a particular column pair $c$ and $c+1$. +% After \!\def!ining \Midx{\!\pcol@colorcommand!} to be \!\colseprulecolor! +% in case we have to give a warning, the macro invokes +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@x!\oarg{mode}\marg{color} or +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@y!\marg{color} according to the provision of the +% optional argument $\arg{mode}$ to invoke \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor! with +% argument \marg{cmd}${}={}$\!\color!\oarg{mode}\marg{color} so that this +% macro invokes $\!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i!\ARg{cmd}|[|c|]|$ where +% $c=\emptyset$ if the optional arguemnt $c$ is not provided. +% +% The macro $\!\normalcolseprulecolor!|[|c|]|$, on the other hand, defines +% $|\pcol@colseprule|\~|color|[{\cdot}c]$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +%  +% with whatever \!\normalcolor! gives, and thus it invokes +% \!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i! letting $\arg{cmd}=\!\normalcolor!$, after +% \!\def!ining \!\pcol@colorcommand! to be \!\normalcolsep~rule~color!. +% +% The macro $\!\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i!\ARg{cmd}|[|c|]|$ examines if +% $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$ to mean no coloring packages have been loaded +% and, if so, do nothing giving a warning the command in +% \!\pcol@colorcommand! is not effective. Otherwise, we examine if +% $\arg{cmd}$ has proper arguments by invoking it but temporally nullifying +% \!\set@color! and then \!\def!ine $|\pcol@colseprulecolor|[{\cdot}c]$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +%  +% to be $\arg{cmd}$. +% +% Note that at the top level we \!\def!ine \!\pcol@colseprulecolor! to be +% \!\normalcolor! to give the default for all \cseprule{}s. Also note that +% macros $|\pcol@colseprulecolor|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +%  +% are referred to solely in \!\pcol@hfil! +% which also uses \!\pcol@colseprulecolor! for columns for which +% $|\pcol@colseprulecolor|{\cdot}c$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{c}{\pcol@colseprulecolor} +%  +% is not defined. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Commands for Column-Separating Rule Color and Background Painting + +\def\colseprulecolor{\def\pcol@colorcommand{\string\colseprulecolor}% + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@defcseprulecolor@x\pcol@defcseprulecolor@y} +\def\pcol@defcseprulecolor@x[#1]#2{\pcol@defcseprulecolor{\color[#1]{#2}}} +\def\pcol@defcseprulecolor@y#1{\pcol@defcseprulecolor{\color{#1}}} +\def\pcol@defcseprulecolor#1{\@ifnextchar[%] + {\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i{#1}}{\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i{#1}[]}} +\def\normalcolseprulecolor{% + \def\pcol@colorcommand{\string\normalcolseprulecolor}% + \@ifnextchar[%] + {\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i\normalcolor}% + {\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i\normalcolor[]}} +\def\pcol@defcseprulecolor@i#1[#2]{% + \ifx\set@color\relax + \PackageWarning{paracol}{\pcol@colorcommand\space is not effective + without some coloring package}% + \else + {\let\set@color\relax #1}% + \global\@namedef{pcol@colseprulecolor#2}{#1}% + \fi} +\gdef\pcol@colseprulecolor{\normalcolor} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{8} +% \begin{macro}{\backgroundcolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to define colors for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\nobackgroundcolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to undefine colors for background painting.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@e} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Fix the mispell ``colorling'' in the error message.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@i} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@region} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@iv} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@v} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +%  +% {\nosv\gdef\|{\;|\;}} +% \def\fdef{f_{\mathit{def}}} +%  +% The macro +% \!\backgroundcolor!\marg{region}\oarg{mode}\marg{color} +% defines the $\arg{color}$ optionally with $\arg{mode}$ of the +% $\arg{region}$ whose syntax is specified as follows. +%  +% % \begin{eqnarray*} +% \arg{region}&{:}{:}{=}&\arg{regionid}\arg{extension}\\ +% \arg{regionid}&{:}{:}{=}&\\|\arg{corg}|[|c|]|\\ +% \arg{a}&{:}{:}{=}&\arg{corg}\||s|\||S|\||t|\||T|\||l|\||L|\||r|\||R|\| +% |f|\||F|\||n|\||N|\||p|\||P|\\ +% \arg{corg}&{:}{:}{=}&|c|\||C|\||g|\||G|\\ +% \arg{extension}&{:}{:}{=}&\emptyset\||(|x_0|,|y_0|)|\| +% |(|x_0|,|y_0|)(|x_1|,|y_1|)| +% \end{eqnarray*} +% %  +% On the other hand, the counteraprt macro +% \!\nobackgroundcolor!\marg{region} undefines the color of $\arg{region}$. +% Both macros invoke \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! giving all arguments to it to +% parse the argument $\arg{region}$, after letting +% $\fdef=\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ and +% $\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@e!=\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@w!$ in +% \!\backgroundcolor!, or $\fdef=\CSIndex{if@tempswa}=\true$ and +% $\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@e!=\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@z!$ in +% \!\nobackgroundcolor!. Note that the \!\let!-assignment to +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@e! is effective when we found an error in the +% parse of the argument $\arg{region}$ to throw away what remains in the +% argument unprocessed and, for \!\backgroundcolor!, the other arguments +% \oarg{mode}\marg{color}. +% +% Then the macro \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! examines if $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@@} +%  +% is defined, and if not, raises an error that $a$ is invalid and then, in case +% the user dare to continue the execution, invokes +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@e! to throw all arguments away after letting +% $a'=\!\pcol@bg@region!=|xx|$ so that the undefining +% $|\pcol@bg@color|{\cdot}a'$ does not cause any troubles. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +%  +% Otherwise, i.e., if $|\pcol@bg@@|{\cdot}a$ is defined, it +% invokes $\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i!|[|c|]|$ or \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! +% according to the provision of the optional argument $|[|c|]|$, after +% \!\def!ining $a'=\Midx{\!\pcol@bg@region!}$ to be $a$. Then +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i! examines if $|\pcol@bg@|\~|mayhavecol@|{\cdot}a$ +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@c}\SpecialIndex{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@C} +% \SpecialIndex{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@g}\SpecialIndex{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@G} +%  +% is defined, and if not, raises an error again in a similar way, or +% otherwise invokes \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! after re\!\def!ining +% $a'=a{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}c$. +% +% Then if $\fdef=\true$, the macro \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! examines if +% $\!\set@color!=\!\relax!$, and if so it complains that any coloring +% packages have not been loaded and invokes \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@w! just +% for throwing away optional arguments for \bgext{} and +% \oarg{mode}\marg{color}. Otherwise, i.e., if $\!\set@color!\neq\!\relax!$, +% it invokes \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii! after adding $a'$ to the tail of +% \!\pcol@bg@defined!. On the other hand if $\fdef=\false$, it invokes +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@z! without checking the availability of coloring +% macros. +% +% The macro \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii! at first invokes +% $\!\pcol@bg@defext!\Arg{d}\Arg{e}$ with $e=0$ for all +% $d\in\{|l|,|r|,|t|,|b|\}$ to have default (no) \bgext{}s. Then if +% $|(|x_0|,|y_0|)|$ is provided, \!\pcol@bg@defext! is invoked again by +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iv! for all +% $d\in\{|l|,|r|,|t|,|b|\}$ but with $e=x_0$ for +% $d\in\{|l|,|r|\}$ and with $e=y_0$ for $d\in\{|t|,|b|\}$. +% Further, if % $|(|x_1|,|y_1|)|$ is also provided, \!\pcol@bg@defext! is +% invoked once again by \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@v! for all +% $(d,e)\in\{(|r|,x_1),(|b|,y_1)\}$. Finally \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@v! +% invokes \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@x!, which is also invoked from +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii! and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iv! if they find no +% (further) \bgext{}s. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\backgroundcolor#1{\@tempswatrue + \let\pcol@backgroundcolor@e\pcol@backgroundcolor@w + \pcol@backgroundcolor#1\@nil} +\def\nobackgroundcolor#1{\@tempswafalse + \let\pcol@backgroundcolor@e\pcol@backgroundcolor@z + \pcol@backgroundcolor#1\@nil} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor#1{% + \@ifundefined{pcol@bg@@#1}% + {\PackageError{paracol}% + {Invalid background coloring region identifier #1}% + \def\pcol@bg@region{xx}\pcol@backgroundcolor@e}% + {\def\pcol@bg@region{#1}% + \@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@backgroundcolor@i \pcol@backgroundcolor@ii}} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@i[#1]{% + \@ifundefined{pcol@bg@mayhavecol@\pcol@bg@region}% + {\PackageError{paracol}% + {Column number \number#1 is not effective for background coloring region + \pcol@bg@region}% + \def\pcol@bg@region{xx}\pcol@backgroundcolor@e}% + {\edef\pcol@bg@region{\pcol@bg@region @#1}% + \pcol@backgroundcolor@ii}} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii{% + \if@tempswa + \ifx\set@color\relax + \PackageWarning{paracol}{\string\backgroundcolor\space is not effective + without some coloring package}% + \let\reserved@b\pcol@backgroundcolor@w + \else + \let\reserved@b\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii + \@cons\pcol@bg@defined{{\pcol@bg@region}}% + \fi + \else + \let\reserved@b\pcol@backgroundcolor@z + \fi + \reserved@b} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii{% + \pcol@bg@defext{l}\z@ \pcol@bg@defext{r}\z@ + \pcol@bg@defext{t}\z@ \pcol@bg@defext{b}\z@ + \@ifnextchar(%) + \pcol@backgroundcolor@iv \pcol@backgroundcolor@x} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@iv(#1,#2){% + \pcol@bg@defext{l}{#1}\pcol@bg@defext{r}{#1}% + \pcol@bg@defext{t}{#2}\pcol@bg@defext{b}{#2}% + \@ifnextchar(%) + \pcol@backgroundcolor@v \pcol@backgroundcolor@x} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@v(#1,#2){% + \pcol@bg@defext{r}{#1}\pcol@bg@defext{b}{#2}% + \pcol@backgroundcolor@x} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +%  +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@x} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@y} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@x! is used in +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii!, \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iv! and +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@v! to define the color for \bgpaint{} of the +% region $a'=\!\pcol@bg@region!$. Since the macro is followed by the +% arguments \oarg{mode}\marg{color} of \!\backgroundcolor!, the macro +% invokes \!\color! to let it \!\def!ine \!\current@color! but without real +% coloring operations by letting +% \!\set@color!${}={}$\!\pcol@backgroundcolor@y!. Therefore +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@y! is invoked in \!\color! and it \!\xdef!ines +% $|\pcol@bg@colpr|{\cdot}a'$ to let it have whatever \!\current@color! has. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@x#1\@nil{\begingroup + \let\set@color\pcol@backgroundcolor@y \color} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@y{% + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@bg@color@\pcol@bg@region\endcsname + {\current@color}% + \endgroup} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@z} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@w} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@backgroundcolor@wi} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@color@xx} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@z! is invoked from +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@ii! directly to work for \!\nobackgroundcolor! to +% disable the \bgpaint{} for a region $a'=\!\pcol@bg@region!$, or from +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i! through +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@e! when they find an error in the argument +% $\arg{region}$ of \!\nobackground~color!. Similarly the macro +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@w! is invoked from \!\pcol@background~color@ii! +% directly when it finds no coloring packages have not been loaded, or +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor! and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@i! through +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@e! on error too but in the argument of +% \!\backgroundcolor!. Both macros throw away whatever remains in +% $\arg{region}$ unprocessed and then invoke \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@wi!, +% but \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@z! gives it a dummy argument pair, while +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@w! passes \oarg{mode}\marg{color} to it. +% +% Then \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@wi! throw all arguments away and lets +% $|\pcol@bg@color@|{\cdot}a'\~=\!\relax!$ so that the region $a'$ is +% untouched in \bgpaint{} macros. Note that since +% $a'=|xx|$ being an absolutely non-exsistent region when this macro is used +% for error recovery, undefining \pcol@bg@color@xx is not harmful. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@z#1\@nil{\pcol@backgroundcolor@wi[]{}} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@w#1\@nil{\@ifnextchar[%] + \pcol@backgroundcolor@wi{\pcol@backgroundcolor@wi[]}} +\def\pcol@backgroundcolor@wi[#1]#2{% + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let + \csname pcol@bg@color@\pcol@bg@region\endcsname\relax} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \KeepSpace{2} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@c} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@C} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@g} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@G} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor} and +% \cs{nobackgroundcolor}.} +%  +% The macros $|\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@|{\cdot}a$ where $a\in\{|c|,|C|,|g|,|G|\}$ +% are used in \!\pcol@background~color@i! when the region specifier $a$ in +% $\arg{region}$ argument of \!\backgroundcolor! or \!\noback~groundcolor! is +% followed by optional $|[|c|]|$, so that the invoker macro examines if $a$ +% can have the optional column oridinal. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@} +%  +% Therefore, the macros just need not to be \!\relax! and thus commonly have +% empty bodies. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@c{} +\def\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@C{} +\def\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@g{} +\def\pcol@bg@mayhavecol@G{} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@defext} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{backgroundcolor}.} +% The macro $\!\pcol@bg@defext!\Arg{d}\Arg{e}$ is used by +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@iii!, +% \!\pcol@back~groundcolor@iv! and \!\pcol@backgroundcolor@v! to \!\def!ine +% $|\pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}a'$ be $e=0$ for all +% $d\in\{|l|,|r|,|t|,|b|\}$ in the first, be $e=x_0$ for $d\in\{|l|,|r|\}$ +% and $e=y_0$ for $d\in\{|t|,|b|\}$ in the second, and be $e=x_0$, $x_1$, +% $y_0$ and $y_1$ for $d$ being |l|, |r|, |t|, |b| respectively in the last. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex +% {d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c} +% {\pcol@bg@ext@} +%  +% The macro at first lets \!\@tempdima! have $e$ to confirm $e$ is a proper +% dimension and then \!\xdef!ines +% $|\pcol@bg@ext@|{\cdot}d{\cdot}|@|{\cdot}a'$ to let it have the integer +% representaion of $e$ followed by |sp|. +%  +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex{d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a}{\pcol@bg@ext@} +% \SpecialArrayMainIndex +% {d{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c} +% {\pcol@bg@ext@} +%  +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@bg@defext#1#2{% + \@tempdima#2\relax + \expandafter\xdef\csname pcol@bg@ext@#1@\pcol@bg@region\endcsname{% + \number\@tempdima sp}} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\resetbackgroundcolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to disable background-paiting for all regions.} +% \begingroup \let\SMALL\small \let\small\footnotesize +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@resetbackgroundcolor} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{resetbackgroundcolor}.} +% \let\small\SMALL +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@bg@defined} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduced to implement \cs{resetbackgroundcolor}.} +%  +% The API macro \!\resetbackgroundcolor! disables \bgpaint{} of all regions +% whose colors have been specified by \!\backgroundcolor!. Since the region +% specifiers $a'_1$, $a'_2$, \ldots, $a'_n$ for which \bgpaint{} is specified +% are recorded in $\!\pcol@bg@defined!= +% \!\@elt!\Arg{a'_1}\!\@elt!\Arg{a'_2}\cdots\!\@elt!\Arg{a'_n}$ by +% \!\pcol@backgroundcolor!, the macro invokes \!\pcol@bg@defined! +% temporarily letting $\!\@elt!=\!\pcol@resetbackgroundcolor!$ to let +% $|\pcol@bg@|\~|color@|{\cdot}a'_i$ be \!\relax! for all $i\in[1,n]$, and +% clears \!\pcol@bg@defined!, whose initial state is also empty. +%  +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a}{\pcol@bg@color@} +% \SpecialArrayIndex{a{\cdot}\string\texttt{@}{\cdot}c}{\pcol@bg@color@} +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\resetbackgroundcolor{{% + \let\@elt\pcol@resetbackgroundcolor \pcol@bg@defined + \gdef\pcol@bgdefined{}}} +\def\pcol@resetbackgroundcolor#1{% + \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\csname pcol@bg@color@#1\endcsname\relax} +\gdef\pcol@bg@defined{} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro}\endgroup\end{macro} +% +% +% +% \section{Closing Environment} +% \label{sec:imp-end} +% +% \begin{macro}{\endparacol} +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Replace \cs{par} with \cs{pcol@par}.} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add pre-flushing column height check and footnote counter +% adjustment.} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove \cs{global} assignment of \cs{hsize} and \cs{linewidth} +% because assigments of them in \string\texttt{paracol} are now +% perfectly local.} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Add saving $c$ into \cs{pcol@lastcol} to let \cs{pcol@output@end} +% know the column visited last.} +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@lastcol} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Introduced to keep the column visited last to pass its typesetting +% parameters to post-environment.} +%  +% The macro \!\endparacol! is invoked from \Endparacol{} to close +% \env{paracol} environment. After making it sure to be in vertical mode by +% \!\pcol@par!, we switch to the column 0 by \!\pcol@switchcol! to let +% \lcounter{} have the values for the column 0 so that they are referred to +% outside the environment, after saving the current column $c$ in +% \!\pcol@lastcol! to be referred to in \!\pcol@output@end! so that +% $\cc_c(\sw)$ and $\cc_c(\ep)$ are passed to \postenv. +% +% \begin{Sloppy}{1800} +% Then we invoke \!\pcol@flushclear! for \pfcheck{}, turning +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ to tell \!\pcol@output@switch! for the +% check that it works on the \lpage, and giving $\bot$ to \!\pcol@flushclear! +% as its argument, unless footnote typesetting is \scfnote{} but not +% \mgfnote{} for which we give $\df$ to ensure all deferred footnotes are +% put in the checking process. Note that the argument for \Mcfnote{} +% typesetting is $\df$ but it is definitely $\bot$ in this mode. After that +% we make an \!\output! request by \!\pcol@invokeoutput! with +% $\!\penalty!=\!\pcol@op@end!$ and still with +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@lastpage}=\true$ to build the \lpage. +% \end{Sloppy} +% +% Next, we let $\!\columnwidth!=\!\textwidth!$ and +% $\CSIndex{if@twocolumn}=\false$ for single-column typesetting, and also +% let $\!\topskip!=\!\pcol@topskip!$ to make it sure that the parameter has +% the value used outside in \env{paracol} environment. Finally, if the +% \counter{footnote} counter adjustment is required by +% $\CSIndex{ifpcol@fncounteradjustment}=\true$, we let +% $\!\c@footnote!=\bf+\nf$. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Closing Environment + +\def\endparacol{\pcol@par + \edef\pcol@lastcol{\number\pcol@currcol}% + \pcol@nextcol\z@ \pcol@switchcol + \pcol@lastpagetrue + \ifpcol@mgfnote \pcol@flushclear\voidb@x + \else \pcol@flushclear\pcol@topfnotes + \fi + \pcol@invokeoutput\pcol@op@end + \global\columnwidth\textwidth + \global\@twocolumnfalse + \global\topskip\pcol@topskip + \ifpcol@fncounteradjustment + \global\c@footnote\pcol@footnotebase + \global\advance\c@footnote\pcol@nfootnotes + \fi} + +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro}\end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\pcol@restoreeveryvbox} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Introduced to reflect \cs{global} updates on \cs{everyvbox} in +% \string\texttt{paracol} environments.} +%  +% The macro \!\pcol@restoreeveryvbox! is invoked just after \Endparacol{} by +% \!\aftergroup! mechanism activated by \!\pcol@zparacol!. It examines if +% \!\pcol@everyvbox! has tokens different from \!\pcol@dummytoken! which +% \!\pcol@zparacol! \!\global!ly assigned to the register. Since the dummy +% token cannot be assigned to \!\everyvbox!\footnote{ +%  +% Unless a very surprising coincidence happens or a user intentionally +% violates the coherence of the implementation.}, +%  +% the difference means the \!\everyvbox! has been \!\global!ly updated with +% the value that \!\pcol@everyvbox! has now. Therefore if so, we +% globally update \!\everyvbox! with \!\pcol@everyvbox! to refrect the +% global update in the environment. +%  +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\pcol@restoreeveryvbox{% + \expandafter\def\expandafter\reserved@a\expandafter{\the\pcol@everyvbox}% + \def\reserved@b{\pcol@dummytoken}% + \ifx\reserved@a\reserved@b\else \global\everyvbox\pcol@everyvbox \fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +%\iffalse +% +%\fi +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/man.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/man.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..f604ba24fa --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/man.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,863 @@ +% \begingroup +% \hbadness9000 \hfuzz6pt +% +% \begin{paracol}{2}[\section{Introduction}] +% This document describes the usage of yet another multi-column package named +% \textsf{paracol}. The unique feature of the package is that columns are +% typeset {\em in parallel.} +% +% Suppose you are writing a bilingual document whose left column is written in +% a language, say English, and right column has the translation of the left +% column in another language, e.g., Japanese. With the \textsf{paracol} +% package you may write an English part of arbitrarily length and then {\em +% switch} to its Japanese counterpart to place both parts side by side. Of +% course you may return to the English writing similarly. +% +% The {\em\Uidx\cswitch} is always allowed when you complete an outermost +% level paragraph. You may be unaware whether a column is broken into +% multiple pages before switching because the package automatically goes +% back and forward to the correct page and vertical position when you switch +% the column. Moreover, you may {\em\Uidx\sync{}e} columns so that the tops +% of the first paragraphs after switching in all columns are vertically +% aligned. At a \sync{}ation point, you may give a single-column text, +% for example a common section header, optionally. You may also switch +% single-column and multi-column in a page arbitrary. +% +% This manual itself is an example of two-column documents typeset by +% \textsf{paracol}. Since the author is not familiar with languages other +% than English and Japanese and the latter should be hardly understood by +% most of readers, the right column is the translation of the left English +% column into a computational language. That is, the right column is the +% \LaTeX{} source code of the left column\footnote{ +%  +% Not really but its essence +% is shown.\label{fn:first}}. +% +% \switchcolumn +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\begin{paracol}{2}[\section{Introduction}] +%\hbadness5000 +%This document describes the usage of yet +%another multi-column package named +%\textsf{paracol}. The unique feature of +%the package is that columns are typeset +%{\em in parallel.} +% +%Suppose you are writing a bilingual +%document whose left column is written in a +%language, say English, and right column has +%the translation of the left column in +%another language, e.g. Japanese. With the +%\textsf{paracol} package you may write an +%English part of arbitrary length and then +%{\em switch} to its Japanese counterpart to +%place both parts side by side. Of course +%you may return to the English writing +%similarly. +% +%The column switching is always allowed when +%you complete an outermost level paragraph. +%You may be unaware whether a column is +%broken into multiple pages before switching +%because the package automatically goes back +%and forward to the correct page and +%vertical position when you switch the +%column. Moreover, you may {\em +%synchronize} columns so that the tops of +%the first paragraphs after switching in all +%columns are vertically aligned. At a +%synchronization point, you may give a +%single-column text, for example a common +%section header, optionally. You may also +%switch single-column and multi-column in a +%page arbitrary. +% +%This manual itself is an example of +%two-column documents typeset by +%\textsf{paracol}. Since the author is not +%familiar with languages other than English +%and Japanese and the latter should be +%hardly understood by most of readers, the +%right column is the translation of the left +%English column into a computational +%language. That is, the right column is the +%\LaTeX{} source code of the left column% +%\footnote{Not really but its essence is +%shown.}. +% +%\switchcolumn +% \end{Verbatim} +% |\begin{verbatim}|\\ +% {\it Here is the source of above.}\\ +% |\end{verbatim}|\footnote{ +% This \texttt{verbatim} construct is simply referred as to +% ``\textit{source}'' hereafter.} +% +% +% +% \switchcolumn*[\section{Basic Usage}] +% Loading the package is very simple. What you have to do is +% \!\usepackage!|{|\Uidx{\env{paracol}}|}| in the preamble. Note that +% \textsf{paracol} can be used with \LaTeXe{} and does not work with +% \LaTeX{} 2.09. +% +% \switchcolumn +% +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\switchcolumn*[\section{Basic Usage}] +%Loading the package is very simple. What +%you have to do is |\usepackage{paracol}| +%\end{Verbatim} +% |in the preamble. ...|\footnote{ +% Hereafter, a part of the source code may be omitted like this.}\\ +% |\switchcolumn|\\ +% \textit{source} +% +% \switchcolumn* +% The fundamental means of parallel-column typesetting are the environment +% \env{paracol} and the command \Uidx{\!\switchcolumn!}. The \env{paracol} +% environment needs an argument to specify the number of columns. Thus the +% following is the basic construct for two-parallel-column documents. +% \begin{quote} +% \!\begin!|{|\env{paracol}|}{2}|\\ +% \textit{left column text}\\ +% \!\switchcolumn!\\ +% \textit{right column text}\\ +% \!\switchcolumn!\\ +% \textit{left column text}\\ +% \!\switchcolumn!\\ +% \textit{right column text}\\ +% \!\switchcolumn!\\ +% \mbox{\hspace{4em}}$\vdots$\\ +% \!\end!|{|\env{paracol}|}| +% \end{quote} +% +% \switchcolumn +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\switchcolumn* +%The fundamental means of parallel-column +%typesetting are the environment |paracol| +%and the command |\switchcolumn|. ... +%\switchcolumn +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source} +% +% \switchcolumn[1]* +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\switchcolumn[1]* +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\switchcolumn[0] +%The |\switchcolumn| command may have an +%optional argument to specify the column +%number (zero origin) to start. ... +%\end{Verbatim} +% +% \switchcolumn[0] +% The \!\switchcolumn! command may have an optional argument to specify the +% column number (zero origin) to start. That is, \!\switchcolumn!|[0]| +% means to switch to the leftmost column, |\switchcolumn[1]| is to start the +% second column and so on. Thus the |\switchcolumn| without the optional +% argument may be considered as \!\switchcolumn!|[|$i+1\bmod{n}$|]| where +% $i$ is the ordinal of the column you are leaving from and $n$ is the +% number of columns given to \env{paracol} environment. +% +% +% +% \switchcolumn[0]*[\section{Column Synchronization}\label{sec:sync}] +% The \!\switchcolumn! command may also be followed by a `|*|' to +% {\em\Uidx\sync{}e} columns. After you switch from a column to another by +% \!\switchcolumn!|*| (or \!\switchcolumn!|[|$i$|]*|), all the columns are +% vertically aligned at the bottom of the {\em deepest} one preceding the +% command. For example, the previous section has three \!\switchcolumn!|*| +% commands at which left and right columns are vertically aligned. +% +% The {\em starred} version of \!\switchcolumn! may have an optional +% argument to specify a single-column {\em\Uidx\mctext} whose bottom is the +% vertical alignment point of columns. For example, \!\section! +% commands in this manual are given as optional arguments +% of \!\switchcolumn!|*| like; +%\begin{Verbatim} +% \switchcolumn*[\section{Basic Usage}] +%\end{Verbatim} +% The \env{paracol} environment may also start with a \mctext{} by +% specifying it as the optional argument of \!\begin!|{|\env{paracol}|}|. +% For example, at the beginning of this document, the author put; +%\begin{Verbatim} +% \begin{paracol}{2}[\section{Introduction}] +%\end{Verbatim} +% +% \switchcolumn +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\switchcolumn[0]*[% +% \section{Column Synchronization} +% \label{sec:sync}] +%The |\switchcolumn| command may also be +%followed by a `|*|' to {\em synchronize} +%columns. ... +% +%The {\em starred} version of +%|\switchcolumn| may have an optional +%argument to specify a multi-column text +%whose bottom is the vertical alignment +%points of the columns. ... +%\switchcolumn +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source} +% +% +% +% \begin{column*}[\section{Environments for Columns}\label{sec:env}] +% \Uidx{\Index{column-switching environment}} +% \subsection{Environment \texttt{column}} +% The \!\switchcolumn! is simple but you may prefer to pack the contents of a +% column in an environment. The \Uidx{\env{column}} environment is +% available for this well-structuralization of \LaTeX{} sources for +% parallel-columned documents. A construct; +% \begin{quote} +% \!\begin!|{|\env{column}|}|\\ +% \textit{text for a column}\\ +% \!\end!|{|\env{column}|}| +% \end{quote} +% is (almost) equivalent to; +% \begin{quote} +% \!\switchcolumn!\\ +% \textit{text for a column} +% \end{quote} +% The \Uidx{\env{column*}} environment is also available for the column +% \sync{}ation and may have an optional argument for \mctext. +% \end{column*} +% +% \begin{column} +% \subsection{\ttfamily Environment column} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\begin{column*}[% +% \section{Environments for Columns} +% \label{sec:env}] +%\subsection{Environment \texttt{column}} +%The |\switchcolumn| is simple but you may +%prefer to pack the contents of a column in +%an environment. ... +%\end{column*} +%\begin{column} +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source}\\ +% |\end{column}| +% \end{column} +% +% \begin{nthcolumn*}{1} +% \subsection{\ttfamily Environment nthcolumn} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\begin{nthcolumn*}{1} +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\end{nthcolumn*} +% +%\begin{nthcolumn}{0} +%\subsection{Environment \texttt{nthcolumn}} +%The |\switchcolumn| can start an +%arbitrarily specified column with the +%column number given through its optional +%argument, but the |column| environment +%cannot do it. ... +%\end{nthcolumn} +%\end{Verbatim} +% \end{nthcolumn*} +% \begin{nthcolumn}{0} +% \subsection{Environment \texttt{nthcolumn}} +% The \!\switchcolumn! can start an arbitrarily specified column with the +% column number given through its optional argument, but the \env{column} +% environment cannot do it. If you want to start $i$-th column, you have to +% do \!\begin!|{|\Uidx{\env{nthcolumn}}|}{|$i$|}| (or +% \Uidx{\env{nthcolumn*}} with an optional argument to \sync{}e). +% \end{nthcolumn} +% +% +% +% \begin{leftcolumn*} +% \subsection[Environments \texttt{leftcolumn} and \texttt{rightcolumn}] +% {Environments \texttt{leftcolumn} and\\\texttt{rightcolumn}} +% The environments \Uidx{\env{leftcolumn}} and \Uidx{\env{rightcolumn}} (and +% their starred versions with an optional argument) are available as more +% convenient means than saying \!\begin!|{|\env{nthcolumn}|}{0}| to switch +% to the left(most) column and +% \!\begin!|{|\env{nthcolumn}|}{1}| to the right (but may not be rightmost) +% one. +%  +% \Uidx{\EnvIndex{leftcolumn*}}\Uidx{\EnvIndex{rightcolumn*}} +% +% \begin{figure*}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% double-column figure \#1\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Double-Column Figure} +% \end{figure*} +% \begin{figure}[t]\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\ +% single-column figure \#1\\ +% \\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Single-Column Figure} +% \end{figure} +% \end{leftcolumn*} +% +% \begin{rightcolumn} +% \subsection{\ttfamily Environment leftcolumn and\\rightcolumn} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\begin{leftcolumn*} +%\subsection{% +% Environments \texttt{leftcolumn} and\\ +% \texttt{rightcolumn}} +%The environments |leftcolumn| and +%|rightcolumn| (and their starred versions +%with an optional argument) are available as +%more convenient means than saying +%|\begin{nthcolumn}{0}| to switch to the +%left(most) column and ... +%\begin{figure*}...\end{figure*} +%\begin{figure}[t]...\end{figure} +%\end{leftcolumn*} +%\begin{rightcolumn} +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source and a \texttt{figure} env}\\ +% |\end{rightcolumn}| +% \begin{figure}[t]\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\ +% \ttfamily single-column figure \#2\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily Another Single-Column Figure} +% \end{figure} +% \end{rightcolumn} +% +% +% +% \begin{leftcolumn*}[\section{Floats, Footnotes and Counters} +% \label{sec:float}] +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Remove \cs{nosv} from verbatim example of Table~1 shown in the right +% column.} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Add footnote to mention the page-wise float problem.} +% \begin{table}[b]\nosv +% \caption{A Single-Column Table} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[t]{|l|c|r|}\hline +% An&example&of\\\hline +% single&column&table\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \end{table} +% \subsection{Figures and Tables} +% As shown in this page, double-column figures\slash tables (or those +% spanned multiple columns if you have three or more) may be placed by +% \env{figure*} and \env{table*} environments as usual\footnote{ +%  +% See Section~\ref{sec:problem} for the appearance order issue of +% double-column floats.}. +%  +% A single-column figure\slash table will be placed in the column in which +% you put \env{figure} and \env{table}. For example, the body of a +% \env{figure} environment in a \env{leftcolumn} environment is +% \emph{always} placed in a left column. That is, even if the column of the +% \emph{current} page does not have enough room to place the figure, it will +% not be thrown to the right column but will be placed in the left column of +% the next page\footnote{ +%  +% Or some farther page if \LaTeX{} cannot solve the placement problem wisely.}. +% +% Another caution about float placement is that you have to be careful when +% you try to put a top-float explicitly with |t|-option or implicitly without +% placement option (i.e., |tbp| in most classes) and to \sync{}e columns. +% The rule is as follows; after you \sync{}e columns in a page, the page +% cannot have top-floats any more. When you \sync{}e columns, +% \textsf{paracol} fixes a virtual horizontal line in the page as the +% \sync{}ation barrier. Thus no top-floats cannot be added above the +% line\footnote{ +%  +% Even if you have enough space above, sorry.}. +%  +% Therefore, the author put two \env{figure} environments for the figures +% shown in this page into the \env{leftcolumn*} and \env{rightcolumn} +% environment for the previous section. +% +% \subsection{Footnotes and Marginal Notes} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add a footnote mentioning page-wise footnotes.} +% +% Footnotes are also put at the bottom of the column in which \!\footnote! +% commands and their references reside (like this\footnote{ +%  +% Unless you specify to make footnotes {\em page-wise} as explained in +% Section \ref{sec:ref-scfnote} and \ref{sec:fnnp}.}), +%  +% as shown in page~\pageref{fn:first} and this page. Marginal +% notes behave similarly like what you are seeing in the left margin of this +% sentence\marginpar{ +%  +% \raggedright An example of marginal note.} +%  +% and the right marginal note in this page\footnote{ +%  +% If you have three or more columns, marginal notes of the second or +% succeeding columns are placed in the right margin in default setting. The +% \textsf{paracol} package solves the placement problem of marginal notes +% from two or more columns sharing a side margin by moving some of them down +% if they conflict over the space with each other.}. +% +% \subsection{Local and Global Counters} +% \UsageIndex{local counter} +% \UsageIndex{global counter} +%  +% You probably found that the numbering of figures and tables is \emph{global} +% while that of footnotes are \emph{local}. That is, the figure in the right +% column of the previous page has number~3 following its left-column +% counterpart Figure~2. The tables in the page are also numbered as 1 and 2 +% crossing the column boundary. However, the footnotes in each column have +% their own numbering sequence. Moreover, the footnote numbers in left +% columns are typeset in roman font while those in right columns have italic +% shapes. Similarly, subsection numbering is local and the headings in right +% columns have typewriter-face numbers. +% +% This happens because the author declared the counters \counter{figure} and +% \counter{table} are \emph{global} in the preamble of this document by +% saying; +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% \Uidx{\!\globalcounter!}|{figure}|\\ +% \!\globalcounter!|{table}| +% \end{itemize} +% and do nothing about \counter{footnote} and \counter{subsection} counters. +% By default, all the counters except for |page| are local to columns. The +% value of a \lcounter{} of a column is saved somewhere when you leave the +% column, and it is restored when you revisit the column. The initial values +% of the \lcounter{}s are the values they have at +% \!\begin!|{|\env{paracol}|}|. After you close the \env{paracol} +% environment, the values of the leftmost column are used for the rest of +% your document until you start new \env{paracol} environment. On a +% restart, \lcounter{}s in a column have the values they had at the last +% \Endparacol, except for those which have been modified outside the +% environment because the modifications are \emph{broadcasted} to +% \lcounter{}s in all columns. You will see the effect of this +% inter-environment counter value conservation in the footnote numbers in +% the right column in page~\pageref{fn:right3} and \pageref{fn:right4}. +% +% This broadcasting of a \lcounter{} value can be done explicitly in +% \env{paracol} environments by a command $\Uidx{\!\synccounter!}\Arg{ctr}$. +% This command makes $\mathit{ctr}$ in all columns have the value of that in +% the column in which the command appears. In addition, another command +% \Uidx{\!\syncallcounters!} performs this broadcasting for all \lcounter{}s. +% +% If you make a counter global by the command \!\globalcounter!, the +% save/restore operations are not performed to the counter and thus it is +% globally incremented by |\[ref]|\AB|stepcounter| +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\refstepcounter}\SpecialIndex{\stepcounter} +%  +% or commands such as \!\caption! and \!\section!. Note that the value of a +% \gcounter{} depends on the place where it is incremented (or set) in +% the \emph{source code} rather than where it appears in the output. Thus +% if the author put a \env{table} environment here to increment \env{table} +% counter, the right-column table at the bottom of page~\pageref{tab:right} +% would be Table~3 because its \env{table} environment does not appear yet +% in the source code. Note that, however, though the counter \counter{page} +% is global as expected, its numbering is consistent among all columns as +% far as you refer to the value by $\!\pageref!\Arg{label}$ and/or see the +% values in table of contents, etc. +% +% Another counter which the author made global in this document is +% \counter{section}. As explained in Section~\ref{sec:sync}, an optional +% \mctext{} of \cswitch{} is considered as in the leftmost column. Since +% \!\section! commands in this document are always given in \mctext{}s, so +% far, it seems unnecessary to make \counter{section} global because it is +% incremented correctly in the leftmost column. However, the stepping +% \counter{section} has a side effect to reset its descendent counter +% \counter{subsection} and referred to from \!\thesubsection! command. Thus +% if \counter{section} were local, the right-column subsections in +% Section~\ref{sec:env} would be numbered as ``0.1'', ``0.2'' and ``0.3'' +% because the local value of \counter{section} would be zero. Moreover, the +% right-column subsections of this section would be ``0.4'', ``0.5'' and +% ``0.6'' because stepping \counter{section} local to the left column would +% not reset \counter{subsection} local to the right column. +% +% You may give a local appearance to a counter \textit{ctr} for the $i$-th +% column (zero origin) by a command; +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% \Uidx{\!\definethecounter!}|{|\textit{ctr}|}{|$i$|}{|\textit{def}|}| +% \end{itemize} +% where \textit{def} is to be the body of the local definition of +% |\the|\textit{ctr}. For example, the preamble of this document has the +% following to give non-default defitions to \!\thefootnote! and +% \!\thesubsection! for right columns. +%  +%\begin{Verbatim} +% \definethecounter{footnote}{1}{% +% \textit{\arabic{footnote}}} +% \definethecounter{subsection}{1}{% +% \texttt{% +% \arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}}} +%\end{Verbatim} +%\end{leftcolumn*} +% +% \begin{rightcolumn} +% \begin{table}[b]\nosv +% \caption{\ttfamily Another Single-Column Table} +% \label{tab:right} +% \centerline{\ttfamily \begin{tabular}[t]{|l|r|}\hline +% Another&example\\\hline +% of&single\\\hline +% column&table\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \end{table} +% \subsection{\ttfamily Figures and Tables} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\begin{leftcolumn*}[\section{% +% Floats, Footnotes and Counters}] +%\begin{table}[b] +%\caption{A Single-Column Table} +%\centerline{\begin{tabular}[t]{|l|c|r|} +% \hline +% An&example&of\\\hline +% single&column&table\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +%\end{table} +%\subsection{Figures and Tables} +%As shown in this page, double-column +%figures\slash tables (or those spanned +%multiple columns if you have three or more +%columns) may be placed by |figure*| and +%\end{Verbatim} +% {\ttfamily |table*| environments as usual\footnote{Another example +% of footnote.\label{fn:right3}}. ...} +% +% \subsection{\ttfamily Footnotes and Marginal Notes} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%Footnotes are also put at the bottom of the +%column in which |\footnote| commands and +%their references reside (like +%this\footnote{...}), as shown in page~2 and +%this page. Marginal notes behave similarly +%like what you are seeing in the left margin +%of this sentense\marginpar{\raggedright +%An example of marginal note.} and the right +%marginal note in this +%\end{Verbatim} +% |page\footnote{...}. ...| +% \marginpar{\raggedright\ttfamily +% Another example of marginal note.} +% +% \begin{figure}[t]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\\\\\ +% \ttfamily another figure with [t] option\\ +% \ttfamily to fill space +% \\\\\\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% Another Figure with [t] Option} +% \end{figure} +% +% \begin{figure}[b]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\ +% \ttfamily a figure with [b] option\\ +% \ttfamily to fill space\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% A Figure with [b] Option} +% \end{figure} +% +% \subsection{\ttfamily Local and Global Counters} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%You probably found that the numbering of +%figures and tables is \emph{global} while +%that of footnotes are \emph{local}. ... +%\end{leftcolumn*} +%\begin{rightcolumn} +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source}.\\ +% |\end{rightcolumn}| +% +% \begin{figure}[p]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\\\\\ +% \ttfamily a figure with [p] option\\ +% \ttfamily to fill space +% \\\\\\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% A Figure with [p] Option} +% \end{figure} +% +% \begin{figure}[p]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\\\\\ +% \ttfamily another figure with [p] option\\ +% \ttfamily to fill space +% \\\\\\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% Another Figure with [p] Option} +% \end{figure} +% +% \begin{figure}[p]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\\\\\ +% \ttfamily yet another figure with [p]\\ +% \ttfamily option to fill space +% \\\\\\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% Yet Another Figure with [p] Option} +% \end{figure} +% +% \begin{figure}[p]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\\\\\ +% \ttfamily fourth figure with [p]\\ +% \ttfamily option to fill space +% \\\\\\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% Forth Figure with [p] Option} +% \end{figure} +% +% \begin{figure}[t]\nosv +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\columnwidth{}\\\\\\ +% \ttfamily yet another figure with [t]\\ +% \ttfamily option to fill space +% \\\\\\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{\ttfamily +% Yet Another Figure with [t] Option} +% \end{figure} +% \end{rightcolumn} +% \switchcolumn* +% \flushpage +% \end{paracol} +% +% +% +% \section{Closing \texttt{paracol} Environment and Page Flushing} +% \label{sec:man-close} +% The final example shown here is this single-column text which the author put +% after the \env{paracol} environment above is closed. As you are seeing, a +% \env{paracol} environment can be finished at any vertical position in a +% page and can be followed by ordinary single column texts. +% +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% \begin{leftcolumn} +% The environment may also be restarted anywhere you like as shown here. +% +% The last issue is to flush a page. The ordinary \!\newpage! command works +% as you expect. If you say \!\newpage! in the left column in a page, the +% contents following it will appear in the left column in the next page. Note +% that this does not affect the layout of the right column. +% +% To flush all columns in a page, a command \Uidx{\!\flushpage!} is +% available. This command in $i$-th column is almost equivalent to; +% \begin{itemize}\item[] +% \!\switchcolumn!|[|$i$|]*[|\!\newpage!|]| +% \end{itemize} +% but more robust\footnotemark\label{fn:flush}. +% The ordinary page breaking command \Uidx{\!\clearpage!} may also be used +% to flush all columns and to start a fresh page, but it has a side effect +% to put all figures and tables which are not yet output. +% \end{leftcolumn} +% +% \begin{rightcolumn} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\begin{paracol}{2} +%\begin{leftcolumn} +%The environment may also be restarted +%anywhere you like as shown here. ... +%\end{leftcolumn} +%\begin{rightcolumn} +%\end{Verbatim} +% \textit{source}\\ +% |\end{rightcolumn}|\\ +% |\end{paracol}|\\ +% |Now the aurthor will do ...| +% \end{rightcolumn} +% \end{paracol} +% +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Add \cs{columnratio}\texttt{\char`\{0.6\char`\}} and a phrase +% for it.} +% Now the author will do |\flushpage| shortly to start a real binlingual +% example from the next page, after showing another example of closing +% \env{paracol} environments in this sentence and of restarting in the next +% one, in which {\em unbalanced column width} is demonstrated using +% \Uidx{\!\columnratio!} command shown in Section~\ref{sec:ref-colwidth}. +% +% \columnratio{0.6} +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% \begin{leftcolumn} +% O.K., we have restarted \env{paracol} environment and we will see the +% effect of \!\flushpage! now!!\footnotetext{ +%  +% For example \texttt{\string\switchcolumn*} may flush a page for the +% \sync{}ation and thus \texttt{\string\newpage} may leave an empty page.} +%  +% \end{leftcolumn} +% \begin{rightcolumn} +%\begin{Verbatim} +%\columnratio{0.6} +%\begin{paracol}{2} +%\begin{leftcolumn} +%O.K., ... +%\end{leftcolumn} +%\end{Verbatim} +% |\begin{rightcolumn}| \textit{source}\\ +% |\end{rightcolumn}| +% \flushpage +% \end{rightcolumn} +% +% +% +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Correct a few words in German and English libretti.} +% \newenvironment{Gverse}{\ensurevspace{2\baselineskip}\begin{leftcolumn*} +% \begin{myverse}} +% {\end{myverse}\end{leftcolumn*}} +% \newenvironment{Everse}{\begin{rightcolumn}\begin{myverse}} +% {\end{myverse}\end{rightcolumn}} +% \makeatletter +% \newenvironment{myverse}{\leftmargini0pt\partopsep0pt\verse}{\endverse} +% +% \begin{leftcolumn*}[ +% \centerline{\Large An Die Freude/To Joy}\label{page:bfreude}\smallskip +% \centerline{\large Friedrich Schiller}\smallskip +% The following is the libretto of the fourth movement of Beethoven's Ninth +% Symphony, his adaptation of Schiller's ode ``An Die Freude'' (or ``To Joy'' in +% English). Beethoven's additions and revisions are indicated in italics.] +% \end{leftcolumn*} +% \begin{Gverse} +% \itshape O Freunde, nicht diese T\"one! \\ +% Sondern la{\ss}t uns angenehmere anstimmen und freu\-denvollere +% \footnote{If I had been a good student in my German class, I could find +% the German translation of the right column footnote \ref{fn:right4} is +% ``Dieser Teil wurde van Beethoven hinzugef\"ugt'' by myself without +% the kind help from a user.}. +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% \itshape Oh friends, no more of these sad tones!\\ +% Let us rather raise our voices together\\ +% In more pleasant and joyful tones +% \footnote{This part was added by Beethoven.\label{fn:right4}}. +% \end{Everse} +% \begin{Gverse} +% Freude!\\ +% Freude, sch\"oner G\"otterfunken +% Tochter aus Elysium,\\ +% Wir betreten feuertrunken, +% Himmlische, dein Heiligtum!\\ +% Deine Zauber binden wieder, +% {\itshape Was die Mode streng geteilt;\\ +% Alle Menschen werden Br\"uder\footnote{ +% Original: Was der Mode Schwert geteilt;\\ +% Bettler werden F\"urstenbr\"uder,},} +% Wo dein sanfter Fl\"u\-gel weilt +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% Joy! \\ +% Joy, thou shining spark of God,\\ +% Daughter of Elysium,\\ +% With fiery rapture, goddess,\\ +% We approach thy shrine.\\ +% Your magic reunites\\ +% {\itshape That which stern custom has parted;\\ +% All humans will become brothers\footnote{ +% Original: +% What custom's sword has parted;\\ +% Beggars become princes' brothers}}\\ +% Under your protective wing. +% \end{Everse} +% \begin{Gverse} +% Wem der gro{\ss}e Wurf gelungen, +% eines Freundes Freund zu sein;\\ +% Wer ein holdes Weib errungen, +% mische seinen Jubel ein!\\ +% Ja, wer auch nur eine Seele +% sein nennt auf dem Erdenrund!\\ +% Und wer's nie gekonnt, der stehle +% weinend sich aus diesem Bund! +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% Let the man who has had the fortune\\ +% To be a helper to his friend,\\ +% And the man who has won a noble woman,\\ +% Join in our chorus of jubilation!\\ +% Yes, even if he holds but one soul\\ +% As his own in all the world!\\ +% But let the man who knows nothing of this\\ +% Steal away alone and in sorrow. +% \end{Everse} +% \begin{Gverse} +% Freude trinken alle Wesen +% an den Br\"usten der Natur;\\ +% Alle Guten, alle B\"osen +% folgen ihrer Rosenspur.\\ +% K\"usse gab sie uns und Reben, +% einen Freund, gepr\"uft im Tod;\\ +% Wollust ward dem Wurm gegeben, +% und der Cherub steht vor Gott. +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% All the world's creatures drink\\ +% From the breasts of nature;\\ +% Both the good and the evil\\ +% Follow her trail of roses.\\ +% She gave us kisses and wine\\ +% And a friend loyal unto death;\\ +% She gave the joy of life to the lowliest,\\ +% And to the angels who dwell with God. +% \end{Everse} +% \begin{Gverse} +% Froh, wie seine Sonnen fliegen +% durch des Himmels pr\"acht'gen Plan,\\ +% Laufet, Br\"uder, eure Bahn, +% freudig, wie ein Held zum Siegen. +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% Joyous, as his suns speed\\ +% Through the glorious order of Heaven,\\ +% Hasten, brothers, on your way,\\ +% Joyful as a hero to victory. +% \end{Everse} +% \begin{Gverse} +% Seid umschlungen, Millionen! +% Diesen Ku{\ss} der ganzen Welt!\\ +% Br\"uder, \"uber'm Sternenzelt +% mu{\ss} ein lieber Vater woh\-nen. +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% Be embraced, all ye millions!\\ +% With a kiss for all the world!\\ +% Brothers, beyond the stars\\ +% Surely dwells a loving Father. +% \end{Everse} +% \begin{Gverse} +% Ihr st\"urzt nieder, Millionen? +% Ahnest du den Sch\"opfer, Welt?\\ +% Such'ihn \"uberm Sternenzelt! +% \"Uber Sternen mu{\ss} er wohnen. +% \end{Gverse} +% \begin{Everse} +% Do you kneel before him, oh millions?\\ +% Do you sense the Creator's presence?\\ +% Seek him beyond the stars!\\ +% He must dwell beyond the stars. +% \end{Everse} +% \end{paracol} +% \label{page:efreude} +% \endgroup +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol-man.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol-man.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..514fdec6dd Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol-man.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..98de092916 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,825 @@ +%\iffalse +%%% Style file `paracol'. +%%% LaTeX file 'paracol-man'. +%<*paracol|man> +%% Copyright (C) 2005-2018 +%% Hiroshi Nakashima +%% (Kyoto University) +%% This program can be redistributed and/or modified under the terms +%% of the LaTeX Project Public License distributed from CTAN +%% archives in directory macros/latex/base/lppl.txt; either +%% version 1 of the License, or any later version. + +% +%<*dtx> +\ProvidesFile{paracol.dtx} +% +%\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1994/12/01] +%\ProvidesPackage{paracol} +%\ProvidesFile{paracol-man.tex} +% \fi +% \ProvidesFile{paracol.dtx} +[2018/12/31 v1.35 ] +% \iffalse +%<*man> +\documentclass{ltxdoc}\normalmarginpar +\usepackage{color} +\usepackage{paracol} +\usepackage{newvbtm} +\DisableCrossrefs +\PageIndex +\CodelineNumbered +\RecordChanges +% +%\OnlyDescription +%\def\ONLYDESCRIPTION{} +%<*man> +\textwidth210mm +\advance\textwidth-40mm \oddsidemargin20mm \advance\oddsidemargin-1in +\columnsep10mm +\marginparwidth20mm \advance\marginparwidth-\marginparsep +\marginparsep.5\marginparsep +\raggedbottom +\begin{document} +\DocInput{paracol.dtx} +\end{document} +% +% \fi +% +% +% +% \makeatletter +% +% \newcount\ChangeCount \ChangeCount10000 +% \def\changes@#1#2#3{% +% \global\advance\ChangeCount\@ne +% \protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#1\levelchar +% \number\ChangeCount +% \actualchar +% \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty +% \generalname +% \else +% \string\verb\quotechar* +% \verbatimchar\saved@macroname +% \verbatimchar +% \fi +% :\levelchar #3}}% +% \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack} +% +% \def\theglossary{\onecolumn \glossary@prologue +% \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem +% \rightskip 1em plus 1fil +% \parfillskip-1em +% \ignorespaces} +% \def\endtheglossary{\relax} +% +% +% +% \errorcontextlines10000 +% \GetFileInfo{paracol.dtx} +% \setcounter{IndexColumns}{2} +% +% \def\bottomfraction{.9} +% \def\cs#1{\hbox{\tt\char\escapechar#1}} +% \def\Item{\vskip-\itemsep\vskip-\parsep\vskip0pt\nobreak\item} +% +% \def\nosv{\catcode`\|12\relax} +% \begingroup +% \nosv +% \gdef\Set#1#2{\{#1\,|\,#2\}} +% \gdef\Abs#1{|#1|} +% \gdef\Bar{|} +% \endgroup +% +% \def\eqnarray{\stepcounter{equation}\let\@currentlabel=\theequation +% \global\@eqnswtrue +% \global\@eqcnt\z@\tabskip\@centering\let\\=\@eqncr +% $$\halign to \displaywidth\bgroup\hskip\@centering +% $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\@eqnsel&\global\@eqcnt\@ne +% \hfil$\;{##}\;$\hfil +% &\global\@eqcnt\tw@ $\displaystyle\tabskip\z@{##}$\hfil +% \tabskip\@centering&\llap{##}\tabskip\z@\cr} +% +% \def\Meta#1{\penalty\@highpenalty +% \hbox{{\tt\char`\{}{\it\meta{#1}}{\tt\char`\}}}} +% \def\opt#1{{\tt[}{\it\meta{#1}}{\tt]}} +% \def\optn#1{{\tt[#1]}} +% +% \let\latex@addmarginpar\@addmarginpar +% \let\latex@latex@warning@no@line\@latex@warning@no@line +% \def\@addmarginpar{\let\@latex@warning@no@line\@gobble +% \latex@addmarginpar +% \let\@latex@warning@no@line\latex@latex@warning@no@line} +% \let\@font@warning\@gobble +% +% \long\def\m@cro@#1#2{\endgroup \topsep\MacroTopsep \trivlist +% \edef\saved@macroname{\string#2} +% \def\makelabel##1{\llap{##1\hskip\@totalleftmargin}} +% \if@inlabel +% \let\@tempa\@empty \count@\macro@cnt +% \loop \ifnum\count@>\z@ +% \edef\@tempa{\@tempa\hbox{\strut}}\advance\count@\m@ne \repeat +% \edef\makelabel##1{\llap{\vtop to\baselineskip +% {\@tempa\hbox{##1}\vss} +% \hskip\@totalleftmargin}} +% \advance \macro@cnt \@ne +% \else \macro@cnt\@ne \fi +% \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\item[ +% #1 +% \noexpand\PrintMacroName +% \else +% \noexpand\PrintEnvName +% \fi +% {\string#2}]} +% \@tempa +% \global\advance\c@CodelineNo\@ne +% #1 +% \SpecialMainIndex{#2}\nobreak +% \DoNotIndex{#2} +% \else +% \SpecialMainEnvIndex{#2}\nobreak +% \fi +% \global\advance\c@CodelineNo\m@ne +% \ignorespaces} +% +% \def\dummymacro{\topsep\MacroTopsep \trivlist \item[]} +% \let\enddummymacro\endtrivlist +% +% \def\DescribeOpt{\leavevmode\@bsphack\begingroup\MakePrivateLetters +% \Describe@Opt} +% \def\Describe@Opt#1{\endgroup \Describe@pt{#1}} +% \def\Describe@pt#1#2{ +% \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeMacro{#1}} +% \SpecialOptUsageIndex{#1}{#2}} +% +% \def\Midx{\begingroup +% \let\Index\MainIndex +% \let\CodeIndex\CodeMainIndex +% \let\ArgedCodeIndex\ArgedCodeMainIndex +% \let\MathIndex\MathMainIndex +% \let\SpecialIndex\SpecialMainIndex +% \MIDX} +% \def\MIDX#1{#1\endgroup} +% \def\Uidx{\begingroup +% \let\Index\UsageIndex +% \let\CodeIndex\CodeUsageIndex +% \let\ArgedCodeIndex\ArgedCodeUsageIndex +% \let\MathIndex\MathUsageIndex +% \let\SpecialIndex\SpecialUsageIndex +% \UIDX} +% \def\UIDX#1{#1\endgroup} +% +% \def\Index{\@Index{}} +% \def\MainIndex{\@Index{\encapchar main}} +% \def\UsageIndex{\@Index{\encapchar usage}} +% \def\@Index#1{\@ifnextchar[] +% {\@IndexWithActualChar{#1}}{\@IndexPlain{#1}}} +% \def\@IndexPlain#1#2{\special@index{#2#1}\ignorespaces} +% \def\@IndexWithActualChar#1[#2]#3{\special@index{#3\actualchar#2#1} +% \ignorespaces} +% \let\LaTeX@theindex\theindex +% \def\theindex{\LaTeX@theindex \hbadness\@M} +% +% \def\CodeMainIndex{\Code@Index{\encapchar main}} +% \def\CodeUsageIndex{\Code@Index{\encapchar usage}} +% \def\CodeIndex{\Code@Index{}} +% \def\Code@Index{\S@nitizedIndex\IndexVerb@timed} +% +% \def\ArgedCodeMainIndex{\Arged@Code@Index{\encapchar main}} +% \def\ArgedCodeUsageIndex{\Arged@Code@Index{\encapchar usage}} +% \def\ArgedCodeIndex{\Arged@Code@Index{}} +% \def\Arged@Code@Index{\S@nitizedArgedIndex\IndexVerb@timed} +% +% \def\MathMainIndex{\Math@Index{\encapchar main}} +% \def\MathUsageIndex{\Math@Index{\encapchar usage}} +% \def\MathIndex{\Math@Index{}} +% \def\Math@Index{\S@nitizedIndex\IndexM@thed} +% +% \def\S@nitizedIndex#1#2{\@bsphack +% \begingroup \@sanitize \S@nitized@Index{#1}{#2}} +% \def\S@nitized@Index#1#2#3{\endgroup +% \special@index{#1{#3}#2}\@esphack\ignorespaces} +% \def\S@nitizedArgedIndex#1#2{\@bsphack +% \begingroup \@sanitize \S@nitized@rgedIndex{#1}{#2}} +% \def\S@nitizedNonArgedIndex#1#2{\@bsphack +% \begingroup \@sanitize \S@nitizedNon@rgedIndex{#1}{#2}} +% \def\S@nitized@rgedIndex#1#2#3{\endgroup +% \ArgedIndexMainAndSub{#1}{#2}{#3}} +% \def\S@nitizedNon@rgedIndex#1#2#3{\endgroup +% \special@index{#1{#3}#2} +% \ArgedIndexSub{#1}{#2}{#3}} +% \def\S@nitized@rgedIndex#1#2#3{\endgroup +% \ArgedIndexMainAndSub{#1}{#2}{#3}} +% \def\S@nitizedNon@rgedIndex#1#2#3{\endgroup +% \special@index{#1{#3}#2} +% \ArgedIndexSub{#1}{#2}{#3}} +% \def\ArgedIndexMainAndSub#1#2#3#4{\ArgedIndexMain{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4} +% \ArgedIndexSub{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}} +% \def\ArgedIndexMain#1#2#3#4{\begingroup +% \def\@tempa{\@rgedIndexMain{#1}{#2}{#3}} +% \def\e{}\edef\@tempb{{#4}} +% \expandafter\@tempa\@tempb +% \endgroup} +% \def\@rgedIndexMain#1#2#3#4{\special@index{#1{#3} (#4)#2}} +% \def\ArgedIndexSub#1#2#3#4{\begingroup +% \def\@tempa{\@rgedIndexSub{#1}{#2}{#3}} +% \def\e{e}\edef\@tempb{{#4}} +% \expandafter\@tempa\@tempb +% \endgroup} +% \def\@rgedIndexSub#1#2#3#4{\special@index{#4s:\levelchar#1{#3}#2}} +% +% \def\IndexBr@cedWith#1#2{#2\actualchar#1{#2}} +% \def\IndexVerb@timed#1{#1\actualchar\string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar +% #1\verbatimchar} +% \def\IndexM@thed#1{#1\actualchar\doll@rm@rk#1\doll@rm@rk} +% +% \def\env#1{\texttt{#1}\EnvIndex{#1}} +% \def\EnvIndex#1{\ArgedCodeIndex{#1}{environment}} +% \def\counter#1{\texttt{#1}\CounterIndex{#1}} +% \def\CounterIndex#1{\ArgedCodeIndex{#1}{counter}} +% +% \begingroup +% \catcode`\_12 \catcode`\$12 +% \gdef\TheUnderScore{_} +% \gdef\doll@rm@rk{$} +% \endgroup +% +% \long\def\Special@Index#1#2{\@bsphack +% \RemoveAtFromCS{#2} +% \protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\special@index{\RAFCtempa +% \actualchar \string\verb +% \quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#2\verbatimchar #1}}\@tempa +% \@esphack} +% \def\SpecialIndex{\Special@Index{}} +% \def\SpecialMainIndex{\Special@Index{\encapchar main}} +% \def\SpecialUsageIndex{\Special@Index{\encapchar usage}} +% \def\SpecialArrayIndex#1{\Special@Index{${\cdot}#1$}} +% \def\SpecialArrayMainIndex#1{\Special@Index{${\cdot}#1$\encapchar main}} +% \def\SpecialArrayUsageIndex#1{\Special@Index{${\cdot}#1$\encapchar usage}} +% +% \def\Macro{\begingroup \@sanitize \iMacro} +% \def\iMacro#1{\endgroup +% \def\SpecialMainIndex##1{\SWiIndex{##1}{\encapchar main}} +% \macro{#1}} +% \let\endMacro\endmacro +% +% \def\SpecialWeirdIndex{\@bsphack \begingroup \@sanitize \SWIndex{}} +% \def\SWIndex#1#2{\endgroup \SWiIndex{#2}{#1}} +% \def\SWiIndex#1#2{% +% \protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\special@index{ +% #1\actualchar \string\verb +% \quotechar*\verbatimchar#1\verbatimchar#2}}\@tempa +% \@esphack} +% +% \let\RAFCempty\@empty +% \let\RAFCgobble\@gobble +% \edef\RAFCIfPrefix{\expandafter\string\csname if\endcsname} +% \edef\RAFCIfPrefix{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\RAFCIfPrefix} +% \makeatother +% \long\def\RemoveAtFromCS#1{ +% \edef\RAFCtempa{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string#1} +% \edef\RAFCtempa{\expandafter\string\csname\RAFCtempa\endcsname} +% \expandafter\iRemoveAtFromCS\RAFCtempa@\NIL} +% \def\iRemoveAtFromCS#1#2@#3\NIL{\def\RAFCtempb{#3} +% \ifx\RAFCtempb\RAFCempty \def\RAFCtempa{#2}\let\next\relax +% \else \def\RAFCtempa{ #2@}\def\next{\iiRemoveAtFromCS#3\NIL} +% \def\RAFCtempb{#2} +% \ifx\RAFCtempb\RAFCempty +% \else\ifx\RAFCtempb\RAFCIfPrefix +% \else\ifx\RAFCtempb\CommonCSPrefix +% \else\ifx\RAFCtempb\CommonIfPrefix +% \else \def\RAFCtempa{}\def\next{\xRemoveAtFromCS#2@#3\NIL} +% \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi +% \next} +% \def\iiRemoveAtFromCS#1{\ifx#1@\edef\RAFCtempa{\RAFCtempa@} +% \let\next\iiRemoveAtFromCS +% \else \def\next{\xRemoveAtFromCS#1}\fi +% \next} +% \def\xRemoveAtFromCS#1@\NIL{\edef\RAFCtempa{#1\RAFCtempa}} +% \makeatletter +% +% \begingroup +% \makeatother +% \gdef\TheAtMark{@} +% \catcode`\@\active +% \gdef\!{\begingroup \catcode`\@\active \IndexedVerb} +% \gdef\IndexedVerb#1!{\def@{\TheAtMark \penalty\exhyphenpenalty} +% \def~{\penalty\exhyphenpenalty} +% \rm\texttt{\string#1}\let@\TheAtMark \def~{} +% \edef\RAFCTempa{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string#1} +% \expandafter\SpecialIndex\csname\RAFCTempa\endcsname \endgroup} +% \endgroup +% \let\Tie~ +% \let\~\allowbreak +% +% \def\CSIndex#1{\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\csname +% #1\endcsname} +% \edef\@tempb{\expandafter\string\@tempa} +% \texttt{\@tempb} +% \expandafter\SpecialIndex\@tempa} +% \def\CSINDEX#1{\expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\csname +% #1\endcsname} +% \expandafter\SpecialIndex\@tempa} +% +% \begingroup +% \gdef\@sverbcat{\catcode`\@\active\catcode`\#\active} +% \catcode`\@\active \gdef@{\char`\@\penalty\exhyphenpenalty} +% \catcode`\#\active \gdef#{\penalty\exhyphenpenalty} +% \endgroup +% \let\latex@sverb\@sverb +% \def\@sverb{\@sverbcat\latex@sverb} +% +% \def\Paracol{\textsf{paracol}} +% \let\LB[\let\RB]\let\LP(\let\RP) +% \def\LBRP#1#2{\LB#1,#2\RP} +% \def\In{\in\LBRP} +% \let\Sec\S +% \def\secref{\Sec\ref} +% \let\<\langle \let\>\rangle +% \let\ARG\arg +% \def\arg#1{\<\mathit{#1}\>} +% \def\Arg#1{\texttt{\char`\{}#1\texttt{\char`\}}} +% \def\ARg#1{\texttt{\char`\{}\textit{#1}\texttt{\char`\}}} +% \def\Oarg#1{\texttt{[\textit{#1}]}} +% \def\Sub#1{{\hbox to0pt{\hss$\scriptstyle #1$\hss}}} +% \def\PT{\,{\rm pt}} +% +% \def\Sloppy#1{\tolerance#1\hbadness#1\relax} +% \let\endSloppy\par +% \def\Hfuzz#1{\hfuzz#1\relax} +% \let\endHfuzz\par +% \def\KeepSpace#1{\par \vskip-\lastskip \vskip#1\baselineskip \allowbreak +% \vskip-#1\baselineskip\nobreak} +% +% +% +% \edef\CommonCSPrefix{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string\pcol} +% \edef\CommonIfPrefix{\expandafter\RAFCgobble\string\ifpcol} +% +% \def\beginenv#1{\CSIndex{begin}\allowbreak +% \texttt{\char`{#1\char`}}\EnvIndex{#1}} +% \def\beginparacol{\beginenv{paracol}} +% +% \def\bgext{extension\Index{extension of background painting region}} +% \def\bginfext{infinite extension +% \Index{infinite extension of background painting region}} +% \def\bgpaint{background painting\Index{background painting}} +% \def\bground{background\Index{background painting}} +% \def\bpage{base page\Index{base page}} +% \def\colorctext{color context\Index{color context}} +% \def\colorstack{color stack\Index{color stack}} +% \def\cctext{column-context\Index{column-context}} +% \def\colpage{column-page\Index{column-page}} +% \def\colpream{column preamble\Index{column preamble}} +% \def\Colpream{preamble\Index{column preamble}} +% \def\cscan{column-scan\Index{column-scan}} +% \def\csepgap{column-separating gap\Index{column-separating rule}} +% \def\cseprule{column-separating rule\Index{column-separating rule}} +% \def\cswap{column-swapping\Index{column-swapping}} +% \def\cswitch{column-switching\Index{column-switching}} +% \def\csenv{column-switching environment\Index{column-switching environment}} +% \def\cwise{column-wise\Index{column-wise stuff}} +% \def\csync{counter synchronization\Index{counter synchronization}} +% \def\ccolpage{current column-page\Index{current column-page}} +% \def\Endparacol{\CSIndex{end}\allowbreak +% \texttt{\char`\{paracol\char`\}}\EnvIndex{paracol}} +% \def\elocal{environment-local\Index{environment-local}} +% \def\exsync{explicit synchronization\Index{explicit synchronization}} +% \def\fcolumn{float column\Index{float column}} +% \def\fpage{float page\Index{float page}} +% \def\gcounter{global counter\Index{global counter}} +% \def\imsync{implicit synchronization\Index{implicit synchronization}} +% \def\lpage{last page\Index{last page}} +% \def\lcommand{local command\Index{local command}} +% \def\lcolumn{leading column\Index{leading column}} +% \def\lcolpage{leading column-page\Index{leading column-page}} +% \def\lcounter{local counter\Index{local counter}} +% \def\lrep{local representation\Index{local representation}} +% \def\Mcfnote{column-wise footnote\Index{column-wise footnote}} +% \def\mcfnote{column-wise\Index{column-wise footnote}} +% \def\Mgfnote{merged footnote\Index{merged footnote}} +% \def\mgfnote{merged\Index{merged footnote}} +% \def\mctext{spanning text\Index{spanning text}} +% \def\mirror{mirror\Index{mirrored background painting}} +% \def\mvlfloat{MVL-float\Index{MVL-float}} +% \def\npaired{non-paired\Index{non-paired parallel-paging}} +% \def\paired{paired\Index{paired parallel-paging}} +% \def\parapag{parallel-pag\Index{parallel-paging}} +% \def\pctext{page context\Index{page context}} +% \def\pfcheck{pre-flushing column height check +% \Index{pre-flushing column height check}} +% \def\Postenv{post-environment\Index{post-environment stuff}} +% \def\postenv{post-environment stuff\Index{post-environment stuff}} +% \def\Preenv{pre-environment\Index{pre-environment stuff}} +% \def\preenv{pre-environment stuff\Index{pre-environment stuff}} +% \def\prespan{pre-spanning-text stuff\Index{pre-spanning-text stuff}} +% \def\prim{page rim\Index{page rim}} +% \def\pwise{page-wise\Index{page-wise stuff}} +% \def\pwstuff{page-wise stuff\Index{page-wise stuff}} +% \def\Scfnote{page-wise footnote\Index{page-wise footnote}} +% \def\scfnote{page-wise\Index{page-wise footnote}} +% \def\spanning{spanning stuff\Index{spanning stuff}} +% \def\sptext{spanning text\Index{spanning text}} +% \def\spage{starting page\Index{starting page}} +% \def\sync{synchroniz\Index{synchronize}} +% \def\tpage{top page\Index{top page}} +% +% \def\vb{\Index[$\kappa_c(\beta)$]{-k_c(-b)}\beta} +% \def\pd{\Index[$\kappa_c(\delta)$]{-k_c(-d)}\delta} +% \def\Celt{\Index[$\gamma_0^c$]{-c^c_0}\gamma_0} +% \def\Celtshadow{\Index[$\hat\gamma_0^c$]{-c^xc_0}\hat\gamma_0} +% \def\celt{\Index[$\gamma_i$]{-c^a_i}\gamma} +% \def\celtpop{\Index[$\gamma_i^-$]{-c^m_i}\gamma^-} +% \def\celtshadow{\Index[$\hat\gamma_i$]{-c^x_i}\hat\gamma} +% \def\mcelt{\Index[$\gamma_{i,m}$]{-c^a_i,m}\gamma} +% \def\mceltpop{\Index[$\gamma_{i,m}^-$]{-c^m_i,m}\gamma^-} +% \def\cst{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Gamma}$]{-C^a}\mathit{\Gamma}} +% \def\CST{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Gamma}^c$]{-C^c}\mathit{\Gamma}} +% \def\CSTraw{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Gamma}^c_r$]{-C^c_r}\mathit{\Gamma}_r} +% \def\cstraw{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Gamma}_r$]{-C^a_r}\mathit{\Gamma}_r} +% \def\csts{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Gamma}_s$]{-C_s}\mathit{\Gamma}_s} +% \def\CSTshadow{\Index[$\hat\string\mathit{\Gamma}^c$]{-C^xc} +% \hat\mathit{\Gamma}} +% \def\cstshadow{\Index[$\hat\string\mathit{\Gamma}$]{-C^x}\hat\mathit{\Gamma}} +% \def\ep{\Index[$\kappa_c(\varepsilon)$]{-k_c(-e)}\varepsilon} +% \def\clist{\Index[$\zeta(\theta)$]{-f(-j)}\zeta} +% \def\fh{\Index[$\kappa_c(\eta)$]{-k_c(-h)}\eta} +% \def\CC{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Theta}$]{-J}\mathit{\Theta}} +% \def\Cc{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Theta}_c$]{-J_c}\mathit{\Theta}} +% \def\CG{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Theta}^g$]{-J^g}\mathit{\Theta}^g} +% \def\cg{\Index[$\theta^g$]{-j^g}\theta^g} +% \def\CTL{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Theta}^l$]{-J^l}\mathit{\Theta}^l} +% \def\cl{\Index[$\theta^l$]{-j^l}\theta^l} +% \def\cc{\Index[$\kappa_c$]{-k_c}\kappa} +% \def\bl{\Index[$\kappa_c(\lambda_b)$]{-k_c(-l_b)}\lambda_b} +% \def\dl{\Index[$\kappa_c(\lambda_d)$]{-k_c(-l_d)}\lambda_d} +% \def\ml{\Index[$\kappa_c(\lambda_m)$]{-k_c(-l_m)}\lambda_m} +% \def\tl{\Index[$\kappa_c(\lambda_t)$]{-k_c(-l_t)}\lambda_t} +% \def\lrm{\Index[$\mu$]{-m}\mu} +% \def\bn{\Index[$\kappa_c(\nu_b)$]{-k_c(-n_b)}\nu_b} +% \def\cn{\Index[$\kappa_c(\nu_c)$]{-k_c(-n_c)}\nu_c} +% \def\tn{\Index[$\kappa_c(\nu_t)$]{-k_c(-n_t)}\nu_t} +% \def\tf{\Index[$\kappa_c(\xi)$]{-k_c(-o)}\xi} +% \def\PP{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Pi}$]{-P}\mathit{\Pi}} +% \def\PPP{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Pi}^+$]{-P+}\mathit{\Pi}^+} +% \def\pp{\Index[$\pi(p)$]{-p(p)}\pi} +% \def\br{\Index[$\kappa_c(\rho_b)$]{-k_c(-r_b)}\rho_b} +% \def\tr{\Index[$\kappa_c(\rho_t)$]{-k_c(-r_t)}\rho_t} +% \def\sw{\Index[$\kappa_c(\sigma)$]{-k_c(-s)}\sigma} +% \def\ft{\Index[$\kappa_c(\tau)$]{-k_c(-t)}\tau} +% \def\df{\Index[$\string\mathit{\Phi}$]{-U}\mathit{\Phi}} +% +% \def\bf{\Index[$b_f$]{b_f}b_f} +% \def\bgc{\Index[$B_a$]{B_a}B} +% \def\bge{\Index[$e_a(d^\pm)$]{e_a(d^+)}e} +% \def\bgr{\Index[$R_a$]{R_a}R} +% \def\C{\Index[$C$]{C}C} +% \def\Cfrom{\Index[$C^0$]{C0^0}{C^0}} +% \def\CBfrom{\Index[$C_b^0$]{C0_b^0}{C_b^0}} +% \def\CBto{\Index[$C_b^1$]{C0_b^1}{C_b^1}} +% \def\CL{\Index[$C_L$]{C0_L}C_L} +% \def\Cto{\Index[$C^1$]{C0^1}{C^1}} +% \def\cmax{\Index[$c_{\max}$]{c0_max}c_{\max}} +% \def\dc{\Index[$d_c$]{d_c}d_c} +% \def\DP{\Index[$D_P$]{D_P}D_P} +% \def\DT{\Index[$D_T$]{D_T}D_T} +% \def\false{\Index[$\string\mathit{false}$]{false}\mathit{false}} +% \def\Fc{\Index[$F_c(X)$]{F0_c}F_c} +% \def\fc{\Index[$f_c(x)$]{f0_c}f_c} +% \def\gap{\Index[$g_c$]{g_c}g} +% \def\HB{\Index[$H_B$]{H_B}H_B} +% \def\HM{\Index[$H_M$]{H_M}H_M} +% \def\HN{\Index[$H_N$]{H_N}H_N} +% \def\HP{\Index[$H_P$]{H_P}H_P} +% \def\HR{\Index[$H_R$]{H_R}H_R} +% \def\HS{\Index[$H_S$]{H_S}H_S} +% \def\HT{\Index[$H_T$]{H_T}H_T} +% \def\mplist{\Index[$I$]{I}I} +% \def\nf{\Index[$n_f$]{n_f}n_f} +% \def\npop{\Index[$n_{\rm pop}$]{n_pop}n_{\rm pop}} +% \def\mpar{\Index[$\mathit{mpar}(t_i,b_i)$]{mpar(t_i,b_i)}\mathit{mpar}} +% \def\mpb{\Index[$M_{\{L,R\}}^{\{l,r\}}$]{M0_{L,R}^{l,r}}M} +% \def\mpbout{\Index[${\string\cal{M}}$]{M1}{\cal M}} +% \def\mpboutz{\Index[${\string\cal{M}}_0$]{M1_0}{\cal M}_0} +% \def\pbase{\Index[$p_b$]{p0_b}p_b} +% \def\ptop{\Index[$p_t$]{p0_t}p_t} +% \def\page{\Index[$\string\mathit{page}(p)$]{page(p)}\mathit{page}} +% \def\S{\Index[$S_c$]{S_c}S} +% \def\SS{\Index[$S$]{S}S} +% \def\s{\Index[$s_c(p)$]{s_c(p)}s} +% \def\size{\Index[$\string\mathit{size}(x)$]{size}\mathit{size}} +% \def\Size{\Index[$\string\mathit{SIZE}(x)$]{SIZE}\mathit{SIZE}} +% \def\spt{\Index[$\mathit{span}(H_i,h_i)$]{span(H_i,h_i)}\mathit{span}} +% \def\T{\Index[$T$]{T}T} +% \def\true{\Index[$\string\mathit{true}$]{true}\mathit{true}} +% \def\val{\Index[$\string\mathit{val}_c(\theta)$]{val_c(j)} +% \mathit{val}} +% \def\Val{\Index[$\string\mathit{val}(\theta)$]{val(j)} +% \mathit{val}} +% \def\vc{\Index[$v_c(x)$]{v1_c}v_c} +% \def\VB{\Index[$V_B$]{V0_B}V_B} +% \def\VE{\Index[$V_E$]{V0_E}V_E} +% \def\VP{\Index[$V_P$]{V0_P}V_P} +% \def\VPP{\Index[$V'_P$]{V0_Px}V'_P} +% \def\VT{\Index[$V_T$]{V0_T}V_T} +% \def\w{\Index[$w_c$]{w1_c}w} +% \def\W{\Index[$W_c$]{W0_c}W} +% \def\WM{\Index[$W_M$]{W0_M}W_M} +% \def\WP{\Index[$W_P$]{W0_P}W_P} +% \def\WR{\Index[$W_R$]{W0_R}W_R} +% \def\WT{\Index[$W_T$]{W0_T}W_T} +% +% +% +% \def\bracepair{`{\tt\char`\{\char`\}'}} +% \@addtoreset{section}{part} +% \def\part#1{\refstepcounter{part} +% \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1} +% \vbox to\unitlength{\vfil\centerline{\Large\bfseries PART\ \thepart}\vfil +% \centerline{\huge\bfseries#1}\vfil\vfil}} +% \def\Env#1#2{\!\begin!{\tt\char`\{\env{#1}\char`\}}#2\quad +% $\mathit{body}$\quad\!\end!{\tt\char`\{\env{#1}\char`\}}} +% \def\ENV#1#2{\!\begin!{\tt\char`\{\Midx{\env{#1}}\char`\}}#2\quad +% $\mathit{body}$\quad\!\end!{\tt\char`\{\env{#1}\char`\}}} +% \def\meta#1{\mbox{$\mathit{#1}$}} +% +% \let\l@part\l@section +% \def\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{0pt}{1.5em}} +% +% \newverbatim{Verbatim}{\topsep0pt\partopsep0pt\parsep0pt\parskip0pt\tt}{}{}{} +% \globalcounter{section} +% \globalcounter{figure} +% \globalcounter{table} +% \definethecounter{footnote}{1}{\textit{\arabic{footnote}}} +% \definethecounter{subsection}{1}{ +% \texttt{\arabic{section}.\arabic{subsection}}} +% \addcontentsonly{toc}{0} +% +% \def\Dotfill{\leavevmode\cleaders\hbox to.44em{\hss.\hss}\hfill\kern0pt} +% \def\Marginpar#1{\marginpar{\raggedright#1}} +% \def\Emph#1{{\bfseries#1}} +% \def\Hrule{\hbox to\linewidth{\hrulefill}} +% \def\\{\hfil\break\null\ignorespaces} +% +% \let\AB\allowbreak +% +% \hyphenation{col-umn col-umns} +% +% \let\EQ\relax \let\GT\relax \let\BAR\relax \let\NEQ\relax +% +% +% +% \changes{v0.9}{2005/01/28} +% {The style paracol is born. (2005/01/28)} +% \changes{v0.91}{2011/09/16} +% {The style is included in CTAN with a very small +% modification. (2011/09/16) } +% \changes{v1.0}{2011/10/10} +% {Add this document and fix the following problems on the author's +% 30th wedding anniversary. (2011/10/10)} +% \changes{v1.1}{2012/05/11} +% {Add \cs{columnratio} and variable column width. (2012/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-1}{2013/05/11} +% {Make \string\texttt{paracol} environment accept \cs{color} and add +% \cs{columncolor}. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-2}{2013/05/11} +% {Add page-wise and merged footnote functions. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-3}{2013/05/11} +% {Fix a problem in synchronization. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add column-swapping functions. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Allow a \string\texttt{paracol} envrionment is enclosed in list-like +% environments. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-6}{2013/05/11} +% {Add \cs{localcounter}. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Bug fixes and minor revisions as follows. (2013/05/11)} +% \changes{v1.21}{2013/06/06} +% {Fix the bug by which a column having empty column-pages followed by +% a synchronization point is lost or placed in a wrong +% page. (2013/06/06)} +% \changes{v1.22}{2013/06/30} +% {Fix the bug that \cs{color} and its relatives in a paragraph or +% around page top causes inconsistency of color context. (2013/06/30)} +% \changes{v1.23}{2013/07/08} +% {Fix the problem that a colored text has a line break candidate at +% its end inappropriately. (2013/07/08)} +% \changes{v1.24}{2013/07/27} +% {Fix the problem caused by the concealment of \cs{vadjust} in math +% group. (2013/07/27)} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Fix the known problem of the placement of page-crossing spanning +% texts. (2013/09/17)} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduce parallel-paging. (2013/09/17)} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduce column-separating rule drawing and background +% painting. (2013/09/17) } +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduce API for column/gap width and marginal note position +% specification. (2013/09/17)} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Introduce \cs{thecolumn} and \cs{ensurevspace}, +% \cs{footnotelayout}, \cs{twosided} and +% \cs{cleardoublepage}. (2013/09/17)} +% \changes{v1.3-6}{2013/09/17} +% {Fix a few problems mainly related to synchronization and ordinary +% footnotes. (2013/09/17)} +% \changes{v1.31}{2013/10/10} +% {Add passing paramenters related sectioning commmands beyond +% \cs{end}\texttt{\char`\{paracol\char`\}} and fix misspells in +% error messages. (2013/10/10)} +% \changes{v1.32-1}{2015/10/10} +% {Add \cs{globalcounter*} to make all counters global. (2015/10/10)} +% \changes{v1.32-2}{2015/10/10} +% {Fix a memory leak in \cs{pcol@startcolumn}. (2015/10/10)} +% \changes{v1.32-3}{2015/10/10} +% {Fix a page-wise float problem. (2015/10/10)} +% \changes{v1.33-1}{2016/11/19} +% {Fix a marginal note problem. (2016/11/19)} +% \changes{v1.33-2}{2016/11/19} +% {Non-logical modifications to obey the coding convention, for +% clarification, etc.. (2016/11/19)} +% \changes{v1.34}{2018/05/07} +% {Fix a text coloring problem in non-breakable sequences of vertical +% items. (2018/05/07)} +% \changes{v1.35-1}{2018/12/31} +% {Fix a page break problem with a tall item in the very first line of +% the first column. (2018/12/31)} +% \changes{v1.35-2}{2018/12/31} +% {Fix a vertical space problem with \texttt{trivlist} immediately +% surrounding \texttt{paracol}. (2018/12/31)} +% \changes{v1.35-3}{2018/12/31} +% {Fix a bug in \cs{pcol@addmarginpar} and add emulation of +% \cs{marginnnote}. (2018/12/31)} +% \changes{v1.35-4}{2018/12/31} +% {Add \cs{belowfootnoteskip} for the additional space below the +% non-merged pre-environment footnotes. (2018/12/31)} +% \changes{v1.35-5}{2018/12/31} +% {Add \cs{definecolumnpreamble}. (2018/12/31)} +% \changes{v1.35-6}{2018/12/31} +% {Add error check if \texttt{paracol} environment is not in outer par +% mode and is with ordinary two-column typesetting. (2018/12/31)} +% +% +% +% \title{Package \textsf{paracol}:\\ +% Yet Another Multi-Column Package to Typeset Columns in +% \textit{Parallel}} +% +% \author{Hiroshi Nakashima\\(Kyoto University)} +% \date{version \expandafter\@gobble\fileversion: \filedate} +% \setbox0\vbox{\vskip\topskip\maketitle\vskip0pt}\unitlength\ht0\copy0 +% +% \ifx\ONLYDESCRIPTION\undefined +% \tableofcontents +% \newpage \ifodd\c@page\else \hbox{}\newpage \fi +% \vbox to\unitlength{\unvbox0\vfil} +% \part{User's Manual}\label{part:man} +% \let\MidxSave\Midx \let\Midx\Uidx +% \fi +% +% \begin{abstract} +% This package provides a \LaTeX{} environment named |paracol| in which you +% may {\em switch} and {\em synchronize} columns by a command +% |\switchcolumn| and by internal environments |column|, |nthcolumn|, +% |leftcolumn| and |rightcolumn|. +% \ifx\ONLYDESCRIPTION\undefined\else +% See p.\Tie\pageref{page:toc} for the table of contents of this manual. +% \fi +% \end{abstract} +% +% \tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \showboxdepth10000 \showboxbreadth10000 +% \input{man.dtx} +% \tracingpages0 \tracingoutput0 +% \newpage +% \input{ref.dtx} +% \newpage +% \input{pwfnote.dtx} +% \newpage +% \twosided +% \edef\OddSideMargin{\number\oddsidemargin} +% \advance\oddsidemargin1in +% \evensidemargin1.25\oddsidemargin \advance\evensidemargin-1in +% \oddsidemargin.75\oddsidemargin \advance\oddsidemargin-1in +% \input{ppts.dtx} +% \newpage +% \input{bgpaint.dtx} +% \newpage +% \twosided[]\oddsidemargin\OddSideMargin sp +% \resetbackgroundcolor \columnratio{} +% \input{probs.dtx} +% +% \IndexPrologue{\newpage\section*{Index} +% Underlined number refers to the page where the specification of +% corresponding entry is described, while italicized number is for the page +% in which the usage of the entry is explained.} +% +% \StopEventually{\ifx\ONLYDESCRIPTION\undefined\newpage\fi +% \section*{Acknowledgments} +% \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{}{Acknowledgments}} +%  +% The author thanks to Yacine Daddi Addoun who gave the author the +% motivation to write the style for his bilingual document. He also thanks +% to the following people; +%  +% Robin Fairbairns who kindly invited the style to CTAN after the author's +% lazy six years failing to upload the style; +%  +% Joseph +% G.\ Rosenstein and Dieter K\"ohler who suggested the author adding the +% function of unbalanced column width incorporated in version 1.1; +%  +% Joaqu\'in Blas who motivated the author to challenge page-wise footnotes; +%  +% Olivier Vogel who pointed out the compatibility problem with coloring +% packages; +%  +% Heiner Richter who asked for the possibility of swapping unbalanced +% columns, revealed two bugs in version 1.22 related to coloring and +% float pages, showed the necessity of \!\coloredwordhyphenated!, and finally +% found the necessity of \!\globalcounter!|*|; +%  +% an anonymous user who reported a very rare-case but severe bug in the +% version~1.1 by which a page can be lost (whoops!); +%  +% Olivier Gerard who found another terrible bug fixed in version 1.21 but +% hidden in \textsf{paracol} for two years by which a column disappears or +% moves to a wrong page (another whoops!\@), suggested to implement +% \!\setcolumnwidth!, \!\marginparthreshold! and \!\thecolumn! introduced +% in version 1.3, and kindly proofread this manual; +%  +% George Kamel who let the author know the coloring function newborn in +% version 1.2 had a bug fixed in version 1.22 to which he also made a great +% contribution testing many tentative versions with his own colored +% documents; +%  +% another anonymous user who pointed out version 1.22 had yet another +% coloring bug fixed in version 1.24; +%  +% Jean Druel who motivated the author to implement an advanced functionality +% parallel-paging; +%  +% Tilo Arens and other patient users who had wished \Paracol{} would have the +% capability of rule drawing in the gaps separating columns and painting +% backgrounds of columns and so on; +%  +% Michael Bolin who gave the author motivated examples showing the +% necessity of \!\ensurevspace!. +%  +% Tigran Aivazian who reported a memory leak problem fixed in version 1.32; +%  +% Marcus Zelezny and Touhami Mamouni who found an incompatibility with +% \LaTeX{} itself (2015/01/10 or later) and enlighten the author on the cause +% of the problem; +%  +% Manuel Kuehner who reported a bug in text coloring which had hidden +% for five years until the version 1.34 was released; +%  +% ZongXian Wang who found that the paracol misbehaves when an environment +% starts with an unusually tall item; +%  +% and Frank Mittelbach who pointed out bugs in \cs{marginpar} implementation +% and vertical spacing with \cs{trivlist}-like environments, and suggested +% new functionality with \cs{marginnote}, \cs{belowfootnoteskip} and +% \cs{definecolumnpreamble}. +% +% For the implementation of the style file, the author referred to the base +% implementations of \cs{output} and othe many macros of \LaTeXe{} written +% by Leslie Lamport, Johannes Braams and other authors. The author also +% referred to \textsf{color} written by David Carlisle and +% \textsf{marginnote} written by Markus Kohm to make the package working +% well with them. +% +% \ifx\ONLYDESCRIPTION\undefined\else +% \newpage\label{page:toc} \tableofcontents +% \fi +% +% \PrintIndex} +% +% \newpage +% \addtocounter{page}{2} +% \let\Midx\MidxSave +% \advance\oddsidemargin1in\evensidemargin\oddsidemargin +% \advance\textwidth-1in\columnwidth\textwidth +% \hsize\textwidth \linewidth\textwidth +% \part{Implementation}\label{part:impl} +% \input{impl.dtx} +% +% \IndexPrologue{\newpage\section*{Index} +% \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{}{Index}} +% +% Underlined number refers to the page where the implementation or the +% definition of the correspoinding entry is described, while italicized +% number is for the page in which the specificatoin or usage of the entry is +% explained. +%  +% To find a control sequence, remove prefixes \cs{@}, \cs{if@}, \cs{pcol@} and +% \cs{ifpcol@} from its name if it has one of them.} +% \Finale +% \GlossaryPrologue{\newpage\section*{Revision History} +% \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\protect\numberline{}{Revision History}}} +% \def\EQ{=} \def\GT{>} \def\BAR{|} \def\NEQ{\neq} \def\S{\Sec} +% \PrintChanges +\endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.ins b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.ins new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..28955d06e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.ins @@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ +\input docstrip.tex +\keepsilent +\askforoverwritefalse +\generate{\nopreamble \nopostamble + \file{paracol.sty}% + {\from{paracol.dtx}{paracol}\from{impl.dtx}{paracol}} + \file{paracol-man.tex}{\from{paracol.dtx}{man}}} +\endbatchfile diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.pdf b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..d7610852ea Binary files /dev/null and b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/paracol.pdf differ diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ppts.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ppts.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..cc7847db7c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/ppts.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,472 @@ +% \def\oddeven#1#2{\ifodd\value{page}#1\else#2\fi} +% \marginparpush5pt \@mparswitchtrue +% \section{Two-Sided Typesetting and Parallel-Paging} +% \label{sec:ppts} +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the section ``Two-Sided Typesetting and Parallel-Paging''.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the section ``Two-Sided Typesetting and Parallel-Paging''.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the section ``Two-Sided Typesetting and Parallel-Paging''.} +% +% This and the next section are typeset with \Uidx{\!\twosided!} enabling +% features |p|, |c| and |m| and also |b| for a part of the next section. +% The effect of |p| feature can be seen by the \oddeven{left}{right}, or in +% other word inside, margin of this \oddeven{odd}{even}-numbered page is +% narrower than that of the previous pages because the author reduced the +% effective \oddeven{left}{right} side margin being calculated from +% \oddeven{\cs{oddsidemargin}}{\cs{evesidemargin}} +%  +% \SpecialIndex{\oddsidemargin} +% \SpecialIndex{\evensidemargin} +%  +% by 75\,\%\footnote{ +%  +% This document itself does not have |twoside| option in its +% \!\documentclass! but the inconsistency between the option and +% \!\twosided! is not visible because \!\pagestyle! is |plain|.}. +%  +% This setting makes the \oddeven{right}{left} side or outside margin of +% this page enlarged by 125\,\%, as well as the \oddeven{left}{right} side +% and outside margin of the next \oddeven{even}{odd}-numbered page specified +% by \oddeven{\cs{evensidemargin}}{\cs{oddsidemargin}}. +% +% Next, we see the effects of |c| and |m| features by the \env{paracol} +% environment below for which \Uidx{\!\columnratio!}|{0.6}| and +% \Uidx{\!\marginparthreshold!}|{0}| are declared to make the \emph{inside} +% columns (\oddeven{left}{right} ones in \oddeven{odd}{even}-numbered pages) +% are wider than the \emph{outside} ones and all marginal notes go to +% outside (\oddeven{right}{left} in \oddeven{odd}{even}-numbered pages) +% margins. +%  +% \columnratio{0.6}\marginparthreshold{0} +%  +% \par\Hrule +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% \switchcolumn +% \footnotetext*{Since the author is temporarily disabling the warning from +% marginal note placement mechanism of \LaTeX, pushing down the second +% marginal note from column-1 is silently performed when you process this +% document.} +% \switchcolumn +% This line\Marginpar{First marginal note from column-0.} of the first +% paragraph of the inside column-0 has a marginal note. Now the author puts +% a few dummy lines to keep a space below the marginal note.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% This line\Marginpar{Second marginal note from column-0.} of the second +% paragraph of the inside column-0 also has a marginal note. Now the author +% puts a few dummy lines again but this time to go down to the bottom of the +% page.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% This is the third paragraph of the inside column-0 having a page break in +% it. Since shortly we will be in an \oddeven{even}{odd}-numbered page +% \pageref{page:ppts2} (now), this wider column\Marginpar{Third marginal +% note from column-0} is now \oddeven{right}{left} one keeping it +% inside, while the marginal note given in the first line of this page goes +% to \oddeven{left}{right} and outside. Now we will have a \!\switchcolumn! +% below this paragraph to go to the column-1 and back to the previous page +% \pageref{sec:ppts}.\label{page:ppts2} +% \switchcolumn +% \it +% This is the first paragraph in the narrower, italicized and outside +% column-1. In this paragraph, we shortly have a marginal note, italicized +% too, which goes to the outside margin shared by all marginal notes from +% both columns.\Marginpar{\it First marginal note from column-1.} The +% marginal note given here is placed its natural position and its first line +% is aligned to the first line of the second sentence of this paragraph by +% exploitation of the space between two marginal notes from the column-0, +% though we already have had three notes from the column. +% +% Now\Marginpar{\it Second marginal note from column-1.} the author puts +% another marginal note whose first line would be aligned to that of this +% paragraph, but it is pushed down below the second marginal note from the +% column-0 because two notes conflict with each other over the +% space\footnotemark*[+0]. Note that since the note from this column is given +% \emph{after} that from the column-0 was given, the conflict is solved +% pushing the note from this column down rather than that from the +% column-0. Now the author puts a few dummy lines to go to the second last +% line of this page.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\par +% +% This is the third paragraph of the outside column-1, which becomes +% \oddeven{left}{right} shortly by the page break.\Marginpar{\it Third +% marginal note from column-1.} The third marginal note is given in the +% first line of this page, but it is pushed down again due to the conflict +% with the note from the column-0. +% \end{paracol} +% \Hrule +% +% Note that the position of the last marginal note in the \env{paracol} +% \Marginpar{Marginal note given after \env{paracol} environment is closed.} +% environment which we just have closed affects the marginal note placement +% in \postenv. For example, the marginal note given in the first line of +% this paragraph is pushed down. +% +% \ifodd\value{page} +% We will see a few examples of \parapag{}ing shortly, but before that we +% will have an intentional black page to make the first page of the example +% odd-numbered to avoid you have an impression that its layout is +% incorrect\footnote{ +%  +% At least the author himself had such impression without the blank page.} +%  +% because if it were in an even page you would see the {\em outside\/} third +% and fourth supplementary {\em columns\/} at first. +%  +% \newpage\vspace*{\fill}\centerline{(intentionally blanked page)}\vfill +%  +% \else +% From the next page, we will see a few examples of \parapag{}ing. +% \fi +% +% +% +% \newpage +% \subsection{Example of Paired Parallel-Paging} +% \label{sec:ppts-paired} +% +% Shortly we will start a \env{paracol} environment by \beginparacol|[2]{4}| +% having four columns but two for each of left and right \paired{} +% \parapag{}es. Since the author declares \!\columnratio!|{0.6}[0.5]|, the +% columns in left pages are made unbalanced while those in right pages are +% balanced. +%  +% \columnratio{0.6}[0.5] +% \par\Hrule +% \begin{paracol}[2]{4} +% This is the first paragraph of the leftmost column-0, +% \Marginpar{Marginal note from column-0.} +% whose first line has a marginal note placed in the right margin because +% the setting of \!\marginparthreshold! being 0 is still effective and we +% are in the odd-numbered page \pageref{sec:ppts-paired}. Now we +% have a \!\switchcolumn! to the next column-1. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begin{Hfuzz}{1.1pt}\it +% This is the first paragraph of the second and right column-1 in the left +% \parapag{}e. We shortly give an italicized mar\-gin\-al note carefully, so +% that it does not conflict with the marginal note from the column-0. +% \Marginpar{\it Marginal note from column-1.} +% That is, now the author puts the note. Now we +% have a \!\switchcolumn! to the next column-2. +% \end{Hfuzz} +% \footnotetext*{This footnote is put in the left \parapag{}e together with +% another footnote below given in the column-2 in the right \parapag{}e. +% \label{fn:ppts-paired1}} +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sf +% This is the first paragraph of the column-2 being the left column of the +% right \parapag{}e. Though we are in a page different from that column-0 +% and 1 reside in, this page is still numbered \pageref{sec:ppts-paired} +% because the left and right page is \paired. Therefore, the left margin of +% this page is narrower than the right margin because the page number is +% odd. +%  +% \footnotetext*{This footnote is \emph{not} put in the right \parapag{}e +% though it is given in the column-2 in the right \parapag{}e and thus its +% reference is in the column, of course.\label{fn:ppts-paired2}} +% +% You have to notice +% \Marginpar{\sf Marginal note from column-2.} +% the first paragraph does not start from the page top +% but above it we have some space of exactly same size as the \preenv{} +% shown in the left \parapag{}e. Therefore, the top of the first paragraphs +% in all columns are aligned. The marginal note given in the first line of +% this paragraph goes to the right margin of this page because of the +% \!\marginparthreshold! setting and the parity of this page. Now we have a +% \!\switchcolumn! to the next column-3. +% \par\endgroup +% \begin{figure*}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% \sf page-wise figure given in column-2\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Page-Wise Figure} +% \end{figure*} +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sl +% This is the first paragraph +% \Marginpar{\sl Marginal note from column-3.} +% in the last rightmost column-3 whose width is equal to that of the column-2. +% The marginal note given in the first line goes to right and does not +% conflict with that from the column-2. We are now going back to the +% column-0 by a {\rm\!\switchcolumn!|*|} with a \mctext. +% \endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn*[\subsection*{A Spanning Text: though this is wider than the +% page width, this text does not span the boundary between the left and +% right parallel-pages.}] +% +% We have come back to this column-0. The space above the \mctext{} is due +% to the \sync{}ation because two paragraphs in the column-2 are +% significantly taller in total than the paragraphs in other columns. As +% the spanning text itself says, it cannot extend to the right \parapag{}e. +% The author puts dummy lines to go to the page bottom.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% Now we will have a page break shortly. You could be surprised by seeing +% this column is not in the left \parapag{}e after the break but in the +% right one. This is because the feature |c| is enabled to swap not only +% columns in a page but also the left and right \paired{} \parapag{}es when +% they are even-numbered. The other feature |p| makes the left outside +% margins of this right and the previous left pages wider than the right +% inside margins.\label{page:ppts-paired2} +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% We have restarted this column-1. This paragraph has a +% footnote\footnotemark*[-1] as shown below.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% After the page break below, this column also goes to the right page +% together with the column-0 +% \Marginpar{\it Another marginal note from column-1.} +% and is placed outside (left) in the page, as well as the marginal note +% in this right page but in the outside margin. +% \par\endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sf +% We have a few other materials not shown in right \parapag{}es. The space +% above this paragraph is for the \mctext{} placed in the left \parapag{}e. +% The \Scfnote{} given here\footnotemark{} is also not in this page but in +% the left. Finally, the author has put a page-wise figure spanning columns +% just before \!\switchcolumn! by which we left this column, but it will be +% in the right page \pageref{page:ppts-paired2} together with column-0 and +% 1.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% Though the footnote numbered \ref{fn:ppts-paired2} goes to the left page, +% its space and that of \ref{fn:ppts-paired1} make this and the next columns +% shorter in the previous page. Similarly, we have a space above for the +% page-wise figure shown in the right page. +% \par\endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sl +% As expected, this line is aligned to the first line of the paragraph in +% the column-2 as well as those in column-0 and 1. It is also consistent +% the first lines including that of this paragraph are not indented because +% the \mctext{} is given by {\rm\!\subsection!|*|} which makes first +% paragraphs unindented.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% After the page break we will have shortly, this column becomes the +% leftmost in the left \parapag{}e, as you are seeing now, +% \Marginpar{\sl Another marginal note from column-3.} +% but still outermost as well as the marginal note in the outside left +% margin. +% \endgroup +% \end{paracol} +% \Hrule +% +% Now you are seeing yet another material placed only in the page in which +% the column-0 resides and thus being the right page now, i.e., this +% paragraph and the next one in the \postenv. You might be disappointed by +% the fact the \emph{outside} pages, i.e., left in this page +% \pageref{page:ppts-paired2} and right in the previous page +% \pageref{sec:ppts-paired}, cannot have \pwstuff{} but it is what the +% author can do now for the version 1.3 and thus you have to wait some +% future versions in which the author could devise a mechanism to exploit +% the corresponding space in the pages\footnote{ +%  +% You might complain the immaturity of \parapag{}ing and might claim that it +% should be included in \Paracol{} after the author implements the +% mechanism. In fact the author himself is frustrated current features of +% \parapag{}ing but he dared to release the version 1.3 knowing that there +% are people who happily typeset their \parapag{}ed documents with the +% current limited features.}. +%  +% In addition, you might think it is weird that the |c| feature of +% \!\twosided! swaps columns \emph{and} paired pages. However this swapping +% is a natural consequence of the combination of \cswap{} and \paired{} +% \parapag{}ing. Therefore, you can simply disable the |c| feature (maybe +% together with other features) to have more intuitive results. +% +% In the next Section~\ref{sec:ppts-npaired}, you will see another kind of +% \parapag{}ing namely \npaired{} one. Before that, we need a blank page to +% let the \npaired{} \parapag{}ing start from an even-numbered page so that +% a left and right page pair comprises a double spread. A short remark on +% the blank next page is that it does not have a right counterpart +% \parapag{}e because the page is outside \env{paracol} environments and does +% not have any portion from the environments\footnote{ +%  +% To illustrate this fact, the author dares to put a real blank page rather +% than stepping the \counter{page} counter.}. +%  +% \newpage\vspace*{\fill}\centerline{(intentionally blanked page)}\vfill +% +% +% +% \newpage +% \subsection{Example of Non-Paired Parallel-Paging} +% \label{sec:ppts-npaired} +% +% This and following three pages are to show an example of \npaired{} +% \parapag{}ing, in which the author keeps the setting of \!\twosided!, +% \!\columnratio! and \!\marginparthreshold! unchanged. +% The arguments of \beginparacol{} for column population are also unchanged +% to have $2+2$ configuration, but the first argument is followed by |*| for +% \npaired{} typesetting. That is, the environment below starts by +% \beginparacol|[2]*{4}|. The contents of the environment is also almost +% same as the previous Section~\ref{sec:ppts-paired}, while +% \Emph{bold-faced} words show the difference from the \paired{} +% typesetting. +%  +% \columnratio{0.6}[0.5] +% \par\Hrule +% \begin{paracol}[2]*{4} +% This is the first paragraph of the leftmost column-0, +% \Marginpar{Marginal note from column-0.} +% whose first line has a marginal note placed in the \Emph{left} margin +% because the setting of \!\marginparthreshold! being 0 is still effective +% and we are in the \Emph{even}-numbered page +% \Emph{\pageref{sec:ppts-npaired}}. Now we have a \!\switchcolumn! to the +% next column-1. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% This is the first paragraph of the second and right column-1 in the left +% \parapag{}e. We shortly give an italicized mar\-gin\-al note carefully, so +% that it does not conflict with the marginal note from the column-0. +% \Marginpar{\it Marginal note from column-1.} +% That is, now the author puts the note. Now we +% have a \!\switchcolumn! to the next column-2. +% \par\endgroup +% \footnotetext*{This footnote is put in the left \parapag{}e together with +% another footnote below given in the column-2 in the right \parapag{}e. +% \label{fn:ppts-npaired1}} +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sf\label{page:ppts-npaired1r} +% This is the first paragraph of the column-2 being the left column of the +% right \parapag{}e. \Emph{Since we are in the page next to} that column-0 +% and 1 reside in, this page is numbered \Emph{\pageref{page:ppts-npaired1r}} +% because the left and right page is \Emph{\npaired}. Therefore, the left +% margin of this page is narrower than the right margin because the page +% number is odd. +%  +% \footnotetext*{This footnote is \emph{not} put in the right \parapag{}e +% though it is given in the column-2 in the right \parapag{}e and thus its +% reference is in the column, of course.\label{fn:ppts-npaired2}} +% +% You have to notice +% \Marginpar{\sf Marginal note from column-2.} +% the first paragraph does not start from the page top +% but above it we have some space of exactly same size as the \preenv{} +% shown in the left \parapag{}e. Therefore, the top of the first paragraphs +% in all columns are aligned. The marginal note given in the first line of +% this paragraph goes to the right margin of this page because of the +% \!\marginparthreshold! setting and the parity of this page. Now we have a +% \!\switchcolumn! to the next column-3. +% \par\endgroup +% \begin{figure*}\nosv +% \def\arraystretch{0.8} +% \centerline{\begin{tabular}[b]{|c|}\hline +% \hbox to.9\textwidth{}\\ +% \sf page-wise figure given in column-2\\ +% \\\hline +% \end{tabular}} +% \caption{A Page-Wise Figure} +% \end{figure*} +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sl +% This is the first paragraph +% \Marginpar{\sl Marginal note from column-3.} +% in the last rightmost column-3 whose width is equal to that of the column-2. +% The marginal note given in the first line goes to right and does not +% conflict with that from the column-2. We are now going back to the +% column-0 by a {\rm\!\switchcolumn!|*|} with a \mctext. +% \endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn*[\subsection*{A Spanning Text: though this is wider than the +% page width, this text does not span the boundary between the left and +% right parallel-pages.}] +% +% We have come back to this column-0. The space above the \mctext{} is due +% to the \sync{}ation because two paragraphs in the column-2 are +% significantly taller in total than the paragraphs in other columns. As +% the spanning text itself says, it cannot extend to the right \parapag{}e. +% The author puts dummy lines to go to the page bottom.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% Now we will have a page break shortly. You \Emph{will not} be surprised +% by seeing this column \Emph{is still in the left \parapag{}e after the +% break.} This is because the feature |c| is \Emph{not effective in +% \npaired{} \parapag{}ing.} The other feature |p| \Emph{consistently makes +% the left outside margins of this and the previous page in which this +% column resides} wider than the right inside margins. +% \label{page:ppts-npaired2} +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\it +% We have restarted this column-1. This paragraph has a +% footnote\footnotemark*[-1] as shown below.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% After the page break below, this column also \Emph{stays in the left page} +% together with the column-0 +% \Marginpar{\it Another marginal note from column-1.} +% and is placed \Emph{inside (right)} in the page, as well as the marginal +% note in this \Emph{left} page \Emph{still} in the outside margin. +% \par\endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sf +% We have a few other materials not shown in right \parapag{}es. The space +% above this paragraph is for the \mctext{} placed in the left \parapag{}e. +% The \Scfnote{} given here\footnotemark{} is also not in this page but in +% the left. Finally, the author has put a page-wise figure spanning columns +% just before \!\switchcolumn! by which we left this column, but it will be +% in the \Emph{left} page \Emph{\pageref{page:ppts-npaired2}} together with +% column-0 and 1.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% Though the footnote numbered \Emph{\ref{fn:ppts-npaired2}} goes to the +% left page, its space and that of \Emph{\ref{fn:ppts-npaired1}} make this +% and the next columns shorter in the previous page. Similarly, we have a +% space above for the page-wise figure shown in the \Emph{left} page. +% \par\endgroup +% +% \switchcolumn +% \begingroup\sl +% As expected, this line is aligned to the first line of the paragraph in +% the column-2 as well as those in column-0 and 1. It is also consistent +% the first lines including that of this paragraph are not indented because +% the \mctext{} is given by {\rm\!\subsection!|*|} which makes first +% paragraphs unindented.\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\\ +% \Dotfill\\ \Dotfill\par +% +% After the page break we will have shortly, this column \Emph{is kept being +% the rightmost in the right \parapag{}e}, as you are seeing now, +% \Marginpar{\sl Another marginal note from column-3.} +% \Emph{and} still outermost as well as the marginal note in the outside +% \Emph{right} margin. +% \endgroup +% \end{paracol} +% \Hrule +% +% As the \postenv{} in Section~\ref{sec:ppts-paired} is, this paragraph +% being the \postenv{} of the \npaired{} \parapag{}es appears only in the +% \parapag{}e in which the column-0 belongs to, and thus in the left +% \parapag{}e in this case. +% \endinput diff --git a/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/probs.dtx b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/probs.dtx new file mode 100644 index 0000000000..4d6ee18c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/macros/latex/contrib/paracol/probs.dtx @@ -0,0 +1,262 @@ +% \section{Known and Unknown Problems} +% \label{sec:problem} +% \changes{v1.2-7}{2013/05/11} +% {Add the section ``Known and Unknown Problems'' to summarize a few +% typesetting issues and warn users of the possiblity of bugs.} +% \changes{v1.3-1}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove the problem description of the placement of page-crossing +% spanning texts because it has been solved.} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove the problem description of the lack of column-separating rule +% drawing because it has been implmented.} +% +% Here a few problems you could face in the use of \textsf{paracol} are +% summarized. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% If your (e.g.,) left column goes ahead too much farther than the right +% column, \LaTeX{} could stop with the following error message. +%  +% \begin{quote} +% |! Package paracol Error: Too many unprocessed columns/floats.| +% \end{quote} +%  +% This usually means that the internal space to keep materials in the left +% column is exhausted. More specifically, suppose at some point in your +% |.tex| the left column is in the page $p$ while the right is in $qk$} +% \end{eqnarray*} +%  +% For a \env{paracol} environment with \parapag{}ing, $n$ is replaced with +% $n_l$ for the columns in left \parapag{}es, while $n$ and $w_i$ are +% replaced with $n_r$ and $w_{n_r+i}$ for those in right \parapag{}es. +% Moreover, if the optional argument having $r'_0,r'_1,\cdots,r'_{k'}$ is +% provided, $w_{n_r+i}$ for a column in right \parapag{}es is determined +% by $r'_i$ and $k'$ instead of $r_i$ and $k$. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% The equations above imply that $k0$ and $\sum_{j=0}^k +% r_j<1$. If $k\geq n-1$, $k$ is assumed to be $n-2$ and all $r_i$ such +% that $i\geq n-1$ are ignored. If $r_i$ or its sum does not satisfy the +% conditions, you will have an ugly result with ``Overfull'' messages. +% +% \item +% The argument $r_0,r_1,\cdots,r_k$ can be empty to mean $k=-1$ to let all +% column widths be $W'/n$ as default. +% +% \item +% The setting of column width by the command takes effect in the |paracol| +% environments following the command\footnote{ +%  +% If the command is in a \texttt{paracol} environment, the command does not +% affect the column widths of the environment but does the next ones, though +% such usage is very unusual.}. +%  +% Therefore, though placing the command in the preamble is the most natural +% way\footnote{ +%  +% Or second most to not using it at all, of course.}, +%  +% you may place this command between two |paracol| environments to change +% the column layout for the second one even when they appear in a page as +% shown in Section~\ref{sec:man-close}. +% +% \item +% \changes{v1.2-5}{2013/05/11} +% {Modify the description about \cs{linewidth} reflecting the fact +% that \string\texttt{paracol} may be included in a +% \string\texttt{list}-like environment.} +%  +% In the $i$-th column, \!\columnwidth! has $w_i$ and, for outermost +% paragraphs in the column, \!\hsize! has $w_i$ as well. As for +% \!\linewidth!, it has $w_i-(\!\textwidth!-l)$ where $l$ is what +% \!\linewidth! had at \beginparacol{}, i.e., the \!\linewidth! for the +% \env{list}-like environment surrounding \env{paracol} if any, or +% \!\textwidth! otherwise. +% +% \item +% You can specify width of each column and that of each {\em gap} between +% two columns more detailedly by \!\setcolumnwidth! shown below. If your +% document has both of \!\columnratio! and \!\setcolumnwidth! prior to a +% \env{paracol} environment, the command given later is effective for the +% environment. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% +% \item[\Midx{\!\setcolumnwidth!}\Arg{$s_0,s_1,\cdots,s_k$} +% {|[|$s'_0,s'_1,\cdots,s'_{k'}$|]|}]\mbox{}\par +% \changes{v1.3-2}{2013/09/17} +% {Add descriptino of \cs{setcolumnwidth}.} +%  +% The command defines the width of each column and that of each {\em gap} +% between two columns by the column/gap specification $s_i$ for the $i$-th +% column and the gap between it and the $(i{+}1)$-th column. More +% specifically, $s_i$ has the form of $\hat w_i$ or $\hat w_i\,|/|\,\hat g_i$ +% where each of $\hat w_i$ and $\hat g_i$ is a proper glue including a +% proper dimension, or an empty string to mean $\hat w_i=\!\fill!$ and $\hat +% g_i=\!\columnsep!$, to determine the width of $i$-th column $\w_i$ and that +% of $i$-th gap $\Midx{\gap}_i$ as follows, where $\mathit{nat}(x)$ is the +% natural width of the glue $x$, $\mathit{str}(x)$ is the infinite stretch +% factor of $x$, $W$ is \!\textwidth!, and $n$ is the number of columns +% given to \beginparacol. +%  +% \begin{eqnarray*} +% W'&=&\sum_{i=0}^{n-2}\big(\mathit{nat}(\hat w_i)+\mathit{nat}(\hat g_i)\big)+ +% \mathit{nat}(\hat w_{n-1})\\ +% F&=&\sum_{i=0}^{n-2}\big(\mathit{str}(\hat g_i)+\mathit{str}(\hat g_i)\big)+ +% \mathit{str}(\hat w_{n-1})\\ +% x_i&=&\cases{(W/W')\mathit{nat}(\hat x_i)&$W'\geq W\;\lor\;F\leq0$\cr +% \mathit{nat}(\hat x_i)+(\mathit{str}(\hat x_i)/F)(W-W')& +% $W'< W\;\land\;F>0$} +% \qquad(x\in\{w,g\}) +% \end{eqnarray*} +% That is, if the total of natural widths $W'$ is larger than \!\textwidth! +% $W$ or there are no infinite stretch factors in the specification, given +% widths are scaled down or up so that the scaled total is equal to $W$. +% Otherwise, each width with an infinite stretch factor is extended +% according to its ratio in the total stretch so that the stretched total is +% equal to $W$. +% +% For a \env{paracol} environment with \parapag{}ing, $n$ is replaced with +% $n_l$ for the columns in left \parapag{}es, while $n$, $w_i$ and $g_i$ are +% replaced with $n_r$, $w_{n_r+i}$ and $g_{n_r+i}$ for those in right +% \parapag{}es. Moreover, if the optional argument having +% $s'_0,s'_1,\cdots,s'_{k'}$ is provided, $w_{n_r+i}$ and $g_{n_r+i}$ for a +% column in right \parapag{}es are determined by $s'_i$ instead of $s_i$. +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% In \env{paracol} environments having $n$ columns, $s_i$ s.t.\ $i\geq n$ +% and $\hat g_{n-1}$ are ignored. On the other hand if $kk$. +% +% \item +% Finite stretch factors and finite or infinite shrink factors in $\hat w_i$ +% and $\hat g_i$ are ignored. +% +% \item +% Unlike \TeX's genuine glue addition, all infinite unit |fil|, |fill| and +% |filll| are not distinguished in the summation for $F$. Also unlike +% \TeX's genuine scaling of a glue primitive, +% $f\!\fill!$ means $0\,|pt|\ |plus|\ f\,|fill|$ for convenience\footnote{ +%  +% In \TeX's grammar, $f\!\fill!$ means a dimension rather than a glue and is +% $0\,|pt|$ because the natural component of \!\fill! is 0.}. +% +% \item +% The division $W/W'$ and $\mathit{str}(\hat x_i)/F$ can have some +% arithmetic errors and thus the total of $w_i$ and $g_i$ may not be equal to +% $W$ exactly but can be a little bit less than $W$. This small error is, +% however, equally distributed to $g_i$ in typesetting of a page to make the +% total width of columns and gaps is exactly $W$\footnote{ +%  +% If we may ignore the arithmetic error inherent in \TeX.}. +% +% \item +% All the specifications shown in the table below give us same results for a +% \env{paracol} environment having three columns, providing +% $\!\textwidth!=360\,|pt|$ and $\!\columnsep!=S=20\,|pt|$. +%  +% \par\hbox to\textwidth\bgroup\hfil +% \nosv \def\|{\verb|}\small\arraycolsep0pt\def\arraystretch{1.1} +% $\begin{array}[b]{l|ccccc} +% s_0,s_1,s_2&w_0&g_0&w_1&g_1&w_2\rlap{ (in \texttt{pt})}\\\hline +% \|50pt/20pt,100pt/40pt,150pt|&50&20&100&40&150\\ +% \|50pt,100pt/2\columnsep,150pt|&50&S& +% 100&2S&150\\ +% \|50pt/\fill,100pt/2\fill,150pt|&50&(1/3)\cdot60&100&(2/3)\cdot60&150\\ +% \|,2\fill/2\columnsep,3\fill|&\ (1/6)\cdot300&S& +% (2/6)\cdot300&2S& +% (3/6)\cdot300\\ +% \|50pt/20,50pt plus 1fil/40pt,50pt plus 2fil |& +% 50&20&50+(1/3)\cdot150&40& +% 50+(2/3)\cdot150\\ +% \|5pt/2pt,10pt/4pt,15pt|&10\cdot5&10\cdot2&10\cdot10&10\cdot4& +% 10\cdot15\\ +% \|100pt/40pt,200pt/80pt,300pt|&0.5\cdot100&0.5\cdot40& +% 0.5\cdot200&0.5\cdot80& +% 0.5\cdot300 +% \end{array}$\hfil\egroup +% +% \item +% If your document has both of \!\columnratio! and \!\setcolumnwidth! prior +% to a \env{paracol} environment, the command given later is effective for +% the environment. +% \end{itemize} +% \end{description} +% +% +% +% \subsection{Commands for Two-Sided Typesetting and Marginal Note Placement} +% \label{sec:ref-twoside} +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the sub-section ``Commands for Two-Sided Typesetting and Marginal +% Note Placement''.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the sub-section ``Commands for Two-Sided Typesetting and Marginal +% Note Placement''.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Add the sub-section ``Commands for Two-Sided Typesetting and Marginal +% Note Placement''.} +% +% \begin{description} +% \item[\Midx{\!\twosided!}{$|[|t_1t_2\cdots t_k|]|$}]\mbox{}\par +% \changes{v1.3-3}{2013/09/17} +% {Add description of \cs{twosided}.} +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add description of \cs{twosided}.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Add description of \cs{twosided}.} +%  +% The command enables a set of two-sided typesetting features +% $\Set{t_i}{t_i\in\{|p|,|c|,|m|,|b|\},\ 1\leq i\leq k}$ explicitly by the +% optional argument, or all of the following four features as a whole +% without the argument, in even-numbered pages. +%  +% \begin{description} +% \item[|p|\rm(\textit{age})] +% for ordinary two-sided paging, letting the left side margin be +% \!\evensidemargin!, page headers be different from those in odd-numbered +% pages with |headings| or |myheadings| page style, and \!\cleardoublepage! +% leave an even-numbered page blank if it is used in an odd-numbered page. +% +% \item[|c|\rm(\textit{olumn})] +% for {\em\Uidx\cswap} to \emph{print} columns in even-numbered pages in +% reverse order. This feature is sometimes preferable in typesetting +% especially with unbalanced parallel columns to make, for example, a wider +% columns are always \emph{inside} while narrower ones are \emph{outside}. +% +% \item[|m|\rm(\textit{arginal text})] +% to place marginal notes in the side margin opposite to that specified by +% the command \!\marginparthreshold! discussed shortly. +% +% \item[|b|\rm(\textit{ackground painting})] +% to make \bgpaint, shown in Section~\ref{sec:ref-bgpaint}, +% \emph{\mirror{}ed} so that, for example, a color specified for the left +% margin is used to paint the right margin instead. +% \end{description} +%  +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% The feature |p| is also enabled by the |twoside| option of +% \!\documentclass! with almost all classes including |article|, |book|, +% |report|, etc. Though it is strongly recommended to make both settings by +% \!\documentclass! and this command consistent, they can be inconsistent +% resulting in lack of some expected functions. For example, enabling |p| +% feature by \!\twosided! without |twoside| option in \!\documentclass! +% makes the format of headers and footers in all pages same even with +% \!\pagestyle!|{headings}|. +% +% \item +% The \cswap{} enabled by the feature |c| is ineffective in \npaired{} +% \parapag{}ing because it is meaningless\footnote{ +%  +% Unless somebody tells the author it is meaningful.}, +%  +% and thus silently ignored. +% +% \item +% In ordinary single-column typesetting, marginal note swapping in +% even-numbered pages is enabled by the |twoside| option, while it never takes +% place in ordinary two-column typesetting. For marginal notes given in +% \env{paracol} environments, however, swapping of them in +% even-numbered pages is enabled by giving the feature |m| to \!\twosided!. +% +% \item\label{page:cswap} +% The command has to be outside of \env{paracol} environments to decide the +% action in the environments following them. If it appears in a +% \env{paracol} environment, you will have a warning message saying it is +% ignored. +% +% \twosided[c]\columnratio{0.6}\columnsep0pt +% \begin{paracol}{2} +% \hfuzz2pt +% \item +% Here is an example of column swapping. Since this page +% \pageref{page:cswap} is odd, this wider column-0 with roman font is placed +% in left side and thus inside at the begining, but now we are in an even +% page in which this column is in right side. +% +% \switchcolumn +% \item\it +% This narrower, outside and italicized column-1 is at first in right +% side but the page break has changed the position to the left. +% \end{paracol} +% +% \item +% \changes{v1.2-4}{2013/05/11} +% {Add description of \cs{[no]swapcolumninevenpages}.} +% \changes{v1.3-5}{2013/09/17} +% {Remove description of \cs{[no]swapcolumninevenpages} but mention +% they are still available.} +%  +% In old versions of \Paracol, namely 1.2 and its minor revisions 1.2x, +% \cswap{} was controlled by lengthy commmands +% \Midx{\!\swapcolumninevenpages!} and \Midx{\!\noswapcolumninevenpages!}. +% Though they are still available and will be so forever for backward +% compatibility, it is recommended to use \!\twosided! with or without the +% feature |c|. The old versions also have a problem that \spanning{} +% crossing a page boundary is placed incorrectly after the page break in it, +% but this problem is solved by a fix incorporated in version 1.3. +% +% \item +% It must be $t_i\in\{|p|,|c|,|m|,|b|\}$, or you will have an error message +% of illegal two-siding feature. +% +% \item +% Section~\ref{sec:ppts} shows examples of two-sided typesetting together +% with related issues on \parapag{}ing. +% \end{itemize} +% +% +% +% \item[\Midx{\!\marginparthreshold!}$\Arg{k}{|[|k'|]|}$]\mbox{}\par +% \changes{v1.3-4}{2013/09/17} +% {Add description of \cs{marginparthreshold}.} +%  +% The command specifies the minimum ordinal $k$ of columns whose marginal +% notes are placed in right margin. That is, marginal notes given in a +% column-$i$ go to left margin if $i